Syntaxofatticgreek

LaGr.
Gr
T47>s
A SYNTAX
OF
ATTIC GREEK
BY
F. E. THOMPSON, M.A.
LATE ASSISTANT .MASTER AT MARLBOROUGH COLLEGE
AUTHOR OF HOMERIC GRAMMAR
' '
ELEMENTARY GREEK SYNTAX,' ETC
;
'
NEiy IMPRESSION
LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO

39 PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON
NEW YORK AND BOMBAY
i8g8
cv
*s^.
* .
; V
—
CONTENTS;
§ I-13. Introduction to the Simple and Compound Sentence,
and Definitions of Terms.
The Statement, Question, and Petition, Subject, Copula, and Predicate,

page 1—The Predicate and its Supplementary Adjuncts, or Sup-
plementary Predicates, 2— The Object, Direct and Remote, 5—
The Predicate, Attributive or Epithet, and Apposition, 5 Simple —
—
and Compound Sentences, 5 Principal and Subordinate Sentences,
6 —Co-ordinateSentences, 7 — Classification
of Subordinate Sen-
tences into ^. Substantival, i?. Adverbial.
: C
Relative, 7 Oratio —
Recta, 10— Oratio Obliqua, 10— Sub-dii'ect and Sub-oblique, 11—
Virtually Oblique, 11.
PART I.
SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
CHAPTER I.
§ 14-34. Subject and Predicate —Attributive and Apposition.

The Subject, page 12— The Copula, 12— Omission of the Copula, 12
Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive in the Accusative, and in
—
the Nominative, 13 Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive in the
—
Genitive and Dative, 13 Omis ion of the Subject, 13 The Predi- —
cate, 14 —
Peculiarities in the Agreement of Subject and Predicate,
—
15 Neuter Plural and Verb Singular, 15 Neuter Plural and —
—
Verb Plural, 15 Adjective-Predicate in Neuter Singular with
Plural Subject, 15— Schema Pindaricum, 16 —Agreement of Predi-
cate with several subjects, 16 — 6'5e, oCxos, e/cetfos, as Subject and
Predicate, 18 — Peculiarities of Number, Singular, Dual, and Plural,
—
CONTENTS.
18—The Dual Number, 19—The Plural used for the Singular, 21

—The First Person Plural used of a Singular Subject, 22—
Peculiarities of Person, 22— Supplementary Predicates, 22—
Peculiarities in the construction of the Attributive or Epithet,
23 —Peculiarities of Apposition, 24.
CHAPTER II.
The Article.
§ 35"66.
Origin and Development of the Article, page 27— Survivals of the older
usages of 6, ^, to, and os, fi, ci —
in Attic Greek, 28 The Article In
Attic Greek, 29—The Article with Participles, 31—The Article
with Numerals, 31— Fluctuating Use and Omission of the Article,
31_With —
Objects of external nature, 32 With material objects,
3-2—With —
familiar places, things, and persons, 32 With abstract
—
and other words, 32 With names of arts, trades, and sciences, 33
—The Article with proper names of persons and places, 33
With geographical names, 33— The noun-making power of the
—
Article, 34 The Article distinguishes the Subject from the Predi-
cate, 36 —
The Article with the Predicate, 37— Position of the
Article A. The Predicative Position. B. The Attributive Position,
:
37 Position Genitive follows, 39— Predicative Position

when a
when used, Position when used, 41— Words which
40— Attributive
vary their meaning according to the position of the Article, 41
Oblique or Dependent Predicates, 43— Idiomatic Phrases with the
Article, 46.
CHAPTER III,
§ 67-77.
Pronotms.
Personal Pronouns, page 47— Possessive Pronouns, 48— Reflexive Pro-

nouns, 49—Demonstrative Pronouns, 51 —The Pronoun ai>r6s, 53
Interrogative Pronouns, 56— Relative Pronouns and Attraction, 57
—Attraction, 58— Miscellaneous instances of Attraction, 59— In-
definite Pronouns, 61.
— — — — — — — —
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER IV,
§ 78-126. The Cases.
Preliminary note on the cases, page 64 The Nominative, 65 The Vo-

cative, 66— The Accusative. Preliminary Note, OG— 1. The Internal
—
Accusative, 67 2. The External Accusative, 67 Conspectus of —
the Internal Accusative, 67 — The Internal Accusative, 68, includ-
ing :
— (a.) Accusative of Respect, 69 [h.) Accusative of Sjâce
—
and Time, 70 (c.) Accusative of Motion, 71 (d.) Accusative of
the Object and Predicate in agreement or in apposition with the
—
Object, 71 Double Accusative, 71 —
The External Accusative,
—
74 Verbs which take an External Accusative, 75 Tlie Genitive
— —
78 Prelimiaar J' K ote on the Genitive, 78 Possessive Genitive, 79
— —
Genitive of Material or Contents, 80 Genitive of Amount,
81— —
Genitive of Plenty or Want, 82 The Partitive Genitive (so
called), 83 — —
Genitive of Connection, 86 Subjective and Objective
—
Genitive, 90 Genitive of Time and Place, 91 Genitive of Value,—
— —
92 Causal Genitive, 93 Genitive with Verbs of Judicial Proceed-
ings, 95— Genitive Absolute, 96 —Genitive with Comparatives, 97
Genitive with Verbs containing a Comparative Xotion, 97 —
Genitive of Separation, 98 Free axd Miscellaneous Uses,
— —
100 Genitive with Compound Verbs, 100 Double Genitive, 100
The Epexegetical —Genitive of the Agent
Genitive, 100 (so called),
101 — Free use of the Genitive of Connection, 101 — The Genitive
with Adjectives and Adverbs, 102 —Free use of the Genitive with
Substantives, 104 PreUmina^'y Note on Dative Case, 104
the
Dative of the Indirect or Eemoter Object, 105 —Miscellaneous
examples of the Dative of the Indirect or Remoter Object, 105
Dative of Interest, 106 — Free use of the Dative of Interest,
106 —Dative of the Possessor, 108 — Ethic Dative, 108 — Dative of
Community or Contact, lOS — Dative of the Instrument or Means,
Agent, Cause, Measure of Difference, 110 — Dative of Circum-
stance, 113 — Dative of Time and Place, 114— List of Vei'bs which
take a Dative, 116 — List of Adjectives and Adverbs which take
a Dative, 119.
CHAPTER V.
§127. Comparative atid Superlative. Page 120

—
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER VI.
§ 128-134. Voices and Aloods.
—
The Active Voice, page 124 The Middle Voice, 125— The Passive Voice,
— —
130 The Mood, 132 Introductory Note ou the Subjunctive and
Optative, 132— The Subjunctive ui Independent Sentences, 134
The Optative in Independent Sentences, 135 The Imperative, 136.—
CHAPTER VII.
§ 135-143. The Tenses.
Classifications of —
Greek Tenses, page 138 Time how far observed
—
throughout the Moods, 139 The Kind of Act or State denoted by
— —
the Tenses, 140 Ideal division of Tenses, 141 The Present and Ln-
—
perfect Indicative, 142 The Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative, 144
—The Aorist, 145— Note on the Aorist, 148—The Future, 149—
—
Gnomic and Iterative Tenses, 151 The Tenses in the Moods, 152.
CHAPTER VIII
§ 144-162. The Three Verbal Nouns.
1. The Infinitive (a Substantive), —

page 153 2. The Participle {an Adjec-
tive), 153 —The Verbal Adjectives in tos and reos, 153 Note on
3. —
— —
the Infinitive, 153 The Infinitive, 153 The Supplementary Infini-
tive, 154 —The Subject before and the Predicate after the Infinitive
(commonly called the Accusative with the Infinitive), 157 The —
Infinitive as a Noun, 160— The Participle, 162— The Participle as
—
an Attributive, 163 The Genitive Absolute, 165— The Genitive
Absolute in Greek and Latin, 166—The Accusative Absolute, 167
—
Verbals in -reos, 168 Their personal construction, 168 Their —
—
impersonal construction, 169 Tlie SupiDlementary Participle, 169
The Supplementary Participle in agreement with the subject
of the Verb : A. With Verbs of Saymg and of Perception, 169—
B. With Verbs of Emotion, 170— 0. With Verbs of Beginning,
Continuing, and Ending an Action, 170—D. With Verbs of making
— — — —
CONTENTS.
or becoming Manifest, aud of escaping Notice, 170 — Note on

Special Verbs which take this construction, e.g. dpxo/J-at, (pOdvu,
\av6dvu, etc., 171 —

The Supplementary Participle in agreement
with the Object of the Verb A. With Verbs of making to
:
cease, finding, detecting, overlooking, 174 B. With Verbs of —

—
Perception, 175 The Tenses of the Participle, and time in the
Participles, 175 —
The Future Participle, 176.
PAKT II
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCK
CN AFTER I.
§ 163- 170. Substantival Sentences.
1 . —
The Indirect Statement, page 178 2. The Indirect Question, 178 —
3. The Indirect Petition, 178 —
The Indirect Statement, 178: A. The
Infinitive in the Indirect Statement, 178 B. on and (lis with the
Indicative and Optative La the Indu-ect Statement, 181 C. The
Participle in the Indirect Statement, 186 —The Indirect Question,
188 —Deliberative or Dubitative Indirect Questions, 190 —The
Indirect Petition, 191.
CHAPTER II.
§ 171-206. Conditional Sentences.
The Particle fij', — Definite and Indefinite Sentences, 194—Con-

page 193
ditional Sentences, 195 —Distinction of Conditions, 196—Division
of Conditional Sentences, 197 — Ordinary Conditions, 197 — Ordinary
Conditions in Greek and Latin, 200 — General or Frequentative
Examples, 200 — The Negatives in Conditional Sentences, 201
Kelative Conditional Sentences, 201 — Participles in the Protasis,
202— Position of 203— Repetition of
6.v, 203—'Av with the Future
ai',
Indicative, 204 — Ellipse of the Apodosis, and Ellipse of the Verb,

205 — Ellipse of the Protasis, 205 — Et aud both in the Protasis,
6.v
206 — Ae in Apodosis, 207 seemingly interrogative, 207

"^d.v
'Kv with the Participle seemingly in Protasis, 208 — Conditional

— — — — —
CONTENTS.
Jparticles andtheir Combiuatious, 208 —

Examples of Conditional
Sentences, with Indicative in Protasis and Apodosis, 209 (A.)
ei
Ordinary Present Conditions, 209. [B. ) Ordinary Past Conditions,

209. (C.) Present and Past in Combination, 210 Ordinary Future —
Conditions, edv {fiv) with Subjunctive, 210 Less Vivid Future —
—
Conditions, d with Optative, 211 Most Vivid Future Conditions,
ei with Future Indicative, 212 —
Mixed examples illustrating the
connection between and interchangeability of the Subjunctive,
Optative, and Future Indicative in Conditional Sentences, 213
The Optative and Indicative with av without a Protasis, 214 —
Unfulfilled Conditions, el with Historic Tenses of Indicative in
—
Protasis, Slv with the same in Apodosis, 215 The omission of &.v in
—
Apodosis with the Indicative, 217 'Ed^ {fjv) with the Subjunctive,
and ei with the Optative in General or Frequentative Suppositions,
— —
220 Mixed Examples, 222 Examples of the Conditional Parti-
ciple in a Protasis, 224 —
Examples of a Conditional Relative
—
Sentence, 225 Relative Conditional Sentences expressing General
—
Suppositions, 226 Examples of Infinitive in Apodosis with &v,
—
226 Examples of Participle in Apodosis with 8.v, 227 Supple- —
mentary Note on eav with the Subjunctive, and ei with the Optative,
227.
CHAPTER III.
§ 207-224. Temporal Sentences.
" TMien" in Definite Time (Past), iirel, iireidri {ijvlKa, Sre), page 233 "As —
soon as," "Directly," in Definite Time, iirel {eireidr]), rdxtcra, (is,
—
234 "Whenever," "As often as," in Indefinite Time, iirei, tVetSiJ,
i]viKa, ore, OTTore, (eTr^v, iireiSdv, Urav, etc.), 235
—
"Since" in Definite
Time, e| oB, 236 — "Whilst" in Definite Time, ews, iare, iv (5, ev
Sffu, Sffov xpovov, ijviKa (/xexpi),
—
237 ""\iMiilst " in Indefinite Time,
with a;' and Subj., without &v and Opt., 237 "Until"
ews, etc.,
—
in Definite Time, eyr, eo-re, //exP' ^X/". 238
—
" Until " in Indefinite
Time, ewj, etc., with dv and Subj., without &v an Opt., 239 The —
Conjunction irpiv, 240 Ilpiv \\4th the Infinitive, 241 Upiv with the
Indicative in Definite Time (Past), 242— Upiv with the Subjunc-
tive and Optative in Indefinite Time, 242 Upiv with the Infinitive
after Negative Sentences, and ^vith the other Moods after Affirma-
tive Sentences, 243--Âv omitted with the Subjunctive, in Temporal
and other Subordinate Sentences, 245—Â;* retained with the Opta-
tive, —
246 Tlic Subjunctive instead of the Optative or co-ordinate
with the Optati»re in Historic Sequence, 240 The Participle as a—
Substitute for a Temporal Sentence, 247.
— — —
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER IV.
§ 225-226. Concessive Sentences.
Concessive Sentences, page 249 — Note on d kcu, kuI d, etc., 250.
CHAPTER V.
§ 227-239. (i) Final Sentences^ (2) o-ws with tJu Future

^
Indicative, and (3) Verbs of Fearing with firj, etc.
Fijial Sentences, page 253 —Final Particles with the Subjunctive and
Optative, 253 —Final Sentences with Past Tenses of the Indicative,
257 —Final Sentences with the Future Participle, 258— Relative
Final Sentences, 258 — Final Sentences with the Infinitive, 259
"Ottws, Sttws 1X7), modal with the Future- Indicative, etc. : and Vari-
—
ant Constructions, 259 Elliptical use of ottjis, ottws ii-q with the
Future Indicative, 262 ^'Ottws, oVws ht] with Verbs of Commanding
—
and Forbidding, 262 Verbs of Fearing with fi-f) and fir) ov, 262
Verbs of Fearing, etc., with the Indicative, 266 Note on Dawes' —
Canon, 267.
CHAPTER VI.
§ 240-244. Consecutive and Limitative Sentences.
Q.jTi with the Indicative and the Infinitive, page 270 — Consecutive Sen-
tences in Greek and Latin, 273 —Relative Consecutive Sentences,
273 —Limitative or Restrictive Sentences, 274.
CHAPTER VIL
§ 245. Causal Sentences.
(a.) —
Causal Pai-ticles and a Finite Mood, page 276 (?».) Relative Sen
tences, 278 —
(c.) Participles, 278 (d.) Miscellaneous ways, 279.
— — ——— —— —— —
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER VIII.
§ 246, Expressions of a Wish. Page 280
CHAPTER IX.
§ 247. Relative Sentences Page 2 84
PAKT III.
PREPOSITIONS, NEGATIVES, ORATIO OBLIQUA, AND

FIGURES.
CHAPTER I.
§ 248-252. Prepositions.
Tutroductory Note on Prepositions, page 286 The Prepositions and —

their meanings with the tliree cases, 289 Collected Usages of —
Prepositions, 289 —
Prepositions and the cases they go \\ ith, 291.
/. Prepositions with one Case only :
§ 253-255. (a.) With Accusative only.
Avi, page 291— Ets or h, 292— ws, 294.
§ 256-264. {b.) With Genitive only.
dfTi, page 294 diro, 295 eK, i^, 297 Tfpo, 300— dcei', 301 — eVe/co, ^fCKev,
301 eKari, 301 x^pi-^^ 301 —Old Cases used as quasi-Px'epositions

with the Genitive, 302.
§ 265-268. {c.) With Dative only.
iv, page 302 — <rw, 305 —Note on a-'uv and fiera, 306 — fi/xa, 8/ulov, etc., 306.
//. Prepositions with two Cases.
%, 260-272. With Accusative and Genitive.
5td, page 307— Kara, 310— i^Tr^p, 314—êrd, 316.
UI— Prepositions with all three Cases.

§ 273-278.
dn4>i, page 317 — fTt. 319 irapd, 328 irepi, 332— Trpos, 336 inrd, 341.
— — — — — — -
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER II.
§ 279-310. The Negatives.
Introeluctory Note, page 345 — Oi) Privative, 346 —

Ou and y.T\ with Adjec-
tives, I'articiplus used as Adjectives, Adverbs, and Substantives,
—
348 Oi) and —
with Participles, 350 Oi) and yujj with the Infini-
fj.r\
tive, 351 Oi) and yiti; with Direct and Indirect Statements, 354 —
Oi) and ii.r\ with Indirect Statements in the Participle, 354 —
Oi) and
/t^ with Direct Questions, 355 — Oy and ixi\ with DeUbei'ative Ques-
tions, 356 — Ou and p.-i) with Indirect Questions, 356 Oi) and y.i) —
—
with Indirect Petitions, 357 Oi) and fx-l] with Conditional Sentences,
—
358 Ou and fxi\ with Concessive Sentences, 359 Oi) and /x?) with —
Causal Sentences, 359 Qv and /xtj with Consecutive and Restrictive
—
Sentences, 360 Oi) and /^/j with Temporal and Local Sentences, 361
— Oi) andyxTj with Final Sentences, etc., 361 —
Oi) and ii.t] with Rela-
tives, 362 — —
M^ with Wishes, 364 M77 and M/j 01) with the Infinitive,
—
365 Mt) Oi) with the Participle, 368 M^ and \i.y\ ov with the Sub-
junctive, 369 Oi) (17) with the Subjunctive and Future Indicative,
—
371 Further examples of 01) ni) -svith A. Subjunctive, 372 B.
:
—
Future Indicative, 373 Repetition of the Negative, 375 Oi'oeis, —
Hrjods, ovdey, fjLrjdey, etc., 376 Mtj with Oaths and Assertions, 378
— M17 where ov might have been expected, 378 Miscellaneous —
instances sho\ving the power of 01) to make a downright Negative
—
Statement, 379 Note on firj, /xr) 01) with the Infinitive and Parti-
ciple, 3S0 — Note on fir] and fj-rj ov with the Subjunctive, 382 Note —
on ov HT] with the Subjunctive and the Future Indicative, 382.
CHAPTER III.
§ 311-327. O ratio Obliqua.
Introductory, page 387 —Rules for Sub-direct Clauses in Oratio Obliqua,

389 —Tj'pes of Sub-direct Clauses in Historic Sequence, 390 —Rules
for Sub-oblique Clauses in Oratio Obliqua, 392 — Types of Sub-direct
and Sub-oblique Clauses in the Obliqua, 393 — The Apodosis in the
Participle in Oratio Obliqua, 395— Relative Sentences in Oratio
Obliqua, 395 — Some real examples of Oratio Obliqua analj-sed, 396
— The Infinitive, and on or tlis ^^'ith Finite Moods in Sub-direct
—
Sentences of Oratio Obliqua, 398 Assimilation of Optatives, 402
— —
Non- Assimilation, 403 Examples of Mixed Graphic and strict
—
Obliqua, 404 Virtual Oratio Obliqua, 404 Past Tenses of the —
Indicative in Oratio Obliqua, 405— Apparently Abnormal Obliqua,
—
406 Long Speeches in Obliqua, 407.
—
xfl CONTENTS.
CHAPTER IV.
§ 328-347. Figures of Rhetoric, etc.
Alliteration, page 410 —Anakoluthia, 411 — Antiptosis, 412 —Asyndeton,

413 —Binary Structure, 413 —Brachylogy, 414— Zeugma and Syl-
lepsis, 415 — Constructio Praegnans, 415 — Brachylogy of Com-
parison, 416 — Catachresis, 416 — Ellipse and Aposiopesis, 416
Euphemism, 417 — Hypallage, 418 — Hyperbaton, Chiasmus, Hys-
teron Proteron, 418— Litotes, 419 — Oxymoron, 420 — Periphrasis,
421— rieonasm, 421 — Prolepsis or Anticipation, 422— Puns, 422.
English Index, ....... Page 425
Greek Index, . . . . . . .428

Table of References, . . . . .
434
PREFACE.
Some explanation, perhaps apology, is necessary for
publishing a new Greek Syntax, when so many similar
books by really great Greek scholars are in use. My

object has been to write a Greek Syntax arranged on the
analytical method, i.e. by sentences, simple and com-
pound ; to attempt for Greek what Dr. Kennedy's in-
valuable Grammars have done for Latin. Dr. Donaldson's
once well-known Greek Grammars are so arranged : they

are the works of a very able man and a ripe scholar, but
no one would now accept the local theory of the Cases,

or the treatment of Conditionals as set forth in them.
I may perhaps be allowed to explain how I came

to write this Syntax, and the plan adopted in it, as the
book, such as it is, is not a mere compilation from other
Grammars. I have for many years been in the habit of

jotting down marginal references to constructions. When
three years ago it was suggested to me that I should
draw up a Greek Syntax, I began by writing out these

examples, under their different headings. I thus had an
outline of rules with many hundred examples, an outline
which has not been materially departed from. I then
read or re-read several books bearing on the subject. I

xiv PREFACE.
need hardly say that my views had to be modified on

several points of principle, and stUl more of detail. With
regard to the examples I do not suppose that I have
used or referred to one quarter of the original supply.

For several of my own, again, I have substituted others,
either because these latter were so familiar as to have
acquired vested rights with teachers and learners or
because they were handier. My original outline began

with Homeric instances, but, as I proceeded, I cut these
out, and confined myself solely to Attic, chiefly because
it was represented to me that, when boys write Greek
Prose or Iambics, they have such a fatal perversity for

bringing in an Epic word or construction. I need hardly
say that, when I read Mr. Monro's masterly Homeric
Grammar, I felt exceedingly glad that I had suppressed

ray own attempt to deal with so difficult a subject. A
monumental Greek Grammar should of course begin with
Homer, and end certainly not before the Hellenistic period,
proceeding with the grand march of the historic method.

In a book meant for boys or undergraduates the object
would, I think, be most practically secured by adding

appendices, Homeric, Hellenistic, and so forth. But this
suggestion need not be discussed here.
The analysis wliich I have followed is, with some

variations, the logical method made familiar by Dr.
Kennedy's Latin Grammars. For instance, I begin the
Introduction with a piece of formal logic : the Proposi-
PREFACE. XV
tion contains three parts, Subject, Copula, and Predicate.

Had I introduced Homeric examples, I should have pro-
bably commenced with the Verb (io-TTj-o-t, SlSco-ai, Predi-
cate + Subject), connecting the thought with the form,
and have attempted to trace theuce the gradual gi'owth

and development of the Sentence. Indeed I might have
begun earlier with the blunt, but perfectly intelligible

expression of judgment : vrjTrto?, fool (Predicate only).
But though the historical method is unquestionably more
scientific, yet I deliberately adopted the logical for
several reasons, chiefly because teachers and boys are
already familiar with it in learning Latin : a double
advantage, for there is thus no new method to acquire,
and Greek and Latin can be worked together.

But, whichever method we pursue, it is equally unwise
and impossible to be rigidly consistent. Take the Cases,

for instance. The Nominative is used both as Subject
and as Predicate. The Accusative and Dative qualify a

Verb, and so may be regarded as supplementary Predi-
cates. The Genitive qualifies a Substantive, and thus is
Adjectival or Attributive : but it may also qualify a Verb,
and so becomes a supplementary Predicate. It would

however be absurd to split up the Cases, and range their
uses under different Chapters. When we come to the
Compound Sentence one of two courses is open : either
(1) to treat all the usages of the Moods together, giving
one chapter to the Indicative, another to the Optative

xvi PREFACE.
and so on ; or (2) to take the dijBferent kinds of Subordin-
ate Sentences, and show how they are expressed by the

different Moods. Most Grammars adopt the former
method, and there is much to be said for it, the same, it
might appear, as for the Cases. This method brings to-
gether the different usages which often vary so slightly,
and shade off into one another ; it makes the learner see
that there are not so many distinct Optatives, but one
Optative. But experience convinces me that the method

of sentences is incomparably the most practical and
easily remembered, while in the hands of a careful teacher

the unity of each Mood may constantly be pointed out.
It is far easier for a boy to learn how to express the
different kinds of Temporal Sentences by treating them
all together than by dividing them among the Moods.
All grammars do this for Conditional Sentences, and why

not for other kinds of Subordinate Sentences which are
almost equally difficult ? However, in order to supple-
ment the plan adopted in the text, I have in the Index
oiven a full register of the uses of each Mood. I
have to a considerable extent adopted Dr. Donaldson's

theory of Predicates with some change of nomenclature.
His division into Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary-
sufftrests three progressive and co-ordinate stages, whereas
a Secondary Predicate is simply an 'extension and part
of the whole Predicate, and a Tertiary Predicate is no-
thing but an ordinary Predicate (Adjective or Participle),

PREFACE. xvii
not in the Xoininative Case. I prefer therefore the terms
Supplementary, and Oblique (or Dependent). But what-

ever names we use, I believe that there is nothing which
gives the learner a greater grasp of a Greek passage
than a thorough assimilation of this doctrine of Predica-
tion. Take the Participle for instance, one of the com-
monest forms of supplementary Predicates, in a Platonic
paragraph, e.g., the Carpenter who is out of sorts and
calls in the Doctor, or the Parable of the Captain and the
mutinous Crew : a knowledge of the exact force of the
Participle in qualifying the main Predication is essential
towards picking our way through the paragraph, and

rendering the Greek into adequate English,
To come to details. The treatment of the Cases
must be unsatisfactory, in far abler hands than mine.

The usages of the Accusative and Dative fall easily
enough under fairly distinct heads. But the Genitive

seems a wilderness of cross- divisions. I do not see
how it is possible to assign its usages to the two distinct
heads of Connexion (Genitive), and Separation (Ablative).

To take only one case : who shall decide whether the
Genitive of Value and Price is the true Genitive de-
noting Connexion, or an Ablative denoting Exchange, i.e.
Separation ? Comparative Syntax often is quite power-
less to help us. Thus the Greek Genitive Absolute

seems unquestionably to be, as Kriiger pointed out long
ago, a real Genitive denoting ''

the sphere within which,"
7.
xviii PREFACE.
and so the Class, {e.g. deov SiBovto^, within the sphere of

divine providence) ; but in Sanskrit the Absolute Case is
the Locative, in Latin it is Circumstantial, i.e. Instru-
mental, in Old English it was originally a Dative, and

subsequently a Nominative, in German a Genitive. I
have with misgivings retained the familiar but unsatisfac-

;
tory " Accusative of Eespect " it is anyhow as intelligible
as Professor Goodwin's " Accusative of Specificatioa"

The Aorist requires more courageous treatment than it
usually receives, if we are anxious to render Greek into

correct and idiomatic English, and vice versa. The
Aorist- Stem denotes an act single, complete, and summed
up. In the Indicative this act belongs to the past,
whether occurring a thousand years ago, or a moment

ago. When the past is not recent, the Aorist is trans-
lated by the English past tense, rjkOov, I came. But,
when the act is recent and bears on the present, the
Greeks could use the Aorist where we use a Perfect, e.g.
Od. V. 172, vvv 8' evOdSe Ka^âXe SalfMcop, hut novj a god
hath cast me on this shore: Luke v. 26, ecSafiev irapdBoâ
arj/jbepov, we have seen strange things to-day. Again, where
the act has occurred a moment ago, the Greeks often used
the Aorist where we use a Present. Familiar instances
occur in the Tragedians, eirrivecra} I commend; ya-6r}v,^
I am pleased ; eSe^dfxrjv,^ I hail. Once more the gnomic
1 Soph. Ai. 536. = PhU. 1314.

* Elektr. U6S. Similarly airinTVija, ^fiuâ, ^wiJKa, etc., etc.
PREFACE. x!x
or iterative Aorist is represented by the English Past,
Perfect, or Present Tenses. And lastly in similes we must

translate the Aorist by a Present, e.g. II. v. 161, 0)9 Se
Xeojy Oopwv a^T}, as a lion sjpringeth and hreaketh. So far
with regard to Principal Sentences. In Subordinate

Sentences our rendering must be still more elastic, as we
shall see if we have to turn into Greek the following :
when I come, have (am) come, shall come, shall have come,
eiretSav ekOco : if I had known, el eyvoyv : when they had

gone, eVetS^ aTrrjXOov : / do not helieve what you have said,
a eXe|a9, not necessarily a €ipr]Ka<; (in past Obliqua what
he had said, the Pluperfect in English, but the Aorist still
in Greek).
Thus, startling as the statement seems, the Greek

Aorist is translateable into almost every English tense
except the Imperfect.^ Mr. M. Arnold's dictum is as
wise as it is witty :
" the Aorist was made for man, and
not man for the Aorist."
* Our English narrative Past Tense is by no means parallel

with
the Greek Aorist. It often is the idiomatic and correct equivalent for
a Greek (or Latin) Imperfect, i.e. it is descriptive as well as narrative.
A few minutes' attention to any ordinary conversation, or almost any
page of a standard author, would prove this, e.g. Macaulay, History
—
of England, vol. i. ch. 2. (fin.): "Still, however, the contest con-
tinued. He [Charles] assured the Duke of York that Halifax should
be dismissed from office, and Halifax that the Duke should be sent
to Scotland. In public he affected implacable resentment against
Monmouth, and in private conveyed to Monmouth assurances of un-
alterable affection." A
boy set down to translate these tenses into
Greelc would probaljly use the Aorist, because he has been required
to translate the Creole Imperfect l)y a clumsy, often unnecessary and
XX PREFACE.
In dealing with the Moods I have probably (p. 133)

expressed myself too unhesitatingly that the Optative
cannot be a past form. Its Secondary endings, and the

possible loss of the separable augment, make it at least
conceivable that the Optative was originally past. If
this were so, a past form would (as in Hebrew, I believe)
be used to denote a wish.

I could not treat the Prepositions briefly, and did not
wish to do so. Nothing seems to me more conventional
than to pick out two or three uses of Trpo? for instance,

and to make the learner believe that these are the dom-
inant and typical usages. Such a course seems to me a
great snare. I do not believe that the use of the Preposi-
tions can be taught in a few formal lessons, they must be

gradually acquired, like those of the Particles, by con-
stant observation.
In the Oratio Obliqua I have introduced the two

technical terms, Sub-direct and Suh-oUique. Personally,
I prefer names to periphrases when dealing with facts of
constant recurrence, and I do not find the pupil puzzled.
But the teacher need not employ the terms if he objects

to them : the treatment of the chapter does not depend
on the terms.
I had prepared a chapter on Particles, but have sup-
unidiomatic, periphrasis, "he was affecting," "kept on conveying,"

etc. Much more correctly T. K. Arnold of old tauglit us on p. 1 that
" the dog howled all night " required an Imperfect in Latin.
PREFACE. xxi
pressed it, as the book already has outrun its intended
length.
It only remains for me to acknowledge my special
obligations, to authors and to friends.
Of books, besides old guides such as Jelf and Donald-
son, LiddeU and Scott, I have found the following most

useful :—
(1) Kriiger's Ch'iechische Sprac/ilehre. This is, all
round, the most useful Greek Grammar I know. It is
a vast treasury of well- chosen instances covering the
whole range of so-called classical Greek Literature.

Even if you do not always agree with his arrangement
or conclusions, Kriiger always furnishes ample materials

for induction. In substituting a better example for the
one which I had originally noted, I have found Kriiger
incomparable.
(2) Madvig's Syntax of the Greek Language, especially
of the Attic dialect. It would be impertinent in me to
praise this well-known work by the great scholar. There

seems to be nothing at second-hand in it.
(3) Goodwin's Moods and Tenses, and Greek Grammar.

The first-named book by this accomplished scholar is of
the OTeatert value. He has revolutionised the treatment
of the Conditionals ; his treatment of Final and semi-

Final Sentences is hardly less striking. I have ventured
to embody the substance of two of his papers in the
Journal of Philology in a note on edv and el

xxii PREFACE.
(4) Curtius's Stndcnfs Greek GramwMr, and Elucida-
tions to the Greek Grammar. Botli books are most

instructive ; the great pliilologer's Syntax is singularly
vigorous, fresh, and suggestive.
(5) Notes on Constructions in Mr. A. Sidgwick's In-

troduction to Greek Prose Composition. Most practical and
incisive.
(6) Eiddell's Digest of Platonic Idioms, in his edition
of the Ajpology. I must record my great gratitude to
this lamented author. ISTo book that I know of bearing
on Greek Syntax is so suggestive : no Greek scholar of

our time seems to me to combine, in so marked a degree,
fine taste, subtlety, and sound judgment.

I wish also to express my gratitude for the help afforded
in Professor Jebb's editions of the plays of Sophocles
and selections from the Attic Orators.

I have sparingly alluded to books of reference, and
then only to such as are easily procurable, such as
Professor M. IMiiller's Essays. It would be useless to
refer boys, or most undergraduates (I suppose), to Del-
briick's Syntaktische Forschungen for the comparative
treatment of Greek Syntax, and the pro])ab]e evolution
of usages and constructions. But while the latter part
of this Grammar was in the press, Mr. D. B. Monro pub-

lished his long looked-for Homeric Grammar. It is a
book with which every teacher of Greek should be

thoroughly familiar, and to parts of which he may con-
PREFACE. xxiii
venieutly refer his pupils for the origiu and explanation
of Greek constructions. Mr. Monro has kindly per-

mitted me, in my Index, to refer to certain paragraphs
in his work.
T have to thank several friends for much help.
Mr. A. Sidgwick has been kind enough to go through

the whole of the proofs. I am deeply sensible that in so
doing he has most materially added to any value which

this book may possess. I have also to thank two old
friends for reading through somer chapters with me,
and giving me the advantage of their views, —Professor
Butcher of Edinbui'gh, and jSIt. F. Storr of Merchant
Taylors. And, lastly, I am much indebted to several
of my colleagues here for help and sympathy.
Some little slips, such as wrong accents, have inevitably

escaped several pairs of eyes. They, however, can be
easily rectified, and will cause no serious harm. If any
one who may use this book cares to point out more
important errors, I shall be extremely gr.itefuL
F. E. THOMPSON.
CoTTOX Hor.sE, .Makleoeough.

Augmt 1883.
—
NOTE,
The book is practically divided into—
I. An Elementary Syntax.
II. An Advanced Syntax.
The following distinctions have (with a few unimportant
exceptions) been observed :
In I. \stly. The type is large.
Iiully, The headings are in Italics.

Srdly, The name of the author is given without reference to
line or chapter, etc.
II. Idly, The type is small.

2ndly, The headings are in tliick black tj'pe.
Srdly, Reference given to the line or cliapter,

is etc., ot the
autlior quoted.
— — — — ;
INTEODUCTION TO
THE SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCE,
AND DEFINITIONS OF TEEMS
§ I. THE STATEMENT, (QUESTION, AND

PETITION
A SENTENCE assiimes three forms (1) the Statement —
{Enuntiatio) (2) the Question (Jnterrogatio)
; (3) the ;
Petition, i.e. a command, request, prayer, or wish (Petitio).

A sentence, logically considered, connects (positively or
negatively) two distinct conceptions. Thus in the sentence,
" The rose is sweet," the conceptions of a certain flower
and a certain quality are connected positively. Two con-
ceptions are connected negatively in the sentence, " The
nightshade is not wholesome." A sentence, logically and
fully expressed, may be represented by the formulas
A is B; A is not B. A sentence therefore necessarily
consists of three parts, neither more nor less :
(1) The Subject, i.e. that of which the statement is made

(2) the Predicate, i.e. the statement made of the Subject
(3) the Copula, i.e. the connecting or disconnecting

link, is (when the sentence is positive), is
not (when it is negative).

These three parts are not always present in language.
The finite verb contains in itseK a complete sentence
o-rpaTTjyM, I am general. The Copula is frequently

omitted, being contained in the verb, or understood
Sep^T}'; âaiXevet, Xerxes is king; ayado<; 6 avrip, The
man is good. Logically expressed, these sentences would
be 'aep^rj'; eari âcrtXevi, 6 avrjp eartv aya6o<;.
A
— —
2 SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.
The Statement, Question, and Petition differ from one

another simply in the relation of the Predicate to the
Subject. Thus we may say, " The door is shut " (State-
" Is the " "
ment) ; door shut ?
" (Question) ; Shut the door
(Petition). In the Statement we say that the Predicate
is applicable to the Subject ; in the Question we ask if
the Predicate is applicable to the Subject ; in the Petition

we request or command that the Predicate may be appli-
cable to the Subject. Whatever remarks are here made
with regard to a sentence apply equally to each of its
three forms, the Statement, the Question, and the Petition.
§ 2. THE PREDICATE AND ITS SUPPIE-

MENTARY ADJUNCTS.
The Predicate is the whole statement made of the
Subject, whether that statement is short and simple, or
long and composite. It may be short and simple, con-
sisting of one word, as in the examples given above
Subject. Peedicate.
6 avTip (sc. eartv) ayaOo';,
or it may be a composite expression made up of many

words
Subject. Peedicate.
TTfli? 'âipei V7rep<j>va)<;.
I
The hoy rejoices |

exceedingly.
01 Adr^valoL aTTrfkOov |
rptratoi.
The Athenians departed I on the third day.
THE PREDICATE AND ITS ADJUNCTS.
Subject.
:
Subject. Predicate.
Saxa panllatim |
anima mollia |
calu-
emnt.
Stones gradually waxed warm with tJie-
softness of life (ita ut mollia

fierent, so as to hecome soft).
Instances may be found on any page of a book in any

language. The first point to notice is that the whole
expression constitutes the Predicate. The second point
to notice is that, on analysing such compound Predicates
as the above, there is a word (generally a verb, but it may
be a noun or participle), which by itseK, if all the rest
were away, might stand as a simple Predicate, and that
this simple Predicate is further extended or qualified by
an adjunct or adjuncts. Thus in the sentence, ol 'AdqvaloL
arrrfkOov rpLraioi, airrfkOov rptraloL is the Predicate
cLTrrfKOov alone as a Predicate would, with its Subject,
have made a complete sentence but a-Krfkdov is extended
;
by stating the time of departure. There may be many

supplementary adjuncts which swell out the Predicate.
It is most important in Greek to notice them, and
discover their special force, for they often convey the real
pith and gist of the predication, denoting manner, degree
cause, tiiiu, condition, purpose, the anticipated result, etc.
etc.
In Greek, adverbs, adjectives, and participles (some-

times substantives) constantly occur as supplementary
adjuncts,^ or, as they will be called throughout this book,
Supplementary Predicates.
^ Dr. Donaldson called these supplementary adjuncts secondary

Predicates. Thus he would have said that airiiKOov -was the primary
Predicate, and rpiToioi the secondary.
—
PREDICATE, EPITHET, AND APPOSITION.
§ 3. THE OBJECT, DIRECT AND REMOTE.

The direct Object is that which is immediately acted on
by a transitive verb. The remote or remoter Object is that
to which the direct object is transferred, or that which is
interested and concerned in the verbal action. Awaco
Bexa fiva<;, I will give ten minae. Here /xj/a? is the direct
object. Aiaato BeKa fiva^ to5 hihaaKoKw, 1 will give ten
minae to the teacher. Here rw hihaaKoXm is the remoter
object.
§ 4. PREDICATE, ATTRIBUTIVE OR EPITHET,

AND APPOSITION.
The following instances will show the difference be-
tween a Predicate and an Attributive :
— avrip {eariv)
d'yado';, the raan is good — dya6o<;, good, is a Predicate:
6 dyaOof dvrjp, the good man — dyaOo^, good, is an Attri-
butive. The Predicate gives new information of the
Subject, the Attributive uses information to be assumed
known and thus forms one notion with a Sub-
already,
stantive. Apposition does not form one notion with a
Substantive, but is a further description appended to a
Substantive, e.g. '^povo^, 6 koivo<; iaTpo<i, ere OepaTrevcrei,
Time, the common physician, will heal thee.
§ 5. SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.

AvTO^ aTparrjyo), I myself am general, is a Simple
Sentence. NiKia^ e(f)7], Nihias made a statement, again, is a
Simple Sentence. But if we join the two together, thus
NtKia<; e^Tj avr6<i arparrj'êlv, Nikias stated that he himself

was general, we have a Compound Sentence. A Compound
Sentence is thus a sentence consisting of two (or more)
sentences compounded into one. Logically, i.e. so far as
thought goes, there no difference between a Simple and
is
a Compound Sentence. Each is an expression containing

the three necessary elements of a sentence, i.e. Subject,
Copula, and Predicate ; e.g. —
NLKLar) (Copula and Predicate).
avTo<; (Subject) arparirya) (Copula and Predicate).
NiKLa^ (Subject) 'i^r) auro? arpaTrjyelv (Copula

and Predicate).
For the last sentence, so far as thought goes, simply

amounts to this Nikias stated something.
:
|
Xatpe(l)(ov, ea Ae\<ôv<i eXOcov, rjpero et Tt9 ecrj c/jlov
cro<pa)T€po<i.
Chaerephon, going to Delphi, asked if any one were wiser

than I.
Here we have three sentences compounded into one, of

which XaLpetpcov is the Subject, and the rest is the Predi-
cate, with the Copula contained in ijpero. So far as
thought goes, it amounts to saying, Chacrephon asked a j
question on a certain occasion.
§ 6. PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE

SENTENCES.
In every Compound Sentence there must be one on
which the depend in construction. Such a sentence
rest
is called the Principal Sentence. Those which depend
CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES.
in construction on it are called Subordinate Sentences.

Thus, in the first example above, NiKia^ e(f)7) is the
Principal Sentence, avTo<; crrpariTyelv is the Subordinate
Sentence. The dependence of the latter on the former is
easily shown if we remove NiKia<;

; e(f>7], then avTocoT€po^, and the
temporal participial sentence, eh AeX(f>ov<i ekdwv, are the
Subordinate Sentences.
§ 7. CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES.
Co-ordinate Sentences are of the same rank, i.e. con-
struction, as those to which they are joined. Thus, if a
sentence is co-ordinate with a Principal Sentence, it is a
second Principal Sentence with a Subordinate Sen-
: if
tence, it is Subordinate, and of the same nature (whether

an Indirect Statement, Question, Petition, Adverbial or
Eelative Sentence). (See below.)
Beofiat Kat Trapiepiai v[iS>v fi'r]re davfiaêiv firyre Oopvêcv.

I heg, and entreat you, neither to wonder, n/yr to interrupt.
Here /cat Traplefiai is co-ordinate with the Principal

Sentence Beo/xai, and therefore is a second Principax
Sentence : while /Mrjre Oopvêlv is co-ordinate with the
Subordinate Sentence dav/idêiv (an Indirect Petition),
and therefore is Subordinate, and an Indirect Petition.
§ 8. CLASSIFICATION OF SUBORDINATE
SENTENCES
Subordinate Sentences are classified according to the
relation in which they stand to the Principal Sentence.
SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.
Let the three following groups he taken.

A. Peincipal, Subordinate.
(a) 1. Of paBiov eari. ravTa fxaUeov.

It is not easy to learn this.
a-TpaTTjyetv.
Nikias said that he was general.
(fi) 1. aZrjkov e(7TLV et, ravra ^vvir)<i.
It is uncertain whether you understand

this.
(/ » f
2. ovK olSa 0(TTC<i eaTL.
I do not hwv) who he is.
(7) 1. TTepcrjyyeXkeTO iravarpana ôrjOelv.

Orders wereheing sent round tomarch in full force.
2. Beofxat <tov ravra fiaOelv.
I leg you to learn this.
S. KareyvcoKo-'i fiov a8iKco<;.
You have condemned me unjustly.
Kar&yvaiica<i fiov Slori ^(^pvaov e\aê<i.

You have condemned me because you took a hribe.
r)v ravra ttoitjo't)';.
You ivill he fortunate if you do this.
C. dveXaôv to. 7rot7]fiaTa a eTTOtTjae So(f)OK\r]<;.
I took up the poems which Sophocles composed.
In group A it will be seen that the Subordinate Sentence

supplies (1.) the Subject, (2.) the Object of the Compound
Sentence. Now the chief function of a Substantive is to
express the Subject or the Object. Such Subordinate
Sentences as those in group A are therefore called Sub-
stantival Sentences.
— ;
CLASSIFICATION OF SENTENCES. g
In group B the Subordinate Sentence is a supple-

jientary Predicate to the Principal Sentence (see above,
§ 2). Now an Adverb is the type of a Supplementary
Predicate. Subordinate Sentences of this group are
therefore called Adverbial. They are Conditional (the
Protasis or Condition), Concessive, Final, Modal, Con-
secutive, Limitative, Temporal, Comparative.
In group C the Subordinate Sentence stands like an
Attributive or Epithet to the noun {iroirj/jLaTa) in the
Principal Sentence. That noun is the antecedent to the
relative, and the relative sentence is used like an adjective
used attributively. Subordinate Sentences of this group
therefore are generally called Adjectival Sentences.
This, however, as we shall soon see, is too narrow a use
of the term, and too inadequate a name for Eelative Sen-
tences, It would be better simply to call them Eelative
Sentences.
For with regard to Eelative Sentences a fundamental
must be noticed. Some are (1) Attributive,
distinction
others again are (2) virtually Adverbial.
(1) Attributive (or really Adjectival) :
avekaôv ra TroLTj/xara a eiroir^cre ôôkXtj^.

I took up the poems which Sophocles wrote (or the
Sophoclean poeins).
(2) Virtually Adverbial :

—
Ti? ovTa><; €vrjd7]<; bcr7L<i a'^/voei ;
Who is so simple that he does not know ?
Here the Eelative Sentence oa-Ti<; dyvoel^&a-Te ayvoelv

J —
lo SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES.
% 9* ^6 t^^s arrive at the following Classification

and Table of Subordinate Sentences :
A. Substantival.
The Subordinate /
Sentence is the Sub- I a. Indirect Statement,

ject or Object of the-A /3. Indirect Question.
Principal Sentence, I 7. Indirect Petition,
whether V
B. Adverbial.
The Subordinate ( 1. Introduced by a Subordinate
Sentence like an Ad- Conjunction (such as el, k'TrecBi^,
verb is an adjunct ciare, etc. etc.).

J
of the Predicate. (^ 2. Introduced by a Eelative.
0. Eelative.
The Subordinate Sentence is either an Attributive, or is
equivalent to an Adverbial Sentence (see B Adverbial, 2).
§ 10. ORATIO RECTA.

By Oratio Recta is meant the words of a person given
at first-hand, as from his own lips.
Bcoaoi d e^co. I will give what I' have.
Tt Xeyefi ; What do you mean ?

KoTTTe Tr)v dvpav. Knock at the door.
§ II. ORATIO OBLIQUA.

By Oratio Ohliqua meant the words or thoughts
is of a
person given at second-hand, by some one else.
€077 ocoaeLv a €'^01.
He said he would give what he had.

SUBDIRECT AND SUB OBLIQUE SENTENCES, ii
r/po/jirjv avTOV re Xeyot.

I asked him ivhat he meant
etTTe TO) TratBc KoTTTecv t7]v Ovpav.
He told the hoy to knock at the door.
§12. SUBDIRECT AND SUBOBLIQUE.

A Subordinate Sentence is Subdirect when it depends
on a Principal Sentence in the Recta.
Principal. Subdieect.
0(0(70) a e^w.
It is SuhoUique when it depends on a Principal Sentence

which itself is Subordinate.
Principal. Subdirect. Suboblique.

€<pr) ooxTeLV a epôt.
In this last example hwaeiv is subordinate to its Principal

Sentence e<^T], but it is the Principal Sentence to a e-xpi-
See further under Oratio Ohliqua.
§ 13. VIRTUALLY OBLIQUE.

A Subordinate Sentence is said to be virtually Ohliq^ce
when it alludes to the words or thoughts of another, the
actual verb of saying or thinking on which it depends
having to be mentally supplied from the context.
iKUKiôv Tov UepiKKea on ov/c eTreâyoi.
They were ahising Pericles because (so they said) he did

not lead them out.
A verb like eXeyov is contained in eKaKiôv.
%
: ;
CHAPTEE L
SUBJECT AND PEEDICATK

ATTEIBUTIVE AND APPOSITION.
§ 14. The Subject is (a) a noun, or pronoun, or (/3) the
equivalent of a noun :
(^) ol ayadoi, the good; to BtKaiov, justice; to

hehievai, fear ; 6 (pevycov, the defendant ; to 8eBio<;, fear
ol vvv, the present generation.
§ 15. The Copula is a verb which merely serves as a

link to join the Subject and Predicate, without containing
in itself the predication.
The commonest Copulas are etyu./ and 7/7^0/^0*. Many
others, however, serve as Copulas, vTrdp'xco, irijtvKa,
KadtaTafxaL.
Note. Other Copulas are dvo/xaô/xai, KaXovfiai, (âivofiai,
Tvy^dvfj)., and KvpQ> (even without a participle), kAvw and
aKovia (I am called, or, spoken of), ttcAu) in poetry.
eifii,expressing existence, may be more than a copula; it
may be a predicative verb, e.g. 'ia-Tc êos, there is a God.
§ 16. OMISSION OF THE COPULA.

The Copula is often omitted in Greek, in fact, where-
ever the distinction between Subject and Predicate is
clearly marked without it
TO }xavTitcov yevoi; (fiiXapyvpov. SOPH. Antig.

The tribe of seers is covetous.
e'Ôpcov aScopa Bcopa kovk ovrjaifjua. SOPH. lA aia^ r *
Gift less the gifts of foes, and profitless. ^ ^4^r^

12
'
:
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE OF AN INFINITIVE. 13
And sometimes the Copula, in a freer way, is omitted in

dependent clauses where we might have expected it to be
expressed
Iws ct" kv oo-tâAei, <f>v\dâ(Tde. DeM. 19. 26.
fFhile you are still in safety, be on your guard.
ecus sub. ecrre.
CI Eur. Hipp. 659. Thuc. l 91. 1.
§ 17. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE OF

AN INFINITIVE.
The Subject and the Predicate of an Infinitive are m
the Accusative.
But the Subject and Predicate of an Infinitive are in
the Nominative when they refer to the Subject of the
Principal Verb.
The same two rules apply to the Subject and Predicate
of a Participle.
For further rules, and for examples, see Compound
Sentence, Indirect Statement.
§ 18. The Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive (or

Participle) may be in the Genitive or Dative, if the principal
verb governs either of those cases.
y(r66firjv avrutv olofievoiv a-ocfxiiTaTWV eTvai. PlAT. Ap. vi.

/ noticed that they fancied they were the wisest of mankind.
The subject to eo-at is omitted, a-otfyoiTdrwv is the Predicate.
TravTL Trpoa~qKei dpyovri (^povtfjua eivat. XeN. Hip. 7. 1.
It behoves every ruler to be prudent.
The Subject and Predicate, however, in such a construction

may stand in the Accusative.
^vix(f)epeL avTOis (piXovs eTvai. XeN. Oik. ii. 23.
It is expedient for tliem to be friendly.
Cf. Xen. Hell. iv. 8. 4.
— —
14 SUBJECT AND PREDICA TE.
§ 19. Omission of the Subject.

The Subject is omitted in the third person in a great
number of indefinite phrases and impersonal verbs.
(a) In terms of the weather, or natural phenomena. The
Subject is a vague indefinite agent [e.g. Zevs, o êds). -uet, it
rains ; vtêt, it snows ; (Bpovra, it thunders ; da-TpaTrrei, it
lightens; x^^H-'^C^h *^ ^^ stormy; o-ixr/coraêt, it grows dark;

was an earthquake.
h-eia-e, there
Sometimes the agent is expressed vei fj-ev 6 Zevs. Alcaeus,

Fragm.
(b) The Subject is when the action alone is
not expressed
worth noticing, and the Subject well known.
is a-aXTTLêi, the
trumpet sounds (i.e. 6 o-aXirLyKTrjs craA-têt, the trumpeter sounds
the trumpet); crrjfiaLveL (sc. 6 Krjpv^, or o o-aATrfyK-r^s), the signal
is given; Kqpva-crei (o Krjpv^), proclamation is made; dvayvwa-eTsi
(6 ypafjL/xaTevs), the reading will follow.
Passive Verbs
(c) —
Aeycrat, it is said ; dp-qrai, do. ; Trapea-Kcv-
aa-Tai, preparation has been made. Cf. Latin, itur, ventum est.
—
Active Verbs ws Xeyovartv, as men say, as they say ; (Jmo-l,
it is said; otovTat, people think. Cf. LsLtin, ferunt, tradunt.
Tts, Tiv€?, av9pw-oi, in phrases like the last, may be
—
expressed (like the French on) e.g. rjv ns aStKg, if one commits
injustice.
(d) Ordinary impersonal verbs and expressions — eS ex^'j

fieXei, etc.
Note. The Latin rule that only transitive verbs which are
followed by an accusative in the active can be personal in the
passive does not hold in Greek. Thus we may say
Karrjyopo) ScoKparovs, I accuse Socrates ; and
SojK/aa-njs Kar-qyopelraL, Socrates is accused.
TTLa-revofiiv 'EoiKparei, we believe Socrates (Socrati credi-

mus) ; and
YdiKpar-qs TTicrTeveTai, Socrates is believed (Socrati creditur).
§ 20. 7'JI£ PREDICATE.

The Predicate is usually contained either (1) in a Verb,
or (2) an Adjective or Particip)le. In the former case the
— ;
PECULIARITIES IN THE AGREEMENT. 15
Predicate agrees with the Subject in number and person

in the latter case in number, gender, and case.
(1) evLKT]dr}(7av 01 AOrjvaloL.

The Athenians were defeated.
(2) rj aXr^deta ecrriv opOr].

Tricth is straightforward.
In the former case the Copula is contained in the in-

flection of the verb. In the latter the Copula is expressed
or understood.
§ 21. Peculiarities in the Agreement of Subject

and Predicate.
A neuter plural Subject takes a verb singular.
ra avBpaTToBa airecjivye, the slaves escaped.
TO, Kcika TTfv ylrv^p^v evcfjpacvei, good deeds gladden the soul.
§ 22. A
plural verb with neuter plural Subject occurs
rarely (chiefly in Thucydides, Xenophon, and Plato). In such
cases (often when persons are implied) the distributive character
of the noun is brought out. Thus in Thuc. i. 58, there are
two readings, to, TeXrj VTr&rxeTO and m-ecrxovTO. If virea-X'^To,
Thucydides is following ordinary usage if vn-ea-xovTo, he is :
thinking of the persons (the magistrates promised).

evravOa rjaav ra 2i;evvecrios (SacriXetxi. XeN. An. 1. 2. 23.
There were the (several) palaces of Syennesis.
Obs. The phrase 56âv ravra, When it had been thus resolved,
which occurs as well as Soâvra ravra, follows in the participle
the construction of Sokc? ravTa.
§ 23. An Adjective -Predicate in the neuter singular

may be used with a plural Subject. The Predicate sums
up collectively the character of the Subject.
KoXov r) aXrjdeia kolI fiovLfiov^ Plat.

Truth is noble and abiding.
€pcoT€<; KaKov fieya. EuKIP.

Loves are a great curse.
;
x6 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE,
Note. Cf. Eur. El. 1035; An. Ecc. 236 ; Plat. Phaed. 242
{yiavTiKov ri rj ^vxi]). The stock quotation isfrom HoM. II.
ii 204, ovK dyadov TroXvKOLpavtr], efs Koipavos eo-ro), No good
thing the rule of the many, one ruler be there.
Compare with this the use of the phrases, Travra etvai, to be
all in all (i.e. of prime importance) ; ra irpioTa dvai, to be the
head and front of; iravr' -qv 'AAeâvSyoos, Alexander was every-
thing, all in all. Dem. 23. 120.
§ 24. In the poets, and in Plato, a singular verb is
occasionally found with a plural Subject. From the occur-

rence of this construction in Pindar it is caUed the Sclmna
Pindaricum.
eo-Tt yap l/ioiye )8a)/iot. PlAT. Euthyd. 302.
I have altars.
The verb generally comes first in this construction.

Cf.PiND. Frag. 344; Pyth. x. 7; EuRiP. Ion, 1146;
Helen. 1358; Aesch. Pers. 49. Compare in French, "il est
cent usages:" and Bacon, Advancement of Learning, ii. ii 7,
" a portion of the time wherein there hath been the greatest
varieties." Shakspere, Macbeth, v. iii. " Serv. There is ten
thousand —
Mac. Geese, villain? Serv. Soldiers, sir." In
some cases, however, the apparent singular in English is a
real dialectic plural.
§ 25. Agreement of the Predicate when there are

several Subjects.
The Dual Subject is considered sejiarately.
(1) The first case is where the Subjects are persons. Here
(a) with regard to number, the Predicate may be either correctly
plural, or singular in agreement with one prominent subject
(b) with regard to gender, the masculine is preferred to the
feminine ; (c) with regard to person, the first is preferred to the
second, the second to the third.
Kal rj yvvrj Kal 6 avTjp ayadoi elcrtv. PlAT. 3Ien. 73.
Both tlie wife and the husband are good.
MTWS dva/B'qcreTai îAittttos xal 'Avrtycvrys Kal 6 avriypa<f)€v<s.
Dem. 22. 38.
Perhaps tJiere will appear Philip, and Antigenes, and the
controller.
:
PECULIARITIES IN THE AGREEMENT. 17
ei3ov veovs koX vkas ofMiXovvras aXXi^Xocs. PlAT. Leg, 835.

/ saw young men and women associating together.
e-yo) Kal ol aXXoi, -pecr/SeLS TreptiiXdoixcv. DeM. 129, 72.

/ and the other envoys went round.
(TV T€"EAA7jv el Kal -rj/xels. Xen. Andb. ii. 1. 16.
You and ive are Gh-eeJcs.
You are Greek, and (so are) we.
Observe the emphatic position of the verb when it is in the

singular.
(2) The second case is where the several Subjects are

things. Here (a) with regard to number, we frequently find the
Predicate in the singular, in agreement with one prominent
Subject ; frequently also in the plural ; (b) with regard to gender,
the Predicate, when plural, is generally neuter, when singular
it agrees with the prominent Subject.
Twv KaKbJv r] cTTatrts Kal 6 iroXefios atrtos ecmv. DeM.

Seditionand war are the cause of our troubles.
XriQ-q Kal 8v(TKoXta Kal fiavCa TroAAa/cts eis Trjv Stdvoiav ifi-
TTLTrTova-Lv. Xen. Ap. iii. 12. 6.

Forgetfuhiess, and discontent, and madness often attack the
mind.
TO vyiaiveiv Kal to vocreiv dyaâ av eti/.
Xen. Ap. iv. 2. 36.

Health and sickness might be blessings.
The singular Predicate is not unknown in English

Destruction and unhappiness is in their ways. Ps. xiv. 7.
So great an afiinity Jiath fiction and belief. Bacon,
Advancement of Learning, i. 4. 8,
(3) The third case is where, in the Subjects, there is a com-

bination of persons and things. Here the person will generally
in gender over-ride the thing ; in number, as before, both
singular and plural are used.
kirvOeTO Tov ^TpojJil3i.^c8r]v Kal ras vavs atriXi^Xydora.
Thuc. viii. 63. 1.
He heard tJiat Strombichides and his fleet had sailed away.
V ''^XV '^'^' ^tAlTTTTOS r}0"av TWV €pyO)V KVpiOL.

Aeschin. 12. 181.
Fortune and Philip were masters of circumstances.
B
— ;
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
Great variety is allowable where there is a plurality of

Subjects. The leading priaciples only have been indicated in
the above rules.
"With disjunctives, ^ 7;, ovri. — — ov-^, the Predicate generally
agrees with the nearest Subject,
§ 26. The demonstrative pronouns oSe, o?-os, eKeti/og,
tvhen used as Subjects to a Predicate, or as Predicates to a

Subject, either (1) are assimilated to the gender and number
of their subject or predicate, or (2) are in the neuter singular
or plural.
(1) eK-eti/ds £(TTtv W€.yyo% /ieytcrros. Lys. 16. 6.

This is the strongest proof.
o?/xat efirjv ravrrjv TrarpiSa eivau XeN. Anab. iv= 8. 4.

/ tJiink that this is my country.
Cf. Verg. Aen. vi 129, hoc opus, hie labor est.
(2) totjt' elcrlv ol Xoyot. DeM. 8. 7.

The statements are these {come to this).
ov Aoycuv KOfji—o? rdSe. ThUC. ii. 41. 1.
This is no boastful talk.
Cf. the use of raSe ; ovk "Iwves raSe cicrtv, ThUC. vi. 77. 1.
These are not lonians, we have no lonians here. Cf. Eun.
Androm. 168.
Also cf. Tt, oTi, (interrogative) Si]/j.oKpaTLav oh-Oa ti Icmv
:
Do you know democracy is ? SovXevofiev Oeols

vjJiat n ttot'
ila-Lv 01 d€ol. EuE. Or. 418, we are slaves to gods, whatever tliese
gods may be.
So the phrase lov-o dX-qOrj Aeyets, ichat you say is true.
§ 27. Peculiarities of Number— Singular, Dual,

and Plural.
(a) The singidar is used for tJie plural (a) with collective nouns,
{b)'ydt]i nouns of material, (c) with nouns denoting nationality,
(d) in several military expressions, etc.
(a) 6 exOpos, the enemy ; 6 TreAas, on^s neighbour.
(b) KepafjLos, tiles; ttXIvOo^, bricks ; dfnreXos, vines; la-d-qs,

clothes.
THE DUAL NUMBER. 19
(c) 6 'lAAv/Dtos,the, Illyrians, 6 XaAKiScvs, iê Chalcidians
(cf.the Latin Foenus, Eomanus). But sometimes, as

in Latin, of the general, king, or prince.
{d) 6 iWos, the cavalry ; dcrms ( = ott Airat), hoplites, heavy-

armed infantry.
(/iJ) ^ collective noun singular (TrX.rjdo's, yevos, o-T/oarev/ia, etc.)

may agree with a plural predicate. Often there is a mixture of
singular and plural.
fiepos Tt dvdpoL>7r(x)v ovx rjyovvrai Oeovs. PlAT. Lei/. 948.

A portion of mankind do not believe in gods.
TO orTpaTev/xa hropi^^ro (tltov, KOTrrovres toi^s ftovs Kal oVovs.
Xen. Anab. ii. L 6.
The army provided itself with food by cutting up the oxen

and asses.
§ 28. The Dual Number.

L The Dual is a kind of plural, an imnecessary kind. It
is not used in Aeolic, and it has disappeared in Modern Greek.
The agreement between a dual subject and its verb or
adjective is irregular. We may say that the strict dual agree-
ment is adhered to only where the idea of duahty (of there
being a pair of things) is prominent.
The first person dual does not exist in the active voice. It
is very doubtful whether it occurs in the middle. //. xxiii.
485, Soph. Fhil. 1079, Soph. El. 950, seem to be about the
only three places, and in aU of them the plural may be the
correct reading.
vo) deaa-wp-ea-da. Ar. Av. 664
Let us two see.
(2.) Dual of the Article —

and of Pronouns. The feminine dual
is defective, especially in the nominative and accusative
forms. {See Kriiger, p. 235.)
Tw is the regular prose form for all genders, ra is rare in

poetry, rolv is much commoner than ratv.
TwSe is used, not raSe, but raivSe is used.
TovTU) not ravra. Both tovtolv and Tavratv for the feminine.
auTw and avTo. ars both used for the feminine, also avrotv
and avTati'.
— : — : —
20 SUBJECT AND PREDICA TE.
aXX-qXui and dAAiÂa, aXX-qXoiv and dA-AÂaiv sre found

equally with feminine nouns.
Similarly l/iw, /tovo), /xarata), d^tw occur with feminine nouns.
(3) The strict dual agreement is shown in the following

examples
TO) d8eX<fiO} avTU) wrrep iyevecrdyjv a/A^co aTratSe eTeAeuri^crdTJjv.
ISAEUS, 6. 6.
The two brothers themselves who were born both died childless.
Similarly when there are two Subjects :
riôv-q KOL Xinrr] Iv ry ttoAci /3acriAeucreTov. PlAT. Mep. 607.

Pleasure and pain shall reign in the State.
A good instance occurs in Soph. El. 977-985, where the

effect is heightened by the dual form.
8vo e^ Ivos dyajvos yeyevr)a-9ov. AnTIPH. HeROD. 85.
Two trials have been made out of one.
(4) The following miscellaneous instances show the irregu-

larity of agreement both in gender, and in number —
a/x^co TOVTU) TO) Yjfiepa. XeN. Cyr. 1. 2. 11.
Both these days.
KaTrjyop-qa-ev diJ,(f)Oiv roiv TroAeoiv. Is. xiL 9. 7.
He accused both the states.
"5 o 0eos kiroirjo-ev.

TO) X^'P^ XeN. Ap. ii. 3. 18.
The hands which God made.
Twv avToiv Seovrai Kal rj yvvq Kal 6 dvyp. PlAT. Men. 73.
The wife and the husband need the same things.
J\r.^, 8vo agrees with a dual or plural noim, or verb

dfxfjju) and dfiffioiv, generally ^vith the dual ; dfi<f)6T€pos, more
commonly with plural than dual.
kfSovXiTO 01 TO) TTttcSe dfX(jiOTepo} Trapelvai. XeN. An, i. 1. 1.
He wished both his sons to be present.
dirkOavov ol OTpaTTjyol dfjL(f>6Tepoi.. ThUC. V. 74. 2.

Both the generals were slain.
(5) A dual verb is found joined to a plural subject, or

several subjects, when the subjects are arranged or contrasted
— ——
THE PLURAL USED FOR THE SINGULAR. 21
singly or in pairs. This construction occurs several times in

Homer. {See Jelf, § 388. 1.)
Svvdfiei<s afKÔT^paL kcrrov Soâ koI kirixTTrnii].
PL. Rep. 478, B.

Both are faculties, opinion and certain knowledge.
So Aesch. Eum. 256, Xeva-a-erov, of the chorus divided into
§ 29. The Plural for the Singular is used—

(1) With proper names —
ot 'HpaKAees re Kal Gijcrecs, Plat.
Theaet. 169, b. Cf. Latin, Scipiones et Laelii; English, Our
Burkes and Chaihams. Cf. Aesch. Ag. 1439 ; Xen. An. iii. 2. 31.
(2) Very freely with abstract nouns, i.e. names of quahties,

denoting (as in Latin) instaD.ces or lands of the quality e.g.
uavtai, Jits of madness ; evvoiai, instances of henevolence ; o-Tocrets,
instances of revolution ; dvSpiai, deeds of valour.
Some words are repeatedly used in this way
modes or forms of death ; aK/zat, prime of
— /3ioi, davaroi,
life, life (flos aetatis) ;
vTTvoi, sleep, etc,
TOis fieTpioLi CÂ°' ''"^ '^^'' 4'ôvoL ovK lyjiyvovTau

Plat. Leg. 679.
Self-controlled persons are not subject to rivalry and envy {or
fits of rivalry, etc.).
(3) Terms
of weather and time ddXTr-q, depfion^rcs, heat;
ij/vêt.'s, xdXaâi, hail; op-fipoi, rain; av-)(jiot, drought;
cold;
TTuxvai, frost ; epvcrifSai, mildew ; {ikcrai vtjktcs, midnight, vv»cT€S,
hours or watches of the night.
(4) Material Nouns —

irvpoi koI KpiBai, wheat and barley.
But here a distinction is commonly made between singular
and plural, e.g. Kpeas, apiece of meat, Kpka,meat; ^vXov, apiece
of wood, stick, cudgel, ^vXa, timber ; 17X105, the sun, 17X101, rays of
the sun; aAs, salt, a Acs, salt-works; Xoytcrixos, a reckoning,
Xoyirrfioi. (also Aoywr/zos), arithmetic.
(5) The plural is often used for the singular in poetry to

heighten the effect by the vagueness of the expression aifjiara,
if>6voi, blood or bloodshed; irXovroi, riches ; dpovoi, royalty, royal
;
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
commands; Sw/iara, a house; TruAat, agate; ai'Aat, a dwelling

yXukrcrai, the tongue.
(6) The neuter plural of verbals in -xfos, eTrixîprjTia,

dSvvaTa, and TTOTepa, and many adjectives. See Verbal Adjec-
tives.
§ 30. The First Person Plural is used of a

Singular Subject
when (a) the author of a book refers to himself ; (b) especially
in the poets, often when a person speaks of himself as acting
with or for others.
(a) TOVTO Treipaa-o/JLeOa Strjyiâ-acrdai. XeN. Cyr. viii 1. 48.
This we will endeavour to describe.
(b) ovK av yvvaLKwv -/jcrcroves KaXoifxiO' av. SOPH. Ant. 680.

We slwuld not be called inferior to women.
In Plat. Sympos. 186, b, one physician speaks in the plural
as representing the profession.
In tragedy a woman may speak of herself in the plural
masculine, sometimes in the singular masculine.
7r£(Tovixi9\ €t xPVi Tt/iwpot'/ievoi.
~'^'''p''- Soph. El. 399.
We will fall, ^f fall we must, avenging a father.
(Elektra is speaking).
In Eur. Eippol. 1103, the female Coryphaeus speaks of her

self in masculine singular.
§ 31. Peculiarities of Person.

The second person singular is used, as in Latin, in an inde-
finiteway Hke an impersonal expression.
£?Ses av, you might have seen ; rjyrja-oi av, you would (or might)
have thought ; rjyrja-aLo av, 7J0U ivould think (credideris).
For peculiarities of the third person, see Omission of the
Subject
§ 32. Supplementary Predicates {See Introduction).
Certain adjectives are constantly so used. Such are {a)

TToAi's, a(r/x€vos, ckwv, eKoucrtos, aKoyv (invitus) adjectives of
; (b)
number, tt/ootc/jo?, tt/jwtos, Sevrtpo?, vcrrcpo?. vararos, Sevrepaios
— ;
:
SUPPLEMENTA R V PREDICA TES. 23
{on the second day), Tpiraios (on the third day) ; (c) words refer-
ring to time or place, 6pdpio<;, in the morning ; xpovtos, late
ai^vtStos, suddenly ; a-Koralos, o-fcoTiatos, in the dark ; Troo-Taios,
in how many days ?
6 'AcrwTTOS TTora/xos fppvr] fi^yas. ThUC. ii. 5. 2.

The river Asopus flowed with a strong stream.
d<f>iKvovvTat at^vtSiot. Thuc. viii. 14. 1.
They arrive suddenly.
KaKos eKUiv ovSei's. PlAT. Tim. 86,
No one is deliberately idcked.
(TTTOvSas Xvova-Lv ol irporepoc CTrtovTcs. ThUC. i. 123. 3.
TJie breakers of treaties are the first aggressors.
1
(
Observe the following distinctions (Kriiger, p. 229) :
TrpwTos M-rjOv/xvy Trpoa-e/SaXe.

He was the first who attached Methymne.
TzpiaTQ ÎrjOvfxvr] rrpocrkfSaX^.
Methymne ivas the first place he attached.
TTpwTOV Mr]dvfJLvr) Trpocre/SaXe.

His first act was to attack Methymne.
The Greek
adjective is more freely used in this way than
the Latin, but see Eoby, Lat. Gr., 1069.
§ 33' Peculiarities in the Construction of the

Attributive or Epithet.
A Substantive is sometimes used as an attributive to another
Substantive —
(1) Commonly with dv/jp, av9po)-os, ywv;, e.g. dvrjp oirXirrjs,
a heavy-armed soldier ; dvrjp rvpai'vos, a despot ; ypavs yw?;, an
old woman; avOpw-o'i -oXirijs, a citizen; dvrjp I.TrapTLdryjs, a
Spartan citizen. So dvSpes 'AOrjvaioi, dvSpes SiKaarat, Athenians,
jurymen.
(2) Many miscellaneous Substantives are thus used as
Adjectives, especially in the poets, but some in prose also
oXiOpos Ma/ceSwv (y/oa/i/xareiSs), Dem. 9. 31. 18. 127, a scoundrel
of a Macedonian, or a pestilent Macedonian, a pestilent scribe;
oTrXiTTjs (TTpaTOs, Kocr/ios, Etjr. Her. 699, 800. yepwv o<^âA/ios, •
Eur. Or. 529; irapdevos x^'P, EuE. Phoen. 838; Aoyos ^ttulvos,
Plat. Phaedr. 260, b.
—
24 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
"EAXtjv for 'EXAtji'i/cos is often found, e.g. oX "EAXt^ves

TreATao-rat, Xen. ^n. vi. 5. 26. EuR, Ker. 130, o-ToA^v
'EAAT^va.
Kai fg Tupavvov o-yr\\t! tyinv. SoPH. Ant. 1169.
(3) When
there are several attributives to one Substantive
the adjectives may be added one after another without con-
junctions (Asyndeton).
dAAa 86paTa etôv rrayêa, fiaKpd, ocra dvrjp av <pepoL /xoAis.
Xen. An. v. 4. 24.
They had other spears, stout, long, such as a man could with
difficulty carry.
Kai, however, often joins two adjectives, especially ttoXvs

with another adjective, where in English we omit the con-
junction, as one combined notion is formed TroAAa koI âAcTra, :
TToAAa /cat Setva, many difficult things, many dangers ; dyadol Kal
TraXaiol voixoderai, good lawgivers of old, Plat. Fro. 326. Cf.
KttAos Kayaôs (KaXoKayaOos), an aristocrat (in a political sense),
a perfect character (in a moral sense).
(4) An adjective or participle may agree with the sense rather

than the form of the word.
S) Trepicrcra Tifirjdels tekvov. EuR. Tro. 735.
Oh son, honoured exceedingly.
TO. fieipaKiaTTpos dAAÂovs 8iaXey6p.€V0i. Pl. Lach. 180.

The lads conversing together.
Cf. DeM. 21. 117, KejtaXri, e^cXrjXvdws. Is. 6. 49, c^w-ews, os.
§ 34. Peculiarities of Apposition.
1. Partitive Apposition (or ^XW°^ '^°-^' ^'^°^' '^'^'

F-^PV^ J-®- ^'^
igure, or construction, of the whole and its parts).
In this construction the whole comes first, and afterwards in
apposition with are its parts.
it The noun which contains the
whole should be in the genitive, but it is desirable
strictly
at once to state it as the Subject or the Object of the sentence.
[The really logical construction with the whole in the
Genitive is seen here
Twv TToAeojv at jxev Tvpavvovvrai, 01 Sc Sr^/iOK/JaTOuvrai, at Sc
dpuTTOKpaTovvrai. PlAT. Hep. 338.
Of states, some are despotic, others democratic, others aristo-
cratic.]
" \
—
:
PECULIARITIES OF APPOSITION. 25
\vrKai al fiev xprjo-rai etViv, at Se Ka/cai. Plat. Gorg. 499.

With regard to pains, some are good, others bad.
ovToc aAAos aAAa Aeyct. Xen. Anob. ii, 1. 15.
These men say some one thing, some another.
TTOXTiv epyov Tt CKacTTW TrpocTTeTaKTai. PlAT. Rep. 406.
To all and each some task is appointed.
Kad-qfied' aKpo)v eK Trdyiav . . .
cye/OTt Ktvtijv avSp dvrjp kirippodoLS

KaKouTiv. Soph, A7it. 411.
We were seated on the hill-top . . .
eagerly provoking each his fellow with bandied threats.
With a singular whole Aeyerat: — ^x^ 17 //ev vovv e^ftv, -q Se

avoiav. Plat. Phaedr. 93.
2.A Substantive (with adjuncts) either in the Nominative
or Accusative may be in apposition to the verbal action. This
is known as the Nominative or Accusative in Apposition to
the Sentence.
KCivrat Treaoi'Tes, Trto-Tts ov a-p-LKpa. ttoAci. Eur. Bhes. 415.
(Some) have fallen and lie buried, no slight proof of loyalty
to the realm.
ev8aipx)V0Lrjs, fiurdbv rjSicTTWv Aoycov. EUR. El, 231.
Blest be thou, the reward of sweetest tidings.
The stock example is
EUR. Or. 1098.

'EAevT^v KTavoj/iev, Mevekei^ XvTn]v TriKpav.
Let us slay Helen, sharp pain to Menelaus (i.e the death of
Helen will be a cruel blow to Menelaus).
3. A substantive is very often found in apposition to a pre-
ceding pronoun, or pronominal phrase, which draws attention
to what follows. Certain idioms of this kind are of the
commonest occurrence
(a) TovTo, €Kelvo, auTo Towo, avTo preceding a substantive.
eKctvo KepSaiveiv -qyeiTai., rrjv lySovr^v. PlAT. Bep, 606.
This it regards as gain (namely) pleasure.
TOVTO ye avTO, rj ev/BovXia. PlaT. Bep. 428.
This particular quality, prudence.
In the same way must be explained the usage of aAAo n,
p.kv, iva ti, and many other expressions of
Taur' apa, tovto
constant recurrence m Plato.
26 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE.
Some constantly recurring Platonic phrases with avro.

ai'To StKtttocnjvTj, ideal justice, ov justice in the abstract; avro
[iiye6o<s, abstract greatness as opposed to to ev -^jxlv
fieyeOos, concrete greatness.
(b) The numerals, ev, 8vo, r/ota, Bvoiv d6.re.pov (one of two),
SvoLv Tot erepa, Svolv Set Odrepov (one of two things is necessary).
SvoLV Sel ddrepov, rj TrpoiTeveiv r] dvyptjcrOai. Is. 6. 89.

One of two things we must do, either be first, w perish.
(c) TO Xeyofievov (quod dicunt, quod dicitur), as the saying is ;
TO T-zJs TrapoifjLLas (quod aiunt), according to the proverb ; /cc^dAatov
(denique, ad summam) to sum up : a-qp-dov 5e, r€Kp.ripiov ^, as
an intiance, in proof Qf this ; and many others.
TO Acyo/xevov, k6.tottiv t^s koprrjs -qKOfxev. PlAT. Gorg. 477.
JFe are come too late fm- the feast, as the saying is.
'A6r}vaioL 7T€pl So^rjs /xaXXov icnrovSaôv i} Trept -^py^fidTtav.
reKfirjpLOV Se" y^p-qjxaTa yap TrXelcrra VTrep ^lAoTi/xias

dvjXoxrav. DeM. 20. 10.
The Athenians used to care more for reputation than money.
As a proof of this assertion, tliey spent vast sums of money
for a noble ambition.
(4.) is found in apposition to a genitive

Sometimes a genitive
which implied in a possessive pronoun or adjective e.g. to.
is :
vfikrepa ain-tov for Tct vfjLwv avTwv, 6 I/aos tou raXaLTrdpov (Bios,
the life of me, wretcJied one, tov TaXanrwpov agreeing with an
e/jLov implied in ifios.
S) dpuTTe dvSpwv, 'A^rjvatos wi', —oAews rqs fJieyicrTrjs, etc.

(-oAeus in apposition to 'AOi^voyv implied in 'Adi^vaios).
Plat. Ap. xviii.
My excellent friend, you an Athenian, a citizen of the greatest
city, etc.
Aesch.. Pers. 162, where a genitive and a possessive are

Cf.
combined.
:
CHAPTER II.
s-
THE ARTICLE.
§ 35* Origin and Development of the Article.
'0, >/, TO (as well as 6s, t), 6) was originally a demonstrative.
Besides being a demonstrative it supplied the place of the
third personal pronoun, the relative, and the definite article.
The first point to bear in mind about 6, rj, to, is its
essentially demonstrative character,
c In Homer 6, i), to is a demonstrative, both substantive and
adjective
(a) Substantive : t(ov vvv fiiv /xi'-qcracra, of those things now

putting him in mind.
(b) Adjective : cf)6icreL ere TO o-ov fj-kvos, that thy courage

u'ill mar thee.
It also takes the place of the third personal pronoun.
ov Xvcrw, but that one (her) / will not free.

Trjv B' eyo)
Tou Se kXv€ ôiôs 'AttoXXcov, and Plioebus Apollo heard
that one (him).
It also does the work of the relative.

avaxTt, Tov qvKofj.o'i TeKc Arjrw, to the king, whom fail-
haired Leto bare.
The following examples show the transition in Homer from

the demonstrative to the definite article.
6 5' e/3pa)(e ;^dAKeos "Apvys.
And he, brazen Ares, roared.
Here the noun is in apposition to the demonstrative o.
avrap o Toto"6 -yeptuv oSov rjyofjiovevev.

But he, the old man (or the old man), was leading the vjay
aXX OT€ 8r) TTjV injcrov dcftiKero.
But when novj he came to that {the) island.
TO re o-êvos 'fiptcuvos.
And the might of Orion.
—
28 THE ARTICLE.
So 01 aXkoi, the rest; rd t" lovra ra r co-dueva, the present

and the future.
The examples show that the use of 6, 77, to as the
last
definite articleis to be found as early as Homer.
It must be borne in mind however that such a use of

o, 1), TO in Homer is exceptional According to old Greek
(Homeric) use, nouns stand without the article as in Latin.
SeLvr] 8e KXayyrj yevcT' dpyvpeoLO /3toto.
And terrible arose the twang of the silver bow.
In Attic Greek prose 77 nXayy-q, rod fSiolo would be required.

To sum up therefore
(a) OS, rj, o, originally demonstrative, became the relative
(with occasional traces in Attic of its older use).
(b) 6, rj,TO, originally demonstrative, became the definite
article (though instances occur in Attic of its use as a demon-
strative and as a relative).
(c) ovTos, oSe, Ik€ivos took the place of o, 7}, to, as demon-
stratives in Attic. The third personal pronoun was in Attic
expressed by
(d) the oblique cases of avrds and (when necessary) in the
nominative by the demonstratives.
Obs. The origin and development of the definite article
from the demonstrative may be illustrated by English, German,
and French.
Thus in English the relatives who, what, which were
originally interrogatives only. The demonstrative still is
constantly used by us as a relative, e.g. I know the person that
you speak of.
In German der is still demonstrative, definite article, and
relative.
In French the personal pronoun il and the definite article
le both come from the demonstrative Ule.
§ 36. Survivals of the older usages of 6, 17, to, and

09, 17, o, in Attic Greek.
I. 6, 77, TO as a demonstrative :
With fiev and Se, d, 77, Td is freely used in all its cases,
d /xev — d 8e, the One, the others ol //.kv —
01 Si, some, others ; with
— :
THE ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK. 29
Tis, o [kkv Tts — to (to) Se, to Se ti, partly ;

6 hk; TO (ra) /tcv
ry fxev — ry way, that way ; to 8e, whereas ; toi' Kal tov,
8e, this
this one and that one ; to koI to, //iw and that.
to koi to n-oiTjcrai Kat to jxy Troirjcrat.
eSet ya/j DeM. 9. 68.
JFe ought to have done this and that, arid not to have done
the other.
Cf.Soph. Ant. 557.

Observe the constant use of o (ot) jj.kv at the beginning of
a sentence, instead of repeating the noun.
'Ivapws ' Adrjvaiovs eirr^ydyeTO. ol 8e yXdov. ThUC. i. 101.
Inarus invited the Athenians. So they came.
II. o, rj, TO as a personal pronoun (a rare use).
TOV KcAevcrat Sovvai (Xeyerai).
/cat XeN. Cyr. i. 3. 9.
And it is said that he ordered.

Cf. Soph. Ant. 1199.
III. As a relative (a not uncommon use in the tragedians).
SiTrAy jMoxTTiyt t))v "ApTjs e^tAet. AeSCH. Ag. 642.
With the twofold scourge that Ares loves.
IV. OS, 17, o used as a personal pronoun with Kai.

ovSeis d^TeAeye* koI os i^yeiTO. XeN.
iVb one opposed, and so he acted as guide.
It is rare, except in the common phrase rj S' os.
eoTTi Tis, e(f)i]v eyw ; irdw ye, rj 8' os. PlAT. Ap. iv.
Is tJiere any one ? said I. Certainly, said he.
THE ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK.

§ 37* "^^^ points must be remembered
1. The Article is essentially demonstrative.
2. The old usage was to omit the Article with definite

objects (see § 35). This old usage survived in many
instances, and hence to a great extent the fluctuating use
of the Article in Attic.
The Article corresponds generally to the English

definite article the. It marks off objects as known and
definite whether (A) individuals or (B) classes.
— ; — ; ;
THE ARTICLE.
(A) The Article denotes individual persons or things

which are definite, because
(a) Already known
(6) Already mentioned
(c) Distinguished from other objects, often by some
accompanying description
(a) rwv eTTTa aocfxoraro'i ^v IloXcov. Plat.

Of the seven sages Solon was the wisest.
(6) BovXevo/jLev 6eo2<; b re ttot eLotv ol deot. ElTEIP.

We are slaves to gods, vjhate'er these gods may he.
(c) o 7rp€a^VTepo6<i.
The elder brother.
7] TToXt? r]V TToXtOpKOVfieV.

The city which we are investing.
eXaôv T^9 îjov7]<i tov 'OpoPTr]v. XeN.

They seized Orontes hy the girdle.
This last example shows how the Article is used where

in English we employ a possessive pronoun.
e/cao-TO? Twv Br]/j,Lovp<ycov ttjv re'^vrju KaX(o<;
eêtpya^6T0. Plat.
Each one of the artisans (just mentioTied) used to
practise his art well.
Ohs. The EngHsh article the was so used for the poSv«essive
in old English. See Bacon's Advancement of Learning^ ed.
Wright ; Glossary The.
(B) The Article denotes the whole of a class, with

substantives or adjectives, in singular or plural.
o priTOip, the (professional) speaker ; ol linreU, tJie
knights; ol coôl avZpe<i, wise men; 6 <f)p6vifjL0<i,
the pmdent man ; ol irovrjpol, had men.

THE ARTICLE WITH PARTICIPLES. 31
o 7rai9 TrdvTcov Orjpiwv SvaijLeTWxeipKTTOTaTov.

Plat. Zav/^
A hoy {i.e. hoys) is of all creatures the most difficult to ZO^l^
manage.
§ 38. The Article with Participles.
The article used in this way with a participle has the force
of a genei'al statement, e.g. o any one who wishes
/3ovX6{m€vo<;,
(quicunque mlt) ; 6 rvxî', any cJmnce comer or person.
a.Tav9' 6 Tov ^rjTOvvTO'5 evpicTKet ttovos.

The toil of one who seeketh findeth all
It is synonymous with the use of jras 6 (with adjective or

participle).
Tras 6 fLT] (fipovwv aXccrKerai.. MeN. 714<

Every one who does not think is exposed.
I § 39* The Article with Numerals.
The article may be used with cardinal numerals either to

mark a definite whole, or the definite parts of a whole, e.g. ra
8vo fikp-q, two-thirds (cf. Thuc. i. 10 and iii. 15); a/x<^t tous
eiKoo-t, about twenty in all.
Twv ^racrcjv Tpi-qpwv ras SiaKOcrias rj ttoAis TrapeaêTO.

The state furnished two hundred of the whole number of ships.
§ 40; Fluctuating use and omission of the Article.

Either (a) The ancient usage has sur\-ived when the use of
the article had not become established.
Or {h) The word is sufficiently definite by itseK from
familiar reference, so that it does not need
the article.
Or (c) The article is omitted because the vague and
general conception of a word, the mere idea
of a thing, is entertained apart from its mani-
festation in a person or event, or its relation
to persons, things, and facts.
The equally fluctuating use of the article in English will go

far to explain and illustrate the Greek usage.
: ;
32 THE ARTICLE.
§ 41. The Article with Objects of external nature.
6 ovpavos, y\ yrj, 6 tjXlos, tj ddXacra-a, 6 tuKeavos. But also

ovpavos, yrj, WKcavos.
So €7rt daXoLTTy, on sea (sur mer) ; v8o}p e^ ovpavoi;, rain from
heaven; -jrepl i)Aiov Sva-fids, at sunset.
§ 42, The Article with Material objects.

TO ydXa, 6 xP^ôSy also ydXa, xpvo'o<s {Ka6aipf.iv xpvaov, PlAT.
Polit. 303).
§ 43* The Article with Familiar places, things,

and persons.
Here the article is generally omitted according to ancient
usage.
CK TToAews, Trpos da-rv, to toion (but also tt/oos to oo-td) ; e^w
'I(r6[xov (and ev tw 'IcrOfMco), iv aKpoiroXei.
aTTo 8e^tas, e^ dpicTTepas, ou the right, on the left; dp^^fi^
TcAevT;/, evpo^, fxrJKOs, fSddos, p,rJK0S, /xeyedos, v\j/os.
Many military phrases

the right (spearwards) ; em or Trap' dcnrtSa, to the
€7rt 8d/Dv, to
left (shieldwards) ; em TroSa, backwards, facing the enemy. So

crrpaTos, crTpdrevp-a, crrpaTOTreSov, Kepas evwyvp-ov, Se^tov, left
wing, right wing.
(Saa-iXevs is the (Persian) king; /SacnXevs 6 fieyas, ol
TTpoyovoi, ol (3a<TiXews. So TrpvrdveLs, the Presidents of the
Council.
§ 44. The Article with Abstract and other words.

Here the use is very fluctuating.
ri dpeT-q, virtue ; rj dvSpeta, courage ; 17 StKatocrvvT], justice
y] (rwcf)po(rvvr], temperance; r] eineiKeia, equity.
But terms often occur without the article.

abstract
Remark above especially applies. In the same section in
(c)
Plat. Hep. i. 354. we have

ovScttot' dpa XvcnreXea-Tepov aStKta SiKaiocrvvrjs,
Never, therefore, is injustice more profitable than justice,
and
Xv(TLreXk(TTepov dpa -q dSiKia t^s Si/catocrvvj^S.
:
WITH PROPER NAMES. 33
§ 45. The Article with Concrete Words.

So with concrete wards, the article being omitted either
because of the mere idea of the thing or its famiharity o-w/xa, :
^Xli bodij, soul ; 6'eds, God {no special divinity) ; av^pw-os,

rrum ; iralSe^ Kot yvvat/ces, loomen and children ; Trarpi^, father-
land ; TToAts, state or country.
§ 46. The Article with names of Arts, etc.

Names of arts, trades, and sciences do not take the article
fiovcriKT], yvfivacTTLK'q, education, mental and physiml ;
p7]TopiK-q, rhetoric ; apidix-qTiK-q, Aoytcr/zot, arithmetic,
numeration.
Similarly, 8oâ, voGs, rkxvr], v6/xos, opinion, mind, art, laiv.
§ 47» The Article with Proper names of persons

and places.
Names of persons and towns do not require the article unless
previously mentioned, or spoken of as well known.
'SiOiKpa.T-qs, but 6 '^lOKpa.Trjs, either Socrates already men-
tioned, or the well-known Socrates, Socrates ille. So Q-7](3aL,
at idrjfSai, 'AAeâvSos o MaKcScuv, 'AAeâvSpos 6 îXirrTTov,
Alexander son of Philip. Also in short business-like notices,
'ZoiKpa.Trj'i 'Euicftpovia-Kov, Socrates, son of Sophroniscus,
The same rule apphes to names of nations, but ol 'EAAtJvcs

always when opposed to ot Bdp/Sapoi. AV hen nationalities are
opposed (as we say " French and English ") the article is not
\ised,e.g. 'KdqvaloL, AaKeSaifiovLoi (so repeatedly in Thucydides).
ot ArjuocrdeveLs, orators like Demosthenes (as we say, our
Burkes, our Chathams).
§ 48. The Article with Geographical names.

With geographical names the use and position of the article
are extremely fluctuating. The following collocations are
generally given as the rule, and may safely be employed.
o Evt^parrjs Trora/jLos, the river Eupthrates ; ro Sowiov aKpov, the
promontory of Suniuni ; rj Qecnrpoirh yrj, the land of Thresprotis ;
q ArjXos vô-os, the island of Delos ; -q MevSi] ttoAis, the city of
Mende.
; ; :
34 THE ARTICLE
But the following are given as a caution against dogmatism

iroTafios 6 EiJc^paTr^s, "AAus TTOTafios. ThUC.
TO AiyaXecov opos (the hill of Aegoleum) ; Ila/Dvrjs to o/aos,
rj AcTVYj TO OpOS, TO OpOS "^ 'I(TT(l)Vr], TO OpOS T^S 'IcTTWVTJS, IIlVSoS
opos (all in Thucydides).
So rj TrjOvs TO ovofj-a, to ovop.a ot Saifioves (PlATO) ; ovo/mi
ZdyKXr], ThUC.
Cf. i) BovXi] ol TreiraKoo-tot, the CouncU of the Five Huvdred.
Thuc. viii. 86.
Note. The preposition seems to exercise an influence on the
omission of the article. Thus Itti a-K-qvi'iv yea-av, Xen. An.
vi. 4. 19. Itti fiXafS-Q Trj% ttoAcw?, ThUC. viii. 72. Trepi aplcnov
wpav, Tbtuc. vii. 81. ev apxi? '''o^ A6yoi», Dem. 37. 28.
§49. THE NOUN-MAKING POWER OF THE

ARTICLE.
The Article, when prefixed to any word or set of words,
makes a nouu of the word or words thus brought within
its grasp.
(a) Adjectives
ot aâOot, good men, to djaddv, the highest good,
summum bonum.
01 TToXXoL, the popular party, populares.
01 oXiyoi, the oligarchical party, optimates, optimus quisque.
(h) Participles;
ol ôvXofievot, all who will, quicunque vult ; ol Trpcorci
cpx^H'^vot, first- comers.

Observe the indefinite force which the Article gives to
a Participle.
(c) Preposition and case ;
ol eiTc Tcov Trpayfiarcov, the government.

Toi €ts Tov ToXejxov, preparations for war.
II
1 TO. €<^' Tj/Aiv, what is in our power.
(d) Genitive
TO, TYj^ Tv-)(r]^, the dispensations of fortune ; ra rrj^
— ;
NOUN-MAKING POWER OF ARTICLE. 35
TToXeox; (without Trpdy/jiaTa), the affairs of the state,

politics.
TO Tov Qe/xicnoKXeovs, the words of Themistocles, Thcmis-

toclis illud.
(e) Infinitives;
TO fii(T€Lv, hatred ; to ra^v \a\elv, rapid talJcing
{tov Ta')(y Xdkelv, etc.).
So with a sentence, to e/xe tovto irpaâi.
(/) Adverbs;
ol evdaZe, the living ; ol eKei, the dead ; 01 TraXat, the
ancients, 01 tots, ol vvv, ol olkoi = ot ev ocKm tot€.

r] TrapavTiKa rjSovi], momentary pleasure; 17 dyav iXevdepia,
excessive liberty.
Note 1. So with a word or even a letter used materialiter,

TO eyw, the word I (similarly in French — le moi est haissable)
Tu aX<f)a (Plat. Crat. 405), the letter Alpha.
vpeis, <S avS/oes 'A^>;vatoi. to 8' v/xets oTav et-w ttjv ttoKly
Xkyio. DEiL 255. 4.
You, Athenians, and ivhenever I say you, I mean the state.
VTrepefSr] to Kal eav dXi^ cf)6vov. DEiL 23. 220.

He omitted the words, " and if he he convicted of murder."
TO yv(t)dt (ravTov iravraôv 'cttl )(^prjcripov.
Menander, Ft. 730.

The adage, know thyself, is useful ever.
Note 2. Instead of repeating a noun it is enough to repeat

the Article.
06Twv ttoXitQv TratSes ko.l ol twv dXXwv (sc. 7rat5es).
The children of the citizens and those of the others.
Note 3. When two or more terms are joined so closely
together as to form one notion, or when they may be brought
under one head the article is put only once.
ot a-TpaTr]yol Kal Xo)(a.yot.
The chief officers, namely generals and captains of companies.
6 17X105 Kal a-eXrjvT) Kal axjTpa.
Tne heavenly bodies, sun, moon, and stairs.
36 THE ARTICLE.
% 50. THE ARTICLE DISTINGUISHES THE

SUBJECT FROM THE PREDICATE.
The Subject takes the Article, the Predicate is without
the Article.
6 yLtey BlKaLO<i evBaificov, 6 B aBiKO<i adXto'i. Plat.

The just man is happy, the unjust man is miserable.
This function of the Article belongs to it in conse-

quence of its demonstrative character. All demonstratives
mark the Subject.
ev Tlep(7aL<i v6fio<; eariv ovTo<i.

Among the Persians this is law (this Subject, law
Predicate).
Kivr](Tis yo.p avTT] jxeyia-Tri Si) Tois "EAAtjo-ii' eyerero.

Thuc. i. 1.
For this proved to be quite the greatest movement in the Greek

world.
The Subject and Predicate, in whatever case they are,

can always be detected immediately by the presence of
the Article or Demonstrative with the Subject,
o Xoyov; 'êvSec<; Xeyei.

iJidvTi<s rov<i
The words which the seer speaks are false.
T0U9 X070U9, Subject ; yp-evBeU, Predicate.
TavTT) (Subject) atrokoyLct (Predicate) îJTau

He makes use of this as an excuse,
T0U9 Be Xo7oi'9 fjuaKporepovi firjKvvovfiev. Thuc. iv. 1 7.
We will extend our speech to a greater length.

Ohs. "With a Superlative Predicate in English we use the
Article where Greek does not.
ovTOt elan TrovqporaTOi dvdpioTrcDV.
These are the most tvorthless of manUnd.
POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 37
§ 51. The Article with the Predicate.
Sometimes the Predicate itself is definite, or denotes a class,

and in this case takes the Article.
ouTot 01 Setvoi cio-6 p.ov KaTi'jyopoi. PlAT. Apol. ii.
These are tliose {really) formidable accusers of mine.
§52. POSITION OF THE ARTICLE.

A. THE PRE DieA TIVE POSITION.
B. THE ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION.
A. The Predicative Position. An Adjective or Par-
ticiple placed outside the Article and its Xoun, whether
before or after, is a. Predicate.
ao(f)o<; 6 avrjp ^
or
I'
the man is wise.
6 avTjp ao(f)o<i J
B. Tlie Attributive Position. Any word or set of words

placed either between the Article and the Noun, or
(a)
(5) after the Noun, with the Article repeated, is an Attri-

butive.
6 croô? avrip, the vAse man.
avrjp cro(^09, do.
The first form is the most natural, and the most common.
In the second form the attributive is often used as a further
explanation.
TO rel-)(o<i TTepielXov to Kaivov. Thuc.
The^ dismantled the wall, the new one I mean.
Any word or set of words thus placed becomes attri-

butive to the Noun.
6 iravv nepiKX7]<;. Xen. Mem. iii. 5. 1 (cf. Thuc. viii
and 89.)
1
The consummate Pericles.

—
38 THE ARTICLE.
r] TrapavTtKa tjoovt].
Mo7nentary pleasure.
rj ar/av eXevOepia.
Excessive liberty.
al avev Xvirwv rjSovau

Painless pleasure.
TO TeL')(o<i TO irapa rov TroTa/xov.

The wall alongside the river (the river wall).
6 iravTcov KaX\.taTO<; kuc iraat <f)L\TaTo<i avifp.

The ha'jidsoinest and hest-heloved man in the vjorld.
Note 1. This attributive or epithet-making power of the

Article is shoAvn by the following examples :
ot op-oXoyov/xevios SovX.ol. DkM. 29. 39.

Those who confessedly are slaves.
TO, rrjs TMV TToXXQv 4''"X^'^ o/j-ixara. PlAT. Soph. 254.

The eyes of the soul of the many.
ôXwv kixia-î Tovs oibs oStos dvdpunrovs. DeJL 19. 254.
Solon used to hate men such as this person.
Iv Tw Trplv /cat yevecrOai rjpa<5 ;(pova). PlAT. Phaed. 88 a.
In tlie time hefwfc loe came into being at all.
Note 2. When
such collocations as the following are found,
— rj aKpaTos, the Substantive, without
avOpoiiroi 01 Tore, dSi/cta
the Article, is generally first used in an indefinite way and
therefore without the Article; the Attributive follows with
the Article as an explanation.
a-KeiTTiov TTUJS TTOTe aKparos SiKatocrvvr)
i-j tt/dos dSiKtav rrjv
aKpaTOV e'xet. Pl- Pep. viii. 535.
We must consider how pure justice is related to an injustice
which is pure (sheer, unmixed).
Note 3. A Predicate may occur inside an attributive phrase,
at a/DicTTat SoKovcrat c'vat (ftvcrecs. XeN, Ap. 4. 1. 3.
Those natures ichich appear to be the best, or which appear to

be the best natures.
— ——
FORMS USED WITH GENITIVE. 39
So especially with 6 Aeyo/xei'os, dvo/iaô/tevos, KaAoi'/xevos.

TO KoTuAatov dvoyMa^d/Acvov d/oos. AeSCHIN. 3. 86.
T^ hill of Cotylaeum as it is called. Mons Cotylaeus qui

dicitur.
And regularly ol 'AOrjvalot KaXovfievoi.
§53. WHEN A GENITIVE FOLLOWS, SEVERAL

FORMS ARE USED.
; , , C , }• Tlie commonest forms.

2. 77 ot/cta Tou 7raTpo<;. )
3. 7^ ot/c/a 7} ToO Trarpd^. Less common.

r This form is used when the
V , , , 1 Genitive has been used
4. TOV Trarpo'i
^ 77 oiKoa. ^ •
^ n.
•
1
j
just berore, or is empha-
[ sised.
In accordance with the last position, rod xwpLov 1) aTropia,

ThTJC. iv. 29 ; irepl tov pia-dov ttJs aTroSdcrews. ThUC. viii. 85.
Note. Where there are two or more Attributives, some one

or other of the above arrangements is employed.
(a) According to the first position
Aesch. 2. 74.
(b) According to the third position, which renders the

Attributes more distinct
1^ (rep.vq avrrj Kal OavpacTTr) rj tt^s T/jayojSt'as Troiqais.
Plat. Gorg. 502.
One Attributive, however, is often put after the Article and

Substantive.
Tot iK T/J? 'lacrou /xeyciAa ^^p-qpaTa ^lapiraa-QkvTa,
Thug. viii. 30.
d KaTetA7y<^ws KtvSui'os t^]v ttoXiv. DeM. 18. 220.
at TToAAa jSpovTttt 8taTeA€?s. SoPH. O.C. 1513.

40 THE ARTICLE.
§ 54. THE PREDICA TIVE POSITION IS USED B Y

(a) 01/T09, oSe, e/ceti/09.
0VT09 o ai'Tjp ^
or
J-
this man.
avi]p ovTO^, J
rioe 1) '7r6\i<; ^
or y this state.
\ \ / 5 /
Kara T01/9 vo/xovi eicHvov^ '\
or y according to these laws.
/car eK6ivov<; Tov Tw %e^pe, hath hands.

€77 aix(ôrepoL<; tol<; \Lfjbeai, off both harbours.
Note. Where there is an Adjective also the usage varies.
71 crrevf) avrr] 080s. XeN. Aliob. iv. 2. 6.
This narrow way.

But eKdvr)ri v^XoraTi] -Aaravos. PlAT. Phoed. 229.
That most lofty plane.
(c) eKaara is variable.
€v efcaarr} rrj TroXei tear a ti)v i]/jLepav eKuarrjv
or ev eKacrrrj iroXei. or Kud rjfiepav eKaaTT]v.

In each state. Day by day.
Note. The Demonstratives, especially o8e, are often used in

the iôets without the Article.
yvi at/cos Tô-8e. AeSCH. Ag. 1438.
^vv Tfjce xe/3i. SoPH. Antig. 43.
And also in their deictic use.
KpLTOiv KpiTojSovXov TovSe 7raTi]p. Plat. Aiml. xxii

Crito, father of Critobultis, here (in court).
;
THE ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION. \\
§ 55, THE ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION IS USED BY

(a) roLovTo^, Toto9Se.
tj TocavTTj kinaTriixr}, such knowledge.

ev Trj TocaBe dvayKr], in such a difficulty.
Note, o ToiovTos, smh a person ; ev t^> toiotjtco, in such a case.

The Article used with ttoios
is also so : ttjs Trotas /xepiSos
DeM. 246, 10, of what division? OeXw a-oi ttJs ywatKos epya
Si-q-^rja-aa-dai,. to. Trota Xen. Oec. X.
; 1, I want to describe to
you the deeds of the woman. What deeds ?
So o TotouTOs, 6 TotosSe : o ttjAikoijtos, 6 T7//\tKosSe : o

TOfTOVTos, 6 TocrosSe : e.g. 6 tolovtos o-v-qp, such a man ; Xa(3k to
Totoi'Se, Plat. Phil. 29, take a case of this kind.
(J))
Fossessives, efjio';, cr6<;, rjîrepo'^, v/Merepc^, (T(f)eTepo<i.
6 e/i09 Sov\o(; or 6 Bov\6<i fiov (fxav 6 80OX.09 when

My slave, servus mens. [words have preceded).
o rjiJLeT€p6<i irariqp or 6 Trarrjp ^fimv (oj/icoj; TraTrjp).
Pater noster.
Note, e/ios 8ovXo<s, a slave of mine, one of my slaves, imus ex

servis meis.
For the position, //ou o SouAos, see Arist. Ach. 12, Neph.
1368, Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 2, Andok. (Ze Myst. 50. os c'xet o-ou
Ti)v dSeAt^vyv, t«;Ao is married to your sister.
(c) Reflexives.
efiavTov irarrip, my own father.

ocra St) Se8rjyfxaL ti]V ifxavTov KapSiav. ArIST. Ach. 1.
iToi^; oft have I fretted this heart of mine.
Cf. Andok. de Bedit. 10.
§ 56. Words which vary their meaning according

to the position of the Article.
(a) Tras and 6'Aos.
o TTus xpoi'os = eternity. Apol. xxxii.

42 THE ARTICLE.
1. TToo-a TToAts, every state (but in plural, ttui/tcs avOpwiroi,

all men).
2. TToura 7; — dA.ts, fl/^ the state.
3. i} Tracra ttoXls, the whole state, the state as a whole.

6 Tras dpLOfLos, the sum total.
There seems to be uo appreciable difiference between 2

and 3.
4. Tot Travra {xepr}, all the parts together.
5. Tous TravTtts Sto-xtAtovs, two thousand in all, or all told.
|i>/i.-avTes eTTTaKocrtoi oTrAtTat, seven hundred heavy-armed

all told.
6. €v TToo-g TToAe/xip StKeAt^, iTi Sicily altogether hostile.
7. Xvrry Tras lATjAarat KOKy, SOPH. î. 275 (cf. H. xi. 65),
^6 is altogether harassed {all vexed) with ill grief.
° ^,1 "°,/^' \ the whole state.

rj TTOAtS OAT^, J
^0 7/ ,.0^ ts,
»
^^^ M;A^;e state, the state as a whole.
Tj TTOAtS 7; oAl/, j
oAj^ TToAt?, a wôZe state. oAat TroAets, tr^Ze sto/es.
(h) fJ.ea-Q'i. aKpos, eo-\aTOS.
7} fxea-q dyopd, the central market.

p.ka-r] 7} dyopd, the centre of the market.
Forum medium for both in Latin.
£7r' a.Kpoi% Tots KwAois, a^ <Ae extremities of the limbs.
6 a/cpos 7roXiTi]s, the perfect (tip-top) citizen. Donaldson.
7} ea-xdri] v?](tos, the furthest island,
^crxdrrj -q vrjaos, tlie end {or verge) of the island.
(c) auTos.
avTos 6 dvTi]p, the man himself, ipse vir.

6 avTos dvqp, the same man, idem vir.
Note. ttTTttS, cri'/XTras, all, the whole ; a-vp-iraa-a ttoAis, dperij, the
as a whole, or the vjhole of, etc. (-as is sometimes so
state, virtue
used in poetry). Observe the predicative use of ttSs —
ov -dv dyaOov rjSovi'] i(rTL. PlAT. PhU. 27. 28.
Pleaswre is not altogetlier a blessing.
—
OBLIQUE OR DEPENDENT PREDICATES. 43
§ 57* Oblique or Dependent Predicates.

All Oblique or Dependent Predicate is simply a Predicate
which is not in the Xominative case, but in the Genitive,
Dative, or Accusative, most often in the Accusative.
This is an exceedingly common construction in Greek, and
one which has to be rendered in many different ways into
English. The essential point to notice is that the Predicate,
in whatever case, is the really important statement, or
emphatic word.
The simplest case is where the Accusative is used with
Transitive Verbs of making, naming, appointing, deeming,
etc.
01 KoAaK-es 'AAeâv5/D0v êov cjvd/za(ôv.
Flatterers used to call Alexander a god.
ot Ilepcrai rov Krpov eiXovro jSaaiXea.

The Persians chose Cyrus Icing (to he ling).
b TOV T^TTW AoyOV KpeiTTO) TTOLWV, PlAT.

Who makes the ivorse reason (appear) the better.
§ ^8. Very often the Greek language exj^resses a

Prolepsi?
{i.e. an anticipation of the result) by this construction.

izapa(rKfv6xravTes lvTe.Xr\ iraxrav rrjv SvvafiLv.
Dem. Phil. 1. 9.
Providing all your force so that it shall he complete.

((ScTTe ivTeXrj eivai. Cf. ThUC. iv. 17, /xaKporepovs.)
Cf. Latin paullatimgue anirna calmrunt mollia saxa ( = ita ut

mollia fierent), Juv. i 83.
So av^dvta Ttva /leyav. Cf. AeSCH. Ch. 262, yueyav.

So StSacTKw Tiva i-77ea (sc. dvai), I teach one to he a horseman
§ 59. With the verb ex'^ ^J ^^ idiomatic usage, similar to

the French, the properties of persons or things are described
by this construction.
KttAors £X^' Tovs 6cf)6aX[J.ov^.
He has fine eyes, his eyes are fine.
n ales yeux beaux (so il a le front large, etc. etc.)
In such examples, ex'^ (^^ xpîp-ai with Dative) is merely

an alternative for the copulative verb dpi The use of habeo
—
44 THE ARTICLE.
in Latin is parallel; {e.g. cum haberet collegam in praetura

Sophoclem, Cio. Off. 1, vjken S. was his colleague in command).
TO crw/xa 6vr]Tov aTravres exoficv. ISOCR. PhU. 134.

We all have mortal bodies.
§ OO. Sometimes we must, in translating, make the Oblique

Predicate the real Predicate, turning the rest of the sentence
into a relative sentence, or using some such device.
d^LwcraTe 8cttovs fiov tous KaTqyopovs y^yovkvai.
Plat. Ajpol. ii.
Consider that my accusers who have appeared fall under two
heads.
ov yap e/iov ipw rbv Adyov, dW eis aîd^pewi' ifjilv tov

Xiyovra dvotcrw. PlaT. Apol. V.
Tlieuwds which I shall use are not mine: the speaker to
whom I shall refer you is trustworthy.
iKavov irapk-)(piiaL tov ndprvpa. PlAT. Apol. xvlii.

Competent is the witness whom Ipvduce.
ov yap fSdvavcrov ttjv T€)(yr]v eKTrjo-d/M-qv. SOPH. Ai. 1121.
Aij, for 'tis no mechanic art that I acquired. (Cf. Electra.)
Tovpyov ov fxaKpdv Aeyets. SOPH. Phil, 26.

The task thou settest is not far to seek.
§ OI. Very often, especially in the poets, oSe is the subject

to an Oblique Predicate. The Predicate is often an interro-
gative. We may often translate this demonstrative in Enghsh
by "here," "herein."
d— opo) ye TwSe ^vjx-e-XkypeOa êvw. EUR. Bacch. 800.
Truly an unmanageable stranger this we have come across.
(dTTo/oo) Predicate, T^Se Subject.)
TTotatcri ToA/xais TaisSe Kal ^pevwv dpacrei ; SOPH. Ai. 42.
With what hardihood and
boldness of soul ?
herein,
(TToiatcTL the Predicate, ralsSe the Subject.)
Cf. Ant. 1295, toSc Sevrepov. —

So, like the last
7roo"ov ciyei to (TTpdrevfia ;
How many battalions does he bring into the field ?
TauTy djroAoyi'^ XprJTat. DeM. 49. 63.

He makes this an excuse.
—
WITH GENITIVE AND DATIVE. 45
Many excellent instances of the Oblique Predicate occur in

Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 10. 11, 1. a. 2, Eerod. 1, 9, 11, 16, 18,
84, 93; Ant. 1178.
§ 62. Oblique Predicates are found in Latin, but they

can be detected only by the emphatic or artificial position
of a word.
Omnem crede diem tibi diluxisse supremum.

HOR. Ep. I. iv. 1.3.
Live every day as though thy last.
Compare the example below, § 65, dc^teo-av ttJv Sokov, with a

line in Propertius
Fidaque suggesta castra coronat humo. Peop. v. 4. 8.

He enrings a trusty camp by throwing up the soil.
§ 63. Oblique Predicates in the Genitive and Dative.

'qyoi'ixevoL avrovojxiav to irpwrov ^vjiiidyuiv. ThuC. i. 97.
At the head of allies who at first were independent.
rovTiav Ticri (^vXa^LV e^^pqro.
Some of these he was using as guards.
Cf. Soph. Antig. .556.
§ 64. Free use of the Oblique Predicate.

Sometimes it expresses a mere emphasis.
He cried with a loud voice.
Kttrai'TAô-as iroXvv tui/ Xoyov.

PlAT. Rrp. \. 344.
Having deluged us with a long sermon.
§ 65« Sometimes we shall have to translate more freely.
ttTr' 6p6r}<s Kal StKatas t/]s V^'X^l? "I'd Trdvra jjlol TreTrpaKrai.
Dial. 18. 298.
JVith uprightness and integrity of heart I have done all (in the
uprightness and integrity of my heart).
diîWav TTjv 80KOV xaXapals rais ctAvcreo-t. TnuC. ii. 76.
They were lowering the beam by loosening the chains (tcifh the
chains loosened).
46 THE ARTICLE.
§ 66. Idiomatic Phrases with the Article.

iroAAot, many, ol ttoXXoi, the many, the people. Populares.
TrAeoves, more, ol TrAeoves, the majority. Maior pars.
oXiyoi, few. party or faction. Opti-

ol oXtyoi, the oligarchical
mates, optimus quisque (also ol ayadoi, etc.)
aAAot, others. ol aXXoi, the others, the rest. Ceteri.
TO (to) vvv, to TTJfjLepov, the present ; to av-LKo., the present.
(o avTLKo. 4>6l3os), momentary terror ; 17 avpiov, the morrow.
TO /xeXXov, to CTretTa, the future ; 6 'iirura ftia (PlAT.), the

life to come.
TO AotTTov, Tot Xonrd, for the future, for the rest.
TO Trptv, TO Trdpos, to TrpocrOev, the past or former time

(chiefly poetical phrases) ; to dpxo-Lov, to TraAatov, of
old ; to, TrapeXOovTa, to. — apeArj AnôTa, the past (in prose).
TO TOTe, Iv Tw TOTc, at that time ; kv tw Trpo Tou, previously.
TO TrpioTov, at first; to TcAevTaiov, a^ last (so TO SevTepov,

TO rpLTOv).
TO, TToAAa, /or Âe most part (so to ttAcov, rd TrAeiw) ; TO
for the greatest part, or the chief point; rd
fieyLCTTov,
jxdXuTTa, in the highest degree ; ws ctti to ttoXv, for the
most part ; to Trdv, Is TO TTttv, on the whole.
rd rrjs Tux>?s, Fortune and her dealings (a periphrasis for
Tci TT^S TrdAecos, politics.
6 (01) Trdvv, the excellent, or famous; ol irdw rQv a-Tpanw-

rwv, the pick of the troops ; 6 rrdw HeptKXr]?, the admirable
Pericles.
fv Tois TrpwToi, first of all. Omnium primL

ii< Tov cTTt Odrepa, from the opposite direction; Ik rov €:r'
dpicTTepd, from the left.
ol Trepi, ol djK^'i, ol otto, Ik. See Prepositions,

—
CHAPTER III
PEONOUNS.
§67. PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

1st pers., /, v:e. e^w, fijieis.
2d pers., Thou, you. o-v, v|X€is.
( 1. Ik€ivos, ovtos, u-hen emphahc.

, rr 7 / 2. 6 jji€v— 6 Se, 01 )i€v,— 01 Se, a^
oCl pers., il6, S/lf!, *t, /7 ^
r/lcy. Jv
heginning of smtence.
\ 3. Oblique cases of avrds.
The personal pronouns in the nominative are not

generally used unless there is a contrast expressed or
implied, or more or less of an emphasis.
eirel Oavovra^ avTOêcp vfxa^ eyeo

eXova-a. SopH.
Seeing that u-hen ye died, with my ovni hands I
bathed you.
iyto (T(f) uTreipyco. SOPH.

I, even I, withhold him..
(TV Be fioi avTov<; Kokei. AndOK.

Clerk, summon the ivitnesses.
Note 1. — o-cê him, her, it, them (sing, and pi. accus.) is used
in tragedy.
vtv (Doric), Do., do.

IJLLv (Ionic), Do., do., but only as accus. sing.
Note 2. ifiov is more emphatic than fiov. "UTien the

pronoun is emphatic it is accented, e.r/. ffie Kal ere, not Ifie
— :
48 PRONOUNS.
§ 68. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

1st pers. my, mine, ours. ejws, T|ji.^T€pos.
2d pers, thy, thine, yours. <r6s, vixe'rcpos.
3d pers. his, her, its. Wanting in Attic.
The possessive of the 3d pers. 69 (eo?) is Epic : atpeTepo^

is reflexive (suus). The genitive of aino'i supplies the
possessive to the 3d person.
Besides the possessive pronouns there are the following
synonymous usages: — (1) the genitives /xov, aov, aurov:
(2) the reflexive genitives efxavTov, aeavTov, eavrov
(3) the Article.
Thus, for "I sent my slave," we may write
1. eirefi^lra top efiov Bovkov, or rev BoiiXov rou efiop.
2. eTre/jbÎra rov SovXov /xov.
3. 67re/A'v|ra rov e/juavTov BovXov, or rov BovXov top

efiavTOv.
4. CTre/ii/ra rov BovXov.
And so with the other persons, e.fj. eireixyê rov BoijXov

avTov.
After a preceding word the order may be -ijKeL fxov 6 8ovX.o%
my slave is come; e.g. aTroSeâcrde [jlov ti]v dirokoyiav, AntIPH.
Tetr. B. B. 2, listen to my defence.
Note 1. The personal pronoun is sometimes used for the

reflexive.
eyw viMois KeXevoi e/ê /At/ieicrât. XeN. Cl/r. viii. G. 13,

/ beg you to imitate me.
And as the subject of an Infinitive, with a reflexive object.

Set r)ixa<i iêrdcrai rjixd<s avrovs. PlAT. Gorg. 514, A.
JFe must examine ourselves.
And often in the plir^se : /jlol or e/xol Sokw (eSoâ).

) ;
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 49
Note, 2. The possessives are sometimes used for a genitive,

which is usually subjective, but occasionally objective. Thus
?) k^vr] errota ( »} =
eiVoia [xov), the good-will which I feel. But
also evvot^ -nj o-rj, from good-will towards thee : -q 8ia(3o\r) >) kfi-q,
the prejudice against me. Plat.
An adjective in the genitive may qualify a possessive
agreeing with the personal genitive implied in the possessive
Tafia 8v(TTTi]vov KaKo., the woes of me, wretched man, mea miseri
mala. Cf. Latin, mea ipsius culpa; nostros vidisti flentis
ocellos. Ov. Her. v. 43 ;
(cf. HoR. Sat. i. iv. 23).
§ 69. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.

1st pers. of myself, )
,
,
> cuavTov, Tjiiwv avTwv.
ourselves.
\
2d pers. of thyself, ]
- ( o-cavrov, <ravTov, vixuv avruv.
yourselves. \
3d pers. of Mm-, her-, °'<l>"v ovriv

\
^ 7^^^7 7 f
«avTOv, airrov \
aud
itself, of themselves. ) { eavruv.
Reciprocal pronoun : d\\T|X«v, of one another.
fiaXLara rrjv cravrov (ppoprjcrtv aaKei. ISAEUS.

Abave all things cultivate self-knowledge.
Ka& eavTov<; ôvXevcrafievoL ra onXa rrrapehoaav Kat,
(T(f)a<; avTOV<i. ThuC.

After deliberating apart by tliemselves, they surren-
dered their arms and themselves {their persons).
Note 1. The separation of the word in the singular makes

the expression stronger, especially if at-To's comes first, e.g.
avTov fxe.
Ktti Tovs TTatSas Tovs e/iovi ycr^^vve Kal kjis avTor v/Spicrev.
Lys. i. 4.
He disgraced my sons and outraged me myself.
avTos often strengthens the reflexives.
KaraXkXvKe ttjv avros avrov Swaa-Tetav. AesCHIN. 3. 233.
He destroyed A?> own power.
Ipse suas evertit opes.
D
—
PRONOUNS.
Note 2. A reflexive pronoun in a subordinate clause may

refer
1. To the subject of its own clause.
2. To the subject of the principal clause. When
so used it is called an Indirect Refiexive.
1. Kvpos TTouri Trapi'iyyeXXev KadicrTacrdai els rrjv
eavTOU rdîv Ikoxttov. XeN.

Cyrus was issuing orders to all that each man should
stand quietly in his own rank.
2. 6 n'pavvos vo/xiêt rovs TroAtras VTTr]p€.T€.lv lavrcp.
Plat.
The despot thinks that the citizens are his own
servants.
Note 3. As may also be used (1) the oblique

indirect reflexives
cases of ar-o's; (2) the datives ol, a-t^tVi (ov and e are very
rarely thus used: they are found chiefly in poetry, and in
poetical passages of Plato).
(1) oi'X e'êiv v/ias o,ti xPW^^^^ aurw vofilêi. DeM.

He thinks you won't know wJmt to do with him.
(2) t(^5; elvai dvSpdiroSou ol eTrt Aavpm. AnDOK. de Myst. 38.

He stated tliat he had a slave at Laurium.
Ol ÂdrjvaloL ovSev (T(î(tiv e(f)aa-av Trpoa-qKciv. ThUC.
The Athenians maintained that it was no concern of theirs.
Thucydides and Xenophon are partial to this use of ol and

(r(f>i(TL.
Note 4. eat'Tou, eavTwv are sometimes used of the first and of the
second person.
ra avTwv afxa eKiropi^wp-eda. ThUC.
Let us at the same time furnish all our own resources.
ovSk yap rrjv lavrou crv ye 4^X']v opas. XeN.
Why you anyhow do not even see your own soul.
Antiph, Herod. 11.
The sometimes used for the reciprocal

Note 5. reflexive is
uXAvjXwv.
(3ovXicr6i TrepuovTfS avTWi' -vvOdvccrdaL ; DeIL
Do you wish to be running about atid inquiring <me of
another ?
;
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. sr
Cf. S. Luke xxiii. 12, "for before they were at enmity

between themselves."
Note. — o-^cDv aviQiv is also used like suus arid not se, meaning
their oicn men, their own side.
S>pp)VTO ot Iv â.fi(j} 'AdrjvaiOL — Aciv e—l (jcfjas avTOvs.

Thuc. viii. 86.
The Athenians in Samos were bent on sailing against their
own countrymen.
So >}/Jiti)v (u/iwv) avTwv partitively.
TO rpiTOV fj-epos rjp.wv avrtov. ThUC. iii. 54. 3.
A third of our own numbers.
§ 70. DEMONSTRA Tl VE PR Oi\0 UNS.

T0O"OVT0S
(oSto
OS, e „^ (
This < ggj"^' So great, so many )
I tantus, tot.
( I TOcrdsSf,
mi ^ ,
^0 old, SO younq {
TT]\iKos.
{so great) ( rtiXiKosSe.
^^^ talis.
{ i:ti::'
Toios is Epic and poetical
For €Tepo<i, see Indefinite pronouns.
681, ovToal are emphatically deictic forms, this here;

ovTo<: and oSe point to something near iu space or time
€K6Lvo<i, to something more distant oBe points to something ;
present ovro'?, to something mentioned, though ovro'i

;
also has the deictic force of o8e.
11 rpayaiBia eari t)]<;8€ Tfj<; TroXeoj? evprj/jia. Plat.

Tragedy is the invention of this city.
TOVT €K€iv ouy<o 'Xejov. Ak.

TJiis is that which I luas speaking of.
ovTO<i cKLcrdev Trpuaep'êrai. Plat.

Here he is coining behind.
—
PRONOUNS.
rovT ear eKelvo, tout eKelvo = as the saying is, illud

quod dicitur.
Note 1. oStos and oSe for first and second person. o8e is often
used in poetry of the first person, dinjp oSe is common in
Trag. for cyw.
oS' e'fJL' 'OpecTTi]^, ^leieXeoiS, ov tcrTopets. EuR. Or. 374.
I am Orestes, Menelaus, whom thou seekest.
ciTov veKpov ^vv tqSc Kovifiiels X^P^- SoPH. Ant. 43.
(Consider) whether thou wilt uplift this corpse together with
this my hand.
ris ovTocrl t6S ovTO(ri; Ar, Ach. 1048.
IFho's this here i i e. who are you ?
Note 2. — TctSe, TttSe Trdvra, Tavra -avra are used in proseand

verse of sometMng near.
ovK "Icuves Ta6e eicriv oroe "^FiXXrjcnrovTioi. ThUC. vi. 77. 1
The people here are no lonians or Hellespontines.

Cf. Eur. Androm. 168.
Note 3. ovros and 68e contrasted, ovros generally refers to
what has preceded, oSe to what follows. So with all demon-
stratives in -Tos and -Se. But the rule is by no means
invariable.
TO oe OVK t<TTi TOLovTov aXXo. TOtovSe jxaXXov. Plat.

Hoivever, it is not so as you think, but rather as follows.
TOtaSe lAePev, ) , 7 / 77 TOcravTa ] , , ,,

V, ^ '.- ^ he spoke as folmcs,
j
^ V eiTrtuv, after
eAeê rotate, J
7
rotavra j •'
speaking thus, are common phrases in Thucydides.
Note 4. —
ovTos (not oie) and avros (the latter especially in
Plato) are the usual antecedents to the relative, like is in Latin.
ovros and cKetros contrasted. Like hie and ille in Latin,
sometimes, but not always, ovtos means this nearer (i.e. the
latter), cKetvos, that distant (i.e. the former), in space or time.
Not-e 5. —
OVTOS and eKelvos in the neuter, like hoc, illud in
Latin, often draw attention to and point the coming word
or phrase. See Peculiarities of Apposition 3.
They also gather up and emphasise what has preceded,
a av et-ys e/x/ieve tovtois. PlaT,
WTiatever you say, keep to that.
—
THE PRONOUN Mr6s. 53
Note 6. — ovTos, oSe, e/ceivos, compared with Latin.

oStos often denotes contempt like iste; eKetvos, praise
(the famous or illustrious), like ille.
oStosis the opponent (plaintiff or defendant) =isê, hie

being the client, ovrot, the judges, the court, or the
opposite party.
ovTos, as antecedent to the relative =is (qui).

ovTocrL=:hicce, celui-ci, this man here.
oSe is much like hie, this man here, marking simply the
presence of something, e.g. aK-r/ jxlv rioi, here is the shore,
void la plage.
§71. THE PRONOUN k-VTO^. T

AvTO'i has three usages which must be very carefully
distinguished.
1. It is a definitive adjective pronoun, like ipse,

meaning self.
2. With the article, 6 avro<; means the same, idem.
3. In its oblique cases it is the pronoun of the third

person, him, her, it, them.
1. AvTo^ in all its cases ma}' mean self, myself, thjself

himself, herself itself, themselves. It has this meaning
when it occurs :
a. lu the nominative case.
b. In any case in agreement with a pronoun, or with

a noun and article when placed outside the
article. Thepronoun or noun must often be
supplied frc»1Jhe context, avro'; occupying an
emphatic position. The pronoun to be supplied
may be the indefioite^^^.
avTol S brav acâXtofjiev ov ^ûxTKoixev. EUR.
Whene'er v)e trip oicrselves we mark it not.
54 PRONOUNS.
avro<i ejcoye ererapdy/jbTji'. Plat.

/ myself was quite upset.
avrov 'âp ere Set IIpo/ji7]$ea)^. Aesch. .
Thou thyself ncedest a Prometheus.

avTrj T7) '^V'^^rj Oeareov avra ra 7rpdy/j,aTa. Plat.
With the soul itself (i.e. apart from the body) we must
behold things in themselves (i.e. actual realities).
BpaaiSa<i ry QeacraKwv '^rj Kat, avTOi<; <f)c\o^ r)V.
Brasidas was friendly to the land of the Thessalians,

and to {the Thessalians) themselves.
Cf. Xen. Anah. vii. 8. 22.
ov^ oiov T€ eanv dixekrj avrov ovra ciWoi/? "Troielv
eirifieXec';. XeN.
It is not possible that one loho himself is careless should
make others careful.
With a proper name the article is not necessary,

avTO<; êvdrji; aveKpayev. Xen.
Seuthes himself exclaimed.
So auT09 fiaaCkev^, the Great King himself.
2. 6 auTO?, 1-] avTT], to avro, and in Attic auro?, avTrj,
ravTo and ravrov, genitive ravrov, etc., means the same.
rov<s avTov; irepi rwv avrwv Xojov; X'eyovcri. AntiPH.

They make the same statements about the same things.
3. AvTQ<i in its oblique cases only, and never at the

beginning of a sentence, is the third personal pronoun,
him, her, it, them.
avrov TTpiv uKovaai. ThuC.
aTTOTre/jLTrova-Lv
They dismiss him before hearing him.

TToWof? avTwv aireKretvav. Xen.
They killed many of them.
TreipacrofjbaL ^Vfj.fxa'êiv avroi. Xen.
1 loill endeavour t'o help him.
So we should write fu/i/Ltaêti/ avry, avral^.
— :
THE PRONOUN Air6s. 55
—
Note 1. Like the Latin is, avros (1) recalls a noun which
has been mentioned, and (2) it is used, instead of the more
usual ovTos or eKeivos, as the antecedent to a relative sentence.
This second usage is uncommon, except in Plato. In most
instances the relative sentence precedes.
(1) erpaTTOVTO iirl tov Sei'ocjiwv-a. ical eXeyov arrw.
Xen. Anab. vi. 1. 2L
They turned to Xenophon, and said to him.
(2) ai'TO ovK (Lp-qTUL o ixdXicr-a e'Sei prjdrjvai.
Plat. iêp. 362.
The very point, which above all ought to have been stated,
has not been stated.
dveXa/Sov avra. ocra virrjpx^v e—LrrjSeLa. ThUC. vii. 74.
They took icith them just ichatever was necessary.
Cf. Eur. Tro. 662, /. A. 1025.
Note AvTos meaning
2. self "will have to be rendered iu
many different ways.
(a.) In or by oneself, unaided.
TO )i^(i)pLov avTo Kapripov vz-q p)(ê. ThUC.
The spot in itself teas strong (i.e. ivifJiout artificial forti-
fication).
avTos kiToiqa-a, I did it myself {without help).
(6) Voluntarily, sponte.
T7^€i yap avrd. SoPH.
T'Fords will come of themselves {unbidden).
(c) The great man himself, the Master.
Tts OVTOS ', avTos. T('s avTos ; SojKpctTrjs.
WTio's this ? the Master. Who's the Master ? Socrates.
a-uTos ^<jiVi -^?se dixit.
{d) With Ordinals.

iCTTpanjyei UepiKXrjs rerapros avros.
Pericles was general tvith three others.
(e) The neuter avTo is used by the philosophers with sub-

stantives of all genders to express the abstract idea of a thing
auTo StKaiocrvi/-;;, ideal justice, or justice in the abstract; avrrj
dSiKta, avTo to KaXov, avrb KaXov constantly in Plato.
In Aristotle a^To forms one compound word with the sub-
stantive avrodvdpojTTO's, the ideal man ; avroayadov, the highest
good, summum bonum, etc.
; ; ; .
56 PRONOUNS.
§ 72. INTERROGA Ti VE PR ONO UNS.

Who, what (Direct), ris, tC ;
(Indirect), So-ns, 8tu
Whether of two (uter) iroxcpos ;

oirorepos.
How
__
much, how great 1
Too'os
,
oiroo-os.
' \
How many (quantus). t
.
Of what sort (qualis) iroios oirotos.
How old, hoiu great ittiXikos ;

oittiXCkos.
The pronouns in the second column are also relatives.

The Direct pronouns are however constantly used instead
of the Indirect {see Indirect Question).
av el ri<i dvBpcov ; oan^ elfi eryoi ; Mercov. ArisT.

What man art thou ? (ask you) what man am I? Meton.
See Ach. 106. 959.
Note 1. — 770 los; is often used in a sarcastic repetition.

ot 7zpea-(3ets ol Trapa /JacriAecos. ttolov âcrtA.€Cos
The envoys from the King ! King quotha ! {King indeed !)
So TT6d€v, Ar. Ran. 1455 ; Ach. 109 ; Nub. 366 (a good
instance).
Observe that in asking a question the article is generally
used with irolos when there is no noun.
oi/x,at ere o/ioAoyvycretv TO TOiovSe. to ttoIov,
Plat. R&p. 475, e.
/ think you will make the folloiving admission. What
admission ?
So TO Tt ; Arist. Batr. 40. Cf Ar. Ach. 418.
Note 2. — Observe the idiomatic use of double interrogatives.
Tts TToOev fioXuiv o-oi fiapTvpr](rei ; SOPH. Tr. 421.

fVho is he, whence comes he, who will bear thee record ?
So ttSs Tt toCt' e?7res ; Plat. Soph. 261, c. Soph. Ant. 40"

Rarely os is used like oo-Tts in a question. eywS" os eo-Tt,
I know who he is, Ar. Ach. 118. The Greeks said oTSa (airbv)
OS ea-TL or oiSa Tts (ocr-is) ecrrt.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS AND ATTRACTION. 57
§ 73. RELATIVE PRONOUNS AND ATTRACTION.

, ., { whosoever
((esp. poet.)
of siLch a
J /y
like jioTis.
'i , , ^ (the very

How ^qreat, f So-os, o-n-oo-os (quantiis
^^. „
go-irep,
\
-< one, exactly
.,
>
now many -J
i quotquot)
^ ^
i ,, ,
\ ^ \ theoneivho.
What number in a series ottoo-tos (qiiotus).
Bow old or ) , ,
OirtlXlKOS
6iroT€pos, ivhich-
, > TlXlKOS J, ,
how great )
soever of two.
Ohs. ttTTtt, Attic (ao-o-a, Ionic) for anva, neuf. pi. of oo-ns.
ttTTa, Attic (oo-cra, Ionic) for nvd, neut. pi. of rls.
74' °">' oairep, oari'i.
6'? is definite.
ecrrLV BtKrj<; o(p6a\fio^, 09 ra •navff opa. MenanDEE,

There is an eye of justice which sees all things.
oarL<; is indefinite.
dveXevdepa Tra? oaTi<; ea Boâv /SXeVei.

Cleanthes, the Stoic.
Slavish the man whoever looks to fame.

For other usages of oarif; see Index.
oairep is particularly definite (vrep adds this force to

other pronouns and adverbs, e.g. ooairep, etirep, etreiBri-
irep, etc.).
Tavrov k')(ovaLv dfiupTrj/jLa oTrep Kat 01 Tronjrai.
Plat.
They are making exactly the same mistake which
the poets make.
58 PROXOUNS.
\v(TLT€\el fiot coarrep e')(w e^êtv. PlaT.

It is good for me to be just as I am.
So T)7r€p Ar. Ach. 364. 474.
Note. — o5v [S-i], S'/jTroTe, S-qiroTovv), added to relative pronouns,
alters them from relatives, and makes them indefinite, oo-no-ovv,
any whosoever; or8' ortorv, not even anything whatsoever, ne
tantillum quidem; o-ocrocrovv, how great soever, quantuscun-
que ; 6-oioa-ovi>, qualiscunque ; ottoo-toctovv, quotuscunque ; ol
6~oLOi8i]7roTe a-rpa-iiyoi, generals of any sort whatsoever, no
matter icho.
§ 75. A TTRA C TION.

A Eelative which would be in the Accusative is often
attracted into the case of its Antecedent, if that Ante-
cedent is in the Genitive or Dative. This attraction
sometimes, but rarely, takes place when the Eelative would
have been in the Dative.
'^pcofxac /3t/SXtot? ot? e^w.
I use the hooks luMcIi I have.
For a c'^co.
Toi? aya6oi<i ot? e'ôfiev KTWfieOa Kat ra^ aX\a<;.

ISAEUS.
B]/ means of the advantages which we possess we gain
our other advantages also.
The Antecedent is often attracted into the clause of

the Eelative.
^(fico/jLai, ot? eô) ;8</3Xtoi? for 'y^pwjxai fiL/3XioL<; a ^X'^'
dpLaOearaTol ecrre o)v eyco olBa EX\.r]V(ov.
' ThUC. vi. Q^ «y{)
Tou are tJie most ignorant of the Greeks whom I know.

For EWtjvwv ov<i olSa.
Note. —The attraction takes place even where the antecedent

is omitted.
TTpos CO efx^ ^vveXeye (TTpaTevpxi. XeN. Hell. iv. 1. 41.
.01? was collecting an army in addition to that which he already
had.
For -pis TovTw o dx^. Cf. EuRiP. Med. 753.
MISCELLANEOUS INSTANCES OF A TTRACTION. 59
Adverbs of place are thus attracted.

Ste/co/itfovToo6iv VTreêOevTO TralSas. ThUC. L 89.
21i€jj now conveyed across their children from the places wliere
tliey had sent them for shelter.
For €VT€vOei' . . . ov.
§ 76. Miscellaneous instances of Attraction.

7r)v ovcriav Ka-eXi~ev ov — Aetovos aîd earii'.
i"]i'
Lts. 19. 49.

The property which he left is not worth more.
q ova-la, the subject, is attracted into the case of the
relative.
So ov 01 dcoi (^lAovcriv a—odvi](TKeL veos. MeN. 128

{He) whom the gods lave dies young.
The demonstrative subject, ovtos, is omitted.
So TToAAot avaXi(TK0V(TLV ovK et's a Sei. XeN. Oik. 3. 5.

Many spend mrniey on objects which they ought not {to spend
it on).
For et's ra.vra eis a.
So a£w v/xas €vda to -payjxa lyevero. XeN. Cyr. V. 4. 21.

/ icill bring you icliere the affair took place.
For Ikci ere ev6a.
Several common idioms come under this head of

Attraction.
{a) ovoeis ocTTis ov {i.e. orSet's icrriv ocrrts ov) is dechned as
one word in Ace. Gen. Dat.
Topyias ovSevl ot^ ovk aTreKptvero. PlAT. Men. 70.
Gorgias was replying to every single questioner.
In Soph. Ai. 725, ovrts ea-6' o? ot5.
(6) dav/xaa-Tos ocros, v7Tep(f)vr]s ocros are similarly declined,

and their adverbs Savfiaa-Tco?, {yTrepcfivws.
wuLoXoy-qcre ravra jxera. i8p(i)T0S davpLacTTOv ocrov.

Plat. Bep.
He made these admissions with an astonishing amount
of perspiration.
v-epdjvw? (JJS \a[p(x). PlaT.
/ am surprisingly glad.
{i.e. V7r€p(five<; ia-rtv ws).
6o PRONOUNS.
(c) ofos, and aXAos oo-os, et Tts.
lAeye —pos avSpas roXfitjpovs olovs kui 'A6r]vaLOV?.

Thuc. vii 21.
Se was speaking to bold men like the Athenians.
For otot etcri Kttt 'AdrjvaLOL.
dvLiTTr) 'Aypiavas /cat aAAa ocra e'^VT^ ITaioviKd.

Thuc. ii. 96.
He was raising the Agrianes and all the other Paeonian
tribes.
eyyv(i)fxeda i^/êts, eyoj, ôpixiiov, aAAov et Ttva

fSovXirai.
Dem. 20. 100.
ie/ us promise, I, Phormio, any one he likes.
For (xAAos T6S et rrva aAAov /3ov\eTai.
ofos re for ToiouTos ofos re in the sense of " able," like Swaro?,
is exceedingly common.
ocos TC ct)[ii ravra Troietf.
/ am aWe to do this.
ou)( otov re ecrrtv.

/i{ is noi possible ; it cannot be.
In the same way, by the omission of the Antecedent,

aie formed many indefinite pronouns and verbs.
ea-TLv OL, commoner than dcriv ot (sunt qui).
evioi (evi, there are . . . ol', those who) ; li'tore, sometimes.
eartv ov, somewhere; Io-tiv y, in some way; ea-nv ottws,
someJww.
The Relative preceding the Demonstrative throws great

emphasis on the Demonstrative (as in Latin).
a TTOtetv alcr^pov, ravra vo/iiê firjSe Xeyetv eivai KaAov.
ISAE. 1. 15.
Quae factu turpia sunt ea ne dictu quidem honesta habe.

Observe the phrases : o Aeyco, a,s I say, or as I was saying,
6—ep, or o apTL ekeyov, oirep iiTTOv.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 6r
§ 77. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

Some, any, ^
none, nothing, ovSeCs, oiSev {oiir\.s) poet.
A kind or Vtls, n ,. , «,
sor^ 0/, j
ASbme (rn^/t
J
.^°"^^''
^ none (emphatic) I
ov8e ds.
emphasis), \ da-lv ot (less common). \ R^* *^s-
Any what-
OSTIS OVV.
ever.
Some
ol |A€V
others Ji dXXoi
— 01 8e.
. . .
' —dXXoi.
' I eKOUTTOs, iT-ds Tis, irds, diras (stronger
v o than Trds)
»/
every, all,
|
<nj|jiiros {all together).
Other ' ^ .
V dXXos (alius) ol dXXoi, the rest, ceteri
(hie of two 1 / 1^ N neither one 1 ovSc'tcoos.

/j-^ ^N > 6Tcpos (alter); .z, h
{different), ) nor other J |i7]8£T£pos.
ôfe 1. TTorepos, and its indirect form, oTroVepos, = xiter,
whether, or which of two ? But they may also alteruter, one, =

or either of two. In this latter sense ttotc/jos is sometimes
written oxytone.
TTotos, of some sort; ttoo-os, of some size or number (observe

the accents).
ere/DOS should perhaps be classed among Demonstratives,

but it is put here in contrast to aXXos.
Note 2. Idiomatic uses of rts.
(a) Tis means sometimes nrnny a one.
fjLLCTil Tts eKe6V0V, (S avSpes 'A^vyi'atot, Ka6 SeStev.

Dem.
There a/re those {there are many) who hate him and
fear him, Athenians.
— —
62 PRONOUNS.
(b) It nieans, like aliquis, some great, some important person,

or thing.
rjvx^LS Tts eivat, toIctl xprjixaai crdevwv. EUR. El. 939.

Thou wast boasting thyself to be some great one, trusting
to thy riches.
Cf. S. Paul, ad Gal ii. 6.
So 8pav n, to do some great thing. Soph. El. 305.
Si vis esse aliquis. lUY. i. 74.
(c) It is constantly joined to adjectives, numerals, and
pronouns, sometimes to strengthen, sometimes to
weaken the expression, in a way for which, in
English, we have frequently no equivalent :
/a,eyas tis, ttols Tts, eKao-ros Tts. ovSci's Tts, oAtyot

TLves. (Spa^v Tt, ovSev Tt, cr^êSoi/ rt, rpels Tives,
etc. etc. TTotds Tts ; "ocros Tts ; a^êSoi/ Tt, iyyv Tt,
ov TToXXoi Ttves, TpiaKovTo. Ttves, TtVes Sijo VTjes,
Thuc. viii. 100.

(d) i) Tts rj o-uSets i] Tt 7'; ov8h, Imrdly any one, hardly
anything.
ovTOt fxev ovv )) Tt '/) ovSev dXrÔis elpyjKacri.

Plat. Ap. 1,
These men then have spoken hardly a word of truth.
(e) Tts also covertly alludes to some known person.

rjS' ovv 9av€LTaL Kal Oavovcr' oAet Ttva.
Soph. Antig. 751.
She then must die, and dying slay another (hers will
not be the only death.)
(f) TL'i= here and there one.
Twi' €V 6XLyap\ia dirodavovTiov t'crcos Tts '^]v Trovrjpos.

Lys. 30. 13.
Note aAAos must often be rendered adverbially,

3. besides,
moreover, as well, adding as well as opposing. This is very
common in Attic.
TTt/i-Tos TTOTap-hs dAAos. Hdt. v. 54.
Yet affth river.
Cf.Soph. El. 707; Aesch. Sept. 481.

yap T^v \6pro<i ov6e aAAo SevS/aov ov^kv. XeN. An.
ot5 i. 5. 5.
There was no grass, no, nor any tree at all.

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 63
Cf. Plaustra imnentaque alia. Liv. iv. 41, Wagons and

burden also.
beasts of
And there were also two other Tnalefactors led with him io be
put to death. S. Luke, xxiii. 32.
All these (vices) are portable, with other graces weighed.
Shakspere, Macbeth, iv. iu. 90.
6 oAAos may often be rendered in general or usual.
irapa tuv aXXov rpotrov. AnTIPH. Tetr. B. B. 1.
Contrary to my general disposition.
Note 4. TTciv like quidvis, quidlibet, may mean anything, no

matter ichat.
ovSeva del fir])âva(r6aL o-ws d—o<f>evêTaL ttolv TroiCiv ddvarov.
Plat. Ap.
No man should endeavour to avoid death by every means.
roLavra dXXa, cf. alter viem. Soph. El. 337.
Obs. TO TToioy, quality ; to voctov, quantity.
CHAPTEE IV.
THE CASES.
§ 78. Preliminary Note on the Cases.

Greek developed from a language which had eight cases,
is
or nine, we regard the separate meanings of the last as

if
belonging to two distinct cases. Of these eight or nine G-reek

retained only five, although comparative philology shows that
traces of the others survived. The work of the lost cases was
carried on by the remaining five, as the following table will
explain
Indo-European. Greek.
Nominative Nominative
Vocative Vocative
Accusative Accusative
^fîî^^ I Genitive
Ablative j
Dative
Locative
Dative
Instrumental
Comitative or Sociative
The Greek Genitive and Dative have been called mixed
cases because they have assumed the functions of the lost
cases.^
^ The following declension of an

THE NOMINATIVE. 65
The Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative form one group,

the Genitive and Ablative a second group, the Dative, Loca-
tive, Instrumental, and Comitative (the latter being perhaps
another aspect or shade of the Instrumental) a third group.
The Nominative is the case of the subject.
The Vocative is the case of the person or thing addressed. .
The Accusative is the case of the object.

The Genitive is the case of the class (yevos, genus) to which
a thing belongs.
The Ablative is the case of that from which another thing is
separated, the case of separation.
The Dative is the case of the person or thing remotely connected
with an action (the remoter object), for whom or which anything
is done.
The Locative is the case of the place where an action takes place.
The Instrumental is the case of the instrument by which an
action is performed.
The Comitative (or Sociative) is the case of the accompanying
circumstances.
The details of each case wiU show that the five Greek cases
retain their original meanings, while the mixed cases (Genitive
and Dative) acquire in addition the meanings of the lost ones.
But nearly all the cases, especially the mixed ones, have
assumed other shades of meaning and other uses, from analogies
which we cannot safely trace now. In treating of any case
therefore we may distinguish between (1) its primary and
distinct use, (2) its freer, looser use. Attempts to explain and
classify the freer uses must necessarily be more or less
arbitrary.
§ 79. THE NOMINATIVE.

The Nominative is the case of the Subject, and of the
Predicate or Apposition in agreement with the Subject.
$iXt7r7ro<j KaOca-Tarac I3a(7i\ev<i.
Philip is appointed King.
The Nominative is often used for the Vocative.

tOt, filv oSv (TV, 6 7rpecrf3vTaTO^. XeN.
Come then, you, the elder one !
E
66 THE CASES.
ovTos especially is so used.
(S ov-os Atas. Soph. Ai. 89.

^âi ho ! Ajax !
Cf. Oed. Col. 1627.

6 'AttoA-AoSw/jos orros, ov Trepifievels ; PlAT. Symp.
Apollodorus, you Sir I stop, won't you ?
\
§80. TBE VOCATIVE.
In Attic Prose w is generally added.
aKoirei roivvv, w ^(i)KpaTe<;, ecprj. Plat.

Consider therefore, Socrates, said he.
firj 6opvl3elTe, w avSpe^ 'Adr,valoL. Plat. Apol

Do not interrupt, Athenians.
The omission of the w makes the address curt, tart, or
businesslike, as aKovei^ Alaxtvr) ; dJye hear, Aeschines?
THE ACCUSATIVE.
§ 8l. Preliminary Note on the Accusative.
Accusative, unlike the Genitive and Dative, is formed
The
with no suffix which in itself gives the case a special appHca-
tion. But it came to denote the object of the sentence, as
the Nominative denotes the subject. In speaking of the ob-
ject, however, we must very carefully distinguish between
two distinct significations of the Accusative. Thus Antiphon
writes, ruTrrei tov ai/Spa 77X7^7(15, ^le strikes the man blows.
Here already contained in the meaning of the

TrXrjyds, bJou-s, is
verb TVTTTei. This Accusative has been called the Internal
Accusative. On the other hand, tov av^pa, the man, is not
contained in the meaning of rvTrru. This is called the External
Accusative. The Internal Accusative is of much freer and
wider application than the External, varying from the Cognate
Accusative, fjâxw P-o-xojJ-ai, I fight a fight, to any word which
is substituted for the Cognate Accusative,
such as, o-TrovSas
TToioviiai, I make a treaty ; hna-ToXijv ypo^w, I write a command ;
THE ACCUSATIVE. 67
jrAeoj âAacrcrai', / fieyaXa crâAAo/xat, / am greatly

sail the sea ;
disappointed. The External Accusative
is a natural extension,
not of the meaning, but of the direction of the verb. The
Accusative is naturally associated with a verb, and, Avhen it is
not an External Accusative, qualifies the verb almost as an
adverb. Thus Trato-ov SittA^v (Soph. El. 1415), strike a double
blow, strike twice ; aKrjv eo-av, or eyevovro (HoM. //.) they were
or became silence, i.e. silent. Hence the many quasi-adverbs of
Accusative form, a.p-)(rjv, olkimi^v, Trpoâo-tv, '^(â.pi.v, irpoiKa, etc.,
and the wide use of neuter adjectives used adverbially, TroAAd,
TTVKva, TO AotTTov, ctc. IIpojTov, TTpoTepov, agalu are Accusative
forms. Indeed we may say that all Accusatives fall under
—
two heads, either (1) the Internal Accusative, or (2) the
External Accusative.
§ 82. Conspectus of the Internal Accusative.

The Internal Accusative denotes either the state or the
operation of the verb (the state of neuter and passive verbs,
the operation of active verbs).
It is either
A. A word kindred in stem or meaning to the verb (the

Cognate Accusative), e.g.
fioi)(rjV ixd)(€(r6at.
0]v jBlov.
B. A word substituted
for the Cognate Accusative, and
limiting or defining the verbal notion.
\j/ri(f)i(r[xa vlko-v, to loin, i.e. carry, a measure.

Accusatives of this class denote
(a) That with respect to which the state or operation occurs,

often the part affected (Accusative of Respbct).
davfiacrros et'vat to koiAAos, to be remarkable in respect of
beauty.
\f/vxyjv voo-eir, to be ill in mind.
(b) The extent of the state or operation in degree, space, or

time.
ovre pkya ovre cr[XLKpbv o-o^ds etjtit.
In no degree, great or small, am I vnse.

68 THE CASES.
O.TT'f.\^l (TTaSioVS €fi8ofni]KOVTa.

It is seventy stades distant.
TToXvv \p6vov Tra/ae/xeiva.

/ waited a long time.
Two further remarks may be made :
(1.) The Accusative follows Adjectives (and Adverbs) as

well as verbs, e.g.
ayat7os Tracrav aperrjv.
arifioi (xTifxtav roiavSc.
and Pronouns
(2) Adjectives, especially neuter Adjectives
in agreement with the Accusative, are freely used instead of
the Accusative, which is unexpressed.
fieyaXa KivSvvevei.
to{;to KLv8vvev€i.
§ 83. TJI£: INTERNAL ACCUSATIVE.

The Internal Accusative is,
A. A word kindred in stem or meaning to the verb.
This is called the Cognate Accusative.

t/ yboyOov ovBev ouaa ixo')(Bel<i ; EUK. And. 134.
Why, being naught, toilest thou with toil ?
^7)0-649 ^loV KpCbTLCrrOV 7]V OvflOV KpCLT'p^. Menand. 186.
Thou wilt live the lest life if thou wilt control thine
anger.
(jtvy-qv,
^vve<f)vye he shared the flight, Pl. Ap. v. ; ttovovs
undergo labours, Pl. Ap. vii. ; a-pxqv ^pâ, I held office,
TTovetv, to
Pl. Ap. XX. ; 6vei8os ovttoto-ai, to upbraid with reproaches, SoPH.
Phil. 523.
voo-cis aXyos, thou art sickwith grief, SoPH. Fhil 1326;

ypacfirjv SiwKeiv, to bring an indictment against (cf. ypa<f)r}v
ypdêo-Oai, cognate in stem); TroAe/ôv o-T/Darei'eiv, to engage in
war, ThUC. i. 112 (cf. ttoAc/xov iroXep-dv and o-Tparetav
CTT/aaTeiietv.)
;
ACCUSATIVE OF RESPECT. 69
B. A word substituted for the Cognate Accusative,

aud limiting or defining the verbal notion.
'krepou yjrrjcficcr/jLa viKo, Aij/xoadevr)^. AesCHIN.
Demosthenes carries a second decree {or measicre).
ri<y(i)ViôvTO aTuBiov, TraXrjv, Kac Trvy/MTjv. Xen.

They were contending in the race-course, in wrestling,
and in hexing.
SiKTjv offiXeii', to lose a law-suit; 'OXvfiina viKoiv, to vnn an

Olympic victory ; ydfiovs h-rtav. to give a wedding feast, EuR.
\pri<^L(Tixa viK^, he carries (or wins) a decree, Aeschin.
Note. An extension of this Accusative is found in the Poets.

This Accusative denotes the result of the verbal operation.
Practically the verb yields an epithet in agreement with the
Accusative.
cAkos ovToxjai, HoM. //. V. 361, to stab (and so make) a wound.

Goodwin compares "to break a hole." rpoiras KaTapp-qyvva-L,
Soph. Ant. 675, breaks to pieces (and so causes) a rout; xaKcts
oipoyydv, SoPH. El. 123, thou meltest a (makest a melting)
lamentation; ireipav kfxuipav^v, AESCa Pers. 715, he made a
foolish attempt ; reyyetv SaKpva, PiND. Nem. X. 141, he wetted
(i.e. shed wet) tears.
In Soph. Ant. 973 the passive of this construction occurs.

IAkos TV(f>k(j}dh, a blinded wound, i.e. ivound inflicted which
caused blindness ; the active form would be tv(^Xovv cAkos, to
inflict a blinding wound.
§ 84. A ecusA TIVE OF RESPE CT.

An Accusative is constantly joined to a verb, adjective,
noun, or even a sentence, to denote that in respect to vjhich
the state or operation of the verb, etc., takes place. Very
often the Accusative denotes the part affected, e.g.
Ka/jLVco or aXyco tt]v Ke(f)a\7}v (ra ofifiara, tov<s TTooa?,

T01/9 BaKTv\ov<;).
I have a pain in the head (eyes, feet, fingers).

;
ô THE CASES.
êXriov ecyrv acofia y rj y^v^riv voaelv. MenAND.

Better to ail in body than in mind.
Tu<^\o9 TO, T oiTU, rov Tc vovv, Ttt T o/jL/jiar el. Soph.

Blind art thou hoth in ears, and mind, and eyes.
'EÛKoatoL rov aptOfiov, six hundred in number.

"EW7jve<; to 76^09 {to ovo/xa), Greeks in race (in name).
Compare this Accusative with the Dative of Circum-
stance.
§ 85. ACCUSATIVE OF SPACE AND TIME.

The Accusative denotes extension of space and duration
of time.
TtXeiv TTjv OaXaaaav, Andok., to sail the sea.
TTopeveaOat oSov, jrjv, opr), Xen., to travel over a road,

land, mountains.
al (TTTOvBai eviavTov eaovrat,. ThuC.

The truce shall be {i.e. last) for a year.
airi')(ei r] Uxdraia rcov ©rjôjv araSiov; e^Sofirj-
Kovra. Thug.
Plataea is seventy stades distant from Thebes.
Tr]v rplrrjv r]p,epav eipyaôvro Kai, rr)v TeTaprtjv.

Thug.
They were working throughout the third day and the
fourth.
KeX^vdov to crawl along a road, Soph. Fhil. 1224:
ep-rretv,
6S0V 4)avr]vai, appear on a road, Soph. Bl. 1274; rijv w/oav

to
Tov cTovSj Dem. Phil. i. 8, during the season of the year.
Note. An Accusative with ordinal numbers means how long

since or ago.
i^rjXdofiev rpiTOV hos tovtL DeM. 54. 3.

We came out three years ago
Cf Plat. Protag. 309.

ACCUSATIVE OF MOTION. 71
§ 86. ACCUSATIVE OF MOTION.

The Accusative denotes motion to a place, without a
preposition in Poetry ; but in Prose a preposition is
required.
oiVw vevocTTrjK' oTkov, EuR. /. T. 534.

Not yet hath he returned home.
Soph. Ant. 244; Eur. Bacch.

—Ere we152,could
Cf. Phil. 1, 5. Cf.
Julius Caesar arrive the point proposed.
Very seldom motion to a 'person. Eur. Bacch. 847, 1353.

alvr]e<i acftiKvovvrac eiri HvXov. Thuc.
The ships arrive against Pylos.
evrevOev eêXavvet et9 Ko\ocrcra<i, Xen.
From this place he marches to Golossae.
§ 87. ACCUSATIVE OF THE OBJECT AND PRE-

DieATE IN AGREEMENT OR IN APPO-
SITION WITH IT.
For this construction, a very common and easy one, see
Obhque Predicate.
Verbs of naming (KaXw, ovo/j-d^w), addressing (Trpoa-ayopevm),
dividing and distributing (ve/xw, Karave/iw, Staipw, refivw), take
this construction both in the active and passive.
KaXovcri fie. tovto to ovojxa. XeN. Oik. 7. 3.

They call me (by) this name.
6 K.vpos TO (TTp<xTevp.a Kareveifie SwSeKa p-eprj.
Xen. Cyr. 7. 5. 13.

Cyrus divided the army into twelve parts.
rjyrj tcc avra p^prj Siaveperai,. Pl. Leg. V. 737,
The land is divided into the same parts.
§ 88. DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE.

Certain classes of Verbs in Greek regularly take
a double Accusative.
: : — :
72 THE CASES.
Verbs of :
ashing, i.e. interrogating : I/dwtw, rjpofj-rjv.
asldng, i.e. petitioning : aWw (and compounds), Trpda-a-b), ets-

Trpdcrcro), Trpdaa-ojiai, I demand,
exact.
concealing Kprnnoi {aTroKpvTnta).
teaching SlMo-kw.
^^^"^^^ ^'^S^^' dix<j,thvvp.i, irepi^dX-

putting on or of:
XofiaL.
devrivinq :
d<âipovp.aL, dirofmpCi, a-vXia.
{KaKov, rovro, eS, xf^XCis,

saying or doing anything dyadov
rt,
, .77 KttKWs), Aeyo), e/Dw, etVov, opw,

ôo(i or lU
^^^ «^ kpydôiiai (rarely Tr/Dao-o-co).
evAoyw, iTratvw, êvSop-at, Sia/3aX\a), v/Spi-Cf^,

Similarly :
dSiKW, avrt-oiw, (BXairTO), KOiXvio, dvayKaô}.
ov rovro ere epoarw. AkisTOPH,

That's not the question I'm asking you.
alrov alrovai, iroWoi Se Ifidrca. Xen.
TToXkol fie
Many are asking me for food, many for clothes.
aXkov<s ravra ravra BiBdo-KW. Plat.
1 teach others these self-same subjects.
ovhev ere Kpv^w. SoPH.

Naught will I hide from thee.
Ihov 'AiroWoyv avro^ €kBv(ov

B' efie
'yp7}(Trr]pLav eaOrjra. AesCH.

And lo ! Apollo's self divesting me
Of garh oracular.
dWrjXov^ rd e'cr%aTa Xeôvacv. Xen.
They say the most atrocious things of one another.
ol fxev -TTOvqpoi KaKov n ipydôvrai
tov? dvO pwtrov'i,
ol S' d'yaOol dyaOou. Plat.

Bad men do harm to others, good men good.
— )
DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 73
Note 1. The construction of the Double Accusative is much

commoner in Greek than in Latin. Almost any Greek transi-
tive verb can take an Accusative of the External Object, and
some one of the many
varieties of the Internal Object. The
Internal Accusative is often a neuter pronoun, or an adjective
agreeing with a suppressed substantive,
MeATjTos \i^ eypdif/aro rrjv ypa(f)rjv Tavrrjv. PlAT.
MeletiLS brought this indictment against me.
In the Passive
Tots aA/Vas fJ.dxo.'S, ocras Ilepcrat rjTTi^drjcrav, Iw, ISOOR.
/ pass over all the other battles in which tJie Persians were
defeated.
The poets, as might be expected, use great freedom with this

construction, from Homer downwards.
Xpoo- vtêro dX/xriv. Od. vi. 224.
He ivas washing the brine off his shin.
(He was washing his skin : he was washing off the brine.
dXA' OVK Idcrei tovto y' 17 Slkij ere. SOPH. Ant, 538.
Naij^ Justice will not suffer tJiee to do this.
TOIOVTOV 6pd(T0S
avT-q 6' oTrAtêt. SoPH. EL 996.
Thou arm'st thyself in su^h boldness.
Note 2. In the passive Construction one accusative becomes

the subject. E.g. —
TToXXol Linrovs dTrea-TeprjvTai.
Many have been deprived of their horses.
The passive of eS, KaKWS, not eS etc. iroida-dai but €u

Trotetv is
etc. Trda-\€LV, and of eS etc. Xkyuv not Xeyecrdai but aKovetv
(cf. bene, male audire), e.g. /xeyaAa, ev, iradelv, iroXXd KaKo.
aKovetv.
Note 3. Many
of these verbs take other constructions, e.g.
TLvd rtvos, atTtS rt -irapd tlvos, dcfiaipoviiat rt TIV05
dvafj.ifJi.vi]o-K(i)
dyaOov ttolQ ctol. XoiSopelv takes an accusative, Xoi8opacr6ai a

dative : /ê/A(ô/ia.ian accus. of thing and dative of person, tovto
o-oi ; also an accusative of person also a dative alone of
;
person.
— ;
74 THE CASES.
§ 89. THE EXTERNAL ACCUSATIVE.

The Accusatives denote the direct object of a transi-
tive Verb.
TT\v fiaxV^ '^0'^*> /Sap^dpovi evcKTâev. AeSCHIN.

He conquered the harharians in battle.
fidxvv internal Accus., âp^dpov^ external Accus.
Note 1. The Accusative depends almost universally on a Verb.

But there are few cases in which it depends on a noun (gene-
rally a verbal adjective, or a noun of verbal character).
Kttt o-e <^v^t/xos ovSels dOo.vaTwv. SoPH. Antig. 789.

And none of the immortals is able to escape thee.
TToAeôs a-opa Tropipos. AeSCR P. V. 904,
TO Trav prixa-p ovpios Zeus. AeSCH. Supp. 594.
Perhaps we may add eâpvot to, oVoAoyr;/xeva, IsAEUS V. 26

€7rto-Tv;/Aoves ra Trpoa-qKovra, XeN. Cyr. 3. 3, 9 IwKpaTrjs to.
3
fi€T€wpa (f>povTL(TT^s, Pl. Apol II. j unlcss WO regard the accu-

satives here as accusatives of respect.
The construction is not unknown to Latin
Quid tibi banc digito tactio est. Plaut. Poen. v. 5. 29.
Reditum domum in patriam. Lrv. xxx. 32.
On this construction see Peile, Primer of Philology, ch. vii. 5,
Note 2. An Accusative stands in apposition not to the

object of the verb, but to the state or act jointly denoted by
the verb and its object. Very often this Accusative in
Apposition has a proleptic force. See Peculiarities of Apposi-
tion.
alal, KaKWv v\pt(rTa Srj kXvu) raSf,

aicrxf) Te UepcraLS koI Aiyea KoyKvpara. AeSCH. Pers. 331.
Woe ! woe ! the top of sorrow hear I now,

Shame to tlie Persians, and shrill lamentations.
Other instances occur, Aesch. Ag. 225, Cho. 200, EuR.

Bacch. 29, 250.
Cf. Verg. Aen. xi. 381, Proinde tona eloquium, sohtum tibi-
:
THE EXTERNAL ACCUSATIVE. 75
§ 90. VERBS WHICH TAKE AN EXTERNAL

ACCUSATIVE.
The following classes of Verbs should be noticed as taking
an Accusative of the External Object.
1. Many Verbs of Emotion
aiSovfjiaL, I revere. kKTrXrjo-crojiai, ) I am alarmed
ai(rxvi'Ofxai, I feel awe or shame KaTaTrXria-crojJ.ai, \ at.
in the presence of. ^ptVo-w, I
shudder at. SoPH.
OappQ, I feel confidence in. Ant. 997.
auT)(yvoixai tov TroXvvfivov deov. EUK. Ion, 1074.
/ am abashed in the presence of the god remwned in song.
TO TOiovTOV crcofj-a ot i)(6pol dappova-LV. Pl. Phaed. 239.
The enemy feel confidence in such a body.
/XYj SvuafJbLV Twv 'A9r)vac(j)v KaTO—XayrJTe. ThUC. vi. 76,

Do not be dismayed at the power of the Athenians.
2. Many Verbs of Motion compounded with Prepositions,

such verbs taking the meaning of their kindred transitives.
Siaâtvw,
)j^j.Qgg
/xeret/ît, )/ pumie, go in
Stepxo/iat, i fJi€TepxofJ.aL, ) quest of
StaTrXiw, I sail across. e/c/3atvw, / exceed.
/ go about.
7r€/Dte/3;(0)Ltai, I avoid.
i^c(rT->]fj.i,
TTepnrXew, I coast along. vTrepl3dXX(x), I cross aver surpass.

U8c8pdcrKo>,
aTTOOtopaxTKO),
U^^ )
^•'
p^ H[<rrap.ac,Î undertake {sns-
v-oovofxai, ) cipio).
vTToêvyw, / avoid, shirk.
TO. cTTtT/^Seta Ik 'EtJcttov /ieriovTes. XeN", Sell. ii. 1 . 25.

Going in search of provisions from Sesios.
VTrepe/SaXov to. oprj. XeN. An. iv. 4. 23.

They crossed tJie mountains.
orav ot avSpes kKfiOxn rrjv rfXiKiav, d(f>i^croij.î/ irov avrovs
kXevBkpovs. Pl. Rep. 461.
As soon as the men exceed the prescribed limit of age we shall,
I presume, set them free.
01 77/Doyovot ovSeva ttoj— ore /ctvSwov eêa-r-qa-av. DeM. 20. 10.
Our ancestors never shirked any danger.
Cf. Verg. Aen. v. 438, vim viribus exit (i.e. evitat).
TO TOVS TVpdvVOVS €t(T tCVOt. DEM. 418. 13.
To act the part of tyrants.
76 THE CASES.
3. Many Compound Verbs, which in their composite form

are equivalent to transitive Verbs :
Svj/xaywyei tous d'vSpas. XeN. An. vii. 6. 4.
H.e wins men by popular acts.
Tov IttDTOu irarkpa yqpoTpoffiel. DeM. 24. 203.

fie nurses his fatlier in his old age.
fXTj TO. X^'P^ <îA.oveiKôrat. ThUC. v. 111.
Not through contentiousness to choose the worse.
Cf. Soph. Ant. 994, Schneidewin, w. note.

So I manage, or regulate.
otKovo/xw (toi/ /Siov),
(rvKO(f)avT(a (riva), I calumniate, or accuse falsely.
XoyoTToiw {(rvii(f>opds), I make up tales (of troubles).
KaTavavjxaxQ), I overpower in naval tcarfare.
KaraTToXefiw, I overpower in war.
4. Special Verbs.
•yeAw, I ridicule (nva) SaKpvw, I weep for (^t'Aovs, friends),
;
Eur. Frag,
(jiddvw, I anticipate {tov? />ieXAovTas, those who are purposing).
î;Acu, / emulate (rovs dyaOovs, the good).
<},vXd^crop.aL, ) ^^v^
J. j^^^^^ ^j: ^^^^^ fj^^ j^^)^
evAapov[j.at, )
d/xvi/o/xat, J dfe/emZ myself against (tovs TroXe/xiovs).
Tipnopoviiai, I take vengeance on (tov ôvcvo-avra, Â^
mwr-
rferer).
/orce (tov 'icnrXow, entrance,
^tdô/xai, / /orcg, win 6^/
tlie
Thuc. vii. 22).

o-tw-w, /âss over in silence (ra St/cata, is right). w^^
XavOdvo}, I elude the notice of (tov SiwKovra, the pursuer),
vpodvixovfiat, I promote {ttjv ^v[Mf3a(rtv, the treaty, Thuc.
V. 17).
01 'kO-qvaioi TOV? twv IvpaKoa-'nav lincka? e4>o(3-^6i](rav.
Hie Athenians were afraid of the Syracusan cavalry.
dSuvaTtt Tjv Tous AoKpovs d/jLVvea-Oai. ThUC. IV. 1.
It was impossible to keep off tlie Locrians.
Tt (^vXdâaOai cf^yjfii 8elv 7}/x5s Dem. de Pace iv. ;
WTiat do I maintain we must guard against ?

6 KXewv inredi^vye tov ttXovv v(î(TTaTai tov ttXovv.
. . .
Thuc. iv. 28.
Cleon was trying to hack out of the expedition: he undertakes

tlie expedition.
— —
THE EXTERNAL ACCUSATIVE. 77
5, 'OfxyvfiL and expressions of swearing, fid, ov fid, va\
lid, vq.
fia Aia, nay, hy Zeus.

v-q or vai Tov Aia, yea, by Zeus.
ov TOV Ata, ov fia tov Ata, nay, by Zeus.
o/ico/xoKO)? Tois deovs, having sivorn by the gods, Dem. 301, 1.
ov /MO. TOV Ai', or (in answers), Ko, by Zeus, not, etc.

ov jxa TOV At', ov fiev 8-q, No, by Zeus, not so indeed.
Note 1. The poets use great freedom in making Verbs

transitive.
Tovs ydp evcrefSils deot
dvqcTKOVTas ov xp.ipovo-i.
At a good man's death
The gods rejoice not. See Peile, Primer of Philology, p. 131.
So ^êv x^pa. Soph. Ai. 44 (J ebb's note); x'^P^'"'^ ^ô^> I cele-

brate the god in the dance, PiND. Isth. I 7, Sopa Ant. 1152;
XopevcLV ydpLOvs, EUR. /. A, 1047. So jiaivi.iv (-poftaiveiv)
iroSa.
Note 2. An Accusative is found after a compound expres-

sion which isequivalent to a Verb. Many accusatives in the
poets may be thus explained.
Ktti Trdvwxot Br) 8ta— Aoov Ka6iar-aa-av
vawv avaKTes —dvra vavriKov Aewv. AeSCH. Pers. 384.

So all night long the captains of ships were keeping afloat (or
sailing in and out) the whole naval host (Stair. Kadia-Taa-av
=one verb).
ot/xwyav 'Aya/xe/tvoia
Tiv' act TttKeis SOPH. JOl. ;
With what melting lament bemoanest thou Agamemnon ?
(TttKets oinoiydv=one verb.)

et Se ji' 58' aet Xoyovs
It^p Y€S (Aoyors epqpx^'i = ~pocr€(f)Wvei.s, Jebb).
Soph. El. 556.
If thou hadst been ever accosting me thus.
Cf.Aesch. Ag. 788 ; Soph. O.C. 583.

See Schneidewin on Soph. Ant. 212.
Cf. Terence, Eauton, Prol. 41, Mea causa causam banc
iustam esse animum-inducite.
78 THE CASES.
Note 3. Poetical and comic use of the Accusative with verbs

of looking (an Internal Accusative).
There are many Hon»sric phrases.

vvp ocÔaXjxola-i SeSopKios, Od. xix 446 (looking, i.e. flash-
ing fire).
So Apy]v (iXk—eLv, 0€pK£(r6at, dXKrjv opav,

"Apr) SeSo/DK-oTuv. Aesch. Se^t. c. Theb. 553.
Aristophanes is very fond of this idiom,

Trpos Twv dewv, avOpoirre, vav^paKTOV f3Xe~eL^.
Arist. Ach. 95.
'fore Jieaven, fellow, thou looFst an irondad.
So fiXi-etv voLTTv (mustard), o/i<âKas (sour grapes).

"to look black," "look daggers," and Eamlet, "I will
Cf.
speak daggers." " He speaks holiday, he smells AprU and
May," 3Ierry Wives, iii 2.
§ 91. THE GENITIVE.

Preliminary note on the Genitive.
The Greek Genitive is the case of Connexion and its op
posite, dis-Connexion or Separation. The Genitive propei
denotes the class (yei-os) to which a thing belongs. Thus
vo/xtcr/xa dpyvpiov, a coin of silver ; the coin belongs to the
class silver. Both in etymology and signification the Genitive

is akin to an adjective. (See ]\Iax Muller, Lectures on the
Science of Language, i. 105; second edition.) The Ablative,
on the other hand, denotes that from which a thing is re-
moved. The signification of the lost Ablative has passed
into the Genitive. But in the Greek Genitive we can never,
perhaps, be sure where we have a strictly Ablative meaning,
for as the Genitive denotes Connexion, by a natural law of
association, it also denotes the opposite, dis-Connexion, i.e.
Separation. Further, Connexion (or Relation) is so elastic a
conception, that the usages of the Genitive have, by a series
of loose analogies, been almost indefinitely extended. This
is what we should expect when we consider the popular and
unscientific growth of Syntax. It is not possible to tabulate
all the usages of the Genitive, or to avoid cross-divisions.
POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. 79
The Partitive Genitive so-called is a misnomer, due to a

confusion of thought. The Genitive denotes the whole, that
on which it depends denotes the part. Lastly, as the Accu-
sative essentially depends on a Verb or Verbal notion, the m
Genitive essentially depends on a Substantive or Substantival
notion.
§ 92. POSSESSIVE GENITIVE,

The Genitive denotes the Possessor, that to which a
thing belongs ; with
A. Nouns and Adjectives, oUeios, lBios [own, peculiar, or

belonging to); Upos, consecrated to; and their opposite, aAAo-
rpios. These also (lepos very rarely) take a Dative.
Nouns, etc.
r) Tov Trarpo? oiKta or tj oiKia rov Trarpof.

The father's house.
rj TToXt? diravTOiv tcov ttoXltcov koivt] eariv. AndOK.

The city is common to all the citizens.
lpo<i yap ovTO<i todv Kara -^dovo^ Oecov. EuR.

Consecrated is that one to the nether gods.
B. Verbs.
Aaiav eavTwv TTOiovvrat.
ol Uipcyai, ttjv XeN.
The Persians are claiming Asia as their oion.
Ti<; ea-ff 6 ^wpo?; rov dewv vo/jiiêTat ; SoPH. 0. C. 38.

What spot is this ? To which of the gods is it held
sacred (considered to belong)!
Note 1. The Neuter Article with the Genitive is freely

used ra twv êtoVjTci rwv 'EAAtjvojv (to, 'EAAt^vikoi),
: the affairs,
concerns, lands, history, etc., of tlie Gn'eeJcs ; to ttJs oXiyapxla^,
the nature of oligarchy, or oligarchy.
Note 2. In certain familiar phrases there is an ellipse of the

word on which the Genitive depends : ev "AcSov, in Hades ; es
"AiSov, to Hades ; ets StSao-KaAou, to the master's {sc. house).
— ;
8o THE CASES.
Note 3. The Genitive denotes the person or thing to which

something is suitable or becoming (it is a sign of, a mark of,
it requires, etc.).
TovTo ecTTt TraiôvTos. Plat. Apol. 14.
This is {the conduct) of one who is jesting (this is mere banter).
€(TTivapa StKatov avSpos pXaimiv koX ovtlvovv dvdpunrwv

Plat. Eep. 1. 335.
Is it the part of a just man to (will a just man) injure any
one whomsoever ?
TToWrjs dvoias Koi to drjpaa-dai Kevd. SoPH. El. 1054.
It shows (it is) great madness even to engage in an idle quest.
In expressions of sonship the substantive on which the

Genitive depends may be omitted ^(OKpdr-qs 6 Sox^povto-Kov,
:
NiKias o NtK7;/DaTov, QovKvScSrjs 6 'OXopov. More briefly, MtA-

ticiStjs KifjLwvos. Poet. Atos "Apre/it?, Artemis daughter of Zeus ;
,
'OlXyjos raxvs Ai'as, Aias swift son of Oileus. HoM.

Ohs. —This is sometimes called the Genitive of Origin, or
Descent, or Source. It is a genitive of the possessor, or of the
class, for, as Max Miiller points out, it is equally correct to say
o vlos rov Trarpos, as to say 6 TraTrjp rov vlov.
TTttT/Dos Xeyerat Kvpos yevecrâi Yiaiifiva-ov.

Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 1.
It is said that Cyrus was the son of Cambyses.

So in poetry, ^viat, Âao-reiv, Tpacfirjvai tivos.
§ 93.
GENITIVE OF MATERIAL OR CONTENTS.
The Genitive denotes the Material of which a thing
consists, or the Contents of a thing.
With Nouns, etc. :
v6^JLi(Tfia dpyvpiov {=^vo[ii<7fia apyvpovv).

A coin of silver (Old Eng. adj. a silvern coin).
opcoat awpov; cnrov, ûXcov, Xidcov. Xen. Hell. iv. 4. 1 2.
They see piles of grain, timber, stones.

o-wfj-a SetAatas (riroSov. SOPH. Elect. 758.
A body of pitiable ashes.
—— ,
GENITIVE OF AMOUNT.
B. With Verbs :
01 aTe<f)avot poScov rjaav aXX! ov j^pvcrtov. Dem.

The v/reaths were of 7'oses, and not of gold.
defieXtoi TravTOKov \c6cov viroKeLvrai. Thuc.
The substructions were made of stones of all sorts.
Free and poetical uses :
(fiOivi] opOliav KOiKVjxdTO)v. Soph. Antig. 1206.

A. voice of shrill laments.
irvorj (jioiviov (TTaXdyfiaTOS. SOPH. Antig. 1239.
A gasp of Uoody dew.
Expressions such as 'Kdi^vOtv ttoAis, the city of Athens (con-
trast with "urbs Eoma"); Tpoirjs -KToXUdpov, the city of Troy
are poetical.
§ 94. GENITIVE OF AMOUNT.

Another aspect of the Genitive of Material is where it
denotes the Amount of Spctce, Time, Money.
oKTco (TTaSicov Tel'ô<i. Thug.

A wall of eight stades.
rpiav rjfiepaw 6Bo<;. XeN.
A journey of ten days (a ten days^ journey).
TpiaKovra TcCkavrcov ovcna.
A property of thirty talents.
eTnTi)8eia rpiwv r^jxepiHv eXafSov. XeN. Cyr. V. 3. 35,

They took provisions for three days.
yafxeiv Seu irreiSdv erajv y ti? TpiaKovra. PlAT. Legg. 721.
A man should marry ivhen he is thirty years old.
TTvpafJus Xcdtvi] TO [j.ev evpos ecos irXWpov, to Se v\pos Svo
TvXkdpuiv. Xen. Anah. 3. 4. 9.
A stone pyramid in breadth one plethron, in height two

plethra.
)(^lXlwv 8/Da;(/*alv Slki^v (fievyo). DeM. 55. 25.
/ am defendant in a suit involving a thousand drachmae."^
' With the Genitive of Amount may be connected the Genitive of
Value.
82 THE CASES.
§ 95. GENITIVE OF PLENTY OR WANT.

With the Genitive of Material may be associated the
Genitive after words of Plenty or Want.
A. Adjectives and Adverbs : fteo-To's, TrX-^p-qs, e/xTrXcws-,
irAovcrtos, evSei;?, Trevrjs, kcvos, eprj/xos, yv/ivds, Kadapos, aAts.
irorajjiO'i ttXt/p?;? t^^yajy. XeN.

A river full of fishes.
TO T^9 Aridi)<i rrreBtou Kevov ean Bevopcov.

Plat.
The plain of Lethe is hare of trees.
TVpavvos
'^
TToXXwv (bofSoiv Kal Idcotcov /UeCTTOS.
Plat. Eep. 579.
A despot filled mth many fears avd desires.
So with a Substantive : airopia. a-irov, scarcity of provisions.
TrX-qpw, irXyjOw, ye/tw,

B. Verbs : Trt/iTrA-i^/xt, kuTrlixirX-qpn,,
/xecTTw, evTTopQ, Seo/ittt, Sei, OTravi^w {KexPWO.t, Kex/)''?/ê»'OS, Epic

and poetical).
TO. îfiXla *Avaâ<yopov jifiet tovtcov twv Xoyaiv.

Plat.
The hooTcs of Anaxagoras teem ivith these statements.
ecnrdvLôv Tpo(f)rj<i to?9 iroWoLf;. ThuC.

TJiey were in want of provisions for the majority.
Trauo-ai, Trplv opyrjs Kape pea-rCJa-ai. SOPH. Ant. 28.

Peace ! ere thou fill me too with wrath.
6 Trapwv Kaipos TroXXrjs <^/DOvrtSos Kal f3ovXris Seirat.

The present occasion requires much thought and counsel
ov irovwv Ki'xji-qpiOa. EUR. Med. 334.
We have no lack of troubles.
Obs. XkKTpa Trip-irXaTai SaKpvp.aa-i,v. AeSCH. Pers. 100.

Tlieir couches are filled (watered) with tears.
Here the dative of Instrument is used.

— —
THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 83
Note. The constructions of Set, Sew :
QV TToXAor TTOVOV /;l€ Set,
7 Aare tw need of much trouble.
TTOtas /iot Set (fipovTiSos: ; SoPH. Elect. 612.

/F^fl^ care 7i€gc? I?
TToXXov Seoj kfj-avTov ye aSiK^cretv. PlAT. Apol. 17.
I am far from intending to urong myself.
Common phrases with Set are ttoXXov Bd, far from it ; or,
TToXXov (personally used), nothing of the sort; oXlyov Set,
Se(jj
there wants little, all but ; oXiyov, (alone) almost ; oXiyov ifiavrov
lireXad 6/jLtjv, Plat. Apol. i., I icellnigh forgot myself {ivho I was).
So fMLKpov, icithin a little, almost.
OKTU) a?7oSeovTes T/3taKocrtot^292. ThuC. iv. 38.
Svotv Seovres — evTv/Kot'Ta = 48.
§ 96. THi: PARTITIVE GENITIVE {SO CAIL ED).

The Partitive Genitive so called (the Genitive is the
whole, the word on which it depends is the part) is
used :
A. With any part of speech denoting participation.
TToKkoi Twv Adrjvaicov.

Many of the Athenians.
TO hvo fiept] rrj'i arparia^;.
Two-thirds of the army.
A67)vai(ov ôv\ofievo<;.
Any one of the Athenians vjho ivishes.
rSyv iroKefiifov at fiev airoiXovTO, ol Se ecfjvycv.
Of the enemy some fell, while others esca/pcd.
TWV TToAtTWV TtS, OVTtS (TTpaTOV. SOPH. Al. (twiCB.)

One of the citizens, no one in the host.
dvrjp Twv p-qTopojv (ARIST. Eq. 423, dvqp rt's). =
One of the speakers ; so, 8-qfj.ov dv-qp, a man of the people
(Xen. Cyr. iL 2. 22).
17 vavs dptxna cTrAet TravTos rov arpaTOTreSov. LyS.
The ship was the best sailer in the whole squadron.
—
84 THE CASES.
B. Especially after adjectives denoting participation

and their opposites êTO')(p<;, —
d/ji,eToô<i,
: tao/jboipos,
aK\r)po<i, afioLpo<;, ayevaroq.
/jbeTO')(ô'; av €ii]<i rov (povov Bpaaa<; rdBe. EuR.

TIiou wouldst this bloodshed share shouldst thou do
this — {particeps sis caedis).
C. With Verbs, especially with those of giving or

taking a share.
fi€Te)(o}, [xcTea-TL (fj-oi), jx^TaXap-fSavoy, I have., or take, a share;
piTairoiovpai, I claim a share ;
fxeraSiSwfxc (nvt), Kocvojvio (rtvi),
/ give a share (to a person, nvi), 7rpo(nt]K€L poi, I have a con
cem in.
avdpwTTOv '^V'^rj rov Oeiov p,eTe)(ei. Plat.

The soul of man partakes of divinity.
ov pêrahcoaovai rjp.lv t?}? apXV'^ AaKehaipiovLOL.
Herod.
The Lacedaemonians will not give us a share in the
empire.
ovhev 7rpocr7]Ket p,oi Tri<i atTLw; ravTT]<i. Antiph.

T have nothing to do with this a^cicsation (i.e. it does
not concern me).
D. Also Verbs of eating, tasting, or drinking, or any

Verb denoting participation in a thing ttlvoo, kadlw, :
yevco, jevopiai.
TTivco Tov OLvov, ea6i(i) Kpecov.
I drinh wine, I eat meat.
Tr]<i <yrj<i erepôv.

They ravaged {some of) tlic land.
irepbiret rwv Avhwv.

He sends some {of the) Lydians.
oaroi e<J3ayov twu Ktip'nav TravTCS a<j)poves iytyvovTO. XeN.
All wJu) ate of the honeycombs soon became rriad.
—
THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 85
The partitive n may be inserted, cf. anoXavnv ri nvos, to

enjoy some advantage from some source.
Note 1. Many of these verbs are used transitively and take

an Accusative {denoting " an object completely overpowered,"
J. Grbevi). TTtVw oTvov, Aay;i(ai'w ti, / attain something, nvos,
a share of something ; so TrAeio-Tov /xepos nvos /xerex^tv, to have
the greatest part of something (where /xepos is a Avhole).
Note 2. Instead of a neuter singular with a partitive Geni

tive the adjective of certain words {ijuLcrv?, ttoXvs, TrAetcrTos,
Aot-os) often agrees in gender with the genitive 6 : r]/xL(Tvs, or
o AotTTOs, Tou xpovov ; Tov )(p6vov 6 TrAetcTTOS, TToWrj T7^? ^wpas
(XeN. Cyr. iii. 2. 2). Cf. ThUC. i. 2, t^s yrjs rj dpia-rr].
Note 3, Many Adverbs of place are joined with a partitive

Genitive : ttov yrjs ; ubi terrarum 1 Travraxov yrjs, ovSa/xov yrjs'
(xAAoi dWfi TTjs TToAews, Thug. ii. 4 ; TnqviKa rrjs -^[xepas ; at
what time of day ? Troppoi rrjs ^^/j.epds, twv vvktcjv, dê T^?
&pa?.
Many such phrases occur in the poets :
TTOV yvw/ATjs ttot' €t"; Soph. Antig. 42.

What is thy purpose 1
Kov ttot' €1 (f)pevQv ; SoPH, Elect. 390 (see 404).

JVhat is thy mysterious intent ?
irol Adywv eA6â> ; SOPH. Elect, 1174,

What words shall I utter 1
yaias opvâs evda, k.t. A. SOPH. Aiax 659.

Hiding it in tlie earth where, etc.
01 /x' aTifiias aycLS ; SoPH. Elect. 1035.

To what infamy art thou leading me ?
Note 4. The neuter of a pronoun or adjective, or adverb,

is not unknown to Greek, but not so common as in Latin
(paullum sapientiae, parum sapientiae, aliquid divitiarum,
quicquid deorum, etc.). rt a-Taa-Laa-fiov, Thuc. iv. 130;
d[j.'q)(âvov evSaip-ovias, PlAT. Apol. aroTra tjjs (TjxiKpoXoyias, ]
Plat. Thaeaet. 175; Itti /êya 8vvdp.eo)<; xutpilv, Thug. i. II8;

€—1 TrAeicTTOv dvdpunrcov, ThUC. i. 1 ; ev 'tô.vtI kukov, PlAT. Bep.
579; €1' Tw (Tvfi4>opo.^ ; SoPH. Antig. 1229.
— —
86 THE CASES.
Note 5. The word on which a partitive Genitive depends

has often to be supplied :
kjxk de's tQv 7re7reto-/A€i/wv. PlAT. Eep. 424.

Set me down as one of those who are convinced.
SoA-WV TWV €7770, CTOC^tCTTCOV eKX'qOrj. ISOCR. Ant'ul. 235.
Solon ivas called one of the Seven Sages.
§ 97. GENITIVE OF CONNEXION.

The following Verbs denoting Connexion take a Geni-
tive :
A. Verbs signifying to aim at, hit or attain, miss.
(TTox<îoixai, aim at ; opeyofxat, reach out towards, strive for ;

Tvy\dv(3i, KvpQ, ecjuKvov/xai, hit, secure, obtain, attain ; onro-
Tvy;(dvco, a[xapT(xvo), miss, lose ; êuSo/xat, crâWojiai, I am
disappointed, balked of (N.B. Kixdvto generally takes ar
Accusative.)
B. Catch hold of, touch, cling to (be separated from, see

Gen. of separation).
XafjLfSdvofiai (and compounds with €7rt, dvTt), airrofiat,
eâTTTo/jiai, dLyydvw, I catch hold of, touch, grasp ; exo/*"'> ^
cling to, etc. (see examples), dvrexo/xat, I cling to, uphold.
C. Malce t7'ial of, begin, have experience in.
Tretpo), ireLpwfjLaL, I try, attempt ; a/o^w, apypixai, I begin ; ifi-

Tret/Dwg exô, I am experienced in.
D. Verbs of the senses : hear, smell, taste, touch (see B.),

enjoy. (But verbs of seeing take an Accusative.)
aKovo), I hear; d.KpoQ> p.ai, listen to, attend lectures ; 6(r(f)paivonai,
smell (trans.) ; o{w, smell (neut.); yevw, give a taste of; yevo/xai,
taste^ d-oXavw, enjoy. (The last two verbs more often meta-
phorically than literally.)
E. Perceive, understand, remember, forget.
al(r6dvop.ai, I perceive ; TrvvOdvo/j-ai, learn by inquiry ; ^wcrjfii,

•understand ; fxifx,vq(rKOfj.ai., remember ; kin\avddvoiJ.o.i, foi'gef.
— ;
GENITIVE OF CONNEXION. 87
F. Care for, long for, desire, neglect, despise.
fieXei (/xoi), iTTiixeXovfiai, I care for; Tretvw, Sixjyw, hunger,

thirst after (literally and metaphorically) ; epQ, love, long foi-
evTpeTTOfjLai, respect ; oXiywpQ, d/ieAcu, disregard, neglect ; kotu-
<{>povia, despise.
A. Examples :
Bet aro'âaacrdaL Bcavoia<;. ISAEU3.

We ought to aim at intellect.
Tov aKOTTOv dj-iaprayv rod iraiSoq ervêv. AnTIPH.

Missing the mark, he hit the child.
eipiKvelrat rrj'i a/jer^?. ISOCR.
He attains unto virtue.
TravTcs ware roôrac (tkottov

TOêver dvSpbs rovSe. SOPH. Antig. 1033. Cf. 1084.
Ye all, as archers at a mark,
Are shooting at this heart.
Ti p.oi Twv 8v(rcf)6p(ov i<pUi ; SoPH. Elect. 141.

JFIiy art thou aiming at the insupportable ?
yap Trpo^kvov Kar-qwcrav.

cf)i\i]S SOPH. Elect. 1451.
They met with a kind hostess.
crrpaTos Kvp-qcrei voo-rt/Aov (TOiTrjpias. AeSCH. Pers. 793.
The host shall meet ivith returning deliverance {i.e. a safe
return).
Obs. iTmvyxa.v<ii, irpovTvyxavfa, to come ocross, fall in with

one, take a Dative.
B. Examples :
j^.B. — \afji/3dva), Kparw take an Accusative of the pei -

son or thing seized, and a Genitive of the thing seized.
rov \vKov Tcov o)T(ov Kparco.
I get hold of the wolf hy the ears.
So dyeiv -êipdî, to lead by the hand.

tov '0/dovt7;i/.
e'Aa/Sov T/^s ^wvT^s XeN. An. i. 6. 10.
They seized Orontes hy his girdle.
—
THE CASES.
C. Examples :
Kvpo^ rjpX^ '^^^ ôyov wSe. Xen.

Cyrus began the conversation as follows (i.e. Wfts the,
first to speoJc).
êvo(f)0)v Tov Xoyov rjp'êro wSe. XeN.

Xenophon began his speech as folloios.
N.B. — cip'xêLv Xdjcov, to he the first to speak ; apx'âdai

Xoycou, to begin one's speech.
aTTOireipciip.evo'i t]/m(ov eypa-Yco rrjv ypacprjv ravTrjv.
Plat.
Tou were making trial of me when you brought this
indictment.
D. Examples :
^povjrj'i cLKovaa^ firjBaiJiaxi iroppw <pvyT)<;. Philemon.

When you hear thunder by no means run away,
ri BrJTa KXciec^ ; KpofifjLV(ov oa^patvofjiai. Ak.

Why are you vjeeping then ? I smell onions.
So c(T(f)palvecrdaL Trj<; Tvpavvtho';. Ak. Lys. 619.

€vBv'i 8e SetVas ifJLWvpojv eyevojxrjv. SOPH. Ant. 1065.
Straightway in terror I made trial of burnt-sacrifice.
OTTOi av iXdu), AeyovTOS e/xov aKpodcrovTai ot veoi.
Plat. Ap. xxvii
Wherever I go young men mil listen to my wm'ds.
Note. With aKpodfiat, cf. the use of dTro8exopai (I accept from,

approve): p-r) ravra a-oSexecrê 'Ayvparov (LyS. 13. 83), do not
accept this statement from (a Genitive of Separation) Agyratus.
So diro^kxârdat rivos AeyovTOS. OKoXavui Ttvos {I enjoy, literally
and figuratively).
o^co, / smell of.
avrat jxev oôikt' dpfi po(Tia<i Kol veKTapos. AR. Ach. 196.
These smell of ambrosia and nectar.
Verbs of perception also mean to hear from, as well as to hear.
roiavTa rov TrapovTOS e/cArov. SOPH. £1. 424.

Thus much was I hearing from one ivho was present.
——
GENITIVE OF CONNEXION. 89
See Ai. 318. So—

€i5ei'ai <jov TrpwrtcTTa xpy\{yi. SoPH. El. 668.
Fain icould I first and foremost know from thee.
So with a sentence :
TOt'rwv aKOve ri Xeyovcriv.

Hear from these men wJmt they say.
But more usually a preposition (jrapd, tt/dos, e^) is added.
E. Examples :
avOpcoTTO'; cov fj,efivr)(70 T779 Koivrj^ Tv^r)<;. MeNAND.

Being a man, rememher the common lot.
oKcyov €/jiavTov eTre\a6ofir]v. Plat.

/ almost forgot myself {who I luas).
ovK TjcrdavovTO TrpoaiovTwv rcov TToXe/XLCov. Xen.

They were not aware of the approach of the enemy.
eirvOovro ttji; IIvXov KaTei\,i]/jL/j,evr}<;. Thuc.

They heard of the capture of Pylos.
F. Examples :
ri Tjfuv T?7? rwv iroWoyv B6^<i fxeXet ; Plat.

What care we for the opinion of the world ?
iretdo) vfia<i /jbrjre awfiarmv eTrtfieXtla-dai fnjre -^prj/ia-
T(ov. Plat.
/ try to persuade you to care neither for the 'body nor
for money.
Treivw x^prjp.a.TOiv, kiraivov, XeN. ayaOoyv, PlAT.
/ hv.nger after (i.e. long for) money, praise, good things.
So 8t\pio, Plat. Rep. 562 c.
Tov davarov Kai, KivSvvov wKvywprjae. Plat.

He disregarded death and danger.
Note 1. iikXii and /xera/jieAei take a genitive of thing, and

dative of person.
fieXet fiOL TOVTOv.
I care for this, hoc mihi curae est.
fieTafxeXeL /zot toiitov.

/ repent of this ; huius rei me jjoenitet.
— —
90 THE CASES.
Note 2. Adjectives witli these significations are found with

the Genitive :
eSpav TravTos evdyrj CTTpaTOV, AeSCH. Fers. 465.

A throne in full view of all tJie armada.
kur-qPoXos (^pevwv. SoPH. Antig. 492.
Possessed of reason (compos mentis).
Note 3. In the following examples observe the various

meanings of Ixo/iai :
Tuiv'Evvea oBav eKparrjcrav.

They ohtained possession of the Nine Roads. Thug.
T^s fJL£V yvw/j.rjs, S 'AOrjvaioi^ del rrjs avTrjs e\ofj.ai. ThUC.
/ hold, Atlienians, to the same unchanged opinion ever.
hrovTai kôfievoi twv apfxaruiv. XeN.

They folloio, coming next to the chariots.
6 7rXt]yeU del rqs 7rXr]yr]<s e'xerat, DeM. Phil. 1. 10.

The boxer who has been striicJc ever follows the blow.
Travres koivq ttjs o-wrr^/otas e)(e(r6e. XeN. Anab. vi. 3. 17.

All together provide for your safety.
With €xo[j.aL compare the parallel meanings of el/xL. t/js

avTijs yvwfirjs e^vat, ThUC. V. 46. tw avTWv Aoywv eTvai, PlAT.
Gorg. 489 (to keep to the same tale).
§ 98. SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE GENITIVE.

O (f)0^0<i TCOV TToXefltCOV.
The fear of the enemy.
This Genitive of Connexion is naturally ambiguous.
It may mean either (1) the fear which the enemy feels.
Here rcov •jroXefiiaiv is Subjective, being equivalent to the

subject of the verb, and the sentence ot jroXe /jlioi, (f)o- =
ôvvrai (rjfia^) or (2) the fear (which we feel) of or for
:
the enemy. Here rcHv TroXefilcov is Objective, being equi-

valent to the object of a transitive verb, rifieh ôôviieda
rov<; TToXe/z-toi;?.
—
GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. 91
o\ avOptDTTot. 5ta TO auTwv (Subjective Gen.) Seos tov 6avd-

Tov KaraipevBovTaL, PlAT. Plioed. 85 ( avTOt SeStores =
TOV davaTOV^.
Men, hy reason of their fear of death, tell lies.
Sta T7)i/ Tou dre/xov (Subjective) aTrcucrtv twv vavaytcui/ (Ob-

jective). Thuc. vii. 34.
In consequence of the wind driving the wrecTcs into the open sea.
The Objective Genitive represents usually an object in the

A^ccusative or Genitive after a verb, more rarely a Dative.
Ace. 8ia Tlavcraviov /xicros, ThUC. i. 96. izodos tov oltto-
davovTOS'
Gen. iindvfiLa xp^fô.T'^v, €7ri/xeAeta rwv Trpay/jLaTOiv.

Dat. ififiovrj tov KaKov, Plat. Gorg. 479. Cf. efi/xivetv tw kokw.
TTttT/DOS Ti/Awpds KafJLOv TttAatvTjs, SOPH. Elect. 811.
The following maybe regarded as free uses of the Objective

Genitive : Xvjxrj (Siov, SoPH. Elect. 1195, outrage on life ; Sva--
fj.€i'Cjv 9y']pa, Soph. Ai. 564, hunting tlie foe. So Tret/aa exdp^v.
Soph. Ai. an attempt on, or against, one's enemies ; to tw Me-
2,
yapkiiiv Thuc. i. 140, decree against the Megarians
xJ/TjcjiLcrfia,
(where the preposition Trepi would have been more usual.)
§ 99. GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE.

The Genitive denotes the time within which anything
takes place. The Genitive is the whole, the time is
either indefinite, or recurring. vvKro<;, hy night; r?}?
ri[jLepa<i, hy day ; tov avrov 6epov<;, during the same sum-

mer ; TOV XoLTTov, for the future; iKciarov erov^, each
year ; Tpl<; tov eviavTov, thrice in the year.
N.B. — With the Article the Genitive is distributive.
Sa)KpaTr)<; to avTO l/xaTLOv rjix<pUaT0 6epov<; re Kol

Xen.
êt/A&Jiô?.
Socrates wore the same mantle summer and winter.
hpajQiTiv ekajiâve r?}? rjixepa'i (or t^9 r)ijiepa<i
eKa(7Tr)<i).
He used to receive a drachma a clay (each day).

—
92 THE CASES.
Note 1. or T»/ avry yj/J-^pf (often with small

T7JS avTTjs rjfj.epa's
difference, Madvig) rov avrov depovs and ev tw a-ur^ depei
;
(Thug. iv. 133); rov Xolttov or to Aoittov, /o?* the future.

So ciAXv;? rj/xepas, SOPH. ^/. 690, 0?l another day: ov /xaKpov
xpovov, Soph. EI. 478, within no long while : rov Xolttov xpovov,
Soph. El. 817, for the future: a/cpas wktos, Soph. Ai. 285, o^
(^m£? midnight: tt}? TrdpoiOev ev^povrjs, Aesch. Per5. 182,
during the past night.
Note 2. The Genitive also denotes the space within which

anything takes place (a very rare and poetical, chiefly an
Epic, usage).
rilx€pevovra<s êvovs
/la/cpas KiXevOov. AeSCH. Ch. 705.
Guests who have been spending the day
On a long journey.
Cf. the Homeric TreStoto levat, irpricrcreLV^ etc.
Note 3. The ordinary prose Genitive of place is either the

possessive, or the (so-called) partitive Genitive. Observe that
it takes the Article :
kcrrpareva-av T^s 'ApKaSiias Is Uappacrtov?, ThUC. V. 33.

They marched against the Parrhasians in Arcadia.
Note 4. To the genitive of place, however, belong certain

prose usages.
eTreraxwov tt^s oSou tous a-)(pXa[repov Trpoo'iovras.
Thug. iv. 47.
TJiey were hastening on the way those who tvere advancing
sloivhj.
kiTopevovro toC tt/dooô). Xen. An. v. 4. 30.

They were marching onwards, forwards.
Cf. TTpOKOTrreiv rrjs apxrjs, ThUG. iv. 60. vTrayeii' tj;s o8ov,
etc. TrpoXafifSdveLV Trj<i ^vyijs, ThUC. iv. 33.
§ 100. GENITIVE OF VALUE.

The Genitive of Value goes with Verbs of Estimating,
Buying, and Selling (cf. Genitive of Amount).
GENITIVE OF VALUE. 93
Value or Estimate : dîw, judge icorthy; racro-a), rate or
value; ti/xw, valu£, assess (n/xw/iat).
Buy : 7rpta/xai, / buy; uivov/iai, I huy.

Sell : TTwAw, I offer for sale; aTroSiSo/iai, /seZZ.
^0^^ ^T^yu.aTWt' ov« ci)vr)Tr]. ISAEUS.

Reputation is not to he purchased with money.
OVK av aTrehojJirjv ttoWov Ta<i eXiriha'i. PlaT.

/ would not have sold my hopes for much.
TLfiaraL fjboc 6 avrjp davarov. PlaT.

My accuser proposes death as my penalty.
)(pvcra ^(aAKetwv Sia/jiei/Sea-dai voeis. Pl. Symp. 218 C.
You are intending to exchange golden for copper.
Note. Verbs of buying more rarely, and only in poetry,

take a dative of the price paid. See EuR. Eel. 885, Med. 233.
Free use of the Genitive of Value,
Tis fierafSaXoLT' wSe criyav Adywv. SOPH. El. 1262.
(Cf. Aesch. F. v. 987.)
Who ivo^dd change thus sUence for words ?
dvTL(TTadfxov Tou Orjpos Kop-qv. SOPH. El. 571.

A daughter weighed in the balance against a wild beast.
KaiToi TaXdvTOV ravr' e/iaêi/'YTrep/JoXos. ArIST. Nub. 876.

A7id yet Hyperbolus was taught this for a talent.
&TTI jxoi dvydrrip ydfiov wpata. XeN. Cyr. iv. 6- JJ.
/ have a daughter ripe for marriage.
Under the Genitive of Value may come the Adjectives with

their Adverbs : — aîos, dvdîos.
§ lOI. CAUSAL GENITIVE.

The Causal Genitive (so called) goes with verbs (and
other words) denoting emotion. It is probably a Geni-
tive of Connexion or Eelation, meaning with regard to,
in connexion with.
—
94 THE CASES.
6avfMd(w, I wonder at or admire; evBaifiovi^d), I congratu-

late; oiKTeipo), I pity ; opyiôfiai, I am angry; <^ôvc3, I envy
or griLdge ; (rjXo), I envy (in good sense) or praise; /xaKapiô),
I felicitate ; ayafxai, I wonder at, admire.
K,ri\a) ere rov vov, Trjiv, T//S ai/otas tiis cr' I— otKTetpoj TraAai. SOPH. El. 920.
Fie f how I have been pitying thee this long while for thy
folly.
(rrjs dvoias may go with (f)iv.)
OpaxTOvs TOuS' OVK dAvêt?. SOPH. El. 627.

For this daring thou shall not escape,
eiirep ri KXdeis twv 'OpecrTetwv KaKwv. SOPH. El. 1117.

If thou hast a tear for the woes of Orestes.
Note 1. A similar Genitive is used in exclamations :
<^£u Tov dvSpos, woe for, or, fie on the man ! w ZeC /SaaiXev
Trj's Ae-TOTijTos Twv <f)pev5)v, Ar. Nuh. 153, Pi,oyal Zeus! what
subtlety of wit ! ot'/xot r^s Tt'x^s, w fxaKapuov r^s (f)V(reo)<s, etc.,
o-^êrAia toAjuvjs, EuR. Al. 741. w xaAatv' eyw crWev, SOPH.
El. 1210, ah, woe is me on thy account, wpot yeAwros, Soph.
Ai. 367, ah me for the mockery. Curtius compares des Leides.
Note 2. Tov, with the Infinitive, denoting the Aim or Purpose

of an action (Final), seems to be a Causal Genitive.
Mti'ws TO XycTTLKOv €K T7JS daXd(Tcn)s TOV Tcis irpovohovs

fidXXov tevat avT^. ThUC. i. 4.
Minos used to siceep piracy from the sea for the sake of his
revenues coming in to him.
Of. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 40; Soph. Phil. 197. This constructioD

occurs frequently in late Greek {LXX. and N. T.)
— :
GENITIVE WITH JUDICIAL VERBS. 95
§ 102. GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF JUDICIAL

PROCEEDINGS.^
The Genitive is used with Verbs (and words) meaning
Ai To accuse : alriw/xai, SiwKW, KarriyopQ), êijyw (/ am pro-

secuted) ; o (fiivyoiv, the defendant ; 6 StwKwv, the
prosecutor.
So also 7rpoKaXov{j.at, eire^€.ifiL.
B. To acquit : a^t-qiii, I acquit ; dTro(f)evyo), I am acquitted.
C. To condemn: atpw, / convict; KaraKpivw, Karaytyvwa-KW,

KaTajl/r](fiiôixat {by vote), I condemn; dAio-Ko/xai, /
am convicted; 6<fi\ia-Kdv(x>, I am cast in or lose
my suit.
hioiKot fiev KaT7)yopLa<;, (fidvov Be (jjevfyo). Lys.
/ am prosecuting for libel, hut am 'prosecuted for
murder.
7ravTe<i K\o7rrj<; r} Swpcov eaXcocrav (or cocpôv).

All were convicted of theft or bribery.
So dXwvai XtTToraîov, ^^revhofiapTvpiwv, to be convicted
of desertion, perjury, passim.

a-vyytyvwcTKOi rtvl Trj<; eiriOvfXta'i. PlaT.
I pardon any one his desire.
ypaêaOai Tiva Trapavo/jicov.

To indict a person for proposing unconstitutional
measures.
In the passive :
TO, fJLOV rpevSrj Karqyoprjfieva. Pl. Apol. iL

The false accusations which have been brought against me.
Note. The case in which the person or thing is put varies
greatly. The charge is generally in the Genitive, the accused
^ According to Curtius, a Genitive of Cause : perhaps a Genitive of

Connexion.
— ;
96 THE CASES.
in the Accusative : e.g. Siwkw nva <p6vov. But with some

verbs it is the reverse : KaT-qyop!^ tI rtvo?, Karaytyvwo-Kw
(KaTaKpLvo)) (f)6vov crov. Other verbs take a dative of the per-
son, i—L(TKqTrTOiMit crot <f)6vov, eyxaAw (fiovov croi. The suit or
sentence is in the Accusative, êvyw SiKrjv, Slkolô) (j)-t]<f>L(rfia,
'Fivoxos Tov (fiovov Tots tTTiTt/itois, Uoble to tkc petudties for
murder.
§ 103. GENITIVE ABSOLUTE.

The Genitive of a noun with a participle, not con-
nected ^vith the main construction of the sentence, denotes
time, cause, condition, etc.
deov Blôvto^ ovBev la'^vei <pdovo<i,
Kol fJLi] EiBovTO^; ovSev ia')(yeL 7rovo<;. MenAXDER.

If God sJiould grant, ill-will availeth naught
Nor, if he grant not, toil availeth aught.
ovTO<; yjrevBov<; eariv arrraTrj. Plat.

WJir7'e is falsehood there is deceit.
The participle alone is sometimes foimd :
eiTTOi', epojTTija-avTOS (sc. avTOv) ort MaK/Do;i'es eitriv.
Xen. An. iv. 8. 5.
They said, on his asking them, that they were Macrones.
So k^yyeXdkvTos, on its being announced; vovto<s, while it
U'as raining ; grovnng dark; nXov-

crucrKOTaôvTos, ichen it u'as
fievwv eiTTOLix av, SoPH. HI. 1334, when the end is come I unll
tell thee. See Participle (Genitive Absolute).^
^ It is difficult to decide whether this usage belongs to the Genitive
or comes from the lost Ablative. A

comparison with Latin seems to
favour the latter view. On the other hand, German uses the genitive
Absolute (see Curtius, Elucidations 197, note). In old English the
Dative was thus used. Each language seems to have proceeded inde-
pendently in its own way.
—
GENITIVE OF COMPARISON. 97
§ 104. GENITIVE WITH COMPARATIVES.

The Genitive is joined to Comparatives.
E.g. fi€(,^(ov Tov aB€\(f)ov, i.e. fiei^wv rj 6 aSe\(f)o<i.
OavaTOv 6el. PlaT.

TTovTjpla OcLTTov
Wickedness runs more swiftly than death {Jlees faster
than fate).
Note 1. The Greek Comparative, hke the Latin, often
is rendered into English, " too great," " too good," etc.
KpeiTTOv 7}v Aoyov TO KaAAos Trjs yvvaiKos.
Xex. Mem. iiL 11. 1.
The beauty of the ivoman was too great for description (lit.
greater than v:ords).
Note 2. Adjectives in -TrAao-ios, -o-rds take the same con-

struction as Comparatives.
6/c cf>eL8(i)Xtas Karedero fxi(ro^ SiTrXdcTLov tijs ot'cri'as.
In consequence of stinginess he incurred a hatred double (thai

of) his property.
iroXXocTTov fJ.epo's ^v to. ;(/37///aTa S)v I'/xets Trpoa-eBoKare.
Lys. 19. 39.
His property was a very little part of what you were expecting.
Sevrepos, second (ovSevds)to none ; vcrrepos, later than ; e-epos,
otherthan; 8ia<ôpos, different from or excelling, similarly take a

Genitive ; so vcrre/oatos, TrpoTepalo'S.
§ 105. THE GENITIVE WITH VERBS CON-

TAINING A COMPARATIVE NOTION'^
The Genitive is used with many Verbs which imply
hetter than, vjorse than; greater than, less than.
Such verbs are :

KparS) {I prevail over), nrept'^cyvofiai,
irepieLfii, virepexf^ (^^ superior to), Bcacpepco, Bcacf)epovTO}<;
eô) {excel, differ frorn), viKOiâi, ^tto)fiac {am conquered
hy, inferior to),
^ The Genitive used with Comparatives may be an Ablative use (cf.

Latin), or it may denote a general connexion, "greater in regard to."
G
:
THE CASES.
Verbs of ruling — ijyovfiac (also with dative), ap-^ôiy,
TvpavvevQ}, rvpavvo), aTpaTrjyco.
Many others : — rrXeoveicrcio, fieioveKTO), varepa), varep-

t^co, eXaTTU), ekarrovâi, XetirofjiaL.
Many take a dative (rtvl) in respect of which the

superiority or inferiority is shown.
H.B. — Biacfiepofjiai, I quarrel with, takes a dative.
epa)9 Twv deSiv âcriKevei. Plat.

Love is king of the gods.
TOVTo SLacpepoi ratv iroWcov. Plat.

In this respect I differ from (or excel) the rest of
mankind.
<yvvaLKo<i ovhafiw^ rjcra-rjTea. SOPH.
We must in nowise yield unto a woman.
yXa)(r(7r]<; fiaXtara TravTwôv iretpo) Kpareiv. Menand.
Strive ever chiefest to control thy tongue.
ap'XpVTL 7rpo(T7}KeL KapTCpta rcov iSkotwv "rrepietvat.

Xen.
A commander slwuld in enduranxe surpass private
men.
§ 1 06. GENITIVE OF SEPARATION.^

A Genitive denoting that from which anything is
separated is used with many verbs expressing removal,

distance, separation, loosing, delivering, and the like.
^ The Genitive here is the representative of the Ablative. It is im-

possible to group the usages of the Genitive under two distinct headings
(1) Genitive or Connexion, (2) Ablative or Separation. Many Ablative
or Separative uses have already been noticed (e.g. Partitive afidToxos,
Connexion a/xapTavu). Any attempt at too rigid symmetry would
violently put asunder usages which are closely connected. See Intro-
dvfitory Note.
GENITIVE OF SEPARA TION. 99
Such verbs are — Siexw, / am distant ; yinpiîa, I separate ;

(;(wptô/zai), iipyta, I exclude ; airk^ta (e^w), / withhold; (TTept-
a-KOfxai, I am deprived of ; eXcvOepQ, I set free ; i/'tAw, / strip ;
d(f>i(rTr]ixL (with, its intransitive tenses), / cause to revolt ; vavu),
I make to cease (from) ; Travofiai, Xrfyia, I cease ; dTraXXda-a-w, I
deliver from ; diraXXdo-crofJiai, I escape ; eiKU), Trapa\wpw, I yield ;
<f)€i8ofMat,, I spare.
7} vrj<70^ ov TToXv Sieêt rrj'i rjiretpov. ThuC,
Tlie island is not far distant from the mainland.
EWijviKov TToXefzov eaypv ol 'AOrjvaloi.
The Athenians desisted from the Greek war:
^TjTelre aurav vvvi aTraWayrjvat. Plat.
Tou are seeking now to he set free from them.
fiera. TavTa ^vvejSr] Qaa-iovs twv 'Adqvaiiov d~o(TTrjvai.

1. Thuc.
100.
After this it happened that the Thasians revolted from the
Athenians.
Qrjcrevs toIs 'AO-qvas Seivov irpocrTdyfxaTOS rjXevdepwcrev.

ISAE. 10. 28.
Theseus delivered Athens from a terrible tax,
etTTOv Tw Ilaro-ai'ta toG KijpvKOS fJ-rj XeiirecrOaL.

Thuc. i. 131.
They told Fausanias not to leave the herald (seeSoPR. El. 479).
Similarly with nouns, iravcrTrjp rQvSe (irovwv), SoPH. El. 384 ;

447.
XvTijpia. cfiovov, El.
Many Adjectives may be brought under this head, as

yvfivo';, A|ri\o9, Ka6apo<i, op(âvo<i, e\ev9epo<; and all :
words compounded with a privative, dfxvf]/j,(ov, aiieXr\<;,

a/jLoipo<;, ayevaTd. Most of these have already been
brought under other rules.
7) eTTidvfXLa afivrjfMoyv twv klvSvvcov. AntIPIL

Desire is forgetful of dangers.
ev')(rj<i SiKaLa(; ovk avr}Koo<; 6eo<;. MenanD.

God is not deaf unto a righteous prayer.
TOO THE CASES.
§ 107. Genitive with Compound Verbs.^
The Genitive is used with many Verbs compounded with

Prepositions, especially airo, e^, irpo, virep, Kara. Sometimes
the Preposition seems to demand the Genitive, sometimes the
signification of the Compound VerlD.
Such verbs are aTrorpe-w, cKâivw, l^to-TT^/xi, TrpoKUfxai, irpo-
Tidevai, 7r/30Tt/i.w, VTrepopio (also with Accus.), VTrepaXyoi, Kara-
yeAft), Kara^povo), KaraycyvaxTKio, and many others.
irpoa-Trji'at rv)(r]s, SoPH. Ai. 803 ; VTvepiaTacrdai, (ds, in whose
defence), Soph. FA 188.
§ 108. A Double Genitive.

Sometimes there are two Genitives in the same sentence.
In such cases the first generally refers to the agent, the
second to the object of his action.
ToLs Twv oiKeiwv TrpoTrJjAaKtcreisTov yrjpois. PlAT. Bep. 329.
The insults by relations on old age.
5ta TO avTwv Seos tov davdrov. PlAT. Phaed. 85 A.
In consequence of their fear of death.
avTtov Subjective, Savdrov Objective.
TO kXclvov 'EAAaSos
irpoa-^-qix dywvos. SOPH. El. 682.
The glorious pageant of Ch'eece, consisting in a contest.
Here the Genitives are freer ; 'EAAaSos is possessive, dyQvos

epexegetical.
§ 109. The Epexegetical Genitive.
What is called the Epexegetical (i.e. explanatory) Genitive

is a free application of the Genitive of Material.
dfjLadta avTT] rj tov oua-dat etSevai a ovk oiSe.
€7rovetSio-Tos 1}
Plat. Apol. xvii

This culpable ignorance of {which consists in) thinking ont
knmvs what one does not know,
^ Some freer and miscellaneous uses of the Genitive are added. They
have been brought together at the end of this Section in order not to
lengthen previous headings with notes on less common constructions.
;
GENITIVE OF THE AGENT.
o Se eyKtcâAos ecrrtv, 6 ras aiV^/^crets irapey^wv tou aKovetv

Kttt opav Kai 6(r(f)paii ecrdai. Pl. Phaecl. xlv.
/|{ 15 /Ae 6?-«m t(;îcA furnishes the sensations of hearing, and
sight, and smell.
§ 110. Genitive of the Agent (so-called).

In Poetry passive Verbs and passive Verbals sometimes
take a Genitive which ijractically is like an Agent, and which
in Prose would be exj)ressed by a Preposition with vtto, or
some such construction. It is not possible to refer these
constructions to one explanation. Many look like a Genitive
of the source whence, like the old English "of" {i.e. off) with
the Agent (diro, ah). In some cases it is possible that the
governing word is used like a Substantive on which the
Genitive depends.
airavTa yap croi rdfia vovO^T-qp-ara
K€ivr]s StSaKTa. SoPH. El. 344.
For all these thy admonishings of me are taught by her (come
from her).
So TrA-ryyeis dvyarpo? Trj<; e/X7js. EUR. Or. 497 (cf. Electr. 123).
Smitten by my daughter.
OUTWS aTLfios elfii to{! redvrjKOTos
oTifios oTjSevos (TV. Soph. El. 1214.
= dTlfldÔp.ai TTpOS TOV TC^VTJKOTOS.
The connexion of an/ôs with words of value may influence
the construction.
And am I thus dishonoured of the dead (i.e. by the dead) ?
Thou art by none dishonoured.
0. T. 1437 TT/oos'jyyopos, and cf. Ai. 807, <^cotos '^QirariîJ.evrj.
§111. Free use of the Genitive of Connexion.

Tj Ke/oKvpa T>js IraAtas Kat, Si/ceAtas KaAws Ko.pa~Xov KetTai.
Thuc. i. 36.
Corcyra is well situated for a coasting voyage to Italy and
Sicily.
irapdirXov is a Genitive of Connexion, 'IraAtas a sort of

Objective Genitive.
rj rwv aAAtov ^wwi/ ; Pl. Hep. 459
Tt Se t'mrwv otet (cf. 470).
Wliat do you think about horses or othei' animals ?
I02 THE CASES.
In Plato a Genitive thus introducing a Subject is often

thus introduced at the beginning of a sentence j see Eiddell,
Digest, p. 126.
TVcfiXov Tov fiiXXouTO? ci.vdpomo'S. PlAT. Sol. 12.

Man is Mind concerning the future.
ws ei Tts atrrwv eXmcTLV Kevais Trdpo's

^^qp^T dvSpo'i -ov8e k.t.X. SoPH. EI. 1460.
That if any of them hitherto were biioyed up ivith hopes con-
cerning {centred in) this man, etc.
Tor KacriyvqTOV ti ^g's ; SOPH. El. 317.

Wliat say'st thou of (about) thy brother ?
Cf. Antig. 11 ; ixvOo? ^tAwv, news of friends; cf. Antig. 633,

1182, 0. a
317.
a 8e fieyia-T' e'/3AacrT€ vop-ifia, rwvSe <f)€pop.evav

apurra. SOPH. ^/. 1095.
^M^ as mightiest of ordinances that
to the exist, in respect of
these, prospering right nobly.
T^S firjTphi i]K(o TTJ'S ifirjs (f^pdcriDV ev ots vvv ecrriv.

Soph. Tr. 1122.
/ am here to tell thee of my mother, what her present plight.
ovSap-ws l/iain-Tjs odcr^ dSeifiavTOS <f)iXot. AeSCH. Pers. 164.

Being by no means without fear for {concerning) myself, my
friends.
The a privative in dSet/xavros does not here take a genitive

of want or separation (like ttcttAwv a/xotpos, without a share of
robes). But by a loose analogy common in all language, it
may help to account for the use of the genitive.
§ 112. The Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs.

Partitive, /^leroxos, ajxe-oxôs : IcrofJLOLpos, djjLotpos, aKXrjpos,
dyevcTTOs.
Perception, (oIKOVw) : KanJKOOS, VTTqKOO'S, klT-qKOOS, (TUV^KOOS,

dvrjKOOs : VTrrfKoov Set efi'at rdv yovkoiv.
Plat. Rep. 463.
These are also found with the Dative.
Tvj TToAet Karv^KOOt lykvovTO. PlAT. Rep. 499.
They became obedient to the state.
: ;;
GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES AND AD VERBS. 1

03
Caring for,
iTrifxeX-qs, dneXrjs: ixv-qfiuiv, dfJLvrjfj.o)v, iTrLXrjo-fJiWV.
neglecting,
^tAo/zaîj?, fond of learning ; oifinadTJs, hie in
remeTubering,
learning (serus studionim).
forgetting, etc.,
Experienced in, €/i7ret/30S, a-eipos : i-urT-qiJLWv, TpifSoiv (versed in).
Aiming at, Svcrepws (perdite amans), love- sick for ; Itt^/JoAos

(compos), possessed of, or having succeeded in
gaining,
Plenty, fj-ecrros, TrAew?, TrKqprjs : ttXovo-los, d~Xq<TTOS.
Want, Trei'jjS, Kevos, ivSiqs, cTrtSc^s, iXXnrqs, yv/xvos,

^tAos, KaOapos.
Separation, €pr]p.os, 6p<t>a.v6s, iXevOepo?, ayvos (jmre from),

êiSwAo's {sparing of).
Value, TifiLos, a^tos, wvr/Tos (jmrchaseoble) : wpaios,

ripe for (Xen. Cyr. iv, 6. 9).
Comparative iyKpaTiqs, (XKpaTqs, aKparcop Kvpios, avroKpd-tap.

notion — aAAos, aAAotos, erepos, 8id<f}Opos, Siaêpovrcus.
:
Better, stronger /xecros (e.j^. Ivos Kat — ATyôvs to oAtyov fiecrov,

than, and the Plat. Foliticus,
303, A), evavn'os rtvo's, /A«
reverse, reverse of a thing / evavrios nvi, opposed to a
Different from, thing.
Connexion vrrevOvvos {responsible for a thing, but inrevOwos

generally, some Ttvi, responsible to a person) ; inroreX-qs {(f)6pov,
objective, liable to pay a tribute) ; e-Uovpos, assisting
or serviceable against {e.g. ipvxovs, cold)
TV(f>Xos {rod fj-eXXovTos, blin/.i tc-ith regard to the
future) ; crvyyvw/zajv {diiap-rjp.a.Twv, forgiving
of wrongs) ; KaKovpyos {iaxrrov), inflicting
wrongs on ; <f)(.X68o)pos {fond of giving).
Ending in -k6<s, —paK-riKos, —apacrKei'aa-TLK6<;, SiSao-KaXiKos, vopia--

TiKos, KwXvTiKOS (t^s apcTTys).
All words com- diradq'?, aSijjpos, avv/KOO?, dOkaros, dyv/ivacrTOS,

pounded with da-Ksvos {unfurnished) ; dr^X-qs (immimis)
a privative. d-ifios, etc. etc
Others have been given under previous Rules.

104 THE CASES.
§ 113. Free use of the Genitive with Substantives.
A few instances are given to show how the Genitive lends

itself tothe loosest connexion. Some may be regarded as
free Objective Genitives, some as Genitives of Separation,
others can only be regarded as Genitives of Connexion.
Trpos/SoX-q SiKcXias, Thuc. iv. 1, means of approaching Sicily,

road ttoXXwv TaXdvTwv, a lawsuit involving many
to Sicily ; St/cat
talents (cf. Genitive of amount) ; Kpdros rwv Spw//evwv, Soph.
El. 85, victory in our enterprise ; irarpos Xovrpd, Soph. El. 84,
libations in memory of a father ; Soph. El. 875,
dp7]î^ irt)jxdT(av,
help in or against troubles (cf. l-rriKovpos) ; irarpos TLfxwpos, Soph.
El. 811, aw avenger whom a father has (Subjective), an avenger
of a father (Objective) ; at twv KaKoJv o-wova-Lat, intercourse with
bad men (freely Objective) ; /3t^ ttoAitwv, in spite of citizens
(freely Objective) ; aTroo-Tao-ts twv 'AOrjvaiwv, revolt from tlie
Athenians (separation) ; A.-iJcris davdrov, deliverance from death
(separation) ; -^6 as p^vOwv, Soph. El. 372, schooled to words,
accustomed to (cf. e-to-rvj/tcov, etc.); rja-vxia- ex^/3wj/, rest from
enemies (freely Separative) ; d(f>opiJ.ri epywv, Xen. 3Iem. ii 7. 11,
means of setting about, or stimulus to, deeds.
THE DATIVE CASE.

Preliminary Note on the Dative.
§ 1 14*The Dative denotes generally the person or thing
more remotely connected with the action than is the Accusa-
tive. It thus denotes that to which the direct object is made
over or transferred (Dative of the Eemoter Object) after verbs
and adjectives which seem necessarily to require such a case
in order to complete the information they have to give {e.g.
SiSfofMi pAcrdov — Tw uTpaTiojTrj. By a natural extension the
Dative also denotes the person or thing, affected beneficially
or injuriously, interested in the action (Dative of Interest),
and can be added at pleasure to any verb whose meaning does
not necessai'ily demand it (e.g. ot Kaipoi Trpoeivrat rrj ttoXh, our
opportunities have been let slip, to the injury of the state). The
Dative of Interest includes the Dative of the Possessor, and
the Ethic Dative. Next to the Dative of Interest, as akin to
it in sense, although probably the use of the case has been
—
DATIVE OF COMMUNITY. 105
transferred from the old Instrumental, may be placed the

Dative expressing Contact with or Community, one of the most
important and extensive rules belonging to the case. Further,
the Dative has inherited the meanings of two lost cases, first
the Instrumental, including not only the Instrument and
Means, but also the Agent, Cause, Measure of Difference, and
the accompanying Circumstances secondly, the Locative in its
;
double reference to Place and Time. The Dative of Place,

however, is used as a rule only in Poetry ; in Prose, to express
motion to, not the Dative, but a preposition with the Accusa-
tive, is required.
§ 115. THE DATIVE OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT

TO WHOM ANYTHING IS SAID, DONE,
OR GIVEN.
T] /jLcopia BcBcoacv av6pco7rot<; kuku. MenANDEK.
Folly hringeth troubles on men.
rj <y€<yev7)fxevT] fjbd')(rj tw /Sacrikel ayyeWeTat. Xen.

The battle which had taken place is reported to the
king.
BiBcoai fxLcrOov t&j arparevfiari. Xen.

He gives pay to the army.
With a substantive
fii] iâfjidpTy)T€ ~epl r^v tov 0eou Soctlv i'fxiv. Pl. Aj->ol. xvm.
Lest you commit some great error in regard to the gift of the
god to you.
§ 116. Miscellaneous examples showing certain verbs

which in Greek take a Dative of the Remoter Object.
oXiyapxia rtav KtvSviwv rots :ro/\Aots yueTaSiScucrt.
Thuc. vi. 39.
Oligarchy gives a share of its dangers to the many.
SiavefJLio -x^prjfxara toTs TroAtrais.
I distribute money among the citizens.
SiaXAacrcei IXepSt/cKav tois 'A^jyvatoi?. Cf. ThTJC. 11. 95.

He reconciles Perdiccas with (to) the Athenians.
io6 THE CASES.
Aay;âi'a) Slktjv (eyKAv^jna) A-qiMoa-Oeuei.

I bring a lawsuit (accusation) against Demosthenes.
Demostheni litem intendo.
AxepovTL vt'iMcfieva-w. SoPH. Ai. 816,
I shall marry Acheron. (Cf. nvô in Latin.)
crv 8' cTk' dvayKYf kol deola-L /xq /iaôv, ECJRIP. Tel. Frag.
Yield thou to necessity, and v:ar not with the gods.
Cf. Soph. Ant. 718.

iiKiiv TLvl r^s oSov. Herod, ii. 80.
To get out
of the way for anybody (or to yield the way
to anybody).
§117. THE DATIVE OE INTEREST, IN CI UDING

THE DATIVE OF THE POSSESSORy
ETHIC DATIVE, etc.
The Dative of Interest denotes the person or thing

interested in the action (Dativus commodi et incom-
modi).
Tra? av'r]p avrw Travel. SoPH.

Every man labours for himself.
fiKToj (TO(f)taTT]v 0(TTL^ of^ avTM ao(f)o<;. MenANDEE.

/ hute a wise tnan who is not vjisefor himself.
Kaipol -upoetVTat, ry TroAei. DeM. 19. 8.
Oppoiiunities have been sacrificed, to the injury of the state.
Good instances occur in Soph. Elect. 66 (ixdpols), 496 ("qp-tv),

979 (exOpols), Antig. 618 (eiSon), Dem. 18. 205 (tw TrarpC).
§ Il8. Free Use of the Dative of Interest.
KaLTot o"' eyo) riprj(Ta rots (jipovovcrtv ev.

Soph. Ant. 904 (cf. 25).
And yet I did honour thee in the judgment of the right-minded.
(r\c8ov TL pnapia /xoptav ocjiXuTKavoi. SOPH. Ant. 470.
Belike I incur the charge of folly in the eyes of a fool.
:
DA TIVE OF INTEREST. 107
ortfii^v fxev evToXrj AtoS

eX€i TcAos S^. Aesch. p. V. 12.
For you (ie. so far as you are concerned) the hest of Zeus
hath ending here.
ovSfV eifii Kal redvrjx' vjxiv TrdXai. SOPH. Phil. 1030.

Naught am I, dead to you long since.
(i.e. you thought me dead.)
vTroXafifSdveiv Set tw tolovtw on ivr)dti<; ecrri. PlAT.

fFe must assume in the case of such a person that he is simple.
Xayxo-vei tov KX'qpov ry yvvaLKi. ISAEUS, 3. 32.

He claims the inheritance in behalf of the woman.
The usual construction would be vTrep rrjs ywaiKos.
(TT€(f)avov<T6at T^^ 0ew. XeN. Ages. \\. 15.

To he crovjued in honour of the god.
So Keipea-dai (roi, to be shorn in honour of thee, Eurip.
Hip. 1425.
Note. Several idioms with participles should be noticed

Tw TrAijêi Twv IXAaratwv ov (3ovXoixiV(fi rjv Taji/ 'AOijvatoiv
'
d(f>t(TTa(T6ai. Thug. ii. 3.
The Plataean democracy did not wish to revolt from the
Athenians.
Cf Tag. Agr. 18, quibus volentibus bellum erat.
rjixipai {xaXia-Ta r/crav tv; MirvX-qvy âXwKVia ore, k.t.X.

Thug. iii. 29.
Seven days had passed since the capture of Mitylene when, etc.
See Temporal Sentences, § 211.
Tw Mtv iûiOev dirrofMevio a-wp-a ovk dyav Oeppov i/v.
Thug. ii. 49.

To the outward touch the body was not very hot.
'ETTiSa/iVos ecTTt TToAts ev Se^ta ecrTrAeovTt tov 'Iovlov koXttov.

Thug. i. 24.
Epidamnus is a town on your right as you enter the Ionic Gulf.
So (TuveAovTi (crvvTc/ii'ovTt) etTTctv, or simply cwcAovTt, to
speak shortly, concisely, in brief, in short

— ; ;
io8 THE CASES.
^lig. THE DATIVE OF THE POSSESSOR.

Especially with et/z/, <yL<yvofiaL, v7rdpx<o.
vri€<i ovK eiacv rjfMiv.
We have no ships.
a\\oi9 fiev y^prniara eari ttoWu, rjp^v he ^vp.fia-)(oi
(lyaOoi. TlIUC.
So7ne have plenty of money, but we have good allies.
OvSlv i/Xol Kat îXlTTTTM,

Philip and I have nuthing to do with each other.
t\ ijxoi Ka\ (Toi
What liave I to do with thee 1 What have we in common i
§ 120. THE ETHIC DATIVE, DENOTING THE

PERSON WHOSE FEELINGS SYMPATHISE
WITH THE A CTION.
0) reKvop, rj ê^rjKev rjfuv 6 ^€V0<; ; SoPH.
My child, say {tell me), is the strange^' departed ?
fjL€fj.vr}crde jmol (jltj dopvpeiv. PlAT. Apol. XV.
Remember, I pray you, not to interrupt.
TTws ^[ilv ex^'5
How are you ?
eyo) o-itoTTw twSc ; Ar. Bafr. 456.

JHiat, I hold my tongue at this fellow's bidding?
So, elliptically
firj /JLOi DeM. iv. 19.
/xvpiov^ êvovs.
Talk notme often thousand mercenaries.
to
Sometimes a mere interjection expresses the Ethic dative,

e.g. Soph. Elect. 272, ^)/xiv,Jie on'tl
THE DATIVE OF COMMUNITY OR CONTACT

WITH.
§ 121. The Dative of Commimity or Contact with is
words (Verbs, Adjectives, and Adverbs) which denote
likeness or unlikcness ; agreement or disagreement ; meeting,
encountering, follovnng.
DATIVE OF COMMUNITY. 109
A. With Verbs.
KaKol^ ofiCkwv KavToî eK^ria-r) KaKo<;. Menand.
If thou associate with the bad, thyself too wilt turn
out bad.
SeS fid'êaOat Seivov ean koI Tv^t). Menand.

'Tis terrible to fight with God and Fortune.
OVK e<{)r] Tct epya rots Xoyois ofjôXoyeiv. ThUC. V. 55.
He said that their deeds did not correspond with their uwds.
OVK alcrxpov ecrrt rots Trovrjpois Sia<êpecrât.
Xen. Mem. ii. 9. 8.
It is not wrong to quarrel with {differ from) had men.
Contrast the use of 8ta(ê/5o> with a Genitive.
Itvôv Trpocrekdoiv KaAAijt. PlAT. Ap. iv. (cf. xviii., ev-
rvy\^dv(j}).
I cJianced to meet Callias.
So TrpocrTvyyavoi, IvTvy^dvia, aTravTW, irponrKpovdi^ Tivt.
Tw 'AXKiftidSrj Tives h Aoyovs ^Xdov. Thuc. viii. 48.

Certain persons Imd a conference with Alcibiades.
So SiaKeyofj-aL tlvi.
ôvXeado) cucAttis 6p.6ae ^wpijaai rot? evavTtois.

Thuc. iv. 10.
Let him with good heart resolve to close mth the foe.
Cf. fld)(OfXai, TToAcjtiW TtVt.
Xpr) (TrecrOa.L tw vojua. ThUC. ii. 35.

One must follow the custom.
B. With Adjectives.
6 aâOo^ TO) wyado) (f)i\o<;. Plat.
The good man is dear to the good man.
Tol<i TvpavvoL'i aet Bia(f)opot eafiev. ThuC.
We are ever hostile to tyrants.
avOpMTroL^ ^Xafiepov fiev TêOSo?, '^prjaifxa 8 aei

aXrjOeia.
To men falsehood is injurious, truth is ever useful.
THE CASES.
Note 1. Constructions of 6 aurds, idem: —

a. TOVTO ravTov (^to avTo) Icrrtv eKetVw.
This is the same as that.
Hoc idem est quod illud.
Ta avra (ppovio ArmocrdeveL (really := 015 (f)poveL A.)

Dem. 18. 30.
/ Jwld the same opinions as Demosthenes.
h. ravTo. 7raa">êts a—ep koI kyui.
You experience the same as I do.
This is a very common construction of o avros in Demosthenes,

ei Tis îvcr^vpiôiro tw avT<Z Adyy uxnrep crv.
Plat. Phaedr. xxxvi.
If any one were to affirm positively (icith) the same statement
as you {that you make).
C. Boi'Sivot 8e ov Ty avrf] yAwcrcry ^^pewvrai Kal VeXwvoL

Herod, iv. 109.
The Budini do not use the same speech as the Geloni.
Cf. idem atque {ac) in Latin. This is not so common a con-

struction in Attic.
Brachylogy is very frequent in the construction of o avrds.
(oTav) etViSo) S' icrO'/jfiara
(}>opQv\T' eKeivM TavTo. (=:a7rep Kal fKeti'os c(f)epe).
Soph. Elect. 269.
TFJiene'er I behold him wearing the self-same robes as my
dead father {as those of my father).
Note 2. tcros, ~apa-Xri<TLos, o/ioios have the same construc-
tions as o avTos.
ov Kal (TV TVTTTei Tcis Lcras TrXijyas e/xot'; Ae,. Ban. 636.
Shan't you be beaten with the same nurnber of blows as I?
§ 122. DATIVE OF THE INSTRUMENT,

INCLUDING MEANS, AGENT, CAUSE,
MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE.
The Dative in expressing these meanings has inherited the
work of the lost instrumental case.
A. Instrument or Means.
'X^pj]aTO<; irovripoL'i ov TLTpcocrKerai Xoyoiij. MenaND.

A good man is not wounded hy had words.
DATIVE OF THE AGENT.
€âXKov avTOv<s \i6ot<; re koI roêvfxaaL Kai ukov-

Tioi^. Thuc.
TTiey were attacking them with stones, and arrows, and
javelins.
eaff OT(p av LhoL<i rj o(f)da\/j,ol^ ;

Plat.
7s there anything you would see with hut eyes ?
Note. xp^H-^-h I use (and sometimes vofiiîo in the same sense)

takes this dative. (Cf. ufor in Latin.)
yjidfiaL dpyvpM, /3t/3Aiots, etc.
I use silver, books, etc.

lit. / get service done {icith), or, I employ myself {uith).
ayaxri /cai dvcriais voiiiôfiev. ThUC. ii. 38.

TFe use festivals and sacrifices.
Cf. dixei/SoDv I3a<f)ij, a dat. of instrument, Aesch. Pers. 319.
/St's^ by force (per vim); avayKy, do., are instrumental datives.
B. Agent (cf. viro Tvith Gen.).
The Dative denoting the Agent is used in Prose chiefly with

the perfect and pluperfect passive. In Homer the same case
may refer both to things (Instrument) and persons (Agent).
(Compare 77. iii. 428 vrith 436, and see Peile, Primer of
Philology.) In Attic, however, the so-called Dative of the
Agent oftener appears to be a Dative of Interest.
Tavra dTTOTCTeAeo-Tat crot. XeN.

Those things have been finished by you Cifor you).
eireiSr) TrapecrKevaa-TO KopivdiOis. ThUC.

When preparations had been made by the Corinthians (Ifor).
Cf. Thuc. iii. 64 ("EAXrjo-i). Eur. Hec. 1085 (a-oi) -.

Dem. 844
1. (tottto)).
rjo-crdadaL, viKacrOai tlvi, to be beaten by any one, are used as
well as rj(T(rdcrdat, viKacrdai Tivos, or v~d Ttvo?.
Verbals m -Teo<; regularly take a Dative of the Agent

(see Participles).
ri2 THE CASES.
C. Gobuse. (This may, in some cases, be a Dative of

Circumstance.)
evirpaylat'; ovk eû^piôfj,€v. Thuc.

We do not hreak out into insolence in consequence of
prosperity.
OVK elfxl T06S TreTrpayfievoLs

Sva-dv/jLos. Soph, El. 549.
/ am not despondent because of what has happened.
Cf. Thug. i. 95, Ixêt.
So ^tAta, through friendship ; evvola, through goodwill (volun-

tate) ; o.yvoia, through ignorance ; tw /xto-etv, through hatred (Dem.
45. 30) ; and <f>va-eL, naturally.
avOpmro^ cfivcrei ttoXitlkov ^wov. AriST. Eth.

Man is by nature a creature adapted to social life.
The Dative of Cause is joined to many verbs express-

ing Emotion {axdopai, I am vexed; xaAcTratvw, / am vexed;
dOvfiQ, I am despondent; -qîopat,, I am pleased; dyaXXo/xai, 1
exult; liraipoixai, I am elated; ala-xvvofxat, I am ashamed (also
Avdth Accus.), crrepyo}, dyaTrw, / am content). Cf. eVi with the
Dative after such verbs.
o 6eo^ epjot<; Tot€pe rrj dri/nla. Xen.

Lysander was offended at the affront.
Tois a-ois dxea-b KaOv/Spc^wv. SOPH. Ai 153.

Mocking at thy ivoes.
iTratpopevo'S -q wXovTi^ rj laxvi -/';

aAAoj tw toiovtm.
Plat. Eep. iv. 434.
Elated either by wealth or strength, or some other such ad
vantage.
So xaAcTTws cfyipetv. Both phrases also take the Accus. (Eur.

^
Med. 1018).
DATIVE OF CIRCUMSTANCE.
D. Measure of Difference, especially with Comparatives.
krepo'i erepov Kej>dKri fiei^wv ecni. Plat,

One man is taller than another hy a head (i.e. is a
head taller).
ScKa Irctn tt/do rrjs ev SaAa/xtvi vav/xaîas, etc.

Plat. Leg. 698.
Ten years before the seor-fight at Salamis (before by ten years).
Toa-OVTO) qSiov ^w ocrw /xaXXov KeKTi]/i.at. XeN. Cyr. viii. 3. 40.
/ live the more pleasantly the more I possess, i.e. by so much
the more pleasantly.
So TToWw, oAiyw, jXLKpQ, /ittK/oo) (fjietôv, (SeXriov, etc.). A
neuter accusative is also used with comparatives, especially
TToXv, oAiyov, ovSei', /xr]8ev {^^ttov, [j.a.Wov, etc.). See Com-
parative and Superlative.
§ 123. THE DATIVE OF CIRCUMSTANCE.

The Dative expresses the accompauying circumstances.
The Dative has taken on the meaning of the lost Sociative
or Comitative Instrumental Case.
In mentioning details of military or naval forces this Dative
is constantly used ; e.g. eiKoa-t vavcri, ttoAAw crTaTev/xart,
o-rdAw, etc.
€(f>oôvvTo /jLT] fjueiôi/i irapaaKevrj eireXdoyatv. Thuc.

They were afraid that they would come against them
with a greater force.
01 Adrjvaioc areXet rrj vlkt] dvecmja-av. Tnuc.

The Athenians retired ivith the victory incomplete.
KaKouTLV oo-Tts fJ.r]8ev lâAAacro-eTai. SoPH. Ai. 474.

Whoso hnoweth no change in respect of ills.
eKTOs 1^ AtTwAt'a?
âvOauTi TTcuAots. SoPH. El. 705 {see 1343).
A sixth out of Aetolia
with bright bay mares.
Cf. Soph. Antig. 589 (-voais),
H
114 THE CASES.
Note 1. The preposition which would be used in such a

construction, and which is sometimes used, is a-iv.
e.g. iTrXeov ^vv Travrt t^ o-TpaTev/xaTt. ThUC. vi. 62.
Note 2. Many adverbial Datives are thus used: Spo/xu), at

full speed; ktjkA(J), ronnd about; a-iyy, silently; tovtw t$ rpomo,
in this way, thus ; STj/xocrta, publicly ; ISia, privately ; Tre^fj, on
foot; ravTij, thus ; y, in uihichioay ; tw oft*, in reality.
fierd with Genitive, a-vv with Dative, or adverbs proper, are
synonymous expressions e.g. crvv Sikij, /nera 8Ui]s, Si/caiws
:
(for the Dative of Circumstance).
In Soph. Ai. 767, Oeois=o-vv deol's, deo favente.

In Pl. AjJol- XV. €v Tw eloiOoTL rpoTTO), in my usual way.
Note 3. The use of aiJTos with the Dative of Circumstance

is specially to be noticed.
fiiav vavv cXafBov avrois dvSpdcn. ThUC.

They captured one ship, icith the men themselves {crew and all).
avTOis TTOifivioiv eTricrTarais. SOPH. Al. 27.

Together with the masters of the flocks.
Cf. Eur. Bacch. 946, 1134.

a-yv and a/xa are rarely used.
eLTrero tw Xoxayw ^vv avrw tco OcopaKi Kal ttj kottlSi.
Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 9.
He was foUoioing the captain with breastplate and with bill
So a/xa, Soph. Anfig. 115.
§ 124. DATIVE OF TIME AND PLACE.

The Dative, as representing the defunct Locative, denotes
Time when and Place where.
A. Tirae. The Dative denotes a definite point of tinie
when something occurs, in certain phrases without the
Preposition kv.
It is used chiefly of day, night, month, year, and

festivals.
TT^Se Tr) r]fiepa = arjixepov, rrjfMepov, on this clay, to-day.

T^Be TTJ vvKTi airidavev, he died to-night.
DATIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. 115
TT) TTporepaia, the day before. (So t^ vaTcpaia,

irporepa, Sevrepa.)
oi ev I0(o/u,r) TerapToy erei ^vve^rjcrav. ThuC.

The (Helots) in Ithome surrendered in the fourth year.
TpayipSots Kaivois, Dem. 243. 17, at the representation of the

new tragedies ; adXoLcn IlvdiKouri, at the Pythian games, Soph.
El. 49. So Qecrfio(f)opioLSj rots 'EirivtKtois, Atovixriots, Ilava-
dtjvaLois, etc.
So in reckonings of the month : evy Kal vea, on the last day

of the month (see Lexicon) ; Bo7;opo/zicuvos pi^vos Terdprrj
MTTa/ievov, on the fourth day of the first decade of Boedromion.
A
prose instance of this Dative of Time occurs in IsoCE.
Evag. 66.
Tiva €vprj(Top€v Twv TOis TpuiLKois ;^/3di'0is yevopAvcov ;
Whom shall toe find of those tvho were born in the Trojan age ?
A poetical one in Soph. El. 193.

OLKTpa pXv vocTTOts aijSa.
A voice of woe on the return.
Note. As a rule ev is added with other expressions, though

sometimes it is omitted. Sometimes ev is found "with the
above expressions, except in names of festivals. 'Ev is more
likely to be omitted when an adjective is used, e.g. ev wktl,
but pia WKTL. In Thucydides e'v is sometimes omitted where
we should have expected it, e.g. e'Kctvy rfj lo-ôAy, Thug. ii.
20, in this invasion. So ry -porepa -apova-ia, Thug. i. 128,
during his first stay ; tq Trpo-epa (e'K/cAycrt'a), Thtg. i. 44, at the
former meeting of the assembly.
Xp6v(j}, in time, ox at last; Kaipw, in season, =es Ko.ip6i', (eV
Kaipw extremely rare)
is ;
x^t/xwvos wpji without ev ; ot ev wpa,
men in the prime of life.
B. Place. This use of the Dative without the Pre-

position ev is poetical.
In pkyas ovpav^ Zevs. SoPH. El. 174.

Still is Zens great in heaven.
ii6 THE CASES.
Prose writers, however, use this case with names of towns.

Mapaôjvt KoX âXafiivt Kal YlXaraiaLS. PlAT.
At Marathon, and Salamis, and Plataeae.
N.B. — M.apad(avi and SaAa/iii/t are real Locatives.
So 'A6t']V7](ri,, Qrj^Yjcn, 'OAv/x7rtao-i, IIA.aTaiao-i.
Veritable Locatives are oi/coi, at liome (domi) ; X'^H-'^'h O'"' ^^^^
(jroiind (humi) ; aypotcri, in the country (riui) ; dvpacri, at the

door (foris) Ili^ôr, at Pytho ; 'la-dfioL, at the Isthmus.
;
These are all, except aypoia-i, used in Prose. In Prose

aypots.
§ 125. Lists of Words which take a Dative.
Verbs.
1. Verbs of telling, p^romising, advising.
<t>yfii, say. irapaivw, ^

)
^^^^,.^^^
Xeyw, tell. avufSovXevij), f
dyyeXXio, report. vTTo/3dXX(o, dictate,
fxrjvvo), inform. vTroTWejiai., suggest.
V7rt(rxvovfj.aL, promise.
They take an Accusative of the nearer object, e.g. ravrd croi
Trapatvw, I give you this advice.
Obs. KeXevo) ere 6€vai, / bid you go, Accus. and lufin.
2. Verbs of obeying, trusting, and the contrary.
ireWofiai, he persuaded by, com- dina-Tw, disbelieve.

ply. viraKovw, serve (and genitive).
TTto-revw, trust (also intrust). Xarpevw, serve (Oiols).
oLTreido}, disobey.
Obs. -TreWov /xot, be persuaded by me, hearken to me; ttlOov /jloi,
obey me.
3. Verbs of helping and hindeiing.

dfjiwio (in Act), v-i]peTw, serve.
1
ap^yw (poet.), ,-hel2). x^P'î^P-^h gratify-
l-LKovpw, help. ifMTTobwv iivai, J
TLfxiopw (in Act), avenge.

For dp-vvoixai and TLfnopov/xai see Middle Voice.
) ;
WORDS WHICH TAKE A DATIVE. 117
4. Verbs of being angry with, hlmning, threatening.

ayavaKTU), eiriTLfjLO), censure.
a-xÛofJiai,
I
^^^j^^ ^ indignant. XoL8opov[xai, revile.

j
opyiôjiai, angry. fx€iJ.(f>ojjLai, blame.
XaXeTTaLvd), angry, annoyed. cfidovw, envy.
iyKaXw, charge, accuse. i3apeo)s (jiepu) (aegre, graviter,
kiry]pea{(a, threaten abusively, or ;(aAe7rws <pep(i), fero), / am
treat despitefuUy. indignant, annoyed, vexed.
N.B. — XoiSopQ Act. takes the Accus.
yxe/x<ô/xat Ttvt, or Tt rtvi (rtva or Tivos), / complain of a
person or thing.
fitcrw, Imte, takes the Accus.
5. The Impersonal Verbs.

SoKet mihi videtur.
jtxoi, XvcrLTeXec fioi, it is profitable for
(SoKw p.oL, mihi videor. me.
ov fxoL 80KW, / think not. fJLSTeCTTi p.01 TOOTWV, / haVC ft
Trperrei fxoi, me decet. share of this.
7r/3ocnjKe6 fioc, it concerns me. fieXet fiot dpcTTjs, / care for

ovSev fioi irpoa-qKeL, nihil ad me virtue.
attinet. lj.eTa[xeXei /xoi tovto^v, I repent
Set /ioi T6V0?, opus mihi est ali- of this, poenitet me huius rei.
qua re, but Sec fis lAêtv.
6. Likeness or unlikeness.
eoLKa (niipers. eotKc), am like. (Twa AAacrcrto) toijtov (toi, I re-
law, make equal. concile this man to or with you.
ofioiw, make like.
7. Agreement, disagreement.
dfi(f)La-(3r)Tio, dispute. TToAe/Aw, a,t war luith.
aTreyddvofxai, am odious to, (TTacridô), revolt, rebel, quarrel

hated by. politically.
evavTiovixac, oppose. (TviKôivQi, agree with (opp. to
iTTtTtê/xat, attack. 6ta<â)^'a5).
quarrel with.
epLû), o-vva.8(i}, agree with (opp. to
o/ioAoyw, agree with. StaSw).
p.d\oiJLac, fight.
Like 7roAe|u.w, Slot TToAe/xou levai tlvl, to be at war with one

€s )(dpa'i eXdelv, or 6/,ido-e ^((o/Detv Ttvt, to come to blows, close
quarters, with one.
d/t<^tcr/?7jTw o-ot Tov o-iTov, I dispute with you about the food.
ii8 THE CASES.
8. Meeting, following.
ttKo Aovâi, I follow. Trpoa-Kpovd), knock up against.

eVo/Lio.t, / follow (also (TVV Tivi, SiaXeyofxai, converse loith.
and jxerd Tivwv). bfxiXui, associate with.
aTTai'Tw, meet with, come across. 7rp6(TeL{j.L, approach.

evTvyxo-vfii, meet with, come crvveL/xL, associate with.
across. eTrepxofj-ai, advance against.

-posTvyx<^v(»} wieei with, come TrapardcrcrofiaL, stand beside in
across. battle.
9, Mauy verbs compounded with Prepositions, especially

with e-L, Trpos, crvv, Trepi, chiefly denoting contact. Some have
already been given.
dvT€X(^, hold out against. irapafSdXXo), set beside, compare

dij.(jiLa/3r}TU}, disptite with. (also Tt Trapd, or TT/ods Ti).
'TrapardrTopiaL, stand beside in

<^tAiKa>s TlVt battle.
(or Trpo's am friendly dis- TrepidTTTO), fasten round.

Ttva) or posed. Trepi(idX\op.aL, throw round, cir-
SLaTidefxat or cumfundere, circumdare,
Trposffiepo/xaL e.g. Ty vqcr(x) Telxos, or vr^crov
€[j.[3dXk(D, throw in.
ep-fxivo), abide by. TrepiTidy]p.L, place round.

e/A-otw, introduce, produce. TrepnrL-Tw, fall round or on.
eTrayo), lead in. TTposeipi, come before, e.g. tw
eTna-rpaTevo), make war on. St^/zo), address the assembly.
i-LTdrTO), impose. cruyxat/3w, rejoice with.
i-L(fi€p(o, bring up or against. (TvXXapilSdvo) TLvt TLvo<s, (rt,
-pos/SdXXoi, put, apply to. or €ts Tt) assist any one in

anything.
""P'^'lfr'^'l apply to.
(TuvoiSa, am conscious; epavrw ^vvi]8etv oijoev hrurTap.kv(a

(or eTTUTTdpLevos) I was conscious tJuit I knew nothing for certain.
Pl. Apol.
^vvia-aa-L MeAvyrw xj/evZopievia, they are aware that 3Ieletus is
speaking falsely (i.e. they know as icell as he knows). lb.
WORDS WHICH TAKE A DATIVE. 119
§126. Adjectives.
And their cognate Adverbs and Substantives, e.g. ô'(\Qo%
Useful, Jit, becoming, friendly, like, near, and their contraries.
dSeAôs (and Gen.), aJdn or kou-o's (and Gen.), common

answering to. Ojuoto?, like.
olkoXovOo? (and Gen.), follow- di'o/xotos, unlike.
ing after, agreeing with. ofiwvviJLos (and Gen.), called by

dAAorptos (and Gen.), foreign, the same name.
or different. 7rapaTrXii)crios, similar.
a.vri(rTpo<ôs (and Gen.), corre- TTtcrwos, relying on, fretus.

sponding. aTTto-Tos, 710^ to be trusted, or
o auTo's, the sanfie. not trusting.
Sid(f)opo<s (and Gen.), different. 7rpos<^tA7^s, beloved.
efifiovos, abiding by. TToXe/xLos, Iwstile.
e/jLcfiVTos, implanted. (rvp.fj.axos, in alliance, friendly.
e/TtT^Seto?, suitable.
eÔpos, hostile.
r^ ^
(rvp.(p€pov,
'
> expedient.
-^
J
cuvoDs, well-disposed. do-i'/xôpos, inexpedient.
SiKTvovs, ill-disposed. XaAe-os, difficult, unfavourable,
iSios (and Gen.), private, per- iniquus.
sonal. Xpij(TTOS, I
ggfi^^ll^^
wros, equal. Xp-)]a-ip.o<s,
j
avLo-os, unequal. axP'l^'''^'^} (.
unserviceable.
'uroppoTTos (and Gen.), equally axpetos,
matched.
O^s.Several take also a Genitive (especially those denoting

correspondency)sometimes with a slight difference of meaning,
for "which the Lexicon should be consulted. Compare par,
proprius, similis, alienus, etc. in Latin.
Adverbs.
afjLa, generally temporal. Aot/xos a/xa TToXkp.(a, pestilence at the
same time as war.
6p.ov, local. vBtap 6p.ov Tw TTTjAo), water and mud together'.
€(fie^7]s, TO. TouTots €<35)e^v]s, vjhat comes next to this.
6yyi'§, Dat and Gen. ; see Lexicon.
—
CHAPTER V.
§ 127. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE.

The Comparative is followed by
A. A Genitive :
veoL<i TO criyav Kpelrrov ecm rov XaXelv. Menander.

Silence is letter for young folk than speech.
B. By^:-
Kpelrrov atwirav ecrriv r] \aXeiv fiarrjv. MenaNDER.
'Tis better to keep silence than talk idly.
Instead of 77 the prepositions avri, tt/oo (with Genitive), or

(with Accusative), sometimes.
TTpos, Trapd
dvTt, Soph. Antig. 182.
TT/ad, Plat. Crit. 54, b.
Trpos, Thuc. iii. 37. 1 ; jrapd, Thuc. i. 23. 3.
irXeov, e'AaTTov, p.eiov, may omit the 7] (like plm, amplius,

minus, in Latin).
diTidai'ov oXiyi^ eXda-aovs irevr-qKOVTa. ThUC. 1. 44. 6.

There fell rather less than fifty.
Instead of ttoXAw with a Comparative marking the measure

of difference, ttoXv may be used. Thus we may say ttoAAo)
dfi€LV(i>v or TToXv dp.eivij}v, far, much better.
Note 1. The Comparative is constantly used, without the

other object compared, to denote a degree too high or too low,
a considerable degree or a degree greater or less than usual
(very, rather, someichai) ; not seldom it is used as a matter of
idiom, where the Positive would be more natural
eAê fxeXos dypoiKorepov (us eê Xa/Sovcra. ArIST. Ach. 675.
Hie thee (Muse), and bring to me a right rural melody
(dypoiKorepov, countrified).
1
COMPARA TIVE AND SUPERLA TIVE. 1 2
fieiôa-LV epyots e7n)(et.povvT€s ov fiiKpols Ka/cots TepnrtTrTOV-

o-tv. Xen. 3fem. iv. 2. 35.
By attempting tasks too great they encounter no slight troubles.
Tt vewrepov,w "ZwKpares, yeyovev ; PlAT.

JFhat new thing has happened, Socrates ?
ov xelpov TToXXaKLs aKoveiv. PlAT. Fhoed. 105.

If is no bad thing to hear often.
Note 2. To denote too high or too low a degree, rj Kara is

used with the Accusative, or i) ws, rj ware with the Infinitive.
(Cf. Latin, quam pro, quam ut, quam qui.)
eiSe veKpov Kar avdpoiiTov. PlAT. Rep. 360.

/xetô) rj
He saw a corpse of superhuman size.

ot 'A6r}vaiOL Iv 2tKeAta /xet^^w 7) Kara Sa/cpva iTreirovdea-av.
Thug. vii. 75.
The Athenians in Sicily had endured sufferings too great
for tears.
(f)ol3oviJ.at p.rj Tt f-etôv i^ wcrre (fêpeLV SvvacrOai ^vfJi/Sy.

Xen. Ap. iii 5. 17.
I fear that some evil, too great for us to be able to bear, may
happen. See Eur. Bacch. 840.
The Positive is sometimes so used with wo-re.
TO v8wp xpvx^pov wcTTe Xovaraa-daL IcTTLV. XeN. Ap. iii. 13. 3.
The water is too cold for bathing.

Cf. Thug. ii. 61. 2 ; eyKaprepetv, without wo-TC.
Note 3. fxaXXov ^ (for which 7rA.eov 7} may be substituted)

is used after a Comparative.
alpiTtoTepov aTToOvqcTKUv jiaXXov y) cfjevyetv.
Xen, Cyr. iii. 3. 51.

It is more desirable to die than to run away.
Seei TO TrAeov 17 <îAtcu ThUG. iii 12.
Through fear more than friendship.
So Avith a Positive.
oyvqTrj 'A^T^vatwv -q Svvajxis [laXXov t} o'lKeia.
Thug. i. 121. 2.
The power of the Athenians is purchased rather than their own.
—
122 COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE.
Note 4. Two adjectives or adverbs compared with each

other may both be in Comparative.
Trjv elpqvrjv dvayKaioTepav )) KaXXioi VTreXdjxfiavov eiî'ai.
Aeschix. iii 69.

They were regarding the peme as inevitaUe rather than
honourable.
So (TvvTOjxuiTepov Tj (TatêcTTe/aov, curtly rather than .clearly.

Is. 6. 24.
10) (rrparrjyol TrAetoves 7] jSeXrioves. AkIST. Ach. 1078.

Ho ! Generals, more numerous than brave.
Cf. Latin —PauUi Aemilii contio fait verior quam gratior

populo. Liv. xxii. 38.
The speech of Paullus Aemilius was more true than
acceptable to the people.
Note 5. Both the Comparative and Superlative may be

used with a reflexive pronoun to denote a comparative or
superlative degree reached by the person himseK within his
o-rni experience.
TToXXiu êipov eairrwv AeyoiKjtv. AnTIPH, V. 7.
They speak much worse tJian they generally do {much below
their real pou-ers, or their average).
o^vraTO. avTOS avTOV opd. PlAT. Leg. 715, e.
His sight is at its keenest.
Note 6. The Superlative is used, where the Comparative

would logically be correct, to denote a supereminent degree
of superiority.
KaXXiCTTOV Twv irporepov (f)dos. SOPH. Ant. 100.
Light most glorious of all former lights.
Cf. Antig. 1212; Philod. 1171.
k^kdqv TrapavoyxajTara aTravTtuv dv6p(a7r<j)v.
Antiph. Herod. 17.
/ was thrown into prison in a far more unconstitutional way
than ever man was.
Note 7. The Superlative is strengthened by St), ttoAA^,

ttoAtj :
/ieyicr-os 8-q, quite the greatest; ttoXXw, ttoXv dpia-ro^, far,

much the best.
—
COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 123
(is, oTi, aud oiov strengtlien the Superlative :
a>s p§o'ra, as easily as possible (quam facillime); m or oVt

fxaXuTTa, rdxio-ra (quam maxime, quam celerrime).
oTi €v (3paxvT<iT0), in as short a time as possible. Thug. iii. 46.

(OS -^SvyavTo aSijAorara, as secretly as they were able.
Thug, vii 50.
otov dOXiWTaTov, in as miserable a plight as possible.
Arist. Ach. 384.
Note 8. The phrase eh dv-qp with a Superlative denotes an

unique personal pre-eminence.
€is dvrjp TrAetcTTov ttovov
ex^pols -irapacrx'^v. AeSGH. Pers. 329.
TFreaJcing, beyond all else,
Most mischief to his foes.
(Or, mth his single arm, what one man might).
Cf. Soph. 0. T. 1380: Ai, 1340; Thug, iii 39.

;
\
CHAPTEE VT.
VOICES AND MOODS.

§ 128. TBE ACTIVE VOICE.
(1.) The Active Voice includes transitive and intransitive
verbs. On the other hand the Middle Voice includes deponent
verbs which are active and transitive, such as atSov/xai tovs
êovs, / reverence the gods ; oTfxai, I think
(2.) Some verbs are both transitive and intransitive.
eXavvQ), I drive, and / ride (so. apfia, 'ittitov).
e')(a), I have, „ I am (with adverbs only).

irpacrao), I do, „ I fare.
hrfkoi, I show, „ I show myself, am manifest (sc.
€/xavTov).
TeXexjTO), I end, „ I die (sc. /Slav).
So in English / tuim, I Join, I move, I change, etc.
Both transitive and intransitive tenses are found in the

same verb.
E.g. taTrjfii, I set (up) ; earrjKa, I stand.
So ^v(o, /Satvo), and others.
(3.) Some simple verbs become intransitive when com-

pounded with a preposition.
( fMera/SdWo), I change.
\ â\\(o, I throw. ) ea^dWco, \ 1 rush in, attack, or
efiâXkei, j (of rivers) flow in.

I
KoTTTw, I cut. irpoKoTTTQ}, I maJcc jtrogress.
, (I differ from, am su-
êpco,Ihear. hacf>epay,
-^
perior to.
, -r , f eXXetTTG), 1 / fail
XetTTO),' I leave. j-
^ t
It die, faint.*
-J> / j- -
[ eKXetTTO), )
124
— — —
THE MIDDLE VOICE. 135
(4.) The Active is sometimes Causative, i.e,. it means

" I get, or allow, a thing to be done," not " I do it myself."
Kvpo<i KareKavcre ra âaikeia.

Cyrus had the palace hurnt down.
So in Latin
Verres ad palum alligavit piratas.
Verres had the pirates hound to a post. ClC Vcr. iv. 29.
§ 129. THE MIDDLE VOICE.

In the Middle Voice the action of the verb refers in
some way or other to self. In some verbs, however, the
notion of self is so much lost that the Middle differs from
the Active only in giving a different meaning to the verb.
The chief uses of the Middle Voice are
A. Reflexive,
{g°™"^fj^,y^
B. Causative.
C. Eeciprocal.
D. The notion of self is so blurred or lost that the
Middle must be regarded as giving a new and
different meaning to the Active ; in some cases
there is no Active.
Note.The Aorist Middle is never passive.
The Future INIiddle is
(1) sometimes apparently passive, but reaUy middle, e.g. AetY-
ojiai, I will not leave (o-ov) ; \£Lcf)67icroiJ.at, I shall be left;
rjapx^? KaxaAtVerat, wiil fall to pieces; KaTaXvdqcreTai, he
destroyed.
(2) really passive with certain verbs Tifxqa-ofiaL, I shall he

:
honoured ; a-rvyqcroixai,, I shall he hated ; 8iSaô/iai, / shall

be taught; a-rep/^cro/xai, I shall he bereft; ^ruiiuicro [xai, I shall
he fined ; <j)(f)eXTi'](TO[xaL, I shall be helped ; dSiKyâofiai^ I shall
be wronged.
In these cases the Future passive is rarely or never used.
—
126 VOICES AND MOODS.
. The Reflexive Middle. < ^ ^ ., ^, i, . .
(2. Indirectly Reflexive.

(1.) Tlie Directly Reflexive Middle. Self is the direct
object or accusative.
\ov(o, I wash. Xovo/jLai, I wash myself.
rpeTToi), I turn (trans.). Tpeno/Mai, I turn (intrans.), i.e.
/ turn myself.
BrjXo), I show. BrjXovfiac, I shov) myself.
The Middle is very rarely used in this way. It is

more usual to employ the Active with a Reflexive Pro-
noun :
E.g., I hire out myself, fxiadco efiavrdu, not fiiadov/jiai,

which means I hire for myself : so aireKreLvev eavTov, not
aireKTeivaro : eiraiveL^ aeavTov, not eiraivei.
(2.) The Indirectly Reflexive Middle. Self is the Dative

of the Indirect Object, or of Interest.
Tropica, I provide. Tropiô/xai {oirXa), I provide for

myself
a'iTOTi0T]fiL, I put off or aTTOTiOeiiai {rov vofjLov),Iput avjay
away. from myself, i.e. disregard.
aTTorWe/xaL paOvfiiav, I put avjay
from myself, i.e. / overcome, lazy
luxbits.
airoTiOefiai, Tpo(f)7]v, I put away

for myself, le. hoard or store
food.
\ov(o, I icash. \ovofiai ra Ifidria, I wash my own
clothes (i.e. far myself my clothes),
"rrape-x^co, I offer or pre- irapexofjuit (BaTrdvrjv), I furnish

sent. my own expenses, from my own
resources ; fiuprvpa, I bring for-
ward a vntn£ss for myself, my
own witness, in my support.
;
The chief notions are — (1.) for self.
(2.) from self.
(3.) v:liat helongs to self.

But the notion of for self pervades and easily explains
all the uses. •
B. The Ca2csaHve Middle.

As the Active means / cause or allow others to do, so
the Middle means / cause or alloiv others to do something
for myself or on myself.
6 irarrjp BiBaaKerac rov viov.
The father has his son taughi.

ypa(f)co, I write ; ypcKôfiai nvd, I get one written down,
i.e. / indict.
Cf. Latin curo^ permitto, with ut and subjunctive, or with
Gerundive.
C. TTie Reciprocal Middle. Each agent acts for self and

so the action is reciprocal Verbs compounded with Bia
especially have this force.
dfiel^Q), I change. afMeiôfjLeda, we ansioer each other.

BiaXejofxeda, we converse together.
BiaKeXevovTai, they encourage one an-
other.
BiaKijpeuovraiythey negotiate hy a herald.

D. See the following Miscellaneous list.
Note. A misceUaneous hst of Verbs for reference showing the

difference in meaning between the Active and the Middle. In
some cases the Reflexive meaning of the Middle is obvious
in some it is dubious in some it has practically disappeared.
;
For constructions with the Cases the Lexicon must be used.

dyaAAw, I adorn. dydWofxat.,! pride myself, exult.
ayw, / bring, lead. dyofxai yvvaiKo., I marry a wife
atpo), I take. alpov/xai, I choose.
dcfMipQ, I take away. d<f>aipovpai rlva Ti, I deprive a
person of smiething (for my
ovm sake).
;
128 [VOICES AND MOODS.

aipu), I take up. aipojiai, I take on myself, un-
dertake (suscipio), begin, gain,
(Ace.)
^
d/Mei/So), I change (trans.). dp-eiftea-Oai,, to do by tums,

answer, requite.
"^
dTrex"^, I keep off, deter. dirkôpaL rtvos, refrain from,
hold 'aloof from,
a7roSi8o)/ti, / give hack.
(TTL—pdcTKio, I sell). dire86p,r]v, I sold.
d/ll'l'CO (see TLfHOpd)).
airaXAaa-crw, / set free. diraXXdcriTopai, I escape, I de-
part from, I leave off.
dpxo) (TToXepov), I am the first dpxopMt (tto Ae/xov), I begin war-

of tico parties to make [war) ;
like operations.
so "vrith Ad you.
but
dpxfa, I rule. dpxofJMi (Passive), / am ruled
fSovXevo), I advise. fSovXevofnaL, I deliberate, coif^
sider.
ya/iw, / marry [duco). yapovfiaL, (1) J marry (nubo)
(2) I give in marriage, betroth,
yeuo), / give a taste of. yevopai, I tcbste.
ypd<f}(D, I write dovM (cf. rt- ypd(f)opai, I get written dawn,
6i)ixi). I indict.
Saret^w, / put out at interest, oavei(opaL, I borrow at interest
lend. (so xpi^cra(T$ai).
6i8da-KO}, 1 teach. SiSao-Ko/i.at Tov vtov, I get my
son taught.
SLBdcTKOpaL VTTO TWOS, I am
taught by a person.
SiKdû}, I decide. 8iKdôpaL (StKTjv (tol), I go to
law with you, conduct a case :
especially of the prosecutor,
opposed to (êvyeiv.
i-eiyo), I urge on, hasten (trans. ). kirtiyopai, 1 hasten (intrans.).
k-i-id-qpi, I put ov place vpon. e—LTide/Jiai, I attack, TLvi
cX") I have (neuter, I am or 1 exopai, I cling to, I come next to,
am able). I am eager for (with Gen.).

iirayyeXXo), I proclaim. iirayyeXXopaL, Ipromise, I pro-
fess, I denounce.
eni\l/r)<^L({3i, I put to the vote {of e7rt,il^<f)L(opai, I vote, decree by
tlie President). vote (of the Assembly).

—— .
Qvm (of iJie priest), I sacrifice. Ovofjiat (of the general), I get a
sacrifice offered, I take au-
spices.
iriiMi, I send. 'Ujiai, I hurry, rush.
KaTa(rTp€(ji(i), I overturn. KaTao-T/3e<ô/xai, / suhdue.
KoifLio, I lull to sleep. Kotjiiw/xat,/ sleep.
Ko/Miô), I transport. Kofxiôfxai, I recover, get hack
what teas lost.
xAa/xySdi/o) Tt, / take. Xafx^dvofiai tivos, Hay hold of.
y kavddv(j}, I escape observation. kavOdvojiai, linXavddvojxai., I
forget.
Travu). I nuike to cease, I stop iravofxaL, I cease, stop (intrans. ).
(trans.).
irdBd), I persuade. ireidofiai, I obey. {irdOov, he
persuaded ; iridov, obey.)
TToiw, / do or make. TToiou/xat, / consider.
TTotw Xoyov, I compose a speech. TTOLovnai Xoyov, I deliver a
speech.
680V T.oLw. I make a road. oSov Troiov[j.at, I make a joumey
iroiovjiai CTTTOvSds, elp-qvrjv, avv-
di]Ki]v, (rvufSacriv.
TToida-dai iraiBas, to beget chil-
dren. Crito, V.
TT/joo-TTotw, I hand over (trado). Trpoo-TToiov/iat, I claim, I aim at.
TTov-qpivw, I am wicked. Troi'r)pevop,aL, I behave toickedly.
TToXtTevo}, I am a citizen. -oXtTevo/jiaL, I act or live as a
(TKOTTO), I look at, examine. cTKoirovixai, I reflect. [citizen.
(TOffiiîi), I make wise, I teach. (ro(f)iôfj.ai, I act tlie sophist, I
quibble, contrive.
^ o-TTci'Sw, I pour out a libation. o-TrevSofjLai, I make a truce.
Tid^jCTL vofjiov 6 vofxoBeTq'i, the TiOerai vojxov 6 Srjfxos, tli^ people
lawgiver makes a laio. makes laios for itself.
6 deis, the mortgager. 6 defxevo's, the mortgagee (also
the depositor in a bank, etc.).
Ti/jnopu) TLvd T6vt, / punish A Ttfi(j)pov/xaL TLvd TLVL, I revcugc
for B's satisfaction. myself on A for wronging B.
And so
Ti/xto/aw (Toi, / avenge or assist Tiixoipovfj-ai ere, I toreak venge-
thee. ance on or pmnish thee.
Similarly
^ d/jLvvb} Tt Tivi, / keep off some- (1) dfiwofxal Ti, I defend my-
thing from B. self against a thing.
—
VOICES AND MOODS.
Hence
(1) d/xvvo) -6Xf.jxov, I keep off (2) dixvio/xai TLva, I requite or
^va7•. punisliaperson, — tois o/xotois,
(2) afxivay 'Adrjvaiots, I help with retaliation, Trepi or inrep
the Atlienians. tlvos, for a certain thing.
Tivb) SUyjv, 2)oenas do, pendOyluo, rtVo/xat SUijv, poenas sumo, I
I pay a penal ti/. exact a penalty or vengeance.
câtvw, I shoiv (trans.). <f>aLvofji.at, I appear, am seen.
X/ooi, (1) I give an oracle. 1 9^^ (^^ oracle given.
xP'^H-^h
(2) I furnish, lend. xP^F-°^h I ^6-
Note. An examination of the above list will bring out two
points.
1. The Active is often transitive, while the Middle is
neuter.
2. The Middle is often used of mental rather than of
bodily actions.
§ 130. THE PASSIVE VOICE.

The Syntax of the Passive Voice is much freer in
Greek than in Latin,
Thus, besides the constructions noticed in the Notes
below, Verbs which take a Genitive or a Dative can be
used personally in the Passive, unlike the Latin.
E.g. Karaippovo) avTov, I desjjise him.
KararppovelTca vir e/xov, he is despised hy me.
TTLarevovat tc5 (BaaiXel, they trust the king.
6 âcriXev^ iriareveraL vir avjwv, the king is trusted
by them.
7ra><i av eTTLôvXevaaLfjuL avrw, ec fxi] Kat eireôv-
\ev6riv VTT avTov ; Aktiph.
How could I p)lot against him, unless also 1 had been
plotted agaiiist hy him ?
Aôlc 1. Neuter verbs can form passive participles.

upX'^j / rule ; dpôiieyo?, ruled over.
This is chiefly the case Avitli neuter participles.
TO. r]cre(h]p.kva avroh {yir auTwv), impious acts committed hi
tlicm.
—
THE PASSIVE VOICE. 131
Ta Kivhvv(.vQkvTa.,, risks TUn.

Tct rjjiaprrjfxeva, errors committed.
TO. cTTparevofjiiva, warlike measures.
TO. croL ir€TrokiTev[X€va, your political acts.
Or with impersonal passives.

Trapeo-KevacTTai, preparation has been made.
d/xa/araveTat, error is being committed.
ovSev d(re/3eiTai, no impiety is being committed.
Cf. Lat. ventum est, erat; factum est, etc.
Note Deponent Verbs are those which have no Active

2.
Form, I receive; olfxai, I think. Passive Deponents
e.g. SexofJ-ai,
are those whose Aorist has a Passive (not a Middle form), e.g.
fSovXa/xai, I loish, e/SovX'fidrjv. The exclusively Passive forms
of Deponents are sometimes Passive not Middle in sense, e.g.
(3id(ofj.aL, I force; efSiaxrO-qv, I was forced. Even the Middle
form of a Deponent may be Passive in meaning, e.g. /3taô/iai
/ am forced, or suffer violence. In such cases there Avas an
original Active form, e.g. (3i,d((j}. See further, Jelf, § 368.
3. It will be remembered that the Aorists in -tjv and

Note
with their corresponding futures in -Tjo-o/xai, -djcroixai, are
-Oijv,
the only Passive forms of a Greek verb. The Middle forms,

except the Aorists, and as a rule the Futures, are of course
Passive as well as Middle in meaning.
Note 4. The direct object of the Active becomes the sub-

ject of the Passive, and the subject of the Active, the agent, is
expressed by vtto and the Genitive.
6 <f>t\6(rO(jiOS 8t8d(TK€L TOV TTtttSa.
6 Trats ScBdaKerai vtto to{J (^lXoctoôv.
The Agent is also expressed, but much less commonly

(a.) By the Dative. See Dative of Agent.
(&.) By "the Prepositions (xtto, e^, -apd, -p6s. See these
Prepositions.
The object of the Active may however remain the object of
the Passive, and the dative of the Active become the subject
of the Passive. This is an extension of § 130.
06 cTrtTCTpa^/jtevoi t^v (f>vXaKi]V, ThUC. i. 126, cf. V. 37, Toura
€7r€o-TaA.)uevoi, and EuR. Ehes. 5. So in English, / leave him a
fortune, Re has been left a fortune.
;
§131. THE MOODS.

Introductory Note on the Subjunctive and Optative.
The Indicative is sharply contrasted with the Subjunc-

tiveand Optative.
Th« Indicative simply and directly makes a state-

ment or asks a question without any qualification.
/3ao-i\eu9 TedurjKev
The king is dead.
TTodev r)fcet<;
Where do you come from ?
It is commonly said that the Indicative states facts,

but the statement need not express a fact actually true ;
e.g. ol JJepaat evtKrjaav rov<; 'Ad7]vatov<i MapaOavt, the
Persians defeated the Athenians at Marathon.
The Subjunctive and Optative, on the other hand,

make assertions, not as real, but as conceptions present
to the speaker's mind.
The Subjunctive and Optative are two aspects of one Mood.

In the oldest Greek they represented originally the WiUing
or Wishing Mood, the Subjunctive being the more peremptory,
Will ; the Optative, the fainter and more remote, Wish. This
was soon modified into a second use, the Subjunctive express-
ing a more vivid, the Optative a fainter, remoter Expectation
or Possibility. Hence they soon came to be used in Sub-
ordinate Sentences, expressing Purpose, Condition, Indefinite
Frequency, etc. And though in Subordinate Sentences the
general rule is for the Subjunctive to foUow Primary, the
Optative Historic tenses, yet there is no such fundamental
distinction between the two Moods as to prevent the Subjunc-
tive being used for the Optative, the two Moods sometimes
alternating in the tame paragraph.
—
THE MOODS, 133
One or two instances from Homer will illustrate the

difference between the Subjunctive and Optative :
Mt] ere KL-êloi, II. i. 2G, let mc not find thee,
Mr} /jbTjv a/cXef<u9 airoXoifjiriv, II. xxiL 304, let me not

fall ingloriously.
ovK eau ovTOf; avrjp, ovo eaaeruL, ovoe yevqrac.

HoM. Od. xvl 437.
Lives nx)t that man, nor e'er will live, nxir e'er is like
to he (horn).
Here the Subjunctive differs from the Future Indicative

in stating what is thought likely to occur, not positively
what will occur.
pela deoqy eSeKoiv Kai rrfKodev avSpa cracoaac
HoM. Od. iii. 231.
Lightly a god, an he u-ill, might save thee e'en at a
distance.
The Optative gives a more remote representation than

the Subjunctive of a future possibility.
Note. The Subjunctive and Optative (with two excep-

tions to be noticed in the Optative) refer to future time.
The reference to the future, however, is more vague in the
Optative, so vague that the notion of time is often scarcely
apparent in this mood. This, perhaps, may be why the
Optative lent itself to a connexion with past tenses in historic
sequence. But there is nothing in the form of the Optative,
neither its connecting vowel nor its suffixes, which per se
denotes past time. And the only two usages in which the
Optative really refers to past time are: (1) in General Sup-
positions (see Conditional Sentences) ; and, (2) in Oratio
Obliqua, where occasionally it represents a past tense of the
Indicative (see Oratio Obliqua).
The Subjunctive and Optative are both used (1) in Inde-
pendent, (2) in Subordinate Sentences. Their uses in Sub-
ordinate Sentences are given in the Syntax of the Compound
Sentence.
—
§ 132. THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT

SENTENCES.
The Independent Subjunctive is used :
A. In Exhortations. First person often with ê/je, 0176,
ityere, iQi (S?/ or vvv added).
ê'/ae hr\ httu) Trpo? v/jia<;. DeM.

Come now, let ine speak before you.
dAA' Wl, LU)fJ.€V.
Come then, let us go {suppose we go).
In Soph. Phil 300 the 2d Person (fxadys).
B. In Prohibitions (with /jlt]).
{a) First person plural (singular very rare, cf Eur. .
Hipp. 567, Heracl. 559).
(b) Second and third person with aorist subjunctive.
(a) /xt) ôj3cofMe6a, let us not be afraid.
fiT] areXrj tov Xoyov KaraXiTrcofxev. Plat.

Let us not leave our argument incomplete.
{b) fiij ravra 7roi,r)a7]<;.
Do not do this.
Ne haec feceris.
fiTjSevc crvfKpopav oi>€iSi(Tr)<;. ISOCR.

Taunt no one vj'ith a misfortune.
C. In Questions of doubt (Deliberative Questions)

with the First Person. ôvXei, ôvXeaOe (deXei^, OeXere
in poetry) are often added.
€L7r(Ofji€v, rj ai/ycaiMev, tj rt hpaaofxev ; EuK.

Are we to {should we, mvM we) speak, or keep silence,
or wlutt shall we do ?
—
OPTATIVE TN INDEPENDENT SENTENCES. 135
Ti ôvKecrde hpaaco ;
Quid vultis faciam ?
What vjould you have me do ?

oifiOL Tt Spd(TOi; 7701 (fivyo) /X7JT/30S xêpas; EUR. 3Icd. 1271.
Ah me, what must I do? whither escape a mothei''s hands ?
Note 1. —The third person, ho^êver, occurs pretty often,

especially in Plato and Demosthenes.
TTorepoi' ere rts t^s TroAecos k\Opov ^ kp.ov efvat ^y;
Dem. 18. 124.
Shmdd one call you the enemy of the state, or my enemy ?
TTodev Tts apgTjrat; PlAT.
Where is one to begin ?
Tt €lVg TIS/
Wliat must one say ? Plat, and De\i.
TTOi Tis ovv (f)vytj;
TTOL poXojv pevw ; SOPH. Ai. 403.
Here this ns refers to the first person.
Note 2. —The Subjunctive, expressing a future possi-

bility, common in Homer, is not wholly unknown, though
rare in Attic.
ovt' IcTTtv 0VT€ TTOTE yevqTai KpeLTTOv. Plat. Leg. 942.
It is not, noi' is it ever likely to get better.
§ 133. ^-^-E OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENT

SENTENCES.
The Independent Optative is used :
A. To denote a Wish (without av).
oi TTol 'yevoLO Trarpo^ evyevearepo';. SoPH.

BoTf, may'st thou 2^^'ove more fortunate than thy
father.
In the first person a wish often conveys an exhortation.

See Subjunctive in Exhortations.
p,ri ^(orjv fj,er afiovaia<i. EUR.
Let me not lire without culture.
—
In the third person a command or permission may be
conveyed.
ephot Tt9 rjv €Ka(rro'i eiSetr) Te'^vrjv. Ar.
Let each man keep to his trade, whatcer he knows.
elSeiT} is assimilated to the mood of principal verb epBoL.
Cf.Xen. An. iii. 2. 37, tijoIto (al. riyeLo-Oco) Aescii. P. V. :
1047, where two Optatives are co-ordinate with preceding

Imperatives.
B. In Deliberative Questions. The Optative differs

from the Subjunctive in the same questions only in ex-
pressing a less vivid and more remote possibility,
reav, Zev, Svvaaiv rt? avhpoiv
vTrepâala Karaa'ôi ; SoPH. Ant. 605.
Thy power, Zeus, what mortal man
By overstepping might control ?
Cf. Aesch. Ch. 392 ; Ar. Plut. 438 ; Soph. 0. C. 170 ; Plat.
Pi,ep. 352 C (oKOVcrats).
Note. Several places, especially in the Tragedians, are
quoted where the Optative without av occurs in its Homeric
potential sense (e.g. Od. iii. 231, quoted before). In most of
these places, however, if not all, the reading is doubted.
Jelf (I 418, I. a) quotes two passages from Plato, Phaedo,
—
87 E, eTnSeiKvvot 8tot;>(otTo, where Heindorf would insert av :
and Pep. 362 o, d8eX<fios avSpl wapeii], where to Aeyo/xevov shows

that the phrase is a quotation, probably from the Epic.
§ 134. TJI£ IMPERATIVE.

The Imperative is used in Commands, Entreaties,
Prayers, and Prohibitions. It denotes future time.
In Prohibitions we must use ix-f] either (1) with 2d Person

Present Imperative (continued act), or (2) 2d Person
Aorist Subjunctive (single act), thus :
yuT] KkeTTre, or jxtj KXe-^^nqq, do not steal ; but neither jxt)
K\f7rTr)<i nor Kkeyôv.

THE IMPERATIVE. 137
Ar. Thesm. 877 (yu,^ i/reOo-oi/) is a rare exception in Attic.
Mr/, Trpo? êwi', fiatvwfieOa, /jLrjB' ai<7)(pco<; airoXw/jLeOa.

Xen.
Ze^ ?is wo^, by the gods, he mad, nor die slianiefully.
But iMrj with the 3d pers. Aorist Imperative is admis-

sible both in poetry and in prose.
/jLTjSei'; v/Mwv Taina vo/xiaarco. Xen.

Let none of you thinJc so.
Note 1. For the Infinitive used as an Imperative, see

Index.
Note 2. ola-O' o Spaa-ov. The Imperative is sometimes used

in relative clauses depending on an Interrogative.
dW oicrd' o BpaxTOv; T(p crKeAet 6eve tt^v Trerpav.
Ar. Av. 54.
Do you know v:hat to do ? Kick the rock with your leg.
oldOd vvv a [lOL yevecrOo) ; Secr/ia rots êvowri TrpocrOes.

Eur. /. T. 1203.
Knowest thou what must be done for me ? put cJuiins on the
strangers.
Logically it would be a 8d y^vka-Oai.;
And as the Future is used in Greek as an equivalent for

the Imperative, we find
olcrd' oSv 6 SpdcreLS . . . oSrjcrov rjiitv ctltov. Eur. Cycl. 133.

Dost know what thou must do ? provide us victuals.
The Imperative in Greek is subordinate in the above idioms.

As this is impossible in English, we have to substitute a
periphrasis. Do yoxi know what (you must do=do) ?
—
CHAPTER YII.
THE TENSES.
§ 135* Greek tenses may be classified in two ways.
A. With regard to the Order of Time.
B. With regard to the Kijid of Act or State.
A. ORDER OF TIME.
The Time of a Tense must be either
1. Past (Imperfect, Aorist, Pluperfect).

2. Present (Present, Perfect).
3. Future (Future, Future Perfect).
PRIMARY AND HISTORIC TENSES.

Tenses in Present and Future Time are called Primary.
Tenses in Past Time are called Historic.
SEQUENCE OF MOODS.
In Compound Sentences the theoretical rule is that
A Principal Sentence in Primary Time is followed by

the Subjunctive in the Subordinate Sentence.
A Principal Sentence in Historic Time is followed by

the Optative in the Subordinate Sentence.
This sequence however is purely theoretical ; for, as

wiU be seen in the Compound Sentence, a Subjunctive
constantly takes the place of an Optative in Historic
Sequence.
138
; :
TIME OBSERVED THROUGHOUT MOODS. 139
§ 136. Time how far observed throughout the

Moods.
(a) The only mark of Past Time in Greek is the Augment
The distinction between Past and Present therefore is strictly
observed only in the Indicative.
Absolute and Relative Time. —The distinctions of Time, how-
ever, are observed in the Optative, Infinitive, and Participle,
when these Moods ai-e used in Indirect Discourse or Oratio
Ohligua, i.e. when they represent indirectly the words or
thoughts of another. This is most clearly seen in the Indirect
Statements and Questions.
e(f)ri Tavra ttoulv — TroLrjcrat — Trotijcretv.
He said that he was doing, did or had done, would do this.

TToteiv =:rota» ia 'Recta, and thereiore is relatively present ;
TTOirjarai ^=k~oiit](Ta „ ,,
relatively po^t ;
TroLi](Teiv=-r-oi-qj-(o „ „ relatively future ;
relatively, i.e. to the Principal Verb present, past, and future

but TToulv, TToiricrai, -oL-qaeLv are all absolutely past, because
I4>r], the Principal Verb, is past.
lAcâv OTt Trefxxfeie crcfias o ftacriXev's.
They said that the Icinghad sent them.

In Piecta e-e/ii/'ev rj[ia.?.
r/pcTO et Kevos 6 <f>6j3os cirj.
He asked if his fear was groundless.

In Eecta kcvos Ian
•ncrdovTO Toiis iroXe/Miovs Trpo(r~XeovTa'?.
They discovered that the enemy were advancing.
Eecta, ot TToXefJuot TrpoaTrXeoiviv.
(b) The Aorist Participle denotes an action past relatively to

the principal verb.
BoicDToi ot e^ "Apn^s avao-Tavres T-qv Boturi'av ioKy](rai'.
Thuc.
Boeotians who had been driven out of Arne settled in Boeotia.
See further however under the Aorist Participle, which in

itself does not denote time.
(c) ^Yith regard to the Future in the Moods it seems always
express future time, for
(1.) The Future Optative is only used to represent in the
Obliqua a Future Indicative of Direct Discourse.
I40 THE TENSES.
(2.) The Future

Infinitive is most commonly used after verbs
of saying and thinking, and therefore like the Optative, repre-
sents a Future Indicative of the Recta. Whenever the Future
Infinitive is used after other verbs, instead of the usual
Present or Aorist Infinitive, the idea of futurity still seems
to be emphasised, e.g.: —
He delays to do his duty, fieWei Troteiv or Troirja-aL Ta
Seovra.
/xeXXeL 7ôt7;cê^v (with emphatic
reference to the future).
dva/SdXXeTat is similarly used.
(3.) The Future Participle denotes a future relative to the

principal Verb.
(TvXXajj.(:iaviL Kvpov, ws d/roKTevoji',
He seizes Cyrus with the intention of killing him.
B. THE KIND OF ACT OR STATE.

With regard to the Kind of Act denoted Tenses are
divided into
1. Continued (Present, Imperfect).

2. Finished (Perfect, Pluperfect).
3. Indefinite or Single (Aorist Strong and Weak).
1. A continued Tense mentions an act as still going on,

or in progress, whether in past, present, or future, an act
in which the agent is still engaged, / was vji'iiing, I am
writing, I shall he vjriting {the letter).
2. A finislied Tense mentions an act as one which is
perfect, complete, in a finished state, I have wiîtten,
I had written, I shall have written {the letter).
3. An indefinite Tense mentions the mere act itself,
a single act, without any such limitation of its con-

tinuance or completion, / iirrote, I write, I shall ivrite
{the letter). Hence the Stoic grammarians called such a
Tense an Aorist {i.e. dopia-Tov or unlimited).
IDEAL DIVISION OF TENSES. 141
The distinction between the Kinds of Act is observed

throughout all the Moods, and is therefore a more univer-
sal and abiding distinction than that of Time.
Note. The kind of act is denoted in Greek by the Tense-

stem, AY-, AYC-, AYCA-, AEAY-.
The Present Tense-stem (Present and Imperfect Tenses)
denotes a continued act.
The Perfect {i.e. reduplicated) Tense-stem (Perfect, Plu-
and Future Perfect Tenses) denotes a finished
perfect, act.
The Aorist Tense-stems (Strong and Weak Aorist tenses)

denote an indefinite or single act.
The Future is ambiguous, denoting either a continued or

an indefinite act.
§ 137. Ideal division of Tenses.
An ideal twofold division of Tenses may be thus con-

structed, to be read horizontally and vertically.
— —
142 THE TENSES.
Note. A very rare poetical periphrasis occurs with Aorist

Participle, o-tCDTrrycras lorojMat, XvTrTjOei^ ea-oixa.i, SOPH. 0. T.
1146, 0. a 816.
This scheme, however, is purely ideal, and does not corre-
spond to the Greek tenses, however well it corresponds with
our analytic English tenses.
In Greek the kind of act, as has been observed already, is
denoted by the Present, the Perfect, and the Aorist Tense-
stems : the Future Tense-stem has to be left out.
The most important distinction is that between a Continued
and an Indefinite act.
§ 138. TIf£ PRESENT AND IMPERFECT

INDICATIVE.
A. The Present Indicative denotes :
1. An act in which a person is engaged in present

time ; '^/pdcpco, I am vjritmg now.
2. An act which is habitual or repeated, or a general
truth, without being limited to the present moment.
pwixTj ajxaOr]^ 7roWaKt<; tlktu â^rjv. EUE. Frag.
Strength untrained oft hrings forth harm.
Vis cousili expers mole ruit sua. Hoeace.
Note 1. The Present has also certain idiomatic uses of which

O are the commonest
the follo^vincf :
(a) The Historic present denotes a past event. In Compound

Sentences it reckons as an historic tense. This historic pre-
sent seems sometimes equivalent to an aorist (narrative),
sometimes to an imperfect (descriptive).
crvWafif^dveL Kvpov (is aTroKTCvtu i/. XeN.
He seizes (seized) Cyrus tcith the intention of killing him.
(b) The
Present, as it denotes an unfinished act, often
denotes an attempted act.
Tous AaKeSatfLOVLOVs dvat/Dei, tovs oe ^wKeas crwêt. DeM.
He is trying to destroy the Lacedaemonians, and to save tht
Phocians.
— —
PBESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 143
Tljis is especially the case with8i8w/ii, / offer, i.e. try to give,

and TrdOw, I try to persuade. The present participle also has
this meaning.
(c) The Present as a Perfect :
1. With TTciAai or 7;5rj {all this ichile, this long ivhile, not now
for the first time), like iam, iavuhidiim, in Latin with the
Present.
efioLje vvv re Kal TraAat SoKet. EUR. Frag.
I think so nmo, and I have long been thinUng so.
vocrei 7yo7j 8e/ca erjy.

He has been ill these ten years.
Esp. in the poets TraAat may refer to a statement made only a

moment ago (as we say hyperbolically ever so long ago). Cf.
Soph. El. 676.
2. Certain presents have the force of perfects : rjxw, / am
come, adsum ; olyoiiai, I am gone {quickly); vikQ, I am victo-
rious ; Kparu), I am victorious ; I'^xTwât, / am
defeated ; dStKw,
I have done wrong, I am unjust ; oAAi'/xat, aTroAAt-ât, in Tragedy,
/ am lost, or undone.
3. Verbs of hearing and learning, d/corca (kAuw, poet.), ttw-
davoixai, al(r6dvoiJ.ai, fxavdavu). apn is often used A\"ith these
verbs.
Ge/itcTTOKAea ovk aKOveis av8pa dyaOov yeyovoTu ; PlÂT.
Have you not heard that Themistocles proved himself a patriot 1
{d) The Present Infinitive and the Present Participle may

represent the Imperfect Indicative in English.
ot (TV/i.Trpecrêvoi'Tes naX ~ap6vTes Karapiaprvp-qcrovcn.
DEii. de F. L. 381. 5.
Tlwse who were his fellow-colleagues in the embassy, and who
were present, will bear tcitness.
B. The Imperfect is the past of the Present. It

describes a past action as (a) still going on, or (6) as going
on along with other actions, or (c) as frequently recurring.
For (a) and (&) see Aorist.
c. û)KpaTr]<i coairep eyLyi'coaKev, outu)<; eXe^/e. Xen.

Socrates used to speak exactly as he used to think.
144 THE TENSES.
Note 2. The Imperfect shares most of the idiomatic uses of

the present.
(a) The Imperfect of an attempted act, like the present of
the same.
€Kao"Tos Tts iTveiBiV auTov VTTOcrTrjvat tyjv dp)(^-qv. XeN.
Each one teas trying to persuade him to imdertake the comrmind.
The present participle also often has this sense.
(b) W[\Qn the present has a perfect force its imperfect is a

pluperfect, / had come; (l)x6ixi]v, I was gone; eviKwv, /
i^kov,
had won the victor I was victorious, etc.
i/,
(c) The Imperfect is used for the present when what is seen
now to be the case has been in the past inquired about, or
sought for, or thought of.
ov tout' rjv €vSaLfj.ovLa, KaKov aTraWay)] ; PlAT.
Is not this happiness (ichich ive icere talking about or trying to
discover) deliverance from evils ?

08' ?]v apa 6 ^vXXal3(i)V fxe. SOPH.
This then, 1 see, is me {this teas and is).
he who seized
To this belongs the famous Aristotelian phrase, to tC ^v etVai
(d) In the use of the Imperfects eSei, XPW^ <«i<êAov, etKos yv,
like the Latin debebam, oportebat, decebat, denote what ought
to have been done, but what was not done.
ovSev aXXo ISet Aeyeti'. DeM.
He need have said nothing else.
Nihil aliud dicere oportebat.
ovK etKos
rjv oi'TUS €av. SoPH. 0. T. 255.
Itwould not have been right to leave it alone.
Non decebat praeterire.
On these constructions see Coiulitional Sentences.
§ 139. THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT

INDICATIVE.
A. The Perfect denotes an act which is in a finished
state. The act must have been begun iu the past, but
it stands finished in the present. The Perfect therefore
is reckoned as a Primary tense. <ye<ypaâ, I have written,
my vjriting is in a finished state ; heBeraL, he is in a state
of imprisonment.
:
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE. 145
Not only in the Subjunctive and Optative, but also in the

Indicative, a periphrasis with et/xt is used for the Perfect. The
abiding nature of the result is then emphasized.
efs oSe /xovoyevvys ovpavos yeyovws I(JT6 xe Kal eV eo-rat.
Plat. Tim. 31.
This one sole-created heaven hath been created, and shall still
endure.
Cf. €xoi with Aorist Participle.

The Perfect of many verbs is equivalent to a Present
rWvrjKev, he is dead; KkKXi^fiai, I am called; yeyova, I ara he-
come, i.e. I am; /xe/ivr^jnai, I remember ; olSa (o-wotSa), I know,
novi. The Pluperfect is then an Imperfect, eTeOviJKei, he was
dead, etc. The Perfect Imperative of such verbs is a simple
Perfect.
Note. A great number of Perfects in Homer describe present

acts or states : avwya, /SePpiOa, KSKevda, /jLeixrjXa, ixe/jLova, eppiya,
etc. etc.
B. The Pluperfect is the Perfect carried back to past

time. eyeypd(f)r], I had ivritten, my writing was in a
finished state in the past.

For the Future Perfect, see Future.
The Perfect Imperative (3d singular Middle and Passive)
issues a decisive command which is to be executed at once,
and there an end.
p-k^pi ToSSe wptcrdw v/jlwv -^ (SpaSirrqs. ThUC. i. 71.
At your slowness find a limit (come to an end).
this point let
Hactenus progressa (terminata) esto (finem habeat) vestra
tarditas. PoPPO.
§ 140. THE AORIST.

1 . The Aorist denotes the mere occurrence
of an act in
past time.-Apart from difference of time the Aorist is
always distinguished from the Imperfect (and in the
Oblique Moods from the Present) by noticing the mere
doing of the act, and not describing the act as in pro-
gress. The Aorist has been likened to a point, the Im-
perfect (and Present) to a line.
—
146 THE TENSES.
Note. As the Aorist notices the mere act or state itself, three
aspects of this are observable.
1. The commencement of the act, the beginning, not the con-
tinuance.
This has been called the Ingressive or Inceptive Aorist,
ifSaa-LXeva-e, he came to the throne {e/Saa-iXevev, he was king).
€7rAouTv;cr€v, he became rich (iirXovTei, he was a rich man),
evoa-qae, he fell ill (li'oo-ft, he was ill).
2. 2'he act as done and over, not as doing.

AYCinnOC EnOIHCE denotes the simple fact that
Lysippus was the maker of the statue.
AYCinnOC EnOIEI denotes the labour spent on the
making.
iSeiTrvrja-av, they supped, i.e. ended swpper.
ISftTTvow, they were at supper.
vv^ lyevcTo, night came on, i.e. it was night.
vr| eyiyvero, night was coming on, i.e. it was twilight.
3. The act as instantaneous and momentary, not as occupying
a long time.
kyia Se i^Xôv, etiSov, kvLKTqtra.
" Caesar's brag of '
came, and saw, and overcame.' " Shak
2. The Aorist is narrative, the Imperfect is descriptive ;
i.e. used when we merely mention a past act

the Aorist is
as having occurred, while the Imperfect is used when we

wish to describe or paint (so to speak) past acts as still
going on.
ol fxev o-TrrfXdov. KXeavSpo'i Be eOvero, Kac avvrjv

Kat êviav avveâXovro. Xen.
'aevo(f>covTL (f)L\LKco<;,
So they icent away. Meanivhile Cleander was en-

gaged in sacrificing, and in friendly intercourse
with Xenophon, and they formed a friendship.
Note 1. Other uses of the Aorist :
The Aorist is from the Imperfect by the

also distinguished
mere mention an act mthout reference to other acts, while
of
the Imperfect often describes an act as going on side by side
with another act.
— —
THE AORIST. 147
nai-cavtas €k AaKeSai/iovos crrpaTijyos xnrb twv 'EAAi^vwv lê-

fiera eiKOcri vewv otto IleAoTrovvvyo-ov, ^vviir\eov 8e Kal
Trkfi<fi6rj
'A^r;vatot rpiaKovra vavcrt, /cat eo-T/aarevcrav es KiVpov, Kai

auT^S Tci TToAAa KaT€(TTpk\pavTo.
Fausanias ivas sent out from Lacedaermn by the Greeks as
admiral with twenty ships from Peloponnese. The Athenians also
accompanied him with thirty ships, and they proceeded to Cyprus,
and subdued the greater part of it.
Note 2. The Aorist is used (esp. in Tragedy) where we use a
Present. The moment of past time is but an instant before.
Something an instant ago has evoked the act.
einyvecr' epyov Koi irpovoiav r^v Wov. SoPH. Ai. 586.

/ commend the act, and the forethaught thou didst show.
Elect. 668. 677, Eur. Hec. 1275, El. 248, Fhiloc. 1289, 1314.
^vvrJKa, I understand, and "]crdi}v, I am pleased, are of constant
occurrence.
((f>pi^' ep(i)Ti Trepixo-prjs B' dveirTonav. SoPH. Ai. 692.

/ thrill icifh love and flutter overjoyed.
Here the act is instantaneous also.
Note 3. English often uses the Pkiperfect where Greek uses

the Aorist this is especially the case in Oratio Obliqua
; :
06 'IvSoi lAeâv on —ep-ifeie (r</)as 6 jSacnXevs.

Xen. Cyr. ii. 4. 7.
The Indians said that their king had sent them.
Eecta tTTCjUi/êv, where we should say " has sent " (not sent).
This in Obliqua becomes had.
And with temporal and local sentences
iireiSi] eVeAei'Tv/cre .Aapetos Kal KaT^crTrj 'ApTaêp^rji;.

Xen. An. i. 1. 3.
After Darius had died and Arfaxerxes had been established
in the kingdom.
Quum mortuus esset Darius, etc.
erpoLTrovTO es TLdvopixov o9i.v dvijydyovTo. ThuC. i. 92.
They turned tmvards Panormus ichence they had set sail.
Note4. The Greek Aorist and English Perfect.
Though we have an Aorist in English corresponding

to the
Greek, yet Greek uses the Aorist even more constantly than
English. We use a Perfect sometimes where Greek uses an
148 THE TENSES.
Aorist. —
Thus / am shocked if these are the orders vjhich you
have given, Seivov iroiovixai €6 Toia.vra. TrapqyyeiXas. Here an
act rather than a finished state is denoted, and the Greek
Aorist is more correct than the English Perfect. See example
above, Soph. Ai. 586, Wov would naturally be rendered into
English, tlum hast shown. Again a Gnomic Aorist in Greek
may be rendered by an English Perfect.
Note 5. The Aorist Participle generally expresses time prior
to its principal verb, but not always so, and, when so, not from
its O'svn inherent meaning, but only from its connexion with
a principal verb.
Thus yeAacras (ot/iw£as) e<^y;, With a smile, laugh (sigh) he
said.
€V e7rot7;cras dvayuvijo-as ft€. PlAT. Phaed. 6Q.
You did well to remind me.
Here the two acts are contemporary and identical.
So ev eTTotr^cras d<^t/c6yu,evos. HdT. V. 24.
Cf. Cui'tius, Elucidations, p. 211.
Note 6. The following verbs show the contrast between the

Present and the Aorist in the kind of act denoted. It Anil
be noticed that several are Ingressive Aorists.
voo-etv, to he ill. vocnja-ai, to fall ill.
(f>evyeiv, to run away. (fivydv, to escape.

(fiofSeia-OaL, to be in fear. 4>ofir]drivaL, 8ei(raL, to take fright.
Trpda-aretv, to be busy about. Trpaâi, to accomplish.
yeAav, to be laughing. yeXda-a.t, to burst out laughing.
dp-xêiy, to rule. dpât, to obtain dominion or office.
tVxi'ea', to be strong. IcrxvcraL, to become strong.

cnydv, /o be silent. a-tyTJa-ai, to become silent.
eêtv, to have. ""X^'''? ^^ obtain.
(jiaivea-Oai, to appear. (âvTjvat, to become apparent.
-oXifxdv, to be at war. TroXep-rjcrai, to begin war.
bellum gerere. bellum inferre.
f3a.criXi.vi.Lv, to he king. l3a.crLX€vcraL, to come to the throne.
Note on the Aorist.
The Aorist is often called the momentary tense. It is

doubtful, however, whether momentariness is its essential
meaning. We
should use the aorist if we translated The
— —
THE FUTURE. 149
Pharaohs built the pyramids, ol (Saa-iêls twv Alyi-Tr-iuji' wkoSo-

fjirja-av ras irvpafjiiSas, though the pyramids, like Eome, were
not built in a day. We
should equally use it in translating
He eyeAaac, or He fell ill, evoa-qcre.
hurst out laughing, And
again we should use it of such an instantaneous shiver of
emotion as is contained in e^pt^' epw-t, / thrill uith love.
The mere mention of the act (or state) itself, without regard
to its duration, seems to be the one description of the Aorist
which suits it all through. Aorist and indefinite are not very
satisfactory words, but they have been retained as familiar,
for want of a better. Simple and Isolated have been suggested.
§141. THE FUTURE.

The Future denotes an act which will take place here-
after.
Its actiou is either continued or indefinite (see above).
Note 1. Idiomatic uses of the Future :
The second person of the Future both affirmatively and

negatively resembles an imperative.
(a) Af&rmatively (either as a statement, or as a question

with ov Interrogative)
Trpos TttCra Trpaêts olov av OeXys. SoPH. 0. C. 956.
Thou vnlt do therefore {do therefore) whatever likes thee.
ov\ eX^€T, ov 7ra6rjo-€T', ovk dpqêre ; An. Ly. 459.

The expression is not so abrupt in form as an imperative.
A suggestion is made, or a permission given, which, however,
is an immistakeable Imperative.
(b) Negatively with ov —

Xky cl Ti f3ovX€i, X'^'-P'-
^' °^ li-aiVeis iroTe. EUR. Med. 1320.
Speak if thou wilt, but with the hand thou must tovdi me never.
Observe (1) that in Euripides ov vnih. the Future is a state-

ment, in Aristophanes a question (2) that in both passages ov
;
with the Future is co-ordinate with an Imperativa

— — —
150 THE TENSES.
Note 2. A
periphrastic Future is formed l^y ixkkXut with the
Present or Future (more rarely the Aorist) Infinitive.
/xeAAco ypdcf)eLV, ypa\peiv (rarely ypaxpai).
I am going to urite, I mean or intend to imite.
/xiXX<j) v/icts ayctv els 'Acrtav.
/ am going to lead you (am on the point of leading you) into

Asia.
In Asiam vos ducturus sum.
oei^cret tov tolovtov el /LteAAet rj — oAireta (jbjêrrdai.
Plat. Hep. 412.
There will he need of such a ruler if the constitution is to be
preserved.
€fxeXX.ov in the same way is used

e/icAAov cr' apa KiVTâeiv lyci. Ar. Mub. 1301.
Aha! I thought I should tickle you.
iiTavOa e/xeAAov KaraAvcretv. XeN.

There they were intending to rest.
Ibi deversuri erant.
Sometimes neXXw, e/êAAov, means / am doomed, destined.

TTws ov jxeXXix), Tt ov /xeAAw ; mean JVJiy shoidd I not i
2. The Future Perfect denotes a finished act or state

in the Future :
7] irokireia reXecof; KeKoafirjaeTai. Plat.

Owr state shall have been 2Jerfectly constituted.
Note. The Future Perfect, like the Perfect, sometimes de-

notes what will take place instantly.
Compare
Ktti' TovTO viKOifxev TTavO' rjiJLLVueTTOLTjTai. XeN. An. L 8, 12.
If we secure this victory we have done everything.
with
4>pa.(€ K-at TreirpdêTai. An. Phd. 1027.
Speak, and it shall be done instanter.
A periphrastic future perfect active is formed with et/it
TCI Seovra ecrofieda eyvajKorfs, k.t.A. DeM. Phil. 1. 54,

We shall have determined to do our duty.
1
GNOMIC AND ITERA Tl VE TENSES. 1 5
§ 142. Gnomic and Iterative Tenses.
Almost any tense in Greek, as in English, can express a

customary or a repeated act, or a general truth.
1. The Present —
pwfirj d/xadrj's ttoAAcxkis tiktei ^Xafii^v. EUR. (See abovC.)
Strength luithout science often ccmseth harm.
Vis consili expers mole ruit sua.
2. The Perfect—
TToAAot Sia ooâv Koi TToXiTKyjv Syva/xiv KaKO. TreTTOvOacriv.
Xen.
Many have come to trouble (and do come to trouble) in cons&-
quence of reputation and political power.
(This perfect alternates with presents in the text.)
3. Th^ Aorist called Gnomic, as expressing a yvu>ixr], sentiment or

general truth —
dOvixovvres avSpes ovvrw rpoiratov ecmjcrav. PlAT.
Half-hearted men never yet up a trophy.
set
So in English — "Faint heart never won fair lady."
Seivcov' t' d7][xa Trvevfidruiv iKoi[jLi(re o-revovra ttovtov.

Soph. Ai. 674.
And the breath of dreadful vnnds husheth ever the moaning
deep.
The present and perfect, the present and aorist, the perfect
and aorist, often alternate in the same paragraph.
4. The Imperfect and Aorist with dv denote a repeated act.
dvaXauPdvuiv ovv avrCiv rot Troirjixara SL-rjpwTOiV dv avrovs

Tt Xkyoiev. Plat. Apol. ch. viii.
Taking up their poems then I used ask them (I loould ask
to
them) what their meaning was.
ec Tti/es tSotev ttt;
'
tov<s (r<j!)ere/30vs iTriKparovvTas aveddpa-rjo-av
dv. Thug. vii. 71.
If at any point they saw their own side idnning they picked
up their courage (as often as this happened).
For an excellent passage see Soph. Phih 289-297.

—
THE TENSES.
§ 143. The Tenses in the Moods.

The between the Present,
distinction previously explained
the Perfect, and the Aorist, is ol)served in all the moods,
the Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive, Optative, "Infinitive,
and Participle. Some instances JH"e giên to show the difl'er-
ence, especially between the Present and the Aorist.
Imperative —
lir]Z\v cfiofiov, Don't be timid : fxr^Sev <f)of3r]dys, Don't liave
any fear of this.
€? TTTj €\ets dvTt/\ey€ti', civTiAeye' el 8e /jlij, iravcraL iroXXaKis

Aeywv Tuv auroi/ Aoyov. PlAT. Crit.
If you Jiave anything to say in objection, say on (at length, in

a continued speech), but if 7iot, give over {at once) repeating
the same argument.
Subjunctive or Optative —
ov TovTo TTWTTOTe CTTCicrî^v ws rj 4^XV> '^^^ i"'^" ^^ """^ dvr]T(o
(TW/iari tjy (;>j, orav 8e rovrov aTraXXayrj, rkdvr]Kev.
Xex. Cyr. viii 7. 19.
He never believed tJmt the soul, so long as it exists in this
mortal body, lives, but that as soon as it is separated from
it, a
dies (y denoting continuance, dirakXayy the instant
act of death).
Infinitive —
ov fSovXevecrOaL en copa aAXa êfSovXevaOai. PlAT. Crit,
It is no longer the moment to be making up one's mind, but to

have it made up.
XaAcTTov TO TTOieiv TO 8e KeXeia-ai pa.8tov.
It is difficult to do (to be engaged in doing), but easy to com-
mand (to say '
do this ').
So with the other Moods.

CHAPTEE VIII.
THE THEEE VERBAL XOUNS.

1. The Infinitive (a Substantive).
2. The Participle (an Adjective).
3. The Verbal Adjectives in -ro<i and -Teo<;.
§ 144- Note on the Infinitive.
The Infinitive is, in its origin, a Verbal Substantive in the

Dative case. Though subsequently its uses diverged so Avidely
from this limited signification, yet its origin gives us a clue to
its diff"erent meanings.
Thus—
iopadmeiaL would mean time for going away.
Svvarbs yev&rOai, able for becoming.
fiavddveiv tJko/icv, v:c are come for learning.
Trapkx*^ e/zairrov re/zvciv kol KaUiv, I offer myself foi- cutting
and burning.
Oavfjjo. ISea-daL, a wonder for the viewing.
For full information consult Professor Max Miiller's
Inaugural Oxford Lecture.
§ 145. TY/ZT IJSFINJTIVE.

The Infinitive is a Verbal Substantive denoting action.
Compare to iroiilv with 17 —oir]a-ts.
It has therefore points in common both with (1) the Verb,
(2) with the Noun.
1. Like the Verb
(a) It has t€ni)C6 and voices — Aueiv, Awretv, Xva-ai, etc.,
\vcraLy \v<ra(r6ai, Xvdrjvai.
(b) It takes a subject before and a predicate after it.

163
154 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.
(c) It governs the same case as its verb.

{d) It is qualified, like a verb, by adverbs, and not like
a substantive by adjectives.
(e) It forms subordinate sentences, the indirect statement,

a temporal sentence (Avith vrpiv), a final sentence,
a consecutive sentence, Avith w(tt(. and ws, and in
connexion with av it is a substitute for the in-
dicative and optative moods with av. This last
use gives it a sort of right to be called a mood.
2. Like a Substantive
(a) It stands as the subject to a verb,
(J) It is declined with the article as a nominative, accusa-
tive, genitive, or dative.
(c) It is connected with Prepositions.
§ 146. THE SUPPLEMENTAR Y^ INFINITIVE.

1. The Infinitive supplements the meanings of verba
and nouns (especially of verbs) which in themselves are

incomplete.
efxaOov TovTo iroLrjaai.

They learned to do this.
ov 7re(J3VK€ BovKeveiv.
He is not horn to he a slave.
6rjfii,aT0K\rj<; iKavwraro^ rjv enrelv Kat yvcovuL Kai

irpaâi. Lys.
Themistocles was eminently ahle to sjJcaJc, to decide,
and to act.
Note 1. Sometimes the article is added.

TO /3ta TToAiTwv 8pav 'e(fivv d/x-Q^âvos. SOPH. Ant. 78.
/ am by natiLre incapable of acting in defiance of my fellow-
citizens. Cf. Track. 545, 0. C. 442, Aesch. P. V. 865.
' Also called the Complementary, or the Prolate, Infinitive. The

term Supplementary seems more simple and intelligible.
— ;
THE SUPPLEMENTARY INFINITIVE. 155
The article marks the more distinctly as an

Infinitive
object. The Infinitive is not always the Supplementary
Infinitive, see Soph. Ant. 265.
Note 2. It is impossible to give a complete list of all such

verbs. They are fairly the same as in English and in Latin,
though this Infinitive is much more extensively used in Greek
than in Latin.
The chief verbs perhaps are those expressing
(a) Wish and desire (as in Latin), /5ovAo/iat, deXw, iinOvixQ.
(b) Caution, fear, shame, evXafSov/iai, 6kvw, okvos eo-rt,
(po/SovfiaL, 8e8oLKa, ai(T)({vofj.at.
For Verbs of Fearing see also Index.
(c) Intention, determination, i/^//<^tô/iat (/ vote), eBoê,

SeSoKTat, 8iavoovfj.ai, ev vw eX'^-
So statuo, coustituo, with infinitive in Latin.
(d) Ability, capahiUty, fitness, ^vva/xai, oT6s re et/it', lêcrrt,

TTecjiVKa, as in Latin.
(e) Duty, necessity, compulsion,

Se?, xP'ih o-^'^yx^ ^^~h
o^ct'Ao). So except that oportet and
in Latin,
necesse est in certain senses take a subjunctive.
(/) Custom, habit, chance, ciwda, vd/ôs eW/, ^vjiftaLvu, etc.

Many of these in Latin, mos est, consuetudo est,
contingit, accidit, etc., take ut with subjunctive
soleo, consuesco, etc., an infinitive
The adjectives with which this Supplementary Infinitive

goes are of a similar meaning, e.g. Swards, tKavds, -p66vfj.os,
€— tTT^Setos, a^tos, dvd^Los, etc.
Sometimes the Greek Infinitive with an adjective corresponds
\vith the Latin adjective and the supine in u, e.g. xaX^Trbv
Aeâi, difficile dictu.
2.The Epexegetical {i.e. Explanatory) Infinitive is added

to verbs of giving and taking, and to adjectives. This
Infinitive further explains the purpose of the verb, or the
character of the action, or of the adjective.
avrjp pâXeTTo? av^rju. PLA.T.

A difficult person to live with.
irapejây e/xavrov rco Larpoi Teixveiv Kai Kacecv. 1 LAT.

/ offer myself to the physician to ait and burn {me).
Note 1. Even where the construction is already complete

this explanatory Infinitive is sometimes added.
KaKov otoyaai Troteiv a ovtos Troiei, avSpa olSlkws eTrijêtpctr
diroKTivvvvat. PlAT. Apol xviii.
It is an evil, I think, to he doing ichat my opponent is now

doing, trying, that is, imjustly to put a man to death.
Tijs (T^s ovK epu) TLpTjs Ti'xeii'. Soph. HI. 364.
/ am not in love with thy honours — to obtain them.
ioa-re with this infinitive and adjectives helps out this ex-
planatory force.
xl^xpou TO vSwp u)(TTe Xova-acrdai. XeN. Mem. iii. 13. 3.
The water is cold to bathe in.
Obs. This use should be compared with that of the English

gerundive (or /o with the dative of the infinitive), a house to lei,
a letter to lorite, etc. Both in Latin and Greek the passive
infinitive is very imusual, and probably incorrect.
Note 2. The comparative with i], or wcrre ^j and infinitive.

TO voa-rj/JUL peiôv rj (pepeuv. SOPH. 0. T. 1293.
The plague is too great to bear.
Pestis maior quam quae (ut) tolerari possit.
peiôv ij ilxrre (fêpetv Sijvacrât KaKov tt) TToAet crvplSaivei,
Xen. Mem. vi. 5. 17.

A calamity befalls the state too great for it to bear.
Note .3. u)s, ws ye, with the infinitive limit the application.
ao-Aoi o)? €K x^V^^ pa-xô-Oai. Xen. Cyr. vi. 4. 16.
Unarmed so far as fighting Jiand to hand goes (i.e. if they
come to close quarters).
cS Xkyci 6 a.vr)p ws ye ouTcocri aKOVcrai. XeN. Cyr. vi. 14. 6.

Tile man speaks well enough just to listen to in this way (i.a
if that is all you consider).

THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE INFINITIVE. 157
To this head belong certain idiomatic infinitives.
tus €7ros eiTretv,

'
so to say.
(Tvv de(a etVetv, w G'oc^'s name.
^
crx^8ov etVeiv, almost, SO to say,
ws e<rt TTOV enreiv. speaking gen- paene dixerim.
eralhj. eKMv eivai (in negative sen-
d)S aTrAws etTretv, ] ^0 speak tences), willingly, ckwv is
ti)s crweAovTt > briefly, con- the predicate to etVat.
etVciv, I cisehj. oXcyov Setj', fi/^ Szi^.
is TO aKptês EtTTetv, strictly Kara tovto elvai, in this respect.
speaking. ocrov ye /a' eiSevat, so far as I
u)s etKOLa-ai, to make a guess. know.
§ 147. The Subject before and the Predicate after

the Infinitive (commonly called the Accusative
with the Infinitive).
The Infinitive, like other parts of the verb, takes a Subject

before and a Predicate after. The Predicate is, of course, in
the same case as the Subject. The Predicate may often be
the Supplementary Predicate, in Avhich case the Infinitive is,
of course, part of the Predicate. The following examples will
explain this construction.
Indicative.
Infinitive.
:
THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE INFINITIVE. 159
The explanation is that the mind has inserted the Accusa-

tive Subject before the Infinitive, licet mihi me esse beatum,
lêcTTtv v[ilv vfias Xaf36vTas oVAa ISorjOelv.
Note 2. The personal

passive construction is used in Greek
side by the impersonal passive followed by the
side with
Accusative and Infinitive, the former being the commoner.
6 Kv/Dos riyykXQ-q vLKrjcraL. XeN.
Cyrus ims reported to have conquered.
Aeyerat 'AAKt/3taSr^v IIe/)iKA.ei StaAe^^îJrat -rrepl vofxiov.
Xen.
It is said that AldUades conversed with Pericles about the
laws.
This construction should be compared with the Latin

(traditur, fertur, dicitur, existimatur, videtur, creditur, etc.,
etc., with an Infinitive) ; e.g. existimatur errare, probus esse,
he is thought to he mistaken, to he upright {it is thought that
he, etc.) See Zumpt § 607 and note. But the Greek con-
struction is much freer, and follows many adjectives.
Certain adjectives, Sckulos, a^tos, wmihij ; eirtTT^Seios (fit),
eVtSoôs (probahle), dvayKaio'i (necessary),
take either a may
personal or an impersonal construction with the Infinitive.
Thus we may say either SiKaios el/j-t ravra iroieiv or SiKaiov
icTTiv €/x6 ravTa Troieiv, I am justified in so doing or it is right fm'
me so to do.
Instances of StKaios occur in Plato's Apology ii. 1, Crito iv.,

Soph. Ant. 400.
Note 3. So Kw is generally personal
ev Aeyetv [xoc SoKctre, / think you speak icell.
Cf. Tots TrAetcTTois iSoKovv, most people thoîghi (they seemed to

most).
4'Soâ ttKovcrat, / thought I heard.

80KU) fjLot Tov ovov eâyetv, I am determined to lead out the ass.
The impersonal SoKet nvt is rare SoKei, eSoê, it is decreed, :
is different. With ookw, 8ok€l, cf. the use of eoiKa, I seem,

varying with eoi/ce, and the Latin, videor mihi, videtur mihi
Note 4. The Infinitive is used for the imperative in formal or

solemn language, in poetry more freely.
i6o THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.
{a) In legal orders or official commands.

aKouere Aew . . . jrtVetv utto t^s o-aA7riyyos. Ar. Acll. 1000.
Hear ye, good 'people all ! drink to ilie trumpet'' s sound.
With aKovere compare yes !
(b) In prayers.
Oeol iroXirai, fii) fie SovXcias tv^^lv. AeSCH.
Gods of my country, let me not meet v-'dh slavery {grant
that, etc.).
Examples occur in Sopa Elect. 9, Ant. 1080 (where a king

speaks), Thuc. v. 9, vi. 34.
Note 5. The Infinitive is used in expressions of surprise.

(Cf. Lat. 'Meue incepto desistere %-ictanx')
T^S /Liwpt'as, TO At'a vofJAêiv, ovra rrfXiKovrovi.
Ae. Nub. 819
TFTiat folly ! to think of a man of his years believing in Zeus I
Note 6. The tenses of the Infinitive correspond to the tenses

of the Indicative throughout in the character of the action (as
continued, finished, or indefinite).
They only express distinctions of time when representing

the Indicative of the Eecta in indirect statements or direct
questions.
But the Present Infinitive sometimes represents an Imper-
fect and not a Present Indicative.
Ti'vas ovv €UXa? vTToXafifiav^T evêcrOai tov ^[XtTnrov or'

€<nr€v8€V ;
Dem. de F. 1. 381. 10.
What vows do you suppose Philip was offering when he was
making libations ?
This is often the case after e^v;v. So in Latin, memini

me dicere means I remember I was saying (also accepimus,
scribit). See Zumpt, § 589, note.
Madvig first pointed out this, § 171. 6, Rem. 1. It is fully
discussed in Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 15,
^ 148. THE INFINITIVE AS A NOUA.

1. The Infinitive, like a Substantive, may stand cither
IS the Subject or the Predicate of a sentence.
THE INFINITIVE AS A NOUN. i6i
Subject. Predicate. Predicate.
TO BiKriv SiSovat Trorepov Traaêcv n ecrrcv rj iroietv ;
To pay a penalty \ is it ( to suffer or ( to do something ?
Paying a penalty j ( suffering \ doing. Plato.

So in English " to see is to lelieve" seeing is believing.
Karely but sometimes without the article, a-wcfipoveiv Kakov,

Soph. Ai, discretion is a virtue.
2. The Infinitive with the Article is declined throughout

like a Substantive. Its cases then follow the construc-
tions of the Nominative, Accusative, Genitive,and Dative.
Its oblique cases with Prepositions.
are connected
Unlike ordinary Substantives, however, it (1) can govern
the same case as its verb, and (2) can be qualified by an
adverb. It corresponds to the Latin Infinitive and
Gerund.
Nom. TO Ka\a)(; a noble life, honeste vivere.
^rjv,
Ace. TO KaXco<; a noble life, honeste vivere (with

^rjv,
preposition), honeste vivendum.

Gen. Tov KoXax; ^rjv, of a noble life, honeste vivendi.
Dat. TOO «:aX&)9 l^rjv, for ov by a noble life, honeste
vivendo.
So Sia TO «aX(U9 ^'r]u, ev {7rpo<;) to5 KaXwj(r tons avrois fJ-rj f3oi]9rj(TaL Trapiayev v[uv
âfxiwv KoXaa-LV. ThUC. i. 41.
The circumstance that the Peloponnesians did not help them
enabled you to chastise the Samians.
(b) The Dative is often a Dative of means, cause, or circum-

stance, instrument, like the Gerund in -do.
KeKpdrrjKe ^lXittttos tw Trporepos yevecrdai. DeM.

Philip has succeeded by being foremost in the field.
L
l62 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.
(c) The Genitive is very often Objective.

lyTTCiyovTO Trpos Tov TTOTtt/iov Tov TTittv eTrt,dv/j.La.
Thug. vii. 84,

êy were hurrying to the river in their desire to drink {oj
drinking).
The Genitiveof the Infinitive sometimes expresses the aim

or purpose (usually in this sense it takes evcKa). The idiom
is considered either a genitive of value or a genitive of cause.
(See Causal Genitive.)
ereix^crdrj'AraXavTr] i) V'q(TOS tov /Mrj Xyjo-tols KaKOVpye.lv
EvBoiav.
TYjv Thug. ii. 32 (cf. i. 4).
The island of Atalante was fortified in order that the pirates
might not injure Euhoea (with a mew to their not, etc.).
The construction not very common, but thoroughly estab-

is
lished, in Attic Prose. The only thing in Latin like it is the
genitive with the Gerundive, a construction which frequently
occurs in Li\"y haec prodendi imperii Eomani, tradendae Hanni-
:
bali ricforiae sunt, xxvii. 9 ; aequandae lihertatis esse, xxxviii. 50.

See Zumpt, § 662, note 2.
§ 149. TIfE PARTICIPLE.
The Participle has three different uses.
A. It is an attributive to a Substantive.
o Trapcov ')(p6vo<i, the present time.
B. It qualifies the principal Verb of a sentence like a

Supplementary Predicate, or Adverbial Sentence.
Tavra eirparTe arparrjyoyv.
He was doing this while he was general.
C. It supplements the meaning of a verb, the meaning

ofwhich would otherwise be incomplete (cf. the Supple-
mentary Infinitive).
THE PARTICIPLE AS AN ATTRIBUTIVE. 163
(a.) The Participle agrees with the Subject.
TTavofiai (f>L\oao(f>a)v.
I leave off loliilosopMsing.
(&.) The Participle agrees with, and is the Predicate

to, the Object.
Travco ere (^CKoanôvvra.

I make you have off johilosophising.
§ 150. TB£ PARTICIPLE AS AX ATTRIBUTIVE,

A. 1. The Participle when joined to a Substantive cor-
responds to an Adjective, or more frequently to a Eelative
sentence.
aiAloKov vr]aoi KaXovjievai, ThuC.

The so-called islands of Aeolus {or, tJie islands of
Aeolus, as they are called).
6 KareLk.r}<^(o<i KivSvvo<i ttjv ttoXiv. Dem.

The danger which has overtaken the state.
2. The Participle with the Article, when the Substan-

tive is omitted, becomes itseK a Substantive.
01 \eyovTe<;, the speakers.
61 hpaaavre^, the doers.

6 Tv^wv, the ffrt^-comer.
6 j3ovX6fjLevos, any one who will (see Article).
01 Trpoa-T]KovTes, relations, propinqui
Note 1. The Future Participle with the Article signifies, in
a sort of final sense, one icho is ready, prepared or willing, to do
so and so.
fj
X'^P^ dyaOQ rjv Kal eirjcrav 01 epyao-o/xevot.
Xen. An. ii. i. 22.
The soil was rich and there were people to till it.
i64 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.
Note 2. Many neuter Participles are Substantival.

TO o-i'/x(ê/3oi', expediency, utile, utilitas With an Adjective
in agreement, ra [xiKpa o-D/iê/aovra tvJs TroAews, Dem. The
small interests of the state.
TO. Seovra, duties 01 dutif, officia.
Thucydides and the poets use a neuter present participle as

a Substantive, where an Infinitive would be more usual.
Ii' Tcp ynT) //eAerwvTt, hy want of training ( = h' tm fn) /xeAerav).
TO SeStos, fear =^To SeStevat, to âpcrow = To 6ap(reLV=Tb
6dp<T0<;. ThUC.
TO vo(rovv:=To vo(reiv=ri vocros. SOPH. Phil. 674.
In the poets ot tckovtcs, parents;
6 t€kwv, the father;
Tj reKovcra, mother (i) TLKTOvcra also. Soph.).
the o eK€Lvov
TCKcuv, his father, to Tno-qBlv cnj ^vx'ij; the wild fluttering in thy
heart, Eur. Bacch. 1269.
B. The Participle qualifies the Principal Verb like

a Supplementary Predicate or an Adverbial Sentence^
(Conditional, Temporal, Causal, etc.).
These usages of the Participle are very common in

Greek, and are most important to notice. The particles
which bring out the special significance of the Participle
in each case should be carefully noticed. The different
usages are given under the heads of the different sentences
in the Compound Sentence. (See Index.)
3. The Participle in a Sentence expresses circumstance

Note
or manner generally.
The particles oiJtws, ro-e, etra, K^ra (xai erra), e-eira are
put before the Principal Verb. The sense hovers between
that of time and of circumstance.
To this head belong the phrases (as old as Homer), tc [/.aduiv;
Tt TradtJiv ; in the oblicjua oVt fxadiov, -n-aOwv.
Ti [jLadovTes efiapTvpecTe ifxeis ; DeM. 45. 38.
fFJiat induced you to give evidence ?
Tt iraOova-ai dvqrah ei'âcri ywat^t ; All. Aûb. 341.

JFliat has happened to {the clouds) that they look like mortal
women 1
So Tt exwi' ; Tt (SovXoixevos ; Plat. Phaed. 236, E.

THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. 165
All these phrases are periphrases for uhj ? icherefore ? ri

fiadwv; learning what, on tchat inducement ? denotes an internal
motive ; rt vaOwv ; ailing or experiencing tvhat ? denotes an
external cause (on what compulsion 1),
Note 4. Under this head comes also the peculiar use of

€X(ov in colloquialisms.
TTOta vTToSrjuaTa <j)Xvapels e;â)i' ; Plat.

JFTiat sort of shoes do you keep on chattering about ?
Ti Xrjpeis ex'^" > ^^- tÎ^ nonsensc in so behaving.

TFJiy do you incessantly trifle ?
Tt KV-Tciêis 'e\(MV Trepl rr]v Ovpav ; AeISTOPH.

IFliy do you keep on poking about at the door ?
Note 5. The Participle in a Comparative sense with the

Subjective particles ws and ucnrep, as if, as though, as thinking.
SeSiacri tov Odvarov ws e3 eiSores otl p.eyia'TOV rwv KaKcov
ea-Tt. Plat. Aptol. xvii.
Men fear death as though they knew for certain that it is
the greatest of evils.
§ 151. THE GENITIVE ABSOIUTE.

The Genitive Absolute {i.e. a Participle agreeing with
a Genitive which is not iu the main construction of the
sentence) is equivalent to an Adverbial sentence, either
Conditional, Temporal, Causal, Concessive, or expressing
Circumstances generally.
The same particles which accompany the simple Par-
ticiple {e.g. fxeTaû, &)?, etc.) go with the Genitive Abr.olute.
ravra e'jrpa')(6rj Kovcovo'i arparrj'^/ovvTO'i. ISOCE.

These operations vjcre carried out when K. was general.
ovK av ^X.6ov Sevpo vfxwv fii] KeXevovTuyv.
I should not have come here if you had not ordered me.
a>S 58' Ixoi'Twv TwvS' eTTLO-Taa-Oai (re SOPH. Ai.

XPV'
On the understanding (as knowing) that this is so, tJiou must
form thy judgment (i.e. thou must know that it is even so).
— — — —
1 66 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.
Note. The Participle alone, without the Genitive being

expressed, occurs (see Genitive Case, Genitive Absolute) —
(a.) Where the Genitife is easily supplied from context
01 8e TToXi/iiOL, TrpocTLovTiav (sc. Twi' 'EAA7^vwv men-
tioned just before), rews ixeu ^(Tvxo-Cov.
Xen. An. V. 4. 16.
The enemy, as they were approaching, for a while were
remaining quiet.
Cf. iv. 8. 5, eptoTrja-avTOs (sc. avrov).
(b.) In certain impersonal expressions

ov~(i)s e)^6vT(j}v. Xen. An. v. 4. 16.
Such being the case, quae quum ita sint.
icrayycXdevTbiv on at vrjes TrXeovcn. ThUC. i. 116.

On the neivs arriving thai the shijps icere sailing.
wvTos TToAAiG (sc. Aio's). Xen. Hell. i. 1. 16 (cf. Ar.

Vesp. 114:).
Thug. i. 74 (Sy/AwêvTos), Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 18 (a-rjfjLov-

Cf.
OevTwv). Compare the Latin Ablative Past Participle Passive
(cognito, edicto, etc.) agreeing with the whole sentence.
The Participle is very rarely omitted.

u)S ifJLOV fiovqs TreAas (sc. ovcrv^s). SOPH. 0. C. 83.
Since I aione am at thy side.
§ 152. The Genitive Absolute in Greek and the

Ablative Absolute in Latin.
Great care must be taken not always to use one where we
should use the other. The Greek has a perfect series of
active participles, the Latin has no past participle active
except in the case of Deponents.
Therefore in Latin we may "vvrite
His verbis editis egressi sunt

So saying they went out.
But in Greek this would be
Tavra eiTTovres i^yecrav,
and not
— —
THE ACCUSA TIVE ABSOL UTE. 167
which would mean v:lieii this had been said (by others) they went
out.
Nor, on the other hand, would Latin tolerate such an

apparently slorerdy structure as the following :
Staê/3 //KOTOS UepLKkeovs, rjyykXdq avrto.

'tjBrj
After P. had already crossed, news was brought him.
In Latin we should write

Pericli iam transgresso nuntiatum est.
§ 153. THE ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE.

Instead of the Genitive Absolute the Accusative
Absolute is used with Participles of Impersonal verbs and
certain other expressions.-^
A. Impersonal Verbs : heov, efoV, irapov, TrpocrrJKov,

/xeXov, /xerafieKov, Bokovv, rvypv, Soâv or Boâvra (ravTo).
B. Passive Participles used impersonally : TrpoaraxOev,
€tpr]/jL€vov, yejpu/jLfxevov, SeSoy/jbevov, irpoa-TeTay/xevov.
C. Adjectives with ov used impersonally ; dSuvarov 6v,
aLa')(pov ov, etc.
The particles «?, W97rfp {as though, as thinking that),

etc., may accompany the Accusative Absolute. The
Accusative Absolute is equivalent to an Adverbial Sen-
tence, Causal, Temporal, Circumstantial, and especially
semi-Temporal and semi- Concessive.
ovBet<i eôv eiprjvqv ayeiv iroXepuov aipriaerai.
No one will choose war when it is in his power to he
at peace.
01 Be TpiuKOVTa, &)? eôv rjBr) avrol^ rvpavvetv aSea)<i
irpoel'irov. Xen.
The TJiirty thinking it v:as now in their poicer to
play the despot with impunity, issued an edict, etc.
* Obs. —This is doubtless an Internal Accusative, probably of refpect.
Compare for instance tov avrov rpoirov with 56|<u' riiuv ravra.
i68 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.
ou%l Se eawaaîev olov re ov Kai Bvvarov. Plat.

We did not save you when (though) it was feasible and
possible.
hoâvra vjjuv ravra, elXeaOe avhpa^; eKarov. Andok.

On coming to this resolution (decree), you a'pjpointed a
hundred men.
(TicoTrr} eSenrvovv, (oîrep rovro TrpoîTeTwy/jbevov.
Xen.
They were taking their meal in silence, as though they
had been ordered to do so.
For other examples see Thuc, i. 126 (vTrapxov), viii. 79

(Soâv). For passive participles see Thuc. i. 125 (SeSoy/xevov),
V. 30 (etpvy/xevov), V. 56 (yey/oa/;!./Aevov).
Sometimes a personal verb is found with the Accusative

Absolute, but then usually with the subjective particles ws,
iVLoi, ru)v dSeAc^wv d/xeAoucrtv wsTrep ov yiyvopevovs îAods.

Some men neglect their brothers under the impression that they
do not become friends.
Xen. Mem. ii. 3. 3 (quotation shortened).
Cf. Mem. i. 2. 20. But Xen. Hell iii. 2. 19 (Soâvra ra^ra

Kal TrepavOevTo), ThUC. iv. 125 (Kvpoidh ov8h).
§ 154. VERBALS IN -t€os.
Verbals in -Tea imply necessity.They take the same

case as the verb to which they belong. The agent is
generally in the Dative (but see below). The verbal has
two constructions, the Personal and the Impersonal
§ 155. A. TBE PERSONAL CONSTRUCTION.

> / t / f > /
u(TK7)Tea eart crot, r} aperri.
You must practise virtue.
Colenda est tibi virtus.
—
THE IMPERSONAL CONSTRUCTION. 169
§ 156. B. THE IMPERSONAL CONSTRUCTION.

Here the verbal is either singular or plural.
aaKVTeov, ) > / v > /

, / V eari aoi rrjv aperi]V.
aaKTjrea, )
€7n6vfjLr]Teov,\ . , ^ ,
^ , ^ , - -p.
, ^ / > ecTTC rot,<i avopcoTTOi^ rm apeji]';. JJOi.
errwvfxijTea, )
Men must covet virtue.
Note. The
agent, however, in Attic, is fairly often in the
Accusative, instead of the Dative.
ovSevi T/aoTTO) (jyafiev cKovras dSiKi^Teov elvai. PlAT. Crit.
We maintain that in no way must ice deliberately commit in-
justice.
And the Dative and Accusative are both found together.

EuK. Phoen. 710, 712.
§ 157. C. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE.

The Supplementary Participle is used, much like the
Supplementary Infinitive, to complete the meaning of
many verbs and verbal phrases. It agrees either (1) with
the Subject, or (2) with the Object of the verb.
§ 158. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE IN

AGREEMENT WITH THE SUBJECT
OF THE VERB.
The Participle is used with the following classes of
Verbs :
* Verbs marked thus have peculiar usages which are ex-

plained in the notes.
A. Ver'hs of Feeling and Perceiving (see Indirect

Statement). These verbs differ from foUowiug
the
because they can equally take a finite mood with on or
609, thus showing the substantival character of the con-
struction which they introduce.
I70 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS.
B. Verbs of Mental Emotion.

Xatpw, T^So/iai, aÔoiiai, ayavaKrio (/ am vexed), ^(aAeTrws <ê/50j
(/ ara vexed), /xeTa/xeAo/â^, /xerajaeAet /iot (/ repent, regret), dve-
)(pixai {I endure), pg.8Lu)s (fêpoi (I easily bear).
•âipovaLv aKovovTe<i eêraôfMevcov rcov avOpoyircov.

Plat.
They like to hear people cross-questioned.
XprjfioiTCou ovK atcr;(TJvet e7rt/xeAoT;/ievos ; PlAT.
Are you iwt ashamed to he devoting yourself to money-maUng ?
paSiws <^€/3ets v^jucts aTroAeiVajv. PlAT.
You don't mind leaving us behind (you Tuake light of doing so).
C. Verbs of beginning, continuing, and ending an action

(including persevering and growing weary).
^dp)(onaL, *vTTa.pyoi, (jiddvui, StaTeAw, Stayw, Scayiyvouab (7
continue), iravo/xat, aTreiprjKa, and Kafivo) (I grow tired).
rov XoLTTOv îov KaOevBovre'i SiaTekolr av. Plat.

Tou would go on sleeping for the rest of your lives.
ov fXTj TravacofMUL (pcXoao(f)cov. Plat.

Never will I give over the pursuit of wisdom.
OVK dveôfiai ^wcra. EURIP.

/ ivill
not endure to live.
D. Verbs of being manifest, being detected (convicted),

and of escaping notice.
*S-q\os ilp.1 (StjAw, intrans.), *<f)avep6s elfii, *<âu'0/iai, SeiK-
vvp-L, Xavddvu), dAicTKo/iac (the active form is alpQ).
Br]\o<; el Karacppovcov. Plat.

It is clear that you despise me.
BeL^ci) avTOV a^tov ovra. Dem.
1 will prove that he is worthy.
eSeiâv eToifiot
ovr6<;. Thuc.
They showed that they were ready,
(pavepoc etatv ayoovcô/JievoL Trayre?. Xen.
It is evident that they all are contending.
NOTE ON SPECIAL VERBS. 171
JJrjXeco'i yap ciîa
iTaTpoavriaeTac. EUK.

He shall be seen to do great deeds
worthy of Pelcus, and his sire Achilles.
(}}ovea eXavOave /SoaKcov. Hdt.

He was entertaining a murderer unawares,
eav he ako)^ en rovTO irparTWv, aTToOavel. PlAT.
If you are caught again in this pursuit, you shall die
{if you are convicted of folloicing it any longer).
So StjAw, 556, and Ai. 472, Ant. 20 (in nomina-
Soph. 0. C.
tive attraction). third example above) may be
8eiKvv/xi (see
intransitive, Eur. I. A. 436, Thtc. 72. The above verbs,
however, have several other constructions, for which see
below.
§ 159' Note on Special Verbs.

1. apxoiJXLi takes both the Infinitive and Participle, more
usually the Infinitive. The Participle seems to denote, more
than the Infinitive, that the act is going on.
qpâvTO oiKoSopeh'.
They began to build (of the intention).
7]pâvTO oiKoSo/iorvres.
They began the building (the act going on).
See Thuc. l 107.
idv Tis »}/ia9 eu ttoliov VTrdp^rj. XeN.

If any one first confers a kindness on us.
Otherwise virdpyu) is used almost like Tvyxavw.
VTrapêt i)(^6pos wv. DeM.
He is an enemy (to begin with).
3. <f)9dv(o.
(a) t^'daa-e {e(f>6r]) d(f)LK6pevo?.

He was beforehand in arriving.
ovK av (fiddvois Aeyojv (gen. of 2d person).
—
Make haste, speak or, qidck, quick speak. (Lit. you could
not anticipate {my wish, or your duty) in speaking.)
The phrase forms an vu^gent command. Cf. EuK. Or. 936,

AU. 662, Aeist. Fl. 1133.
Cf. Aeye <f)6dcras, speah quicUy.
Quin statim loquere !
In the last examj)le (jiOdvtx) is in the Participle.

So dveojâs /xe cf)6dcras, ArIST.
Fou Opened the door before me {got the start of me).
Cf. Thug. iv. 8.
4. dvvroi (/ achieve) is used like (fiddvu>.
AriST.
dvvcrov VTToSvcrd/xevos.
Look sharp and put your shoes on.
dvvcras dvoiye.
Look alive and open the door.
5. al(rxvvofj.at.
ai(T)(yvofJ.a(. Aeycov.
I am aslmmed of saying {while I do say).
aicry^vvofjLai Aeyetv.
/ am ashamed to say (and generally, / refrain from saying).
6. aTTOKa/jLVO).
d—OKdjXV(si TOVTO TTOldv.

I am iveary of doing this.
dTTOKdfxvo} rovro ttoulv.

I leave off doing this through iceariness.
7. SÂos et'/xi. Several constructions.

(a) The personal construction with participle.
SrjXos ^v olofxevos. XeN.

It icas evident tliat he thought.
The personal cmsti-uction with ws and participle.

SÂos iartv ws rt Spacreuov kukov. SoPH. AL
It is pilain that he is craving to do some ill {Spaa-eiw, de-
siderative).
Cf. Soph. Ant. 242; SijXols (verb) ws.
{b) The personal and the impersonal construction with oVt and
finite mood.
Srjkoi etcTLV oTt e—iKeirrovTat, XeN.
It is clear that they vill attack us.
NOTE ON SPECIAL VERBS. 173
StJAov ecTTiv OT/. TravcTOfxai. PlAT.

It is evident that I shall give over.
8. and (fxivepov icrri, dpKw (I suffice), dpKei, it is

<j)ai'ep6s elfiL. :
(Soph. Ant. oil) iKavds elp-t, iKavov eo-n, are simi-

sufficient :
larly constructed either -with the participle (personally) or

with o-i and a finite mood.
9. <âivo[iaL takes the Participle and the Infinitive.
(fiaiv€Tat dvr]p dyado? ctVai.
He seems to be (is considered) a brave man.
Yidetur esse fortis.
The appearance or opinion may be groundless.

(f)aLV€TaL dvrjp dyadb? tliv.
He shows himself (proves himself, manifestly is) a brave man.

Cf. appareo in Latin.
Apparebat certamen fore. Liv. It was evident there ivould
be a struggle.
Apparebat utilis. Suet. So \p€v8r]s (fjaLve-ai. (wv omitted).
a-qfieia âtveis (=<âtvei) yeycos. SOPH. El. 24.

Tou show proofs that you are.
10. XavOdvo).
XkXrfOa efiavTov etSws. XeN.

I J:noiv irifhout myself being aware of it.
Horace (Od. iii. 16. 32) and Propertius (i. 4. 5) imitate

this Greek construction.
e.g. HoR. Fallit sorte beatior= XavOdvei oX/Siwrepa ova-a.
Earely in Attic XaOtov is used participially with a yerb=

secretly, clam.
11. TvyxoiVf^, and (in poetrj'') Kvpu.

€TV)(OV Trpoa-eXdwv dvSpL PlAT.
/ chanced to meet a man.
irpos Tt tovt' eiTTWv Kvpeis ; SoPH. El.
Jlliy is it thou speaJcest thus ?
The notion of chance is often almost lost in both verbs.

They often denote mere coincidence in time, just then. Both
are used sometimes without a participle.
vvv dypoicTL Tvy')(dv€i. SoPH. El.
At this moment lie happens to be abroad.
12. ot'xo/âi denotes rapidity and completeness.

oi';)(€Tat (fjevywv,
Celeriter fugit.
OllÔ^ttt cf)€p(OV.
Celeriter aufero.
OLêraL Oavioi'.
He is dead and gone.
13. SÂos elfj-i (above^, âvepos et'/'^t, Xavddvo) are also con-
structed with oTt and finite mood. For Xavddva) on see
Plat. Crito, xii.
14. The Poets use this Supplementary Participle with

a great many verbs, e.g. verbs implying superiority and
inferiority (vikw, i^TTw/âi, eAAei-o/xat) doing right or wrong
:
(dSiKW, a/iaprttvo), ev or KaAw? —otw).
§ l60. r^-S SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE IN

AGREEMENT WITH THE OBJECT.
The Participle is the Predicate to the Object.
The Verbs which take this Participle are mostly the

active forms of those in the previous rule, but the cor-
respondence is not complete.
A. Verbs of stopjiing {^making to cease), finding and

detecting, overlooking (i.e. allowing to he done).
Travoj (/ make to cease, cf. Travo/xat), -epLopw and kôpla, 1

overlook {Trepulôv, k-elhov), but not ew, SetKvvfii (I point out),
KaraXapfiavix), alpu) (see aXlcTKopai in previous rule), <f)wp<j)^
I detect, catch, convict.
iye\(t)VTa<i e')(6pov<i nravaoixev. SoPH.

We will check the merriment of our foes.
fiT] 7repuB(o/JLev v^piadelaav rrjv AaKehaipuova. ISAEUS.

Let us not look on and see Lacedaenion outraged.
ov ;(atpj)(r€is' aAAa (re kActttov^' atpqcro}. ArIST.

You sJian't get off scot-free. No, Fll catch you thieving.
:
THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 175
B. Verbs of perception (see Indirect Statement, § 167).

Note 1. Observe, however, that Verbs of Perception may be
used with a Supplementary Participle which is not equivalent
to an Indirect Sentence.
Thus 6/otj o-e xatpovra may mean either / see you rejoicing,
or I sec that you rejoice.
ya-Oero Kvpov Tre-TWKOTa, he heard that Cyrus had fallen; but
-wTTore jxov crvKocfiavTovvTos ; have you ever noticed me
y(rdr](TaL
playing the part of an informer? olkovu) o-e ^Kov-a, I hear that
you are come; but olkovo) crov SiaAeyo/xerov, I hear you con-
versing.
2. otSa, crvvoL8a, eTriarafiaL :
otSa TavTa ttoicov.
/ know that I am doing this.
oiSa ravTa ~ouiv.

I know how to do this.
So with eTTio-Ta/xat, I knoio for certain (scio)
efxavTw oaVotSa ovBlv eTricTTa/Jievo}.

kfiavTi^ (Ti'votSa ovSev i-icrTOifievos.
I am conscious that I knoiv nothing for certain.
§ 161. The Tenses of the Participle, and Time

in the Participles.
The Tenses of the Participle correspond with the Tenses of
the Indicative always in the character of the act, and some-
times in time.
1. The Present Participle denotes an act in progress, the

time of which is usually determined by, and therefore con-
temporary with, that of the principal verb. But the time
may be determined by some word in the sentence, such as
vvv, Tore, Sometimes the context, without such a clew-word,
determines the time.
T7)v vvv BotojTtav KaXovixem^v MKqcrav. ThUC. 1. 12.
They occupied what is now called Boeotia.
ot KopivOiOL {J.exP'- TOVTOv Trpodvfxws Trpocro-ovTes dvctcrav rfys

<f>iXoveiKLas. Thug. v. 32.
The Corinthians, who up to that time had been energetically
at icork, now abated their vehemence.
Tapovre^ Kara/iapTvp-qa-ovcnv.
ot a-v/jLTrpea-fiiVOVTes Kat
Dem. de Fals. Leg. 381. 5.
Those who were then his fellow-envoys, and were present, will
testify against him.
Here totc would have made the time clearer.
2. The Aorist Participle generally refers to an act prior to

that of the principal verb.
ravTa etV oi'Tes d— vyAôv.
They said this and tvent aumj.
But in many cases there is no such priority of time.
€v CTTOtTjcras dvafjiv^cras p-e.
You did loell to remind me.
§ 162. The Future Participle.
1. The Future Participle, as a rule, denotes mere futurity

in time only after verbs of Perception.
otSa ravra Spdcrcov.
I know that I shall do this.
ySr] o"e Tavra Spdaovra.

I Jcneiv that you would do this.
Here the Latin future in rus is the equivalent of the Greek

future participle (me, te haecfacturum esse).
6avovp.kvq yap i^r'iSrj. SOPH, Ant. 460.

/ knew well that I shoidd (or must) die.
Here the Latin gerund {mihi moiiendum esse) would be the
better equivalent.
2. But the Future Participle often denotes intention,

(a.) With a verb of motion.
ovK es Aoyovs kX'qXvd\ dXXd ere Kxeviov. EUE. Tro. 905.

/ am not come to parley, but to kill thee.
Cf. ThUC. i. 18, SovAwo-o/tevos.
Here the Latin supine in -um after a verb of motion, rather

than the future in -rm would be used. We should translate
'^]X6e 6ea(r6p.eios by spectatum venit, not by specfaturus venit.
3. The subjective particle ws is often added to the Future

Participles (as to other participles). It denotes the presumed
;
THE FUTURE PARTICIPLE. 177
intention (as though) ; or the motive calculated {a& thinking, on

the assumption thai).
^vXXa[xj3dvei Kvpov ws a.TroKT€vu}v. XeN.

He seizes Cyrus icith the intention of putting him to death.
jXLadhv alrovdiv ws ov\l avTolaiv (iêAetav €(TO{Xivr]v.
Plat. Bep. 345, e.

They demand pay on the assumption (ground) that no benefit
will accrue to them.
d>(f)e\eiav ia-ofievrjVy Accusative Absolute.
4. With the Article the Future Participle denotes not

only intention, but what is likely, able, or calculated to do
anything.
TToAAa Se? Tov ev o-TpaTrjyrjcrovTa e'x^"'* XeN. AjJ. iii. 1. 6.
He who toishes {means) to he a good general must have many
gualifications.
ovTe. (TLTOS (J- dpeipoixida fxevovres, ovre irXota eart ra a7r-
dôvTa. Xen. A71. vi. 3. 20.
We have neither food to eat, if we stay, nor ships to convey us

hence.
Neque frumentum est quo vescamur, si manserimus, neque
navigia quibus vehamur.
The above may be expressed by a jDeriphrasis with {xiXXw,
Thus 6 (rTpaTr]yq(ro)v = 6 /xeAAwv crTpaTrjyqcretv.
ov8' 6 KwAvcrwv Traprjv. SOPH. .471/. 260.
Nor was there at hand one who could stay them.
Neque aderat qui prohiberet.
5. The Future Participle may take the place of a dii'ect
sentence.
Tou KaciyviQTOv ri ^gs,
^ôvTos /xeAAovTos ;
7} SoPH. El. 317.
What say'st thou of thy brother,
Will he be here, or will he tarry ?
=7roTe/Jov 7'j^€t Ti) /xeAAet
The above examples will show how widely the Greek

Future Participle from the Latin future in rus, and how
difiers
much more elastic the use of the former is. Mr. Paley first
pointed this out in the Journal of Philology (viii. No. 15), from
which number much of the above is derived.
M
PART II.
THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
CHAPTEE L
§ 163. SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
1. THE INDIRECT STATEMENT.

2. THE INDIRECT QUESTION.
3. THE INDIRECT PETITION.
§ 164. THE INDIRECT STATEMENT.

The Indirect Statement quotes words or thoughts not
at first-hand {i.e. directly), but at second-hand {i.e. indi-
rectly). It therefore follows verbs and phrases of saying
and thinking.
The Indirect Statement is expressed in three ways.
A. By the Infinitive.
B. By on or ty? with the Indicative or the Optative,
never with the Subjunctive.
C. By the Participle.
§ 165. A. THE INFINITIVE IN THE INDIRECT

STATEMENT.
1. The Infinitive follows expressions of saying and
thinking. The Subject before the Infinitive and the
178
INFIXITIVE IN INDIRECT STATEMENT. 179
Predicate after it are in the Accusative (but see next

rule). The usual negative is ov (see second example).
N.B. 1. <^y]ii.i and 4>d(TKw regularly take the Infinitive.
2. Aeyw (active) generally takes on or w?, Aeye-at (it
is said) takes either the Infinitive, or oVt, ws with
a finite verb.
3. dirov takes on and ws. (Observe that cTttov, I said,
introduces a Statement ; d~ov, I hade, a Petition.
1 told has the same double sense in English.
TOP BcKuiov avBpa evBaifxova elvac (fyi]/j,c. Plat.

/ assert that the just man is ha]pp7j.
ovBeva oL/xai Sacfxovcov elvai, kukov. Eueip.

/ thinh that none of the deities is evil.
2. But if the Subject of the Infinitive is the same as the

Subject of the Principal Verb, it is usually not expressed
at all. The Predicate is in the Nominative. This is
called the Infinitive Attraction.
<^7]cri (TTpaTTjyelv.
He says that he is general.
vofjitêi'i elvat, (f>povt/j,o<?.
Tou fancy that you are prudent.
(f>povifiO'i the Predicate.

o AXeâvBpo^ e(paaK6v Aio'^ vio'^ elvai.
Alexander used to irretend that he was the son of Zeus.
Aib^ yfo? the Predicate.
Alkt] elvai (prjac Aesch,
She saith that she is Justice.
If the Subject needs to be expressed, avTo<i is used in

the Nominative (in all genders and numbers).
KXeav ovK e(f)r) avTO<; aW eKecvov arparriyetv.
Thuc.
Cleon declared that it was not himself bict Nikias ivhc
was general.
i8o SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
vo/jbiêre ovv avrot ecvat <f)povL/MOi.
You fancy, then, that it is you who are prudent {that

you yourselves are prudent).
The Subject however, avro'?, must never be expressed

unless it is necessary to distinguish it from a Subject in
the Accusative, or to throw a special emphasis on it.
In nine cases out of ten the presence of a Predicate in
the iN'ominative is sufficient.
Note 1. Instead of avrds the personal pronouns eyw, a-u

occur (Dem. 52. 12, 9, 74, Lys. 25. 18), and the reflexive cruets
(Plat. Bej). 518).
Sometimes the accusative used instead of the nominative
is
(e/i.e, /xe, ere, This construction, more
e/xavrov, creavror, €at;Toi').
emphatically than the Infinitive Attraction, marks the Sub-
ject of the Infinitive as the Object of the main verb.
(firj/M Setv eKeu'Ovs d—oAecrât, i/xe Se crdêcrdaL. ANDOK. i. 30.

I hold that they ought to he condemned to death, and I be
acquitted.
For other instances see Plat. Gorg. 474, Xen. Cyr. v. 1. 21

{efxavTov), Herod. i. 34 and ii. 2 (ewvrov).
Note 2. Verbs of hoping and promising (expecting, under-

taking, swearing). They usually take the Future Infinitive
(like the Latin).
TÂjTt^cv ixa.y^r]v ecrecrOa.L.

He was expecting that there would be a battle.
{•Trecrxov ravra ^r^T^cetv.

You promised to search into this.
But with little or no change of meaning they also take a

Present, or an Aorist Infinitive sometimes, the future time
being expressed not by the Infinitive, but the principal verb.
kXiTiêi Swaros e?rat ap)êiv. PlAT.
He hopes to be able to rule.
VTrecrxero yuoi (SovXevaacrdaL. XeN.

He undertook toaavise me.
—
Sti and if IV/TH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. i8i
Also an Aorist Infinitive "witli a.v.
OVK tJXttlôv €KTrecreiv dv TLepiKXea. ThUC.

They icere not anticipating tlmt Pericles ivoulcl he banished.
cKTrea-dv av is an Oblique Apodosis, representing IxTrecroi av in

the Eecta. See Note 3.
The sort of verbs that come under this head are :
eXiriû). VTrurx^'ovfiai. ofxoXoyw, ) j-
iXiriSa (eA—tSas) €;(cu. ofxvvfJLt. avvrWefjiai, "^

J
ÔKw, ^"oSexo/xai (/ etc., etc.
IrprnPrf
'
Trpoa-boKU), j undertake).
Note 3. Tlie Infinitive icith av. If the Judicative of the Eecta

had an dv, the Infinitive will retain it in Indirect Discourse,
but not otherwise.
oTfjiai yap av ovk dyâpccrTios fiOL ^X^'^* DeM,
I think it would not be a thankless task.
In Recta, ovk dv ex*''-
Note 4. The Tenses of the Infinitive, in Indirect Dis-

course, represent the corresponding Tenses of the Indicative
or Optative in the Becta, and therefore denote the same time.
See § 147, Note 6.
§ 166. B. ort AiV£> w? W/Tir THE INDICATIVE

AND OPTATIVE.
(1) The Indicative (in Primary or
. , I Historic Sequence).
(2) The Optative (in strict Historic
Sequence).
N.B. Never the Subjunctive as in Latin. The Negative
is 01'.
To understand this construction it is well to see first
what the Direct Statement is.

avTol fidpTup€<; eajMev, we ourselves are vjitnesses, is a
Direct Statement.
This, in an Indirect Statement of Primary Sequence,

becomes Xeyovaiv «? avrol ijbdprvpe<i elaiv. Observe that
— — ;
i82 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
the jpcrsoi alone is changed, "they say that they them-

selves are witnesses." The tense and mood remain
unchanged.
In an Indirect Statement of Historic Sequence it may
be expressed in either of two ways, both being equally
common :
y , f (1) avroi aacTVpe<; elev (Optative) ;
'
( (2) avTOL fxapTvpe^ et,aiv (indicative)
i.e. either the Optative is used, and this is the really

Indirect Statement, or no change is made in the mood in
consequence of the Historic Sequence, the Indicative being
used. This retention of the mood and tense of Direct
Discourse is a well-known practice, pervading all Greek
syntax.
Again, a Direct Statement is, KparTjao/xev rcov AOnvatwv,

^
we shall heat the Athenians.
The Indirect Statement is
(1) Primary, Xeyovaiv ore Kparriaova-L r&v AOrjvaLcov,

They say that they will heat the Athenians.
(2) Historic, e\e<yov on { 1. Kparrjcroiev rcov AOrjvaiwv.

They said < they ivould heat the Athenians,
that 1 2. Kparrjaovai rcov 'AOrjvalcov.
The two constructions, the Optative and the Indicative,

are often found alternating in the same paragraph.
The rules therefore in passing from the Direct to the
Indirect Statement are :
1. The Person is always changed.

2. The Tense is never chansred.
3. The Mood may be changed from the Indicative
to the Optative when the Sequence is Historic,
but constantly the Indicative remains un-
changed in Historic as in Primary Sequence.
on AND is WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. T83
In case of a difficdlty as to tense and mood, the learner

should practise turning back the Indirect to the original
Direct Statement.
Thus in the sentence eTokfxa Xeyeiv w? '7ruvra<; tov<;
ixdpov'i €viK7}(rev, he made bold to say that he had conquered

all his enemies, the original Direct was iravra^ rov^
e^6pov<; evtKTjaa, I conquered all my enemies. The tense
and mood of the Direct Statement are retained.
Again, ^«e o ayyeWcov tI<; «<? 'Exdreca KaTetkrjiTrai,
there came a messenger announcing that Elateia had been
captured. The messenger said in the Direct, 'Exdreta
KaTetkrjTrTai, Elateia has been captured. In the Indirect
therefore the original tense and, in this case, the mood
are retained. It might have been KaTeiXrjjjifievr] e'lr).
Xeyei w? ovSev earLV aSiKcoTepov (f3rifX7]<;. AescHIN.

He says that there is nothing more unjust than
rumour.
Recta : ovhev eart k.t.X.
Xoyicracrda) rovro brt ei')(0[xev TTore UvSvav. DeM.
Let hi7ii reflect that loe once possessed Pydna.
Recta : ei'âjxev k.t.X.
<fiav€pc!}(; etirev on 1) iroXL'i rerei'îa-Tai, ijSt). ThuC.

He told them openly that the city had already been
fortified.
Recta : Tereixârai, k.t.X.
a7r€KpLvd/jL7]v oTi fjLOL XvatTeXolwcnrep eyweyf-LV. Plat.

I answered that it vms good for me to be exactly as
I %m. Recta : XvacTeXel k.t.X.
Kvpa eXeyev, otl 1) 6S09 ecroiTO irpa âcriXea fieyav

BajSvXwva.
€19 Xen.
Cyrus told them that the march would be to Bahjlon
against the great King.
Recta : kaTai k.t.X.
SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
elirev on 6 dvrjp av aXwaijxo'i eoj. Xen.

He said that the man might he cajptured.
The av of course belonged to the Direct. 6 ai/qp
d\waifio<i av etrj.
The Indicative and the Optative are sometimes found

in the same paragraph.
eXeyov on Kvpo<; fjiev TeOvijKev Apialo<; Se ev tcS
araOjXU) etrj.
They said that Cyrus was dead, and that Ariaeus

was in the camjp.
It might have been reOvqKw^ en] and ean.
eyvco on ecroLTO irepl Trj<; tov AXkiîuBov KaOoZov

\dyoi;, Kul on ol 'AOrjvalot evheôvrat, avTrjv.
Thuc.
He saw that there would he a proposal for the recall '
of Alcihiades, and that the Athenians would

approve of it.
For lyvo) 3ti see 3. The Participle in Indirect Discourse, Note 1.
Note 1. oTi and ws. ws being a subjective particle, i.e. ex-

pressing what is in a person's mind, is used, more than oVt, of
opinions, of pretexts, sometimes of untrue statements, and
with negative expressions, ov Aeyco ws. ws is used rather than
oTi after verbs of thinking.
Ti(r(ra(fi€pvr]<s StajSdXXei tov Kvpov Trpos tov d8eX(f)6v ws

einj3ovX€VOi avT(^. XeN. An. i. 3.
Tissaphernes accused Cyrus to his brother, alleging that he

was plotting against Mm.
eXeyov ws ypy) v/z.as evXafSetcrdaL. PlAT. Apol. 1.
They ivere telling you that you ought to he on your guard
(against me).
vopiôv(TLv €KeL ws "H<â tcTTos ôÂKevet. Thuc. lil. 88.

The local belief is that Hephaestus is worhing at his forge.
In Soph. Elect. 43 ot6 is used of an untrue statement.
Stl and i>s WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 185
Note Instead of on and a>s other particles are used in

2.
poetry, ovveKa (Soph. El. 1476), odovveKa (Soph. EI. 1308),
e.g.
oTTws (Soph. Ant. 685, Fhil 169).
ov yap alcrddveL TraXai

^wvTas âvovcrtv ovv£k avrauSas tcra ; SoPH. El. 1476.
And hast thou not ^narked long since
that thou hast been accosting the living as the dead ?
oBovv^K Aiy L(r9os {xkv ov Kara a-reyas. SOPH. EL 1308.

Thou hearest
That Aegisthus is not beneath his roof.
oTTODs also is used.
ava^, e/3w /xev ov^ ottcos Taôvs vtto
Sva-TTvovs LKavio. Soph. Ant. 223.
3fy liege, I will not say that by reason of speed
I come scant of breath.
Cf.Soph Ant. 685, Phil. 169.
As the Watchman is a clown we might be tempted to

translate, " I won't say as how." We use " how " just in the
same way.
So ut is often used in Latin poetry :
Quid referam nt volitet crebras intacta per urbes

Alba Palaestino sancta columba Syro :
Ui que, etc.
TiBULL. I. vii. 17, and the ôets passim.
Note 3. av mth the Optative. If dv is found with the

Optative in the Indirect Statement it is because it was there
in the Eecta. In such cases the Optative with av in the
Indirect is the Apodosis of a Conditional Sentence which in
the Eecta was in the Optative with dV.
eXeâv ws iravT dv 1801.
They said that he tcoidd see everything.

Direct : Trdvi' dv tSot (sc. ei eXdoi).
eXeâv ws TrdvT tSot.

Th&/ said that he saw everything.
Direct irdvTa eTSe.:
Note 4. If in the Direct the Imperfect or Pluperfect In-

dicative were used, they should be retained in the Indirect
;
1 86 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
(both Primary and Historic). The reason of course is that

there is no Optative Imperfect or Pluperfect.
^]Ki.v ayyc/Vos Aeywv on Tpti]pets ijKove — apaTrAcovcras.
Xen. An. i. 2. 21.
TJwe came a messenger saying that he had heard that triremes
were sailing round.
Direct : t^kovov, / was hearing.
For further rules see Oratio Ohliqua.
Note 5. Verbs and phrases of emotion, Oavfidô), I wonder

ayavaKTw, / am indignant/ Seivov Troiov/xai, do.; ffiOovw, I
grudge; aicrxvvo/iai, I am ashamed; alaxpov kcni (Setvov
kcTTL, it is a shame); ixkjxcjioixaL, I blame, etc., usually are fol-
lowed not by on but by the conditional et.

ToSe Wavfxacra el c'r dpe-yjs rid-qs fiepet tyjv dSiKiav.
Plat. Bep. 348.
I was surprised at your setting injustice in the light of a virtue.
Setvov TTOiovvTat ei prq etcrovTai. ThUC.

They think it abominable (if) they are not to know.
These pkrases also take on. Cf. miror si (mirum si) as well
as miror quod.
§ 167. C. TJIE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT

DISCOURSE.
The Participle is used in Indirect Discourse after Verbs
of Perception [sec, 'perceive, hear, learn, mark, hnoio,rcmem-
her) and some others. The usual Negative is ov.
6pu), I see. oToa, I know ((rvvoiSa l/xain-^, I

ata-ddvojxai, I perceive. am conscious).
aKovo), I hear. eTno-Ta/iat,/ know for certain.
-vvddvofjLai, I learn by in- / remember.
/ze/^rjy/Aai,
quiry. k-iXavddvop.ai, I forget,

fiavddi'w, I learn. yiy vwo-kw, / get to know.
ol"EWrjveq ovK TJBeaav Kvpov Tedvqicora. Xen.

The Greeks did not hww that Cyrus was dead.
TjBeco'i aKovco ^(Orcparovi BcaXeyo/Mevov. PlaT.
I love to hear Socrates conversing.
THE PARTICIPLE IX IXDIRECT DISCOURSE. 187
efiavTiu ^vvqSeiV ovBev l— wrra/ievo). PlAT. Apol. viii.
I was conscious thai I knew nothing for certain.
ovT€ /xeya ovr€ a-jxiKpov ^vvoioa e/zavrw crocôs wv.

Plat, ApoJ. vi.
I am conscious that in no degree, great or small, am I wise.

The rules about the Subject and the Predicate of the
Infinitive equally apply to the Participle.
ewpoav ov KaTop6ovvT6<;. ThuC.

The}/ savj that they were not succeeding.
aiaOavofieda yeXoloL oi'Te<;. Plat.

We perceive that we are ridiculous.
Note 1. The Indicative (and Optative) Avith on and ws are,

however, often used with Verbs of Knowing, especially yty-
vcuoTKw, and 018a ('(tO' oTt).
eyvu) OTt ol Adrjvaiot ov8ev evShXTOxxTtv.

^ TUTTC.
He saw thai the Athenians would not give in at all.
Note 2. If the Principal Verb itself is a Verb of Perception

the Indirect Sentence will be in the Infinitive to avoid the
clumsiness of two participles close together, if both Participles
refer to the same person.
alaOofxei'os ovk av rrf.iOcLV arroi's. ThUC.

Perceiving that he should not convince them.
alcr66fi€voi OVK dv ireidwv would have been intolerable.
Note 3. dyyeXXo), I report, sometimes takes a Participle.

rrpioTOS âcrtA-et K.vpov eTrifSovXevovTa T^yyeiAa. XeN.
I first reported to the king that C. was plotting against him.
o/ioXoyw, / agree, assent; lêAey^w, l-tSetKvr/it, I point out

(see Eule), may almost be regarded as verbs of statement.
These take a Participle.
Note 4. The remarks made about dv with the Infinitive

apply equally to the Participle.
Note 5. The Tenses of the Participle in Indirect Discourse

represent the Corresponding Tenses of Indirect Discourse, and
therefore the time which they denote.
:
: ; ;
1 88 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
§ 1 68. THE INDIRECT QUESTION.

The Indirect Question may be regarded as the Indirect
Statement put interrogatively. All the rules given as to

person, tense, and mood for the Indirect Statement apply
equally to the Indirect Question. The Subjunctive must
never be used, as in Latin, in an ordinary Indirect Ques-
tion. (See Deliberative Questions.)
The Negative is ov.
For the Interrogative Pronouns and Adverbs see Pro-

nouns. Their Indirect (or Kelative) forms are used in
Indirect Questions, but it is just as common to use the
Direct Forms. El, like the English if, is the regular

indirect interrogative, meaning whether (in a single ques-
tion = Lat. num).
Direct t/? eari

ir/io is he ?
Indirect Primary : ovk olBa oa-Ti<i (or r/?) earu

I do not know who he is.
2. earc
I did not know who he was.
Direct javra eTroi'qa-a'i
Did you do it ?
Indirect Primary : epcora avrov el ravra eiroLr^crev.
He asJcs him if he did it.
ravra Troirjaeiev.
1. ei
Indirect Historic : ripwrvo-ev
'"
avrov - ,„ - - -
' ravra eTrocrjaev.

^2. et
He asked him if he had done it.
o,rL ireiTovOare ovk olBa. PLA.T.
What you have felt I know not.
Pecta : ri rreirovdare ;
;
THE INDIRECT QUESTION. 189
ThuC.
epcoTwcrtv et Xrja-Tac eiaiv.
They ask them if they are pirates.
Recta : XrjaraL eare ;
ccrre oto? r]V 6 Xatpecpoov. Plat.

You know what sort of a man Chaerephon was.
Kecta : oro9 'qv ;
Si7]po)Tcov av avTov<; tc \eyoiev. Plat.

/ icsed to ask them what they meant.
Eecta : tl Xeyere ;
rjpero, et Ti9 eci] e/xov a-o(f)0)Tepo<;. Plat.

He asked if there was anybody wiser than I.
Kecta : eart t<9 ;
•^TTopovv TO TTore Xeyei 6 6eo<i. PlAT.

/ was at a loss to understand what the god meant.
Eecta : ri ttotc \eyet
eôvXevopTo rtva KaTa\ei->ôv<xLv. DeM.

They were considering whom they should leave behind.
Recta : rtva KaraXeL-ôêv ;
TjpcoTcov avTov €0 ava7r\€V(Tei€v. Dem.

/ was asking him if he had set sail.
Recta : avetrkevaa'^ ; did you set sail ?
Observe in examples 6 and 7 that the Historic

Sequence is disregarded.
Good examples will be found in Soph. El. 32, 679, 974,

1348, Ai. 557, Ant. 239, 1190.
If the Direct uses the Imperfect Indicative, e.g. n's ^v 6

fivdos ; tohat was the Indicative will be retained in
the tale ?
Indirect Historic for reasons explained on p. 182. It would
become eTirov oo-tls ^]v 6 /xv9o<;. eTirov ocrrts eiq 6 /xvOos would
represent a Direct rt's eWtv 6 fivdos ; See a good instance in
Soph. Ant. 239.
: ;
I90 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
§ 169. DELIBERATIVE OR DUBITATIVE

INDIRECT QUESTIONS.
These questions, when Indirect, are in the Subjunctive
(Primary or Historic Time), or the Optative (Historic
Time).
The Subjunctive is retained in the Indirect because it
was the mood of the Direct.

Direct t/ ^(u ;
What am I to say?
Indirect Primary : ovk ej^w o,tl {rl) ff)co.
I know not what 1 am to say.
Non habeo quid dicam.
Indirect Historic ovKelyov\^ / /( «

:
^ ( 2.
,,
0,Tt [TIJ (pO).
;
I kneio not vjhat I vms to say.

Non habebam quid dicerem.
OUK e%w, OTTO)? aoL ecTTco a voco. rLAT.
I don't know hoio I am to tell you my thoughts.
Direct : ttw? crot eoTrco ;
rjiTopei o TL '^prjaaiTo tu> Trpayfjuart. Xen.

He was at a loss to know hoiv to deal loith the question.
Direct : rt -^pTjaoofiat
eirripovTo el Kopivdioi^ TrapaBolev ttjv ttoXlv. ThuC.

They asked whether they were to deliver over the city
to the Corinthians.
Direct : irapaZwiiev ;
rjiroprjaav ottt] KadopfitacovTai. ThuC,

They were at a loss where to come to anchor.
Direct : irrj KaOopfMLaco/xeOa ;

THE INDIRECT PETITION. 191
TO, Se iKTiofJiaTa ovk 0I8' el rovTOi 8w. XeN. Cy7: viii. 4. 16.
/ don't knoiv tvhether I am to give the cups to this man.
Obs. et with Subjunctive, and see Note.
eAeyes on ovk av e;(ots iêXOwv xpwo cavry.
o,Tt
Plat. Crit. iv.
FoM iveresaying that if you escaped you would not know what
to do with yourself.
ijSovXevovTo eiVe KaTaKavuwcnv ttVe rt aAAo xpqawvrai.
Thuc. ii. 4, 6.
They were deliberating whether they should burn the men to
death, or do something else to them.

Observe the etVe — etVe with the Subjunctive again.
§ 170. THE INDIRECT PETITION.

The Indirect Petition (a command, a request, or a
prayer) follows verbs of commanding, requesting, praying,
advising, and the like.
eliTov, I hade or ordered d'yyeXKco, I hid.
{irpoeLTTOv). irapaKokw, I exhort.
KsXevco, I order. dîco, I request, call upon,

BiaKeXevofjiat, I order, ex- expect.
port, direct. irapaLvw, I advise.

irapa'yyeWQ), I order, in- aira'ôpeixo, I forbid.
struct.
All these take the Infinitive, which is the common

Greek construction for the Indirect Petition. The Nega-
tive is ytJ].
The difference between the Greek and Latin construc-

tions here should be carefully noted.
eliTov To5 Ilavaavia tov KrjpvKc; //.?; \ec7r6a6at.

Thuc.
TJiey ordered Pausanias not to leave the herald.
1 el is interrogative as well as conditional, and so goes with the Sub-
junctive as well as with the Optative. 'Edv (ijv) is not interrogative

where it appears to be so, as in a few phrases with aKOTrei {e.g. uKoirei
iiv <Toi ooKw ev Xeytiv). edv means not whether but if iêr chance (si fox'te)
—
192 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES.
eKeXevae tov<s "EWr)va<; ei? /J'^XV^' TCLxPrjvai. Xen.

He ordered the Greeks to he drawn up for battle.
BeofiaL vfjbcov air/yi^cafirjv fioL e^^LV. PlaT.

/ heg you to pardon me.
irapaLvovfiev aroi irHdeaOat Toi<; êknoai.
We urge {advise) you to listen to your letters.
aîS) ere aXrjdr] Xeyeiv. AntiPHON.
/ call upon (require) you to tell the truth.
The Subject or Predicate will be in the Nominative if
necessary, as in the Indirect Statement :
IIpofMTjOea TrapaiTelrai, EirLfirjdevi avTo<i veifuu.

Plat.
Epimetheus hegs Prometheus that lie himself may
distribute.
("Let me distribute," says Epimetheus.)

For verbs of forbidding see Index.
Note 1. Some of these verbs take o-cus (o-ws /xv;) with the
Future Indicative and Optative. SiaKcAet'o/xat, -apaKaXd, I
exhort ; dyyeAAw, -apayyeXXw, I tell, order ; d-ayopevw, I for-
bid ; TT/DoetTTov, I proclaimed, ordained; d^tw, I beg, call upon.
StaKeAevovrat ottws Tt/Awp^^creTat Travras tovs toiovtovs.

Plat. Bep. viii. 549, e.
They exhort him to take revenge on all such people.
K€Lvio S' efxrjv dyyetAar' evToXrjv ottojs
Tov 7ral8a Seiêc. SoPH. Ai. 567.

And bear to him my message that he show the boy.
dirrjyopives ottojs p-r] tovto OLTroKpLVolprjv.

Plat. Bep. i. 339, a.
You told me not to give this answer.
oTTws pi]8lv ipd after past tense in Bep. I 337, E.
For the Construction of ottcos, o-ws //.//, see Final Sentences, etc.
:
CHAPTER II.
§ 171. THE PARTICLE "Kv,
"Kv (and the Epic kIv, Ke, Doric K-a) were originally Demon-
Adverbs meaning
strative there, then, so, in that case, perchance,
possibly, continfjenthj. They were Adverbs qualifying the Posi-
tive Statement of the Verb. This part of the subject belongs
to Philology rather than Syntax.
"Av in Attic Greek may be regarded as having practi-

cally two distinct uses.
1. It is joined to Verbs, the Indicative (Historic Tenses),

Optative, Infinitive, and Participle. It denotes a Con-
dition on which the fulfilment of the verbal action
depends.
2. It is joined to Pronouns and Particles with the

Subjunctive Mood. Such are 6'?, o'crrt? (69 av, oart^ av)
ore, €7rei, eTrecBr], irpLV, €(a<;, etc. {prav, eirav, eireiSav, irplv
av, €&)? av) : the Conditional el {edv, rjv) : sometimes the

Final «?, oVw?, o^pa (&><? av, etc.). In this use av (but
not in Final Sentences) makes the meaning of the Pronoun
and Particle indefinite, who-so-ever, when-so-ever, if ever (in
one very common use of edv), though this meaning cannot
always be expressed. When Historic Sequence requires
a change from the Subjunctive to the Optative av must
be dropped, e.g. 69 av ôuXrjTaL but 09 j3ov\oi,to.
N
:
194 THE PARTICLE hv.
§ 172. DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE

SENTENCES.
Before dealing with Relative, Conditional, and Temporal
Sentencesit is most important to understand the difference
between a Definite and an Indefinite Sentence.
In the Sentence ravTa a ôvKovrai e'^ôvat, they have

iJiosethings which they vmnt, the antecedent Tavra is
definite (those particular and known things), and the
Relative Sentence which follows refers to a definite act.
But in the Sentence a av ôvkcovrai eôvacv, the Ante-
cedentis indefinite and the act is virtually Conditional
they have ivhatsoever things they want, anything they ivant,

anything if they want it. This second sentence in Historic
Sequence becomes a ôvkotvro etôv. Similarly in the
sentence e'rretBrj Be oXtyap'xîa eyevero ol rpiaKovra fiere-
TTe/jb^lravTo fie, tvhen an oligarchy was established the TJdrty
Tyrants sent for me, Socrates is speaking of a definite
time (B.C. 404) and of a definite act. But eTretSdv o\i.y-
ap-^la yevqrai, whenever, or as often as, an oligarchy shall
he established, or is established, an indefinite time and act is
spoken of. The sentence is virtually conditional again,

if ever, or if at any time, etc., and might be expressed
thus, eciv TTore yeprjTac. In Historic Sequence the sen-
tence would be eTreiSri yevoLro.
It will be seen therefore that when the Antecedent is
definite the Indicative is used : where indefinite, the

Subjunctive with civ, or the Optative without av :
e.g. oy? elBev eTrZ/veae, those whom he savj he praised.

om av cSjj eiraivei, whomsoever he sees he praises,
ovi iSoc €7r')iJ€i, vjJwmsoever he saw he used to praise.
—
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 195
Note. Further instances of

1. Definite sentences.
KC/DOV fj.£Ta7r^fJLTr€TaL ttTTu TT/s ^PXQ^J '^5 awTov crarpaTrrfv
CTTOtvô'e. XeN.
He sends for Cyrus from the province of ivJiich he had made
him governor.
ctDS iêa-Ttv Tavra vfuv cTTiSeiât 0eAw. PlAT.
Wliile it is permitted I desire to explain this to you.
eTToAiop/cei Tovs "EXX-qvas f-^XP'' °^ ^rfpavas ti]V ^Mpvâ

efAe T7)v vrj(TOv. ThUC.
He was blocJcading the Ch'eeks until he drained the ditch and
took the island.
2. Indefinite sentences.
eêo-Tt OTt av /JovAryrat elirelv. AnTIPH.
He may say whatever (or anything) he likes.
p-^XP''
^' ^^ ^y^ '>]K(i}, at (TTTOvSal /êvovTwi'. XeN.
Until I return let the armistice be observed.
€(us Trep av e/xTTvew ov p,rj TravcroipaL (f)hXo(ro({iWi/. PlAT.

So long as I breathe I will never give up philosophy.
KaTi(rTi]cra Sk iTripeXelcrdaL et Ti 8eoi tm X'^PV ô-^'oo-rparov.
Antiph.
/ appointed Phanostratus to provide whatever the chorus
required.
î
§ 173. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
A Compound Conditional Clause consists of two
Correlative sentences, one of which contains the Con-
dition, and is called the Protasis -^ the other contains the
' Pi'otasis (TrpjTttcris) meaus Premiss. Apodosis (dTroSoirts) means

Conseqiience. The Apodosis is the Principal, the Protasis the Sub-
ordinate Sentence. Wliether oi'iginally a clause with d was a Sub-
ordinate Sentence, is a point which need not be discussed in Attic
Syntax. How far the Apodosis, as being the Principal Sentence,
influences the construction of the Protasis, is an interesting question,
which is alluded to under the Oratio Obliqua. Professor Goodwin
{Journal of Philolofjy, viii. 15, p. 33) strongly maintains the assimi-
lating force exerted by the principal verb on the subordinate verb.
; :
196 THE PARTICLE 5.v.
Consequence, and is called the Apodosis. Sucn a clause

reduced to its simplest form may be thus expressed
If A'\^B, C is D,
or C is D, aA IB B
i.e. the fulfilment or truth of the Consequence depends
on the fulfilment or truth of the Condition. This depen-
dence of the Consequence (the Apodosis) on the Condi-
tion (the Protasis) is the essential point of a conditional
clause.
§ 174. DISTINCTION OF CONDITIONS.

I. The most obvious distinction of Conditions is that of
Time. Some refer to the present, others to the past, others
to the future. This distinction is universally present in all
Conditions.
II. A second distinction concerns the opinion implied as to

the fulfilment or non-fulfilment of the Condition. In two
forms, and two forms only, the expression in itself conveys
information on this point. ^
III. A is that between Particular and

third distinction
General Conditions. A
Particular Condition refers to a
definite act or set of acts e.(j. " If the windows up-stairs are
:
* There is, as Professor Goodwin tells us, no special form implying
that the condition is or was fulfilled. That is to be decided by the

context. This is tme, though of course a fact may be clearly implied,
and in some cases nan-ated. Such is the case chiefly in past General
Suppositions, e.g. el ns avreiTroi, evdus eredyriKei, Thuc. viii. 66, which is
the same as saying, Every one who spoke against them was at once
'
'
got rid of." A

General Supposition may also be expressed in an
Ordinary Past form. Thus, et ti dWo iiri.KivSvvov eyivero awdvToiv
fiereaxo/J-^j Thuc. iii. 54, which is only a way of saying, took "We
part in every danger as it arose." Indeed a fact is nan-ated here
under a conditional form, though not by virtiie of the form itself,
which need only denote a connexion between Condition and Conse-
quence. With regard to General Suppositions in present time, they
may refer to facts, but usually are generalisations from observed facts
or habits.
—
DIVISION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 197
open, the rain is coming in;" "If you receive a telegram

send it on to me;" " If lie had a five-pound note he would
lend it me." A General Condition refers to any act which
may occur or have occurred any number of times " If ever :
a candidate is convicted of bribery he loses his seat;" "If

(ever) he were left to himself he used to waste his time;"
" If (ever) he had a shilling in his pocket he gave it to the
first beggar he met."
§ 175. DIVISION OF CONDITIONAL

SENTENCES.
Conditional Sentences accordingly may be divided into :
I. Ordinary Conditions II. General or Frequentative Condi-

;
tions. Ordinary Conditions again may be subdi\nded into

A., those with regard to which no opinion is expressed
whether the Condition is fulfilled or unfulfilled, probable 01
improbable, true or false; B., those in which the form oi
expression implies that the Condition is unfulfilled. There is
no form to express an opinion that the Condition is fulfilled.
The context alone could suggest this. In General Conditions
again no opinion is expressed concerning the fulfilment or
non-fulfilment of the Condition. Thus in Ordinary Conditions
of the second class alone is any such opinion expressed.
1
§ 176. ORDINARY CONDITIONS.
For Real Examples seefurtKer on.
A. All that is stated is that a Consequence did, does,

or will follow from a Condition. The expression in itself
does not tell us whether the condition was, is, or will be
fulfilled. That is beside the question : the stress is
wholly on the if. The sole difference between the three

forms (1, 2, 3) is one of time.
igS THE PARTICLE ^v.
1. Present.^
Any Primary Tense of the Indicative.
elravra iroiel^ aSt/cet?.
If you do this (strictly you arc doing wrong,

if you are doing this)
2. Past.
Any Historic Tense of the Indicative.
, „ i €7roLei / > 5, /
(^
€7rocr)aa<i rjOLKTâa^.
( luere doing this you were doing im'ong.
"^
•^
(^
did this yoio did wrong (aorist, a
single act).
3. Future.
To express a Condition in future time there are three
forms, differing, but differing only, in distinctness of ex-
pression.
(a) The ordinary future form,
eav (vv) ravra < , > aoiKr\<Tei<^.

y TTOLrjO-r)!;
)
If you do this (strictly you loill do wrong.

if you shall do this)
^ There are endless varieties of present and past conditions, and the
two are constantly combined. Present and futnre may be combined.
el ravra ireiroiTjKas ddiKi-is, rjdlKTjKas.
If you have done this you are doing tvrong, you have done
wrong (the Apodosis might be an
Imperative),
ei ravra SoKeT <tol irKiwuev.
If you think so let its set sail.
ei ravra Trotets oKyiâeis.

If you art doing this you will he sorry,
el ravra erroleis or iirolricras ddiKels or ddiK-qaeis.
If you icere doing, or did this you are doing, will do, wrong.
And so on.
- It is hoped that no difficulty will arise from the selection of the

verb d5t(cw in these special examples. 'A5i/ccD, of course, means, / am
an idiKos, a wrong doer, and also / do wrong, or injure.
ORDINARY CONDITIONS. 199
(5) The less vivid future form.
, „ ) TTOLOLT]'^ aBiKoirjî av.
(^
7roir)(7eia<; aoiKrjaeia^ av.
If you should do tliU you would do wrong.
(c) The most vivid future form.

etravTa Troirjcrei? aocKTjcrei'i.
If you shall do this you will do icrong.
B. Besides a difference of Time, the form of expression

implies that the condition is unfulfilled either in Present
or in Past Time. This is implied by the presence of av
in the Apodosis, and not by any peculiarity of the
Protasis.
1. Present (but see note).
ei ravra eTTotet? riBcK€i<; av.
If you did this (strictly if ijou woxdd he doing

you were noio doing this) wrong.
2. Past.
6t ravra eTronjcra'i rihiKricra^ av.
If you had done this you would have done

vjTong.
Note. —The Imperfect, however, very often refers to a

descriptive, habitual, or continued past.
et ravra ewpacrcres idav/JLOLôfJiev av ere.
If you had been acting thus we should have been admiring you.
The Pluperfect denotes a state or condition in the past.
e.g. €1 eXeX-vfiriv, if I had been set free (in a state of liberty).
. -rrdXai av diroXwXr], I should long ago have been a dead

man.
. )
THE PARTICLE av.
^ 177' Ordinary Conditions in Greek and Latin.

A.
Protasis. Apodosis.
1. Present. d ravra Troiets aStKEis.
Si haecfacis iniuste facis.^
el Taura TrcTroi^Kas.
Si haec fecisti.
'^BtKei's.
2. Past. el ravra ( 'r'^ qSiK-qcras.
CY- J i faciebas iniuste faciebas.

Si haec < •'/ • ,•
(
jecish iniuste fecisti.
3. Future, (a) e^v (rjv) ravra / '^"t^^ dSiKrjaeis.
Si haec feceris (f ut. perf. iniuste fades.
n\
10) ei
> "
Tavra i
<
TTOIOLTIS
,
'
d8iK0Li]<s av.
I
— 06^treias dStK7y(retas av.
Si haec facias iniuste facias.
(c) el ravra Trot^trcts dSlK7jo"€tS.
Si haec fades initiste fades.
B.
1 Present (or £6 TttU-a €7rOl€tS qScKeis av.
Continued Past).
Si haec faceres iniuste faceres.
2. Past. 61 raura eTTOirjcro.s •tjoiKYjcras av.
Si haec fecisses iniuste fecisses.
II.
§ 178. GENERAL OR FREQUENTATIVE

CONDITIONS.
These are best taught by real examples. Observe the
Apodoses, distinguishing these uses of the Subjunctive
' The normal Latin equivalents of the Latin of Cicero, Caesar,
and Sallu.st are here given. The variety of Latin forms is far greater
than the Greek, and varies more according to the period of the writer.
The above are given only as a guide in comparing the two languages,
not as an attempt at a full division of the Latin Conditional Sentences.
NEGA n VES E\ CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 201
and Optative (in the Protasis) from their uses in Ordinary

Conditions. In the Apodosis any frequentative tense
denoting respectively present and past time may be
employed.
1. Present (a generalisation true now or for any future

occasion).
avrjp TTOvrjpo'i hv(TTV)(el, Kav evrv^fj. Menand.

A had man is in evil state,
Even if he e'er is fortunate.
2. Past.
et Ti9 avreiTTOi ev6u<^ eredvrjKei. ÛC.

If ever any one spoke against thc^ he was promptly
put to death.
eTeOvrjKeL is, of course, a virtual Imperfect.
§ 179. THE NEGATIVES IN CCJNDITIONAL

SENTENCES. ^
The Negative of a Protasis is ^rj, of an Apodosis ov.
€t fJbrj ravra TToieL^ ovk /caA-tu? eêi.
If you are rwt doing this it is not well.
For exceptions see the chapter on the Negatives.
Relative Conditional Sentences.

Real Examples are given further on.
As has been ex])lained, a Relative Sentence with an In-

Antecedent is equivalent to a Conditional Sentence.
definite
Any form of the Protasis with et or lav may be expressed
by a Eelative Sentence. Both os and ocms are used, but
ooTis, asbeing the indefinite form, is preferred, especially in
affirmative sentences. In negative sentences fii] is sufficient
to show that the Relative is indefinite.
THE PARTICLE 5.v.
POSITION OF Sv. 203
Note. participle alone is given (except in B.

The present
2). Ofcourse the aorist participle, denoting a single as
opposed to a continued act, may be used in any of the fonns,
tvhile the present participle denotes an imperfect act {i.e. an
act in progress).
§ 181. Position of dv.

av of an Apodosis can never begin a sentence. Its natural
position after its verb, but, as it possesses a power of
is
emphasising the word it follows, it often comes before the

verb and after some word which is to be emphasised. Almost
any word may be so emphasised, especially an interrogative or
a negative.
ovK av Ixo'i^' 7 ft~£if oTi ov irpocreixov tov vovv. PlAT.
/ could not say that I was not attentive.
-tSs av Tis, a ye /xv; e-rria-TaiTO, ravra cro(/)OS eiii] ; XeN.
How could a man be wise in matters of which he knew nothing
certainly ?
TToXXr) av Tis ev8a.iiJ.ovia eh) -e^n tovs veov9.

Plat. AjjoI. xii.
Great would be the good fmiune in the case of the young,

ap ovv av p.e oiecrOe TocrdSe err] oiayevecrOai.
Plat. Apol. xxi.
Think you then that I should have lived all these years ?
av belongs to 8iayevecr6o.i.
eirieiK-q av /xot Sokw Trpos tovtov Xeyeiv. PlAT. Aôl. xxiii.
I thinJ: I should be adopting a conciliatory tone toivards him.

av belongs to Xeyeiv and emphasises e-ietKi).
As in the last two examples av when separated from its

verb often comes near oto/xaj, 8okw, 4>-qfj.i, oTSa, so much so as
to look "as if it belonged to them. But we must be careful
to connect the av with its proper verb, ovk oloa av el, or ovk
av ol8a el for ovk otSa el —
av should be especially noticed, e.g.
OVK oiS' av et ireia-aifj.i (EuK. Med.), I know not whether I should
persuade him, where av belongs to Treia-atfii.
§ 182. Repetition of dv.

"Avoften used more than once in the same sentence.
is For
this repetition there may be two reasons.
— —
204 THE PARTICLE av.
1. In a long paragraph, which is complicated by interrupt-
ing clauses, o.v occurs at the beginning. It thus strikes the

keynote of the whole so to speak, and gives warning that the
whole coming statement is conditional. It occurs again later
on near the verb.
2. It may be repeated, more than once, even in a short
sentence, if any special word is to be emphasised.
EXAIUPLES.
I. In long paragraphs
v/x€ts 8' UTOJS Ta;^' av dvô/xevoi, wcrTrcp ot vvcrTaôin"CS
eyct/Do/zevot, K/DOtVavTCSai' /if, ireidoixevoi 'Avirrw, pq-Siios
av aTTOKTCtVaiTC. PlAT. Apol. xviii.
But you very possibly in annoyance, just like people ichen they
are being roused from a nap, might listen to Anytus, and,
vnth a tap, put me to death, and think nothing more of it.
N.B. — To-xo; perhaps, often attaches an av to itself.
In Plat. Apol. xxxii., a good instance. The sentence begins

—
with lyo) yap av oTiiai then seven lines later on oi/xat av
recurs, followed by av eipelv, (all the av's belonging to cvpdv).
II. For emphasis

ovK av d-oSoirjv ovS' av o/SoXov ovSevi. AriST. Nub. 118.
I'llnot give —
no not a copjper to any man.
ri 8tJt' av u)S (k twvS' av ij}(f>iXoifit. (re ; SoPH. Ai. 536.
How then, blowing ivhat has happened, could I assist thee ?
ovt' av KiXevuaiji! ovr av, ei deXoi^ en

—pda-(reiv, e/xov y av i^Sews Spturjs /tera. SOPH. Ant. 69.
/ tcoidd not urge thee, no !. nor shouldst thou now
Desire to help me, icould I have thy help.
Good instances occur in Soph. Ant. 466, 680, 884; Aesch.

Persae, 431.
§ 183. "Av with Future Indicative.

"A with the Future Indicative, Infinitive, and Participle.
I'
"Many critics have maintained that this construction does

not occur in Attic Greek Many instances have been
removed by revision of texts. Mr. Pdddell (Apology, p. 67,
and Digest, p. 139) regards the construction as abundantly
established, and cites seven in.stances from Plato, e.g. Rep.
ELLIPSE OF THE APODOSIS, ETC. 205
615 D, ovY av ^^(.i Sevpo.

ijKet, ouS' Other cases are Apol.
xvii., Leg. Symp. 222 a, etc. Also Xen. A?i. ii.
719 e,
5. 13, av KoXdu-eade. In Phaedr. 227 B, ovk av oiei /tie
TTOiqcrecrdaL. In CVitO. XV., ouk otet av âveTcrât, av with
the future infinitive occurs. S.v occurs with the future parti-
ciple in Plat. Apol. xvii. (end of chapter), ovk dv ttoiv/ctovtos.

Madvig denies, Kriiger defends, the existence of this last
construction.
§ 184. Ellipse of the Apodosis, and Ellipse of

the Verb.
"Av of an Apodosis is sometimes found without its verb.
The verb however (an Indicative or an Optative) may be
easily supplied from the context.
pkyKovaiV dAA' ol'k dv tt/jo tov. Ak. Nub. 5.

ot 8' OLKeTai
The domestics are snoring, but they icouldnH {have been doing
so) once. ovk dv (sc. eppeyKOv).
Where two verbs are connected or opposed, it is enough to

use dv once only, with the first, unless some lengthy com-
plication of clause renders it necessary for the sake of clear-
ness to repeat it, or unless some word is to be emphasised.
ouScis dv t]V o"oi OS epov Karep-apTvpTjcrev (sc. dv).

Antiph. Her. 15.
You woidd liave found no one who would hive given evidence
against me.
Tt €Trotr](Tev av ; -ij 8rj\ov oTt w/xoo-ev (sc. dv) ; DeM. 31. 9.
IFhat would lie have done ? Is it not clear tliat he icoukl have
taken an oath ?
§ 185. Ellipse of the Protasis.

Sometimes the Protasis, as in all languages, is wholly
omitted. It can be easily supplied from the context.
ouSev yap dv kfiXafSqv (sc. €t kTip.i)crdp.i)V, from what has

preceded). Pl. Apol. xxviii.
/ should Jiave received no Juxrm (Jmd I done so and so).
irav yap dv Karet/o-ydcra). SoPH. El, 1022.

So liadst thou compassed all (sc. d roidSe ya-9a), supplied
from a preceding wish.
2o6 THE PARTICLE 5v.
§ l86. Et and dv both in the Protasis.
In several instances el and av are both found in the Pro-

tasis (nearly always an Optative). One of the best-known
instances is from Plat. Protag. 329 B., koI eyw, etVep aAAw t(u
avOpwTTUiv TreLdoifJi-qv av, Kal crot Trei6o[j.at, fo7' myself, if I WOuld
trust any other man, I trust you. Here it is considered that av
belongs to the verb Tr€i6oL/xi]v, which does double duty, both as
a Protasis with et, and also as an Apodosis with av to another
unexpressed Protasis, thus et TreiOotjj/qv, if I iimild trust {i.e.
:
Tre.L9o'L[iqv av, I ivould trust, ei Tricmv 8ol7], if he should give me his

word). This is an established Attic idiom, e.g. Dem. Fhil. L
18, ovTOi TravreAw?, ov6' et /xi) Trot/ycratT' av tovto, €VKaTa(]ipov'i]-

Tov e'o-Tt, it is not lightly to he you should not do so
despised, even if
(do so — if the occasion should arise). Isoc. Archid. 120, et Se
Ix-qSels av vfJLwv d^LWcreLe ^rjv aTro(TTepovj^xvo<s Trarpidos, 7rpoa"i]K€i
K.T.A., if none of you should care to Uve—ifdejjrkedofhis country,
it behoves you, etc. In this last example the Second Protasis is

given in the participle uTroarrepovfievo?, as it is also in Dem.
Meid. 582, et ovtol xpT^/xarae^ôvrts /xr) TzpooivT av, if these men
—
would not spend money if they had it.
Other instances occur (perhaps) in Aesch. Ag. 930, and
Sept. 513. See also EuR. Hel. 825, Dem. Meid. 1206, de
Fals. Leg. § 190 (with Shilleto's note), Antiphon, 6. 29, Xen.
Cyr. iii. 3. 35 {davjxdôip! dv —
et dv citêAv^crete).
An essential point to notice is that in all these instances

(except Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 35) the Apodosis is in the Indicative,
generally in the Present, sometimes the Future. The Opta-
tive with et and dv, therefore, does not denote a remote future
supposition except so far as it refers to the unexpressed
Protasis. Hence in their notes to Aesch. Ag. 930 (reading et
TrpdcraoLix dv) both Mr. Paley and Mr. Sidgwick consider ei
-pda-croi/x' dv a variant not for et Trpda-a-oipLi, but for et Trpdô),
translating not, if I should prrosper, but, if I have a chance of
prospering.
Jelf (§ 860) and Professor Goodwin (Moods and Tenses, 107)
compare the Homeric et Kev with the Optative. But in all
the Homeric instances an Apodosis with the Optative and Ktv
is joined, e.g. II. v. 27'), et rovTOi kc Xdf3oip.ev dpoi/j.i6d kc
KAeos e'crÂo;', if, in the case given, v:e should take them, tec-
should win goodly renown.
In Dem. Timoth. 1201. 19, ei ai' occurs with a Past Indicative:
/^( TN APODOSIS. 207
£t TOIVVV T0V70 ICT^VpuV I'jV aV TOITW T€KfJ.i]piOV, KafXOL yev€(ru(t}
TeKffqpiof. Observe the Apodosis in the Imperative if this v:ould :
have been strong evidence for him (i.e. if he had been able to adduce
it), let if be evidence for me too. Here, as Professor Goodwin ex-
plains (p. 101), the Protasis means if it is true that this would
:
have been, so that reference is really to the present, and only to

the past so far as the unexpressed Protasis requires. Dor. de
Cor. 260. 2, is another instance if d l-eyjiip-qa-' av is read ; only
the Apodosis which follows is n's ovk av dirfKreni ;
Note. There is no difficulty in connecting an Apodosis with

more than one Protasis referring to different times, e.fj. Dem.
de Cor. 274. 28, e—evyôno-i iraaL Tourois, £t a.Xi]6rj irpos vp-O-s
eiTToipn Kal eLTTov, I irrcuj to all these, if I sJiould sjjeak, and did
speak the truth before you.
§ 187- Ae in Apodosis.
Si sometimes introduces an Apodosis as if it were co-

ordinate with, or followed, the Protasis. This is instructive
as showing that the logical importance of the subordinate
sentence (Protasis) may assert itself over the grammatical
importance of the Principal Sentence (the Apodosis), Such
cases, however, are very rare in Attic.
£1 oi'V eyw ytyiwcTKW /X'/Jre ra ocria p-'i']~i. to, 8iKaia, vpeis 81

SiSdâre /xe. Xen. Eell. iv. 1. 33.
If therefore I hioiv neither what is holy nor what is just, do

you then teach me.
Cf. Soph. 0. T. 1267; 6etva 5' i)v.
§ 188. idv seemingly Interrogative.
€1 is interrogative as well a.s conditional, but eai' is only

conditional, and must not be used in Indirect Questions.
AVhere it ajjpears to be interrogative, as in two places cited
by Liddell and Scott, it comes after o-Ko-et or a-Keipai, and
clearly means, "if by chance," e.g. Xen. 3Iem. iv. 4. 12.
cTKeâi, eav roSe crot /xaAAor dpecrKij, consider if perchance you
like this better (si forte tibi placuerit).
2o8 THE PARTICLE
§ 189. 0.V with Participle seemingly in Protasis.
A Participle with av must always be in Apodosis. But

sometimes examination and explanation are necessary.
Though I have much to say, yet I hold my tongue.
eX^v a concessive participle, and is itself an apodosis,

is
the sentence being equal to ex°'/^' "-^ (^' fSovXoifiip'), criyd Se

(or eyu) os~€p TToXX' av eôifii). dv emphasises —okkd.
crvdeii r'av ovk dv dXyvvais — Aeov. SoPH. 0. T. 446.
If thou speed hence thou wouldst not vex me more.
Here crvdeis is itself the Protasis followed by av, which
reallj' belongs to dXyvvats.
îXiTTTTOi IIoTtSaiai' lAwr Kat 8vvrjBel<; dv avros €;^€tv, ci
ij3ovX-i]6r], 'OXvvdioL'i TrapeSojKev. DeM. 23. 107.

P. after taking Foiidaea, and though he might, if lie had
icished, have kept it himself, yet handed it over to tJie
Ohjnthians.
5vi'»;^€is ai' is the Apodosis {r^^wriOfj dv — ei ifSovX/jOrj), the

participle having a concessive force.
§ 190. Conditional Particles and their

combinations.
1. ei 8e fiTj, if not, sin minus, siii aliter, has become so
stereot}'ped a phi-ase, that it is used where lav 5e /i^ would
be more correct.
eai' (f>aLVi]TaL SiKaLov, Treipw/xeô, ei 8e /zv) ew/zev.
Plat. Criio ix.
If it appears right, let us make tlie attempt ; but if not, let us

abandon it.
2. eav, el, meaning " if haply " (" in case," " in the event of,"
" in hope that," " thinking that "). It contains sometimes a
virtual oratio obliqua (i.e. the thought of the subject). Cf. si
forte in Latin.
aKOvaov Kal e/J-ov, idv (tol ravra So/cy. PlAT. Hep. 358.
Hear m£ too, in case you may agi'ee.
Trphs Tr)V -ttoXlv, et i—i(3or)doiev, l\wpovv. ThuC. vi. 100.

They were marching on the city, on the chance of the citizens
advancing against than {thinking that they might, etc.).
—
EXAMPLES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 209
3. uKT-ep (iv el : also ojcr-epavei

\^Titten The phrase
is compressed from dv (Apodosis)
loanrep —
et (Protasis), e.g.
wa-rrepav ei etTTot (Plat. Apol. ix.), just tts if he were to say,

uxr—ep dv ttoiolto el enroi.
4. TTws yap dv ; (sc. etq), with a Protasis {el with Optative)

omitted. How would it be, if it were so ? How is it possible ?
How so ?
5. Kav el vvv fiot SoKei xav dcrefSeiav el KaraytyvwcrKOt tis

:
MetSiou TO, Trpoa-T^KOvra TToielv. DeM. 21. ol Kat dv TroLeiv = —

€1 KaTaycyvuKTKoi. But Kav el comes to be used for the simple
Kttt el, even if.
6. Kav := /cat edv.
§ 191. Examples of Conditional Sentences.
(1) Ordinary Present Conditions. (2) Ordinary Past Con-

ditions. (3) Present and Past in combination. See
§ 177 A, 1 and 2.
Observe that the condition may be general as well as

particular.
1. Present :
ei Tt xj/evSofiai, eêcniv lêAeyâi fxe. AnTIPH. de Cher. 14.

If I am making any false statements, you may confute me.
€1 deoi Tt Spdocnv alcrxpov, ovk elcrlv deoi.

EuRiP. Bell. Frag. 294.
If the gods do aught immoral they are no gods.
el ovv TOiovTov 6 ddvaTos ea-Tt, Kep8o<s eywye Xeyto.

Plat. Apol. xxxiii.
If therefoi-e death is such a state as this, I for my part count

it gain.
2. Past:—
el dirocTTfjvaL 'A^ryvaiwv ovk rjOeX/jdanev, ovk rjSiKov/xev.
Thug. iii. 55.
If we refused to desert the Athenians, ice were doing no torong.
OVK because ovk €êAw=no!o.

o
2IO THE PARTICLE 5v.
el fxev 'A(rKX')]TrLos 6eov yv^ ovk '^v al(TXpoKep8r]<i, ci S'
at(rxpoK€p8rjs, ovk rjv Oeov. PlAT. JRep. iii, 408 C.
Jf Asdepius teas the son of a god, he was not covetous ; if he

was covetous, he was not the son of a god.
€4 Tt aA.Ao eyev€TO i-LKivSvvov, TrdvTOiv irapo. Bvvafjiiv

li€T€(rxojJ.€V. ThUC. iii. 54,
If any other danger arose, we took our share in all beyond

our strength.
(3.) <f)pdê~e o^v dXX'qXots el TrwTrore ri rJK0V(Te Tts.

Plat. Apol. iii.
Explain then one to another, if at any time any one heard
anything.
et TTOv TL eirpaâ Totorros (âvovpai. PlaT. Apol. xxi.

If ever I engaged in any business, I shall be found to be stick
as I have described myself.
el Be 8vo e^ Ivos dywvos yeyevrjcrdov ovk eyu> dtVios.

Antiph. de caed. Herod. 84.
.
If two trials have been made out of one (or instead of one), it
is not my fault.
§ 192. Ordinary Future Conditions.

See § 177 A, 3 (a).
Protasis edv (tji/, dv) with the Subjunctive.

'i]V dva—ela-io tovtovl, o-co^Tycro/xat. ArIST. Nub. 77.
If I {slmll) pjersuade this person here, I shall escape.
edv ejxot Treidrjorde, cfieia-ea-de fj.ov. PlAT. Apol. XviiL

If you are {will be) persuMed by me, you will spare me.
edv e/xe d—OKTeivr]Te, ovk e/j-e fiecô) (SXdrpeTe -q vfids avrovs-

Plat. Apol.
If you put me to death, you will inflict no greater injury on
me than on yourselves.
Koi. TTttiS', edviiep Bevp ejxov irpocrOev p-oXy,
irapi^yopeire. AeSCH. Pers. 529.
And for my son, if he return befoix me,
Comfort ye him.
1
ORDINA R V FUTURE CONDITIONS. 21
K-eiveiv lavTov, ^v raSe ifevcrdy kiyojv.

Soph. Phil 1342.
Freeh/ he offers himself
To the death if, speakinrj thus, he lie.
SlSiocti, he offers, practically means, he says that he mill, is

ready, and thus implies a future.
irapa tov dyaôv Oeov, av deb<; kdkXrf, avTLKa iTiov. PlaT.

/ must go at once, to the good God, if God tciU.
10. KOVK dv ye Xeâi/j.' err' dyaOouxi (roi<s fcaKct.

AF. î' fii^ ye (hevywv iK<fivyrjS ~pos aWepa.
Eur. Fhoen. 1215.

Yea, and I icoidd not speah of ill close on thy happiness.
Yea, hut thou shall, unless thou escape in thy flight to the
firmament.
Cf. Eur. Orest. 1593.
N.B. —A
physical impossibility is here spoken of. Observe
that it follows an Apodosis with Optative and dv : i)v with
the Subjunctive realises vividly the impossibility of the
situation.
Ti oSi', dv e'—oicnv ot vo/xot k.t.X. Plat. Crit. xiL

What then, if the laws say to ns, etc.
A physical impossibility again is brought home as a vi-\ad

argununtum ad hominem.
§ 193' Less Vivid Future Conditions.

See § 177, A 3 (i).
In English we render elwith the Optative in a variety of

ways : ei -oirjaaLiii, if I should do, if 1 were to do, should I do,
were I to do, if I did, supposing I were to do. etc.
ov roXXrj dv dXoyia tov ddvarov 6 toioutos.

eirj ei (fiojSoiTO
Plat. Phaed. 68.
JVould it not he the height of inconsistency if such a man were
to fear death ?
€1 fie arl tovtois d^toire, eiTTOifi dv v[j.lv. PlaT. Apol. xvii.

If you should dismiss me on these conditions I would reply to
you, etc.
212 THE PARTICLE Sa>.
o?KO? S' 0.V avro?, et <^doyyi^v Xu.fioi,

(Ta<f>e(TTaT' dv Xeêiev. AeSCH. Ag. 37
Nay, the very house, if gifted with a voice, would tell tJie tale
most plainly.
A physical imijossibility represented as supposable ; cf. CiC.
Cat. 1, haec si tecum patria loquatur, nonne impetrare debeaf?
iyu} ovv Sciva dv eir]v elpyaa-fxevos et XC—oifxt Ti]v rdgiv.
Plat, Apol.
I should then be in position of one who has committed dreadful
sin, were I to desert my post.
The perfect denotes the state.
§ 194. Most Vivid Future Conditions.

See § 177, A 3 (c).
1. Et with the Future Indicative sometimes refers plainly

to the future, and is used much as lav with the Subjunctive,
only the latter is more common and less positively and
vividly future.^
aTTOK-ei/ets yap, €l fxe yr^s e^w âAets. EUR. Plwen. 1621.
Thou wUt slay me, if thou wilt thrust me from the land.
et jj.q Kadeêi's yXwcrcrav, ecTTat croi KaKo.
EuRiP. A eg. Fr. 5
If thou v:Ut not curb thy tongue there will be ills for thee.
qv lêAw/xev d—oOvrjcrKeLV — et 8e (f>of3q<T6ixe6a klv8vvov<s.

IsoCR. Archid. p. 138, A. § 107.
If we are ready to die —but if ice shall fear dangers.
Observe the co-ordination of the two forms.

etTOVTO — ot5ô"o/xei', pafi^ws ra e— tr/ySeta eôfxei'.
If we shall do this we shall easily find supplies.
2. But et with Future Indicative in Protasis is found with
a present (or virtual present) in the Apodosis.
et TTotvycrets then =
£i jiteXAet^ —otjcreiv, if you are going to do,
if you mean to do, if you are for doing, and this et with the
Future is used of a condition now imminent, and even existing,
e.g. if you're for fighting, I'm your man, el p-a-x^l oSe eyti) cro<
1 Mr. Monro (Homeric Grammar, p. 239) considers that et with the
Future (in Homer) generally expresses suppositions of an obvious or

fanoiliar kind.
MIXED EXAMPLES. 213
atpe TrArjKxpov, et /jiaêt. ARIST. ^l". 761.

Up with your spur if you mean fighting.
Cf. Akist. Ach. 316.
rj vvv eyo) jxlv ovk o.vqp, avTi] S' ai'v^p,
ci Tavr' di/art T/]Se KetVerat KpaTq. oOPH. ^Tli. 484.
Lo, you now ! I am no man, hut she is the man, if with impunity
these my commands are to count as naught in her eyes.
Si iacebit imperium nostrum, cf. 461.
The periphrasis with fxeXXo) and Infinitive (Present or

Future) commoner in prose. There is a life about the expres-
is
sion which recommends this et with the Future to poetry.
§ 195- Mixed examples illustrating the connection

between and interchangeability of the Sub-
junctive, Optative, and Future Indicative in
Conditional Sentences.
N.B. —This section is supplementary to § 192 — § 1 94.
TTWS ovv av opdws SiKacratTC Tre/jt avTWv ; et tovtovs eao'cre

Tov vofMLôfxevov opKov Sto/xocrayaei'ODs KaTijyoprjcrai, k.t.X.
TTws 5e edcrere ; eav vvvl a.iro\pi-jî(Tq(j6k p.ov.
.
Antiph. de Caede Herod. 90.

How then would you rightly judge on these points ? if you
shall allow my prosecutors to take the prescribed oath and
accuse me. And how icill you allow this ? if you acquit me
on this present trial.
N.B. —
el with the Future Indicative, and lav with Subjunc-
tive, have a modal force, " by permitting."
Plat, de Rep. 359 c the ring of Gyges), e??; S' av

(of
rj eôvcria 7]v Xeyoi p-aXuTTa el avTols yevoLTO
TOtdSe
ol'av TTore âcri 8vvapt.v Tco Tvyov toG AvSov Trpoyorw
yevecrdai.
They would enjoy this liberty ivhich I am speaking of mod
completely, if they should possess such a power as we are
told the ancestor of Gyges the Lydian once possessed.
Compared with
PLA.T. Rep. 612 B, 7rot7jT€OV eTvai a.vTy -d SiKaia, idv t' ex'g
TOV ruyoi) SaKTvXtoi', edv re p.q.

(we concluded, evpop.ev) that the soul must do v;]iat is righteous,
whether it possesses the ring of Gyges or no.

214 THE PARTICLE 5v.
oi'oeJs rjfxwv t(ov v'o[i(dv iiiirooojv ccttii', idv re Tts /iovAi^-ai

vjKov ets uTToiKt'uv ttvai, ci /i'// (IpecrKOLfLev y/xeis re Kat 7y
TToXis, edv re /xeTOiKeiv dAAotre ttoi cA^wi', levat eKeicrf
OTTOi av ISovXrjTai, €;)(OVTa a. avTov. PlAT. 6Vi7. xill.
-,
iVu«e of our laws pi-evenis any of yov, if he wishes to go to a

colony, supposing we and the state slwuld not give him
satisfaction, or if he wislies to go and reside anywhere else,
{none prevents him) from going wherever he wishes with all
his belongings.
The Optative here, Professor GoodAvin says, sunply marks

a less prominent clause. But, it is to be notked that idv with
the Subjunctive here, which is thus joined with d and the
Optative, is a general supposition
§ 196. The Optative and Indicative with dv

without a Protasis.
The Optative with civ is freely used without a Protasis in
a variety of modified statements. In some cases it is easy to
supply a Protasis in others no Protasis appears to have been
;
thought of. (This is Madvig's Oidativus Fotentialis or JDubita-

iivus, § 136.)
1. As a modified statement in present or future time, very often

drawing an inference from what has preceded.
wpa av rj/JLLV crvcrKevdêcrdaL etq. XeN. Cyr. iii. 1. 41.
It is time for us then to he packing up.
Of. AnTIPH. Tetral. B.B. 6, eXeyxOeirj.
tovt' av etr) o lyw (^Ty/xi ere alvLrTetrdai. PlAT. Apol. XV.

Herein t/ien would consist icJiat I hold to he your riddling.
Cf. Antiph, de Chor. 15, oios t* av eliq.
Often (3ov\oi/xt]v av, I coidd wish, I v:ish, velim.

ovK av iMedeifJ-qv rov Opovov, p.i^ vovOeret. ArIST. lian. 830.
I'll not resign the throne, don't counsel me.
Cf. Arist. Ach. 1055.
2. A modified command or prayer, sometimes put as a ques-

tion.
(TV fiev KOfuôLS av creavTov y êAeis. SoPH. Ant. 444.
2I10U may'st betake thee where thou likest, i.e. get tJiee gone.
UNFULFILLED CONDITIONS.
up' ovv WeXii]<Tais dv 3
Should you feel disposed ? Would you mind ? Please do so

and so.
3. A icish, expressed interrogatively. An interrogation eguiva-

lerU to' a wish.
TTws av 6Xoifxi]v ; EURIP.

How could I perish^ i.e. would I might perish !
Arist. Ach. 991.
Similarly, but not so freely, the Imperfect Indicative is
used. The time is past.
ePovXofJir^v dv.
I could have wished, vellem.
^v S' av ovTOs Twv iTTTriKwv Tis. PlaT. Apol. iv.

This man accordingly would he one of those who understand
hoi'ses.
(i]v av is Apodosis of an unfulfilled condition.)
§ 197. Unfulfilled Conditions.^

See § 177, B 1 and 2.
1.Et with the Imperfect Indicative. The time of the

Imperfect Indicative is either present or a past of description,
habit, or iteration.
Koi ToS', elirep ecrêvov,
c8po)v dv. Soph. El. 604.
Had I the strength,
I 'd do the deed.
The time is present (/ should now have been doing).
^ Wehave in English several ways of expressing an unfulfilled con-

dition in present time, some of which resemble the Greek. Thus we
may render, el raOra eiroleis 7]5iKeis dv, if you were doing this (or, if you
had been doing this), you zoould be doing wrong (or, would have noio been
doing wrong). These are not, however, the forms always used in every-
day speech. E. g. A
tramp, meeting me on the road, asks me for a copper.
1 put my hand in my pocket, but, finding nothing there, I shake my
head and say, "Very sorry, if I had anything, I icould give it" (el ri
dxov iSiSovp av). A
Shaksperean unfulfilled condition, referring to
present time, may be given. Constance says to Arthur "If thou :
that bid'st me be content, wert grim," etc., "/ woidd not care, I then
would he content, for then J should not love thee," etc. "But thou art
"
fair.
2i6 THE PARTICLE 5p.
el êvos €Tvy)(avov w, ^vv€yi,yvu)(TK€T€ B'ijttov av /xot.
Plat. Apol. i.
If I happened to he a foreigner {which I am not), you would

surely pardon me.
The time is present.
£t jJLij tot' iirovovv vvv av ovk exKJipaivofirjv. PhILEM. 159.

If I had not been toiling then, I should not he rejoicing now.
The force of the Imperfect Indicative (referring to both

kinds of time) is well shown in the above example.
lyo) ovv cKaXXwofiiiv Kal rjppvuo/jL-ijv av, et ijTTLa-Tajj.Tqv Tavra.

aAA' ov yap iirLa-TafxaL. PlAT. Apol. iv.
/ anyhow should plume and pride myself if I possessed this

knowledge. —
Bid you see, I don't possess it (or, / should
have heen pluming, etc.)
The time is present, or it may refer to a habit in the past.
SrjXov oSv OTi OVK av TrpoeXeyev et fxi] eTricTTevev dXr]div<Teiv.

Xen. Mem. i. 1. 5.
It is plain accordingly that Socrates would not have publicly

made these statements had he not felt confident that he
should speak the truth.
The Imperfect here expresses customary or habitual acts in
the past.
Similarly in Latin the Imperfect is used, and not the

Pluperfect. The poets are fond of it as a descriptive past.
Several instances, not much noticed, occur in Horace. lUe
non inclusus equo Minervae, etc. ; fcdleret aulam, etc. ; sed,
etc. ; ureret flammis ; He would not have been deceiving, hut
burning. Thou hadst not seen Achilles deceiving, hut burning.
Non ego hoc ferrem calidus iuventa consule Planco. I had
not brooked this in the heat of youth wlien Plancus was consul.
Sometimes av with the Aorist Indicative in Apodosis is

joined to ei with the Imperfect Indicative, not to denccte a
past unfulfilled condition, but a single act, e.g. Plat. Euthyph.
12 D, d jAv ovv (TV p.e. TjpwTas rt, eiTrov av, if you were asking
me any question I shoidd instantly say. Here dirov av really
refers to the present, and denotes the instantaneousness of the
single act in a way which the Imperfect could not express.
OMISSION OF 5v. 217
2. El with the Aorist or Pluperfect Indicative, The time

is past, denoting a single act (Aorist), or a state (Pluperfect),
dirWavov av el fxr] rj twv rpLcxKOVTa a.p)(r] KanXvOi^.
Plat. Ai?ol. xx.
/ should have been put death if the government
to of the
Thirty had not been overthroim.
el /Mr) d]/e/3r] "Ai'htos Kctv tocÂe ;(iAias Spa^/xas.

Plat. AjjoI. xxv.
If Anytus had not come into court he woidd even have
incurred a fine of 1000 drachmae.
el fir] vfiels i^kOeTe eTropevofxeda av ctti pacrtXea.

Xen. An. iL 1. 4.
If you had not come (past) iveshould now be marching
against the King (or have been now marching).
Protasis a single act in Past ; Apodosis a continued act in the

Present.
el Tore e/3orjdT^(rafxev ovk av vyvw^Âec vvv 6 îXnnros.
Dei^l 30. 6.
If we had then given help Philip would not be annoying

lis now.
Here vvv is added to mark the present.
OVK av Trapefxeiva el eXeXvpLyv. AnTIPH. Hei'od. 13.
I should not have stayed if I had not been set free on bail.
el, o (re r^piorwv, direKpivoi, iKavws av I'^h) ep,ep.adqKeiv.
Piu4.T. Eutltyph. 14 c.
If you had ansicered my question, I should already have

finished my learning.
The pluperfect denotes a past state.
§ 198. The omission of av in Apodosis with

Indicative.
1. Sometimes a past tense of the Indicative is found in

Apodosis without av. Such a construction is necessarily
rhetorical. A statement which would have been true if
certain conditions had happened is spoken of as actually true.
The instances are rare, and many are disputed, but some
occur both in poetry and prose.
8 —
21 THE PARTICLE av.
TTvpyovs Trecrovras -ijcrfxev YiXXqvwv 8opl

</)o/3ov TTapeo-xî' ov /xeo-ws o8e ktiotos. EuR. Hec. 1111.
(for Trapk(7y;ev av).
Had we not known
Tlmt Phrygians towers had fallen 'neath the spear
Of Hellas, no slight fear this din had caused.
Cf. Nee veni nisi fata locum sedemque dedissent.
Verg. a en. xi. 112.
The Imperfect by almost bears this meaning without
itself
requiring an dv. Indeed the intrinsic meaning of the Im-
perfect {e.g. in the following example, " I was not by way of
sending,") is closely allied to a conditioned statement.
e.g. KacTOi ov SrjTTOV ye Kar' kfxavTOv /xi^vvtijv eTrefMirov etSws,
Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 24.

And yet I surely was nat sending an informer against myself
with my eyes open (I should not have been sending).
See especially a paragraph too long for quotation in Andokides
de Myst. 58. 59. Cf. also Eur. Bacch. 1312.
The construction is commoner
in Latin (cf. Lrv. xxxiv. 29,
Difficilior facta crat oppugnatio ni T. Quinctius supervenisset.
Tag. Ann. iii. 14, Effigies Pisonis traxerant ac dvvellehant ni
iussu principis repositae foreut. HoR. Od. II. x\di.. Me
truncus illapsus cerebro sustulerat nisi Faunus ictum dextra
levasset. Verg. Georg. ii. 132, Et, si non alium late iactaret
odorem, laurus erat.
2. This omission of dv is almost the rule with the Im-

perfect of verbs denoting necessity, duty, possibility, propriety,
etc. :
XP^'' ^^ ^XP'Q^t '^^^'i ^^Vî ivrjv, eiKos r)v, TrpoarJKev, ^v or
VTTTJpXû (it was KaXov '7V, alaxpov tJv, KaXî c'x^*'>
possible),
u)(f)ikov, l/xeAAes, kftovX6iJ.riv. Also with, verbals in -reos, e.g.
7rpoaLpeT€ov rjv (satius erat). All these phrases denote an un-
fulfilled condition (present or continued past).
This construction is parallel with the Latin debebam, de-

cebat, oportebat, poteram, gerundive with eram, par, satis,
aequum erat, etc. See Madvig, L. G. § 348 E., and Obs. 1.
KaAov rjv TolaSe, el Kal rjixaprdvo/iev, elâi tq r^fieTepa opyQ.

Thug. i. 38.
It would have been icell foi' them, even if we Imd been
wronging them, to give way to our anger.
OMISSION OF &v. 2 19
epovXofJLrjv fxkv ovk epCêiv ivddSe. ArIST. Man. 866.

/ could have wished I was not wrangling here.
wrov ?]v fjLOL firj iXdetv (as apodosis to et fitjSev Steê/ae).
AxTiPH. Herod. 13.

It would have been all the same to me not to have come.
For w<êAoi', k(iov\6jj.-qv, see Wislies.
3. Observe similar constructions of cSei and ^XP'?)^ (XP"'/'')-
XP^v (I8ei) ere Taura ttoulv.

You ought to he doing, or, to have been doing (but you are
not, or were not, doing the act). Compare i-oUis av.
XPV^ (eSet) cre TaCra Trofqa-at.
You ought to have done (but you did not do) the act.
Compare fTroiiycras av.
Oportebat and oportuit facere.

For xP''h'j with Present Infinitive and Aorist Infinitive, see
Plat. Apol. xxii., Arist. Ach. 562. eoet, Dem. 112. 6. But
Xpri cre ttouiv (TrotTjcrat), yoti ought to clo this (of what can stiU
be done), oportet te facere.
OVK eSet cre rav-a Troieiv.
You ought not to be doing (what you are doing).

Xpjji', eoet, etc. , however may take an av.
ei fxlv q-LO-Taiieda cTa(f)ws, ovSev av eSet co^ /xeXXo) Aeyetv.
Xen. AnaJi. v. 1. 10.
If ive had all knotcn for certain, there would be no need for
me to say what I am going to say.
So in Latin jôssem may be used and not poteram, oporteret
and not oportebat.
4. KivSvvevw, fxeXXo).
y) TTO/Xts eKti'Si'V€i;cre —acra 8ia(f>0aprjvaL, ei ave/xo? iTreyepeTO.
Thuc. iii. 74.
The city was in danger of being entirely destroyed if a wind
had not arisen (we might say, but a ivind arose), a
periphrasis for Bu4>6a.prj av.
In eo erat ut consumeretur urbs nisi, etc.
likXXoi in the Imperfect is a periphrasis for an Aorist
A'ith av.
ovcrva-TpaTeve.Lv ep.eXXov. Dem. de Fals. Leg. 391. 11.

They would not have joined forces (ovk av a-weo-TpaTevcrav).
Vires non collaturi erant.
)
220 THE PARTICLE Slv.
§ 199. 'Eai/ ('^z^) with the Subjunctive, and Et

with the Optative in General or Fre-
quentative Suppositions.^
See § 178.
Many of the four forms already given may express general

as well as particular suppositions, but to express a supposition
which refers not to a particular act, but to customary acts, fre-
quently repeated acts, general truths or maxims, there are two
common forms which are given below. They are parallel with
Indefinite Eelative Sentences, and Frequentative Temporal
Sentences (see Index). 'Eav and d here mean " if ever " (lav
7roT€, et TTor^. 'Eai/ and ei, however, in themselves, with the
Subjunctive or Optative, are not Frequentative, but the Tense
of the Apodosis (the Principal Sentence) makes the whole
compound clause so. It is the Apodosis which distinguishes
these uses of eav with the Subjunctive, and ei with the Optative
from their ordinary uses.
^ The Latin equivalents to Greek General Suppositions should be

noticed.
Prestnt.
Si quis eorum decreto non stetit, sacrificiis interdicunt.
Caesak, B. O. vi. 12.
If yet any one does not abide by they exclude him from the
their decree, sacrifices.
Sin autem etiam libidinum intern- duplex malum est.

perantia accessit, Cic. Off. i. 123.
But if ever in addition there be the mischief is doubled.
want of control over the desires,
(The Present Indicative is also used in Latin.
Past.
Si a persequendo hostes deterrere disiectos a tergo circumvenie-
nequiverant, bant. Sallust, lug. 50.
If ever they could not deter the they kept inclosing them in the
enemy from pursuit, rear.
Siquod erat grande vas, laeti adferebant, Cic. Verr.
If they came, across any large they used to bring it to Mm in

vessel, triumph.
Observe the tenses of the Protasis the Perfect Indicative in Present

:
Time, the Pluperfect in Past. These are the commonest fonus accord-
ing to the Latin strictness in representing one action as prior to another.
'Hap i^v) WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 221
I. Referring generally to present or future time.

Protasis. Apodosis.
'Eav {^]v, av) with Suôjunctive. Present Indicative or any
present Iterative Tense
(gnomic Aorist).
Parallel with
OS av f
and Suhj.
ocTTts av
orav, etc.
II. Referring to past time.

€t with Optative.
Parallel with
€1 -ore '^ Imperfect Indicative, or
OS, oo-Tis i-with Opt. any past Iterative Tense
ore, etc.
) (Aor. or Imperf. with av).
Examples of I.
i;v eyyi's eA^v; Odvaro? oi'Seis ftovXerat

Ovrjo-Keiv. Eur. Ale. 671.
If (when) death draws nigh none wish to die.
[ley' €0"T6 KepSos 'Qi' SiSdcrKecrOai dkX-QS. MeNAND.

'Tis great gain if thou car est to he taught.
airas Aoyos, dv di^rj rd Trpdy/xaTa, /xdraioi' tl cfjatyeraL (cat
Kevov. Dem. OL ii 21. 20.

All talk, if deeds are wanting, seems idle and empty.
qv 8' dpa crâAwcrtv, eTrX-qpoicrav ttjv )(^p£Lav. ThL'C. i. 70.
If ever by chance they fail, they ahcays make good the loss.
iTrXrjpwa-av, Gnomic Aorist.
Cf. Plat. Apol. ix. ; dv nva o'ojixai. Ibid. xxi. ; lav Tis
(3ovXrjTai.
EXAJSIPLES OF II.
€t 5e Tts Kttt uvTeLTTOL ivOvs iredvu^Kei. ThUC. \"iii. 66.

If {as often as, ivhenever) any one did speak against them,
he was promptly put to death.
dXX €1 Tl jxi] (fiepoi/xev, wrpvvei' cfjepetv. El^R. Alc. 755.
But if ever ice did not fetch him a thing, he zvould order
(i.e. kep>t mxlering) v; to fetch it.
THE PARTICLE <?i/.
€t' Ttves tSoiei/ TTj/ Toi)s a-(fi€Tepovs iTTiKparovvras dve8dpcrrj(rav

dv. Thuc. \di. 71.
If any of them saiv their own side ivianing in any part of the
battle, they ivoidd ijluck up courage.
dv^ddpcr-qcrav dv, iterative. For the iterative (or indefinite)

use of dv Avitli the Imperfect and Aorist Indicative, see § 142.
This use must be carefully distinguished from that of dv in
uufulfilled conditions. The iterative use of dv may have
arisen from its being used without definite application, e.g.
e'Aeê dv, he caiiie —in any given case, whereas in an unfulfilled
condition the dv may have been of special application, e'Aeê
dv, he came — in that case, i.e. he would have come.
Ohs. —
That here in connection with a past Apodosis, the
Optative really refers to past time. It is only when thus
used, and in the rare instances in oratio ohiiqua where the
Ojitative represents a Past Indicative of the recta, that the
Optative denotes past time.
Supplementary Sections, § 200 — § 206.
§ 200. Mixed Examples.

For Examination ami Reference.
Not seldom the Protasis and Apodosis do not strictly
correspond. No one rule can be laid down for exjilaining
all the irregularities. Sometimes the mind really shifts its
ground in the passage between Protasis and Apodosis, making
the conclusion depend upon a condition which the expressed
Protasis only suggests. But mostly the irregularity is one of
expression only. This is chiefly the case with the Optative
with ay in an Apodosis, connected with a Protasis in the
Indicative or Subjunctive. The Optative with dv may, as we
have seen, express a modified Indicative drawing an inference,
or an Imperative, or a Future. Sometimes again there are
two Protases actually expressed (Ex. 9). Sometimes Preposi-
tion and Case, or a Particle supplies the place of the Protasis
(Ex. 11 and 12).
1. et pev yap tovto \eyov(Tiv, opoXoyoii]v dv tywye ov Kara

TovTovs dvai piJTOip. Plat. A2)ol. i.
If this is what they mean, I must admit that I am an orator
of a far higher order Hum they.
MIXED EXAMPLES. 223
The Protasis, et Xkyovaiv, refers to the present; the Apo-
dosis is partly a remote supposition, and partly an inference.

2. TOUTo ye [loi BoksI KaXov eTvai, et rts oio's t' itrj TratSei'dv
dv$pcjTrov<s. Plat. Apol. iv.
This does appear to me to be a grand thing —supposing one

were able to teach men.
Here, SoK-er, a verb of thinking, almost makes the Apodosis
likean OptatiAê with av.
3. Kttt eyo) Tov Et'jjvov efxaKapicra, et ws dXrjdios €>ôt ttJv
Tex^'î'- Plat. Apol iv.
ittc^j/ Evemis, thought I, if really and trnhj he were to possess

the art.
d €xo' is the Protasis to an Apodosis implied in ifj-aKapia-a.
4. et Tous dvaLTiovs SiwKOi/JLev . . . Setvovs dXLTi]pcovs eô//ei',
. . ei'oôt re tou (j)ovov rots

. i~iTi/JLLOi? kcrp-kv.
Antiph. r, A. 4.
7/ we should indict the innocent, we shall find dread avengers,
and we are liable to the penalties for murder.
A series of pictures more and more vividly presented,

passing from the Optative to the Future Indicative.
5. ^ws av enj Setvorepa yurjâv^/xara et vpAV Karetpyaa-Tai a
l3ovX€o-6e ; Antiph. de Caed. Eerod. 1 6.
How could there be more terrible practices, if you have
(a present ordinary condition) achieved your object ?
6. et TOti'i'i' yueyaAcor dyaOQiv aXria v/ias eipydcravTO eKetfot,

fxipos eyw ovK av iXd-î(nov StKaiws rawijs t^s aiTta<;
exoi/JLi. Andok. de Bed. suo. 12.
If then those men oxcompUshed

ichat secured your great
advantages (an ordinary past Protasis), / might justly
claim not the least share of the merit (a future Apodosis,
also marking an inference).
7. et ovv Tti't vfiuiv yviofiq roLavrrj TrapiLcrrrjKei Trporepov —epi

ifjiov, (TKOTreto-ê e^ o.vtwv twv yeyevry/xerwv.
AxDOK. de Myst. 54.
If, therefore, any of you previously used to entertain mch an
o^pinion of me (an ordinary
past condition in the Imper-
fect), examine the case by the actual facts {i.e. now in the
immediate future).
—
224 THE PARTICLE Rv.
8. el rjv KaXws a—oXkcrdai rj aiV)(pws

Svoiv to irepov eXea-dai, ^
crco^^vat, €X°' ^^
KaKiav elvai to. yevofieva.
'^'•^ etTretv
Andok. de Myst. 57.
If it had been possible to choose one of two alternatives, either
an honourable death or a dishonourable escape, then you
might stignmtize my conduct as cotvardice (a past unful-
filled condition, a future Apodosis vnth. an inference).
9. lyo) ovv Seti'o. av eu^v et/aycurytxevos, et, ore jxkv fi€ ol ap^ôvres
Ira-rov .totc fikv ov e/vetvoi eVarrov e/xevov
. . tov 8e . . .
6eov raTTOVTOS XiTrot/Mi. rrjv raîv.

. . . PlAT. Apol. xvii.
/ accordingly should be in a position of one ivho is guilty of
fearful sin if, when your rulers were assigning me a post,
etc., if then, I say, I was remaining at the post ichich
tJiey assigned me, but if, tchen noio God is assigning me a
post, I tvere to desert that post.
Here there is one Apodosis, av ecTjv etpyacr/iei'os, and twc

Protases, el e/xevov, el XiTrot/jLi. The two Protases make up the
combined conditions which produce the Apodosis.
Cf. also ch. XV.
10. el yap ovroi. opdws ajre<TTq(rav, vfieis av ov xpewv ap-)ôtTe.
Thuc. iii. 40.

If they icere right in revolting, then your rule is unlawful
(it would folloio that you are ruling).
11. Sta ye vp.a.'i avTOVs irciAai av aTroXtjXeiTe. DeM. de Cor. 242,

So far as you yourselves were concerned, you would Ivave been
ruined long ago.
Sia ye v/ias avrousêi vfxeh avTOt /iovot vy-e, if you had, been
left to yourselves, had it depended on you alone.
12. ovrw yap ovKen tov Xol—ov T7aa-)(0tiJ.ev av KaKws.
Dem. Fldl 1. 44.
For in that u-e should never again get into trouble.
ovT(o =
el Tavra yevoiTO.
201. Examples of the Conditional Participle in

a Protasis.
oXov/JLai /xt) fiaOwv. ArIST. Aâh. 792.
I shall be ruined if I don't learn.
lay piJ paOisi.
CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 225
Set yap Ivos o5 /Jt^ tv;(&)v

aTToAwAa. Arist. ^cA. 466.
One ihing I need which, if I fail to get,
Fm a lost man.
ov [XI] Tvx^v = iav /.LT] Tvyoi . . . (XTro A(oAa being a vivid future.
TO dirodavelv av Tts €K({ivyot osrAa dcfêis. Pl. Apol. xxix.
A man might escape death if he were to fling away his arms.
dêts^ct d<f>ei-q.
/xerayvovs yap ( = et /xerayvoiri) en av opdois /SovXevarairo.

Antiph. de Caede Herod. 91.
For if he should repent he yet might come to a right decision.
ov yap av ifSX'qOrj drpe/Mi^wv Kal firj SiaTpe^wv ( = et ijr/ae/xiê
Kal fxr) Ster/aexe). AnTIPH. 2 Tetrol. B. B. 5.

He would not have been struck if he had been standing still,
and not running across.
§ 202. Examples of Conditional Relative Sentences.

a firj oI8a, ov8e oiofiat eiSevat. PlAT. Apol. vi.
What I do not know I do not fancy that I know.
=€t Tiva fiYj olSa.
Tcov aAAwv êvwv ocrris ttcuttotc qOeXrjcre KaTa<TTrj(rai

Se
eyyvqrds, ovSels TrtoTrore eSedrj. AntIPH. Herod. 17.
Of all the other foreigners who ever at any time chose to furnish
securities, none ever ivas thrown into prison.
oo-Tts i}êArjcr6=€t xts -qOkX-qcre, an ordinary past Condition.
a yap ns p.rj TrpocreSoK-qcrev, ovSe ûAdâcrât kyyuypel.
Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 19.
WTiat one does not expect, it is not even possible to guard
against.
An instructive instance ; ~po(ji86Kri(Te.v is a Gnomic Aorist, and
so this is a General Supposition in Present time. The Aorist,
however, may here simply imply priority of time.
urrjv ye 8vvajxiv eêt ocms re av rfj X'^tpl diroKTUvyj dStKoys
Kal oo-Tts T); ^ri<po). Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 92.
The effect is the same whether a man takes life with his hand,
or with his vote.
A General Supposition again in Present time.
p
J26 THE PARTICLE uv.
§ 203. Relative Conditional Sentences expressing

General Suppositions.
(iSêe also tlie. last two examples in the previous section.)
I. Present Time.
(Tviip-aêlv TovTOLS WeXova-LV aTravres, ous av opwo-t -ape
(TK€va(TfjLevovs. Dem. Phil. i. 42. 1.
All men are ready to be in alliance with those wJiom ever they
see prepared.
:=.k6.v Ttvas=OTav, ottotov Tivas.
II. Past Time.

ot 5^ KaLOfievov akXov, e7ri/3aAoi/Tes ov <fiepouv, dvyecrav.
Thuc. ii. 52.
Continually, while one body was burning, they kept throning
on {the funeral pile) any one they were bearing, and then
going away.
= e? Tiva = ei ttotc TLvdôTTore rtvou
§ 204. Examples of Infinitive in Apodosis with dv.
el Teyca cr^tcri trpocrykvoiTo, evofitôv d—ao-av ar ex'^**

neAo7rovv7;o-ov. ThUC. v. .32.
They thought that, if they coidd get in addition Tegea, they

would possess the whole Peloponnese.
dv 6xe(.i'=lxoiev av.
But in the recta they would say : edv rijj.iv irpocryevrjTat . . .
eôfiev.
ovBels dvTeiTre 810 to fii] dvacr)(êa-9aL dv Tr)v €KKX.rf(riav.

Xen. An. i. 4. 20.
No one contradicted, because the assembly would not have

permitted it.
el avTeiTre — ovk dv qve(r\eTO rj eKKXrja-ia.
dAA' et Treiravrai, Kapr dv evTvy;eiV SokQ SoPII. Ai, 263.

Nay, if he hath ceased, methinhs all may be v:eU.
tvTvxoiTfj dv an Optative of inference.

SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE ON 'Eav AND Y.I. 227
§ 205. Examples of Participle in Apodosis with av.

atret êiovs koI fiurOov ws ourcos ~eptyevo/ji€vos av twv
avrunacTLoyTiav. XeX. ^«. L 10.
He asked for mercenaries and pay, representing that thus he
would get the letter of his opponents.
ouToj -eptyei'OiTo av, but as it is in Historical (Virtual) ohliqua

the original recta would he kav Se^w/xat ^kvovs —ovrw -ep^
yevj^croyuat.
6p<^\' TO —apaT€i\i(TiJ.a, el e~LKpa-qcr€te ti?. paSitas av Xrjcf^Sev.

Thuc. vii. 42.
Seeing that the ci-oss-waU, if any one carried the heights,
woidd easily he captured.
=pa.Si(j}? av XYj(f)9€Lr]. Xote the Participle after 6pwv, a verb

of Perception.
w iravra
roA/xoIi', Kairo ~avTos av cf)€p(av
koyov SiKaiov p.-qyâvqp.a — oiKiAov. SoPH. 0. C. 761.
Bold wretch, who out of every cause wouldst bring
Shifty device of righteous argument.
<f>€p(ov = OS (j>epots av (et Kaipuv Aa/3ots).
§ 206. Supplementary Note on idv with the Sub-

junctive, and el with the Optative.
'Eav with the Subjunctive the ordinary form for stating

is
a supposition in future time. By the term ordinary it is not

meant that this form occurs oftener than et with the Optative,
but that if, for instance, we had to say, '' If it is fine to-morrow,
we will go for a walk;" we should naturally translate this by
idv with the Subjunctive. That is to say, iav ravra yei'rj-ai
means if this shall happen. Modem English renders it difficult
for us to grasp this very simple explanation, because we
equally render el ravra ytyvera-t and iay ravra yevrjrai by if
this happens. Et ravra yiyve-ai should correctly be translated
if this is {now) happening, and eav ratTa yevq-ai, if this shall
happen. So in the instance first given we ought strictly to
say ^^ If it shall he fine to-morrow.'' In older EngKsh it would
have been "?/ he fine to-morrou;" which is
(t anr'^xact
parallel to with the Subjunctive.
lav The difficulty is
aggravated by not bearing in mind that the Apodosis is the
228 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
Principal Sentence, and, as such, sets the time of the whole

Compound Conditional Sentence. 'Eav with the Subjunctive
(in ordinary particular conditions) is regularly accompanied
by an Apodosis in the Future Indicative, e.g. ravTa Troirjo-o}
edv Tt So;, / ^cill do this if it is necessary; eav xt Serj thus
refers to the future.
Et Avith the Optative also refers to the future. Et ravra
yevotTo means if this should happen, as opposed to kb.v ravra
yevrjTai, if this shall happen. AJl scholars now seem agreed
that the diflTerence between lav with Subjunctive and et
with Optative is the same as that between if I shall and
if I should in English.
In opposition to long-received explanations Professor
Goodwin has shown in a series of papers (see especially
Journal of Fhilologij, Vol. v. No. 10, and Vol. viii. No. 15)
that lav with Subjunctive and el with Optative are inter-
changeable expressions, alternating sometimes in the same
paragraph, and when referring to the same condition. There
can thus be no fundamental distinction between them, nor, we
must add, between them and el with the Future Indicative.
All these are variant expressions for a future condition.
The most generally received theory hitherto of lav with
Subjunctive has been that of Buttmann, according to which it
denotes " an uncertain but possible case with the prospect of
speedy decision." Professor Goodwin pertinently asks how
we should turn into Greek the proverb, " If the sky falls, we
shall catch larks." Of course by lav with the Subjunctive.
But what is the " prospect of speedy decision " here ? Further
he asks whether Demosthenes {Phil. i. p. 43, § 11) implies
any nearer prospect of decision about Philip's death when he
first refers to it in the words av oStos ti TrdOrj, than in the
very next sentence, when he says et n Trddoi. Again, lav with
Subjunctive has been stated (by Dr. Donaldson and others) to
denote "uncertainty with some small amount of probability."
This theory, however, is destroyed by such conditions as the
following, all with lav and Subjunctive. In Plat. Crito, 50,
of the laics speaking to Sokrates. In Euthyd. 299, of a man
swallowing a cartload of hellebore. In Rep. 612, of the soul
wearing the ring of G-yges. In EuR. Phoen. 1216, and Orest.
1593, of a human being flying on ivings to the aether.
How then do these three Future Conditions differ 1 'Eav with
the Subjunctive gives a vivid and distinct representation of
ON 'Eai; AND Et. 229
a supposition in the future. Ei with the Future Indicative is
more vivid still a condition is brought home as of imminent

;
and immediate interest. E^ with the Optative, on the other

hand, conjures up a future supposition less graphic, vivid, and
life-like, a supposition less distinctly conceived, more faintly
sketched, a supposition of less immediate concern, one which
moves the mind with a more languid interest. We may com-
pare the three forms to three sketches or pictures differing in
greater or less distinctness of outline. Or we may say that d
with the Future Indicative moves the mind with the immedi-
ate interest of the next hour or minute, lav and the Subjunc-
tive with the natural and lively interest of the morrow, et and
the Optative with the fainter and remoter interest of next
week. But the whole effect in each case is rhetorical, the
expression itself does not imply that the fact denoted in the
condition is to be decided, or that it is likely or unlikely ; it is
aU a question of realising a conception more or less vividly,
or, Mr. Monro in his Homeric Grammar puts it, the
as
depends on the tone assumed by the speaker.
diflPerence
When, therefore, is lav with the Subjunctive chosen rather
than €t with the Optative 1 Professor Goodwin shows that
there may be several reasons for choosing the more vivid ex-
pression. The following instances are most instructive.
1. The speaker may have an actual case present to his mind.
In Eep. vi. 494, Sokrates is thinking of Alkibiades ; in Eep.
viL 517, of himself. In both cases idv Avith the Subjunctive
is the form employed.
2. The speaker may be dreading the fulfilment of his supposition.
Deji. Aphoh. i. 67 (p. 834), an adverse vote is referred to in

these terms, lav airo^vyrj fie ovTOS, 6 fxrj yevocTO.
3. The speaker may bean improbable and ridi-
treating
culous supposition uith Plat. Eep. x. 610 a, of
scorn.
bodily depravity causing mental depravity (lav fxi] ifnTOLy —
TovTO ye ovSeis Trore Set|et) PlAT. GoJ-g. 470 C, of Polus con-
:
victing Sokrates of talking nonsense (lav fie lAly^ys),

There may be other reasons besides the above. Sometimes
lav with the Subjunctive seems to single out a supposition for
special emphasis sometimes an unfamiliar conception has been
:
introduced by et Avith the Optative, which, when we have

become familiarised with it, is expressed by lav with the Sub-
junctive. Or again, and this is a point worth further atten-
230 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE
tiou perhaps, different writers, from temperament or style,

have a habit of using one expression rather than another.
Thus Aeschylus very rarely uses k6.v vA\h the Subjunctive'
in an ordinary future supposition. He oftener uses d with
the Future Indicative thrice he uses d with the Subjunctive.
;
But his partiality for the Optative is remarkable. Thucy-

DIDES again often uses d with the Future Indicative.
In all the above cases (1) the time is future, (2) the picture
is designedly conceived and drawn in a lively graphic manner.
(3) In many cases such as the above k6.v with the Subjunctive
alternates with di and the Optative. Thus in the example
from Dem. Aflioh. the same condition is alluded to later on
(ii. § 18, p. 841) by the words di j^7;<^tcrato-ê, then three lines
further on by eav 6(}>Xo}fj.€r, and yet again (§ 21, p. 842) by el

yvuxrecrOe. Similarly in Plat. JRej). 517 A, where Sokrates is
referring to himself, the Optative is used.
The inferences from the above premises are inevitable.
(1) lav with the Subjunctive, and d with the Optative,
both refer to futui'e time.
(2) Theyare interchangeable, differing only in greater
or less clearness of conception and vividness of
expression,
(3) As expressions they can in themselves imply no
opinion of the writer that the fact denoted hj the
condition is more or less likely to occur, the one
and only thing stated being the dependence of the
consequence upon the condition.
The interchangeability of the Subjunctive and Optative is
one of the regular and most characteristic features of Greek
Syntax. Wefind it constantly in Indirect Statements and
Questions, and throughout the Oratio Obliqua, in Temporal,
Final Sentences, in Sentences with ottws. In all these
cases we do not hesitate to accept the explanation that one
expression is more or less dii-ect and vivid than the other, and
that the two varieties are interchangeable. Conditional
Sentences do not stand apart by themselves they follow :
the principles which rule Greek Syntax.

Two points may be added :
1. If it is asked whether the writer may not hold an

opinion that the fact denoted is more or less probable, we
may reply that of course he may, and that holding such an
opinion he may choose one form of expression rather than
ON 'Edi; AND El. 231
another. But this covers only some instances and not alL
Probability cannot be made the basis of a division, since the
fact denoted varies from what is in itself natural and probable
to what is physically impossible.
(2) The notion of future time is sometimes very indistinctly
marked by d with the Optative, the faintness of the con-
ception being the chief effect intended in such cases. Still d
TavTa ovTws d-q cannot (as sometimes in Homer) be past, ?/
tins had been so ; it cannot be translated, if it loere iww so ; it
can only be rendered, if this were to he so, icere so, should be so.
The Apodosis also must always be examined in connexion
with the Protasis.
—
CHAPTEE III.
§ 207. TEMPOEAL SENTENCES.

Temporal Sentences are constantly expressed in Greek
by Participles in agreement with the Subject, by the
Genitive Absolute, and by the Accusative Absolute.
"When the time of the Temporal Sentence is definite the

Indicative is used ; when indefinite the Subjunctive and
Optative.-^ This is the one clew to the use of the moods
in Temporal Sentences.
See § 172, Definite and Indefinite Sentences.
Time is iiulcfinite in three ways :
1. Indefinite Futurity, i.e. when the action will

occur in the indefinite future.
2. Indefinite Frequency, i.e. when the action may

recur an indefinite number of times.
3. Indefinite Duration, i.e. when the action may
continue for an indefinite period.
AU Temporal Sentences in the Subjunctive and Opta-

tive wiU fall under one of the above three heads, the first,
^ This principle of Indefinite Time may be most usefully applied to
the Latin Subjunctive as opposed to the Indicative, e.g. —

Donee labantes consilio patres_^?'mcire^ (Hok. ). Indefinite Futurity.
Opperire quoad scire possis quod tibi agendum sit. Indefinite
Futurity.
Dum Priami Paridisque busto insultet armentum. Indefinite Duration.
It is usual to explain many such sentences in Latin (and in Greek)
by saying that they express a purpose. So they do, but this is not con-
tained in the Temporal Particle and its Sentence, but in the nature of
the principal verb combined with the iudefiniteness of time in view. So
probably with Temporal Sentences which are described as Conditional
{dum).
Indefinite Frequency is so differently treated by Latin writers that
it is not touched on here.
232
« WHEN" IN DEFINITE TIME {PAST). 233
ludefiuite Futurity, being the commonest, and the third,

Indefinite Duration, being the rarest. j\Iore than one
kind of Indefiniteness may be denoted by the same
expression.
The Subjunctive is used in Primary, the Optative in

Historic sequence, though, as in other Sentences, the Sub-
junctive occurs in Historic sequence, and sometimes is
co-ordinate with the Optative.
A Temporal Particle with the Subjunctive takes av

{irplv av, eco? av, eireiSav, brav, etc. etc.).
Thus 60)9 av 'yevrjTaL.
A Temporal Particle with the Optative drops the a^

{irplv, 60)9, eTTCt^Tj, ore, etc. etc.).
e&)9 yevoLTO.
For the omission of ai^ in Subjunctive clauses see § 221.
For the retention of av with the Optative see § 222.
§ 208. " WHEN'' IN DEFINITE TIME {PAST).
I. eTret, eVetSrj {ip'iKa less common), when, after, with

Indicative Aorist (an action prior to principal sentence),
Indicative Imperfect (contemporary with principal
sentence).
Latin : cum with Pluperfect and Imperfect Subjunc-

tive, postquam with Indicative.
eTreiOTj oe OMyap')(^ca eyeveTo, oc TpiuKovra /LcereTre/u,-
yjravTo /xe. Plat.

Wlien an oligarchy had been established, the Thirty
sent for rue.
Cum vero paucorum dominatio constituta esset,

Tri"inta illi me arcessiverunt.
234 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
CTree rjadeveL Aapeio^, eôvXero oc T(o TralBe afjuôrepo)

irapelvaL. Xex. A71.
WJien Darius vjas ill, lie wished hotli his sons to

appear he/ore him.
Darius, cum moreretur, filios ambo ad se venire
volebat.
For i)vlKa see Plat. Apol. xxxi., Soph. El. 32, 423, Ai. 272.
Note, ore, " when," cannot introduce a clause in Attic Greek

like €-ei, e-etS>/. Being a relative it must be connected with
some sort of antecedent, though, like all relative sentences,
the clause in which it stands may come first, rore is its strict
antecedent.
rfv TTore )(povos, ore Beol fxiv ^crav, 6vr]~a 8e yevrj ovk ^crav.
Plat. Prat.
There ivas a time once when the gods were in existence, but
tchen the races of mortal creatures icere not.
ore p-i. ot a/3)(0VT€S eVarTOv, ron ov exeivot era-TOV efJLevov.
Plat. Apol.
When the rulers were assigning me a post, then, I remained ai
the post which they assigned me.
§209. ''AS SOON AS,'' "DIRECTLY;' IN DE-

FINITE TIME.
Êirei, eireihri take Td-)(î(xra when they mean directly,
immediately, as soon as, no sooner — than.

(a? (Latin ut) has the same meaning even without
Ta'îara, but more markedly with rd'^îara.
[Latin : vM, libi pririmi.m ; ut, ut primum ; simul, simid
ac (atque) ; postquam ; with the perfect indicative.]
(B9 rayjarra eto? vireâtvev, eOvovro. Xen.

As soon as day began to dawn, they set about taking
the auspices.
" WHENEVER,'' ETC., IN INDEFINITE TIME. 235
OL TpLuKovra iipedrjcrav eiret Ta)(iaTa ra Tei-^r}
Kudripidii. Xen.
The Thirty were ap'ôinted directly the v:alls were
rased.
In poetry oTrtos has this sense. Cf. Aesch, Pers. 200, Sopa
El. 736, 749, ottws 6pa (present indicative) ut vidit. For ws
(often with ^vdis, eidew^) see Aesch. Fers. 363, Akist. lien.
504.
§ 210. " whenever:' "AS OFTEN AS," IN IN-

DEFINITE TIME.
The same particles, eVe/, eTretSri, rjviKa, ore, and also
OTToVe, denoting Indefinite Futurity, or Indefinite Fre-
quency, take the Subjunctive and Optative.
[Latin : usually a Temporal Conjunction with Future
Perfect Indicative. But for Frequentative Sentences see
the caution given § 207, footnote.]
A. AVith Subjunctive in Primary sequence, eireiSdv,

brav, oTTorav {tjvik av, iirriv and eirdv rarer).
N.B. — ws civ is said never to be Temporal, but see Soph.
Phil. 1330, Ai. 1117, "with Jebb's note on the latter passage.
eireiBav Be BiaTrpa^co/xai, a Beofiai, rj^co. Xen. An.
When I have (shall have) accomplished, my object I
will return. (Indefinite Futurity.)
Cum vero confecero quod in animo est, redibo.
ovKovv, OTOOJ Bt] fir) adevco, ireiTavcrofJbai. SoPH. Ant. 91.

So, when my jpoiccr shall fail, I will give o'er.
(Indefinite Futurity.)
avTTj 1] (fxovrj, orav y€V7)Tai,aec aTroTpeirei [le. Plat.

Tliis inicard voice, wJienever it comes, ever checks me.
(Indefinite Frequency.)
fiaivo/ieda iravre^, ottotuv opyi^to/xeda. PHILEMON.

We are madmen all, vShenever we are angry.
(Indefinite Frequency.)
Note. For orav (Indefinite Futurity) Soph. El. 386, 1038,

(Indefinite Frequency) Plat. Apol. xvi., xxiii., Soph. El. 267,
293, Aesch. Pers. 602. oTrdrav (Indefinite Futurity) SoPH.
Phil. 146. All these particles may often be rendered, as soon
as, ivhen once, but the time is still indefinite in the Future.
oTTorav (Indefinite Frequency) Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 26, al. ojtov
ai') : eVetSav (Frequency) Plat. Apol xxxii.
For eSre av, poetical, SoPH. El. 627.
"With the Subjunctive expressing Indefinite Frequency com-

pare idv (7)1') with Subjunctive in General Suppositions.
B. ^Yith Optative in Historic Sequence, eireL, eireiB-q,
oTTore {ore very rarely).
oi ovoi, eiret Ti9 olwkol, 7rpoopafjiovTe<i av eicrrriKeaav.

Xen.
TJie asses, ivhenever any one cliasecl tJiem, would gallop
ahead and then halt. (Indefinite Frequency.)
OTTOT ev irpaaaoi iroM^

e'âtpe, \v7rpco<; 8' kêpev, eu rt SvaTvôt.
EUE. Supp. 897.
Whenêr the state fared well,
He would rejoice, and mourn if aught it suffered.
oTTOTc is =ei -6-€, as much conditional as temporal. See
Plat. Apol. xxxii., ottotc kvTv-ôip.i XlaAa/iv^Set. In Thug, l
99 a good instance.
Note. IttciStJ, ottotc with the Optative appear always
cTrei,
to denote Frequency rather than Futurity, except when they

represent an t-qv, tretSav, oTrdrav, orav tui'ned from Primary
to Historic sequence.
Comj)are €i with Optative in General Suppositions.
§211. " SINCE " IN DEFINITE TIME.

e| ov {ex quo with Indicative), since, ever since, Id
Definite Time with Indicative.
« WHILST'' IN INDEFINITE TIME. 237
e| ov ra êviKa urpareveraL, rov^ (piKovi vlkS,.
i)EM.
Ever since 'inercenaries have been serving, he has been
conquering his friends.
e^ o5t€Aesch. Pers. 761, for ws (like id in Latin) Thuc. iv.

90 (Poppo), 6^ wv, d<^' ov are also used.
For ut in Latia cf. Ov. Trlst. v. 10. 1, ut sumus in Ponto, etc.
This may be expressed participially in the Dative, see § 1 1 8,

*
note.
§ 212. " WHILST" IN DEFINITE TIME.

'
E(o<i, ecne, ev o), ev oaa>, ocrov y^povov, rjvtKa (rarely
fiexpi), whilst, denoting Definite Duration with Indicative.
[Latin : dum, donee, guamdiu, quoad with Indicative.]
sJ 6G)9 en veo<i eifii, rrjv tû^tji/ 'yvfiva^co.
t^ While I am still young, I train my mind.

paBio)^ ra emrriSeta eôfiev, baov ')(povov ev tt]
TToXefjLia ea-Q/jLeda.
We shall easily find, supplies so long as {during all

the time that) we are in the enemies' country.
avt]p eKeLvo<;, 't]VLK rjv ev tt) voaui,

avTO<i [lev rjheTO. SoPH. At. 271.
Yon chief, so long as he was set i' the plague,
Himself icas happy.
Donee morbo versabatur.
ecrre with past tense, Xen. An. iii. 1. 19.
6(i)s eêcTTiv [dum licet), Plat. Apol. xxxL ewslA-is^)v (past

tense) dum spes erat, Tnrc. viii. 40. fj-^xPh Thuc. iii. 10. 2.
§ 213. " WHILST'' IN INDEFINITE TIME.

The same particles denoting Indefinite Duration take
A. Subjunctive in Primary sequence with av.
eoiCTTrep av efxTTveo), ov /j,r) iravacofiai (fiL\oao(f)Mv.

Plat.
Just so long as I breathe, I never will give up
pliilosophy.
Dum spiiabo baud desinaiii philosophari.
Cf. Aesch. ^^. 1435.

B. Optative in Historic Sequence, without av.
<f>-^cro/x€v [j.i]8e7roT' av [xel^v yevecrâi, etos Lcrov etr] airro
eauTw. Ptat. TJieaet. 155 A.
JFe sludl admit tliat it never would become eitlier greater or
less, so long as it should remain equal to itself.
[Latin : dum, donee, quamdiu, qux)ad, with Future In-

dicative, or, when purpose is connoted, Subjunctive.]
§ 214. " UNTIL " IN DEFINITE TIME.

e&>9, ecTTe, ii^^xpi,
^XP'' O^^XP'' °^' ^XP'' °^)'
'^^^*^> denot-
ing Definite Time with Indicative.
evre poetical, ixi'^pt';, u'^pL'i before a vowel in later writers.
[Latin : donee, quoad, with past Indicative.]
•^ ravra eiroiovv, l^&XP^ ctkoto^ eyevero. Xen.

This they were doing until darkness came on.
quoad or donee nox oppressit.
Cf. Thuc. i. 109, iv. 4, /ie'pî/Oi ov and îxpi.
Tratovat rov ^corrjpiSriv, eare rivajKacrav TTopeveaOau

Xen.
They heat Soterides till they compelled him to move on.
quoad progredi coegerunt.
Cf. Soph. Ant. 415.
kytapovv Sta Twv StKeAwi', ecos o.(f)'LKOvTo es Karavr^v.
Thuc. vi. 62. 3.
They marched through the country of the Sicels, till they came
to Catane.
" UNTIL " IN INDEFINITE TIME. 239
TTaioi'cri, KpeoKOTTOva-t Svcttti^vwv fteAry,

ecus (XTravTWV iâTre<f>dei[iav (3tov. AeSCH. Pers. 466.
They hack, hew mincemeal the pom' wretches' limbs,
Till they had crushed outright the lives of all.
kiruT^biV av, ecus 01 7rAeto"Toi t(3v iiwdoTcav yvwfirjv dTr€<J3rj-
vavTO, K.T.X., r^crv^îiav av Vjyov. DeM. Phil. i. 1.
I should have waited until most of the regular speakers had

expressed their views, and have been keeping quiet.
In this example the Indicative denotes Indefinite

Futurity thrown back into the past, and consequently
now Indefinite only to the original thought of the chief
subject. This is parallel with a Final Sentence in the
Indicative (see Index).
§ 215. " UNTIL" IN INDEFINITE TIME.

The same Particles, denoting Indefinite Futurity, take
A. Subjunctive in Primary Sequence.
fJ'€')(^pi,
8' av eyo) rjKO), al aTTOvSal fjuevovrcov. XeN.
Until I return, let the armistice continue.
eincrye'i ecrr av Kat ra Xonra irpafiaOrj';. AesCH.

Pavê till tliou further learn whit yet remains.
dvdyKTj TttOTtt aei Trapi^îv, eus av \(j)pav Xd(3rj.
Xen. Cyr. iv. 0. 37.
It is necessary to furnish continually the same things until he
(shall) take the country.
€ut' du Aesch. Pers. 366.
B. Optative in Historic Sequence.

TrepiefMevo/xev eKaarore, eco? avoL'Ôen} to Seafiwrripiov.
Plat.
We used to wait about on each occasion, until the
prison was {should he) opened.
Tnpufxevojxiv is Frequentative, but ews dvoixOeirj exi^resses

Indefinite Futurity, and expresses indirectly the thought of
the chief subject.
airovha'i eTroirjcravTO ew? airayyeXOeir) to. \e)(6evTa.

Xen.
They made an armistice (to last) till the terms were
{should he) announced.
Here again the thought of the chief subject is clearly seen.

Their original words would be o-TrovSas iroiov[xeda ews av
dirayyeXdij. The moods in the two last examples are thus
due to Oratio Obliqua.
Note. It may be generally laid down that ew?, etc., with the
Subjunctive and Optative after Affirmative Sentences corre-
spond to TT/Div with the same moods after Negative Sentences,
ews, etc., do occur, but very exceptionally, after Negative
Sentences.
ovK avafj-kvofi^v, ews av -q rj[j,€Tepa X'^P^ KaKiorai.
Xen. Cijr. iii. 3. 18.
JVe do not remain until our country is being ravaged.
When Trptv is used with any finite mood the action of its
verb will not begin until the action of Trptv with the principal
verb has occurred. The difference here consists in the mean-
ing of the verb dvanho}, to continue.
§ 2l6. TJI£ CONJUNCTION Upiv.
Tlptv with the Indicative, Subjunctive and Optative is

used after Negative Sentences w^here ew?, eare, /jicxpt) etc.,
are used after Affirmative Sentences.
IIplv rj is used like irpiv. irporepov, irpocrOev, irapo^,
another nrplv (used as an adverb), frequently are used in
the Principal Sentence as forerunners of irplv.
Upiv differs from other Temporal Particles only in
being joined to an Infinitive as well as to other moods.
The following table will show the ordinary Attic usage.
Exceptions are given subsequently.
A. Aftei Affirmative Prin- ) irplv with the Infinitive.

| irplv
cipal Sentences.
Upiv WITH THE INFINITIVE. 241
When the Time is De-

finite, irplv with the
Indicative.
B. After Negative Principal J 2. When the Time is Inde-

Sentences. "j
finite (Indefinite Fu-
turity), irp'tv with the
Subjunctive and Op-
tative.
The order in time of the Principal and Subordinate

Sentences in Tvplv clauses should be noticed. (1) When
trplv is used with the Infinitive, the action of the Prin-
cipal Sentence takes place before that of the Subordinate
Sentence (the irplv clause). (2) When irplv is used with
a Finite Mood (Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative) the
action of the Principal Sentence had to wait (in the past),
or has to wait (in the future) for the decisive occurrence
of the Tvpiv clause.
§ 217. n/9tV WITH THE INFINITIVE.

A. The Principal action takes place before the Sub-
ordinate action with Trpiv. Upiv with Infinitive always
means hefore. The Infinitive in itself denotes the mere
verbal notion rather than a distinct fact, like the English
gerundive in -ing (before coming, going, speaking). But
the fact is often implied. Cf ware with Infinitive.
irpLV fxev TTetvrjv €<j6cet<;, irplv Be 8f\lnjv irivea.

You eat he/ore being hungry, you drink hefore being
thirsty.
CTrefiylre irpiv ev Teyea avTo<; elvai. Xen.

He sent before he loas himself in Tegea.
Observe the Nominative attraction.
Q
24.2 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
Trplv yev^crOaL 7}/i,as ^v rjfiujv r) ^vî]. PlAT. FJuied. 77.

Before we were created our soul was in existence.
•qfjiils M.e<Tcr'i'fV/]v eiXofiev Trpiv Ilepo-as Xa.fjîv rijV (3axn\€Lav,

Isoc. Archid. 26.
JVe conquered Messene lefore the Persians took tJie kingdom.
ev Tw irplv yevecrdai ij/xas xpowf). PlAT. Phaed. 88.
In the days before we were horn.
*1
§ 2l8. Uptv WITH THE INDICATIVE IN

DEFINITE TIME {FAST).
B 1- Ilpiv with Aorist Indicative. (The Historic
present occurs in Thtjc. i 132, irpiv '^/iyverai,.)
Ilpiv may equally be rendered lefore, until.
Oi AaKeSaL/xovcot ov nrporepov eiravaavTo irpiv Mecr-

a-7)VL0V(i eêâSjov €K
X^P^'*' IsaEUS 12.
t?)9
The Lacedaemonians did not leave off until {before)

tliey had expelled the Messenians (and then they
did leave off).
ov irpocrdev eêveyxeii' erokp-qcrai' Trpos '/}/xas voXepov Trpiv

Tovs CTTpaT/^yors rjpwv crweAa/3ov. XeN. An. iiL 2. 29.
They did not dare to make war on us until (before) they seized
our generals.
See Aesch. P. V. 481.
In ISOCR. Panegyr. 19, Trpiv iBiBaâv where ~piv oiBdêiav
would be expected.
§ 219. UpCv WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND

OPTATIVE IN INDEFINITE TIME.
B 2. Tlpiv av with Subjunctive in Primary Sequence,
after Negative Sentences, denotes Indefinite Futurity.
ou yjpr] fi€ uTreXdelv wpiv av Bco Blkijv.

Xen. An. V. 7. 5.
/ miist not depart before I suffer ]punishmcnt.

Upiu WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 243
Cf. also Aesch. p. F. 165, Eur. Heracl. 179.

ovK, airoKptvoviJLav irporepov irplv av 7rv6cofiai. Plat.
/ will not answer before {until) I hear.
irptv alone with Optative may be described as irplv
av with Subjunctive converted into Historic Sequence by
Oratio Obbqua, actual or virtual.
aTTTjyopeve fji7]8eva âXkeiv, irplv Kvpo<; e/Jb7rXr}a6eir]

drjpcov. Xex. Cyr. i. 4. 14.
He forlade every one to shoot until Cyrus luid had

{should have ha£) his fill of the chase.
The recta would be fir)8els âAAerw irplv av kpTrXrjcrOrj.
€Trei\eipow eKaarov inideLv pi) ~poTepov rwv kavrov fxqSevo?

(TTLfieXucrdatj TvpXv kavTOv kiripiXqdeLrj.
Plat. Apol. xxvL
/ used to try to permade each one not to care forany of the
things helonging to himself before caring for himself.
TIpiv is also used after another Optative (see Oratio

Obliqua, Assimilation of Optatives).
oXoLO /XTyTTO) irplv paOoLp! ei Kai ttoKlv

fyvap^riv pLeroicreLf;. SoPH. Phil. 961.
Perish not ere I learn if yet again
Thou wilt repent thy purpose.
§ 220. Tiplv with the Infinitive after Negative

Sentences, and with the other Moods after
Affirmative Sentences.
As stated above, the general Attic rule is that Trpiv with
Infinitive follows Affirmative Sentences. But the rule isnot
without exceptions. In Homer Trpiv with Infinitive regularly
follows either Affirmative or Negative sentences. In the
Attic poets it very rarely follows a Negative. In Attic prose,
however, several instances occur of -npiv with Infinitive after
a Negative.
— :
Instances in the Attic poets occur in Aesch. Ag. 1067,

Soph. Ai. 1418, Eur. H. F. 605, and Apjst. Av. 964.
In Thug, some cases occur (i. 68, i 39) in both of which
the ov belongs rather to the Infinitive than to the principal
verb ; in V. 10 the Negative belongs to the principal verb
clearly. In all these three cases the abstract verbal notion
rather than the fact is stated, e.g. v. 10, Trpiv tov? fSorjdov?
before the arrival of Ids allies.
)"}K€iv, But in viL 50 tt/diV with
the Infinitive is found after a Negative where we should
certainly look for an Optative, occurring as it does in the
reported words of Xikias.
ovS' av SiaôuAcvtracrâi en ^<f>y], ~piv k.t.A., rpts evvea

rjfxkpa^ fiiivaij o— (u; av Trporepov KivrjOetrj,
He declared that he zvouJd not even consider the malcing of a
move until he had waited thrice nine days.
Recta, ov8' av Sia/SovXevcraiiJLrjv —plv /xeivai (for Trplv fietvat/Mi

or 77/3 tv av /i€tvw).
Cf. also AisTiPH. Herod. 25, Andok 3Iyst. 43.
IIpu', Avith a Finite Mood (Indicative, Subjunctive, Opta-

tive), isfound when the Principal Sentence is afiirmative in
form, but virtually negative.
a(f)po)v v€os T i;v, Trpiv ra —pdy/xaT eyyvdev

CTKO-wv eseiôv, k. t. A. EUR. I. A. 489.
where acfipoiv =ôvk îx(f>p(av.
Similarly in Thuc. i. 118. 2, ot're IkwAvov, dAA' rjo-vxp-ôv

~plv St) 7) Twv 'AOqvaiwv yp^ro, where, besides the true
Si'va^ts
negative ovre iKwXvov, rjcrvxo-ôv means, they did not bestir them-
selves. See also Thuc. iii. 29, Aav^dvot'o-t Trptv: viii. 105,
eipyov TTptv. But in Thuc. vii. 71. 4, Trpiv with the Indica-
tive occurs after a principal sentence truly afiirmative
napa~\rj(jLa I— a(rôv, Trpiv ye S?/ ot ^vpaKocnoi erpexj/av rovs
same state of excitement, until at last
'A^Tjvaious, they icere in the
theSyracusans routed the Athenians (ea-re 8q might have been
expected). With the Subjunctive and Optative Trpiv is verj^
rarely found even after quasi-negative sentences :
Tts av SiKrjv Kpivkuv rj yvotq Aoyov,

TT/Dtv dv Trap u/x<ôtv fMvdov eKp-ddrj (ra(f>C}i ; EUR. Heroc. 179.
Ti's av, however, is almost a real negative.
: :
"Kv OMITTED WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 245
al(r)(pbv rfyovfjiai irpoTepov Travcra(rOat irpiv uv v/xeis, oVi av

/3ovXr](T6€, xpr](fiLa-r](r6e. LyS. 22. 4.
Here al(T\p6v is a virtually negative word, as its use before

p.!) ov with au luiinitive shows. (See Negatives.)
Tlplv r/, —porepov i], Trpocrdev -q, vcTTepov ?)', are USed like Trplv
with an Infinitive.
Tov MrjSov avTOt t(rp.^v irporepov kXOovTa rj to. Trap' vp.MV

Trpoa-iraVTrja-ai. ThUC. i 601 (and vi. 58).
For vcrrepov 1) oivjcrat see vi. 4.
§ 221. "Av omitted with the Subjunctive, in Tem-

poral and other Subordinate Sentences.
Insentences with the Subjunctive (Indefinite Eelative,
all
Conditional, Temporal), av is sometimes not used even in
Attic prose and poetry. It seems quite a mistake to say
that av is omitted. It is much more rational to treat this
construction (like that of the Optative Avithout av), as a
survival of the older usage, so constantly found in Homer,
Avhen the mood might or might not at pleasure be modified
by the adverb av. Instances of all the constructions are here
given, but it must be remembered that they are all excep-
tional constructions in Attic, except, perhaps, in the case of
the Temporal Particles.
Indefinite Relative —
yepovra 8' opdovv (f)Xavpov os veos Trecry. SoPH. 0. C. 595.
€in)((optov 6v rijxlv ov p,€v /S'pa^êts dpKwcrL /xt) ttoAAois
xpyja-dat A07065. Thuc. iv. 17.
Cf. Soph. EL 771, 225, 1059; Ai. 496; Ant. 323.
Conditionxil —
{d with Subjunctive common in Homer,
Pindar, several in Herodotus).
SucTTctAatva Tap' kyw,

d (TOV CTTepqOw. SoPH. 0. C. 1441.
Cf. 509, Antig. 710, 0. T. 198 (Chorus).
Once inThuc. vi. 21, £6 ^vo-Two-tv at iroAets, according to
the best MSS. See Kriiger and Poppo.
:
Temporal —
TTpLv fxi] Trporepov aTroKTivvvvai Setv tt/div dvdyKrjv riva 6
debs e-L-efjupij. Plat. Plmedo, vi.
/Lf)) (TTkvO.^'e TTplv p.d6lJS.
Soph. Phil 917, Aniig. 619 (Chorus).
p-^XP''
'''"'' f'ôi'Scis ea-Tretcrdai, ji^xpi ov iTraveXOcoa-iv.
Thug. iv. 16 (also iv. 41 and i. 137), Soph. Ai 571.
eojs ews TO )(ai/D€tv Kat to Xv—elcrOac fiddy;.
Soph. iJ/. 555 {Pkil 764).
e/ret e-€t S' dpidpTrj, k.t.A. SoPH. ^n#. 1025.
With these Temporal Particles av is commonly used in prose,
but is fairly often omitted.
it They seem in themselves
sufficient to mark the indefiniteness of future time without
the addition of av.
§ 222. "Av retained with the Optative.

In a few places av found
^vith a Relative and Opta,tive,
is
and Avith a Temporal and the Optative, almost as if
particle
the "writer iu changing from the Subjunctive had forgotten to
drop the av. iXoyi^6p.ip' ei -avra TrpoOvp.os trot (rvXXd/3oi[xt,
o)? otKCtos re crot lcroiiJir]v, /cat e^ktroiTO fioi SiaXiyecrdaL croi o—6crov
av xpo'vov l3ovXotp.-i]v, Xen. Cyr. \T.i. 5. 49. Here either
oTTocrov av f3ovX(oixai OV oTrocrov ySovAoi'/ijyv would have been
expected. Cf. Xen. Ap. i. 2. 6, Trap' Sv av Xdfôiev. So
ovSels ocTTts ovx rjyetro Slki]v p.e XiîJ/ecrdaL Trapd twv eTTLTpoTrcav,
e— etSav Ta^to^Ta dvi]p eivai ÔKip.aa-de'i'qv, DeM. Olict. \. 865. 24.
Cf. Soph. Tr. 687, ews av dpixoa-aLjxi..
§ 223. The Subjunctive instead of the Optative,

or co-ordinate with the Optative in Historic
Sequence.
e/SovXevcrav Secr/iois avTovs (jivXdcrcretv p.k\pL oS rt ^vfi^da-i.
Thug. iv. 41.
They decided to keep them in prison till some arrangement
was come to.
Observe that av is omitted with the Subjunctive, for p-expi- ov
Tt ^vfjLJSauv. Cf. i. 91, Trplv d'v Subjunctive after Historic time.
THE PARTICIPLE AS A TEMPORAL SENTENCE. 247
Trapr/yyetXav CTreiov) SetTrvz/cretai/ Travras dvairavia-dai, Kal

eTTea-dai -ijViK d'v Tts TrapayyeXXrj. XeN. An. iii. 5. 18.
77ie?/ iss2ie(^ orders for all to rest as soon as they had dined,
and then to follow lohenever any one issued orders.
This principle of the return to the Primary Sequence is so
common in Greek that it requires no further explanation here.
§ 224. The Participle as a Substitute for a

Temporal Sentence.
The a regular substitute for a sentence ex-
Participle is
pressed by eTret,i^vtKa with Imperfect and Aorist
e-etSiy,
Indicative, but is used still more freely, for it is joined to
Present and Future Time, whei'eas these Particles go with a
past Principal Verb.
1. The Present Participle denotes an action contem-

porary with that of the Principal Verb.
a-ixa and fiera^v with the Participle bring out more
clearly the contemporary time.
a7rr]VTrj(Ta ^ckLTnrqy airiovrt.

I met Philip as he vjas going away.
ajxa irpoioiv eTrea-KOireiro. XeN.
As he was going forward he,was considering.
TO Tov deov (T7)/j,ecov iroXkajôv hr\ fxe eirecr'ê Xeyovra
jjuera^v. Plat. Apol. xxxi.
The sign of the god very often has checked me in the
—
midst of my talk {xohile I have teen speaking —
while the words were on my lips).
€Tre<Txe is here a gnomic aorist.
2. The Aorist Participle denotes an action prior^ to

that of the Principal Verb.
The Perfect Participle would express a completed state
before the action of the Principal Verb.
* Never forgetting that the Aorist Participle does not always denote
an action prior to that of the principal Verb. See Participles. Where

the Aorist Participle denotes a contemporary action it expresses Cir-
cumstance, not Time.
\
t6t€, Tore ijSt], elra, eirei.Ta, TrjvtKavra, outo)? often

accompany the Principal Verb, evdv^ with the Participle
is like Tayia-Ta with a Conjunction.
Tvpavv£vaa<; errj Tpca liT'ma'i c'^wpec e? 2it<y€iov.
Thuc.
After ruling three years (when he had ruled),
Hippias retired to Sigeum, or he ruled and then
retired.
eKeXevcre ovv htaâvra top EXkricnroviov eirenu

aTraWdTTea-dat. Xen. An. vii. 1.
He indticed him to accompany him over the Helles-
pont, and then withdraw {after he had accompanied
him, to withdraw).
€vdv<i yevd/juepoi (primo ortu), immediately after hirth.
€vdv<i d7ro/3e^r]Kor6<;, directly they landed, no sooner

had they landed . . . than, etc.
CHAPTER IV.
§ 225. CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.

The chief Concessive Particle in Greek is Kai, with or
without the enclitic irep.
Concessive Sentences are most commonly expressed by

the Participle, especially with Kalirep (more rarely Kai
alone). The Negative is 01;. "Ofxoo'i (tamen) often
accompanies the Principal Verb.
rov KXecovo^, Kaiirep /j.avtco8r]^ ovaa, i] viroa'êaL^
direlSrj. ThUC.
Clemi's irromise, insane though it was, was fulfilled.
Cf. Soph. Ai. 122.
Tretdov jvvai^t, Kanrep ov crrepycoi' 0/^0)9. AeSCH.
Listen to icomen though thou liJcc them not.
The o/i&)9 belongs to ireiOov, though it often is drawn to

the Participle,
ovTo<i oierai rt etSevat ovk etSai?. Plat. Apol. vi.
Tliis man thinJcs he knoivs soraething though he Jcnows

nothing.
Kayo) a-' iKvorfxai, Kai yvvrj — ep over' ojJLOiS. EuR. Oi'est. 680.
/ too entreat thee, woman though I he.
Here Kai and Trep are separated, and o/Liws is dislocated from
its Verb.
Note 1. ov&k, ov8e Trep, prjSe, fxt^Se irep are also found with
Concessive Particles in Negative Concessive Sentences.
OVK av —poSoiqv, ovSe —ep —pdaraojv KaKUS. EUR.=-P/wew. 1624:.
I'd not betray, not even though in woe.
yvvaiKt irt'idov, prjSe TdXrjdrj kXvwi'. EuR. Hipp. Fr. 443.
Hearken to a icornan, even if thou hearest not the truth.
24i>
250 CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.
ov8' €1, ov8' edv, fxi]S' el, /tv^S' idv are used in Negative Con-
cessive sentences {ne — quidem).
fj-f] dopvjSrjcrrjTe, ft-qS' lav Sd^co ti ii/tiv /xeya A€y€6v.
Plat. Apol. v.
Do not interrupt, even if you shall think that I am speaking
presumptuously.
ovS' ci, Apol. xvii. 29.
eyo) n^v oSv ouk av ttot', ovS' et /y.ot to, era
fjiêXXoi Tis oto-eiv Siop' i(f)' oicrt vCv ÂtSa?,

TOVTOts VTretKaOoLfii. SoPH. ^/. 360.
Ne'er then would I, not e'en if one were like
To bring me those thy gifts, wherein thou now
Art glorying, submit to these.
Note Kat ravra, and that too, is also used with a participle,
2.
and also, but very seldom, Kairoi. For Kal ravra, Plat. Rep.
404 B, Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 16. For Kairoi, Plat. Prot. 339 c.
eyo) OTjSev tovtwv Trot'/jcrco, Kat ravra KivSvvevuiv.
Plat. Apol. xxiii.
/ wiYZ ^0 TioTie of these things, and that too though I am run-
ning a risk.
Note 3. The Relative occasionally is used in a concessive

sense.
For oo-Tis, Soph. Ai. 434, otov iruT-qp and Arist. Ach.
: 57,
oo-Tts 7]6eXe : os iê/Stjv, Antiph. Caed. Herod. 25.
Note 4. eiirep, kdvirep, bear a sort of concessive force, or
perhaps rather a particularising force, that is to say, cf. if
really, EuR. Her. Fur. 1345, Lys. 12. 48; edvTrep, Plat. Apol
sdi. (a General Supposition).
§ 226. Note on el Kai, koI el, etc.

Kat added to the Conditional el, edv, -qv gives the
particles
Conditional Sentence a concessive meaning. Kat is thus
added to any form of Conditional Sentence, which will there-
fore follow the rules of Conditional Sentences. distinction A
is generally made between el Kal and Kat et, Et Kat is said
(by Hermann and Kiihner) to concede a fact, although, Kat el
a supposition, even if (a supposition). It is impossible to sup-
port this theory. As Kat -vvith et and edv occur with every
form of conditional sentence (Indicative, Subjunctive, Opta-
tive) with ordinary and general suppositions, Kat cannot give
;
;
NOTE ON 61 Kai, Ka\ fl, ETC. 251
the d or kixv the power of turning any and every form of

supposition into statement of a fact. Hermann's dictum at
the most could hold good only of d koX and /<at' et with the
Indicative. And it is equally true here as with ordinary
conditions (without Kai) that if a fact is stated it is only by
virtue of the context. Madvig more cautiously states that
ct Ktti sometimes inclines more to the affirmation of the con-
dition, and that it is often only distinguished from ko.1 d by

being less emphatic. This is the most we can say, the latter
part of his remark being very true, Kat in these phrases is
expletive, i.e. it emphasises the word it precedes (as in TrpXv
Kol yevea-dat rjixas, Plat. Phaed. 77. 6, hef(yre we came into being
at all). It is further clear that Kat el with the Indicative
often leans to the affirmation of the condition as strongly as
d Kai Kat el, being more emphatic, may often mean that
even in spite of, under extreme circumstances, the Apodosis holds
good.
d Kai, with Indie, Plat. La. 182, Soph. El. 547, 0. T. 302.
Ktti €t,
„ Plat. ^j^;o/. xxix., AESCH./'er5. 297, Aesch.
Clio. 290 (leans to the fact) ; SoPH. Ai.
564 (do.); Soph. Ant. 234 (fut. indie.)

Plat. Apol. xix, {Kai d [jLeXXet).
et Kai,
„ in unfulfilled conditions, ISOCR. de permut.
(33), from Madvig.
Kai €1, „ Plat. Polit. 276 (Apodosis eSei) ; Dem. 21.
199.
lav Kai, with Subj., Desl 16. 24.
Kai £av, „ Menand. Fr. 19 (a General Supposition)

Plat. Symp. 185, Soph. M. 25 (a General
Supposition).
Kai d, with Optat, Xen. Hell. vii. 1. 8.
et KOI is used concessively with an ellipse of its verb in

Plat. Apol. xviii.
€t Kat yeAotore/oov etTreiv.
Though the expression be ridiculous.
d Kai, in SoPH. Ant. 90, is not concessive at all; koi

emphasises the et.
ei Kat 8vvy](TeL y '
(a A A' ajxriyavuiv epus).
Ay, if thou wilt be able.
—
CHAPTER V.
§227. FINAL SENTENCES, ottw? WITH THE

FUTURE INDICATIVE, AND VERBS OF
FEARING WITH fi-q, etc.
Introductory Note.
Three more or less closely connected constructions are here
brought into juxtaposition. They are
A. Final Sentences.
B. Modal Sentences with o-ws and the Future
Indicative.
C. Verbs of Fearing with fi-iq, firj ov.
These three constructions sometimes run into one another,

at other times they widely diverge. Verbs of Fearing with
fj.r) deprecate a result. Negative, Modal, and Final Sentences
consider or adopt means to avert a result. The connecting
links, therefore, are /x// and oVtos. The resemblance is strongest
in three such types as the following A. raura ttoiw oVws /xi)
:
aTroOdi'w, I do this that I may not die. B. iTnfjLeXovfiai ottws /x^

(XTroOavovfiai, I take care that {strive hoio) I shall not die.
C. 4>of3ovfxaL fxr) diroddvo),I fear that I shall die.^ The resem-
blance is even stronger when the construction of B. is eVt/xeAoiJ-
fxai OTTWj /xiy diroddvio, andof C. cjio/Sov/xac o— ojs dirodavovixat
fJi'f]
or diroOdvw. Onthe other hand the divergence is greatest

between A. ravra ttoiw ottcos firj aTroddyw (a true Final Sentence),
and C. <f)o/3oviJi.ai ws aTro/o^crets, I fear tlmt you will he at a loss,
^ The term Object Sentence is often applied to the second and third
forms of these Sentences. If by an Object Sentence is meant one which

stands as an Object to the Principal Sentence, then the term appears
too comprehensive to be of practical value. It would include Indirect
Statements, Indirect Questions, Indirect Commands, the Infinitive
after such verbs as ôuXofxai (e.g. ôiiXofiac eXêij'), besides Sentences with
Situs, etc. ilore would be lost than gained by grouping together con-
sti'uctions so diflerent as ol5a afiapruv, jôuXofxai eXdelv, and aKoirei. ottws
ravra yevqcjerai. Further, if we use the tenn Object Sentence, why
not also Subject Sentence ? Syntax must be content sometimes to
sacrifice logical system to expediency.
252
— —
FINAL SENTENCES. 253
where ws cxTropTjcrets is practically a Substantival Sentence of
Indirect Statement, or cfjo/3 ov/xai d~oOavdv (to aTroâveti'), which

is the same as (f)ofBovfj.ai davarov.
It is not easy to give the right name to sentences of class

B. They corresj)ond with the Latin construction euro, enitor,
efficio, Avith ut and the Subjunctive, which Dr. Kennedy assigns
to the Indirect Petition. By an extension of the usage of
oTTws, verbs of commanding and of requesting (which introduce
a true Indirect Petition) may take ottws with a Future Indica-
tive, just as impero smd poshdo, etc., take ut (or ne).
"Ottws is a Relative Modal Adverb meaning as, how, ws ottws,
(Epic) or oiirajs ottw? (Attic) thus —
as or hoic, ws or oi'Tws being
the Antecedents to ottws. It is also used in Questions, /cara-
Aeôv ottws ^vTTjo-as (Od. iii. 97), tell me hoio thou didst meet ic'ith.
But one of the most characteristic usages of ottws is in Modal
Deliberative Questions Avith the Subjunctive or Optative, after
such verbs as (^paÔfxai, ^lepixi^pi^w, e.g. (f>pd(€a-dai OTTTTws KC
fivrjcTTrjpa's KTeivrjs [Od. i. 295) take counsel hoiv thou shalt slay
the wooers. The connection between this and a Final Sentence
is obvious, e.g. Tre/Dt^pa^wyueâ TTctvTes voo-tov, ottws eXdrjcrt (Od.
i. 77), us all take good counsel touching his return how (so thai)
let
he shall reach home. The Future Indicative is used much in

the same way as the Subjunctive, e.g. <f>pdêv ottws dAe^jjcrets
KaKov rj/xap (11. ix. 251), take counsel how thou unit avert the evil
day.
§228. FINAL SENTENCES.

Final Sentences denote an etid, purpose, or intention to
achieve or avert a result. They are expressed in a variety
of ways, chiefly by (1) Final Particles with the Subjunc-
tive and Optative ; (2) by the Future Participle ; (3) by
Eelative Sentences ; (4) in certain cases by the Infinitive.
§ 229. FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE

AND OPTATIVE.
The Final Particles are 'Iva, &)<?, and 6Va)9 (of^pa is Epic
and Lyric In Negative Sentences 'Iva fx-r],
only). firj, m
oTTw? firj, and sometimes /atj only. In Primary Sequence
the Subjunctive is used, in Historic Sequence the Opta-
254 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.
tive,but the strict Sequence is often disregarded, and the

Subjunctive used instead of the Optative.
Tov KUKOv Bel KokdêLv Lv afieivcoi> f).
Plat.
It is iiecessary to punish the criminal in order that he
may he reformed.
iKerevae tov<; BiKa<Tra<; jxera ttoWcov BaKpviov tva

iXerjOelv. PL-'^T.
He entreated the jury with many tears in order that

he might he pitied.
7rapaKa\el<i tarpov^ ottm? /lit) aTro6avri<i. Xen.
You call in physicians in order that you may not die.
cva ol aWoL ry^wtrt twv BtKUccov, ra v/xeTep' avTcov

avrfkLCTKere. Dem.
In order that the rest might ohfain their rights, you
used to spend your oivn o'esoicrces.
For ft)9 see Eur. Tro. 714. For /xrj only Xen. Cyr. i.
4. 25 (Xeyerac eiTrelv ort ainevaL ôvXolto, fir] a irarrip
Tc axôLTo). Mri truly final is however rare.
Note 1. The Subjunctive and Optative are sometimes found

alternating in Historic Sequence.
TO aTToXXivai dv6pwTrovs ^v[x/xd)(ôvs ttoXXovs Setvov e(f)aLveTo
elvai, pq Ttva 8iaf3oXi]v crxoicv Kal ol (rrpaTLwrai Svcrvoi
5o-i. Xen. Hell. ii. 1. 2.
To put death a number of allies was considered a dangerous

to
course, lest they should incur odium and the troops be
disaffected.
Trapavlcrxov <f>pVKT0vs ttoXXovs, ottws axTacf^yj to. a-q/Mela rots

TToAe/Atots y, Kal py) jSo-qdoUv irplv crcfiuiv ol avSpes 6ta-
(fivyoLeLV. ThXJC. iii. 22.
They icere hoisting many beacons, in order that the enemies
signals might be ^mintelligible to them, ami that they might
not bring aid before their own men escaped {slwuld escajye).
Dr. Arnold in his well-known note on this passage explains
that the Subjunctive expresses the immediate, and the Optative
the remote, consequence (? purpose), the second (Optative) being
a consequence upon the first (Subjunctive). Such an explana-
FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 255
tion,however, clearly cannot apply, as Dr. Arnold thought, to

passages where the Optative precedes the Sub-
all cases, e.g. to
junctive (see Xen. Rdl. ii. 1. 2, above, and Thuc. vi. 96).
This interchange of moods, of the graphic Subjunctive and the
remoter Optative, is allowable in every variety of Greek sub-
ordinate construction.
For other instances cf. Hdt. i. 185 ; viii. 76 ; ix, 51 ; Thuc,
vii.17.4; vii. 70. 1.
Note 2. a.v is sometimes joined to d>s and oVws with the
Subjunctive (o<^pa. Ke Epic). It adds little, if any, meaning
Possibly av may refer to an implied condition, like our English
so (in order that so).
av is not found with the Subjunctive in Negative Final
Sentences.
"Iva av, when it occurs, is not final but indefinitely local
(wheresoever).
TTaTpls yap ecTTt rracr' Iv' av rrpaTTy rts tS,
Aeist. Flut. 1151.

Tlie fatherland is any land where'er a man is prospering.
Examples of ws av with Subjunctive.
a»S av fxddys, avraKovcrov. XeN. An. ii. 5.

lAsten in return, that you may know.
\wpei S' evOairep KareKxaves
irarepa tov d/xov, ws av ev TaTjroi Odvrj'i. SOPH. El. 1496.
On to the spot ev'n where thou slew'st my father.
That so on that same spot thou may'st be slain.
Cf. Aesch. p. F. 10; Soph. Phil 825; Plat. Pep. 567 a,

Symp. 189 A.
Note 3. When dv is found with cos or ot-ws and the Optative

in a Final Sentence, ws and oVcos are Modal, and the Optative
with av is an Apodosis.
ws /X€V civ eiWoire StKatovs Xoyovs aynetvov ^lXltt-ov irap-
ecTKivaadi, ws Se KdiXxxrair dv avTov dpyws ^X^^^-
Dem. Phil. ii. 66.
As to the means by
you might express just sentiments
ichich
you are better preptared than Philip, but as to means of
checking him you are doing nothing.
fiovXiva-o/xeda ottojs av dpucrTa dyoiVLôlfiida. XeN. Cyr. ii. 1. 4.

Cf. Cvr. i. 2. 5. Plat. Symp 187, d.
In Xen. Hell. iv. 8. 16, ottcos o.v, TrXi-jpfaOkvTO'i va.vTiKov k.t.X.,

TrposSeoivTo, we must either explain that oVws av TrposSeoivro
is the AjDodosis (in order that they might loant), and TrXrjptoOevTO'i
the Protasis, =
ei -n-X-qpioOd-q [if the fleet were manned): or we
must consider that Xenophon is using an Ei)ic construction (ws

oTTws av or Kev in Final Sentences with the Optative, e.g.
Od. ii. 53, xvii. 362).
The Optative with /xi) av occurs in Soph. Tra^h. 631,
Thug. ii. 93.
Note In a few places oVcos with a Future Indicative is

4.
strictly final ratherthan modal. And as the verb of striving,
or taking precaution, does not precede in these passages, they
are noticed here under Final Sentences. The Future Indica-
tive may be regarded as a vivid form of the Subjunctive.
ovSe 8t' ev dAAo rpecôvrai rj OTTios [xa'ôvvrai.
Xen. Cyr. ii. 1. 21.

And they are maintained for no other single purpose except
for fighting (lit. hou' they shall fight).
i(j}i] \prjvai dvafSi/SdêLV Itti tov Tpo)(hv tovs diroypa^kvTas,
OTTWS p.y] Trporepov vvg fcrrat Trplv irvOecrdaL tovs avSpas
ttTravras. Andok. de Myst. 43.
He said that those who had been informed against ought to he
put upon the wheel (to the torture), in order to discover all
the perpetrators before night-fall.
Cf.Soph. El. 955 ; Arist. Ecc. 495.
It is doubtful whether the Future Optative, as the Obliqua
of the above, ever occurs. The MSS. appear to favour other
constructions where it has hitherto been read. In Plat.
Bep. 393 E, /ii) ovK eirapKea-oL occurs as a virtual, rather than
literal, obliqua of firj ov xpo-^f^/Ji-y cf. //. i. 25. See Goodwin,
'
Moods and Tenses, p. 40.

Note 5. In a few places the Optative is found in a Primary
Sequence. The Optative carries back the purpose to its
original conception in the past ; the action, though still con-
tinuing in the present, was begun in the past.
TOVTOV 8' O^C)
iva fj.rj TaXaiTTOipotTO. ArIST. Han. 23.
I'm carrying him,
that he mayn't be inconvenienced.
i.e. / took him on my back {and am carrying him\ thai he might
not he, etc.
FINAL PARTICLES IVITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 257
TOVTOv £;êt toi' Tpo—ov 6 vd/ios, tVa /iijSe Treicrdrjvai jxq8' iga-
TraTTjdrjvaL ykvon' ejrt tw Stj/xw, DeM. 22. 11 (AXDROT. 596, 17),
i.e. tlie original intention of the lav: ivJien first made was, etc.
Cf. Xen. Ci/r. iv. 2. 45 (tVa, ei' ttotc Seoi, Svvaiixeda, in Primary
sequence).
In the same way Cicero uses the Imperfect Subjunctive to
recall the original intention : —
Homines sunt hac lege generati
qui tuerentur ilium globum quae teiTa dicitur, CiC.. . .
Bep. vi. 15. Sic mihi perspicere videor ita natos esse nos ut
inter omnes esset societas quaedam, CiC. Lael. 5. Cf. de Off. i.
§ 152, ii § 1.
Cf. EuK. El. 58, and Hec. 1138 (Subjunctive followed by
Optative in Primary sequence).
§ 230. Final Sentences with Past Tenses of

the Indicative.
AFinal Sentence with iva (less commonly ws and o-ws)
and a Past Tense of the Indicative expresses a purpose unful-
filled either in the Present (Imperfect Indicative), or in the
Past (Aorist Indicative). The Principal Sentence is either an
\mfulfilled Wish, or an unfidfiUed Apodosis.
ei yap (j(êAov oTot re etvat to. yueyto-ra KaKa epyd(ecr6ai., iva

olot re rjcrav Kal dyaOa to. jxkyLcna. PlaT. Crito, iii.
Woidd they had been able to do the greatest evil, in order tJmt
they might be ahle (or might have now been able) to do also
the greatest good (which they ai-e not able to do).
Kal )U5^v a^tov y i)v aKovcrai. tl 87^ ; iv rjKovcras avSpcHv ol
o-ot^wTarot eiau Plat. Euthyd. 304 E.
Well, I assure you it tcoidd have been worth hearing. TTJuj
so ? In order that yoic might have heard the ablest men.
dîov 7^v of course =a'^tov du vyv, similarly we should say,

It was worth hearing.
a»s (3<êAov TrdpoiOev ekAi— eii' (3iov, k.t.X.
OTTWSâvwv CKeto-o ry rod' fjixepa. SoPH. El. 1134.
TFould God that I had first forsaJcen life, etc.
That death had laid thee low on that far day.
Other well-known examples are Aesch. P. V. 152 (after a
wish) xb. 766 (after a question equivalent to a wish)
: Soph. :
0. T. 1387, 1391 Dem. Aph. ii. 837. 11 iii. 849. 24.

; ;
R
§ 231. FINAL SENTENCES WITH THE FUTURE

PARTICIPLE.
A Final Sentence is often expressed by a Future
Participle : m is often added, denoting the tliought, or the
presumed intention in the mind of the Subject of the
principal verb.
TT/oeo-ySei? e9 AaKcBaifiova eTrefju-âv ravra re epovvra^;

Kac AuaavSpov aiTr]aovTa<;. Xen,
They sent envoys to Lacedaemon to say this, and to
ask for Lysander.
irapeaKevaôvTO to? '7rpo^â\ovvre Tef^ca/xaTi,

Thug.
They were making preparations for an attack on the
fort (with the intention of attacking).
Note. Such a Participle is especially common after a verb
of motion.
7]8r] lopa aiTikvai, ipol p€v a,Tro6avovp,kv(a, vpiv 8e f^Lwrofik-
voLs. Plat. Apol. xxxii.
It is high time to be going, for me that I may die, for you
that you may live.
§ 232. RELATIVE FINAL SENTENCES.

A Final Sentence is expressed by o(7rL<; (less frequently
09) with the Future Indicative.In Historic Sequence
the Future Optative would strictly be used, but the
Future Indicative (the vivid construction) is generally
retained. The negative is p^rj.
irpealSetav Tre/iTrere 77x49 raOr epel Kai irapearai

TOt'i irpa<ypacn,v. Dem.
Send a depiutation to hear this message, and to he
present at tlie operations.
Legates mittite qui haec uuntient rebusque se immis-

ecant.
FINAL SENTENCES WITH THE INFINITIVE. 259
eSofe TO) hrifxo) rptaKovra av8pa<i eXeaOai oi vofiovi
^vyypaylrovai. Xen.
TJie assembly resolved to appoint thirty men who were
to compile laws.
Cf. Xen. Cyr. viii. 6. 3 ; An. ii. 3. 6. (ot aôvatv). In

Thug. vii. 25, the Subjunctive occurs, oiirep ^pdacoaL (in
Historic sequence).
§ 233' Final Sentences with the Infinitive.

A Final Sentence is expressed by the Infinitive, chiefly after
verbs of choosing, appointing, or assigning.
Sevocfiuiv TO rinLcrv tou (TTparevfiaTos KareAtTre ^vAdxTetv to
crTpaTOTreSov. XeX.
Xenophon left half his force behind to guard the camp.
ol apôvTes ous ei'Aeaê apêtv pov. PlAT. Apol. xvii.
Tlie rulers whom you chose to rule me.
Cf. Thug. vi. 50, TrXeva-ai Te, k.t.A.
Note As the Infinitive is, in its origin, a Verbal Dative,

1.
we have a natural explanation of this use of it (f}vXdTTeLv,foi' :
the guarding. We
may, of course, say that the Infinitive is
explanatory (epexegetical).
Note 2. For toG with the Infinitive in a Final Sense, see
Index
^ 234. "Ottco^, ottos pirj, MODAL WITH THE

FUTURE INDICATIVE, ETC.
Ottco^;, ottox? /i?j are used with the Future Indicative
(usually the 2d person) after Verbs of takingmeans to an
end {considering, striving, and contriving). In Primary
Sequence the Future Indicative is used in Historic ;
Sequence the Future Optative may be used, but the

Future Indicative (the vivid construction) is much com-
moner.
26o FINAL SENTENCES, ETC.
Such Verbs are :
fSovXevo) /xeXei {jJ-oi) Trpu(T(T(o
CTKOTTti) (cTKOTTOV/xai) ivkapovfJLai, 77 apacTKeva^w

4>povTiî') TrpoOvfJLOVixai cnrov8d^(D
eiTLfxeXovixat ^vAacrcrco wvovfxai (I manage by bribery).
Dem. de Car. 236. 12.
And periphrases such as irpovotav e^tu, firj'âv^ ean, etc.
Cf. Latin euro, (curam, operam, negotium) do, studeo, id ago,

enitm; efficio, impetro with ut (ne) and Subjunctive.
(f>p6vTiê oTTw^ /jbrjBev avaîov aavTov irpaêi^. ISOC,
Sec that thou do nothing umvorthij of thyself.
Vide ne quid te indignum agas.
e'KLfieX.rjTeov 07r&)9 &)? aptarr) aot earat rj yjfv^r].
Plat.
You must strive that your soul may be as good as
possible.
Enitendum est ut tibi quam optimus sit animus tuua

eTTe/ieXetro otto)? yLtTjre cktltoc /iTjre uttotoi eaotvTO.
Xen.
He ivas taking ])recautions that they should be neither
vjithout food nor drink.
eTTpaaaov 07ro)<; Tt<? ôrjdeca rjêi. Thuc.
They were arranging for tJie arrival of reinforcements.
Note 1. The 1st and 3d person are very rare. In Dem.

Chers. 99. 14 (on-ws eOeXija-ova-L) in Ae. Eccl. (ottws KaOeSov-
;
He6a).
Note 2. Instead of the Future Indicative the Subjunctive

and Optative (Present and Aorist) less often occur, though
not uncommonly.
opa oVws fJ-^ Trapa Soâv ofioXoyys. PlAT. Crit.
See that you are not surprised into making an admission.
ifiefieXrJKeL avrots oTTtos 6 L—7raypeTi]S etSetv; oi5s Scot Tre/jurciv.
Xex. Eell. iii. 3. 9.
They had taken care that the Cavalry -Commissioner should

know who should be stnt.
On-wj, Sttcos fMTi, WITH FUTURE INDICATIVE. 261
In Lys. 12. 44 an Aorist Optative is followed by a Future

Indicative (i—ejSovXevecrOe ottws /^^tc ttoXXQv re
ifqcfiUraca-Oe,
evSeeis eVecrê).
iVoê 3. Variants, of rare occurrence for ottws with the
Future Indicative are o-r) (Thuc. i. 65, yevqaeTai.) ; orw t/do-w
(ThuC. iv. 128, ^viJ./3i]a-€rat) ; e^ orov rpo-ov (DeM. il/f^rt/. 207).
ws is found instead of o-ws with a Subjunctive or Optative
(Xen. Oec. XX. 8, Aesch. P. V. 203), but seldom with a Future
Indicative (Xen, Cyr. iii. 2. 13),
Note 4. av is sometimes found with ottws and the Subjunc-
tive, of. Plat. Gorg. 481 a {ix-i-ixavi-jrkov o-ws av 8La.(fivyrj), but
never with o-ws and the Future Indicative. The Optative
(Present or Aorist) with av in this construction is an Apodosis.
Cf, Xen. 9 (e— t/ieAeto-ât OTTWS av yevoiTo).
Oec. ii.
Note 5. found, instead of o-oj? /x?;, with the Subjunc-

M7; is
tive (rarely with the Future Indicative) after o-ko-Q, opw,
evXa/Sov/xai, <:f)vXdcrcrojj.aL, just as after Verbs of Fearing.
Conversely o-ws /j-'q, instead of the simple ixij, is used after
Verbs of Fearing. Cf. the next section, page 265. Cf. Soph.
Phil. (Spa fxi) -apys), 0. C. 1180 j Plat. Si/mjy. 213 d. In Xen,
Cyr. iv, 1. 18 (opa fii) Se-zô-et), evXo./Sdcrdat fiij, PlAT. Pfot. 321 A;
evXajidcrdai to firi, PlAT. Bep. 539 A; (fivXdcrcrea-OaL jxt] is fairly
common.
Note 6. found with an Infinitive in Thuc. vi.
l-LfieXovjiai is
54. 6, Xen. Comm. Appian, Civ. v, 73, So euro occurs
iv. 7. 1,
with the Infinitive in Cic, de Fin. iii, 19. 62 (natura diUgi , . .
procreatos non curaret). Poppo, Thuc, vi. 54, So also (jivXaxr-

crofiai fiT) TToieiv, to fir/ Troietv, I guard against doing, Dem. 773.
1, 313. 6.
Note 7. (TKo-w is followed by el interrogative (Soph. Anf. 41),

See similar construction with Verbs of Fearing, Xote, p. 266,
Note 8. In one or two places Set precedes o-ws with the
Fut, Indicative, e.g. Soph. Ai. 556, Set o-e ottws Setêts Phil. 55, :
ere Set o'-ws eKKXerpeis. Jebb (note to SoPH. Ai. 556) quotes
CrATINUS {apud Athenaeum), Set cr' ottws dXeKrpvovo? fn]8ev
Sioiorets Tovs rpoTTovs. There seems to be a confusion between
two constructions ; Set with the Infinitive, and some verb like
opa, o-KoVet with oVws and the Future Indicative. In Arist.
Eq. 926 we have a-Treva-w ere oTTOJs av eyypa^ys, which however
may be regarded simply as an instance of Antiptosis, i.e. o-e,
the Subject to iyypa(f)-[]s, is made the Object to cr-evo-w, which
is a Verb just like (r-ov8d((o or Trpda-a-o).
§ 235. ELLIPTICAL USE OEottcos, ottws fxrj, WITH

THE FUTURE INDICATIVE.
" OiTW'i, OTTO)? /U.7] are used with the Future Indicative
in exhortations and prohibitions, when no principal
sentence has preceded. All three persons are found,
thouoh the second is commonest.
aXs! OTTO)? av7]p eVet. EuR. Cycl. 595.
Come, he a man !
o7ra)<; Be rovro fir) StSafci? /x7]Bevi. Ae. JVuh.
Mind you don't tell this to anyhody.

4>^pe 8r] OTTCos fiefivqa-o/jLeda ravTa. PlaT. Gorg. 495 D.
TFell, then, let us be sure to remember this.
OTTWS ravra [xrjSeh dvdpwTrwv TrevcreTai. LyS. i. 21.
See that not a smd Jiears of this.
Observe that this construction is generally introduced by a

word, dXXd, ovv, 8e, sometimes by dye vw (Ar. Nub. 490).
Note. The Subjunctive occasionally is found :
o7ra)9 ye fJ-rj eâTraT-qarr) rj/xas. PlAT. Prot. 313 C.

Mind he does not deceive us.
§236. "O 770)9, OTTWS fJi-q WITH VERBS OF COM-

MANDING AND FORBIDDING.
For this Construction, see Indirect Petition. It is, of
course, the same as oVw? after Verbs of taking means to
an end, although an extension of it. There is a natural
connexion between, " Take care to do so," and " I bid you
do so." But for the sake of convenience the rule and
examples are given elsewhere.
§ 237. VERBS OF FEARING WITH fji-q, AND

(JLT) OV.
Verbs and phrases denoting fear are followed by fi-^

and fMT] OV with the Subjunctive (in Primary Sequence),
—
VERBS OF FEARING WITH ixi) AND ixf, oi. 263
and the Optative (in Historic Sequence). The Subjunc-

tivemay, by the graphic construction, of course be sub-
stituted for the Optative.
SeSoiKa fji^rj ravra yevrjrai,

I fear this will happen.
Vereor ne haec fiant.
8e8oiKa fiT] ov ravra yevrjTai,.
I fear this will not happen.

Vereor ut (ne non) haec fiant.
eSeSoUetv fir] (jir] ou) ravra yevotro or yevrjrac.

Verebar ne (ut) haec fierent.
Observe that /u,?] does not negative the verb ; it expresses

a surmise that the result will occur. Ov on the other
hand is privative and negatives the verb.
SeSoiKa /XT] ov^ batov fj.
I fear it v:ill not he righteous (i.e. unrighteoits).
For fxr], /jltj ov and the Subjunctive, etc., without a

principal verb see the Chapter on Negatives.
Verbs of fearing are :
(poôv/Mai, 8eo9 ecrrt 7re'(ppiKa (mostly poet.)

SeSoiKa, heivov eart rpeco (mostly poet.)
SeSoiKa [iTj eTTtKadcofieda T779 OLKahe oBov. Xen.

I fear we shall forget the way home.
ovKeri eTrerlOevro BeBotKora

firj arrnrfiTjOeLriaav. Xen.
They were no longer attacking from fear of Icing

cut off.
SeSifiev fir) ov /3e/3aiot rjre. Thuc.

We fear yon are not trustworthy.
;
ecpoêiTO TO a-rparevfia firj ein rrjv avrov '^copav

arparevrjTaL. Xen.
He was afraid that the aimy would march against
his own country.
ovSev Seivov fir) ev e/xol aTrj. Plat. Apol. xv.

There is no fear (likelihood) of the rule breaking down
in my case.
In Xex. Mem. i. 2. 7, we ha.ve Wavfxaê et ns 4>o(joito

Obs.
fxr) KaAos Kayados /î) X^P'-^ 'î^'-y instead of fx^ uv
6 yevo/Aei'Os
Xo-p>-v eôt, an abnormal construction not found elsewhere.
Note 1. As these Verbs of Fearing denote doubt and appre-

hension as much as downright fear, their construction is
followed by many Verbs which in other senses take other con-
structions, but which when denoting apprehension, anxiety,
suspicion lest or tvhether, are followed by fit] and prj ov.
Such verbs are verbs of caution in the sense of anxiety

((fipovTLîa, evj'ow, opQi, ctkottw, evXafSovpaL, (f)vXd(r<r(ji (-o/xai) j
oKvtu, / hesitate or scruple {

from fear, or pity, or sluim^)
VTTOTTTevoi, I SUSpect, aTTtcTTCu (dirLCTTLav e'êi, 7rape;êt) in the sense
of suspecting rather than disbelieving, kivSui'os Ictti.
VTTOTTTevopev prj ov KOtvol a.7ro/3rJTe. ThUC. iii. 53.

We suspect that you imll not prove impartial.
OKVW /XT] /iot 6 Avo-tas TttTretvos (fiavy. PlAT. Pol. 368.
</)/)OVTiâ) prj Kparirrrov y /xot crtyav. XeN. Mem. iv. 2. 39.
/ am thinking that it may he best for me to say nothing.
Plat. Phaed. 70 a (d-to-rtav irapk^'î pr] ovSapov) Plat.
Cf. ;
Theaet. 183 e {alaxwopevos p-q, a very rare construction with

this verb) SOPH. Tr. 1129 (evXafSeia-dai. p.y] 4)avys) ThUC. iv.
; ;
11 (<fivXa.cr(re(r6ai prj ^wTpiilôya-tv).
Consult the Index for other meanings and constructions of

these verbs.
Note 2. Instead of the Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing
the tenses of the Indicative are used.
(1) The Future Indicative as a graphic substitute for the
Subjunctive.
cfiofSovpai pt] Ttvas 7)Soi'as i^Sovat? ivprjaopev ivavTias.
Plat. Phileb. 13 a.
/ apprehend that we shall find some pleasures opposite tc
pleasures.
VERBS OF FEARING WITH m AND ^f, ov. 265
Cf. Plat. Bep. 451 a (^(ôfi^pov re koL o-âAepoi' fx-i] KcifTOfxaL).

In Aesch. Pers. 112, the Subjunctive and Future Indicative
are co-ordinate, p) n-vdt^To.t, Kal eo-o-e-at, Trea-y (Se). See Choeph.
257. So EuE. H. F. 1054, Ak. Fee. 493.
(2) oTTws [Ml] with the Future Indicative, Subjunctive, or
Optative, as after verbs of taking means to an end in the pre-
vious section.
drap Tov Sacfxovos
SeSoLx' OTTWS [JLT] rer'ô/zat KaKoSo-Lfiouos. Ae. Fq. 112.
But Im afraid
This genius will turn out my evil genius — (Frere).
SeSot;^' oTTcus ft^ dvayKT^ ykvrjTai. DeM. Phil. iii. 130. 14.
I fear that a necessity may arise.
(3) ws -^vith the Future Indicative, ws does not (like ottws)

appear to have a modal force, but to introduce an Indirect
Statement, as if SeSotK-a or <f>o/3ovfj.aL meant I fear, thinking tJiat.
dvSpbs /xi) (}io/3ov ws d770/37^crets d^cov. XeN. Cyr. V. 2. 12.
Do not fear that you will be at a loss for a worthy man.
Cf. Soph. Fl. 1309, Xen. Cyr. vi. 2. 30, Dem. Phil.
iv. 1. 141.
In Eur. Heracl. 248 (u-ws, as o-ws is occasionally used in
Indirect Discourse).
When oTi follows a Verb of Fearing it seems to introduce
an ordinary causal (or rather explanatory) sentence.
OTt oe TToAAwv dp-ôvcri [jlt] <ô/3r;^7yTe, XeN. Hell. iii. 5. 10.
Do not be afraid because they rule imtny.
Though we^might translate, do not be afraid thinking tJiat.
Note 3. The Infinitive, Future, Present or Aorist is also used,

ov <f}ol3ov[j.eda eAao-crdxrecrât. ThUC. V. 105.
We are not afraid that we shall be beaten.
The Future Infinitive is here = the more usual p.-/] with

Subjunctive.
(f>o(3ovp.aL SieXeyxêLv ere p.r] v-oXdf3i]?. PlAT. Gorg. 457 E.
/ am afraid to refute you lest you should suppose.
The latter construction (with the Present or Aorist) is
common enough, and is the ordinary objective construction
common to verbs of fearing with many of the verbs mentioned
—
in Note I fear to do imong ; at(r\vvoiiaL

1, e.g. cjiofSovfj-ai. doLKelv,
dSiKciv, / am ashamed do wrong ; KivSwevw dSixetv, I run a
to
risk of doing wrong ; (jivXda-a-u) firjSeva dSiKelv, I fake care that no

one does wrong. Cf. Latin, culpari metuit fides ; penna metuente
sold, etc., in Horace.
Note 4. Observe the following distinctions:
1. (ftofSovfJiai dSiKelv.
I fear to do wrong (and so refrain).
2. <f>ol3oVfiaL fJL^^ d8lK(0.
I fear I shall do wrong.
3. cf)of3ov[j.ai dSiK-qcreiv.
I fear I shall do wrong (very rare for 2),
4. ô/3ov/xat TO aStKelv.
I fear wrong-doing (generally, by myself, or by another.)
Note 5, Verbs of Fearing are also followed by d interroga-

tive.
ov SeSoiKtt et ^tAuTTTos Cy. Dem. Fals. Leg. 434. 6.
I have no fear ichether Philip is alive (i.e. I have no fear as
to that question).
Cf. Eur. Herac. 791, Xen. EeU. sd. 1. 4 (ottoj).
Note 6. dv is not used with the Subjunctive after Verbs ol

Fearins;. When the Optative is found with dv it is an
Apodosis.
§ 238. Verbs of Fearing, etc., with the Indicative.
When the result has actually occurred, or is occurring, the

verb with fi-q is in the Indicative.
Thus : SeSotKtt /x?) dfiapTavrjs (or dfidpTrj?).

I fear you mil make a mistake.
But S^SoiKa fiTj d/iaprdvets.

I fear you (actually) are making a mistake.
SeSoiKtt fir] '^fidpTy]Kas.
I fear you have made a mistake.
So SeSotKtt firj rjfidpTaves (you were making a mistake); fir}
T7/xap7£s, tlmt you made a mistake.

———
VERBS OF FEARING, ETC., WITH INDICATIVE. 267
1. The Present Indicative :
cfyofêtade fir] Sva-KoXcjTepou ti StaKei/zai. PlAT. Phaed. XXXV,

You are afraid that I am in a somewhat mare fretful state of
mind.
eTTt'crês, ws av Trpovêpevvqcria crTi/Sov,
fi-q Tts TToAtTWv kv Tpi/3(S (pavTCiêTat,

Ka/xoL fxev eX6rj, k.t.A. Eur. Phoen. 92.
Yet stay, that first I may explore the path,
Lest any citizen now is visible
Upon the road, and one shall come to me.
Cf. Ion, 1523, Soph. El. 580. Similarly opdii^v pjq NtKi'a?
oierai, PlAT. Lach. 179 B. ela-ofJiea-Oa p-rj KakvTrrei, SOPH.
Antig. 1253. ^KTraôpêv p) -n;yxf'-vet, Plat. Soph. 235 A.
(TKeil/iop-eOa /x.7) XavOdvei, PlAT. Ly. 216 C.
2. The Imperfect Indicative :
opa pi.rj Trai^wv e'Aeyev. PlAT. Theaet. 145 B.

Have a care that he was not speaking in jest.
3. The Perfect Indicative :
(f)ofSovp.at p.1] up,c{iOTep(av afxa -qpia pT-qKa/JLev. ThUC. iii. 53.

I fear that we have missed both objects at once.
Cf Plat. Lys. 218 d, Dem. 19. 26 {Fals. Leg. 372. 1).
4. The Aorist Indicative does not appear to occur in Attic.
See HOM. Od. v. 300.
5. The Future Indicative may be regarded as a graphic
substitute for the Subjunctive (supra).^
§ 239. Note on Dawes's Canon.

Dawes down
the rule that after o-ws jirj and ox' p-q, the
laid
First Aorist Passive,and the Second Aorist Active, Middle,
and Passive may be used, but not the First Aorist Active or
Middle. Instead of the First Aorist Active and Middle, he
said that the Future Indicative must be used. Subsequent
^ So at least in Attic. But if the original force of the Subjunctive

was imperative (denoting mil) rather than future (a point on which it
is impossible to speak dogmatically), the Subjunctive in the oldest
Greek would mean shall rather than idll, and would be more direct and
dvid than the Future. See ]Monro's Homeric Grammar, pp. 2.31 and 238.
critics extended Dawes's Canon to ottws (without /ii}), and set

about changing a First Aorist Active and Middle, wherever
they were found in a text, to a Future Indicative. The sole
ground for this arbitrary rule of Dawes is the resemblance in
form between the First Aorist Active and Middle and the
Future Indicative, e.g. KATOKNHCHIC (KaroKvy/o-y?, Soph.
El. 956) and KATOKNHCEIC (KaroKvô-eis) ; SYAAE;e7HTAI
{^vXXkî^rai) and SYAAESETAI (^vXXk^^Tai). Naturally
this resemblance of form might incline a Greek wTiter to avoid
confusion by using a second Aorist (if it existed) rather than
a First Aorist. Dawes made no objection to a First Aorist
Subjunctive Passive, because it bears no resemblance in form
to a Future Indicative. But Dawes's Canon rests on no solid
foundation of grammar, and breaks down completely on
examination. Instances of the First Aorist Subjunctive
Active and Middle in which all the MSS. agree are ottws fir]
eTn/3ot]6r](T(ji(rL (ThUC. iv. 66) ; ottws fi')] ISovXeva-qa-Oe (ThUC. i.
73); o-w's firj epyd(Ti](rde, Lys. 138. Secondly, in some cases

the First Aorist Active does not resemble in form the Future
Indicative, and therefore cannot possibly be changed. E.g.
Soph. Phil. 381, ov fj-r) eKirXevcrys the Future is eKirXeva-ovfiai,
:
and the second person would be cKTrAetcrei not eKTrAetVets. So

Plat. Fiep. x. 609, d-oAeo-y, the Future is d-oXC} Soph. El.
:
1122, KXava-d), First Aorist Active, where the Future Avould

be KXavaovnai. And, lastly, the change made would in some
cases spoil the metre.
CHAPTEE VI.
§ 240. CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE

SENTENCES.
A Consecutive Sentence may be expressed either by

A. (ocTTe with the Indicative, or B. ware with the In-
finitive,
A, <w(rT6 (wo-re ov) with the Indicative states the con-

sequence as an independent fact actually occurring.
670) 87J 6t9 ToaovTOv atiadia'i tjkco (aare kukov eKwv

TTOLO). Plat.
/ it seems have readied such a pitch of ignoixtnce that
I deliberately do wrong.
et? TovTo rfkOov oio-r ovk e^pKeaev avroc<i rj Kara
^Yjv ap'^rj. ISOC.
To such a pitch they came that their empire by land
did not satisfy them.
B. ma-Te {ware fxri) with the Infinitive expresses

merely the consequence which would naturally result
from the Principal Verb without affirming or denying
its occurrence.
<yvwfx,ri<i lyap ovk UTreipo'; coaO' dfJiapraveLV. SoPH.

He is not void of wit that he should err.
ra TrapaSeiyfjbaTa rcou a/xaprrj/jiarcov iKava Tol<i
a(o(f)poat oiare /j,7]KerL dfxapraveLV. Andok.

Examples of errors are sufficient for sensible people
that they should no longer err, i.e. sufficient to heep
them from erring.
269
—
270 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITA TIVE SENTENCES.
§ 241. wcrre with Indicative and Infinitive.
A. wo-re with the Indicative is parallel with on and the

Indicative, that is to say, it introduces the Indicative as
a statement almost, sometimes quite, independent of the
Principal Sentence.
Thus : Toa-ovTQv cru k\iov (TocfiLjTepos €?, ware (tv /xev eyi/coKas
eyo) 81 dyvow.
Pl. Apol. xiii.
So much wiser are you than I, that (and so) you Jiave
discovered, while I am ignorant, etc.
This introductory force of wa-Te is best shown by its

famihar usage at the beginning of a sentence where it is a
synonym for ovv, roivw, and may be rendered and so, conse-
quently, therefore.
eis Ti-jV vcrrepaLav ov^ vJKev Ttcrcra<^£pv7/s" oxrO' oi'EAAvjves

i4>p6vTi(ov. Xen. An. ii. 3. 25.
On the morrow Tissaphernes did not appear. Consequently
the Greeks began to consider, etc.
So with an Imperative.
6vr]-os 5' 'Ope(TTi]S' (li(TTG p.!] Xiav (neve. SOPH. El. 1172.
Orestes was but mortal. Therefore grieve not too sore.
Occasionally this introductory force of ua-Te is seen even
with an Infinitive.
wctt' e/x.e ep.avToi' dvepuiTciv (after a colon or full stop).
Plat. Apol. viii.
And so I was questioning myself.
As wo-Tc, like oTi, is merely introductory, it can be followed

by any construction which an independent sentence can take,
e.g. Imperative (supra) : wcrre prj d.TroKdiJLr]s, Plat. Crit. 45.
dv \nth. Optative, coare dv StSdo-Koire,
(ilo-Te Xen. Cyr. iiL 3. 35.
uxTTe dv er6Xp.r](rev, Lts. 7, 28.
B. <^~e with Infinitive.
wa-Te with the Infinitive is epexegetical, i.e. explanatory of

the Principal Verb. It is doubly so, for oio-re is an exjDlanatory
particle, and the Infinitive is in its o^vn nature explanatory.
Indeed locrre with the Infuiitive, as will be seen below, often
takes the place of the simple Infinitive. The consecutive use
of ware with the Infinitive is only one among several of these
explanatory usages. The result contemplated, ie. the purpose,
—
&<m IV/TII INDICATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 271
may be denoted; the condition or limitation; the comnumd or

advice.The character of the explanation or definition will
depend upon the nature of the Principal Verb or Sentence.
1. A Purpose, or Contemplated Result.
Plat. Gorg. 479 c.
They do anything to avoid pmiishment.
Cf. Plat. Phaed. 114, wo-re /zeracrxetv.
2. Limitation or Condition (cf. e^' w, e<^' w re).
^vix[xa)(^tav (TroLrjcravTO Itti TOtcrSe, wcrTe fxi] crTpaTeveiv

€776 IleAoTrovvT^crtovs. Thug. iii. 14.
TJiey made an alliance on these conditions, that they were
not to serve against the Peloponnesiam.
3. A Petition or Command.
TT^WovcTiv locrre "Apyet eTri^êiprjcrai,. ThUC. iiL 103.
They try to induce them to attack Argos.
The Infinitive alone would be more usual here.
Cf. Thug. viii. 45, oio-re. d-rroKTeLvai. SOPH. 0. C. 969, wo-T£

Bavilv, ordaining, requiring, to the effect, that he should die.
4. The definitive force (denoting the character, degree, or

extent) is well shown in the following :
TretVojuat yap ov
TocreiJTOv ov8ev wcrTe p.y\ ov KaXws davetv.
Soph. Ant. 97.
/ shall suffer naught
So great as not to die a noble death (i.e. nothing which
will prevent my dying, etc. ).
For jMTj ov see chapter on the Negatives.
5. wo-re is freely used with the Infinitive, where the Infini-

tive alone might be used.
irdvv fiot efxeXrj(Tev wcrre elSevat. XeN. Cyr. vL 3. 19.
/ was greatly concerned to hioiv.
TTorepa TracSes etcri (ftpovLp-WTepoL (ixne paOelv ?} dvSpes ;
Xen. Cyr. iv, 3. 11.
Are hoys more sensible at learning than men ?

272 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE SENTENCES.
/xeiôv y] wcTTe <f>epeiv.
Too great to bear.

Maius quaiu quod tolerari possit,
ij/vyjiov v8wp wo-Te \ov(T(w6ai. XeN. Ail. iii. 13. 3.
The wafer ?.s cold for bathing.
Ii.r]ya.va\ — oAXat tlmv wore Staêuyeiv Oavarov.

Plat. Apol. xxix.
There are many shifts for escaping death.
lis is more rarely so used, cf. Xen. Cyr. iv, 5. 15, dis lyK-parets
iVoê 1. Canwith the Infinitive state a fact? The Infini-

wcrre
tive, of course, denoting as it does the abstract verbal notion,
cannot, like the Indicative, definitely state a fact, wcrre, with
the Infinitive, is parallel with -pLv and the Infinitive, Sid -vvith
the Infinitive, or any similar substantival use of the Infinitive.
The fact, though not stated, is not excluded. More than this,
the expression may evidently be a variant for oio-re with the
Indicative, open for a writer to use. This occurs when there
is no demonstrative in the Princijial Sentence requiring defini-
tion. In this way Trplv aTrievai avTov, before his departure, may
practically mean, before he depiarted ; Sio. to fxrjSeva irapdvai,
because of the 'presence of no one, may mean, because no one was
present.
KAeap^ôs rjXavviv 67ri Tous Mevwi/os, wcrTe CKe/vovs ex-
7re-X-7]x0aL. Xen. An. I 5. 13.
Clearchus was marching against Menon's men, so that they
were in a state of amazement.
kvkXovvto Traa-av vrjcrov, wen' ap.r]\a.vuv

OTTOi rpdiroiVTO. Aesch. Pers. 460.
They round about
Encircled the whole isle, so that the foe
Knew not tvhich way to turn them.
Cf. Eur. Hec. 730.
Note 2. wa-Te with av and the Infinitive, wcrre with the
Infinitive may be an (oblique) Apodosis, and therefore av will
go with the Infinitive.
lyo) €7rt TOVcrSe cAw oxttc av dvayKacrO-ijvaL, k.t.A.

Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 20.
For ojore ov with the Infinitive, see Negatives.

RELA TIVE CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 273
Note 3. ws is sometimes used for ilitm, generally with the

Infinitive.
6 TTora/xos ToorouTos TO /3ddos, ws [J-'i]8e to. Bopara vTrep€)îLV

Tou (SdOovs. Xex. An. iil 5. 7.
TA^ river is of so great a depth, that even the spears could not
reach the bottom.
(Lit. rise above the depth). Cf. Xex. Ci/r. L 5. 11. More rarely,
u ever in Attic, with an Indicative.
§ 242. Consecutive Sentences in Greek

and Latin.
The nearest approach in Latin to the distinction between

the Infinitive and Indicative is to be found in the use of the
Imperfect Subjunctive and Perfect (Aorist) Subjunctive, e.g.
cecidit ut cms frangeret (cja-re Karayin^vai), and 2it cms fregerit
(SxTTe. K-areaê). But the Latin distinction, even sui^posing it
is always observed, a distinction expressed by two tenses of
the Subjunctive, is a very diiferent thing from that expressed

by two moods, the Infinitive and the Indicative.
§ 243. RELATIVE CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.

Consecutive Sentences are also expressed by Relative
Pronouns, oibs, ocros with Infinitive.
For ToiovTos oxTre are used toiovtos ofos or ofos alone.
„ TCXTOvrov OKTTe „ rocroxTov ocrov or o(tov.
The Negative is jx-fj.
ToiovTo^ eific. olo^ firjSevt aWa 'jreiOeadac rj Xoyw.

Plat.
/ am of such a character as to yield to nothing but reason.
Is (or eiusmodi) sum ut nulli alii rei nisi rationi
paream.
ovK ^v wpa Ota apSetv to jreStov. XeN. An. iL 3. 13.
It was not the season for irrigating the plain.
veixofxevot to. iavrioi' eKaarot ocrov d—o^rjv. ThUC. i. 2.

Each tribe cultivating just enough of its land to obtain a sub-
sistence from it.
Cf. ThTJC. iii. 49, toctovtov ocrov dveyvwKevaL

S
274 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITA TIVE SENTENCES.
Toiaij-a etVoires ola koX tovs 7ra/)0VTas aÔâSai.

Plat. Goi-g. 457.
Saying such things that even the company was annoyed.
"Oari^ (more rarely 09), with the Indicative, is Con-

secutive (parallel to ware with Indicative), Negative ov.
tU ovtco<; evr]dr]<i eartv vfiwv octl^ a'yvoel ravTa ;
Dem.
Who of you is so simple that he is ignorant of this ?
Quis vostrum tana stultus est ut (qui) haec ignoret?

ovSets av yevoiTO oiStus a8a/;iavTivos os av jueivetci/.
Plat. Bep. ii. 360 B.

No one would prove so steeled against temptation as to remain
firm.
dv fidvetev is, of coursB, an Apodosis. For os see Soph. Phil,
409, 444, Ai. 471.
§ 244, LIMITA TIVE OR RESTRICTIVE

SENTENCES.^
waTe {ware fiT]), e<^' w, e^ wre {jir]).
On condition that, on the understanding tluct.
ware {ware fir]) with Infinitive.
e'^' M, ecj) wre with Infinitive (Negative fir]), or Future

Indicative (Negative ov or ixri).
e^7]V avrol'i to)v aWcov ap-êtv EXkrjvcov uxtt avrov;

VTruKoveiv tcS jSacnXel. Dem. 6. 11.
It was in power to rule the rest of
their the Greeks if
they themselves would obey the King.
1 With uicrre Limitative compare the use of ut in Latin :
Bonis viris ita fides habetur ut nulla sit iis fraudis suspitio.
Cic. Off. ii. 33.
Good men are trusted only when there is no suspicion of dishonesty

against them.
—
LIMITATIVE OR RESTRICTIVE SENTENCES. 275
a(f)iefiev ae eiri tovto) ecf) cLre /xrjKeTi (fiiXoaoêlv.
Plat.
We acquit you, on the understanding that you no
longer pursue pMloso]3ky (ita ut pbilosopbari
desinas).
avve^fjcrav ecf) une e^tacriv €K UeXoTTOvvricrov vtto-

crirovhot {kul /i7?Se7roTe eTn^nqcrovraL avTrj<i).
Thuc.
Tliey surrendered on the condition that they should
leave the Feloponnese under truce {and never again
set foot on it).
Observe that the Future Indicative is used in Historic

Sequence.
Note. The Nominative Attraction is observed :
ws av oStos IdkXoL tu. dXXorpta d—oa-Tepelv i(fj (S Ka/co5oô9

dvai. Xen. Ag. 4. 1.
CHAPTEE VIL
§245. CAUSAL SENTENCES.
Causal sentences are expressed in a variety of ways.
A. By Causal Particles and a Finite Mood.

B. By Pielative Sentences.
C By Participles.
D. In various miscellaneous ways.
A. Causal Particles.
The common Causal Particles are also the Temporal

Particles, eTrei, eiretB-ij, w? (cf. Latin cum). The negative
is 01), and the Indicative is the Mood.
rWrjfit (T€ 6fio\o<yovvra eTreLhr) ovk airoKpivei. Pl. Ap.

I assume that you consent, since you do not o.nswer.
eVet OVK eBvvavro Xafi/Saveiv to '^wptov ainevat, rjBrj
e'n-e')(eipovv. Xen. Anal. v. 2. 5.
As they were not able to take the place they were now
trying to go away.
For eiret^ with Imperfect, Thuc. i. 102. For lirei, see

Xen. An. v. 2. 5. For w9, Soph. Phil. 46, 914.
Note 1. When, however, the sentence is explanatory of what

has preceded, on, Siort, StoTrep are used. These particles
cannot introduce a Causal Sentence like hrd, etc. (cf. ore
Temporal).
TDLriprjS Se cr^craypevrj a.v6po}~oiv oid rt aAAo (jjofSipov ecm
n oTt ra^û TrAet; 8ta 3e rt aAAo aAt'Troi dAATÂois ol
€/x7rAeovTes rj Stori ev raêt Kadrjvrat ; XeN. Oec. viii. 8.

For what other reason is a trireme full of men dangerous,
except because it And for what other reason do
sails fast ?
those icho are cm hoard occasion no alarm to one another,
except because they sit still in their ranks ?
276
CAUSAL SENTENCES. 277
Note 2. A
Causal Sentence in Historic Sequence is found
in the Optative when it expresses the indirect vvDrds or
thoughts (virtual oratio ohliqua).
rov IIept/<Aea Iko-kiôv, otl crrparv^yos wv ovk kirkâyoi.
Tiiuc. ii. 21.
Therj were abusing Pericles, because, though general, he did not
lead them out into the field.
oTt OVK €Tre^rjy€v would have been the simple explanation of
the historian.
In Periclem invehebantur quod, cum praetor asset, non
educeret.
Cf. Lrv. ii. 7. Matronae annum ut parentem Brutum
luxerunt, quod tarn acer ultor violatae pudicitiae fuisset.
ws occurs similarly in Xex. Syriip. iv. 6, oTcrOa k-aivka-avTa
avTov Tov 'Aya/x€/Avova, ws fSacrtXevs etr) dya66s, because (as he
said) he was. Both on and ws may, however, be regarded as
introducing an Oblique Statement, the verb of saying being
implied in eKaKLôv and e-TratvecravTa. But in Xex. 3fem. i. 4.
19, we have lirei-ep qy/juaLVTo, which must be causal or ex-
planatory. And in XJen. Hell. vii. 1. 34, we have et^xe Aeyeii/
tt)S Oia TOVTO ovk edeXrjcraLev, where we have a
—oXeixi'jcreLav, utl
real blending of o-t causal and ot6 of the Oblique Statement.
Note 3. ore (just like cum in Latin) besides being Temporal,

is also Causal,
OTC Toivvv TOvO^ ouTws c'x^'j ~pocn]Kei Trpodvfxws edeXeiv

aKOVei-v. DeM. 01 i. 9. 3.
Siroce then this is so, it behoves you to be heartily willing to
listen. Quae cum ita sint, etc.
Observe that this Causal ore, unlike the Temporal ore, can
begin a sentence.
ot' ovv TotovSe y^piqarp.ov etcrTjKOVcra/xev.
Soph. El. 38, Phil. 428, Ant. 170, Ai. 1231.

Cum vero huiusmodi oraculum accepissemus.
Observe that on cannot be elided.
oTTore is similarly used. Thuc. ii. 60, Pl. Leg. 895 B.
eSre causal is poetical (Soph. Ai. 715) : ottov, causal only in
Ionic.
odovveKa (otov ei/cKtt) in a causal sense occurs in SoPH. Ai
123, 153.
278 CAUSAL SENTENCES.
B. Causal sentences are also expressed by relatives

69, 09 76, oarc^, oariq ye, with the Indicative.
Latin qui or quippe qui with Subjunctive.
TTw? <f)epeL^ jap 69 ye avro<; o)(eL ; Ak.

Why how d'ye bear, when you're being carried yourself?
OavfiaaTOv 7rot6t9 09 tj/jlIv ovBev BiBco<;. Xen.
Tou are acting strangely in giving us nothing.
= 0x1 ovSev 8t8a)9.
Mirum facis qui nobis nihil des.
TTws ov KaKVfrroi ocrrts Trepi — Aetovos Trotet tovs KaKovpyov; ;
Must you not be a scoundrel since you are maldng much oj

evildoers? Dem. 24. 107.
05 ye, Soph. El. 911. oo-rts, Soph. Ant. 696.
Note. Other relatives (pronouns and adverbs) are similarly

used.
T^v pr]T(pa ipaKapLôv, oicov Te/vvcuv €KvpQ(Te. HdT. i. 31.
They tcere cminfing the mother happy in having been blest
with such children.
= 0Tt Totourojv eKvpijcev.
€v8aip(jjv pot ecfiaiveTO, ws PlAT. Phaed. ii
dSetos ireXevra.
/ deemed him happy, meet death.
so fearlessly did he
= oTi ovTws aSews, not an uncommon use of ws.
C. Participles are frequently used in a Causal Sense. The

Nêgative is ov. d-e (are S?;), oLov, ola Sj often accompany the
Participles in this use (also wo-re in Herodotus).
6 Kv/Dos, are Trats wv, yjSero tq (rroXy. XeN. Cyr. i. 3, 3.
Cyrus, hoy-like, was charmed with the dress.
ovS' av evi vTretKadoipi SeiVas Odvarov. PlaT. Apol. XX.

Tliere is not a man to whom I would yield through fear of
death.
Aeyo) Se tov^ eveKa, fSovXopevo? Soâi crot o—ep ipol.

Plat. Fhaed. 102 D.
I speak for the following reason, because I want you to think
just as I do.
See also Genitive and Accusative Absolute.
CAUSAL SENTENCES. 279
D. Causal Sentences are also often expressed by rcJ and

the Infinitive.
ov -Aeove^tas eVexa ravr' e-paêv dWa toS SiKaiorepa d^LOvv

Qi]l3alovs rj '^fias. Dem. ii, 13.
It was not for sake of greed that he did this, but because the
Thebans made ajuster demand than we.
Causal Sentences are also very often and very simply

expressed by a Preposition and its case, sometimes by a
Preposition with the Infinitive, e.g.
Ota TO <J3iXovs avTOv? eivai.
Because they are friends.
Cf. especially Std and Kara.
CHAPTER VIII.
§ 246. EXPEESSIONS OF A WISH.

I. A Wish that refers to the Future, and which there-
fore may be fulfilled, is expressed-^
A. By the Simple Optative.
B. By the Optative with etOe, el yap {el and w?, Trm

av ; in poetry).
The Negative is always yu,??.
ft) iral, lyevoLO irarpo'i evrvyearepof;,
ra B' aX\! 6fiolo<;, /cat yevoL av ov kukoi;. Soph.

Boy, may si thou prove more fortimate than thy father.
Like in all else, so shouldst thou prove not vile.
Observe that yevoio alone expresses a wish, yevoi av is
an Apodosis.
yu.7; t,(aT]v jxer a/wvala<;. EUR.
May I not live without culture !
el yap yevoijxrjv, tckvov, dvrl crov vcKpo's. EUR. Hipp. 1410.

Would to God, my child, I were dead in thy stead.
eW vfjitv dfi(f)Oiv vors yevoiTO cr(iicf>povelv, SoPH. Ai. 1264,

Would that to you twain judgment were granted for discretion
et /ioiyevoiTo (fiOoyyos ev fip6.')(L0(Ti. EUR. Hec. 836.
Oh, that a voice were given me in these arms.
ws 6 TaSe TTopoiV oAoito. SoPH. El. 126.

Ah, thai he wlw contrived this might perish.
Cf. EuR, Hipp. 407.

TTtUs ai' dvT e/xou rpecfiOLTe TvpSe t^v vocrov ;
Soph. Phil. 794.

Would that in my stead ye might hug this plague.
p-q TTcos eyw TO(ravTas SiKas ^vyot/tt. PlAT. Apol. ui.
May notI be indicted on charges so serious /

2S0
—
EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH. 281
II. A Wish which refers to the Past, and which there-

fore can no longer be fulfilled, is expressed
{Imperfect Indicative (of pre-

sent time, continued or ha-
bitual actions).
Aorist Indicative (of single
acts).
B. (ocpekov (Aorist), sometimes w(f>eXkov (Imperfect),

from oêtXxo, I owe, with the Infinitive (Present or Aorist).
etOe, el <ydp (fjuii) may accompany mcpeXov, sometimes to?
in poetry.
eld' elp^ê?, w reKovaa, /SeXr/ou? ^peva<i.

EUE. El. 1061.
Would that tliou hadst, mother, letter jiulgment (but

thou hast not).
ude ao(,, b) UepUXea, Tore crvveyevo/jLrjv.
Xen. Mem. i 2. 46.
/ wish I had been with you then, Pericles.
<B? m(f)e\ov nrdpoidev eKKiirelv ^tov. SoPH. El. 1131.

Ah, vjould that I had first forsaken life.
eW 0)<êA.e<; rotaSe rryv. yvw/iTjv Trarpus

Ovy](TKovTO<; elvaL. SOPH. El. 1021.
Would thou hadst been thus minded on the day thy father
died.
firjiroT weêAetv Xnreiv
Trjv iKvpov. Soph. Phil. 969.

JVould that I ne'er had left
My Scijros !
a»S Trplv SiSdât y uxfteXes fiea-os Siappayrjvai.

Arist. Ban. 955.
Pity, ere yow taught 'em, that you didn't burst asunder in
the midst.
——
!82 EXFRESSIONS OF A WISH.
Note 1. A wish may be made to depend on a condition which

isexpressed by ovtw. Instead of the sentence which logically
should follow " 50 may I as" an Indicative or an Impcra
. . .
tive is substituted.
OUTO) vtK^crai/Ai t eyw koI voixLôifxyjv crocfios,
m vfias rjyovfxaL ervat 6'eaTas Serious. Ar. Nub. 520.

So may I icin and be considered wise, as I hold you to be a
clever audience.
ourtos ovaiariv Twv TeKvoiv, /jllctIo tov ai'Sp' eKstvov.

Ar. Th. 469.
So may I be blest in my children . . . I do Iiate that fellow.
OUTWS ovaL(r9e tovtuiv, fxi] TrepuS-qre fie. DeM. Aph. il. 842. 9.
So may you enjoy this . . . do not neglect me.
Instead of saying on this condition, namely, that you do not

neglect me.
This is exactly like the well-known Latin idiom :—

Sic te diva potens Cypri
Ventorumque regat pater

Navis . . .
Finibus Atticis
Reddas incolumem precor. HoR. Od. 1. iii. 1.
Sic venias hodierne . . . tibi dem turis honores.

TiBXJLL. 1. \di. 33.
Note 2. Explanation of expressions of a wish.
(1) Optatives and Indicatives with el, d ydp, eWe are clearly
Protases with suppressed Apodoses.
et yap ravTa yevoiTO (sc. KaAws o.v eirf).
d yap Tttura eyevero (sc. KaAws dv t/v).
Latin is parallel
si haec ita fiant, fierent, facta essent.
With a»s compare ut, utinam in Wishes.
(2) &4>eXov {I ought, or had ought), on the other

hand, is ân
Apodosis Avith a suppressed Protasis; used like xPV^y ^^"
mthout an av.
— :
EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH. 283
Latin again supplies a parallel

(Eum) si uUa in te pietas esset, colere dehebas.
Cic. Phil ii. 38.
Tunc ego debueram capienda ad Pergama mitti

Tunc poteram magni, si non superare, morari
Hectoris anna meis. Ov. Met. xii. 445.
CHAPTER IX.
§ 247. EELATIVE SENTENCES.
Eelative sentences are introduced by either (1) Eelative

Pronouns, or (2) Particles of Eelative origin, «?, ore, el,
b(f)pa, etc.
The chief distinction between Eelative Sentences is
that of Definite and Indefinite, a distinction explained in

§172. It applies to many Eelative Particles as weU as
Pronouns, e.g.
A. Definite —
icrre oirodev r^Xto9 avia'êi, Kac ottol Bverai. Xen.
Tou knew where (lit. whence) the sun rises, and vjhere
(lit. vjhither) it sets.
oi 'yala Sef at Oavacri/xov fi , oTra><i e^w- SoPH.

Earth ! receive nie, as I am, in death.
Accipe me, ut smn.
B. Indefinite —
oTTOfc av arparrjyov eKirefx-^re, 01 e')(6poi Kara-
<yeKoiai. Dem.
Wheresoever you send out a general, your enemies
ridicule you.
eêcTTL ')(pri(T6av b'rroo'i av /SovXcovTai. Xen.

You may make vjJiatever use (of it) you please.
284
RELATIVE SENTENCES, 285
Definite Relative sentences present no difficulty. In-

definite Relative sentences freely form Subordinate sen-
tences of every kind, — Conditional, Temporal, INIodal,
Consecutive, etc., and will be found under these several
heads. Some Relative Particles denote Place {ôttoi, 'iva,
etc.), but a special chapter on Local Sentences is un-

necessary.
Other uses of the Relative will be seen by reference to
the Index. Especial attention should be paid to the
syntax of the Negatives with Relatives see chapter on
;
the Negatives, Part IIL

PART III.
PREPOSITIONS, NEGATIVES, ORATIO

OBLIQUA, AND FIGURES.
CHAPTER I.
§248. PREPOSITIONS.
Prepositions in Attic are particles which have a double
use. Either (1) they are joined in Composition with
Verbs; or (2) they serve as links between the oblique
case of Nouns or Pronouns and other words, especially
Verbs, in the sentence. As such links they denote Place,
Time, and various iigurative relations, Agency, Cause,
Means, etc., more distinctly than could be done by the
oblique cases alone. Prepositions also help to form com-
pound adjectives and substantives. Philology and Epic
Poetry, however, enable us to trace the origin and usage
of Prepositions further back than their Attic uses, and to
account for those uses.
§ 249* Introductory Note to Prepositions.

1. Prepositions appear to have been originally case-
forms. Thus v-6 (Ep. vTTa.i) was Locative, meaning on the
under side ; virkp (Sanskrit tijpari), on the upper side ; Sid (Ep.
and Poet. Stai), in the space between; avri is Locative, ai/ra
Accusative (cf. avrrfv, coram) ; Trepl. Locative ; tt/jos {Trporl)
Locative ; Traoa (Traoai) Locative ; irpo is Ablative. As cases
;
INTRODUCTORY NOTE TO PREPOSITIONS. 287
they must all have been capable of taking a Genitive. ^

Thus vTToX \dov6% on the under side of the earth; Trap ttoSos
(Trapat), PiNDAR, P.
10. 97, on the near side of the foot; dvrl
ifxelo, II. 481, on the opposite side of me.
xxi. This is con-
firmed by the fact that all the quasi-prepositions, which are
cases of nouns, are joined to a Genitive, e.g. 6vpa(e, EuR.
Bacch. 331. This stage, however, is previous to all written
hterature, and belongs to Philology rather than Syntax.
2. They were used Adverbs ^ independently of Verb or

as
Noun. Instances occur frequently in Homer, e.g. /j.eXave'i
still
8' ava (iorpve.'s ijcrav, hlack clusters were throughout, 11. xviii. 512:
7re/)i 77/30 yap eyx^' dmv, around in front he was raging with his
spear, H. xi. 180 dpcf^l 8e ol ppdê Tei;xf«) on either side forr

:
him (or near him) clashedJiis arms : -n-epl Krjpt cjuXeea-Ke, exceeding
much at heart he loved him. The Adverb qualifies the Verb,
but stands apart from it.
3. A transitional period, that of the Homeric poems, suc-

ceeds. Originally the Noun went straight with the Verb;
the relation between the two might be more particularly
defined by an Adverb. Thus ayayetv Sojxov, to lead home;
dyaydv 86p.ov, to lead from home (Genitive of separation or
Ablative) wixol<s /SdX' alyiSa, on his shoidders (Locative) he cast
:
his shield. Compare these with elsrjyov 6elov 86pov, Od. iv. 43
€K 8' ayaye KXurirjs, II. i. 346 rjyev h KXicrirjv, II. i. 89
: : dp<^\
Se x«'''''«' w/^06s dia-crovrai. In the first two of these last four
examples the Adverbs ets and eK further define the direction of
the Verb, and form Compound Verbs which " govern " respec-
tively theAccusative and Genitive. But in the last two the
Adverb serves as a link between Noun and Verb, and becomes
a Preposition.
4. Prepositions thus come to furnish new analytic cases,

the old cases with their blunted and confused sufiixes being
1 This is Curtius' view {Elucidations, Ch. xvii. ) It must apply to

Prepositions only when they do not denote separation (in which case
they would be joined to an Ablative). Such a connection between
Prepositions and the Genitive is said not to exist in Sanskrit, and on
this gi'oiind Delbruck (Syntahtische Forschungen, iv. ch. ix. p. 134)
only partially accepts Curtius' theory.
- No distinction is here intended in speaking of Prepositions as case-
fonns and as Adverbs. All oblique cases are, of course, adverbial,

except the true Genitive, which is adjectival or attributive.
288 PREFOSITIONS.
insufficient to express all the new relations between Noun

and Verb which were suggested by the expansion of Greek
thought and knowledge. When a Preposition links a case to
any other word but a Verb, to an Adjective or Noun, a verbal
meaning is readily understood. In determining the force of
a Preposition we must carefully consider three points the :
meaning (1.) of the Preposition, (2.) of the Case, (3.) of the

Verb (or verbal word). In the stereotyped phrases with
Prepositions which have practically become Adverbs or Adjec-
tives, it will be easy enough to supply the verbal notion which
the phrase requires to complete it logically,
5. A few instances may elucidate the foregoing remarks.
a. The noun linked by a preposition to its case has a

verbal meaning.
StaXAayat Trpos Ttva, reconciliation loith any one, IsoCR. 60 B,
compared with SiaXXaÔ^vai Trpos nva, to be reconciled vMh
any one.
ToôT-qs a.(f)' LTTTTOV, compare with roêuetv d(f>' linrov.
b. The Preposition with its Case is a fuller expansion of

the Simple Case.
Thus we may say, xp-qa-rov irpos dvS/aos kern, or xP'/o-tou
dv8pds ecTTt, it is the part of a good man.
Lysias writes ixvrjcrdrjvac rtvo?: Thucydides, I'vrjo-Orjvai Trepi
Tivos : Demosthenes, fJLvrjcrOrjvai xnrep tlvos.
So we may say, elpiâ-erat Trpos v/x.as, or vfxiv, 17 dX-rjOeLa, the
truth shall be told you; p^dyea-dai tw At/^w koI tw Sti/'e', Xen.,

to fight with hunger and thirst ; fidxô'dai. Trpos eTri6vfj.i'as, Plat.,
to fight against desires.
Similarly, rj Trap' I/aou eiivota=:i7 etSvoia fiov, my goodwill
(Subjective Gen.); to Trap' Ijiov dS6/c7jjua=To dSUrjixd {xov, the
unvng done by me (Objective).
6. Improper or Spurious Prepositions are those which can
be joined with Cases, e.g. dvev, eVeKa with Genitive, ws with
Accusative, but which are not compounded with Verbs.
7. Tmesis is a late Grammarians' term to denote the

separation between Preposition and Verb. The term is
unnecessary, for, as we have seen, in early Greek it is not the
separation, but the combination, which has to be accounted
for. Tmesis in Attic is but a survival of the earlier usage :
it is practically confined to poetry and a few colloquialisms,

—
PREPOSITIONS AND THE THREE CASES. 289
oAwAa/xev, EuR. I.T. 1371, uTTo' cr' oAw. It is seldom

e.g. St' ap'
found except when a particle intervenes. Aesch. Sept. c.

Theb. 672 forms an exception.
8. Dissyllabic Prepositions are oxytone. They become

Paroxytone {i.e. Barytone) in certain cases (1.) When they:
stand immediately after their Verb or Case, e.g. dAeo-a? aTro

Travras eraipovs, l^dxrjs irkpi. This is called Anastrofhe.
'Kixi, dvTi, dvd, Sta are not liable to Anastrophe. Mono-
syllabic Prepositions take the acute accent by Anastrophe,
but only when they come at the end of a line. (2.) When
they are equivalent to a Compound Verb, generally a Sub-
stantive Verb, dva=dvd(rTridL /iieTa=/A€T€o-Tt, similarly €vt,
€7rt, Trdpa, Trept, and perhaps v-o. (3.) d-o and Trept when used
as Adverbs.
Oxytone Prepositions with elision lose their accent, e.g.
vap' "qiiepav, Itt' avr^.
§ 250. The Prepositions and the Three Cases.

The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object of the
Verb. This, however, impHes direction to, or on, and thus
Prepositions with the Accusative denote motion to,^ extension
along or over.
The Genitive is the Case of Connexion and Separation.
Prepositions with the Genitive denote connexion v:ith, or sepor
ration from: in the former sense the true Genitive is used,
in the latter the old Ablative use has been handed on to the
Genitive.
The Dative is connected with Prepositions chiefly in its
locative sense. Prepositions with the Dative denote nearness
to, or rest at, by, with, or near.
§ 251. Collected usages of Prepositions.

1. The Agent is expressed by the following Prepositions :
vTTo with Gen. (the regular expression to

denote the Agent ; the others which
follow are special.)
* But it must be remembered that the notion of motion must origin-
ally have come from the combined signification of Verb, Preposition,
and Case.
— —
290 PREPOSITIONS
Trpos (in poetry and Ionic prose) with Gen.
TTapd (the agent as the source) with Gen.

aTTo (in some special prose uses) with Gen.
8id (the intermediate agent) with Gen.
2. Means by
Sid with Gen. (the regular expression to
denote the Means; the others are special).

OLTTO.
€K with Gen.
€v with Dat.
^vv with Dat.
3. The usages of certain Prepositions are closely parallel :
aTTO
: :
PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 291
§ 252. PREPOSITIONS AND THE CASES.

I. Prepositions with one Case.
a. Accusative : avd, eU (e?), C09 (dfM^l practically in

prose).
h. Genitive : avrt, airo, e^ (e/c), irpo (aveu, eveKo,

eKUTi, %a)/)t9, dxph fJ'€Xpt)'
c. Dative : ev, crvv (afia, 6/j,ov).
II. Prepositions with two Cases.

Accusative and Genitive : Sid, Kard, vvep, /jberd.
III. Prepositions with all three Cases.

afi<f)C, eTTc, irapa, irepi, irpo'i, viro.
I.— PREPOSITIONS WITH ONE CASE ONLY,

(a.) WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY.
§ 253. 'Ai/c£.
^ Avd, up to, through, opposed to Kard (compare the two

throughout), Eng. on, Gothic ana. Germ. an. 'Avd related
to €vi {ev) as on and in.
Lat. an-helo, I breathe up, Curt. Etyrtiol. i. 381.
Up along
TO, TfXola ava tov irorafiov ov hwavrai ifKeeiv.

Heeod.
The boats cannot sail up the stream (cf. Kard).
Throughout or Among
aOLStfia avd rrjv 'EX\a8a eyevero. HerOD.
He became famoiLS in song throughout all Greece.
oiKciv ava. to. opiy, Xen. An. iii. 5. 16, to live in the hills.
: : : ! :
292 PREPOSITIONS.
Distrihutivdy
eiropevOrjaav ava Trevre Trapaacrayya^; r?)? r]fjbepa<;.
Thei/ marched at the rate of five parasangs a day.

So ava Ikotov, in bodm of a hundred, in centuries. Ct
S. Luke ix. 14, S. MattL xx. 10.
Phrases:
dva KpoLTO's ((f)evy€iv), with all one's might (cf. Kara K/DciTos
dva Aoyov (^vo/xeva SevSpa), PlaT. Phaed. lix. trees
growing) in proportion ; dva <n6iia. ex^"'? ^^ ^^^ *^ one's
mouth, at the tip of the tongue.
N.B. dva has the sense of dvaxTTrjdt, up! arise! sursum!
Cf. Soph. Ai. dXA' dva 1^ k^pdv(av, come, up from thy seat
Note. dva. is also used in Homer, in Lyric poetry (Pindar),
and in Choruses of the Tragedians with the Dative {e.g.
Eur. /. A. Ibi).
In Composition :
(1.) Up, dvafBXe-oi, I look up. (2.) Reverse action, hack,

dvavruo), / throw the head hack. (3.) Again, dvafSkeiroi,
I recover sight.
§ 254. Et9 or es.
Eh or €9, into, to, opposed to e^, out of. Original form

perhaps ei/?, from eVt-?. In Pindar ev means in and into.
Cf. Latin in and inter with Accusative.
(1) Of Place:—
Motion to, info, for
SiKcXol e| 'lra\La<i Bie^7}aav e? HiKeXtav. ThuC.
The Sicels crossed over out of Italy into Sicily {or for
Sicily).
With verbs of rest

KaraKXeuLv Is ttjv vrjcrov. ThTJC. i. 109.
To shut up in the island. (Constructio praegnans.)
: — :
PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 293
{To speah) hefore :
Aeyetv ets to ttA^ôs.

To speak hefore the people.
Cf. ewrievai, o-T>Jvai Is,
Looking towards :
TO es HaW-qvrjv t€i\o<s. ThUC. L 56.

The wall facing Fallene.
Phrases :
CIS oiKOVTLOv, ets Soparos vXrjyrfv (d</)iKveMrâi).

To get ivithin javelin's throw, spear thrust.
Opposed to i^.
(2) Of Time:—
Up to, until
eU T7)v €(0, till daivn ; €<? e/i€, up to my time.
At such a time, hy such a date :
et's ecnrepav, ets TpLr-qv (with or without -q/JLepav), Is ttjv

va-repaiav (i^KeLv), to come at even, oil the third day (or
in three days), on the morrow.
Phrases :
Is Kaipov, in season ; eis avpiov, on the morrow ; ets eireiTo,

hencefm'ward ; ets a-a^ (or €tVa7ra|), once for all, etc.
(3) With Numbers :
Denoting limit, up to, amounting to
vav^ e? rm T€TpaKoaia<;. Thuc,

Ships to the number of four hundred.
69 hpa'îJii]v SiaSovi'ai. Thuc.
To pay each man up to (i.e. as much as) a drachma.
Phrases :
ets eva, ets hvo, ets recrcrapas.

One, two, four deep.
et's 8vvaiJ.iv, to tlie extent of one's ability ; eis inrepfSoX.'qv, in
excess.
: ——
294 PREPOSITIONS.
(4) Of Eelation to :
dfjiaprdveLv eU nva, to do wrong to any one.
Purpose
is ToSe rjKoiiev, for this purpose we are come.
eis KaXXos (rjv, Xen., to live for show.
(5) Special Pheases :
es avSpas ("EAXv^vas, etc.) TeXeuv, to come to rmjVbS estate

(to be enrolled among, belong to Greeks). Cf. iyypd^xa.
c's Tt (t vto) TekevToiv, to end in a certain way.
Is Trav d<fiLKi(r6at, to come to everything, i.e. to try every
means.
€is 'AttoAAwvos, Ai6vv(Tov, to Apollo's, Dionysus' temple, ad
Apollinis, ad Bacchi. So eis StSao-/<aAou, tis efiavrov
(<j>oLTav), sc. oTkov or some such word.
N.B. ei's is not used in Attic of motion to individual per-

sons ; Trpos or ws must be employed.
In Composition :
Into. Examples unnecessary.
§ 255. 'a?.
0)9, to, with Persons only, not with things,

with 7r/309, eU, eiri,, and alone.
Ajiv eirpeo-êvaavTO. Thuc.
Q)f;'
They sent an embassy to Agis.
{b.) WITH GENITIVE ONLY.
§ 256. 'Kvri
dvTL (original sense, over against, opposite to), instead of,
in exchange for ; avra. Epic adv. and prep, over against,

face to face ; dvrrjv, Ep. adv. over against. Cf. ev-avn-o^
dvTi-Kpv. In Homer dvTu is stillan adverb rather than a
preposition. Lat. ante (orig. anted), cf. Germ, ant-wort
: — :
PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONLY. 295
(1) Of Place, opposite to

This sense is Epic.
(2) Instead of:
KUKa 7rpaTT€L avr a'yaOaiv. PlaT.

He does evil instead of good.
So /ieitov, ttAIov, dvTi, instead of Comparative and Simple

Genitive, Soph. Ant 182, Tr. 577.
(3) In return for :
Bel TO, fjb€v avri, apjvpiov aXkaâadau. PlAT.

We tmist exchange some things for money.
avB' Siv, wherefore (also because, cf. Soph. Antig. 1068).
Earely like -p6s, for the sake of (lit. over against, in the
presence of), vnth verbs of entreaty, see Soph. 0. C. 1326.
In Composition :
Many meanings, (1) Against, i.e. opposite or in opposition,

dvTi/3aLvw. I plant the foot against, also / resist. (2)
I help in
Eeciprocity, substitution, or equality, dvTi(3oi]6oJ,
turn ; dvûn-aros, proconsul ; dvriTv-os, struck, or striking
back, cmresponding ; avrWeos, godlike.
§ 257. 'Atto.
Atto, aioay, off, from. Sansk. apa, away, Lat. ah, Germ.
al, Eng. off, of. 'Atto (Sausk. apa) connected with errl
(Sansk. api, further, after).
(1) Of Place :
Away from
aiTO rr)<i avTcov op/xcovTai. IHUC.
They advance from their oum country.
With verbs of rest (from the ohserver's point of view) :
efSoacrev (£770 irerpas o-radets. EUR.

Shouted from the rock, standing {on it).
Hence many phrases : ot u.-h -w -rrvpym', the men on the

toicers ; dno vewv, dcfi Ittttiov fidxecrdai, to fight on board ship,
on horseback.
: —
: : :
296 PREPOSITIONS.
Phrases :
ciTTo o-KOTTOU, Kaipov, wldc of tkc TTiark (cf. dnb yvw/jiT^s,

Soph. Tr. 389) ; aTro Tpovov (Plat.), unsuitably,
opposed to TT/DOS TpOTTOV, KaTOL TpOTTOV.
diro BevSpoiv KaraSelv (XeN.), to tie to trees.
(2) Of Time :—
After, since
airoTwv atrtov BiaTToveladai. Xen.

To vjorh after meals.
Phrases :
TO aTTo TovSe, henceforth ; d^' o5, ex quo, since ; dm

TvaXaiov, dp)(a[ov, of old ; d(f>' ecnrepas (ThUC. vii. 29),
at even.
(3) Origin :
OL fxev UTTO Oecov <ye'yovoT€<;, ot S* e^ avratv roav decov

Isoc.
Some descended (remotely) /r<97?i gods, others legotten
(directly) ly the gods themselves.
Material
KpacTis diro re Tqs 'qSovrj? (TvyKeKpa/xevi] o/jlov Kal d—o rrjs
Xt'Trrjs. Plat. Phaed. ii.
A combination consisting partly of pleasure and partly of
pain.
Means
^r^v diro TroXe/xov (yewpytas). ThuC. and XeN
To live hy war (husbandry).
TlepiKX'qs aTTO SiaKocrtojv veujv KareTroXefirjcrev rrjv 2a/zov.
Is. 15. 11.
Pericles loith 200 ships redmed Samos.
Cf. ThUC. i. 91, arro TrapaxTKevrjs.
Cause, in consequence of or for

diro Tivos 9av/JLdê(r6aij e7ratveto"ât, SialSaXXecrOai.
To be admired, praised, slandered in consequence of anything.
auTWi/ twv epyiav crKOJreiTe.

dir ThUC. L 17.
Judge from facts themselves.
—
PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE OXL Y. 297
Agent, less direct than vtto :
iTrpdxdr] utt' avTwv ovBiV. ThUC. i. 17.

Nothing was achieved by them.
See Poppo's note.
(XTTo with a case is often a periphrasis for a case alone, e.g.
6 a-o T(3v 8opo(f)6p(Dv (t>6(3o<;, fear of the body guard, Xen. Hier.
X. 3; Twv d-o Twv SîfMov Tts, one of the people, Thx'C. iv. 130.
THUCYDroEs's partiality for a free use of d-o is remarkable.
(4) Phkases :
01 (1770 riiâyopov, IIAdTcoro?, the school of Pythagoras,

Plato.
ol oLTTo rrjs 'AKaS-iyxeias, -Toas, the Academics, Stoics (the
Academy, the Porch).

old—o CTKrjvrjs., actors.
d-u o-ttovStJs, earnestly ; drrb tov icrov {rrji 'crv^s), dv Tcttjs,
equally; dTzh rov !rpo<f)avovs, openly; d-6 yXwcro-T^s
etVeiv, to state by icord of mouth (Thtc. ^î. 10), to
repeat by heart (Xen. Symp. iii. 5), from hearsay (Aesch.
Ag. 813); opp-drw d-6 (Eue. Med. 216), icith on^s
own eyes; d-o tov avTOjid-ov {Ta^y)pdTov), spontaneously,
sponte, casu quodam ; d77o ay^peiov, at a given signal.
In CoiiPOSiTiON :
(1) Separation, hence completion, and ceasing, dTroXovw, I

wash off; d-epyd(op.ai, I finish off, i.e. / complete;
dTToA^yw, / leave off, desist. (2) Restoration, diroU8u>fj.i,
I give back.
Separation also becomes practically privative, e.g.
OLTrayopivoi, I forbid ; d-oxptyMaros, without money.
§ 258. 'E/c, 'E^

*Ek, 'E|, out of; opposed to eU, into. €k and utto run
parallel throughout. Lat. ex, e (ec).
(1) Of Place :—
Out of:
e/c îrdpTT)'; <f36vy€i.
He is banished from, {put of) SvartcL
: ;;
298 PREPOSITIONS.
Denoting cluingc ; (cf. avrt).
ttoKlv e/c TToXeco'; aWarreiv. PlaT.

To chaTige city after city.
With verbs of rest

€K Sei'S/Jwv tt7ray;^€(râi. ThUC. iii. 81.
To hang themselves on trees.
Phrases :
Hence many phrases (observe that the first three or

four are instances of Constructio Praegnans) tous €k t^s :
vavfiaîa^ {ovk dveXo/xhovs), Plat. Apol. XX., those in the sea-

fight ; 01 Ik vqarijiv KaKovpyoL, Thuc. i. 8, the evil-doers in (of) the
islands ; oX kK twv Trrpycov, those on the toivers, Thuc. iii. 22
TO i^'Icrd/xov reixos (opposed to to es HaXXi'^VTiv), ThUC. i. 64,
the icall on the side of the Isthmus ; Ik Se^ms, on the right; e^
apL(Trepa.<;, on the left; ck vofxwv, in accoi'dance with the laws ;
6pdo<i k^ opdwv St(^/)Mv, Soph. El. 742, erect in chariot erect

kK Trj<i ^v')(fi<i {kK Svfiov, HoM.) iuith all one' s heart ; Ik era vttJs
(Aeyets), self-promptcd, Soph. El. 344, cf. airo ; kK iroXXov, at
a long distance, Xen. ; Ik t6£ov pr/mTos, Xex., at how-shot;
CK x^pos p-o-xv^ irmfvardai, Xen., to fight hand to hand.
(2) Of Time ;—
Since, after:
€^ ov {y^povov), since, ex quo ; eK tov aptoTov, after

hreahfast. (So airo)
kK TouTov, after this (ck tovtojv gen. in consequence of this).
eK To{J XoiTTov (twv XoiTTwv) for thc future, Xen. and Plat.
After, denoting change:
eK BaKpvcov jeXav. XeN.

To laugh after tears (iceeping).
rv(f>Xos Ik SeSopKOTOs Kal tttwôs avrl ttXovctlov.

Soph. 0. T. 454.
Blind after seeing, and poor instead of (being) ritih.
Ever since:
eK veov, eK TraiBos, from youth, from childhood.
: :
(3) OeiGIN :—
dyaOot KUi e^ ayadcov.
Plat. (Cf. Soph. Ant. 466.)
Good, and boom of good parents.
Material
TO ayKia-rpov 1^ aSa/iavTOS. PlAT. Rep. 616.
The hook is of adamant.
Agent (Herodot. and poetry, rare in Attic) :
fK Twv8' apôfxai, SOPH. El. 264.

By them am I ruled.
Cf. Soph. Ant. 957. 973, Thug, iii 69, Xen. Hell. iii. 96.
Cause, Consequence, or Means :
Ik TToXifiov elprjvr] /SeftaiovTai. ThUC. i. 120.

Peace is secured by meana of tear. (Cf. Sia.)
Dependence upon
Trappi](rLa e^ dXi^decas t)pTi]Tai. DeM. 1397. 1.
Plain speaking depends on truth {comes of).
Cf. aTrayxeo-âi Ik, above.
Mixed Phrases :
01 1^ 'AKaS/y/xeias, eK tov IlepiTrctTOV (cf. d-o).

The Academics, the Peripatetics.
So N. Test, ol Ik ttio-tcws, the adherents of the Faith.
6 e^ v/Miov TTodos, Soph. Tr. 631, yotir desire (like a. gen.),

so vfxvos 6^ 'Epivvwv, the song of the Erinyes. Aesch.
Eum. 344.
Adverbial Phrases :
€K /3ias, by force ; ck tov (f>avepov (7rpo(j>avovs), openly (cf.

ex impro-s-iso, ex consulto, etc., Latiu) ; Ik tov el kotos,
Thug. iv. 17, in all likelihood; ws Ik twv irapovTwv,
Thug. far as present circumstances alloiv ; k^
iv. 1 7, 'so
ttrcov (totj icrov) equally ; €K Tou avTo/icxTov, by chance, or
accident, Xen. (less common than a-o).

: :
300 PREPOSITIONS.
Periphrasis for a case

at k^ 'A6r]v(ov Trapdhoiy the maids of Athens.
In Composition :
(1) Separation, removal, completion (cf. otto), eKâtvo), I go

out ; cKTrepdo), I sack utterly, out and out.
§ 259. npo.
Upd, before, in front of. Cf. tt/jo?. Lat. prod, pro.
(1) Of Place :—
Before, in front of:
Mivooa rj vr)ao<i Kelrai irpo Meyapcov. ThUC.

The island of Minoa lies off {in front of) Megara.
Hence in defence of, for the sake of. (Cf. virep) :
r/6/eAe 0ave6v Trpo Keivov. EUR. Alc. 18.

She ivilled to die for him.
Phease.
Trpo oôv, forwards, onwards.
(2) Of Time :—
ol irpo rjfiwv <ye<ôvoTe<;. ISOC.
Those ivho were lorn lefore us {our forefathers).
6 irpo Tov xpovos, thefwmer time, aforetijne.
(3) Of PtELATiON :—
In ijreference to, cf. avTi, irepi
irpo Tci)v ra /Spa'^vrepa atpeiaOai. Plat.

jSeXTLaTOJv
To choose more unimportant things in preference to
the highest things.
irpo TToAAou TToielcrOaL {rifMacrOai).

To esteem highly, (lit. in preference to much).
In Composition :
(1) Forth, forward, in front, of place and so oi pre-eminence,

of substitution or defence, Trpo/3dXXo), I put forward ;
Trpodvpov, front door ; 7rp6e8pos, piresident ; Trp6p.ayo<i,
champion. (2) Before, of time, TrpoaLo-ddvoixai,, I learn
beforehand.
:
§ 260. "Kvev.
"Avev, loithout, opposed to (tvv.
(1) Withmt the help of, or (yrder of ti fipoToU avev Atos xeA-
:•
cirai; Aesch. Ag. 1487, what comes to pass among men wUliout
the will of Zeus? (iniussu lovis, love nolente). Cf. Thuc. viii. 52.
In Plat. Gorg. 518 d, without reference to. (2) Eoxept, besides
(like x'^P'-^)
'•
T^"'"^*^ ^^^^ xpvo-ou, Plat. Grit. 112 c, all things
omnia praeter aurum.
except gold,
In Soph. 0. C. 502 av&v comes after its case.
§ 261. "îveKa, evEKev.
"Ev€Ka, evGKev (Ion. e'lvtKa, elveKev), Poet. ovveKu.
Generally after its case, sometimes separated from its case

(Ar. Ecc. 105-6). Lat. gratia, causa.
(1) For the sake of : KoXaK^miv evexa fiicrOov, Xen. Hell. V. 1.

17, to flatter for the sake of {in oi'der to get) a reward. (2) So far
as concerns : kjxov ye IviKa, so far as I am concerned ; eveKa tcSv
6<{>6aXfiS)v, Plat,, so far as depends on the eyes.
Note. Sometimes pleonastically with other Prepositions

diro /Joi/S eveKa, ThUC. vii. 92 ;d/i<^t (TOV evcKa, SOPH. Fhil.
534; Tivos 81) x^P'-^ 'iv€Ka ; Plat. Leg. 701 D.
§ 262. "E/cart.
"EKan (Ep, with the help of).
(1) Because of,on account of: apexes eKan., SoPH. Phil. 670,
on account of (i.e.as a reward for) valour. (2) So far as concerns
(like eVcKa) : TrX-qBov<i eKart, Aesch. Fers. 337, so far as nurrir
hers went.
§ 263. Xwpts.
X(i3pi<;, ivitJiout.
(1) Without help of : irovov toi X'^P'S ovSei/ evTVXf', SOPH.

El. 945; vnthout toil nothing prospers. (2) Far from: x<^P^s
dv^/DWTTuv (TTifiov, SoPH. FUl. 4:87 far fvoM track of men. , (3)
Without considering, besides : x'^P'-'^ Sd^vjs, apart from reputation
Plat. Apol. xxiv. (4) Different from, Plat, iac/i. 195 a.
Note. Yw/Dts is also used Adverbially.

302 PREPOSITIONS.
§ 264. Besides the Prepositions, a greater number of

old Cases, which have become Adverbial, are used like
Prepositions with a Genitive.
(1) Of Place i^'^xP'- '''^^ vroAews, Thug., as far as the

: city.
(2) Of Time i^'^xP'- toctovtov, tovtov, so far, up to this

: time.
(3) /J-^XP''
'''^^ ^LKa'iov (Swarou), SO far as is right (jjossible).
II. (1) For the sake of : tou ;;âptj/;

X"P'^* To{! ev€Ka ; for =
the sake of ivhat, or wherefore ? (2) Because of: x^pti' X^'^^5=
XîSa.'s €KaTt, heaiuse of pride, Soph. 0. T. 888. (3) So far as
concerns: SaKpviov x^P'-î if tears could avail, Soph. Fr. 501.
Note. ifjiy]v x'^P'-î '^V^ X'^P'-î f^ ^2/ sake, thy sake, not x°-P'-^
ifiov, (Tov, mea, tua causa, gratia.
irpos x"P'îs also redundantly used, loith reference to, for the
sake of. Soph. Ant. 30, 008.
Several old Accusatives adverbially used, meaning like,

III.
after the fashion of: hU-qv (lit. usage) ; rpoirov (way) ; Se/xas
(Epic only, form or body). Cf. Lat. instar.
IV. aAis, aSqv, enough; St'xa, apart; XdOpa, Kpvcfia, secretly.
V. Many old local cases.

lyy vs, near (also takes Dative) ; eto-w, Ivtos, within ; £|o>,
Iktos, without; fxcTa^v, between; Trpoa-o), iroppw, airoOiv, far

from ; Trpoa-dev, in front of; oTncrBev, KaToiriv, be-
epLirpoa-Oev,
hind ; dficjiorepoidev, eKarepoiOev, 'ivOev Kal evdev, on both sides

of; irkpa, irkpav, beyond, O^ross ; dvTliripas, KaravrtTrepcs, avrt/cpv,
KaravTLKpv, opposite.
(c) WITH DATIVE ONLY.

% 265. 'El..
Êv (poet, iiv, Ivl, elvi), in, within, opposed to eU, into,
and e|, out of. Lat. in, Eng. in, Germ. in. Cf. ava.
[The old Adverbial usage of cV still continues in the phrase

€v Se, and among, and therein, and besides. Several instances
occur in Sophocles.]
: — : ——
PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE ONLY. 303
(1) Of Place (see Dative of Place) :
At, near, hy, on :
A€Q)TV)(iBr]^ i)'yelTo rcov ev WLvKaXr} EWrjvcov. ThuC.

Leoty chides commanded the Greeks at Mycale.
Tpa7r€ôv<; oiKecrat ev tc3 Evêivo) ttovtw. Xen.
Trapezus is huilt on the Euxine sea.
Among
vofJLOi Iv iracTLV f.vh6KijX0L TOis "EAAtjctiv. Plat
Laws famous among all the Gh'eeks.
Elliptically (supply oUa, or some such word), mostly

with proper names in Attic. Of, el<;.
iv AiSov, in Hades.
i.v' Kptffipovos, Plat. Prot. 320 a, in the house of Ariphron ;
ev AioviVov, in the temple of Dionysus, Dem. 21. 8.
Iv Trai8oTpcf3ov, Iv KidapicrTov, at (the school) of the gym-
nastic master, the cithara-player.
Also an Epic use (the complete construction sometimes

occurs, e.g. elv Al8do So/xoktl, Od. iv. 834).
With Verbs of Ifotion (Constructio Praegnans). Cf.
eU, converse construction.

01 ev T^ 'H/jatco KaraTreffievyoTes. Xen. Hell. iv. 5. 5.
Those who had fled to (and tvere in) the chapel of Hera.
(2) Of Time (see Dative of Time) :
Within a space of, during :
ev rat? (T7rovSat<;, during the armistice, Xen.

ev TovTco, meanwhile ; ev at, ev baa, whilst.
(3) Of Eelation :
Occupation, Condition
ol ev TOt? vpayfiaaL, oc ev re\et. ThuC.

Those who are engaged in public affairs, those who o.re
in office, i.e. ministers of state, the authorities, the
government.
:
: :
304 PREPOSITIONS.
kv ev Aoyots, €V ry Te;(vr; ervai.

cf)iX.o(TO(f)ia.,
To be engaged in philosophy, in oratory, in an art,
eivat ev <f)6j3(f,
ev atcr^vvr;, ev crtuTry, ev IAttiSi.
To be in a state of fear, shame, silence, hope.
Phrases :
ev opyy eêiv OT TToielcrBal Tiva, to feel angry towards anyone;

ev atTtct e)(etv, to blame ; ev -qBovy etvai ap)(0VTe<s, ThUC.
1. 99, to give satisfaction as rulers; ev KaAw efvai
(=KaAcus ex^'v), Eur. Heracl. 971, to &e têZ^y ev SiKg
StKtttws, iw justice ; ev irapacTKevQ eivai, to be in a state
of preparation, Thuc. ii. 80 ; ev oVAots c'vat, to be

under arms (so ev robots, equipped tvith arrows; ev
<f)opTLOLs rpeêtv, to run with burdens on tJie back, Xen.).
Dependent on
ev rat? 'yvvaiîv eariv tj awTTjpia. AriST.
TJie safety (of Greece) depends on the ladies.
So, very often, ev y efjuol, ev aoiye, etc., penes me,
quantum in me est, so far as lies, depends on me, thee.
ev Tw dew TO xeAos ^v, ovk Iv epLoL DeM. 292. 21.

The issue rested tvith God, not with me.
Cf. Soph. 0. C. 1443, 0. T. 314.
With respect to or at
yeXu)T ev crot yeAw. SOPH. Ant. 551.
/ laugh a laugh at thee.
A rare use, but found with Compounds, eyyeAw, ivv-
Instrument, Means, Manner (a special use, originally

denoting Place)
ev 6(fida\fiois (o/i/xowtv) opav, Hom. and Attic.
To see with the eye (in oculis).
Sophocles is fond of this ev. Cf. Phil. 60, 102, 1293,

Antig. 691. Cf. also Eur. Bacch. 211, Thug. L 77 (vo-
fiois), vii. 11 (eTTtcTToAais).
In Composition :
(1) In, at, near, e/xjSaAAw, I throw in; cyycAw, / laugh

at. (2) Of inherent qualities, e/x^wvos, endoivtd wUh
voice, cf. evvo/Aos.
:
PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE ONLY. 305
§ 266. tvv,
Xvv {^vv, old Attic form), ^vith, together with, opposed
to av€v. Lat. cum. Compare throughout with fierfi
Together with :
eTraiBeiieTO crvv to5 aBeXô). Xen.

He ivas being educated loith his hrother.
Conformity with (opp. to •jrapa), with the help of:

aw tS vofim 'Îrrjcpov TcOevat. Xen.
To vote in accordance with the law {irapa top vd/xov,
contrary to law).
Phrases :
aiiv Beta, with God's blessing, or help, please God {deo

favente). (a-vv, êw el-n-elv, PlAT., AillST.)
01 (Tvv Ttvi, ones friends, party, followers. Xen.
avv Ttvt iidîcrdai ifivai, yiyvea-dai), to fight on one's side
(fierd Ttvo9 more usual). Xen.
Accompanying circumstances :
<rvv vava-i TrposTrXdv, Xen. Hell. ii. 2. 7, to sail with ships

(commoner in Epic than Attic).
Expletive use. Cf. Dative :
avv T$ o"^ dyaOia, to ijour advantage, cum tuo commode,

Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 15. Cp. Soph. Ant. 172.
crvv TYj (3ia, with violence (cf. irpos fiiav, /^taious).
(TVV T^ x/'ovw, at length, Xen. Cyr. viii. 6.
Old Adverbial use

liTj ^vv KaKws TTOietv a^TOUS. ThUC. iii. 13.
Not jointly (i.e. together with the Athenians) to injure them.
Cf. Soph. Ai. 960, Aesch. Ag. 586 {=furthermê),

Soph. Ant. 85 {moreover), El. 299.
In Cojiposition :
(1.) Together with, crwayopevto, I speak with another. (2o.

Completely, crvpirXrjpw, 1 fill completely, cf. comple g.
With numerals, a distributive force is given, e.)
avvTpeis, three taken together, i.e. three apiece.

u
:
3o6 PREPOSITIONS.
§ 267. Note on avv and /aera.
(Tvv, together with, denotes mere addition,

/xera, together uitli, in the midst of, in the company of, denotes
participation with, community of action.
Thus (in Homer)

fie.Ta. Sfjiwdiv TTive Kal rjcrdte. Od. X. 140.
He was drinking and eating in the compamj of the slaves.
rjXvde. (TVV Sioi MeveAaw. II. iii. 206.
He came with god-like Menelaus (i.e. both came).
Cf. Soph. Antig. 115, 116.

So (rvXXaixfSdvd), I take or get together (tous (ttpar ulna's, the
soldiers).
fieTaXafxfSdvo), I take together with others, i.e. I share.
(Twexw, / hold together, comprise, contain.
/xerexw, / have
with others, piartake, share,
hrâdai fierd Ttvwv, to follow in the midst of others,
eirea-dai (Tvv tutl, to follow with {as well as) others.
In Attic, it is to be observed, that <rvv with the Dative is

used in Poetry where fi^rd with the Genitive is used in Prose,
Xenophox, however, apparently following poetical, i.e. earlier
or Homeric, usage, is the one Attic prose writer who uses <rvv
with the Dative.
§ 268. One or two old Adverbial Cases, dfia and ofiov,
are joined like Prepositions to the Dative,
L dfia, mostly Temporal a/ia ew, djxa ew ytyvo/icvg, oi

:
dawn, daylreak ; but also of accompaniment, ol dim Qoavri,

Hdt. vi. "^138, those who were with Thoas. Cf. Thuc. vii. 57.
n. oftou, together with; v8(ap ofiov t^ 7rr;A^, Thuc. vii, 84,

water together icith the mud; deoU 6/iou=(ruv êois, SoPH. Ai
767, with the help of the gods.
eyyvs (see Genitive), near.
III. 1. When used of Place is
chiefly Epic, and takes a Genitive, but, in EuR. Herac. 37, a

Dative. 2. Of Time or Numbers, eyyus evtavrou, Xen. Hell.
iii, 1, 28, near a year. In Thuc. \-i, 5, ereo-t eyyus eiKoa-i, near
twenty years; lyyi^s is Adverbial, as post may be in Latin,
viginti post annis.
TV. ecê^^s : ra toi'tois €<ê^^S, PlAT., what folloWS.

: :
PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 307
II.— PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES.
WITH ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE.

§ 269. Atct.
Acd (old and poetical form hial), Utvjeen, apart, through.
Cf. hvo, 8/?, S/%a.
A. With Genitive.
1. Of Place :
TJirough {right through, and out of)
eiropevdrjaav Sia XaXv^cov. Xen.

They marched through the country of the Chalybes.
A II through, along :
Oopvôv ^Kova-e Bia twv Taêcov lovro^. XeN.

He heard a din ;passing all along the ranks.
Distributively, intervals of space :
Bia BeKa eirdXêcov Trvpyot rjaav. ThuC.

At every ten battlements were tovjers.
So Sia TToWov, Stot TrXeia-Tov, 8l lAacrcrovos, at a great dis-
tance, greatest distance, shoi't distance.
Cf. Eur. Andr. 1251 (aAXov 81' aXXov).
2. Of Time :
Tliroughout, cf. Trapd with Accusative

ravra St' oXov tov aiQ)vo<; piO')(6ova-L. Thuc.
Thv.s throughout their ivhole life they labour.
So 8ia vvKTOs, 8t rj/jLepa^, etc., Sta TravTos, Sto. reXous,

continually ; St' oXiyov, for a little while.
Of intervals after :
eoiKe Bed ttoWoO ')(p6vov a ioopaKevai. ApjsT.

It seems that it is a long lohile since lie has seen you.
Cf. Soph. Phil 285 {'xpovo^ Bid xpovov, of succession in

time).
: :
3o8 PREPOSITIONS.
Distrihutively
8ia Tre/JLTTTOv erovs, or 8ta Trevre ertov, every fifth year,

quinto quoque anno ; 8i' erous, 8t tviavrov, every year,
yea/)- by year.
3. Causal :
The notion is that of a coming between or intervening.
The intermediate agent, through the medium of, by the

agency of:
eXeye Bl ep/jbTjvecji;. Xen.

He was speaking by means of an interpreter.
Si' eavTov TToieiv ti, to do a thing by oneself, all alone, i.e.
without the intervention of another.
Cf. OLTTO, i^.
Means or instrument. Cf. the Dative (which denotes

more direct means)
i] SiOL Twv d/A/ioiTcuv (TKexpis. Plat. Fhaed. 83.
Examination by means of the eyesight.
8ia x^'pos 6X^'^> XaPdv ti, to hold, to take in the hand.
Adveebial Phkases :
A great number of Adverbial phrases are formed with 8id

and the Genitive. In these Sta appears to be uped sometimes
in its local, sometimes in its causal sense.
Sta uvaL, epxeadai (rivi), to go to, engage in battle

[j.o.xr]s
with; St e'x^/oas ylyvicrdai (rtvt), to be liostile to ; Sta

(^tAtas tei'ttt (rti't), to be friendly with ; Sta Adywv ikvai
(rtvt), to converse with ; St' aiVtas eêtv, ayetv (rtva), to
hold guilty ; St' d/ay/Js, <f>vXaKr]s, oiktov ^xÎ'V (rtva, ti),
to be angry with, keep in pi'ison, feel pity for.
Sta a-TOfj-aros ^x^'-^t H-^VP-Vî

(rrepvuiv, to have on one's lips,
in one's memmij, in the h'east.
St' 6pyri<i, angrily ; Sta o-ttovSv^s, hastily ; Sta (Bpaxmv,

shortly; Sta fj-aKpiHv, at length (e.g. tovs Xoyovs
TTotda-dai, to speak) ; Sta Taxovs, quickly, shortly.
;
B. With Accusative — generally denotes close con-

tiguity.
1, Of Place axd Time :
Throughout, during :
Epic and poetical only. Cf. Aesch. Supp. 15, Soph. 0. T.

867.
2. Causal :
Of the Antecedent, not the Final Cause. Of the person

or tiling whose intervention helps towards a result.
Oioing to, because of, on account of, with the help of (see
note).
OL Adrjvaloi, hi, ap€Ti]V, aW ov Sia TV')(r)v eviKTjaav.

ISAE.
The Athenians conquered through valour, not through
cha/iice.
Sta Tous ev fj.aôfi€Vovs at /za^ât KpivovraL,

Xen. Cyr. v. 2. 35.
Battles are decided by (owing to the conduct of) those who
fight well.
Cf. Soph. 0. C. 1129 (Sia o-e).
Through the fault of :

Sta Tovs dSt/cws TToAiTevo/xevovs ev ry oAtya/s^ta 17 SrjfjLO-
Kparia ytyverai. LtS. 25. 27.
Owing to the unjust administration of i-ulers in an oligarchy,
democracy springs up.
e\ firj Sid, had it not been for, but for :
el fir) Slot Toy Upvraviv ive—€(7eu av. PlAT. Gorg. 516 E.

Had not been for the President he
it wovM have been thrown
into prison. Cf. Thug. iL 18.
Phrases :
St' li'Setav, because of, owing to poverty (Xen. An. viii. 6)

St' dyvotav, Sta Kavfj.a, Sta ^nfiij^va, because of ignorance^
heat, winter ; Sta to ^v/j.iJ.dxov<; dvai, because they were
:
3IO PREPOSITIONS.
allies. Similarly the common expressions cta rt, ivhy ?
wherefwe? Sta ravra, on this account, because of this;

St 6, St' a, 071 which account.
Note. For the sake of denoting a

this, final cause or purpose,
would be TOVTOV ev€Ka, not Sta ravra.
For the sake of, in order to :
A very rare use of Sta \dtli the Accusative. It occurs

seemingly four times in Thucydides, iv. 40,
St' dxO-q-
86va, in order to vex; ii. 40, Sta rrjv (r4>krepav So|av,

for their own glory ; iv. 102, Sia to reptexeiv avrriv, in
order to enclose the city; v. 103, Sta rov dv/xaros rrjv
ESTrpa^tv, in oi'der to exact the sacrifice.
Note. It is difficult sometimes to distinguish between the

causal uses of Std \vith Genitive and Sta with Accusative. It
is extremely difficult to account for the causal use of Sta with
Accusative. Consult Eiddell's Digest of Platonic Idioms for
instances of Sta with Accusative in Plato and the Orators,
meaning uith the help of.
In Composition :
(1) Through, and so throughly or thoroughly, SiafSaivoj, I

go through ; Staêvyw, / escape thoroughly. (2) Apart,
Stoo-KeSavvv/xt, I scatter asunder.
§ 270. Kara.
Kara, dovm, opposed to avd. Old form Karai, cf. Karai-
A. With Genitive.
Note, (irivai Kara irerpr]? originally may have meant " to go
downwards with regard to the rock," i.e. either down from, or
doum upon.
1. Of Place :
Doi'jn from
dkofjbevoi, Kara Trj<; Trerpai?. XeN.
Leaping clown from the rock.
: :
Down upon or over :
(f>€pe irai ra')(êa)^ Kara ')(eLpo^ v8(op. Arist,

Gome hoy, quickly, pour ivater on my hand.
Cf. Lucian's late use, Kara K6ppi]<i Ttardâi, to box on the head,
for the earlier iirl K6pp-)]s.
Cf. Plat. Bep. 398 a. In Soph. El. 1433 (Kar dvTidvpwv,

towards the vestibule).
Doiun into, and tinder :
i} 'ArAavTts vrjaro<s Kara rrjs OaXdrryj'S Svcra rj(f>avi(r9r].

Plat. Tim. 25.
The isle of Atlantis sank under the sea and disappeared.
2. FlGUEATIVELY :
Against
at Ka6 rjfjbwv Xoyoi, Dem, 15. 25, arguments against
us. Cf. Soph. Phil. 65.
Cf. KaTTjyopoi), KaTaytypojaKco rivo'i, '\\revhoâL Kara
TlVO^.
Concerning, with respect to :

TOVTO eLprjTat Kara Tracrwv twv TroAiTetwv. AB..P0I. v. 7. 11.
This has been asserted of all governments.
So (TKOTrelv, Aeyeiv, {'''jTetv, Kara tivos, often in PlaTO (see
EiDDELL, Digest, 163).
Phrases :
Kar' aKpas, utterly {Ep. Kar' aKpr)^, a Oldmine) ; Kara

T6Kvct)v d/ivvvat, Desl, to sivear by one's children; Kad'
6\ov (later Ka96Xov, see Lexicon), on the whole.
B. With the Accusative, Kara denotes close

proximity.
1. Of Place :
Motion down upon or after

01 'AOrjvalot Kara TToSa? eTrXeov rwv AaKeSaifiovccov.
Xen,
The Athenians were sailing in the wake of the Lacedae-
monians.
Kara poov, doivn stream (cf. dva poov).
:: :
312 PREPOSITIONS.
After, in search of :
eaKeBao-fievoL Ka6' dpirayqv. Xen.

Scattered in quest of plunder.
Over against, opposite
ol AdTjvalot Kara AaKeBaifiovcov^ eyevovro. XeN.

The Athenians were posted opposite the Lacedae-
monians.
Extension throughout
T) evXdêca ctkotov e^î' âO' 'EWdBa. EUK.

Discretion is under a cloud throughout Hellas.
Kara yrjv Kal Kara OaXacrcrav, by land and sea.
In, connected with, belonging to :
Kar dyopdv, in the market ; aX Kara to a-Cyfia (ttjv ^v)(rjv)

€Trtdvixiai. bodily (mental) desires; rd Kara r-qv -oXtv,
public affairs, politics; rd Kara Tov TToAe/tov, military
matters.
2. Heuce Figukatively :
Of fitness, according to
Kara vovv X6y€i,<i. PlAT.

You speak to my liking.
Cf. Aesch. Ag., Kar' dvSpa adi^pova, like a discreet man

(tcitha man's discretion) ; Ar. Av. 1001, Kara -viyea,
like an oven; Kara <f>vcrLv, agreeably to nature (opposed
to Trapd (f>v(rLv) Kara tov aKpi^rj Aoyov, in strict state-
ment ; Plat. Ap. i., ov Kara, tov-ovs priTwp, an orator
of a different stamp from these men ; Kara ^vjxfxaxlav, by
virtue of an alliance.
Especially with Comjjaratives
eiSev veKpov ftei^co rj Kar avOpwirov. PlaT.

He saw a corpse of superhuman size.
Cf. ThxtC. vii. 75, /îei^w t) KaTd 8dKpva -eTrovOoras.
: : ;
3. Of Time :
Contemporary with
Geuto-TOKAws 6 Twv Kad' eavTov a-dvTOiv ei'SoôTaros.
Dem. 20. 73.
Themistodes, the most illustrious man of all his con-
temporaries.
01 Kara IIAarojva, Plato and Us age; Kar' dpxqv,
originally ; Kar' eiprjw^v, in time of peace.
4. DiSTRIBUTIVELY :
Of Place, Time, Money, etc., a common use :
KaTOLKOVvrat 01 Mrjhoi Kara /cooyLta?. HeroD.

The Medes live in separate villages.
Ka9' eva, one hy one ; Kara fjiiav Kal Kara 8vo Aa/?etv, DeM,
20. 77, to take (ships) one and two at a time; kot'
dvSpa, man by man.
Kad' rjfiepav (in dies), day by day; Kara /ATjva, KaT
kviavTov.
Kara ras — evre koI etKOcrt )U,vas TrevraKocrcai 8pa)(jias
€ts(ê/3€tv. Dem. 815. 11.
To contribute 500 drachmas on every 25 minae.
5. Miscellaneous Phrases, mciny adverbial

Ka6' lavTov, h-aO' aurov's, left to themselves, ie. alone or
singly ; kutcI /xovas, alone ; Kara, [xiKpov, Kar' oXtyov,
little by little; Kara Svva/jLiv, to the best of one's
ability; to Kar' ipe, SO far as concerns me; Kara ravrd,
in the same way ; kot' Aia-xvXov, as Aeschylus has it
Kara x^pav, in statu quo, "as you were."
Kara Tctxos, quickly ; Kara Kparos (per vim), by force ;
Kara (rirovSi^v, hastily ; Ka6' -qcrvxâv, quietly.
Kara touto, on this ground ; Kara Tt ; on what ground,
wherefore? Kara ryjv da-Oevetav, on the ground of, by
reason of, weakness.
In Composition :
(1) Down, KaTa(3aivio, I go down. (2) Of isolation or

abandonment, KaTaAetVw, I leave behind or abandon. (3)
Against, KaT,)yopQ>, I accuse ; KarayiyvoJa-Kw, I condemn.
(4) All over, i.e. completely,
Ka-aKd-Tw, / clwp up in
pieces.
:: : : :
314 PREPOSITIONS.
§ 271. 'TTrep.
'Trrep (poet, v-wetp), above, over, beyond. Sansk. upari

(above), Latin sujyer, English over, German ilber. 'Ttrep
for vTrept is a Comparative of utto.
A. With the Genitive.

1. Of Place :
Over, above
6 Oeo'; edrjKe rov rjktov virep yrj<;. PlaT.

Ood placed the sun above tlie earth.
Motion over
eKKV^tcrrav virep rwv ^L<ôiv. Xen.
To turn a somersault over the sujords.
In the interior of a country :
ripâro e^ Aldi07ria<; t^9 vTrep AtyvTTTov. Thuc.

It began in Aethiopia which is beyond Aegypt, ie.
higher up, further inland.
2. Figueatively :
To protect, in defence of, ef. tt/jo :
vvv virep iravrmv aycov. Aesch.

Now is the contest in defence of our all.
Joined with irpo, EuE. Ale. 690.
In the interest of
Tov fSeXruTTOV Acyovres,

01 virep DeM. 9. 63.
Those who speak in the cause of what is best.
On account of
KXavfiara fSpaSvrrjros inrep. SOPH. Ant. 932.
Tears as a punishment for slowness.
Instead of
diroKpLvea-Oai virkp Ttvos, Plat. Rep. 590, to answer for
one. Cf. Thuc. i. 141, vwep lavrov.
:: : : :
With a, view to
virep Tov HTj irpaTxetv to Trposra-TOfievov, ISOC. 152 D, in

order not to do what was bidden. Cf. Eiddell, Digest,
p. 167.
B. With Accusativk Chief signification figurative,

beyond, ie. in excess of.
1. Of Place :
Beyond
Tfov ovpeoiv T(t)v virep Me/j,cf)iv iroXiv Ketfxevoav ro
fiera^v. Hdt.
Tk€ space hetiveen the hills which lie beyond the city
of Memphis.
2. Figuratively :
In eoccess of:
ovK eariv virep avOpoJTrov tovto. Plat.
This is not beyond the poiuerr of man.
inrep eXTTiBa, past, beyond hope; vTrep ij/tas, beyond our
power ; inrep Suva/xiv, beyond one's ability.
More than
iTTecrov VTTep Tecrcrepa Kovra avSpas, HeEOD. V. 64.
There fell over more than 40 meTi.
3. Of Time:
Before
6 irpos TOV Alyivrj7(ov virep to. Mt^SikoI —oXefiov.
Thuc. i. 41.
The war with the A eginetans before the Persian wars.
As an adverb
Very rarely ; cf. EuR. Med. 627, St. Paul ad Cor. 11. xi
23, inrep eyw.
In Composition :
(1) Across or beyond, hence of excess or transgression,

vTrepi6aLV(a, I go beyond, I transgress, omit, surpass. (2)
For, in defence of, inrepaXyw, I grieve for (also exceedingly)
as by (1) ; virepfxax^, I fight for.
6 : :
31 PREPOSITIONS.
§ 272. Merct.
Merd, With, among, hetiveen, after. Compare with avv.

Cf. fieTu-û, between, fieraê, afterwards. Sansk. mithas
{alternately), mithu (together), German mit. Curtius
{Etym. i. p. 258) denies the direct relationship between
fxerd and In Attic, fierd
/tecro?. is chiefly used with the
Genitive. Compare with <7vv.
A. With Genitive.
With, among :
7) "^v^T] aec fiera raiv deoiv Btayei. Plat.

The soul lives for ever with the gods (in their society).
fxera ^v/xfjLdxoiv KivSwevecv, Thuc. viii. 23, to run risk in

common tcith allies.
On the side of
ovK etKos TO T/Js TVXV^ oi€(r9aL aet fieO' vfiQv ecrecrâi.

Thuc. iv. 18.
It is not reasonable to suppose that the influence of fortune
will ever be (m your side. Cf. Plat. Apol. xxii., ii^to.
rov vofiov.
Joined to :.
tcr;(os re Kal KaXXos fi€Ta ryieias. PlAT. Mep. 591 B.

Strength and beauty joined to health.
Modal, cf. avv, and Dative alone :
tKeTetxre tous StKacrras /xeTo. ttoAAwv SaKpvcav..

Plat. Apol. xxiii
He besought the judges with many tears.
Phrases :
ftera rtvos etvat, to be on one's Side ; ot /iera tivos, one's

companions ; fxer' dXr] deias, truly.
B. With Accusative (rare in Attic).
Next in order to
fiera Oeovi '^v^v decoraTov. Plat. Leg. 726.

Next to the gods the soul is most divine.
:
Other usages of fi^To. wdth the Accusative, going among,

going in quest or search of, according to, are chiefly Epic. For
them the Lexicon should be consulted.
Note 1. With the Accusative /aera denotes either (1) motion
to the midst of, or (2) extension over the midst of. The idiomatic
phrases with 1^76. and Accusative will fall under one of these
two heads. Thus (1) /xera ravra, next to, after this (lit. going
into the midst of, and so succeeding, or coming next to); (2) /xe^'
-qfiepav, interdiu, in the daytime (during, extending over the day) ;
ficTo. êtpas ex^'^'j ^^ have in hand.
Note. 2. In Homer and in poetry /xera is also used with the

Dative to denote presence among, one among others, without
the close connexion denoted by the Genitive.
/xera 8e TptraTOio-ev avacro-ev, 77. i. 252, he wos ruler among
(in the presence of) the third generation.
Cf. Eur. Erechth. 26.
As an adverb
Among, amid, next, afterwards, often in HoMER.
In Herod, also afterwards, fiera Se, ixmXure. k.t.X,, i. 128.
In Composition :
(1) Together with, /ierex^, J^ have together with or share.

(2) Going to, among, or extending over, or in the midst of :
fieraixjJ'-i'Ov, the space between armies; /xeOirj/j-i,, 1 let loose
(among). (3) Of succession, alternation, change, /uraSop-
TTios, after dinner; fUTayiyvwcrKOi, I change my mind;
fieTavoia, repentance.
N.B. Coming among implies following some, and so suc-

cession and alternation. Thus if a bead is put among
or between others in a necklace, it comes after, and
alternates with, other beads.
\\\.— PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.
§ 273- V<^t'-
'Afji(})c, on hath sides (about, arovrnd). Cf. aficfjoa, a/jL(f)o-
repo<i. Sansk. abhi, Lat. amb, (am-, an-), aml-o, anib-io.

'AiJ,<f)t related in form to a/x^/? as €k to e|. Compare
throughout with Trept.
:: :
3i8 PREPOSITIONS.
Note. In Attic Prose a/x(/)t is practically used with the

Accusative only.
A. With Accusative.
About the time of, cf. irepi:
ayopav 'ir\T]dovaav.
tjBt) rjv ufi<f)t Xen.
It was now already ahout full market time {forenoon).
dfx(f>l TrevT'qKOVTa trt]^ obout 50 yeCLTS.
{Employed) about
aaKovat ra afj,(f)C rov TroXefxav. XeN,
They jJractise the arts of vjar.
dfi(f)i Ti {e.g. iTTTTovs, dpiMara, Stlirvov, etc.) «X^'*'> f**"*'?
Siarpi/Seiv, etc., to engage in, set about, be concerned with
anything.
Phrases :
01 a/x(î II/jwTayo/aav (IIAaTwva), the school of Frotagoros

{of Plato). The phrase (especially in later writers)
is a periphrasis for Pythagoras himself.
So 01 d/[x<^t Sepêa, the army of Xerxes, Herod., but ol
dfx(f)l Meyapeas Kal ^Xia(Tiovs (HdT. ix. 69) the

Megarians and Fhliasians.
Less commAjn uses

(Epic and poetical) rjXOes dp^l AwSwvr^v, Aesch. P. V.,
830, thou earnest nigh {aboi.it) Dodona, cf. 419 ; /xe/oijum S'
dix<fi ttoXlv, Aesch. Sept. c. Theb. 843 {care about the
city).
B. With Genitive (the uses are very rare and wholly

Epic, Ionic, and Poetic).
Concerning, cf. irepL
dp(f}l o-Tjs Aeyw TratSos, EuR. Hec. 580 (7 tell thee of thy
child). Cf. Soph. Phil. 554. Aesch. Ag. 67, dpcj^l
yvvaiKos (m the cause of).
Round about :
HdT. viii. 131 {ap(fil TToXios oiKeova-i).

: : :
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 319
C. With Dative (wholly Epic, Ionic, and Poetic).
Among
(dfji(fil KkdSois lô/xcva, EuR. Phoen. 1518 {seated among
branches).
Concerning
a/i^' ijjLol o-T€veis, SoPH. JEl. 1180 (thou sighest for, about
me).
Phrases, cf, irepi:
d/t<î rdpfSei (cftofSwt), prae pavore, for fear. In poetry.

As an adverb, on either side. Homeric use.
§ 274. 'ETTt.
'Etri, on the surface of, upon, hy, to. Cf. eiret,, then.
Sansk. api, further, after, Lat. db. See airo.
A. With Genitive.
1. Of Place :
Upon, vnth verbs of rest

TTU'i T eirt 7779 Kat vtto 7779 y^pvao'i. PlAT.
All the gold on earth and under the earth.
So ej> tirirov, very often.
With verbs of motion :
eirefjbyjrav avrovi eirl Tptripov<;. XeN.

Theg sent them aivay on board a trireme.
And in Gon^tructio Praegnans, ava^rjvai eirl TTvp<y(ov,
Xen,, to climb up, and be on towers.
Towards (a common use) :
01 ^vfifia'ôt aveywpr}(Tav eir olkou. ThuC.

ITie allies returiud homewards.
Cf. i. 60, eTTt @paKTj<;.
: :
320 PREPOSITIONS.
In, hy, near, at
€Trl vqcrov, in the island ; yrj's lirl êv)]s (SoPH. 0. C), in a

foreign land ; iv dyop^ cttI twv Tpa-n-eôiv, Plat. Ap. 1,
in the market at (by) the tables of the banks ; kiii 8l-
KCWTrjpiov, ISAE., in COUVt.
TO. e-n-l QpaKrjs, Thuc. (see Poppo and Kriiger) {the parts
in) the neighbourJwod or the district of Thrace or Thrace-
wards, So €7ri T^s AaKti)|/i/c^s, V. 34. hrl rrjs avTOiv
/xcveiv, to remain in their own country, Thuc. iv, 118.
In presence of, coram. Cf. Trapd.
iêXeyxêaOat eirl TravTWV. DeM. 781. 4.

To be convicted in presence of all.
. Of Time (very common)

€7rt Kvpov âai\evovTo<i, in the reign of CynLS ; eiri
Oe/j,iaTOK\eov<; ap')(ovTO'i, in the archonship of

Themistocles ; eirl rcov Trarepcov, in the time of our
father's ; ctt e/xov, in my time ; ft>9 eirl klvZvvov,
as in time of danger (Thug. vi. 34).
, Figuratively:
Set over, engaged in :
e/xevev ein rrjî apyrj^;. XeN.

He was continuing in command.
Phrases :
So fikveiv Itti Tivos, to abide by a thing ; IttI twv irpayfid-

Twv (tov TToXefxov) elvai, be engaged in business,
to
in war ; Itti yvdoixrjs ycyvea-dai, to come to an opinion,
Dem. 42. 4.
6 Itti twv ottAitwv (ottAojv), eirl twv ittttcwv, the commander
of the infantry, cavalry ; 6 Itti ttJs StotK-qcrews, the con-
troller of the treasury, paymaster-gerueral.
Resting, dependent upon, €(f>

iavrov, etc. :
€(/)' €avTov, of or by oneself, independently or separately,

spontaneously, is a common phrase; €(/>' kavrm irXilv,
Thuc, to sail by oneself or alone; e^' kavTov oiKi.iv,
: :
Xen., to live apart, separatdy ; e^' vjiCiv avjCiv /3a A-

kecrOai,Hdt., to consider by yourselves ; €</)' koivrdv Sta-
XiyovTat, Hdt., they speak a language or dialect of their
oum, a distinct dialect ; iir' dyKvpewv, at anchor, Hdt.
i. 188.
In the case of
With Aeyw, ala-Odvo/jiai, o-kottw (/ exximine or consider),

Kp'ivoi, I decide or judge.
d (TTi TtSv dX\o)v opdre, radr' i(fi vfiQv auTWP' dyi/oetre.

Is. viii. 114.
WTiat yoti see in {the case of) others, that you are ignorant
of in your own case.
So eir' ifjiov Aeyetv, Plat. Rep. 475, to speak in my own

case, to take myself as an instance ; iirl ttuvtcdv 6/xotws,
in all cases alike.
Called after :
KeKXrja-dat, 6vo[iaa-d?ivat iiri Ttvos (HdT. ), to he named

after a person; ij elp-qvt] r) eVt 'AvrakKiSov, Dem., tJie
peace of Antalcidas.
€7ri ovo/x.ttTos eti/ai, to hear a name, Dem. 1000. 21.
Military phrases
era^^vjo-av CTrt Terrapcov. XeN. An. i. 2, 15.
They were dravm up four deep.
Generally of the depth, sometimes of the length, of a hne.

CTTt Trei'TT^KovTa dcTTTtScuv crvvecTTpajxiievoi.
Xen. Sell. vi. 4. 12.
Massed in column fifty shields deep.
TO fikrunrov iirl Tpta/cocrtcov, to 8e /3dôs e^' cKarov.

Xen. Cyr. ii. 4. 2.
The length of the line was four hundred, its depth one hundred.
i<^' Ivds, in single file ; ot dAtywi/ Toa-crecrOai, to he dravni

up in a long line (or a shallow column) (Xen. and
Thuc).
7rA€iv Itti Kepws (cf Accus. ),
. to sail in column (towards the
unng), (Kara p.Lav iirl Kepws. Thuc. ii. 19, in single file).
X
: ;
322 PREPOSITIONS.
Miscellaiuous 'phrases :
eirl Tov eixavv/xov, iirl Tuiv TrXevpujv, on the left, on the

flanks.
cTTi TravTcov, Dem., on all occasions; icfi' cKao-Twi', Plat.,

071 each occasion.
hrl xeAeuT^s, at last; exi (txo A-^s, at leisure, leisurely;
€-' i(rr]s, equally (SoPH. El. 1061); e-i Trpo^do-tos,
Hdt., as a pretext ; eVl opKov, on oath (Hdt. ix. 11)
6-1 77/3o?7roAou fiioLs, dej^cudent on one handmaid, Sopa
0. C. 746.
B. With the Dative.

[The uses should be compared with those of the Genitive.
They often run closely parallel. 'Ettl with Dative, meaning
iqyon, is commoner in Prose than "vvith the Genitive; the poets
use ijoth cases indifferently. 'Etti with the Dative implies
closer connection than e-t with Genitive.]
1. Of Place :
Over, on :
ol 0paKe<; oKwrreKiha'; eirt Tah K€(j>a\aU (popovat.

Xen.
The Thracians wear fox-skin caps {fitted to) on their
heads. Of. EuE. Bacch. 757.
N.B. i(t> iTTTi^ must not be used for e<^' iWou.

Tovs OTrAtVas ctti vavcrlv oAtyais €v9vs ttc/i— owrtv.
Thtc. ii. 80 (cf. iv. 10).
They at once despatch the hoplites in {on hoard) a few ships.
Against
at vrje'i i4>' rj/xiv riTayâ.Tai. ThUC. iii. 13 (cf. iv. 70).
Tlie ships are draica up ac/ainst us.
Cf. Soph. Ai. 51, i-' ofifxaa-i (SdXXeiv (Constr. Praegn.).
In, at, near, by :
OLKeovTef: evrt HTpv/Movi, Hdt., living on the shores
of, or near, tJie Strymon.

: :
PREPOSITIONS WITH A LI THREE CASES. 323
01 Twv dpLCTTUJV Ilepcroji' TratOe? €776 rais fSaacXewi dvpaLS

TraiSevovTat. XeX. An. i. 9. 3.
I'he sons of the noblest Persians are brought up at {close by)
the king's gate (at the " Sublime Forte ").
Cf. Soph. Tr. 1100, Phil. 353.

JVext after :
Til eTTt TovToc<i, the next step.
Cf. HOM. Od. 216, ov yap rt arvyeprj eirt yaarepi

vii.
Kvvrepov aWo, naught more blatant next to (than) the hell//.

ot £776 7racr6V, tJie rear ; oXiyoi ru)V 6776 -ttS.o'lv vtto twv
rpiXwv d-Wavov, few of the rear were slain by the light-
armed, Xen. Eell. i. 1. 34.
2. Of Time (rarely)
Generally of succession, after, or following :
iKTy €776 ScKari] or TIJ eKTTj £776 S^KU.

Dem. 279. 18, 288. 29.
On the 16th of the month (sixth after the tenth).
Near, ahout (very rare in Attic)

rjv 7JA6OS €776 Sva-fMal's. Xen. An. vii. 3. 34.
It was near sunset (the sun was at his setting).
3. Figuratively :
Set over and actively engaged in :
Tovs £776 T06S TTpdyfj-acnv ovras a6T6cijvTa6. De^^L

They accuse those wJw are engaged in public affairs.
So 06 €776 rais nr])(âvats, £776 to6s Ka/i7jAo6s, Xen., thde in

guard of the engines, the camels, etc.
Generally at, in, of circumstances :
£776 Tw TrapovTt, Thuc. ii. 36, on the present occasion (to

speak) ; iirl tw SeiTrvw, Xen., at supper.
With : (by no means an infrequent use).
Cf. Eur. Bacch., withjoyous shouts (cf. 1368).

iir' ^vda-jxaa-i,
Cf. also Soph. Ant. 556, €77" dpp-qroh XoyoLs, ivith ivords
unspoken, iir' iêLpyaa-p.h'oi's, iclien a deed is done and
over, Aesch. Ag. 1379, Soph. Ai. oil, Eur. Bacch.

1039.
: : :
324 PREPOSITIONS.
In reference, to, in case of, connected with
voixov Tidevai cVt tlvl, Plat., to make a law for, in the

case of, a jyerson {for or against him) ; so vd/xos KUTai.
ilTL TLVL, DEJSL
TO IttI tw o-w/ittTt KctAAos, Plat., bcauty of person.
Upon, i.e. accumulated on, added to :
TTTjfjbaTa eirt, •Trrjfjbaatu irtTrrovTa. SoPH. Ant. 595.

Woes falling on woes.
So eirl TouTot?, thereupon, on this, very frequently

in Attic.
Hence probably phrases connected with meals : inl tw

o-iTO) TTivetv v8(op, Xen., to drink water with one's food.
Dependent upon, in power of, with elfit and îyvofxat
ei ejrX Tol<i irokefiioL^ eyevovro rt av eiraOov ;
Xen. An. v. 8. 17.
If they had fallen into the hands of tJie enemy, what

wo2dd have been their fate ?
TO Itt* ifiot, TO €771 (Toi, SO far OS in my, thy, power.

Cf. Ace. TO eTTt o-âs e?vat.
(Be named) after, on the ground of
iirl Ty e'x^p? crTcto-isK^KXi]TaL, pLAT. Bep. 470, see Stall-

baum and references there, sedition is so called from
{intestine) Jiatred.
Causal, vnth words of emotion, at, for, because of:
eiTi TLVL ixaXtaTa ayaWrj ; Xen.

In vjhat do you most take delight ?
So with x^'P'^j I rejoice ; a-e/xvvvofjLaL, I pride myself,

Svcrx^po-ivo), I am vexed, etc. and corresponding adjec-
,
tives, and substantives such as e-atvos, (jyiXoTL/jLca, etc.
So ^TjfjLLovarOaL i-L rtvi, Dem., to be fined for a thing.

: :
PREPOSITIOi'TS iVITH ALL THREE CASES. 325
Condition
ewl TOVT(p vrre^KTTafjbai, Trj<; apXV'*' Herod.
On this condition I resign my command.
So very often ert rovro), eVt rovrots, e<^' w (re), ctt* ouSevi,
cTTt Tots ilpriiikvois, on the conditions expressed.
Motive
ylrevSerat re Kac eiri Trj e/xTJ SiaôXfj XeyeL.
Plat. Apol. v.
He is lying, and is speaking with a view to prejudice

you against me.
cTTi KaKovpyia, Thuc. i. 37, for Jcnavish purposes ; ovk eirl
v/Jpiêcrdai, dAA,' ctti tw j^ye/zdves etvai, ThUC. i. 38, not

in order to be insulted, but in ffrder to be rulers ; l-rrl nZ
K€/o8et, Xen. for gain ; eTri o-o(^ta, to get vjisdom, Plat.

N.B. In Plat. Frot. 358 b, with Gen., IttI tou dXvTruis
(rjv, toith a vieio to living a painless life; Licldell and
Scott.
The reward or price :
^vyyevi(T6aL'0fJ.ii]pu> (ttI ttoctw (sc. pLiado}) av rts 5eâiT0 ;
Plat. Apol. xxxii.

For what price icoidd any of you be willing to meet Homer?
So CTTi hpay^fifi 8avei^€tv, DeJL 816, 12.
To lend money at twelve per cent. See Diet, of Antiq.
e-rrl avSpairoSois Savîêiv. DeM. 822. 8.
To lend money on the security of slaves (i.e. to hold a mort-

gage on the slaves).
Phrases :
Aeyetv eVt Ttvt, to speak in any one^s pi'aise (perJuips over

the body of). Aesch. Ag. 1400.
C. With Accusative (1) Direction to, or (2) Extension
over.
Direction :
Upoji :
Bel avaj3rjvai ettl rov tinrov. Xen.

He must mount (on) his horse.
:
326 PREPOSITIONS.
To:
TrpoTpeTTere rovs vewrepovs ctt' d/DCTjyv, Is. 3. 57.
Urge the younger to {the pursuit of) virtue.
As far as :
q dp)(r) 7j 'OSpvcrZv CTrt âAacrcrav Kad'i]Ket. ThUC. ii. 97

The kingdom of the Odrysae stretches as far as tlie sea.
(See Phrases.)
Against :
ovK eiKO<; ap')(r]v eirc apyriv crTparevaai. Thuc.

It is not likely that empire will advance against
empire.
For, for purpose of:

eifKGovov^ <w9 evrt vavixa-îav. Thuc.
They were sailing not as though for the purpose
of a sea-fight.
To fetch:
ire p.— over IV kirX Ar]p,ocr9evr]v Koi, eirl xas eiKOcri vavs.
Thuc. iii. 105.
They send for Demosthenes and for the twenty ships.
So KaXelv €-1 Set-vov, to summon to supper.
Extension :
Over, in space or time :
TO ofi/jba Bvvarai eTri TroWa crraSia eîKveiaQai. Xen.

The eye {sight) can reach over many stades.
eOvero eirl T/aet? rj/jLepa<;. XeN.

He was sacrificing for the space of three days.
Phrases : (1) Direction.

€776 TTCLv kXddv, to come to an extremity, try every means ;
eri TO peiôv Kocr/xetv, to exaggerate {he extravagant in
embellishing), Thuc. i. 21. (Cf. viii. 74.)
To produce {of a purpose)

c/Tt Ta yeAotorepa, Plat., to raise a laugh. So i-n-l Ta
al<Ty(iova (KaAAiw, to /BeXriov, to dpeivov), changing
to, resulting in, something worse {better, etc.).
:
PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES.
TO eirt
TO kiTi TLva, tovtt' ejjf, tovtti ere, Trag., as regards me, thee;
TO eirl (t4>S.s ermt, Thuc. iv. 28, SO far as regards them.
Military Phrases :
cTTt 86pv dvacrTpe\pai, to face to the spear (the right) ; ctt'
dxTTTiSa avauTpkrpat, to face to the shield {the left) ; hrl

TToSa avaywpdv, to retire on the foot (ivith the face to the
enemy) ; kiii Kkpas -Xdv, to sail towards or on the wing

{in column). Cf. Gen.
Itti Se^ta, I/t' dpia-Tepd, to the right, to the left; km rdSe,
on this side ; k—' dfKôTepa, both ways ; kir" Ixetva
(eTTCKetva), on the yonder side, beyond, ultra ; lirl to. 'irepa,
Itti Odrepa, on the other side.
Phrases : (2) Extension,

Up to, as far as to :
k-TTi SirjKocria d-o8t86vaL, to yield tico hundred fold, Hdt. i.
193 ; e^' ocrov Set, SO far as is necessary ; k-l crp.iKp6v, Itti
(3paxv, k-ir' oXiyov, k-irl ~\kov, etc., to a slight, to a greater

extent, a little way, etc.
k-Trl TToXv (kTTi-oXv), over a large extent or space ; kirX
TrAetcTTov dvOp(^Trwv (extending to or over) the greater

part of mankind, Thuc. i. 1. Cf. km -Xela-Tov ofxiXov,
ii. 34.
km TO TToXv, for the most part, Aristot.
Tiine :
km TToAtii' X/30V0V, for a long time ; kirt )(p6vov nvd, km

Tpis, Act. Ap. X. 16. See Liddell and Scott, rpk and
es T/3ts.
In Composition :
(1) Upon, over, errtKet/ât, I lie upon ; kirnrXkoi, I sail over ;

kTToi\op.ai, I go over, survey. (2) To, i.e. for, kirivevu),
I nod assent to. (3) To, i.e. against, k-mo-rpaTevo), I
march against. (4) In addition, k-m8i8ia[iL, I give in
addition; kirLTpiTos, with a third added to one, Le. 1-j.
(5) Causally, over, at, kmyalpd), I rejoice at. (6) Of
time, after, eVtytyvo/zat, I am born after, succeed. (7)
From the joint notion of advancing and addition such
words as kmyap-la, right of intermarriage ; cf. kirivofxia,
kTrepyacTia.
: :
328 PREPOSITIONS.
§ 275. Ila/Da.
Ilapd (irapai, it dp), hy the side of, to the side o/(the

primitive notion being that of goiifig through or crossing).
Sansk. pard, away and towards, Lat. per, Eng. from (Goth.
fra, fram). Uapd and irepl are related forms from the
root PAE, to fare or go through.
A. With Genitive/ coining or proceeding from (but

originally aside, at the side, or sideways from).
Coming from
eêkOelv irapd rtva, to come from a person's house,
or country, or court.
yLyvea-dat irapa tivos, Pl, Symp. 179 B, to be horn of or
sprung from.
eêtv irapd Ttvos (DeM.), to receive from ; pavOdveiv irapd
(Eur.), to learn from.
TJie Agent with passive verbs

irapd Ttvos SiSoudat, Xeyecrdat, crvpPovXevea-Oai, to he given,
said, advised by any one.
Periphrastically for the Genitive, etc. :
at irapa twv h-qpoiv Swpeai. DeSL 20. 15.

The gifts of democracies.
So rj irapd tivos eiSvota, to irap' epov dStKrjpa (the IVTOng
done by me), Xen.
Phrases :
01 irapd TIVOS, one's friends, dependants., messengers, etc,
Thuc. and Xen. ; Ta irapd Ttvos, one's commands,
purposes, opinions ; irap' lavTov StSovat, to give of one's
resources, or spontaneously ; irap' ipov, Pl. Frot. 322 D,
by my advice.
1 The Genitive with Trapd appears to represent the Ablative ; thus

TTo/jaxwpf^" ToO jSijfuiTos would first have meajit to move sideways from
the tribune.
::
B. With Dative, hy the side of, near, hy, tvith. (Of

persons, seldom of places, Trapd aot, at your side)
Among, ivith
Trap vfjblv eTpd(f)r]v, Aeschix., I was brought up among

you.
KaraXveiv irapd rivi, Dem., to lodge with any one,

chez quelqu'un.
Belonging to :
TO fikv ^(fivcriov irapa toi'tw, 01 Se KivSvvot trap' v/xiv.

Aeschin. iii. 240.
This man gets the gold, you the dangers.
In presence of
eis Kpia-iv Ka9 (.(rrdvat riva irapd Ttvt. ThUC, DeM.
To bring any one to trial before another.
In the judgment of:

Trapa rots (jjpovovcnv evSoKt/ietv. Is. 9. 74.
To be in good repute tcith sensible people.
So Trap l/xot, me iudice. vapa o-avTw, Plat.
Phrases :
01 Trap' e/ioi {rip.Lv), my OWn people; TO. Trap' efioi, my

affairs.
1. Motion to (with per-

sons, Trapd ere, to your
side), with verbs of
motion,
2. jMotion or extension
C. With the Accusative : -^
alongside, witli verbs of

rest.
3. Parallelism and com-

parison, side by side,
figuratively.
:
330 PREPOSITIONS.
I. Of Place :
1. Motion to
cTre/jbylrav Trap AOrjvaiov^ 7rpecr(3ei<;. Thuc

They sent envoys to the Athenians,
eicriivai, (ftoirav —apd rtva, to enter, go to any one's house.
Cf. Genitive and Dative.
2. Extension along or beside :
rj irapa OdXaacrav MaKeBovia. ThuC.

TJie seaboard of Macedonia. Cf. Xen. An. iii. 5. 1,
Soph. El. 183.

3. Parallelism and Comjjarison :
Side by side (with verbs of examining) :
Trap aWTjXa earat (pavepcorara. Dem.

Set side by side they will be most conspicuous.
Trap' oft/xa, before one's etjes, Eur. Supp. 484.
Compared with (often implying superiority) :
fjLiydXr) poTTY] rj TV)(r] irapa. jravra to. twv dvOpwTriov

Trpdypara. DeM. 2. 22.
Fortune a mighty makeweight compared with all hitman
is
influences. Cf. Xen. Apol. i. 4. 14 (so used especially

with comparatives).
Beyond and contrary to, opposed to Kara :
Many phrases : Trapa 8vvap.iv, beyond one's strength,

irapb. TO SiKaiov, ras cnrovSds, Tovs vopovs, (fivcnv, yv(op.if)v,
86âv (Xoyov), contrary to, or in violation of justice, the ,
treaty, the laws, nature, opinion, expectation (praeter

opinionem, spem).
Note. Several peculiar and much debated constructions
occur with irapd and the Accusative.
Causal :
Ovjing to, in consequence of, cf. Sia with Accusative.

€Kao"Tos ov irapa ttjv kavrov dpeXeiav oterai f^Xaxfêuv tyjv
ttoXlv,Thug. i. 141, each man imagines that he loill not
in consequence of his oion neglect injure tlie state. Cf.
Dem. Phil. i. 41, Trapa Ti)v lavTOV pwpr)v.
:
Besides, in addition to
OVK 'da-Tt Trapa raw' aWa, ArIST. Nub. 698, there's

nothing else besides this; Trapa ravra -n-avTa eVepdv ti,
Pl. Phaed. xix., besides all this something quite different ;
TrKyyrj Trapa irXrjyrjv, Ar. Han. 643, Uow for Uow (im-
plying alternation).
II. Of Time :
During :
Tov SoXiov avSpa êvye Trap' o\ov tov ^tov.

Menand.
Avoid a cunning man thy whole life long.
So Trapa Travra tov xpovov, Trapa ttotov, AeSCHIN., inter

potandum. Cf. Lat. per totam vitam.
At the moment of :
Trapa tolovtov Kaipov, DeM,, at SUCh a moment ; Trap' aura
TaSiKi^/iara, Dem. 21. 26, at the verij moment of the
wrong-doing, flagrante delicto. Cf. ctt' avroc^wpw, in
the very act.
Note 1. Trap' rjfxepav is generally taken to mean on each alternate

day. See Soph. Ai 475. Lobeck and Jebb consider that it
rather means dccy by day, as each day comes. The phrase occurs
in Dem. viii. 70. In Soph. 0. C. 1455, Trap' 7]//ap avdu-i appears
to mean on the folloioing day. Trapa p,7jva rptrov, Aristot., every
third month.
Note 2. Trapa [motion to), in certain phrases denoting the limit

reached, is used of excess or defect, and so describes the differ-
ence of two things.
Trapa rofTOvrov17 MutiAt^vt^ rj\6c klv^vvov. ThUC. iii, 49,
Mitylene came within such a distance of danger.
Cf. Thug. vii. 2, vi. 37 (Trapa too-ovtov ytyvwa-KW, SO much

within the mark is my opinion); iv. 106, Trapa vvKra iyevero
Xafii.lv, came icithin a night of taking, i.e. one night only stood in
the way of taking.
To this construction belong a great many phrases, e.g. Trapa
fjLLKpov, TToXv, oXiyov, j^pa^v eXdsiV, yevecrdai, aTTOtpevyeiv, viKoiv,
to come within a little, to have a narroio etc. escape, to luin a narrow
:
332 PREPOSITIONS.
or a hollow victory. Similarly Trap' oi5Sev, jxiKpov, oXiyov TrouurOai,

a-yeiv, decrdaL, eivai, to hold of 710, little, occount, he of little occoimt.
In Composition :
(1) Alongside, I set alongside; Trapa^dXXofiai,

TrapicrTrj/xi,
I expose or stake ;TrapdXXrjXos, beside one another. Hence

(2) of alternation, TrapaXXda-a-w, I make alternate. (3)
Aside, beside the mark, amiss, Trapaf3aiv<a, I transgress.
§ 276. TiepC.
Uept, round about, beyond, over, very (cf. adverbial use).

Cf. TTepi-^, rouiul about ; Trepiaao'i, excessive ; Trep, how- —
ever much. Sansk. pari, routid about, Lat, per{magnus).
See irapa.
Compare throughout with a/iî.
A. With Genitive.
In prose the meanings are figurative : the local use is Epic
and poetical (cf. EuR. Tro. 818).
The Object for or about which :
dycovlêa-Oe Traz/re? irepi apeTr}<;. Xen.

Strive all of you after excellence.
So o dyojv (6 kivSdvos, etc.) Trept i^XV'^ (-epl twi/ /xeyto-rwv)

struggle is for life {for the highest objects).
lo-Tt, the
With verbs of caring, thinlcing, fearing, etc.
peXei jioi, /BovXevofiai, ôôvp.ai irepL tivos, I care etc. for

a thing.
Also of saying and hearing .
dyykXXw, Xkyw, aKoviu, p.kp.vqp.ai Trepi tivos.
The use of these verbs with Trept should be compared

with the use of the simple Genitive in Epic and in Poetry.
Phrases :
e/ATreipws ^x^'-^ ^^/"' ''"'ô^, Aeschin., to be experienced in a

thing. (Cf. Xen. An. vi. 2. 1. Genitive without Trepf.)
: : :
PREPOSnWNS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 2,^2,
Periphrastically :
a6 rrepl 'H/aaKAe'ous Trpdêis, Plat,, the deeds of Heracles.
TTOLelcrdaL, rjyeta-daL Tt Trepl iroXXov (crfiLKpov, ovSevos,

TravTos), to esteem a thing highly, etc. irepi. here contains
the old meaning beyond, cf, ir^piyi.yvop.ai, I get beyond,
i.e. / surpass, excel.
B. With Dative.
Comparatively rare in Prose in a local sense the Dative
:
denotes a closer connexion than the Genitive, cf. eVt with

Genitive and Dative.
Close round, around and upon ; the literal meaning leads

on to the figurative
etSe irepX ttj )(eipt rov veKpov '^^pvaovv BaKTvXiov.

Plat.
He saw round the finger of the corpse a golden ring.
A good example in Xen. An. vii. 4. 4, ^rept rots o-reî/ots, etc,
Kelrai 8e veKpbs Trepl veKpw. SOPH. Ant. 1244.

He lieth dead, clasping close the dead.
Transfixed hy a weapon
Common in Homer (so d/i<^t, Od. xii. 395).
TrcTTTtuTa TwSe Trepi v€oppdvT(^ ^6<êt. SOPH. Ai. 828.
Fallen upon this new-reeking siuord.
The Object about luhich, very rare in Prose (cf. Gen.) :
irepl ry StKcAta eWat 6 dywv, THUC. vi. 34.

Tlie struggle will be for Sicily.
See Poppo.
TTcpt to} yjjip'no eSetcrav. ThUC. i. 67.
They feared for (about) the place.
Cf. Plat. Prot. 314 a, Trept rots ^tArdTots: Phaed. 114d,
The cause {poetical). Cf dfi^l

.
Trepl <t>6fto}, irepl Tap/Set., irepl -xâppLaTi. (In Poetry.)

For fear, for terror, for joy.
: :
334 PREPOSITIONS.
C. With Accusative.
{Motion round about. Epic]
1. Of Place, the literal meaning sometimes running into
the Figurative :
Rest round about, near, at, by, in
ol €(j>rjôi KotfMwvrat irepc ra ap')(eia. Xen.

The Ephehi sleep by {in the neighbourhood of) the
toion-hall.
Kat T»}s KccfiaXrjs Kareaye irepl XWov Trecnov.

Ar. Ack 1180.
And he fell on a stone and has cracked his crown.
Cf. DeM, Karappdv.

21. 4, Trepl avTO.
Fall in ruins (lit. about themselves).
So ThUC. vii 23, ttc/di dAATjAas TapaxOûrai,.
Cf. the Dative, Trept îêt, etc.
rj Trepl Aecr/Sov vavpayia. XEN. Hell, ii 3. 22.

The sea-fight off Lesbos.
2. Time:
Ahovt or near, with numbers :
rjhrj rjv irepl ifkriOovaav a<yopav. Xen.

It was now near full-marhet hour.
So irepl TOVTOv<; tovs xpovovi. ThUC.
About this period, or time.
Trepi e/iSop-qKovra, Thuc. i. 54, about seventy.
3. Figuratively :
Be busied about, engaged in. Cf. up,<f>l
With e'vat, ylyvea-daL, Siarpiêtv, cnrovSdêLi
ovTt avTO) Trepl ravTa 6 ^vpvpeSwv aTravrci. ThUC. vii 31.

JFJiile lie was engaged in this Eurymedon met him.
See Phrases below.
Towards, i.e, with reference to :
TreplTov 6eov da-eftovcrLV. AntiPH.

They are impious with regard to {in their dealings with, or
duiy towards) the god.
;
With Verbs :
So €V(re(3eLV
auaoTaveiv
11/ \
f ,
Trept TLva, or tu
(r(o<ppoviU' i
cnrovSdêiv )
With Adjectives :
TTOvrjpos, ) ^
^ j^^
oyaôs, ,- ~€pi TL J f in ike matter of,
3'"^ ^
Itc., I
dyaOos irepl rfjv ttoXlv.

Good as regards the state, i.e. a patriotic citizen.
With Substantives, Periphrasis for Genitive or Adjective :
06 I'o/xoi ot Trepl rovs ydfiovs, PlaT. Crito, 50 D, the laws

tchich relate to marriage, marriage laws ; ot -cpt AL-crtav
Adyot, Plat. Phaedr. 279 a, the speeches of Lysias ; -^
Trepl ^lXl-ttov Tvpavvli, Xex. Hell V. 4. 2, Philip's
despotism ; to. irepl -as lars, Thuc. l 3, naval affairs
TO. Trepl Kvpov, Hdt. i. 95, the deeds or history of Cyrus.
Phrases :
01 Trepl. Tiva, a person's retinue or suite ; ot -epl 'H/jaK-Aetrov,

Plat., the school of Heradeitus ; ot -epl 'Kpxiav iroXefji^
o.pxoi', Xen., Archias and his feUoiv-polemarchs.
01 Trepl fjLova-tK-qv, (t>iXocrocf)Lav, rrju Trotv^crtv, tovs Adyovs

OVT€S.
Those engaged in music, philosophy, poetry, oratory ; musi-
cians, philosophers, poets, orators.
6 irepl Tov iTTTTov. Xex.

The groom.
TTept, after its case (Anastroplie), is found in Thuc. and
Plat. Once in Plato, Leg. 809 e, it is put far from its case,
something like a German separable particle. (See Liddell and
Scott.)
In Composition :
Around, beyond, exceedingly, -e/3t/3aAAa), I jyut around;

Trept-t-TO), I fall around, embrace, fall foul of, into ; vrept-
yi'yvo/xai, I get beyond, excel, survive, escape; Trepixap^s,
exceedingly glad.
: : :
336 PREPOSITIONS.
§ 277. nôs.
11/309 (Ep. and Dor. tt/oot/, ttotl), toiaards, to, in front
of, before, opposite, beside. Sansk. prati, towards, Eng.
forth-ioith. Upo-ri is formed from tt/jo.
Cf. 7rp6(T-6ev, in front.
A. With Genitive,^ generally of direction towards, or

with reference to, without implied motion.
Towards
In presence or in sight of
o Tt SiKaiov ecTTL Kac irpa dewv kui. irpa avdpoiTrwv
Xen.
Whatever is right in the sight of gods and men.
TO 7rpo9 Xi'icvwvo^ ret^jô? eêrei,')(Laav. XeN.
They completed the wall which faced Sicyon.
A very common usage in prose and poetry (the verb, such
as dvaL or KelcrOaL, is readily understood).
So in entreaties :
7r/309 vvv ae irarpo^, irpo^ re p.7)rpo<;, (a reKvov.

LKeTrj' te decs ore; (2) the
verb is often omitted, ?rpos Aids, -pus dewv, p) Trpos yevdov,
/xt) TT/ads ere yowoiv.
On the side of
' AkKiîdhrj^ Xeyerai 7rpo<; Trarpa AXKpaioiBoJv

elvai. Dem.
Alcibiades is said to have been descended fro'ni the
Alcmaeonidae on the father's side.
^ Observe that the Genitive with 7rp6s is a genuine Genitive and not
—
a representative of the lost Ablative, connection, not separation, being
denoted.
: : :
Cf. Soph. A%. 1305, rov% tt/dos al'/jLaros, blood relations. Cf.
Soph. El. 1125 and 1075 (ra -n-pos reKvwv).
Belonging to (periphrastically for Genitive alone) :
ov 7rpo9 larpov aocpov

dprjveiv eTreoSa? tt/Do? to^wvtl Trrjâri,. SoPH.
'Tis not a wise pJiysicicin's part
To mumhle spells o'er sore that needs the knife.
So wpos yvvaiKos, like a ivoman, etc.

And with qualities, -pos StV-v^s, in accordance with justice.
Soph. 0. T. 1014; ov irpus rrj's vp-erepas oo^qs, ThUC. iii.
59, it does not accoi-d with your reputation.
In favour of
7r/309 TWV €'ÔVTO)V ôl/Se TOV v6/JL0V TLOrjt. EuE.
Thou makest this law in favour of the rich, Fhoehus.
On the part of, at the hand, of:
itraivov rev^CTai Trpo? jovv efxov. SoPH.
He shall meet ivith praise at least from me.
The agent with Verbs and Adjectives (very common in Ionic
and in poetry)
Kr/Dos 6p.oXoyeiTaL Trpos TravTCUf KptxTicTTOs yevecrOai.
Xen. An. i. ix. 20.
Cyrus is admitted by all to have been most excellent.
Cf. Aesch. p. V. C50, Soph. An. 919 (epr//ios tt/sos ^t'Awv).

Cf. Z/. 562 (with a Substantive).
In poetry also, rarely, of things. SoPH. El. 1236.
B. "With Dative.
Near or beside, in rest
oc TTora/jLoi Trpo^ ral^ 7rrjyal<; ov /leyaXot eiatv. XeN
Rivers near their sources are not big.
Soph, 0. T. 1169, -pos -P} Seivo), on the brink of horror.
In presence of :
In Demosthenes —pos rois Kpirah, in the presence of
: the
jurymen : Trpos to?'- Oecrij.o9eTat<;, etc. (Aeyeti).
Y
: :
338 PREPOSITIONS.
Engaged in :
vphs Tw elpr]ix€v(o Aoyw vjv 6 SwK/Dar/^s.

Plat. Phaed. xxxv. 84 c.
Socrates was absorbed in the conversation held.

Cf totus erat in sermone.
. HoR. Sat. i. 9. 2.
N'ote. Afrequent prose usage : elvai, yiyveadai, SiaTpijSeiv,

Tr}v yv(i)fJir]v ex^"' ~pds tivu
In addition to
77/309 Tot9 Trapovciv aXka 7rpo<i\aêli> deXei^.

Aesch.
Jw addition to thy present woes thou wouldst add
other woes.
irpo<i Tot<; aXXot9, in addition to the rest.
So constantly 77/309 Tovroi<i, praeterea, in addition

to, hesides this, seldom 77/309 Tovrm.
C. With Accusative:
1. (i) Direction towards, or implying motion, to,
(ii) Eelation to or connection with (a very free

and post-Epic usage).
Toicards, to, literally and figurcdively :
e^vyov 77po9 ttjv yrjv. Xen.

They ficd to the sJwre.
1] (piXoTifiLa irapo^vvei 77/309 ra KoXa. Xen.

Arahition spiirs to noMe aims.
With verbs of speakitui
eiprjaeTai 7rpow<; (to proclaim), publicly, in
broad daylight, in luce.
Aeyetv Trpos riva, to Speak in reply, advorsus aliquem.
Aeyetv Kara tivos, to speak against (in accusation of), in
aliquem.
:
With vcrls of considering :
Xo'yiaacrde irpo'i v[xa<i avTov<; ri avfjiîjcrerai. Deil

Consider with yourselves ivhat will happen.
So ivdvixeicrdai, avajxvi](TOr\vaL —ept tlvos. Cf. SOPH. El. 285.
auTi) Trpos avrqv, alone by myself.
Of dealings with
(TirovBa'i {avvdr]Ka<i) 7roiov/xat irpo'; riva, I maJce a
truce, treaiy with.
So ^v[L\iayia.^ (f)i.Xia, ^^(dpa, aTrwrTi'a, -6Xîxo<i ~p6s Tiva.

irpos Tovs StKacrras, in the presence of the jury.
Against :
Trpus Tors MvySoi'S eyevovro dyaOoL ThUC. i. 86.

Th^y proved themselves brave men against the Medes.
Cf. Xen. Cyr. ii. 3. 13.
7r/3os KkvTpa /mi) XaK-iê. Fvov. —Kick not against the pricks.
Generally, uith reference to :
ovSev avTta -irpos Tr)v ttoXlv ea-rL DeM. 528. 16.

He has nothing to do uith the city.
d(r<âAu)s exetv tt/dos rt, Xen., to feci safe w comfortable

about.
Miscellaneous Phrases:
With a puipose:
'X^pi] irpo<i TO irapov ael ôvXeveaOai. ISOC.
We should ever deliberate vjith an eye to the present.
So cToifios, xPW''l^°^j iKavos vpo? ri, ready, etc., for a purpose.
According to :
7rpo5 aAAoi' (?]i', Deii., to live according to the standard
of another.
irpos rrjv Swafxiv, according to one's ahdity (pro viribus).
Trpos ras rvxas (EuR. Hipp. 701), suited to one' s fortunes.
In consequence of, on hearing :
'âXeiraLveiv 7rp6<; ti. Thuc. To be annoyed on hearing.
a6vfia><; e-)(6iv Trpo'i re. To be despondent.

Trpo'? TavTTjv -Tji/
(f)îj,7]v. Hdt. Ad hanc famam.
340 PREPOSITIONS.
TTpo? ravra :
7r/jo9 r/; vjherefore? 7r/309 ravra, therefore.
Sometimes introducing a defiance or challenge, so then

e.g. Soph. 0. T. 455.
Compared with :
TToXXr] av (Xt] aTriCTta tjJs Swa/êws Trpos to kAcos avrZv.

Thuc. i. 10.
There would he a strong disbelief in their power as compared
with their reputation.
Cf. Hdt. iii. 34 : also ill. 94 (implying superiority), and
iii. 94 (to /xea-ov irpos, the mean between).
TrevTe rpos T/Dt'a, Aristot. Five to three.
Exchange :
T^Sovas TT/Dos i^Sovas kol AuTras irpos Awas /cat ôfiov Trpos
(fi6/3ov KaraXXdrrecrOai. PlaT. Phaed. 69 A.
xiii.
To exchange pleasures icith pleasures, pains with pains, and
fear with fear.
Cf. HoM. II. vi. 235.
2. 0/ Time (a rare use), toicards, near, about :
irpos ^(T-epav, drauAng towards evening : Trphs ijw, towards

daybreak. Plat, and Xen.
Phrases :
TO, TTpbs rov TToXefxov, res militares, military affairs.

TO. TTpos Tous deov? (SoPH. Phil. 1441); duty to the gods.
irpos ri8ov-)]v Aeyetv, to Speak loith a view to gratify or

please; so, irpos X'^P'-'^
Srjjx-qyopeiv, to make a popular
speech, talk clap-trap or ^^
bunkum" ; -n-pos e'x^/jav Troieicr-
6aL Xoyov, Dem. {calculated to inspire dislike) ; airavra

TTpos -qSovriv C'lFeiv, to make pleasure on£s sole aim
(omnia ad voluptatem referre).
Adverbial phrases :
TT/aos Aesch. Ag. 130), violently, by

(Slav (tt/dos to (Siatov,
foi'ce ; dvdyK-qv, of necessity (cf. vtt' dvdyKrjs, St'
Trpos
dvdyKrjv, e^ avayKTjs, crvv dvdyKrj).
irpos p-^pos, proportionately, Dem. ; -pos evcrefSeiav, piously,
Soph.; Trphs opyqv, angrily, Soph, and Dem.; tt/jos
Kaipov, seasonably, Soph,

: :
TT/aos x^P'-^ Tivos, alicuius gratia, for the sake of a person,

x'^P'-î Eur. 3Icd. 538
jrpos to-xôs (laivs not made) in
support of violence ; cf. Soph. Ant. 30, 7rp6s X'^'P'^ /3opa<;,

for the sake of food. In such phrases, ttôs X'^P'^ ^s
almost like heKa.
TT/oos avAov, Eur. Al. 346, to the accompaniment of the
pipe.
As an Adverb : in addition, besides :
dXoyia Kal dfj-adia ye irpos, Plat. Meno, 90 E, absurdity

and unreasonableness to boot. Cf. Eur, Or. 622.
In Composition :
(1) Towards, Tzpo'iipxoiJ-a-i, I approach. (2) Near, beside, be-

sides, TrposKeifjLaL, I lie near ; TrposTLOrjfjn, I apply, I add.
§ 278. 'Ttto.^
'Tito (Epic. vTral), under, = Sansk. icpa (thither, to, vnth).

Lat. sub.
A. With Genitive.
1. Of Place.
Under
TO. VTTo yrj'i hiKaa-Trjpia. Plat.
The courts of justice under the earth.
From under
veocrcrov toi/S' vtto impwv crTracras. EUR. And. 441.
Drawing from under the wings this chick.
An Epic but rare Attic use.
^ viro, like the Latin st(b, seems originally to have meant upwards,
from below towards a place above. Compare vittlos with supinus, facing
uincards, vfi, aloft, surgo {i.e. sub-s-rigo), succedo. Hence inro means
going to meet (uTravrtdfaj), supporting, and so agency or cause. More
generally vw6 comes to denote under the power or influence of, and even
accompanying circumstance, sometimes almost like eir/ \vith a Dative,
e.g. Aesch. Sept. c. Theb. 821, inro (povLi. With the Genitive vTr6 denot-
ing separation from, the Genitive must represent the Ablative on the ;
other hand when i/ird means under, the time Genitive, denoting sphere
within which anything occurs, whether of place or time, etc., is em-
ployed.
:: :
342 PREPOSITIONS.
2. Figuratively ; under the influence of.
Of Persons — the Agent, like Lat. a, ah :
With Passive Verhs :
OLIlepaat evcKridijaav vtto tmv EXkrjV(ov.

The Persians were defeated hy the Greeks.
Of Tilings — t?ie cause :
iravra vtto Seov; ^vvLararai. ThuC.

Tliey all hold together through fear.
A very common use, vtto vocrov, u^' ')]Sovf]<;, vir opyri<;,

by, in consequence of, from, for, disease, pleasure,
anger.
VTTO Ki'jpvKos et'âs i~OLOvvTO.
TbTUC. vi. 32,
At the of a herald they were offering prayers,
direction
praeeunte praecone.
Hence of accompanying circumstances

Frequently of music :
icrrpaTeveTO vtto crvpiyyojv. HdT. i. 17.

He used to march to war to the sound of the pipe.
Cf. Soph. El. 111. Euk. Bacch. 156.
So -iVetv VTTO craAn-tyyos, Ar. Ach. 1001, to drink to the

trumpet^S sound. vw' ev4>-q[xov /Sorj's Ovcrai, SoPH.
El. 630, to sacrifice with auspicious cry. vtto ({>avov
TTopevecrdai, to march by torchlight. iVo Tro/xirrjs, in
procession. Hdt. ii. 45.
Note. VTTO has this sense with the Dative in early and late
Greek, e.g. Hesiod and LuciAN and Scott) ; also(see Liddell
rarely in Attic with the Accusative, Plat. Leg. 670 A, vtt'
opy^TjiTLv Kol wh)v Xen. Syin. 6. 3, vtto avAov.
:
Phrases :
v^' kavTov (rroietv rt), to do anything spontaneously, of one-

self, sua sponte. u(^' vpw aurwi/ koL /Ml] VTTO TbJV
TToXe/MLm; Thuc. iv. 64, of your oivn free-will, and not
compelled by the enemy, viro here denotes the Agent.
: : :
B. With Dative.
vTTo means under, in a local sense, less frequently
in Prose than in Poetry.
Under
evKXer)<; Oavel
fyvvT) T apcarr) tcov v(f> rjXto) fiaKpu). EUR. Ji.1. 150.
Glorô^ls thou wilt die.
The noblest woman far beneath the sun.
Cf. Xen. An. i. 2. 8, viro ttJ aKpoirokei elvat.
Covered by :
T6 e'xet? TJTTo TO) t/xarta} ; Plat. Pliaedr. 228 D.

Wliat have you concealed under your cloak ?
Cf. Aesch. Ag. 1030, virh o-ko't^.
Under poiver of persons or things

r}v ert vtto v6/j,ol<; Kal irarpi. Plat. Rep. 574 E.
He VMS still in sidjjection to laivs ami to ct father.

v(}) iavTM iroieladai, to bring under one's poiver ; ci'.
Hdt. vii. 157; Thuc. vii. 64 (and see Accusative).
Classed under :
TO. VTTO Ta6s yeofJ.eT plat's Aeyets. PlAT. Mep. 511 A.

You are speah'mg of what comes under the head of geometri-
cal pursuits (various branches of geometry).
More rarely with Accusative, see Lexicon.
C. With Accusative.
Motion under :
ave')(oipriaav vtto to Tel')(p<i. XeN.

They retired under the walls.
VTTO BiKa<TTripiov, into (under co7itrol of) a lata court.
Hdt. vi. 104.

Extension or position under
TO IleAacryiKov to vtto Tqv aKpoTToXiv €^(jJKT^9tj.
Thuc. ii. 17.

The Pelasgicum which lies (extends) under the acropolis was
croicded.
Ta VTTO Trjv apKTov. Hdt. V. 10, the northern districts.
: :
344 PREPOSITIONS.
Subjection to
eLKO<i avTov<; Tvavra ireipanaaBai vtto a<f)a<; TroielaOai.

Thuc.
It is likely they will try to hriiig all under their power,
ol VTTO TLva. Xen., those who are in suhjection to
any one.
Cf. Dative.
Of Time : nea.r, about

v7ro rov creicrfiov. TlIUC.
At the time of the earthquake.
VTTO vvKTa, towards night, at nightfall, sub noctem.

wo TYjv KaTakvcTLv To{! TToXe/xov, just at the end of the war.
Xen. Hern. ii. 8. 1.
Phrases :
V7r' auyas opav Ti, to hold up to the light (cf. Eur. Hec.
1154).
TjTTo Tt, Plat, and Aristoph., to a certain degree, ali-
quatenus.
In Composition:
(1) Up to, uTravTta^w, I go up to meet, I face; and so of
accompaniment, vTra.8ia, I accompany in song. (2) Under,

{jTrei/At, / am under. (3) Secretly, slightly, gradtially,
vTTocfiatvcx), I show or shine a little; vTrof3dXXu>, I suggest,
siJ)orn, substitute; vTrepvOpos, reddish.
CHAPTER II.
THE NEGATIVES.
Introductory Note.
§ 279. Ov negat, M-Tj mfitiatu7\
ov contradicts or denies.''- The following are typical instances

of its use: ravra ovk lyevero, these things did not take place;
Tavra ovk av yevotro, these things would not take place ; ov (prjui,
I do not assert, i.e. / deny. The statement may take an in-
terrogative form, ov raiJTa lyevero; did not these things take place?
where an affirmative answer is expected, the person addressed
being challenged or dared to say ovk lyevero.
M-q on the other hand deprecates or repudiates. The following
instances taken from Homer are typical fj-i] l/xl Xdf3ot xoAos, :
may not anger seize me ! \i-t\ ere ki.X'^lw, let me not meet thee ! ^ /xij
TTov (fidcrde; what .^ say ye? (be it not that ye say/) a state-
ment put deprecatingly or repudiated Surely no ! you don't :
say, etc. =do

you say ?
Hence [Jii] naturally expresses a prohibition, fj-rj fx' ipWiê,
pj-ovoke me not ! It also naturally expresses fear, apprehension,
surmise {xj fj.e o-TclS-q Sa/xao-g, I fear (or perchance) the frost shall
:
overpower me. The surmise may be expressed independently,

as above, or it may be attached to a verb, and so pass into a
Subordinate Sentence SeiSto /x?) yevwyât, I fear that I may
:
become. Again the surmise, or result deprecated, may prove

true SetSo) fxrj vrjiieprea eirrev, I fear she spake the truth.^
:
^ Ov denies, /j.-^ declines, Curtius, Ov denies, firi rejects ; oi is the

negative of fact and statement, firi of the will and thought, Goodwin in
Liddell and Scott Ov denies a predication, fXTj forbids or dfprecates
(further on, disclaims), Monro's Homeric Grammar.
"
M77 is identical with the Sanskrit md. In Sanskrit md is used with
the Conjunctive, Optative of wishing, and Imperative like /inj in Greek,
Curtius, Etym. i. p. 415. For instances see Delbriick and Windisch,
Syntaktische Forschungen, Der Gebrauch des Cnnjunciivs und Optativs
im Sanskrit und Griechischen, p. 112 and following. Max Midler,
Oxford Inaugural Lecture, Kote C, gives an instance (from WQson)
of the prohibitive md with what may be equally well called an Infini-
tive or Dative md kdpaldya, lit. not for unsteadiness, i.e. do not act
:
unsteadily. This seems to trace back fx-q as far as we can go.

345
346 THE NEGATIVES.
In the above instances ov contradicts downright a state

all
ment of fact,whereas \ir\ deals with conceptions or thoughts.
A line is thus drawn between the two negatives a line, on —
the whole, clearly marked throughout Attic Greek, although
subsequently blurred. ^ Mr^ is thus used with JFishes, Prohibi-
tions, Conditions, and Purposes. A
negative consequence con-
ceived (wcTTe with the infinitive) requires fi-q, a negative con-
sequence achieved as a fact {wa-re with the Indicative)
requires ov.
M-q is used generally with abstract conceptions as opposed to
known and definite facts. Thus ot ov Trto-TevovTes means those
particular (knoicn) persons ivho do not believe ; ot p) Tno-reiJovTcs,
all or any persons who do not believe (if any do not believe) ; i-TreiSr)
ovK ^Xdov, when, or since (as a matter of fact), they did not
come; cTretS?) fjir] eXOoiev, whenever (the number of times not
being specified) they did not come; rj ovk kinrupia, tJie in-
experience (of some known person), the fact that some one is in-
experienced ; -q fi-q e/xTretpta, inexperience in tJie abstract (without
predicating of any particular person) ; 6 ovk wv, he who is not
existing, the dead man ; to, jxr] ovra, all things whatsoever are Twt,
a vast limbo outside of our actual knowledge.
The construction of the sentence may change ov to fi-q, yet
even so, if it is necessary to contradict point bhmk a word or
statement, ov may be used. See examples at the end of
this chapter.
Whatever applies to ov and fi-q applies equally to their com-
pounds, oijSets, fL-qSds : ovSe, fx-qSe : ovre, fi'qre, etc., etc.
§ 280. Ov PRIVATIVE.
prefixed to a word deprives that word of its afifirma-
Ov
tive meaning and gives it exactly the opposite sense.
Hence it is called privative (privativum).
Especially noticeable under this head is the idiomatic
use of ov with verbs of saying and thinking ov (f)r)fjbi, ov :
(bacTKO), ov vo/iiiô), ovk otofJuaL, ov Soko), ovk ew.
^ As Lucian (second century a.d.) is sometimes read, it may be
observed that he uses fifj where Attic writers use 01): (1) with Parti-
ciples in a Causal sense, and after u>s, on, diori Causal, (2) after Verbs
of Saying and Thinking in Oratio Obliqua.
—
Ov PRIVATIVE. 347
By this idiom ov is used with the principal verb where

in English the negative is joined with the following
Infinitive.
Ov in fact almost coalesces with its word. Compare

the use of the Latin negative {ne in nego {ne-ig-6), ne queo,
nescio) which has gone a stage further than ov in coalescing.
ov (fjaac OefjbiTov elvai. Plat.
They say it is not right.
negant fas esse.
ovK coero Zelv Xeyeiv. AesCHIN.

He thought that he need not speak.
ov fjbOL BoKw. Plat.
/ thinJc not.
Note 1. This use of ouwith the governing Verb seems more

ancient than with the Infinitive. See Monro's Homeric Chum-
mar, p. 262.
Note 2. This ov privative is sometimes retained where the
construction requires |u^.
kav ov (fiTJTe edv re <^7JT€. PlAT. A])ol. XU. 25 B.
Whether you say no or yes.
€t IX€V ov TToAAot rjo-av. LyS. 13. 72.

If they were few.
Cf. Thug. i. 121 (d ovk dTrepovo-i); Xen. An. i. 7. 18 (d ov
fiaxdrat); SoPH. Ai. 1131, 1242, 1268; El. 244: EuR.
Med. 88.
But generally the /xvy required by construction is used,
ear fii) (f>y 6 eVepos tov eVepov opdcos Xiyav. PlAT. Gorg. 457 D.
Note 3. Ov exerts this privative or contradictory force on
any word to which it is prefixed.
{a) Verbs :
ou a-Tepy(o, I hate. ovk ol^loj, I consider that not

OVK ew, \t mnaer,
h' /J ^ h'ri (like ov SoKoi), I require or ex-
jm-OM.
oi KeXevw,)^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ (Thug. ii. 89),
OVK vTria-xvov/xat, I refuse. I disdain or refuse (Aesch.
ou TrposTTOLovfxai, dissimulo. P. V. 285).
ou o-vfxfSovXevo), I advise one
not to, etc. Thug, and Hdt.
—
348 THE NEGATIVES.

(b.) Other words :
Totov KaXd, immorality.

ov KaAws, immorally ; ovk dp^ws, icrongly.
ov\ eis, OVK 0X1^01=: TToAAot, many.
OVK eAd;(i(7T0S^/U€yi(rT0S.
OVK rJKLCTTa aAAa fidXiCTTa, Hdt. iv. 170.
T^s AevKoiBos rj ov TreptTet^tcrts, Thuc. iii. 95, the non-investm^nt
of Leucas.
-q OVK eôixrta, ThUC. V. 50 J
rj ov SiaXvcris, i. 137 ; 17 ovk
aTToSoais, V. 35.
ev ov Katpo), unseasonably, EuR. Bacch. 1288.
Note In some of these cases the negative doubtless is
4.
due to the Greek reserve and abatement of positive assertion
(litotes), e.g. ovx ^jKio-Ta, not least, i.e. (by implication) most.
§ 281. Ov AND ixri WITH ADJECTIVES, PARTI-

CIPLES USED AS ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS,
AND SUBSTANTIVES.
(For Infinitives used as Substantives see § 283.)
Ov. Mrf.
When definite and known When the members of a

individuals or members class are indefinite, so
of a class are spolvcu of, that the expression is
so that a fact is stated, virtually conditional : (or
ov is used. when certain attributes

are thought of, so that it
is consecutive :) or when
the expression is a mere
vague conception, some-
thing thougrht of rather
than known, fjuri is used.
Instances with fxrj much outnumber those with ov.

OL OVK wâQoL iToXlTaL. 01 fxt) Kadapol ra? ')(elpa^.
Those {particular) citizens Antiph.

who are not good. All who are of impure hands.
O^ AND mi] WITH ADJECTIVES, ETC. 549
01 ov TTLaTevovre'i. 01 fir] 7rC(TT€U0VT€<;.
Those tuho do not helieve. Those, i.e. any (all) who do

(Special known persons not helieve = if any do not
spoken of.) helieve.
ii qui non credunt. = ocTive<i fxrj Tnarevovai.

oaot dv fiT] irtaTevaai.
si qui non credunt.
at ovK opdat iroknelai Tcof <jTpaTi(OTa)v 01 fjLT] Svva-

avrai. Plat. Rep. IxevoL. Xen.
TTiese wrong forms of govern- Such of the soldiers as are
ment. unable.
Here, as in many such cases, ra opara Kai ra fir] {opara).

the ov is privative ; under Plat. Fhaed.
which rule are given ex-
The things which are seen
amples of adverbs and
substantives. and those which are not
seen.
o [ir] iarpo<i aveiriaTrj/icov.

Plat. Gorg.
He who is not a physician
is inexperienced.
ecvov ecTLv r] fir] efiTreipia.
Ak. Ecc.
A sad thing is inexperience.
Here no statement is made

that any particular person
is inexperienced, but the
mere conception is spoken
of.
Note on Substantives. When ov is used with a Substantive,

the expression is equivalent to a negative objective sentence.
=
Thus t] OVK tôva-La qiiod 71011 licet, the fact that it is not per-
mitted. Whereas i) p) iôvcria simply means the not heing able
as an abstract conceittion, non licere. Mq however may be
said to be the usual Attic construction Avith Substantives.
:
350 THE NEGATIVES.
§ 282. Ou AND /xrj WITH PARTICIPLES,

Ov.
Ov is used when the Par- M97 is used when the An-
ticiple states a fact tecedent to the Partici-
the Participle is often ple is indefinite, so that
Causal. the Participle is Condi-
tional.
ov TTiaTevcov. firj Triarevcov.

Since (as, when, etc.) he does If he does not believe,
not helieve.
aia'^vvofjLai ov ttoicov ravra. ata'X^vvofJbat jmt] ttoicov rav-

I am ashamed because (that) ra.
I do not do this. I am ashamed if 1 do n/)t
do this.
Srj'Xwao) ov nrapa'yevofievo^.
Antiph.
/ will yrove that I was nx)t
present.
ovK av ovvaio, fitj ku/mcov,

fxeTaXajSiov to Tre/XTrrov /xepos
evSai/jbouelv. EuE.
rwv ^^wv.
TIiou couldst not be happy,
Plat. Apol. xxv.
He would even have been con- unless thou shouldst toil.
demned to fay a thousand

drachmae, because he had not
obtained a fifth of the votes.
OVK iVTV)(ovcraL Soêr ovî

Sv(TTV)(êtV.
Eur. JBacch. 1263.

Although not fortunate, ye shall
seem not to be unfortunate.
Cf. 270, vovv OVK e\(i)v (void
as he is of sense).
— —
Oi AND Mfj WITH THE INFINITIVE. 351
Note, ov is more usual with the Participle than

(is (wcTTre/))
ws /xr). appears to be used when the construction of the

<Ls )U7;
Sentence demands ft>/ {e.g. when an Imperative or a Con-

ditional particle precedes), though even then tos ov may be
used when a plain statement of fact is intended.
edopvfScLTe ws ov 7roi7jcrovTes ravra. Lys. 12. 73 (cf. 27. 16,
wanrep oi').
Cf. Thug. iv. 5 ; vi. 82. 2, Xen. An. iv. 4. 15.
For ws fji'q
:
(is ifiov /ATySeTTOTC ajLieATjcTOVTOS, oi'tcos e;(€ ri^v yvw[xy]v,

Xen. C^r. i. 6. 11.
^
But, dcjiUTe fii rj [xrj dcficere (is e/xov ovk av ttoivjctovtos aAAa.
Plat. ^ô/. xvii. 30 B ; Thug. i. 78. 1. /SpaSecos ftovXevearOe
(is ov Trepl f3pa^k(jiv.
(is /X7J, with the Participle, may denote several charac-
teristics, e.g. SiSaa-Ks fjC (is fir] eiSoTa, OS onc wlio Jcnows not,
Soph, a C. 1154.
§ 283. Ov AND iiTj WITH THE INFINITIVE.

Ov. Mt;.
Mr] is the regular Negative with the Infinitive.

Whenov is found with an Infinitive, it is chiefly in
Indirect Statements after verbs of Saying and Thinking,
oif being the proper construction in Oratio Obliqua.
An infinitive used as a Substantive with or without
the Article regularly takes ix-q.
€^7] OVK eK^rjvac /x£ e/c tov aicrj^pov fir] a\r]6eueiv.
irXoiov. Antiph. It is lorong not to speak the

He stated that I did iwt truth.
leave the ship =^ ovk ecfirj
eK^rjvai.
eXeyov ovk elvai avrovofioi. -y^pr] /j,i] Karac^poveiv tov

Thug. ttXtiOov;. Isaeus.
They ivere saying that they We should not despise the
were not independent. multitude.
352 THE NEGATIVES.
evofjbicyev ovk av BvvaaOac to /jltj hiKa'iw^ uTroXecrat,.

fieveiv. Xen. Antiph.
He thought that they would An unjust sentence of death.
not remain.
ofjLU)fioK€v ov -^(âpietaaai.
Plat. A^joI. xxiv. 35 c.
A striking instance ; verbs

of swearing usually are
followed by firi, see note 4
below.
For other instances, cf.
Soph. Ant. 378, 755 ; Plat.

Apol. xvii. 29 b.
1. When ov is exceptionally used with the Infinitive,

Note
it isgenerally due either to the o^'der of or emi)hasis on a word
or sentence. Sometimes ov is privative. positive negation A
is always made.
ovSci/os a/xa/oretv SiKaios ecmv. AnTIPH. iv. Tetr. T. a. 6.
There is nothing icliich he deserves to miss.
= ov8ev ecTTLV ov afxapTeiv.
dAo) eyw Qv ofxwfJLOKaTe 7rapa/3^vai ovSev.

Xen. Hell ii. 4. 48.
/ beg you to violate no single point of your oath.
Z=OVK d^LW.
Observe that ov is used although a Petition strictly requires

fi-Zl. Cf. Thug. i. 39. 2.
Cf. Soph. Fhil. 88, €<^w ov8€v=ovk 'icfivv.
KeXevet ovk iv rfj iKKXijcria dW Iv tw Oedrpw Trjv dvdpprja-u
ylyvea-daL. AeSCH. 3. 204.
(The law) requires the proclaviation to he made, not in the

Assembly, but in the Theatre.
Emphasis on the parenthesis.

Oi AND Mr, WITH THE INFINITIVE. 353
SoKets xaipqcreiv 1} ovk d~odavei(r6ai ; AnDOK. i. 101.

Do you expect to rejoice, or escape death ?
OVK a-odavda-dai is perhaps privative.
Note 2. XP'/ {XP^î ^XP^^) 2-1^6 followed by both iiq and ov

with the Infinitive, xp/y ov may be considered to stand for
ov xp-q-
Soph. Phil. 1363, xp^jv /a^tc /xoAeiv, k.t.A.
And. 607, x/^^jv /xi) Ktvetv.

Eur. Androm. 100, xp^ ^' oi-ttot' ehrdv, so 214.
Hipp. 507, XP'Jv ov 0-' oLfiaprdveiV.
Med. 294, XP^ S' ovttot' eKSiSda-Kecrdai,.
Note 3. Mtj is not seldom found with the Infinitive in an

Indirect Statement. In some, but not all such instances,
the Statement is general, and bears the character of a
Conception.
aTreKpivaTO /xv^Sevos 17TTCOV eivai. XeN. Hell. ii. 3. 11.

He replied that he was inferior to none ; cf. iii. 2. 31 ; iv.
4. 5 ; Mem. i. 2. 39.
01 fJMVTets Aeyovrat eavTOis fiv) ~poopav to eTriov.
Xen. Symp. iv. 5.
Prophets are said not to foresee the future for themselves.
This is not, however, the strict Attic use, and Xenophon is

often exceptional. See Xen. 3Iem. i. 2. 39. Ov and /ii]
occur in co-ordinate clauses in Soph. Phil. 1058 3 Plat. Prot.
319 B.
Note 4. Many Verbs which imply an effort of thought or

ifill prefer nq with the Infinitive. Such are Verbs of making
an admission, o/xoAoyw, Plat. Phaed. xlii. 98 D, o-vyx^pw cf. :
conviction, iria-Tivij), Xen. An. i. 9. 8 ; Tre-etcr/xai, Plat. Apol.

xxvii. 37 A of witnessing, swearing, 6jxvvij.i^ Ar. Vesp. 1047,
:
=
1281 (also an Epic usage), lp!a 6p.ovpat, Xen. Cyr. vii 1. 18;
lyyvw/xai, Plat. Prot. 336 D. (For other constructions of
6fivvp.i, see Lexicon.)
Verbs of Perception, k-'unapai, are found with 11.1] and the

Infinitive in Soph. El. 908, 1092.
.
354 THE NEGATIVES.
§ 284. DIRECT AND INDIRECT STATEMENT.

Ov. Mij.
The Direct Statement

takes ov.
ovK eê^rjv €k tov irXoLOV.

Antiph.
/ did not leave the ship.
Indirect Statement with

oTt or CO 9 takes ov.
For the Indirect State-

ment in the Infinitive, cf.
supra.
Trapeô/Ltai fiaprvpa^ to? ovk

eê^Tjv eK tov ifKoLOV.
Antiph.
I produce witnesses {tojJrove)
that I did not leave the

ship := OVK e^€^r]V.
eiTrev ort ovoev avra fxeAoL

TOV Oopvôv. Lys.
He said lie did not care
about the disturbance =
ovBev fiot /xeXet.
§ 285. INDIRECT STATEMENT WITH

THE PARTICIPLE.
riyyeiXe t^v ttoKlv ov tto- ^''ote. But Verbs of Percep-
' tion sometimes take f^ See
^
XcopKrideiaav
/)
Xek
Yt^tvt iiri.
^^^^ ^^^ ^^^3 ^^^ ^ ^^

He reported that the city had thuc i 76 1 •
ii. 17. 2 •
not been besieged. similarly after BeiKvvfii, Eur.

"Recta : ovk eiroXiopK-Ôr). Trv. 970.
;
DIRECT QUESTIONS. 355
eyvcoaav ov Trpa'y^delaav ttjv
^vfiixa'xîav. TllUC.
They discovered that the al-
liance had not been con-
cluded.
Recta ovk etrpajÔr}.
:
Ov in both cases is regular,

going with an Oblique
Statement.
§ 286. DIRECT QUESTIONS.

Ov expects the answer " yes " {Twnne ?). Mrj expects
the answer " no " (7iu7n t). They are often associated
with other particles : ap ov ; apa ixr\ ; ovkovv; fjbwv {i.e.
fiT] ovv) ; ficbv ov ; ficov fir} ; fxwv ovv ; rj ov ; rj fj,r]
ravT ovy^L KaX(o<; Xeyerat ; fit] aot SoKov/jbev r^ySe Xet-

Ka\a)<;. PlaT. (f)6rjvai fid'^T] ; AescH.
Is not this rightly said ? Think' st thou we were in-
Tes, rightly. ferior in this fight ?
(f)T]<; rj ov ; TTavv ye. Plat. Note. in an oblique ques-

p.r\
tion, like num in Latin, loses

Do you assent, or do you not
this force of expecting a ne-
(assent) ? i.e. Yes or no ?
gative answer. So Soph. Ant.
Certainly (7 do assent). 1253, Eur. Herac. 482.
Ov interrogative with a
Future Indicative is equi-
valent to an Imperative.
OVK aêd &)? Twîcrra ;
Soph. Ant. 885.

Will you not lead her away
instantly ? (i.e. lead her
away).
Followed by an imperative
Kol a<peT€.
;;
356 THE NEGATIVES.
ovKOVV KadeSel Brjr evOahi,,

fyuarpwv ; Ak. Ran. 200.
Sit ye dovm there, Paunch.
Cf. Soph. Ant. 2U, Ai. 6^^,
Phil. 97--), 0. a 834.
Note. Similarly ovk av with

optative, ovk av <^/t)duretas
which is a gentle <^p6.crov,
Soph. Phil. 122. But ov in
combination with -ov and 8?)
(ov TTOV ; ov Tt TTOV ; ov Srj
ov Sij TTOV ;) means surely it is
not so ? Cf. Soph. Phil. 900

Ar. Ban. 522, 526;— the ques-
tion here is really outside the
words " surely not eh ?" —
§ 287. DELIBERATIVE QUESTIONS.

Mrj is used in Delibera-
tive Questions.
firj aTTOKptvcofjbat ; PlaT.

Am I not to ansvjer ? ^
Xeyere, eia-ta rj (4,7] ; Plat

Sxjcak, must I enter or no?
Cf. Soph. Ai. 668, rt /i^';
§ 288. INDIRECT QUESTIONS

(a.) Indirect Single Ques-
tion. The Negative is ov.
rjpwTTiaa, Bia ri ovk ekdoi.

I asked him why he did not
come.
INDIRECT PE TITION 357
iip(OTayopa<; epuna ei ovk

aia)(ûvofiat. PlaT.
Protagoras asks me if I am
not ashamed.
Obs. el here is interroga-
tive, not conditional.
(b.) In Indirect Double Questions the usage varies, but ov
is commoner than ârj. There is generally a reason for /iTj.
(TKOTrwfiev, et irpeTret rj ov. 6 veo<; ov^ oto9 re Kpiveiv o

Plat. tl re virovola Kat, b fir].
Let Its consider whether it is Plat.

becomhig or not. A child is incapable of de-
^^^^^^9 ^'-'^^^^ ^^ allegonj
oTTft)? lhr)<i
etr' ^vBov elr ovk evhov. ^^^^ ^"^^^ ^'^^•
Soph.
That thou mafst see
Whether he be within or not
within.
Note. Ov rather than /atj seems to represent simply the
original direct double question. Mi] seems to import a doubt
into the question, or to represent it as a conception. Professor
Jebb, in a note to Soph. Ai. 6, and Antiphox {Attic Orators,
p. 161), draws a subtle distinction in every case. Thus, he
says (TKOTTWfiev el irpiTrei ^ prj means, let us consider the question
of abstract fitness : but a-KOTrwiJ-ev el Trpkirei ^ ov ; let us see ichether

the matter in hand is fit or no.
In this passage of Antiphon, el p-q el ^ ou occur in
•>]
—
sequent clauses. Similarly in IsAEUS, viii, 9, we have, ia
three sequent clauses, elre elre pj Kal el 7} ov — — Kat el rj p-q.
§ 289. INDIRECT PETITION.

p,7] is always used whe-
ther the Petition is Direct
or Indirect.
fir) Kkeirre or p.r] Kke'^'i.
358 THE NEGATIVES.
a. Direct.
11,7] aîovre fie ravra hpav.

Do iwt require nie to do this.
h. Indirect.
eXeyov avTOi<i fii) aoLKecv.

Thug.
TJiej/ were telling them not to
do wrong.
iKerevov firj aTpe^Xcodijvai.
Andok
Thei/ were begging not to he
tortured.
For exceptions see

Note.
under ou and /it) with Infini-
tive. See also o-ws uv; with
Future Indicative (Index),
§ 290. COyDITIONAL.
Ov. Mrj.
The Apodosis or Principal The Protasis or Subordin-

Sentence takes ov. ate Sentence takes /irj.
For Examples see Conditional Sentences.

Note 1. ^Vhere ov is found
in a Protasis it is joined
privatively to some special
word. (Cf. supra, p. 347.)
Note 2. €1 interrogative, not

conditional, takes oi not fi-q.
Not^ 3. When ei is used like

oTi after verbs of emotion
(davixdô), KaroLKTiipo), 8eivov
«r-i, and the hke), ov, not fn),
follows, for we may either say
that a statement of fact is
;
CONCESSIVE, CAUSAL. 359
made, or that ei is virtually

causal. Cf. Isoc. 11 d. /x^
davfjLoxrys el ov n-pkire.i, DeM.
197 D. ouK alcrxpuv el ov
Note 4. Also sometimes el

ov is found when a direct
statement quoted, el, ws
is
wv ov TrapecTKevda-aTO,
<f>-j(TeL,
Dem. 1266. 2, so virtually

Eur. Ion, 347.
§291. CONCESSIVE.
Ov. M-q.
Kanrep {kui, koI ravra, El, eciv {^v, av), conces-
Kal Toc), with a Parti- sive, take fuj, being truly
ciple take ov. Conditioual.
Kanrep ovTe<; ov Seivoi fiefj,-
vrjadac fivr^fiovevere.
Dem.
Though you are not quid' at
remembering, you remem-
her.
Cf. Soph. Phil. Zll ; Eur.

Ale. 352= even being.
§ 292. CAUSAL.
Ov. Mrj.
The regular Negative is ov.
eireiBr] ovk eSuvavro Xa/M- 2\;ote.See Introduction on

o '
paveiv
^
TO ^coptov cnnevah
/ 1 / use of in Causal Sentences
p.!)
in late Greek.
r]8r) eire-êlpovv. Xen.
Since they v:ere unahle to
take the fort they now

vjcre trying to depart.
So Sto'r*, Thug. iv. 11. 2.

360 THE NEGATIVES.
§ 293. CONSECUTIVE A ND RESTRICTIVE.

Ov.
ware with the Indicative wcrre with the Infinitive
takes ov. takes fXT].
ovrw hiaKeijxeOa ware ovoev ovTo}<; aXojLaTo^ ecfii ware

irpaâi BvuafieOa. DeM. fit] SvvaaOaL XoylêaOat.
We are in such a mood that Plat.
we are unalle to do any- So unreflecting am I that I
thing. cannot reflect.
a(pi€/jL€v a€ e(p o) re firjKeri

(f)L\oao(f)eLv. Plat.
We set you free on the under-
standing that you tw
longer ]_mrsue jjhilosophy.
Cf. Thug. i. 103. 1. (Fut.
Indie.)
Note, ov is found with an For the rule of ecf) o) re,
Infinitive. see p. 274.
8eiV eTT/jTretAet reAetv wctt' ovre
VfKTOS VTTVOV OVr' 1^ '/^/Xe/DttS
Soph. El. 782.

S^ threatened to fulfil a drcxd
revenge, so thai, nor day, nor
night, did sweet sleep shroud
me.
Cf. Eur. Eel. 107, Phoen.

1357, Thug. 40. 2, viii
v.
70. 6, Plat. Apol. xiv. 26 d.
Note. It is very important

to distinguish between the
regular and the exceptional
use of (ScTTc ov with the Infini-
tive. The regular use {e.g.
Plat. A2nl. xiv.) is due to
Oratio Obliqua. The exam-
ple in Soph. EI. 782 is excep-
TEMPORAL, LOCAL, AND FINAL SENTENCES. 361
tional. But iu all cases we

may perhaps say that there is
a negation of fact.
§294. TEMPORAL AND LOCAL SENTENCES.

Ov. M77,
When the Time or Place is When the Time or Place
definite ov is used. is indefinite firf is used
{e.g. with brav, ottotuv,
eireiBav, bwou av, etc.,
with Subjunctive : or
ore, etc., with Optative).
eireioT] avi]p ovk ecpaivero fiVKOvv, orav Se jjut] crdevco,
ci>')(Ofjbriv TrXeeov. Antiph. TreTravao/xai. SoPH.
When the manvxis not forth- So, when I have no strength,
corning I went on my 1 vjill give o'er,
voyage. {orav denotes Indefinite
Futurity.)
€0)9 fiev OL av/iifxa'ôi ovk OTTore /jL7] (paiev a7ruyovTe<i
€i')(ov oTTOt airQcnalev aireKTelvav. Thuc.
eKpVTTTOV TTJZ/ TTpo? y/i,a9 Whenever they said "no,"
exdpav. Xen. Hell. they led them off and exe-
So long as the allies did not cute them.
know what side to revolt
Obs. That o-ore changes ov
to, they concealed their 4>ijfJ.L to /JLlj (ji-t]fll.
dislike to you.
§ 295. FLNAL SENTENCES, ETC.

{a.) Final Sentences.
(h) OTTCD? with Future
Indicative.
(c.) Verbs of Feariuor.
With these Constructions
the regular Construction is
362 THE NEGA TIVES.
§ 296. Ov and Mr; with Relatives.
M77.
The Relative takes ov The Ptelative takes /ju-q

when the Antecedent is when the Antecedent is
definite, so that a fact indefinite. The use of
is spoken of. firi with Relatives is the
same as its use with et.
^TjTovaa (f>ap/xa')l evpov of^ a fj-T] oiSa ouSe OLOfiat ei-
a '
ôv\ofi7)v. EuE. hevai. Plat.
a 'ôvXdfiijv, i.e. a eôv- Whatever I know not I do
Xojj/qv. not think that I know.
In seeking drugs I found not
what I sought.
Cf. Xen. An. ii. 2. 3.
Note. Ol'SetS OCTTtS ov, OVK ol e/xe tcraai. Plat.

firi
fQ-TLv ocTTLs OV take ot'. Thuc.
Any (all, such cls) do not
iii.39; vii. 87; Hdt. v. 97.
Plat. Prot. 323 c. know me.
In Thuc. iii. 81, ot 8e oaTL'i jXTj avTapK7)<; ecrnv
:roAAoi Twv LKerwv o<toi ovk
ovTO<; ')(a\e7ro'i (f)tXo^ ea-
k-elcrd-qa-av, the actual fact is
rl. Xen. 3fem. ii. 6. 2.
perhaps emj^hasised. With a
negative preceding Totor-os, Whoever is not self-sufficient
ov always follows (Madvig, is a dangerous friend.
§ 203, note) :
Aesch. Euni. 618, 661,
Cf.
vofxov Ti^€/xei', oiKi](riv Kai ra-
Soph. 0. T. 281 (with
fxieiov f^1^Sevl eu'at fJLtjBev
roLOVTOv, els o ov 7ras fSov-

Subjunctive and Opta-
Xofxevos eiaeLCTLv. tive with av).
Plat. Puf. iii. 416 d.
This indefinite or generic use
A treasury which not every one
of firi shades ofi" into a Con-
toho icishes shall enter.
secutive or Final use.
Cf. S. Matt. vii. 21, ov ttSs xpijcfiLcraa-de roLavTa e^ S>v fx-q
elcreXevcriTai,. SeTTore vjxlv /xera/xeA-iycret.
Andok 3. 41.
Pass such a sentence that you
will never repent of.
Oi AND Mij WITH /RELATIVES. 363
{jLekkovci yap a'

ivravOa ~€fnf€iv ivOn fxij —06'
qXcov eêyyos Trpoaotpn.
Soph. El. 380.
Th^tj are purposing to send thee
where thou never more shalt
see the glory of the sun.
Cf. Soph. Ai. 359, 470;

Phil 408, 588.
Cf. the Eestrictive oaov fii],
ocra fxi], KaO' ocrov fj.-)],

otl fi-q.
ov and /z,^ are both used with the Eelative in a Causal

Sense. The analogy of Causal Sentences seems to show
that ov must be the normal construction nrj ;
is used
where perhaps the fact is delicately put, as for instance
el is put for ort after Oavfidô). This use of /x-q arises
from its seneric use.
davfiacrrov Trotet? b? ovhev Ta\aL7ra)po<; Ti? av ye av-
6p(07ro<i el ot fiTjre deoc
Xen. Mcvi. ii. 7. 13. Trarpcoot eidi fi^jre lepa
Toil are acting strangehj in K.T.\. Plat. Euth. 302.
giving nothing. Yoit are a miserable sort
So Ak. Nub. 692 (^Vt? ov of being since you have
aTpareverat), EuR. Med. neither national gods nor
589. sacrifices.
ttok; av opdco<; efiov Kare-

yiyvwaKere, at to irapa-
Trav 7r/30<? tovtovi fir/Sev
avfJLôXatov earlv ;
Dem. Apat. 903. 22.

Hovj could you have rightly
condemned me, since I
have nx) contract at all
with this man ?
C£ An. Ran. 1459.
364 THE NEGA TIVES.
§ 297. Mr) is used in Expressions of a Wish.

Mr}KeTi. ^Mfjv €70).
Ak. Mth. 1255.
May I no longer live !
fjuri TTOT (t)(f)eXov \nreLv

TTJU ^Kvpov.
Soph. Phil. 969.
Would I ne'er had left
My Scyros.
= I ought never, fi^ like
fiiq after Bel.
kyu) Opdcrvs ovt' eifj.1 /ai^tc ye-

voifiqi'. Dem. 8. 68.
/ am neither bold nor might I
become so.
lyu) S' OTTWS (TV /MYj XeyeiS 6p6io<;

rdSe OVT av ovvacfxqv jx-qr
iTn(rTa.i prjv Aeyetv. SOPH.

Ant 685.
But that these tcords thou
speakest are not right I neither
could nor may I learn to say.
OVT av Svvat/xrjv is an Apo-

dosis, and therefore ov is re-
quired p-qr kTH(TTa.i(J.i]v is a
:
Avish ; the jx-q with ottws is far

more difficult to explain, for
it is an Indirect Statement.
But observe that ottws p-q
depends on a verb of percep-
tion, eTrlcTTapat (see note 4 p-q
with Infin.). Also ottws p-q
expresses doubt, and is much
less positive than ort ov.
Moreover the wish ij.i]B' eVto-

Taipi]v may throw its shadow
over the previous line.
—
MiJ AND Mr, oh WITH THE INFINITIVE. 365
§ 298. Mt^' and {kj] ov with the Infinitive.
A. After a Principal Sentence containing Verbs and

expressions of denying, hindering, forhidding, and avoid-
ing, fitj is used with the Infinitive where in English we
use no negative.
^rjif ^ Karapvei firj heZpaKevai rahe ; SoPH.

Dost oivn or dost deny that thou hast done this ?
rjvavTLOidr^v fiijSev irparTeiv irapa tov<; vofiov;.

Plat.
/ opposed your doing anything contrary to the laws.
aira'ôpevoi fir) iroielv eKKKrjaiav. Aristoph.

I forbid your calling an assembly.
TjTriCTTOUV fiq eiVai tovs to. oirXa —apaSovTas toTs Te^vewcrtv

6/xotovs. Thug. iv. 40,
They did not believe that those ivho had given up their arms
were like those who had fallen.
6vr)T0vs y' iirav(ra pJq TrpoSipKiaOai /j.6pov.
Aesch. p. V. 248,
Ay, I let mortals from foreseeing their doom.
Note 1.
Such verbs are :
dvTiAcyu), \ e^w (and compounds), ^

dpvoviiai (and com- \deny. dpyoi (and compounds), f hiinr
pounds), )
l/ATToSwv etî/at, i der.
> dispute, doubt.
^'
^ '
<p€vy(i), I
I
hesitate,
devoid.
(pvAacra-ofiaL. J
So also (iTToAiSo/Aat, Thug. i. 128; d-iroKpvTrropai, ii. 53;
dTro(rTpe(f)(ji, viii. 108 ; vTreKTpaTrea-dat, SoPH. 0. C. 565 ;
(jivkuaa-U), 0. C. 667.
366 THE NEGATIVES.
Note 2.
Mf], however, as in the Enghsh idiom, is not seldom

omitted.
ov davelv €ppv(rdiJ.r)v. EUR.
Whom I from death delivered.
TovTo Tis eipyet Spav 6kvo<s. PlAT.

Some scruple prevents me from doing this.
Cf. Soph. 0. T. 129 ; Thuc. i. 62 ; Plat. Phaed. 108 e.
Note 3.
Other constructions are (1) wsre fir] with the Infinitive,

(2) TO p-rj with the Infinitive, (3) rod or tou p,r} with the
Infinitive.
(1.) dyyeXXoiv on ras vaiis d.Tro(TTpk^€U SxjTe p,rj e\6eiv.

Thug. viii. 108. 1.
Announcing that he had diverted the ships from coming.
(2.) eTpjov TO fxr) KaKovpyeiv. ThUC. iii. 1.
They prevented them from inflicting damage.
Cf. Aesch. Eum. 691 Soph. Antig. 263. ;
(3.) kKOiXva-e. tov KaUiv hnovras. XeN. An. i. 6. 2.
He kept them from advancing and burning.
Iêi TOV pjr] KaraSuvat. XeN. An. iii. 5. 11.

It will keep them from sinking.
Cf. Thug. L 76, ii. 49, iii. 75 ; Xen. Cyr. ii. iv. 23
B. But when the Verbs themselves take a Negative

or quasi-Negative, /x?) ov and not firf alone is used with
the Infinitive.
Here also in English we use no negative in the sub-
ordinate sentence.
TLva olei aTrapvriaeadai firj ovî einaraaOat ra

BiKaia; Plat.
Who do you think vjill deny that he is acquainted
with justice ? { = no one will deny).
ov Xtj^co fjLT) ov iraai irpo^wvelv. SOPH.

1 will not cease to publish unto all.
M^ AAD M^ oi WITH THE INFINITIVE. 367
Tt efiTToScop fii) ov^L airodavelv ; Xex.

What is there to hinder us from being put to death ?
( = no hindrance).
Cf. Aesch. p. K 627 {-i /xeAAec?;); Sopa AL 540, 728;
Xen. Symp. iii 3 (to fj.^]
ov).
C. Also when the Principal Sentence is negative, fir)
ov and the Infinitive is used after expressions denoting

what is impossible, ôrong, repugnant, and the like. Here
in English we use a Negative.
ahvvara rjv fir) ov fieya\a ^Xairreiv. ThUC.

It was impossible not to injlict great harm.
ouSet? fjL av Treiaeiev to /jltj ovk eXdetv. APJSTOPH.

1^0 one shall persuade me not to go.
us ov\ ocidv (roi ov fxr) ov jôTjdeiv

V7r&T\ov ^TjTqcreiv
PlAT. Bep. 427, E.
SiKaLO(rLvr].
You promised to search, on the ground that it would be
impious for you not to assist justice.
CI Plat. Symp. 218 c {avo-qrov /n?) ov).
D. Sometimes /ii) ov and the Infinitive follows a Principal

Sentence which is not Negative in form.
aitr)(p6i' ecTTi (ro(f>iav ixq ov\l Travrtov Kparunov <f>dvai.
Pl-\t. Frot. 352 D.

It is immoral not to assert that wisdom is the highest of all
possessions.
In these cases the alo-xpov is practically condemning, blaming,

dissuading from a course.
oxrre rracriv atV^viojv eivai fir] OT.'0"~ov6a{€ti'.
Xen. An. LL 3. 11.

So that all were ashamed not to co-operate heartily.
Compare those two examples with Xen. Cyr. viL 7. 16,

Tiva ai<T\Lov fii] (f>i\€ii' i] ruv dSeA<^dp' ; where a quasi-Xegative
Priucipal Sentence is followed by /j-ij only.
See Herod, l 187, 8eiv6v /x-q ov kaPelv.

368 THE NEGATIVES.
§ 299. Mr) ov with the Participle.

M7) ov is found with the Participle denoting circumstance
{conditionally, or restridk-ely), after a Principal Sentence ex-
pressing what is impossible or repugnant.
Mr) ov is practically equal to el fii^, except, unless.
OVK ap' eJTTt (f)iXov tw cjuXovvti ovBev, fj.rj ovk dvTtcf)L\ovv ;
. Plat. Lijs. 212 d.

No creature then is a friend to a friend, unless it love in
return, (icifhout loving).
T^/cet? yap ov Kevrj ye, tout' eyo) (ra^ws

€ôtSa, fxr) ov)(l Setjx' i/xol (jiepova-d ti. SoPH. 0. C. 359.
Thou comest not empty, this I know full well,
unless thou hing'st some horror mine ears. to
yap av
SixraXyv^TOS
eiifv, ToidvSe /xiy ov KaTOiK-eLpuiv eopav. SoPH. 0. T. 11.
hard of heart were I,
Compassionating not so sad a session. (Cf. 0. T. 220.)
Other instances will be found in Herod, ii. 110, vi 9. and

106. IsocRAT. Laud. Eel. 47.
So entirely was /^t) ov eventually regarded as equivalent to
el fi-q that in De3I. de Fals. Leg. 379. 7, we find it used with-
t>ut a participle expressed : ai' re ttoXus TroXXal koI xa^f^rat

XafSdv fjii] ov xpovw Kal TToXiopKLo., tJie cities were numerous and
difficult to take except by long waiting and by siege (so. Xi^^dda-at).
Variant Constructions of B. C. D. (pp. 336, 7).
After a Negative Principal Sentence are used sometimes

(1) the Infinitive alone; (2) p) alone instead of firj ov with
the Infinitive ; (3) to fxr] ov ; (4) tov /xt) ov.
(1) TauTtt OVK eâpvovvTaL irparTeiv. AeSCHIN. iii 250.
They do not deny that tJiey so act.
#iAt—TT ov irapeXdelv ovk "ôvvavTO KCoXvcrai.
Dem. de Pac. 62. 10.
They were not able to prevent Philip advancing.
(2) ov -iroXvv
)(p6vov fj.'
i-e<T\ov fir] fie vavcTToXelv Ta)(y. SOPH. Phil. 348.
Not long while
they held me from quick setting sail. (Cf. Antig. 443.)
«/*
:
Ml) AND MtJ oi> WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 369
(3) OVK 4vavTL(i)crofj.at to /xi) ot5 yeywvetv Tror.
Aesch. p. V. 786.
ril not refuse (lit. opjjose tliee) to declare the whole.
Xen. Symp. iii. 3.
(4) Ti's Mi/Swi' oov dir€Xei<p6r) tov fxrj aKokovdeLV ;

Xen. Cyr. V. 1. 25.
TF/w 0/ ilie Medes failed to follow you ?
Instances of omission of /xv/ and /u,?) ov are said to be rare.

There are however a good many.
1. Mrjomitted after an Affirmative Principal Sentence,
Antiph. and 7. Thitc. iii. 39. 3. Soph. Ai.
Tetr. B. B. 4.
70, 0. T. 129. EuRiP. Or. 263. Apjst. Ack 127. Xen. Hell.
V. 21. Plat. Apol. xix. 31 d, xxxi. 39 k
2. M?; for ix-y] ov after a Negative Principal Sentence,
Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 3. Soph. Fhil. 349. Thuc. iii. 39.
ISOCR. Land. Eel. 47. (Infin. alone after a Negative Sentence.)
§ 300. Mt7 and (xrf ov with the Subjunctive.

Mrj with the Subjunctive expresses anxiety, a/pprchen-
and so may often be translated
sion, s7ispicion, surmise,
perhaps.
fi^ TovTo aKr)de<i fj.
Perhaps this is true.
firj ajpoiKOTepov tj to uXri6e<i eiirelv. PlaT.

Perhaps it is someiohat blunt to tell the truth.
The addition of ov gives the opposite or negative

meaning
fiT] ov TOVTO a\rid€<; 77.
Perhaps this is not true.
aWd jxrj ov tout t] •âXeTTov, davaTov eKcbuyecv.

Plat. Apol
It looks as if this were not the real difficidtij — to
escape death.
Cf. Crit. ix. 48 C. Phaed. xi 67 B.
2 A
: :
370 THE NEGATIVES.
Note 1, M^ ov is found graphically with the Indicative in

questions.
d/VA.' apa ixT) ov)(^ vrrcXaufSdveis ; PlAT. Prot. 312 A.
Bid perhaps then you do not suppose ?
Note 2. oTTws /j-y-, o-ws /x^ ov is similarly used with the Sub-
junctive and Indicative (Pres. and Future), Plat. Crat. 430 D,
3feno 77 A, Fhaedo 77 B; PcIDDELL's Digest, p. 140.
Note 3. The same constructions of and /xi) ov occur even ij.;"]
more commonly after a Principal Verb like (fypdôfxat, 6pw,

CTKOTTW, dOpCj, ei'voovfia.L^ ala-)(^vvojJiat, okvw, kiVSuvos iir.Ti, c})of3ov-
/i.ai, etc.
(a.) With Subjunctive

cf)povTiÔ} fxr] KpoLTiCTTOv y fiot (TLjav. XeN. Mem. iv. 2. 39.
/ am considering tchether it is not best for me to be silent.
Tttura aTTtcTTtav Trape^êi rrepl T?ys 4'^XV'^ H-V ovSa/xov ert tJ.
Plat. Phaed. xiv. 70 A.
This causes a doubt about the sotd that possibly it no longer
exists.
(b.) With Indicative
a. Present Indicative :
opwjiev fxr] NiKias oterai Tt Acyciv. PlAT. Lack. 196.

Cf. Soph. Aît. 1253; Eur. Tro. 178, P/we/i. 92 (quoted p. 267).
b. Imperfect Indicative :
6pa fi^ Trai^wv 'iXeyev, PlAT. Theaet. 145.
e. Future Indicative :
6pa fXTi S€'i](reL. Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 27.

cfyofSovfiaL fii] evpijcrofJiev. PlAT. Phileb. 13. A.
SeSoixa OTTWS fXT) Tevô/jLai. ArIST. Eq. 112.
Cf. Plat. Crat. 393 c, Bep. 451 a.
d. Perfect Indicative :
(jiofSovfJieda firj d/iôre/awv rj/JMpTrjKafiiv. ThUC. iii 53.
e. Aorist Indicative :
8ii8<i} fjiij TTui'Ta vrjixepTeaeTirev, HoM. Od. V. 300.

Oi fi^ WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. yji
§ 301. Ov \Lri WITH SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE

INDICATIVE.
A. Ov yj] with the Subjunctive (generally the Aorist,
but sometimes the Present) expresses an emphatic nega-
tive future statement.
ov firj Travaoyfiai (ptXoaocpcov. PlAT. AjJol. xvii.

/ will never give up 'pliilosopliy.
ovToc (7 ' A')âi.o}v, olda, fjn] Ti9 u/3pLar).

Soph. Ai. 560.
No7ie of the Achaeans, I know it, shall ever insult
thee.
B. Ov yJ] with the Future Indicative has the same

meaning.
oKK etaiO . ov aot fxr] [lede-ôiiai, irore.
Soph. El. 1052.
Enter ivithin. I ne'er 'will follow thee.
eiirev otl rj SirapTr] ovBep fit} kuklov oiKtelraL avrov

aiTodavovTO';. Xen. Hell. i. 6. 32.
He said that Sparta tvould be governed not one whit
the vjorse after his death.
Observe that the example is in the Graphic Oratio

Obliqua.
C. 1. Ov yrj Interrogative with the Future Indicative

(second person singular) expresses a strong prohibition.
irolo'i Zevi ; ov firj Xiypr/cret? ; ovS' eart Zev<;.

Apjst. Nub. 367.
Zeas quotha ! don't talk twaddle. There's no Zeus.
o) dvyarep, ov fir} fMvdov et? ttoWov; e/3et9 ;
Eur. Su2)p. 1066.

Daughter, tell not the tale among the crowd.
372 THE NEGATIVES.
2. Ov \X7] with the Future Indicative (second person)

in the first clause is followed by a second clause express-
ing (a.) an affirmative command (6.) a negative command
or prohibition.
(a.) ov fxii BiarpLylret^, aWa yevaei tt}? dvpa<i ;
Apjst. Ran. 462.

Don't shilly-shally, hut taste the door.
(b.) ov /jli] 7rpoaoLcreL<; yêlpa, p.rih ayjreL ireirXoiv ;
EuK. Hipp. 606.

Bring not thy hand near, and touch not my robes.
3. Ov with the Future Indicative (second person), de-

noting an affirmative command, is followed by a Future
Indicative (with Kal jxrj, p-vê) denoting a negative
command or prohibition.
ov^L avyKXr/a-ei^ o-rofMa,

Kai fj.rj pbeOiiaea av6L<; aia-î(Trov^ \oyov^ ;
EuK. Hip2X 499.

Set a seal upon thy lips,
and. let not fall again most shameful words.
ov crly aveêi, firjSe SeiXcav apet? ; SoPH. Ai. 75.

Keep silence, and a.vjahe not covja/rdAce. (Lit. vjilt thou
not silently endure ?)
Some make these two separate questions, one with ov

{nonne ?), the other with fxil] (num ?), wilt tlwu )iot endure silently ?
and wilt thou play the coward ?
§ 302. Further Examples of ov fxrj.
A. ov /JL-j WITH SUBJUNCTIVR

ovKe-L fxri 8vvi]-aL fiaaiXevs rjpas KaTaXa/Siiv.
Xex. An. ii. 2. 12.
There is no longer any likelihood of the King overtaking us.
Obs. The Present Subjunctive is here used. So also in

FURTHER EXAMPLES OF Oi /xi,.
373
Plat. Eqy. 341 c. (ov p) 0039 re 7/?) and in SoPH. : 0. C. 1023,

(c7rei'^(ui/Tai, one MS. reads CTrei'^wi/TOi).
TO fikyuTTOv KaKov Ikojv ovSets fJ.i^ ttotc kdf3rj.

PLA.T. Leg. 731 c.
.ATb one is ever likely voluntarily to choose the greatest evil.
ov /xrj ere Kpvxf/u) tt/dos ovTtva /3ovXo/xat a.(f)iKi(r6ai.
Xen. Cyr. vii. 3. 13.

/ icill not conceal from you whom I wish to march against.
See further SoPH. 0. C. 408, 450, 649, 1024, 1702; Thtjc. v.

67 ; Xen. Hell. iv. 2. 3 ; Plat. Rep. 499 b ; Ar. Av. 461,
ov jxi] (TK<Jj\!/rjs, fJ-YjSe TTObqcrr]? airep 01 TpvyoSai/jLoves ovtol,

dAA' €v<fii']fX€L. Arist. Nub. 299.
Don't you flout, and don't behave like your poor comedy hacks,
but, hold your peace.
Elmsley changes a-Kwipy? of the MSS. to o-xwêt, Fut. Indie.

Mid. Similarly in Nub. 505, ov /xt) XaXiâ-gs has been changed
to XaXi](T£Ls. See Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, pp. 186, 187.
If (TKw\py<; is right, this is you icon't jest, a possible way of
saying don't jest : if o-Kioifd, -ot-zyo-ets, the construction is in-
terrogative like that of C. 1 above, p. 371.
B. ov fxi] with Future Indicative.

ov jJLfj cr' eyio —epioxpofiai aTreXOovra. ArIST. Ran. 508.
ril not suffer you to depart.
ov Tot ivqirork cr ck twv ISpavwv,

J) yepov, aKOVTtt rts aêt. SoPH. 0. C. 178.
No one, be sure, from these abodes,

Old Sir, shall drag thee hence.
2d person in the same meaning as the above, i.e. denoting

not a strong prohibition, but a negative statement.
ovKovv —or' eK rovrotv ye fit] aKi^—rpoiv Irt

(Schneidewin, 6Sot-o/07Jo-/?s.) Soph. O.C. 848.
oSoiTTo/oi/o-ets
Never henceforth, on these 'props leaning, thou

Shalt journey hence.
Tovs yap TTOvqpovs ov /xiy rrore iroLijcreTe (SeXriov?.
Aeschin. in Ctes. 177.
You will never make the bad better.
;
374 THE NEGATIVES.
The following example may denote either a prohibition or

a statement.
ov "yiyvojo-KO) ere" ov fxrj eto-et €ts T^v oiKiav. ISAEUS, VIU. 24.
I do not Jcnoiv you, you shall not enter the house ; or ov eiVci fj.-t]
don't enter.
C. OVK Is KopaKttS ; ov /tr) TrpocriTOV ; ArIST. iilaTl. 609.

To the crotcs with you. Be off!
Observe here that the 2d person dual is used
S) fxiapdn are, rtTrouls ; ov [xr] Kara/?iô-ei ; ArIST. Vesp. 397.

You scoundrel, wimt are you at ? don't come down.
ov fJii] 'êyepets tov vttvo) ko-toxov

KaKKLvrjcreLS Ka.va(jTrj(ret<s
(jiOLTaSa 8eivi]V
voa-ov, w reKvov ; SOPH. Tr. 978.
Observe that cKKtvTjcreis joined by Kai is prohibitive co-ordin-

ately with lêyepets.
ov /JLT) KttAeiS fJ.',
S)vdp<j)-\ iKerevo), /x-qSk Kare/acis rovvofia ; ArIST. ^W. 298.
Don't call me,

Sirrah, I fray thee, nor blab out my name.
ov jx-t-j Sv(Tfievr]<; erret
(^t'Aots, TravaeL Se dvfiov, Kal ttuXlv crrpe\peL<; Kapa . .
Seêi Se Swpa kuI TrapaiT-qa-ei Trarpos ; EUR. Med. 1151.

Be not wroth with friends,
Forbear displeasure, turn thy face again,
Accept these offerings, and entreat thy father.
ov /xr)—poa-ota-eis X^'P"» PaKX^vo'eis S'twv,

fxrjS' eôixopget poipiav ttjv ot)v l/xot ; EUR. Bacch. 343.
Lay not thy hand on, me, go play the bacchanal.
Nor smudge me with thy folly.
ovKovv kaA.€is avTov kol fxi] dcf)rj(r€LS ; PlAT. Symp. 175 A.
Call him, and don't send him away.
ov daxrcTov olcreis, fxrjB' uma-Trja-eLS efxoi ; SoPH. Tr. 1183.

Give me thy hand quick, and distrust me not.
REPETITION OF THE NEGATIVE. 375
3. Ov /mt; is found in the Obliqua with a Future Optative

representing a Future Indicative of the Recta.
TO. t' aAAo, TravT* Wecnna-ev
Kal Tpotas TT^pyajx ws ov fJ-rf izo-e

TttTTi
Trepcroiev, el /xi] t6v8' ayoivro SoPH. Phil. 611.

In the Recto this would be ov /x->} —6~e Trepcrere eav fMYj ayrjade.
A striking instance, for here the 2d person of the Future
would clearly be a negative statement.
All the rest he prophesied,
And how they ne'er should sack the towers of Troy
Unless they brought him with them.
ov iJ.1) is also found mth the Future Infinitive.

crac^ws yap
il—e Tetpecrias ov p.^ ttots
(TOVT'qvSe yrjv oIkovvtos ev —pdêiv —oXiv. EUR. Phoen. 1590.
Recta, ov prj TTOTe cS irpdêi ij ttoAis.
Cf. Plat. Lach. 197 D, koI yap poi SoKeh ov8e py] ya-dqa-daL,
unless for ovSe p.rj we substitute ovSaprj as has been suggested.
§ 303. REPETITION OF THE NEGATIVE.

I. Where a simple Negative follows a Negative in the
same clause, two Negatives make one Affirmative, as in
English.
ofSet? ovK eiraa-'ê. Xen.

No one was not suffering (i.e. every one was suffering).
ov fiovov ov TreWovrai.
Not only do they not ohey.
ov hwajxat pbrj yeXav. Ae.

I am not able to keep froin laughing.
II. But where a Compound Negative follows a Nega-

tive in the same clause the first Negation is continued
and strengthened.
aKovet 8' ovhev ovZea ov8evo<;. EuR. Cycl. 120.
No one obeys anybody in anything.
—
376 THE NEGATIVES.
^17] XavOavirw ae firjBe rovro. Xen. Cyr. v. 2. 36.
Let not even this escape yon.
6eov<i <poôv/ji€Vot firjTTOT aa€^€<; fxrjBev fxrjSe avoaiov

fjb7]T€ TToirjarjTe jjii]T€ ôv\r]ar,Te.
Xen. Cyr. viii. 7. 22.
Fear the gods, and never do or intend anything either
impious or unholy.
§ 304. OvSet?, Mr)SeL<;, OvSep, MrjSev, etc.
A. Oi'Set's and /xTjSeis are used as declinable Substantives

both in the Singular and Plural, with or without the Article,
of persons.
Much more rarely 6, 07, ovSev, 6, ij, fjirjSev.
B. Ov8ev and fxrjSh are used as indeclinable neuter predi-

cates of persons.
CTO fxrjSev, an indeclinable substantive, is very freely

used both of persons and things.
All these constructions are chiefly poetical with the excep-
tion of (B), which is also Platonic. Herodotus also uses (A)
and (B.).
We may observe with regard to them :
(1.) That ovSets, ovSev denotes what is known or proved to

be actually non-existent or worthless. (Cf >) ovk iôvcria under
ov privative.) Ouoev is actually nothing.
M>jSei?, ij.rj8€v denotes an indefinite conception of what

(2.)
is anything non-existent or worthless. (Cf. 7} p) lôva-ia.)
Mr^Sev is abstract nonentity, hence to fxrjSev.
(.3.) The two sets often seem to be used indifferently, but

though ovStts is plainer and blunter, yet /xijSets may be really
more contemptuous, " as nothing," " no better than a mere cipher."
(4.) The construction of the sentence (with et or an im-

perative) may favour p/ rather than oi'.
(.5.) Both sets of phrases are the reverse of ns (n) etvai, tc

he K somebody.
;
Ovêls, M^Sft's, oi8(v, ^]1^8fv, ETC. 377
Examples :
o vvv /xev ovSet'S, avpiov 8' vTr€p[if.ya<i. ArIST. Eq. 158.

Nohody now, exceeding great to-morrow.
<f>povov<Xi 8i']fxov fieiôv ovres ovSeves,
Eur. Androm. 700 ; cf. /. A. 371.
ayere fi' IkttoSwv
Tov oi5k ovra fiaXXov SOPH. Ant. 1326.
1/ /x-qSeva.
Lead me hence
Who am no more tluin him that is as nothing.
ov yap -q^Lov tou? fxrjSevas. SoPH. Ai. 1114.
Tovs {'wvTas eS Spav KarOavwv Se Tras avrjp
yq KOt o-Ktd* to fxrj8ev €19 ouSev pcTret, EuR. Meleager.
i.e. tt'Aa^ M;as believed to he nothing noiv proves to be actually
nothing.
For the sentiment compare the Epitaph on Gay :
" Life is a jest, and all things show it

I thought so once, but now I know it."
(Sat/xwv) ^jXLV 8' fi-qSev ep;(eTat. SOPH. El. 1000.
d—oppel Kain
Our future is and comes to naught.
at ebb,
Compare the /xTjSei/ here with orSev in the Meleager.

avSpes r]p.€TepoL et'crtv ovSev. PlAT. Bep. 556 D. ; cf. 562 D.
iav SoKcocrt rt eivai fxr]Sev ovres. PlAT. Apol. xxxiii. 41 E.
If they think they are something, ivhen they are nothing. I
Here edv favours fi-i]8eu rather than ovS^v.

ot' ouoev oiv tou fiq8€V avrecTTJjs virep.
'
Soph. Ai. 1231 ; cf. 1275.
vfid's TO firjSev ovTas iv Tpoiry 8op6s
eppva-aTO. SOPH. Ai. 1274 ; cf. EUE. El. 369.
Kci TO ^TjSev 6^"e/3a) cfipaxrw 8' SyLtws. SOPH. ^71^. 234.
roiyap crv Se'ât /[z' es to o-ov ToSe o-Tcyos

TVjv ju,r;8ev ei's to fxrjSev. SOPH. El. 1165.
Examples in Herodotus occur in i. 32, xi. 137, is. 58, 79.
Note.
ov8€v (p-r)8€v) Ae'yetv, to talk nonsense or idly.
to ot'S' Plat. Theaet. 190 a, the absolute nothing.

ovSev,
6 ixy]8ev wv yoval(TL=8v(Tyevij<;, SOPH. Ai. 1094.

ov8ev (/xv^Sev) dvat, to be doomed to death, as good as dead
Soph. El. 1166; Eur. Androm. 1077.
378 THE NEGATIVES.
>i 305* ^^ with Oaths and Assertions.

MvJ is sometimes found with the Indicative after an oath or
a strong assertion.
[m. TTjv 'Acfipo8iT7iv . . . firj 'yco tr' dcfirjaw.
Arist. Ecc. 999, cf. Av. 195, Li/sisL 917.
Cf. also B. X. 330, xv. 41.
This use of fj-y should be compared with /xt] and the Infini-
tive after verbs of swearing and testifying (see py with Infin.
Note 4).
The constructionis Epic. In Ho]ViER/i>j is found both with
the Infinitive and the Indicative after an oath or protestation.
M7; repudiates the charge.
lo-TO) vvv ToBe yala, k.t.\., jx-q ri croi kukuv fiovXevarefiev.
Od. V. 184.
Be vntness earth to this —far from me be it to contrive harm
to thee.
iaro) vvv Zevs avros, k.t.A., {xr] av))p e— o;(7jcr€rat aXAos.

II. X. 329.
Be witness Zeus himself —no other man shall ride.
§ 306. M77 where ov might have been expected.

M17, where ov might otherwise have been expected, is used
where the structure of the sentence requires or has a natural
afiinity with ixi]. Such cases are where (1) an Imperative
precedes, (2) where the sentence is Conditional, (3) where
the whole cast of the sentence is of tL nature of a concep- •
tion, so that the statement denied is nqt âal fact.
1. ifi](f)i(Tacrde tov TroXefiov, [xi] (jio/SyÔevres to avTiKa Setvov.

Thug. i. 124.
Vote the war without fearing the immediate danger.
TavTa (TKOTretTe, on fxi^ TrpovoM fxaXXov eyiyvero iy tv)îj.
AXTIPH. V. 21.
Consider this, that it ho.ppened not so much designedly as by
accident.
A
very exceptional use of /x-q, hardly explained by the pre-
ceding Imperative.
Cf. Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 37, Soph. Ant. 546, Dem. 27. 59
;
MISCELLANEOUS INSTANCES. 379
2. o -d.li eiTTep IfTTw? (fiavephs vfJAV kcm [xr] ^Xrjdeis, 8-i]XovTai,

8ia. -njv avTOV ajxapTLav dirodavwy.
Antiph. Tetr. B., c. 5.
As to the proved to you that he was not struck

child, if it is
when he was standing still, it is evident that he was killed
by his oivn fault.
3. oT/xat jxi] av SiKaiws tovtov T^xetv cTraiVov tov [irj ei'Sora ti

60-Ti I'd/xos. Xen. 3fem. i. 2. 41.
/ think that one who does not know the meaning of law would
not deservedly receive this praise.
The first f/.i) is exceptional, but the example is from

Xenophon, an exceptional writer.
•n SoKeL (TOt, otov re elvai ert iKeivqv ti)v ttoXlv €ivat Kai [j.r]
dvanrpdcfydai,, ev fj
at yevofiivai SiKai fxqêv i(r)(yovcriv
Plat. Grit. xi. 50 b.
Do you really think it possible for a state to continue to exist
and not be averthroum, in which verdicts which have been

passed have no avail ?
This may be regarded as regular, the ixj coming after ohv

re and not after SoKei.
Riddell, Digest 135, collects some extreme Platonic
instances.
§ 307. Miscellaneous
Instances showing the power
of ov to make a downright Negative
Statement. Cf. the use of ov in Emphasis,
p. 352.
This power is very marked in contrasts :
^vjifia'ivei yap ov to, fxiv, ra 8' ov. AeSCH. Pers. 800.

It is not that some things are happening, while others are not
(i.e. all things are being fulfiUed).
riv 6 TTOTap-os Sacrvs SevSpecri -a^kcn p.lv ov, -vkvoIs 8e.
Xen. An. iv. 8. 2.
The river was overgrown with trees which, though not big,
were numerous.
ttTTwAeTO S' ov\i, dAA.' kXvdq. LyS. vi. 27.
He was not condemned to death, but acquitted.
—: : .
38o THE NEGATIVES.
Of course the construction may change ov to /xt^ :
CTKO/reire î-q roGro, et raXavTOV eSoj/ce, dAAa -rqi' — poQ\j\j.iav

Dem. 470. "l^.
Consider not this point, whether he gave a talent, but his uill.
Yet even in spite of the construction ov may assert itself

tl yv(ii(T6ri(T6jj.ida ^vreXOoi'Tes fiev, dfjLVvea-Oai 8e ov
roXiMWi'Tes. ThUC. I 124.
If we sliall he knaiim to have met together, and yet not to he
venturing to protect ourselves.
This power of ov to assert itself under difficulties is seen

very strikingly in some passages :
liT] 6 ye ov xpî ~oUi. Plat. Euthyd. 307 b.

DonH do wJmt is actually wrong.
The generic might be expected
/ivy :
eyo) yap, el fxr) ôfi-qv -Ijêiv —apa deovs, rjSiKOVv av ovk

/xev
dyavaKTU)V tw Oavdrw. PlAT. Phaed. viii. 63 B.
i.e. / should be acting wrongly in not grieving, as in reality I do
grieve.
In spite of the Conditional structure :
Cf. Soph. 0. T. 551, d vofxlêfi ovx vêêir.
§ 308. Note on fx-q, fir) ov, with the Infinitive and

Participle.
1. This construction is perfectly
Mt7 with the Infinitive.
natural and intelligible. Indeed the Infinitive without it,
though allowable in Greek as in English, may be somewhat
ambiguous. Thus ov daveiv eppi'o-dfj.rjv would in itself mean
whojn I rescued for dying. The addition of p./) makes it per-
fectly clear that the net result is negative.
The negative was thus used in our earlier English
You may deny that you were not the cause.
Shakspere, Rich. III. i. 3.
First you denied you had in him no right.

Comedy of Errors, iv. 2.
Precisely parallel in Greek is the use of ov with oVt and the

Indicative after verbs of denying av-eAeyov on ovk eyxopoir],
:
XeN. Hell. ii. 3. 16 ; dpvrjdqvac ws ovk d-eStjKe, Lys. iv. 1.

^ The double negative is uot unknown even in Ciceronian Latin.
Cf. Cic. De Offic. iii. 102, 118.
—
NOTE ON M^, Mi) ol WITH INFINITIVE, ETC. 381
2. Mt) ov with Infinitive. Here it is much more difficult to

see the force of each negative, especially as in translating the
Greek into English we make no difference between jx-i) and
fXT] OV. Thus we translate oo-iov /i.7) /SoqOeiv, it is pious not to
help ; ovx jxr^ ov ôi^delv, it is impious not to Jielp.
oa-iov But
we may be sure that the force of each negative was, originally
at least, felt in Greek. Observe that the double negative is
only used with the Infinitive when there is a negative, actual
or virtual, in the principal clause. Thus there is an additional
negative over and above that in the preceding construction
(p; with Infinitive). Just as yuv; with the Infinitive repeats
and sums up the net negative result of the principal verb, so
when the principal clause is negative, this additional negative
is repeated with the Infinitive, and sums up the efi'ect of the
principal clause.^
That this was not always felt to be necessary is shown by
the examples under B. C. D.
Mr) ov with Participle must be explained in the same

3.
way. E.g. in Soph. 0. T. 12, (1) Afiirmatively I should :
be TcindJy —
(net result) —in refusing pity (ii-i) KaroiK-dpoiv).
(2) Negatively I shoidd be unkindly (net resiilt) in
: —
not refusing pity (/xi) ov KaToiKreipoiv). The Participial con-
struction is required either because, as in the three instances
from Sophocles, the Participle agrees with the subject of the
principal sentence, or because (as in Herod, vii. 106) it is in
the Genitive Absolute. The Participle denotes circumstance
generally, and more specially condition, restriction, etc., which
are only kinds of cii'cumstance.
Wiinder (Exciu-sus to SoPH. 0. T. 12, 13), while pointing
out the above reason for the Participle, denies that it is con-
ditional, although in 0. T. 221 he translates /av; ovk e'xwi', unless
I had. In Soph. 0. T. 12, 13, hesays that mth anuupersonal
construction we might write 8etv6v civ eiTf) or aicr^vvi) av fioi eiTj
jxi] ov Ka-oiK-eipecv. It is true that we might thus give the
sense of this one passage, but we could not so analyse the
other passages, while the above explanation seems to suit this
as well as the others.
^ Mr
A. Sidgwick comniuiiicates the following note Just as in
:
KuAvcj opav the negatived infinitive gives the total effect of hindrance,
fir]
viz. the prevented act, so in ov kojXvo) /jlt) ov 5pav the doubly negatived
:
infinitive gives the total effect, \\z. the not prevented act.
382 THE NEGATIVES.
To this superfluous /xv) after verbs of hindering, etc., the

French offers an exact parallel : Empechez qu'il ne se mele
d'aucune affaire. Compare
too the redundant ne after com-
paratives : —
Ces fruits sont meilleurs que je ne le croyais.
With verbs of doubting, denying, etc., used positively, the
—
French idiom follows the English: je doute qu'il soit ainsi; but
with such verbs used negatively the French ne corresponds to
the Greek /x,^ ov :
—
je n'ai jamais ni6 qu'il ne soit ainsL
§ 309. Note on yjr] and [xA] ov with the Subjunctive.

The Attic construction is chiefly Platonic and Aristotelian
(cf. MLN. X. 9. 6, Fol. iv. 4. 11, ii. 2. 8). But the construc-
tion is as old as Homer,
e.g. Od. v. 467, fji-q /xe o-ti^v; re KaKy
KOI By^Xvs eepa-i] Perchance cruel rune and soft dew shall
Sa/iao-i/,
hlast me. We
have here the original deprecatory force of yxTj,
let it not. In a "sviiter like Plato this ixq has become simply a
suggestion put politely, and with a delicate irony. Closely allied
to this is the interrogative use of ix-q in the example quoted
from the Protagoras (312 A). We
need not call the construc-
tion elliptical any more than p) ykvoiro need be called ellip-
tical. When a Principal Verb (such as 6pw) is expressed, the
thought is more logically and fully stated, and the clause with
p] has become subordinate but the two constructions are par-
:
allel and synonymous.

Mv) ov after a Principal Verb is also found in HoMER, II. xv.
164, <j)paêo-6o) jJii] ju.' ovSe Kparepds ~ep ewv tTrtovra raXacraij
/xeivat. Let him look to it whether, stout though he he, he endure Tiot
to OAcait my coming. Ov is strictly negative or privative here,

as in the Attic examples. Thus in the construction of fiq and
fir) ov both particles exert their legitimate force. M'q ov with
the Subjunctive occurs also in Herod, vi, 9.
§ 310. Note on ov [xt] with the Subjunctive and

the Future Indicative.
Both constructions are post-Homeric. It is impossible to
trace them with historical certainty, and therefore any explana-
tion suggested must be theoretical.
1. ov with the Subjunctive. This construction is found
[x.!]
both in Prose (Herodotus, Xenophon, Isaeus, Plato, Demo-

sthenes), and in Verse (Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides,
Aristophanes).
NOTE ON Ov /xt) with SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 383
Both ov and /x/J appear to exert their proper force. The

construction seems to be the negative of m
with the Subjunc-
Thus /^^ iridi^rai
tive. (See note on that construction, § 309.)
would mean far he it that he obey ; ov negatives this apprehen-
sion it is not a case of such siirmise, there is no
likelihood of
:
his obeying, he will not obey. Such a construction in the

second person is tantamount to a prohibition, as in the example
from the Clouds of Aristophanes. If this view is correct, we
need no more understand an ellipse of Seos or Setvoi' between
the ov and the m
here than in pj with the Subjunctive.
ov Seos, ov Seivov fully expressed occur often enough (Hdt. i.
84 Plat. Ajôl. ch. xvi. 28 b, Phaed. 84 b, liq). 465 b Xen.
; ;
Mem. 25
ii. Arist. Ecc. 650).
1. ;
2. ov fx.v with the Futui-e Indicative is far

more difficult.
In the first place the construction is almost AvhoUy poetical.
rare
It occurs in Hdt. iii. 162, Plato, Aeschines, as a
idiom in each. It is very common in Sophocles, Euripides,
Aristophanes.
^
(a) Is the phrase Interrogative 1
In favour of ov fi^j with 2d person of the Future being
interrogative are the following' considerations :
_
A
positive
command is commonly expressed by ov interrogative with the

Future, e.g. Apjst. Lys. 459, ovxeA-Jer', ovTroivjo-er, k.t.A. ; fol-
lowed by imperatives iraveo-de, k.t.X. Sometimes ov /xi; with
the Future (expressing a negative command) appears side-
by side with ov and the Future (expressing a positive com-
mand). The juxtaposition is very striking in Arist. PMn.
200-2, a passage which shows that in the time of Aristophanes
the two idiom's could be used as exact opjiosites.
Professor Good^^-in's objection to the Future being inter-
rogative, derived from the single passage in the Clouds (296),
where an Imperative and not a Future is joined by dWd to
ov HI] with a Subjunctive (v. I. a Future), is not convincing.
The inference (supposing that the Future is the true reading)
need only be that ov pj with the Future had become a stereo-
Ant.
tyi)ed Imperative. And in Arist. Lys. 459 (above). Soph.
885 we have the Imperative immediately following ov with the
Future used interrogatively, though not joined by a conjunc-
tion to it.
1
Mr. A. Sidgwick writes " It is to me quite clear that oi- fir]^ -with
:
the Future is usually interrogative ; when not, it is a form of oi) with /j.i)
the Subjunctive."
— —
384 THE NEGATIVES.
Against the phrase being interrogative may be urged that

such a theor}'' assigns a different origin not only to ov /xtj with
the 2d person of the Futui'e from ov jxi] with Subjunctive, but
also from ov //.j with the 1st and 3d persons of Future. This
difficulty is increased by the fact that ov /xrj with the 2d person
of the Future may, though rarely, express a negative state-
ment, like ov [xi] with Subjunctive.
If, in spite of this, the Interrogative theory is maintained,
we should have to assign a different origin to this special

idiom ; doubtless a serious but not perhaps a fatal objection,
for the evolution of popular idioms is as manifold as it is
obscure.
(b) Ov and ov [xrj followed by Kat, dXXd, Kal [xq, /xrôe:
If ov fx-j interrogative the explanation is simple.

is Oi5
throws its force over each connected clause which follows.
The simplest case is Soph. Tr. 978, where Kal follows. The
most complex is EuR. Bacch. 343, where the process would be
ov fxrj TT/JOO-oiVets ; —
ov /JttKêucreis ; (joined by 8e) ov fxi] iô-
fxopêi ;Will you not avoid bringing near ? JFill you not jylay tJie
bacchanal ? and will you not avoid vdping off?
If oil fxq is not interrogative each subsequent clause will
have to be differently explained. Eur. Bacch. 343 would run
thus Ov jx-q Trpocrotrrets, you shall not bring near ; (SaKxeva-ets
8e, but you shall jilay the bacchanal (like tt/dos TaCra Trpaêis,
Soph. O.C. 956); fxrj eôfxopêi could only be explained on the

assumption of /xi) with the Future being prohibitive, a con-
struction which has yet to be estabhshed.
The interrogative theory of ov [x-/] finds decided support
here, not only from the extreme abruptness of each clause
thus made independent, but from the grammatical difiiculty
thus occasioned.
(c) Professor Goodwin (Moods and Tenses, § 89) considers

that in ov /xq with the Future, ov is added (not interroga-
tively) to fxi] with the Future Indicative used as a Prohibition.
But (1) fxij mth the Future Indicative thus used is a con-
struction of extreme rarity, if it exists at all. Some of the
instances quoted [Moods and Tenses, § 25, Note 5 (b) ), e.g.
Soph. Ai. 572, are probably not to the point, and in others,
assuming the Futiu-e Indicative to be the correct reading, a
different explanation seems jiossible. (2) Assuming the ex-
istence of fxj with the Future Indicative as a Prohibition, it is
;
NOTE ON Oi ix^ WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 385
difficult to see how a Prohibition can be got out of ov /xv/ with

the Future as a statement. An analysis of the phrase ov {you
shall not) fiij Troirjo-eis (don't do) would land us in a meaning
precisely opposite to that required. On the other hand, we
get the right meaning if the phrase is interrogative, ov, uvn't
you, fJLi] TTonjo-eis ; abstain from doing ?
In ov fj.1] with the Subjunctive Professor Goodwin does not

attempt to account for the fj-y. He considers the Subjunctive
as "a relic of the common Homeric Subjunctive used as a
weak Future."
(d) Mr. Eiddell (Digest of Platonic Idioms, p. 177) explains
the double use of the negative on the principle of " simul-
taneity of force;" i.e. both particles, like a double-barrelled
gun, concentrate their fire on one verb. It is quite true that
in course of time the two particles formed one strong redup-
Ucated negative, their origin being quite lost sight of. Such
cases as Soph. Phil. 611, Eur. Phoen. 1590, clearly show this.
Still the question remains, How is it that ov and jxij, differing
as they do, combine their force 1
(e) Can ov and fi-q be separately explained 1
It is fj-Tj which requires explanation, not ou Ov on any

theory exerts its simple contradictory force.
If ov fiT] with the Futui-e is interrogative, ov p) 7ron)o-£ts
must mean, "Won't you abstain from or avoid doing? It is
always objected that this explanation gives fir] the privative
force of ov. Not so, for fj.r} Tronô-eis need not represent a
privative ov ttoiw, but rather a deprecated future act. The
use of /xt) with the Future Indicative would help us to un-
derstand how the idiom might arise. Now the independent
use of [Jit] with the Future is extremely uncommon. It occurs,
rarely, in questions (e.g. Plat. Bep. 405 a., apa fvq n
fiexôv 6ê6s XafSdv reK/jL-qpiov). Mtj interrogative is simply
/ii) denoting an apprehension. It occurs after oaths and
similar assertions (B. x. 330, Arist. Ecc. 991). But the
Future Indicative, graphically substituted for the Subjunctive,
is fairly common ((fio/3ovfj.aL p) evprjo-ofj-ev. Plat. Phileb. 13,
and the Future Indicative is joined co-ordinately to the Sub-
junctive in several places (e.g. Aesch. Pers. 124; Soph. El.
43 Arist. Ecc. 495).

; cf.
If ov fx-q is not interrogative then it will be a more vivid

and graphic substitution of ov p.q for the Subjunctive. The
2b
: ;
386 THE NEGATIVES.
process would be ov fx) ttol-qo-us, it is not the case (ov) firj
(of appreliending that you may do), or ov

TTOiijary'i jit] Trotiyo-cis
{that you really will do). This readily passes into a command
(cf, Eur, Med. 1320, x^'P'
^' û âwets TTork, thou shall not
touch, i.e. touch not).
A list of passages in which ov /atJ occurs with the Future is

given for reference.
Hdt. iii 162 (ov /xi) dva(3\aa-Ti]crei). Aeschin. de Cor. 79. 12.
Xen. Hell i. 6. 32. Isaeus, viii. 24.
Plat. Symp. 175 a. (ovkow Kal fx-q).
Soph, (a.) ov /xij, 1st or 3d person :
El. 1052; 0. 0.177; Phil. 611 (Optative in Obliqua).
(b.) ov jxi], 2d person

0. T. 637 (ov . . . Ka\ [XI]) 0. C. 847 (not a prohibition)
;
Ai. 75 (ov . . . ixTjSe); Track 978 (ov fxt) KaL); 1183 . . .
(ov . . . fX'i]8e).
EURIPID. Hipp). 213 ;Ih. 496 (o^x' xal fxri); lb. 1601 . . (ov
jx-i] . . . ixi]Be) ; Androm. 797; Supp. 1066; Bacch. 342 (ov
fxij . . . 8e . . . fxt]8e).
Aeistoph. Ban. 202 (ov ix-q aXXd) ; U). 298 (ov fx-q . . . . . .
pySe); Ih. 462 (ov pj aXXa) Ach. 166; FfS^. 397; . . . ;
Nub. 296, 367, 505 (the subjunctive of the MSS. in these

passages has been changed by editors to the future
indicative).
— —
CHAPTEE III.
OEATIO OBLIQUA.
Introductory.
§ 311* ^y Oi'^'itio Eecta is meant the words or thoughts

of a person given at first-hand, as from his own lips, e.g. —
Sojcrto a e.'XW.
I will give what I have.

By Oratio Obliqua is meant the words or thoughts of a
person given at second-hand by some one else, e.g. —
^(fj-q
Saxreiv a ^X^'^
or
eXeyev art (ws) Suxroi a ^X^'"
He said he tvould give wlutt he had.
If the words are reported in the following way :
lAeyev on (w?) S(0(ra) a e'x'^'
He said, " / xvill give ichat I have,"

we have no Obliqua at all : e'Aeyei' 6-t introduces the
original words just as in English we put them in inverted
commas, as a quotation in fact.
e.g. irpocrekOovTe^ 8e fiot tj; vcrrepai^ McAt^tos xat EuîAt^tos

IA.eyov OTi, yeyevj/Ttti, w 'AvSoKiSrj, koi ire—paKTai lyxiv
Tttura. A.1\T)0K. de Mijst. .&?>.
Next day Meletus and Eiiphiletus came to me and said,

"It luis tahen place, Andokides, ive have done it."
But the reporter may give the words thus :
6(^7^ Scocretv a ^X^'*

lAcyev oTt (cus) Swcret a ^X^'-
Here we have a kind of Obliqua extremely common in
Greek, and often alternating in the same paragraph with
: : — :
388 ORATIO OBLIQUA.
the Obliqua given above. From a love of what is graphic and

vivid the Greeks keep the original mood while only changing
the person. Or we may say that they keep the mood which
would be used if the Obliqua were in Primary Sequence
e.g., Aeyei OTt Soicret a e'xet.
Observe then that in Oratio Obliqua
1. The person, whatever it was in the Kecta, becomes the

3d in the Obliqua.^
2. The tense of the Recta never changes. If it did, the
Obliqua would not represent faithfully the time and act of
the Recta.
3. The Mood may either

(a.) be changed to the Optative in the Obliqua (of
Historic Sequence),
(b.) be retained as it was in the Recta, or in Primary
Sequence.
By Oratio Obliqua is here meant reported speech in

Historic Sequence. Oratio Obliqua in Primary Sequence
involves (in Greek) no change of Mood in the Adverbial and
Relative Sentences, and therefore can at once be dismissed
with one brief example by way of illustration.
Oratio Recta
Sta/xevo) ews 6.v eTraveXdwcnv ovs Tre/iTro).
/ tcill remain until they return whom I am sending.
Oratio Obliqua
4>ri(TL ) Staueveiv „ „ , ,â „ ,
Aeyet oTt (ws) ) otafxevet,
He says that he will remain, until they return, wJwm he is
sending.
vojxi^di, av toijt' aKpifitas yuaîyre, jxaXXov vfxas tovtol^ jjXv

a.TTi(jT-!](ji.Lv, ifxol Se (io'i^dqauv. Dem. Onet. 870. 24.
/ consider that, if you learn the truth of this, you icill he move
likely to distrust them, and help me.
^ Unless the speaker quotes his own words, or those of a person

whom he is addi-essing, e.g. "I told you that I knew nothing of the
matter :" " You stated that you would lend me ten pounds."
RULES FOR SUB-DIRECT CLAUSES. 389
Sub-direct and Sub-oblique.

When Eecta is changed to Obliqua, the Principal Sentence
{i.e.the Substantival Sentence, whether Oblique Statement,
Question, or Petition), becomes itself subordinate to the
reporter's verb (He said, ashed, requested). Such a Sentence is
technically called Sub-direct, i.e. subordinate to Recta.
^^^lat were the subordinate sentences of the Recta, i.e.
Adverbial or Relative Sentences, become subordinate to a
Principal Sentence which itself is subordinate. They are now
technically called Sub-ollique, i.e. subordinate to an Oblique
clause. For brevity's sake these terms, Sub-direct and Sub-
oblique (i.e. Adverbial and Relative Sentences in Oratio
Obliqua), will be used in this chapter.
The terms have been explained in the Introductory Chapter,
p. 11.
§ 312. Rules for Sub-direct Clauses in Oratio

Obliqua.
Such clauses are either (1) Oblique Statements with on and
ws, or Oblique Questions. Oblique Petitions take an Infinitive, so
that their construction is just like an Oblique Statement in
the Infinitive after (firifii Sentences with o-ws and o-ws /X17
(with Future Indicative or Subjunctive) follow the construc-
tion of the Oblique Question. The Oblique Statement in the
Participh presents no difiiculty.
Co-ordinate Sentences follow the construction of those to
which they are joined.
A. In Primary Sequence, i.e. when the Principal Sentence
takes a Primary tense, the Mood and Tense of the Sub-direct
Sentence undergo no change.
B. In Historic Sequence the Sub-direct Sentence may either

(1.) be just what it was in Primary Sequence, under-
— —
going no change (this is called the Graphic
Construction) or,
(2.) the Verb may be changed to the same tense of

the Optative.
But N.B. The Imperfect and Pluperfect Indica-
tive must remain in the Indicative, and not
59«> O RATIO OBLIQUA.
be changed to the Optative. If they were

changed we could not distinguish tlieni from
Present and Perfect Optatives. Historic Tenses
of the Indicative with av must also remain in
the Indicative.
A few instances occur where the Present Optative represents

an Imperfect Indicative of the Recta. In such cases however
no ambiguity exists.
TO, ~€~payixkva Sii^yovvro, on avrol fiev —Xeotev ttjv Se
dvaipecrtv twv vavaywv Trpoo-Tctâiev. XeN. Ilell. i. 7. 5.
They were describing the facts, explaining that they tJiemselves
tvere sailing (against the enemy), and that they had com-
missioned (proper persons) to pick up the shipwrecked
seamen.
Eecta, auTOt lirXeoixev Kal Trpoa-erdâfxev. Cf. vii. 1. 38,

iOeXoL, BovXevoiTO.
Obs. 1. The Tense of an Infinitive in a Sub-direct Clause is

the same as in the Eecta, e.g. eyparpa, I wrote ; c^tj ypdifai, he
said that he had icritten; Xkye, speak ; iK^Xivev avrov Aeyeiv, he
was ordering him to speak. The time of the Infinitive Tense
may therefore be instantly discovered by turning it back to
the Eecta. So with the time of a Participle.
Obs. 2. No verb takes av because of its conversion from

Eecta to Obliqua. If in the Obliqua a Finite Verb, Infinitive,
or Participle takes dv, it is because it had an av in the Eecta.
The tallies of converted Conditional Sentences will show this.
§ 313* Types of Sub-direct Clauses in Historic

Sequence.
A. L Original Eecta (Statement).
1. Taura [lavdavia.
2. Tav~a [ladqcop-ai,
3. Tarra ix€[xd6-qKa.
4. ravra kjidvOavov.
5. ravra ifiefiad-qKr).
6. ravra efiadov.
; ;;
SUB-DIRECT CLA USES IN HISTORIC SEQUENCE. 391
II. Converted to Obliqua in Historic Sequence.

Principal. Sub-direct.
1. TavTa /jLavddvei. Graphic.
-aura jxavdavoi. Strict Sequence.
2. Tav-a jxadrjcreTai. Graphic.
ravra fiadqcroiTO. Strict Sequence.
3. TavTa fiefidO^Ke. Graphic.
ravra fM€fj.a6qK(jJi i.lq. Strict Sequence.
4. TavTtt (fidvOave.
5. TaiJTa ifx.efia$rjKei.
6. -aura ifxade. Graphic.
ravra 1x6.601. Strict Sequence,
B. I. Original Eecta (Question).

Ti fiavaaveis ;
Tt fiadt'âei j
ri fie/iddrjKa^
ri ejxdvdavi^;
ri kjj.ifxadrjK^L'i j
7t ejiades
II. Converted to Obliqua.

rjpiro. 1. oTi or Tt, fiavOdvei. Graphic.
fxavddvoi. Strict Sequence.
lxadi](Terai. Graphic.
fxa6n]croiro. Strict Sequence.
fj.efj.ddr]K€. Graphic.
fi€[ia6r]Ka)i ccyj. Strict Sequence.
ifidvOave.
ifjLefxaOqKii.
(fiade. Graphic.
IxdOoL. Strict Sequence.
Note. The Aorist Indicative is preferable to the Optative

whenever it avoids ambiguity. Thus ovk eT-)ôv on Spao-ciav
might mean either they did not hnoiv what to do (Recta, rt
8pdcro)fi€v ; a dehberative Subjunctive), or, they did not hnow
what they had done (Eecta, ri eSpdcranev ). Almost always the
first construction is intended.
'
392 ORATIO OBLIQUA.
C. Similarly -with o-ojs, ottws /xtj (a much rarer construction

after verbs of commanding, etc. , than the Infinitive).
Recta : oVcos /a>J ecrecrde ctva^tot eXevOeptas.

See that you be not unworthy of freedom.
-X „ X lo-ovrai ) Graphic.
^ ' ' ' ' €(TotvTo strict Sequence.
J
D. With Deliberative Questions.

Recta, TTOi (fix'yo) ;
Obliqua, ^Trdpet tto? (ottoi) ^vyy ")

Graphic.
4>vyoi j Strict Sequence.
§ 314. Rules for Sub-oblique Clauses in the Oratio

Obliqua.
A. In Primary Sequence they undergo no change of Mood
or Tense in passing from the Recta.
B. In Historic Sequence :
1. By the graphic construction they undergo no change,

continuing to be what they were in Primary
Sequence.
2. The verb is changed to the same tense in the Optative,
in Strict Sequence.
But N.B. The Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist Indicative

must remain in the Indicative and not be changed to the
Optative. Exceptions will be noticed further on.
§ 315* Note to accompany the following Tables.

The construction of Sub-oblique as well as Sub-direct
Clauses is shown in Conditional Sentences converted from the
Recta to the ObHqua. The Recta will be found by referring

to Conditional Sentences (page 198), and need not be repeated
here. The Apodosis is the Principal Sentence in the Recta
and the Sub-direct in the Obliqua. The Protasis is the Sub-
direct in the Recta, and the Sub-oblique in the Obliqua. The
Protasis may be taken as the type of any Adverbial Sub-oblique
Clause by substituting e-n-eLS-q, ore, ecus, Trpiv, etc., for ei or idv.
It may equally weU stand as the tjê of any Relative Sub-
oblique Clause, but for the sake of completeness a Relative
Conditional Table is given converted to the Obliqua
:
TYPES OF ORAT10 OBLIQUA. 393
Observe that in the Sub- oblique Clauses, Adverbial or

Relative, the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist Indicative of
the Recta are not converted to the Optative but continue in
the Indicative.
The conversion of General Suppositions may be thus
shown
Recta : rjv eyyus ^^^?? âvaros ovSets ôvAerai Ovqa-Keiv.
dXX' et Tt /xt) cfiepoLfiev h)Tpvvev <fiepeiv.
,Obliqua after Ijv ekdy—/SovKeTai — Graphic.
eAeê on et tXdoi — /3ovXolto.
et Tl /Al) cf}€pOUV WT/OW€V,
etpTf qv eXdrj — ovSeva — Graphic,

/BovkecrdaL
€1 eXdoL — ôvXecrdat.
ovSei/a
e'i T6 p,r] — orpwcLV
<f)epoi€V cfiepeiv.
He said that, if they xcere not fetching anything, he

was ordering them to fetch it.
§ 316. Types of Oratio Obliqua, showing Sub-direct

and Sub-oblique Clauses in the Obliqua.
The Protasis is the Sub-oblique, the Apo-
dosis the Sub-direct Clause.
If you do this you are doing urong becomes, when reported
by another person, He said that if he did it he was doing wrong.
T. With Aeyo) oTt, and a finite mood :
1. Primary Sequence :
Sub-oblique (the Protasis). Sub-dii-ect (the Apodosis).
€1 ravra tzoul dSt

/ TTîroL-qKe
ei ravra kiroUi ySiKet
iTTOL-)](re r]StKrj(Te
lav (^v) ravra iroirj dSiKTjrreL
Xh (i>J —orqcrrj
€L ravra iroiotq or dSiKOLt] dv or
Trot'i'jcrete d8lKi'j(T€L€y dv
el ravra Troii](T€L aSiKt'jcreL
et ravra liroUi qSiKei dv

\el ravra CTrouycre TjOlKlfjCnV ui
m ORATIO OBLIQUA.
2. Historic Sequence :
[ €1 TttUTtt —OLOLT)
et rarra i-oUt
'AeA (-5)
.
THE A PO DO SIS IN THE PARTICIPLE. $95
{ A. Present ct ravra eTroiets dSiKCiV av

( B. Past €l raura eTToirjcras dSiKrjcrai av
Note. Et with the Optative in the Strict Historic Obliqua

stands for three distinct forms. Thus €i ttoiolijs may represent
(a) el TTotets, a present condition ; (b) idv -rroiys, an ordinary
future condition ; (c) ei ttoiolijs, a less graphic future condition.
§ 317. The Apodosis in the Participle.
1 Prijiary Sequence.
Taora — oiets, dSiKovvTa, and SO on, the Participle
olSu. ere, ci
in each case being in the same tense as the corresponding

Infinitive.
2. Historic Sequence.
ySfj ere, si ravra Troioirjs, dSiKovvra, and SO on.
Note. €1 ravra ttoiw dSiKtU becomes oiSa et ravra — otw dSiKiov.
§ 318. A Relative Sentence in the Sub-oblique

Clause.
Hecta.
a Ix"
—
396 O RATIO OBLIQUA.
Ohliqua.
Note. After e'Aeê on

m, by the Graphic Construction
or
the clauses would remain unchanged but the real Obliqua :
would be as follows :
lAeê OTi (o)?) a exot SlSoiyj

a eTê or ecx^ eSiBov or eScoKe (or, instead of
e8<j)Ke, Sot'r^)
a e'xoi SwcroL (more commonly Zwaet)

a ^xpi 8i8otr] av
a. eôt SoKTOt (Sweet)
a et'x^'' eStSou ai/
a eVêv eSwKev ai'
iVoê.Observe the retention of the Aorist Indicative, which

is not changed to the Optative. If we were to write eXeê on
8o)(TOL (Scucret) a XufSoi, or ((jirj SwcreLV 6 rt Xdf3oi, we should
rightly take this to mean, he said that he would give whatever he

took; a Xd(3ot would represent a Recta a dv Aa/3a), and not
a eXaôv, what I actually took.
§ 319* Some real Examples analysed.

Principal. Sub-direct. Sub-oblique.
1. e(f>V Xvirreov etvat ] irapa- ! » , q. ,
e'Aeyev ort (ws)

X , > y
XrjTrreov lcrTt,'j o-Taras
} / i
ei Tt Mavrjs oe-ncroi.
|
Adapted from Xen. Cyr. viii. 1. 10.

He said that \ he must get comrades if there should he
i need of a battle.
Recta : Arj— reov ecrrt irapaa-rdras et tl fxd)(p]'i Se-j<r€L.
I must comrades if there shall he need of a

get battle.
The Obliqua is partly Graphic, partly strict Historic.

2. e<fiq ov8lv avT(o /jieXeiv \ [
iiretSrj elSeir}.
cAeyev on (ws) ovBev auTw /ueAot J

i LyS. xiL 74.
He said \ that he cared not \ since he knew.
Recta : ovîv fioL /xeAet iirei8rj oiSa.
3. (fiovXivovTO oTTWs ioi€v I CTTetS^ yevoivTO irapd

;
TO) TTOTafHU.
Adapted from Thuc. vii. 80.
They were con- how they shoidd go when they came to
sidering I
the river.
Recta : TTws tw/xev, eTreiSav vevwueâ ; a Deliberative

Question.
:
: ;
REAL EXAMPLES ANALYSED. 397
Principal. SUP.-DlEECT. Sub-oblique.

jrws auToj ccroiTo OCTTtS Ounj/Ol.
InAE. ii. 10.
He was consi- /tow; Ae should find one \
to bury him.
dering. I
Recta 7rw5 /Jtot ecTTat ocms Odxpei
5. 'Ai/uTos e^jj ov)(^ oiov T€ etVa6 to /xt) [

eTretSi) ctcr/jAôi' Seu-
aTTOKTetvat yue |
po.
Plat. -<4/?oZ. xvii. 29 c.
Anytus said it was impossible for you when once I had been
that not to sentence me to brought into this
death court.
Recta l ov\ ol6v re kcmv TO ixq 1 eTretS/) eKrrjXOc Sevpo.

I (XTroKTetvai ^WKpuTi] |
Observe that the Aorist Indicative of the Recta is not

changed to the Obliqua.
6. Aeyovtri 8e ws €V ry yy ajridavev 6 ! os ovk iêf^rjv to

;
w'qp, Kayu) XcOov auTW | Trapdirav €k tou
kvkfiaXov et's t7)v Ke(f>a- I TrAotov.
k-qv,
\
Antiph. de Caed. Her. 26.

They say that the deceased was tlwiigh as a matter
murdered ashore, and of fact I never left
that I struck him on the the ship at all.
liead with a stone.
Observe here that the Aorist Indicative is kept in the Sub-

direct Clauses, and also (of course) in the Sub-oblique
Clause.
7. €(^>? jJ^^Xpi' TOVTOV betv [xav- ecus iKavos tis ye-

ddveiv votTO, £i—0Te Sevycrete,
K.T.A.
Xen. Mem. iv. 7. 2.
He said that it teas necessary to until one became cap-
go on learning for so able, if ever it slwuld
long a time be necessary, etc.
Recta : fJ^k^pi tovtov Se? fxavddveiv^ Iws dv yevjj-at, lav ttotc

Seijcry.
" :
398 O RATIO OB LI QUA.
§ 320. The Infinitive, and oVt (w?) with Finite

Moods in the Sub-direct Sentences.
Both these Constructions occur
in the Sub-direct Sentence,
i.e.in the Principal Sentence of the Original Recta. But the
Infinitive is unquestionably the most common, as it is the
most natural, simple, and easy mode of expression. Greek
writers seem unconsciously to slide into it, even after an
Obliqua has been introduced in the first instance by on or ws.
In consequence of this love for the Infinitive, one or two
peculiarities should be observed.
1. An
Obliqua (indirect words or thoughts) is often
suddenly introduced without any introductory Principal
Verb. A
Particle is the only warning given, said he, he
thought, it was said, or some such expression was in the
writer's mind and can be easily supplied. And in such a
case it should be noticed that the Predicate in the Nomina-
tive accompanies the Infinitive when referring to the Subject
of the Infinitive and of the chief Verb.
Latin and English have the same free and natural usage.
(a.) Âyis Toi'S 7rpe<T/3ets es AaKe8at[xova eKeXevcrev ievaf ov

yap elvat Kvpios avros, k.t.X. XeN. Hell. U. 2. 12.
Agis recommended the envoys to go to Lacedaemon (ex-
plaining that) he was not himself com/petent, etc.^
(6.) IIAaTtuv 6e oSe, (3 avS/aes ' Kd-qvaioi, KaX KpLTOJV Kal

K/3iTo/3ouA.os Kal 'ATToAAoSwpos KeXevovai fxe rpid-
KOVTa iMVoJv Tiji-qaaa-dai, avTol S' iyyvacrdaL.
Plat. Apol. xxviii. 38 b.
Plato here, and Crito, and Critohulus, and Apollodm'us,
ivish me to propose thirty minae (desiring me to say
thai) they themselves are the securities.
SvoLV yjiqcriixoLV ov 8tafw.pTT^<re(r6ai ttjv ttoXiv riyov/xrjv irXev-

crdvTwv rjixwv' rj yap îXtTnrov, d /jLev etA/êêt rrjs ttoAcws,
d— oSwcretv, twv Se AotTrwv dtfjeêo-dai, r/, /jlt] itolovvtos
TavTa, dirayyeXelv 7}/xas evOews Sevpo, k.t.X. Dem. 388. 15.
One of two useful ends I considered the state would not lose.
Either Philip would restore the possessions of the state
1 English expresses this just as neatly, with still less warning

'
Agis recommended the envoys to go to Lacedaemon.
' He himself was
not competent, etc.
INFINITIVE, ETC., IN SUB- DIRECT SENTENCES. 399
which he had taken, and would Iwld his hand from the
remainder, or, if he were not to do this, we should at once
bring back word liere, etc.
2. In t}ie same way, but not nearly so often as an Infini-

tive, an Optative may be introduced by an explanatory ydp.
(a.) e'/Veyoi/ an Travros a^ta Aeyet 2ev^7/s" ûfxwv yap etrj,
K.T.X. Xen. An. vii. 313.

They said that what Seuthes said ivas quite right : for it
was winter, etc.

The whole paragraph 13 is very instructive, and should be
carefully read. Observe that the Obliqua ends with a direct
indicative of the writer, ISoKct.
(b.) Or the Optative continues the Obliqua after a preceding

Optative with on or (is.
aTTiKptvavTo avTCo, OTL dSvvaTa crc^tatv etTj Troielv a. TrpoKa-
AeiTttt avev ' Kdrjvaiiov TratSes yap (tcJjwv Kal yvvaiKCS
Trap' e/cetvots eirjcrav SeSievat 8e Kai, k.t.X. ThUC. ii. 72,
Obs. That
after the Optative the writer slides naturally into
the Infinitive SeSuvai.
They answered him that it was impossible for them to comply
with their proposals ivithout consulting the Athenians, /(w

their wives and children were with them; moreover they
were afraid, etc.
(c.) In Soph. Phil. 615, an Optative is still more abruptly

introduced.
evOkws v7r€(r;(eTo
TOI' dv8p' 'Aiâtots Toi'Se SvÂwcreiv dywv
oioiTO /ocev jxaXia-O' eKOVcriov XafSwv.
et [xrj BkXoL 8', aKOVTa' [Kat rovroiv Kapa
Tep-vetv eêiTO tw êAovrt p.rj tv;^wi'].
Straightway he promised
To bring and sJioiu this man to the Achaeans.
Most like ivith his consent he thought to take him.
Should he refuse, then in his spite, etc.
Out
of vTre(rx€To is to be supijlied (eXeêv ws) before o'oito.
And observe, as in the preceding passage of Xenophon, the
Direct Indicative ecêtro is resorted to, relieving the artificial
strain of the Optative. Cf. also Plat. Phaed. 95 d, (^rj
. .drroXXvoiTO Rep. i20 C, kvaXi^Xnijxkvot (lev. With the last
, :
400 ORATIO OBLIQUA.
instance compare Soph. 0. T. 1245, i'<^' wv ddvoi X'lttol. . . .
Here, although in a Relative Sentence, the Optative crops

up ; it is equal to eAeêi/ on vtto rovrtav ddvoi, so that the
clause is virtually Sub-direct rather than Sub-oblique, being
introduced by iJ.vqp.-qv lyovtr. The passage is discussed in
Madvig's Syntax, p. IIG, note 2, and Goodwin, Moods and
Tenses, § 77, 1 (e).
3. The Infinitive and oTi (ws) with a Finite Mood alternate

in the same Obliqua.
ot AaKe8ai/xoi/iot eiVov, on cr<îcri /xev SoKoiev aStKciv oi
'Kdqvatoi, (iovXecrOaL Se Koi tovs Travras ^vnnd)(ôvs
TTapaKakecravTes \l/rj(f)OV €7rayayeiv. ThtJC. i. 87.
Obs. on fiev SoKoUv co-ordinate with fSovXecrOal Se.
The Lacedaemonians told them thai their oum judgment was

tliat the AtJienians were in the wrong : they wished, how-
ever, to summon all the allies as well as themselves, and to
put the matter to the vote.
Aeyet? crv, w Trdrep, ws ifiol SoKet, on, cocr—ep ov8e yewpyov

dpyov ovSiv ocêAos, outws ov8e CTTpaTrjyov dpyov ovScv
6<f)eXos eivai. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 18.
You say, father, as I understand you, that, just as an idle
husbandman is of no use, so an idle soldier is of no use.
Observe that the verb lo-n is omitted in the sentence

introduced by wairep, and the finite construction with on is
not carried out at all.
4. And Such is the natural
this is the greatest peculiarity.
Greek yearning Sub-oblique clauses,
for the Infinitive, that
both Adverbial and Relative, instead of taking a Finite Mood,
are actually followed by an Infinitive. In some cases the
MTiter, after beginning with if, since, ichen, which, etc., seems
mentally to throw in a "said he," "it icas said," "it was
agreed or thought," and passes to an Infinitive in others the :
preceding Infinitive seems to exercise an assimilating influence

over the Sub-obUque Verb.
(«.) €<f)r) SI. lireiSrj ov iK/3rjvaL rrjv '/UX'?*'} ''''opevecrOaL /xeTo.
-oAAwv.
Plat. Eep. 614 b.
He said that when his soul had gone out of him (i.e. his
body), he was journeying with many.
Several similar instances occur from 614 to end of the book
after iv a>, ov?, ore, els o, ov, a»5.
INFINITIVE, ETC., IN SUB-DIRECT SENTENCES. 401
(6.) A-tyerat koX 'AAK/xatwvi twSv) dXacrdaL

'A{j.<}itdpe(o, ore
avTov /;ieTa tuv Tov 'AttoAAw
<fi6i'ov rqs fxi^rpos,
TavTy)v TTjV yrjv \p?](TaL OLKelv. ThTJC. ii. 102.
There is a tradition moreover that Apollo by oracle
directed Alcmaeon, the son of Amphiaraus, when he
VMS a wanderer after the murder of his mother, to
inhabit this district.
Strictly ore Âaro.
(c.) VvyrjV (fioxTLV iSovTa ro âcr/ia kol 6avfJid(TavTa Kara-

ISrjvaL, tSeiv dAAa re
Kal 6av[xa(Tra kol ittttov
)âXKOvv KOiXov, 6vpL8a<i e^ôvra, Ka$' a.<iJ.y,KV\lavTa
ISeiv evovra veKpov, ws ât'vecrât, fxeiû) -q Kar'
avdpwTTOv TOVTov 8k ttAAo [ikv ex^'^ ovSev, irepl
8e ry X^^P' \pvcrQvv SaKTuAtov, ov —epieXo/xevov
eK(Bi]vai. Plat. Rep. ii. 359 d.
and marvelling at
G-yges, the story runs, seeing the abyss
it,descended and saw, among many other marvellous
things, a IMoiu brazen horse, fitted icith windows,
through which he peeped and saw inside a corpse, so
it seemed, of more than human stature. It had
nothing but a golden ring on its finger, ivhich Gyges
took off, and so made his way out.
Ka6' as et'Sev — ws eâu'ero — ccAAo p-lv et'xe — ov TrepteAojuevos
Though Latin has the same construction of the Relative

with the Infinitive, yet Cicero in translating this does not
avail himself of the identity of idiom (see De Offic. iii. 38).
Note. Latin has, though very rarely, this idiom of the

Relative with the Infinitive the often quoted instance from
:
Liv. xxiv. 3 appears to rest on an incorrect reading, but in

Liv. XXX. 42 an undoubted example ocdurs.
Quorum oratio varia fuit, partim purgantium, quae questi
erant missi ad regem legati, partim ultro accusantium
socios populi Romani, sed multo infestius M. Aurelium,
guem ex tribus ad se missis legatis, dilectu habito,
substitisse et se beUo lacessisse contra foedus, et saepe
cum praef ectis suis sigrds conlatis pugnasse.
They spoke on a variety of topics. A
t one time th&y endeavoured
to clear themselves of the charges brought by the commis-

sioners sent to the king ; at another time they were bringing
2 C
;
402 O RATIO OBLIQUA.
countercharges against the allies of the Roman people, with

much greater rancour Iwwever against M. Aurelius, who
{they said), out of the three commissioners sent to them, had
levied troops, stayed behind, and had commenced hostilities
against them contrary to treaty, and Imd fought several
dovmright battles with their officers.
§ 321. Assimilation of Optatives.
A. After an Optative in a Principal Sentence it is usual

for another Optative to follow in an Adverbial or a Relative
Sentence as if in Historic Sequence. As the Optative is not
in itself past, but on the contrary almost invariably refers to
future time, we can only explain this on the principle of
assimilation.
(a.) redvairjv ore [iol u/yKert ravra jxkXoi.
MiMNERMUS, I 2.
Then might I die whensoever this is no longer my care.
For orav fieAg.
(&.) (TcSs av Tis, a ye îv) eTricTTatTO, croôs av etrj

;
Xen. Mem. iv. 6, 7.
How could one be wise in v:hat he does not know for

certain ?
Instead of a e-LO-ra-ai, or a av /xt) i-iria-T-qTai.
(c.) ei 6.7ToOvrj(TKOt fikv otra tov ^yv fxeraXafôi,

iravTa
eTretSi) d—oOdvoi^ fxevot iv toutw tu (r)(?j/xaTt Kat
8e
fir] TTaXiv dvajSiuXTKOLTO, dp' ov ttoAAt) dvdyKr],
TeXevToJvTa —dvTa TiOvdvat Kal firjSev ^yv
Plat. Fhatd. xvii. 1. 72.
If cdlthings whatsoever partake of life sJwuJd die, and

when they die, abide in this condition and not come
to life again, does it not inevitably follow that in the
end all things will be dead and nothing living ?
—
For o(ra dv fieTaXd^rj IjretSav diroddvrj.
But TtS OVK dv flLOrqCreLEV ^tAtTTTTOr, ei cfidcVOLTO TOVTOIS CTTl-
fSovXevuiv, virep &v 6 irpoyovos avrov TrpoetXcTO

KCvSweveiv ; ISOC. Phil. 77.
Because irpodXe-o was Aorist Indicative in the Recta.
Who would not detest Philip if he should be jyroved to be
conspiring against those in whose behalf his ancestor
deliberately decided to face danger ?
: ;
ASSIMILATION OF OPTATIVES. 403
Note. After an Optative denoting a wish, the sentence may

be assimilated.
dvfiov yevoLTO X^'P' irXr^pwaat ttotc

iv' al MvKrjvat yvolev rj "ZTrdpTi] 6' on
X^ 'ZKvpos dv8piJ}V dXKbfxoiv p-'i'irrjp ecfiv. SOPH, Phil. 324.
Foriva yvwo-t. It is generally stated that a Final Sentence

is never assimilated. See Soph. Phil. 961, an often quoted
instance. See also Soph. Track. 955; EuR. Pacch. 1252 (and
consult the note in Sandys' edition).
In Eur. Bacch. 1384, we get both constructions, Assimila-
tion and non-Assimilation combined
^XdoifXt 8' OTTOV

fJ'iJTe K.L6ai,pwv yntapos //.' ecrtSot
/Ltvyre K.t6aipwv' ocrcro6crtv eyw,
l^yjO^ o^t dvpcTov fxvrijjj' dvaKetTat*
BaKxats S' dXXai(TL /xeAoiev.
§ 322. B. 1. Occasionally this Assimilation does not take

place.
(ft.) Tis 0.V SiKiyv Kptv€i€v i) yvotT] Xoyov

irplv av Trap' dfi(fiocv [ivdo<s eKixdOrj crac^ws
Eur. Her. 179.
Trplv dv kKp-ddri, and not irplv eK/xdOoi. Cf. Hel. 176,
Ion 672, Plat. Rep. ii. 359 c (o n dv jSovXrjTai).
(b.) Kvpos Trpoa-KaXwv tows (ft^Xovs la-irovSaioXoyeiTO, ws

8'>]Xoci], ovs Ti/j-a. Xen. ^71. i. 9. 28.
ous Ti/Aci, and not n/xco^.
2. An on or m, an Indirect Ques-
Indirect Statement with
tion, or a Sentence with ottws when following an Optative, is
not so assimilated, nor usually a Final Sentence.
(a.) ov 8' dv eis avretTTOt ws ov crvfji.(jiepeL rfj TroAet.

Dem. 202. 23.
Not even one would reply that it is not expedient to the
state.
Here dv dvTetVoi is a Principal Sentence in Primary Time.

404 OR A TIO OBLIQ UA.
(b.) e'i Tts Aeyoi avdpbyjrov €0-T7;K0Ta, Kivovvra 8e ras xcipas

re Kat ttjv Kecjiaki/jv, otl 6 avrbs ecTTrjKi re Kal Kivetrai,
OVK (iv d^Loifxev ovto) Aeyctv oeiv.
Plat. Rep. iv. 436 d.
If one should say of a man who is standing still, but is
moving his hands and his head, that the same man
is both stationary and in motion, we should not allow
this to be a correct mode of expression.
(C.) O TTplOpiVS TTJS VeWS . . . Kal ttTTWV dv eiTTOl, OTTOV iKaCTTa
KeiTttt Kal OTToa-a (.(ttlv. XeN. Oec. viii. 14.
(d.) OKVOLTjv dv els rot TrXoia €/x/3atv€tv, a Kvpos "^[iiv Soit],
firf 'qfias avrals rais Tpirjpecri Kara^varj.

Xen! An. i. 3. 17.
§ 323. Examples of Mixed Graphic and Strict

Obliqua.
(a.) irpoelirov vpLiv on ct p.r) Trapecro/iida crvcrTpacrevcrofievoi,
eKCLVOi icf> rip-as louv. XeN. Hell. V. 2. 13.
I told you beforehand that if we should (shall) not be pxsent
to join them, they would march against us.
(b.) i(f>o/3€lTO firj ol Aa/ceSai/xovtot crâs, ottotc o-a</)a)S aKova-eiav,

ovKeTL dcfjoicnv. ThUC. i. 91.
He Lacedaemonians would no longer let
ivas afraid that the
them go, whenever they heard of it.
(c.) e?7rov ry fSovXy on elSeirjv rovs rroLqcravTas, Kal e^qXeyâ
TO. yevofjLeva otl iia-qyrjcraro pkv TrtvovTiav i^pinv ravTrjv
r))v /3ovAi)v EvcîAtjtos, dvnl—ov Se eyw, Kal rore /xev ov
ykvono St' kixk. Andok. de Myst. 61.
I told the Council that I knew who had committed the act, and
I established the facts that Euphiletus had suggested this
scheme, and that I had opposed it, and that on that occasion
it was not executed owing to my opposition.
. . . elo-rjyqcraTO Evc^tAi^ros, avretTTOv Se eycu, ovk eyevero.
§ 324. Virtual Oratio Obliqua.

Virtual Oratio Obliqua occurs the words, thoughts, when
and motives, not of the the subject of the
writer, but of
sentence, are given rather by implication or allusion than
directly introduced.
;
PAST TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 405
(a.) Tov Ile/DtKAea kKO-Kiôv oTt (jrpa.Tqyo'i (ov ovk eTre^dyoi.

Thuc. ii. 21.
(The Athenians, ol ttoWoc, grumbled thus: (TTparqyo<i wv ovk
(b.) ol S' wKTeipov, el a\(x)(TOLVTo. Xen. An. i. 4. 7.

Others were pitying them if they loere to he captured {felt pity
at tlie thought).
The thought was olKrpoi eVovTai et dAwcrovTat.
(c.) ourOa lTraiV€(TavTa"0[JLr]pov tov Ayafjie/mvova ws /3acriAeus'
et'Tj dyaôs. Xen. Symp. iv. 6.

Fo?i /;%oi(; Âa^ Homer praises Agamemnon as being a good
king.
Cf. laudat Africanum Panaetius quod fuerit abstinens.

Cic. Be Offic. il 76.
(rf.) ToiAAa, 7Jv €Tt vai'//tt)(e6v e6 'AOrjvaloL roX/j/'jcrwcrL, irap-

eo-KtvaôvTO. Thuc. vii. 59.
They were making all other preparations in case the
Athenians should venture on a battle.
Here, observe, the graphic rjv ToXfn/ja-wa-i is used instead of
ei ToX.fj.-q(retav.
(e.) Compare
Trpos rrjv ttoXlv, el eTn/3or)6oiev, exwpovv. ThTJC. vii. 100.
They were advancing on the city in case the citizens should
march out against them.
Et and lav often allude in this way to a thought. See Soph.
0. C. 1770, edv TTCus StaKwAiVw/xev : SOPH. Ai. 313, el fiij cjâvoitjv.
§ 325* Pîst Tenses of the Indicative in

Oratio Obliqua.
I. For instances of the Imperfect and Pluperfect Indicative
in Sub-direct Clauses, see Xen. An. i. 2. 21, Hell. vii. 1. 34.
II. For instances of the Imperfect, Pkiperfect, and Aorist

Indicative in Sub-oblique Clauses, see Xen. Mem. ii. 6. 13;
Thuc. vii. 80 (ovs /xereTre/xi/'av) ; DeM. 869. 9 (wv OLTreSocrav)
Xen. An. i, 9. 10 {eirel eyevero) ; Cyr. ii. 2. 9 (>)v eypa\pa).
:
4o6 O RAT10 OB LIQUA.
The Indicative may be accounted for on the same or an^

logous principles in the following passages
(a.) CXP^*' '''0^5 aXKovi [jLi] irpoTepov irepl tZv ofiokoyovfievtav
Î'lx/SovXeveLv, Trplv Trepl twi/ dfi<f>UTl3r)Tovfievwv 17/xas
iSiSaâv. Isoc. Panegyr. 19.
Here ~p\v SiSd^cLav would represent Trplv dv StSa^wo-i.
(0.) TjSews dv KaAA-i/vAct en SieXeyofMrjv, €(os avTw tî/ tou
'Aix(f)iovos aTreSwKa prjaiv dvrl rrjs tov ZiÔov,
Plat. 6-'o?-5r. 506 b.
€0)s d-eSwKa and not ews d-o8oLrjv, which would represent
eojs dv a— oSw.
§ 326. Apparently Abnormal Obliqua.

Sometimes, but rarely, instead of either the Graphic or the
real Obliqua we get an Indicative.
, An examination of :
passages seems to show that the writer throws in the mood

and tense from his own point of view instead of giving the
mood which would be required if he were quoting words 01
thoughts.
(a.) Kvpos v*7r£cr>êT0 rots MtAvyo-iots (/ji'yacriv, el KaXws Kara-
7ipd^€L€v, e(f)' a ia-Tparevero, /jlyj irpocrdev Tramcrdai, Trplv
avToi'S Karaydyot otKaoe. XeN. An. L 2. 2,
The Recta would be i}v KaraTrpdgw, €<^' a (npaTevoiuxc ov

Travaofxai Trplv dv Karaydyia. 1^' a IcTTpaTeveTO is really a bit
of the writer's narrative.
(b.) Aeyerai o' avrov (Uavaaviav) p.eXXovTa ^vX\Tf]<fid-q(Te(r6ai
. . . yvoivat icf) w 134.
i)^wp€L. ThUC. i.
It is said that Pausanias, tchen on tJie point of being arrested,

knew for what purpose he (the ephor) was coming.
e<f)w -xjiopoiiq or xâpfl would be the usual construction ; e^wptt
isthe mood and tense of the writer rather than of the subject
Pausanias.
(c.) lAeyov ov KaXoJs ttjv 'EAAaSa iXevOepovv avTov, et dvSpas
8Lecf)B€Lp€v, K.T.X. Thuc. iii. 32.
They told him that he was not liberating Greece in the right
way, if he was destroying men, etc.
Obliqua would require et 8La(f)9eipei, or SiacfideipoL. Cf. Thuc
vi. 29, cipyaarro (taking Ste^^ctpev as Imperfect. It may be
Aorist).
—
LONG SPEECHES IN OBLI QUA. 407
tlie same way it is open in Latin for the writer

Precisely in
to employ an Indicative or a Subjunctive. Thus we might
say, legati, mirante consule, quod morahantur, venerunt (or quod
morarentur) ; morahantur would give the writer's statement
{morarentur would express the consul's feelings).
{d.) The most peculiar instance perhaps is in Arist. Vesp.
283, Ac'ywv ws (f)iXadTJvaLOs rjv Kal Karet— ot, where the Ae'ywv
us seems to necessitate a quotation of words (ws eo-ri or eh-j).
§ 327. ZOJVG SPEECHES IN OBLIQUA.

Long Speeches in the Oratio Ohliqua, such as we find in
Livy, are rare in Greek. Greek is too lively, too anxious
constantly to recur to the present, and cannot bind itself to
the formal regularity which characterises a Eoman Obliqua.
The introductory verb e^ry, cAege, -qpeTo, efTrev, is repeated, or
the writer breaks away suddenly into the Recta.
For longer specimens of the Obliqua see Plat. Symp. 189,

Bep. 614 B, Thuc. vi. 49, Xen. Cyr. viii. 1. 10, 11.
A very instructive example occurs in Andokides de

Mysteiiis, 38, etc., which is here given at length :
effiT] yap AtoKAetSrjs etVat /x€v Diokleides stated that he

oLvSpaTToSov 06 cTTt Attvpco), 8elv had a slave at Laurium, and
8e KOfua-acrdaL d—o(f)opa.v. dva- that he had occasion to fetch
crras Se irpo) \J/eva-6eis rrjs wpas a pajTnent due. Rising early
/3aSiê6v eivai Se TravcreXrjvov. he mistook the time and
£7ret 8e irapa to -po~vXatov tou started there was a full moon.
:
Aiovvcrov ^v, opav dv6p(o-ovs When he was by the gateway

TToXXovs diro Tov (uSeiou Kara- of Dionysus, he saw several
/?aivovTas ets Tr]v opx'qo'Tpav persons coming down from
SetVas 8e avrous, ela-eXdojv virb the Odeum into the Orchestra.
TTjv (TKLav Kade(€o-OoL jx^ra^v Afraid of them, he withdrew
TOV KLovos Kal TTJs (TT'i]X-)]s i4>' luto thc shads and crouched
y 6 (jTpaTi^yos icrTLv 6 âA/cov?. down between the column and
opav 8k dvdpui-oxs tov p-lv the pedestal on which stands
dpidfjiov fidXicTTa TpiaKocrioi's, the Bronze General. He saw
earrdvai 8e kvkXo) dva izkvTe. ko.\ some three hundred men
8kKa av8pas, tous Se ava standing round about in
eiKocrtv o/Dwv Se avrwv Tr/aos groups of fifteen and twenty
-^v creXip-i^v TO. Trpocroyrra twv each. As he looked he recog-
4o8 ORATIO OBLIQUA.
TrXd(TT(j)V yiyvui(TK€iv. Kat 7rpa»- nised most of their faces by

Tov fMcv, S> av8pes, Tovd' vTredero the moonlight. Now in the
SetvoTttTov —payixa, olfiaL, ottojs first place, gentlemen, this
61/ eKetvM eii] ovrtva /SovXolto story on which he bases his
'AOr^vaidJV cjidvai twv avSpcav evidence is a most extraordin-
TOVTOiv eivai, ovTiva 8e /zi) ary thing; his object, I take it,
fôvXoLTo, Aeyetv ort o-uk t/v. being that it might rest with
tSwv 8e Taur' t^v; ctti Kavpiov him to include in this list
levai, Kol ry rcrrepata aKovetv ot6 any Athenian he wished, or to
06 ^FipfLal €tev TrepLKeKofM/JievoL' exclude any he did not wish.
ovv €v6vs oVt tot/twv etv^
yvoivai, After seeing this he stated
Twv avSpwv TO epyov. •jJkwv Se that he went on to Lauri ^m,
eis aarv {'TjTJ^Tas re '/JSt^ rjpy]}!.^- and next day heard of the
vovi KaTaXafx/SdveiV Kat jxr^- mutilation of the Hermae.
vvrpa KeKr]pvyfJ.€va eKarov fivas. So he knew it was the work
of these persons. Returning
to to\\Ti he found the com-
missioners of inquiry chosen
and a reward of a hundred
minae offered for information.
tSwv 8e E{i(^'»j/xov Tov KaA-Aioi; Seeing Euphemus the son
Tou Ti/AcKAeoDs dSeAôv ev toj of Kallias and brother of
)(aAK€ta) KadrjiJLevov, dvayaywi' Telekles sitting in his forge,
arroi/ CIS TO 'Hâio-Teiov Aeyetv he brought him up to the
airep ly/iv lyo) etprjKa, ws tSot Hephaesteum, and told him
»}jUaS eV iKlLVQ TYj VVKTL' OVKOVV exactly what I have said to
SeoiTO Tra/Dtt rrjs TToAews XPT^/xaTa you, how he had seen us that
Aa/3etv /LtaAAov >') Trap' ij/iwv, night. Now he did not (so
wcr^' ij)u.as c'xÛ' <Âovs. he said) desire to receive
money from the state more
than from us, if we would be
his friends.
eiTTCiv o5v TOV Ev<f)rjixov on Euphemus then told him
KaAws TTOt^creiev €t;rwv, Kat vuv that he had acted rightly in
7/Keiv KcAevcrat otets t^v Aew- telling liim, and noAv he asked
yopov oLKiav, tV Ixei ^vyykvy him to come to the house of
/t€T' euou 'AvSoKiSy Ktti IrkpoLs Leogoras, to meet me there,
,
oTs 8el. i^Keiv e(f)r] Tij va-Tepaia, said he, with one Andokides
KOX 8rj KOTTTCtV T'>)v dvpaV, TOl/ and other needful persons. He
8€ TvaTepa. tov e/;iov tdxcii' said that he went next day,
e^tovTa, Ktti etVeti/ auToV' d/oa and just as he was knocking
ye o-e oi'Se TrepiiJ-evovcri ;
xpv) at the door my father hap-
LONG SPEECHES IN OBLI QUA. 409
fxevToi firj dnijjOela-dat tolovtov^ peiitid to be going out, and

</)iA.ois' etV di/ra 8e axrruv ravra said, "Ob, is it you these
oi)(i(rdai. people are expecting 1 Well,
one ought not to reject such
friends." So saying, he was
off.
Kai Tovro) [lev tw rpo—w rov In this way he tried to niin
TTUTepa [Jiov d—a)X\ve, o-weiSoVa my father by denouncing him
aTToâtrwi'. eiVeii' Se )]fj.as oVt as an accomplice. (According
Se8oyfi€vov ijixlv etr] 8vo fikv to him) we said that we pro-
TCiAaj'Ta dpyvpiov StSdi/ai ot posed to give him two talents
avTi Tuiv eKarov (jlvwv twv €k of silver instead of the hun-
Tou 8r]p.o(rLOv, €av Se KaTdo-)(Ûi- dred minae offered by the
fJLiV "^/xets a. (3ovX6fjLe6a, eva Treasury, and that if Ave
.
avTuv rjfjuDV eivai, ttlcttlv 6e gained our object he was

TOVTcov ôvvai re Kat Seâo-âi. (should be) one of our num-
diroKpcvaxTdaL 8e auros Trpos ber, and that we exchanged
Tuvra oTt fSovXevcroLTO. "^fias pledges of this. His own
Se KeAevetv ai^rov i/kciv eis reply to this was that he
KuAAiou Tov Ti]XeKXeovs, iva would think it over we, how-:
KUKCivos Trapeu/. tov 6' av ever, told him to come to the

KvySecTTvyi/ /xoi' ourws u— wAAvei'. house of Kallias son of
i']K€iV €(f>7]
€IS KaAAtOU, Kttt Telekles whose presence we
KaOofioXoyi^cras rjjxlv ttio-tlv desired. Again in this he
Sorvat £1' aK/aoTToAet, Kat v'^âs tried to ruin my relation.
(rvvdefievovs ot to dpyvpiov et's He came, so he said, to the
TOV tTTidi'Ta fiQva Siixreiv Cta- house of KalHas, and accord-
êuSccr^ât Kat ov otSdvat" v^Ketv ing to agreement he gave us
GUI' firjvv(r(i}v tu yevd/xei'a. pledges on the Akropolis, and
we, after stipulating to give
him the money by the next
month, break our promise and
refuse to give it. Conse-
quently he is present to in-
form of the facts.
CHAPTEE IV.
FIGUEES OF EHETOEIC, Exa
§ 328. Alliteration.
Alliteration, or the repetition of the same letter.
e.g. Who shall tZecide when cZoctors (disagree ?
Subdola cum ridet placidi pellacia ponti. Luc. ii. 559.
Tympana tenta tonant palmis et cymbala circum

Concava, raucisonoque minantur cornua cantu.
Id. ii. 618
OavoLTov 65.TTOV Oil. Plat. Apol. xxix. 39 A.
It (wickedness) fleeth faster than fate.
t) tw TravwAet irarpX rwv fxev e^ e/JLOv

TratSwv TToôs irapdro ; SOPH. El. 544.
Or hy thy felon father, for the family
I bore him, was all fondness flung atvay?
Tov 8' dypiois o(TO-oio"i TraTTTî/as o Trais
TTTUo-as TrpocrwTro). SOPH. Ant. 1231.
Cf. Soph. Ant. 50, where an initial a occurs seven times.
Instances may Ours is the most alli-

be collected.
easily
terative of languages. Shakspereabounds with natural
and beautiful examples. As is well known, Early English
alliterative poetry consisted of couplets, in which each section
contained two or more accented words beginning with the
same letter.
In a somer seson, whan soft was the sonne,
I shope me in shroudes, as I a shejie were,
In habite as an heremite, unholy of workes,
Went wyde in J?is world, wondres to here.
Piers the Plowman
410
: 1;
ANA KOL UTHIA. 41
Shakspere ridicules the abuse of Alliteration :
Whereat, with blade, with bloody blameful blame,

He bravely broached his boiling bloody breast.
"
" Hortatur me frater, ut meos malis miser mandarem natos
of Accius (Cic. Tusc. iv. 77) is little better.
§ 329. Anakoluthia.
Anakoluthia or Anakoluthon is the term used where the
structure of the sentence is not grammatically followed out.
It is either natural and unstudied, or artificial and rhetorical.
It is natural' and unstudied in Herodotus, whose irregular
constructions arise from his writing just as if he were talking.
It is natural and unstudied again in Aeschylus, whose
thoughts* and emotions are too big for his words, and in
Thucydides, who thinks more of matter than manner. It is
rhetorical in Plato, who purposely imitates the easy freedom
of ordinary conversation. Sometimes Anakoluthia arises
from mere slovenliness, as in Andokides.
During the progress of a sentence a new idea strikes the
writer a new expression is thus introduced and becomes a
;
disturbing influence. Or an explanation may be necessary

and a parenthesis, more or less long, is inserted. The
sentence thus may wander far away from its original con-
struction. Generally the writer is aware that he has gone
astray, and goes back, not to the grammar, but to the sense
of the passage, resuming often in a different construction with
a particle 8e, o-q, ovv, so, then, as I teas saying.
There are many kinds of Anakoluthia, and the figure is
constantly recurring. One or two specimens are given just
to show what is meant
dvSpotv 8' ofiaLfioiv ddvaros S)8' avTOKTOvos, —
OVK ecTTi yrjpas TOvSe tou fiiaxrfiaro'i.
Aesch. ;S'. c. Thek 681.
Here OdvaTos, the subject, has no verb {yt-ipda-Kii). Instead
of the verb the writer solemnly pauses, adding a' second
sentence nearly complete in itself.
But blood of brothers shed by fellowly hands —

There is no age for such pollution.
—
41.2 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.
TO, ~dvTa yap tls e'yjêas dv6' aLfiaro?

cvos, fidrrji' 6 ixoxOos-AeSCH. Ch. 521.
Pour all the atoning offerings in the world
—
For one life spilt vain were thy toil
Grammatically fj-driiv av //.oxôt j;s.
:
oi 'Adi]vaLOL I'oo-w €— leôi'TO Kar* dufftorepa, rrj^ T€ wpas Tou

ivLavTOV TavTrjs ev y dxrOevovaiu dvOpioTTOi /xaAicrTa,
ovcrrjs.,
Kal TO )((i}piov dfia, iv (o eo-Tparo— eSevovro, lAwSes /cat

XaAe-ov T/v. Thuc. vii 47.
Grammatically it should have been tou yjapiov lAwSovs koI
XaAcTTOU OVTOS.
The Athenians loere suffering from sickness arising from two
causes, first, because this was the time of year when sickness
is most prevalent, and next, the ground on which they were
encamped teas swampy and unhealthy.
Cf. iv. 23, Kttt Trept IIi'Aov —r^ Tet'xei. Hl)T. vii. 74, /cat
TToAAa dfj.vva(T6ai.
One simple instance from Plato may suffice to show how he
imitates the freedom of ordinary talk :
—
7Â6'ov kiTi Ttva Twv SokoiVtwv cro<f)U)v €Lvat . . . Kal otaAeyo-
fievos avrio, eSoê fioc ovtos o dvijp ook€iv fxkv (.tvai a'0(}i6s
K.T.X., eivac 8' ov.PlAT. Apol. vi. 21 B.
1 went one of those who had the reputation of being
to see
wise. And talking with him, this man seenud to me to be
considered^ tvise, without being really so.
As if it were SiaAeyo/ueios avr^ eooâcra, conversing with him
I thought.
§ 330. Antiptosis.
Antiptosis. The Subject
of the Subordinate Clause is
the object of the Principal Clause.
The stock instance is "nosti Marcellum, quam tardus sit"
for "nosti quam tardus sit Marcellus." "I know you not,
whence ye are."
This is a common construction in Greek, Latin, and
English.
ireov ovv ctko—ovvti tov )(^p-qcrfxuv r't Aeyet. PlaT. Ar>ol. vii.
21 E.
/ must go on then examining the oracle, ichat it means (i.e.
examining wlmt tlie oracle means, or the meaning of the
oracle).
ASYNDETON AND BINARY STRUCTURE. 413
oTê fih' ouSets tov Odvarov ov8' el Tvyx^v^t- TrdvTO)v fikyta-TOV

ov Twi/ dyadQ>v. PlAT, Apol. xvii. 29 A.
No one hnows {loith regard to) death, even tvhether it is (not)
the greatest possible blessing.
We may say that the Accusative antl the Subordinate

Sentence together become the object of the principal Verb.
Antiptosis is commonly explained as above, but the simpler
and more rational account is that the Subordinate Clauseex-
pands and explains the Object or Accusative of the Principal
Clause.
§ 331. Asyndeton.
Asyndeton, or the omission of Conjunctions, stock instances
of which are Shakspere's
Unhousel'd, disappointed, unanel'd j
and Cicero's Abiit, excessit, evasit, erupit.
Cf. Milton's Unrespited, unpitied, unreprieved.

Unshaken, unseduced, unterrified.
Exhaustless, spiritless, afflicted, fallen.
ttKAavcTTOS, cic^tAo?, dvviikvdio<i. SoPH, Ant. 9>'1'1.
Unwept, unloved, unhymned.

a(f)t\ov, eprjfJLOv, ctTroAtv, iv ^wcriv veKpov. SOPH. Phil. 1018.
Friendless, lone, citiless, midst the living dead.
The use of the figure is to set forth each idea separately,

and pointedly. It is so common that further instances are
unnecessary.
§ 332. Binary Structure.

One conceptionis stated twice over, so that two aspects of
it are given.This double presentment enables the reader
to obtain a fuller view of the conception as a whole.
"
Mr. Riddell aptly describes this artifice as giving a rhetorical

"binocular vision." It is commonly employed in Similes.
ctv 5' Ayafiefivwv
i'cTTaTO SaKpvêwv, bxrre Kprjvq /xeXavvSpos . . .
&<s 6 (3apvcrT€va.\(av lire" A py (.tour i fiCTrjvSa. II. ix. 13.

Cf. Soph. Ai. 840, 0. C. 1239.
;
414 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.
Tavra lyw Sokw UKOvetv, wcnrep ol KOpv/3avTio)VT€'s twv

avXwv SoKovaiv uKovetv . . . Kal ev e/xol avri] ^ "^XV - • •
ftofjLfSel Plat. Crito, 54 d.

ov TavTOV rovTo Tr€Trov6o.(Tiv, . . . aKoXaaia tivI crw^poi/es
etVtv; Plat. Phaed. 67 e.
ovTwcrt (TOL SoKWj ovSeva vojxiô} deov €?vat
Plat. Apol xiv. 26 e.
Binary Structure in giving two descriptions of the same

object differs from Apposition, which gives but one descrip-
tion, though in certain forms there is a resemblance between
the figures. Asyndeta and Anakoluthia often occur in this
structure. The artifice is used by all Greek writers, but it is
employed in an almost endless variety of subtle forms by
Plato. See Eiddell, pp. 196-209, whence the above examples
are taken.
Antiptosis is a form of Binary Structure.
§ 333* Brachylogy or Abbreviated Construction.

(Including Zeugma, Constructio Praegnans, Brachylogy of
Comparison.)
Brachylogy is a kind of Ellipse ; but where Ellipse actually

suppresses a word or sentence altogether, Brachylogy leaves
them to be supplied from some corresponding expression in
the context. Brachylogy is thus more essentially artificial
than Ellipse.
vTreprepav T'^s totc ^dptTOS (sc. vTrepTepav )(dpiv, the
'€(ppa.(ra<s
Xaptv supplied from xaptros). Soph. EI. 1265.

A Substantive, an Adjective, a Pronoun, a Conjunction, or
a Verb may thus be supplied from the context.
Tcl fiev aXXa, oa-airep Kal Travres ifxeis eTrotetre.
Xen. Ci/r. iv. 1. 3.
i.e. Tu fiev aAAa (sc. kiroUi, supplied from kirouire).
In the common phrases ov^lv dXXo )], rl dXXo dXXo ^, a -!], n

different verb of more general meaning is supplied from a
special verb in the context.
01 AaKcSat/xovtot ciAAo ov8ev 'Pj Ik ttJs yqs lvav[xa.)(ovv.
Thuc. iv. 14.
i.e. aXXo oi'Sev kiro'iovv tj. PlAT. A])ol. 19 D.
Tavra Kal ttouiv koI iraa-xîv a 7rd(T)(êL. PlAT. Phaed. 98 A,

supply Kal TTOtet.
CONSTRUCTIO PRAEGNANS. 415
§ 334* Zeugma and Syllepsis.
Zeugma another form of Brachylogy. There is only one

is
verb in the sentence, but more than one noun. The verb
strictly applies only to one of the nouns, but suggests the verb
required by the other.
dAA.' y] TTVoauTiv i] âOwKaêl Kovei
KpVÔV VLV.
Soph. EL 435 ; cf. El. 72, Ai. 632, EuR. Bacch. 142.
No, or to the toinds (sc. )ue(?es) or in the deep-dug soil bury
them.
A violent instance of Zeugma :
i(r6i]Ta 8e cfiopeovcrt ry ^KvdLKrj 6jj.oi.-qv, yXwcrcrav Se IStrjv,
Hdt. iv. 106.

They wear a dress like the Scythian, but (speak) a language
of their own.
Cf. the old Tyne ballad :
" He wears a blue bonnet, wi' a
dimple on his chin."
!rpo6v[i,ta xpiofjievoi Kal 7rapaKeX€vap.{o. ThUC. iv. 11.
JVith energy and with mutual exhortation.
XpcafievoL goes with both nouns not quite in the same sense.
This sort of Zeugma is sometimes distinguished as Syllepsis.
Cor.
1 iii. 2, yaAa vfias eTTOTicra ov (3pw[ji.a, is a stock instance
from the New Testament, liroTia-a suiting yaAa only. Cf. L.

i. 64.
§ 335* Constructio Praegnans.

Constructio Praegnans is a form of Brachylogy. Two
Sentences are compressed into one.
ov eSet KaKOTradelv tw aw/iart ivravdoi ovSev pe uxjêXy^crev rj
kp-Kupia. Antiph. de Caed. Her. 2.

WJiere I ought to have endured personal ill-treatment hither
(i.e. here, whither they have brought me), my experience
proved no help to me.
It is common with certain Prepositions (et's, kv, i^) and with

Relative Adverbs.
e.g. Tais €v ry yrj KaTaTreêuyviats (sc. vaxxri).
The ships which had fled to the share, and were on the shm'e.
4i6 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.
K€ivos S' OTTOV fik(ir]K€v, ovSets oiSe. SoPH. Tr. 10.

/-F/i^j-e {for lohither) he is gone none knoivetk
OTTOV for oTTot. Cf. Phil. 256.
Constructio Praegnans is very common in the New Testa-

ment. A
stock instance is ^lXittttos evpWr] eh 'A^wtov, Act.
Ap. viii. 40. See 2 Tim. iv. 18, Matt. v. 22, eVoxos els tyjv
yeevvav.
§ 336. Brachylogy of Comparison.

Brachylogy of Comparison, or Comparatio Compendiaria.
The stock example is from 77. xvii. 51, Ko/xat -xapLTea-a-Lv
6/xotai, i.e. KOfiat 6/iiotai \apiTiav KOfnaicri, hair like the (Juiir of)
the Graces.
'HâiVrou 8' LKave So/zov Gerts apyvpoireâ

a<j>diTov da-Tepoevra, /xeraTrpeTre' ddavaTotcriv. HOM. II. xvili.
i.e. {JLeTairpeTrea 86[j.ouriv aâvctTWV. [368.

Silverfooted Thetis came unto the house of Hephaestus
Incorruptible, starry, conspicuous among the Immortals.
yeipov dptrevoiv votrov ravT-qv voa-ov/xev. EuR. Androm. 220.

i.e. ^(êipQva dpcrevdiv vocrov vocrov vocrovjiev.
Worse than men this plague we are plagued witlud.
ofioiav Tats SoijAais eT)(e ttjv i(rOrJTa. XeN. Cyr. V. 1. 3.
Cf. Rev. xiii. 11, elê Kepara 8vo o/xota dpvta).
§ 337. Catachresis.
The use of a word not in its strict meaning.
viroTTTevdi, I expect; Sat/xdvios, extraordinary; davfiaa-ro?

davfida-Los, strange, eccentric,funny, capital, excellent ; /xeyas (sc.
Adyos, Plat. Phaed. 62 b), puzzling ; urepûajs u»s (6/xoAoyw),
/ decidedly do (assent) ; dfirjxavC}'; ye ws a-cfioSpa, most decidedly.
See Ptiddell, Digest, p. 240.
§ 338. Ellipse and Aposiopesis.

The suppression of a word or sentence.
e.g. rj avpiov (sc. rjfxepa).
Is KopaKtts (sc. âkXere, f.ppere, oi-)(ecrOe).
To the crows /
"
EUPHEMISM. 417
The suppressed word or sentence can, of course, be easily

supplied. The figure ismechanically and unconsciously em-
ployed in many common every-day phrases. The object of
its artificial use is to give brevity and pith to the expression.
ev\as TucrSe
y\lilv fJLev (sc. eli;^0)u,a^). AeSCH. Cho. 142.
For us these prayers —
The omission of the Subject with its Verb, of the copula ccm,
of the substantive with its epithet or genitive (01 ayadoi, 6
common instances of unconscious Ellipse.
^lAiTTTTou), are
Instances of unconscious Ellipse of Sentences occur in the
phrases oi^ otc, /xt) ot6, o^x ottws, etc., and more or less so in
the suppression of a Protasis, or of an Apodosis.
Aposiopesis is a form of Ellipse.^ In animated and excited

expressions the speaker breaks ofi" abruptly, leaving the lest
of the sentence to be understood.
fjir]8€v TTpos opyi'iv irpus dewv (sc. Spdcrys). SOPH. El. 369.
By Heaven ! naught in anger.
[i-q T/Dt/3as eV (sc. iropiêTe or some such verb). Antig. 577.
No longer tarrying !
fill] /Moi Trp6(f)aa-iv. Ar. Ach. 345.

No shuffling !
p-q fjLot ye fivdovs. Ae. Vesj). 1179.

Come ! no tales !
Vergil's "quos ego: sed motos praestat componere

fliuctus," is Quintilian's stock instance. " Quid multa ?
" quid plura ?
" are common cases.
§ 339* Euphemism.
The
substitution of a colourless or an agreeable expression
for a strong or disagreeable one. It is the reverse of " calling
a spade a spade." The Greeks carefully avoid the mention of
death especially, e.g. cwpa^' ottws eVpaê.
e.g. aWo Ti Tradeiv. Plat. Crito, iv. 44 e, to suffer something
else.
^ 'ATrofftwirrjffis. Reticeiitia, Cic. Obticentia, Celsus. Interruptio ai.

QciNT. Inat. ix. 2.
2 D
—
4i8 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.
So we say " in the event of anything happening."

eyw yap eTyx' eKacr' ottol TTopevrkov. SOPH. Al. 690.
For I shall go thither where all must go.
Spoken by Aias when contemplating suicide.
SedoiK' eyo)
/117 /ior (Sefti^KTi. Soph. Phil. 494.

Where Philoktetes fears that his father may no longer be
alive.
§ 340. Hypallage.
A change of case, so that a word does not agree with the
case w^hich logically it qualifies. In such constructions the
word agrees with a compound expression, so that the figure
is a form of Synesis rather than Hyperbaton. The stuck
instance is from Horace
Nee purpurarum sidere clarior
Delenit usus,
where the adjective clarior, instead of agreeing with pur-

purarum (pui-ple robes) agrees with the compound substantive
vsus purpiirarum.
Si Trarpwov ea-Tias /Sddpov. SOPH. Ai. 860.
Seat of my father's hearth.
For Trarpioas hnlas jBaOpov.
So Antig. 794, veiKO? av^pwv ^vvaiiiov, where retKOS av^pMv
forms one word : Track. 817, oyKov 6v6p.aro<i ixrj-pMov.
Tov 8' dOXiios 6av6vTa HoXvveiKOVs vIkw. SopH. Ant. 26.
For davovTos HoXvveiKovs.

In Lucretius, L 474, we have an instance of true Hypal-
lage Ignis Alexandri Phrygio sub pectore gliscens.
:
Mr. Munro,
in his note on the line, collects some striking parallels from
other -oTiters.
§ 341. Hyperbaton, Chiasmus, Hysteron-Proteron.

The displacement of the natural order of words. Its chief
use is to give emphasis to a word. It also enables language
to represent the rapidity of thought, one word instantly
catching up another word.
— —
LITOTES. 419
Easy and familiar instances are

eiVe, w Trpos Atos, MeATjre. PlAT. ^poZ. xiii. 25 C.
Like the Latin

Per te Deos oro.
Certain Avords in particular are thus displaced, especially ye,
fievTOi, av, CTi, «ra)S, ovk in ov (f^Vf-h ^tc.
ap' oSv av fxe oUcrde TOcravTa Itv/ otayivecrdai ;
Plat. y^^w?. xxi. 32 e.
Tts >/v ev § fiaTTOfXiOa fxevTOL to-Xî-to. ; AltlST. Ntlh. 788.
Tax' av opdm la-ijiS /x€/x<ôtTO. PlAT. ie^. 640 D.
Chiasmus is a form of Hyperbaton. Chiasmus is the In-

verse Parallelism of Clauses and Sentences :
TTttV /xev epyov irav S' cttos Aeyovras re Kat TrpaTTOvras,
where the outside tpyov belongs to the outside TrpdrTovras,

and the inside cVos to the inside Aeyovras.
ovt' dSiKei, out' dSiKeirai, ovd' vtto deov, oure deov.
Eysteron Froteron {va-repov -porepov) reverses the order in

which events- occur, e.g. Tpa4>ev 7;S' eyevovro.
€')(etS Tl K€tOTJKOVO-OS ', SOPH. Allt. 9.
dXAvjAovs StSa'o-Keiv re *cai <^pd^€iv. PlAT. ^jwZ. iii. 19 D.

alcrdavofxevos ftev Kai AvTTOV/xevos Kat SeSiws ort o-irrjx-
davofxi^v. Plat. JôZ. vi. 21 e.
On the Hyperbaton and its forms see Riddell, p. 228.
§ 342. Litotes.
Litotes or Meiosis, smoothing or diminishing a stronger

conception by a weaker statement. A
common enough figure
in all languages, but especially suited to Greek taste, e.g. oi'x
iô-croi', not less, i,e. more; ov [xaXXov, not so much.
ei fiev yap tovto dv eywye ov Kara

Aeyovo-ii', ofioXoyoi-qv
toi'tous €?vat pi]T(x)p. Plat. Aôl. 1. 17 b.
If this is what they mean, I must admit tluit I am an
orator,
not as they are 07-ators (i.e. an orator of a far higher order

tluiv. they).
!
420 FI(7URES OF RTIETORIC, ETC.
\u.ipovcnv lêrcô/xeiois rots olo/xevoLS eivai o-o</jots, overt o'
ov- loTTi yap OVK d-i]8e<;. PlAT. Ajjol. xxii. 33 C.
Tliei/ enjoy the cross-examination of those iclw think they are

wise, tdthout really being so. It really is not disagreeable
(i.e. it is extremely amusing).
KctTtti 6avci>v SetAatos, ot5 jxaX' evruxws. AesCH. Fers. 327.

Lies loiv in death unhappy, not all fortunately (i.e. all ivr
gloriously, because unburied : an euphemism also).
§ 343. Oxymoron.
Oxymoron is tbe contrast by juxtaposition of opposite
conceptions, e.g. from the Paradise Lost :
Our final hope is flat despair.
Dishonest shame
Of Natiu-e's works, honour dishonourable.
A universe of death . . .
Where all life dies, death lives.
In King John the despairing and passionate Constance cries :
Death, death ;amiable, lovely death !
Thou odoriferous stench sound rottenness !
kydpdv aSwpa 8wpa. SOPH. Ai. 665.

Giftless the gifts of foes.
ixaiverai 8' v(j)' rjSorrjs
fi-qrrjp d/mi/ro-/). SoPH. El. 1154.

She is mad for joy,
A mother, yet no mother.
oo-ia Travovpyâ-aa-a. SOPH. Ant. 74.

Daring a holy crime.
€^€(f)6iv0' ai rp'uxKaXjxoL
vae^- draes avaes. AesCH. Fers. 680.
They are destroyed those three-banked
ships, ships no more, ships no more.
Cf. Catullus : funera ne funera.

Cf. Aesch. p. V. 545, x">^s ax^pii. Soph. 0. T. 1214,
ya/ios ayafios.
:
PERIPHRASIS AND PLEONASM. 421
Oxymoron is well caricatured by Shakspere

A tedious brief scene of young Pyramus
And his love Thisbe, very tragical mirth.
Merry and tragical, tedious and brief !
That is, hot ice, and wonderous strange snow.

How shall we find the concord of this discord 1
§ 344. Periphrasis.
Periphrasis or Circumlocution is a roundabout way of using
two or more Avords instead of one, e.g. '\(TH'i]vq'? Kotpa, head of
Ismem, for 'la-fii'^vi] Opefifxara NeiAou (Plat. Lcij. 953), children
;
of the Nile, i.e. Egyptians (of. the Hebrew, children of Israel,

sons of Belial, son of peace, etc.). The word XPW^ occurs in
one or two phrases vos /-teya XPW'^:
: Hdt. to XPÎF-^ ''''^^
;
vvktQiv, Ar. Niib. 2.

Very often the Substantive is used for an Adjective or an
apposition, IlocretSwvos Kparo?, the might of Poseidon, for
e.g.
the mighty Poseidon (Aesch. Einn. 27); Trapdevia 'lovs, the virgin
lo (Aesch. P. V. 898); iJ.-i-iTpos o-efSas, a revered mother (P. V.
1090). So in Latin, mitis sapientia Laeli, prisci Catonis
virtus (Horace).
Periphrasis is employed in the use of Tenses, e.g. fieXXa)
TTotT^cretv, fieXXd) re.dva.vai (Plat. Apol. xviii. 30 C and xix.
32 a), drt/iao-as ex^') periturus sum, fore or futurum esse with
a Subjunctive mood.
Very often, again, both in Greek and Latin, a periphrasis
is used for a simple verb, especially with e^w, e.g. ev vw e^w
= Siai'oov/iai (/)/Dovt/xws i^ta
: (fipovQ =
dappaXeojs e^w
: Bappui =
(all in Plat. Apol.): XvTr-qpQi cxf^ =
XvTrovixai (Soph. El. 766):
riSovrjv (êpetv =
rep-etv (SOPH. El. 286) <pwvrjv XafSdv
: =
(fiOiveiv, etc.
In fact these iJeriphrastic verb^ axe of constant use both ir>
prose and poetry.
§ 345* Pleonasm.
Pleonasm or Redundancy is the employment of words
apparently superfluous. Apparently, for a second expression
may often define or amplify a previous exj^ression, e.g. 6
TTpaTi]yu<; rrjs crrpaTias, fiovov Kad' avruv KovBev' aAA.ov.
— : :
422 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC.
A
cognate accusative is a sort of pleonasm, /J^dxrjv ixaxeo-Bai
or an adverl) with its adjective, /zeyas iieyaXoxTTc (kcito). //.
xvi. 776, (he lay outstretched) huge luith his huge length.
Adverbs are often thus combined dX-qdws tm 6vti : m :
—dXiv avdL<;, av TrdXiv aS^ts eVetTa /zera ravra. The repeti-

:
tion of the negative and of du are cases of Pleonasm.

Tt' 0'() Aeyovres SteâAAov oi Sia/3aAA.0VT€S ;
Plat. Aprd. iii. 19 b.

Ittuikyj dv jwi SoKM Aeyeiv Aeyojv. PlAT. A])ol. xxii. 34 D.
Periphrasis is a form of Pleonasm.
§ 346. Prolepsis or Anticipation.

"What is intended, or expected to take place, as spoken of,
by anticipation, as having already taken place.

It occurs most commonly with a predicative adjective. A
srood instance is found in Juvenal
Paullatim caluerunt mollia saxa.
i.e. caluerunt ita ut mollia fierent.
A stock instance is
€vcf>rjfxov, (3 TctAaiva, KOtfJir](TOv (rro/ia. AESCH. Ag. 12.58.
i.e. wcTTe ev(f)i]fJiov etvai.
ewa Kcvet cbOeyixar' opviddv crac^rj.SOPH. El. 18.

Awakes to shrillness the birds' matin songs.
See v. 14, Tifiwpov.
yovewv
eKTLfiovs L(T\ova-a Trrepvyas
6^vt6i'(ov yow;/. SoPH. El. 242.
Bestrain'mg the loings of shrill-voiced wailings
So that they honour not a parent. Cf. Antig. 1200.
Cf. Eur. Bacch. 70, 183.
§ 347- Puns.
(Paronomasia, Annominatio.)
Occasionally Greek writers indulge in them.

dAAa yap, <S MeAjjTC . . . (racjiw^ d7ro</)aa'ets rrjv (rairroC
HueAetav, on ov8^v croi fjLeiMeXrjKe irepl (Di' e/xe ewrayets.

Plat. Apol. xii. 25 c
(See xiv. where the pun is repeated.)
PUNS. 433
RiJdcll, p. 242, collects many instances from Plato.

aTTCO-Te/ar^Kas tov /3iov to. to^' kXuiv. Soril. Phil. 931.
where there is clearly a play on JBlov (bow) and fSiov (life).
The grandest instance of punning or playing on words at a

solemn moment is in Shakspere. {Richard ii., Act ii.), where
the dying Gaunt dwells on his name :
Old Gaunt indeed, and gaunt in being old, etc.

So of Helen :
lAevas, €/\avS/30S, eAeTrroAt?. AeSCH. Ag. 689.

Helen, the Hell of shi])s, the Hell of men, the Hell of towns.
Compare the pun made on the rock-built Assus recorded in
Athenaeus viii, 352.
"A.(T<Tov W, ws Kev Oacrcrov oXkdpov iretpaO' in-qai. 77. vi. 143.
Paronomasia is the combination of words of similar sound
or cognate form.
utrum propter an propter aves; Varro, JS. R.
oves iii. 2. 13.
Traume sind SchJiume (lit. dreams are huhhles).
Socriv KttKav KaKcov KaKol<;. AeSCH. Pers. 1041.

(j'jpOovd' 6 tXtJikjjv 6p6o'S e^ opOdv Sitfypuyv. SOPH. Pll. 742.
AvTos lavToj', avTos v(f> eavroi;, etc., would be familiar
instances.
;
ENGLISH INDEX.
Reference is only made to sttbjeds ivhich are not easily found in the
Table of Contents.
The numbers refer to the pages of the book.
Dative of interest in Par-

Article, for Possessive, 30.
with words used 7>ta- ticipial phrases, 107.
represented by terialitcr, 35. of circumstance used

Ablative
not repeated with a adverbially {f.g. o-ty?}),
Genitive, 78-9.
second noun, 114.
Accusative, see Table of 35.
Contents, 66-78. Asyndeton, 24. with Infinitive, 13, 158.
as an Oblique Pre-
I
Absolute, 95. Attraction, 58.

Attributive or Epithet, 5 dicate, 45.
with Infinitive,! 13,
158, 179. Peculiarities in Construc- Dawes' Canon, note on, 267.
__
with Infinitive instead tion, 23-4. Deliberative or Dubitative,

see Questions.
of Nominative, 180.
in Apposition to Sen-
Definite and Indefinite
Sentences, 194-5.
tence, 25, 74. Cases, Preliminary Note
with Prepositions, 2B9. Demonstrative Pronouns as
on, 64. Subjects and Predicates,
Active Voice, 120. Causal Sentences, see Table 18.
Adjectives which take a of Contents, 276-9.
Genitive, 100.
Pronouns preceding a
Causative Active Voice, sentence in Apposition,
which take a Dative, 125 do. Middle, 127.
;
25-
119. Collective Noun with Plural Deponent Verbs, 131.
Adverbs which take a Predicate, 19.
Genitive, 100. Dual Number, 19, 20.
Comparative and Super-
which take a Dative, lative, 120-3.
119. _ denoting great
too
Adverbial sentences, 9. Emotion, Verbs of, with
a degree, 97, 120, i2x.
Agent, how denoted, 131. Concessive Sentences, see Participles, 170.
denoted by Preposi- Table of Contents, 249- Verbs of, with ei foi
tions, 2S9-90. OTl, 186.
251-
Genitive of, loi Epithet, see Attributive.
;
Conditional Sentences, see
Dative of, in. Table of Contents, 193-
Anastrophe, 289. 231-
Aorist, uses of, 145-9. Sentences, examples Fearing, Verbs of, with
Sometimes the equival- of, 209-231. fJLTJ, OV, 262-8.
ent of the English, Consecutive Sentences, see
fjl77
Present, Perfect, or ;
(i)With Subj. orOpt.,
Table of Contents, 269- 262.
Pluperfect, 147.
.'^podosis, meaning of the
275. (2) With Fut. Indie,
Co-ordinate Sentences, 7. I
264.
term, 195, footnote. Copula, I Verbs used as,
1
;
(3) With on-co? fiV} and
without O.V, 217-9.
12 omitted, 13. I
Peculiarities
;
I Fut. Indie. Subj. or
Apposition, 5 ;
Construction Kara <rivt(ii.v^ Opt., 265.
of, 24-26. I
Article,^ see Table of Con-

24.
I
(4) With (OS and Fut.
Indie, 265.
tents, ch. ii., 27-46. D I
(s) With Infin., 265.

as Personal, Demon-
I
and Relative Dative, see Table of Con- (6) With €1 Interroga-

strative,
tents, 104-119. tive, 266.
in Attic, 28.
1 For an e.xplanation of this construction, see Monro's Homeric

Grammar, p. 158.
are arranged under
2 See Monro's Homeric Gravimar, where the uses of the Article
three heads.
425
— —
426 ENGLISH INDEX.
Figures of Rhetoric, see Indicative Mood Infinitive,with toO denot-

Part III., ch. iv., Table in the Indirect Ques- ing a purpose, 162.
of Contents. tion, 188. in Indirect Statement,
Final Sentences, 252, 259. in the Indirect Petition I 178, etc.
(i) With ivoL, to;, o—(OS, (Fut. Indic), 192. I in Indirect Petition,
and Subj. or Opt., in Definite Sentences, 191.
194-3- with Verbs of Fearing,
^ I
(2) With (OS, o~(os a.v in Conditional Sen- 1 265.

and Subj. (not Opt.), tences, see Part II. ch. ii. \ with TM, used caus-
255- (a) Present Conditions. ally, 279.
(3) Rarely with Fut. ib) Future Conditions. '
in Oratio Obliqua,
Indic, 236. {c) Past Conditions. introduced without a
Fre juentative, see Itera- ((/)Unfulfilled Past or Principal Verb, 398.
tive. Present Conditions. and Finite Mood
Future Middle as Passive, in Temporal Sentences alternating in Orat.
115. to denote Definite Time, Obligua, 4(30.
Perfect, 150. see Part II. ch. iii. with Adverbial and
Indicative, with ojtojs in Concessive Sen- Relative Sentences in
Final, 256, «. 4 ; Fut. tences, sec Part II. ch. iv. Orat. Obliqua, 400.
Opt., as Obliqua of in Final Sentences of in Latin Orat. Obliqua,
above, 256. Past Purpose, 257. 401.
in Relative Final Sen- Indefinite Tenses, see
tences, 238. Definite.
with 6-(os Modal (Fut. Time, three kinds of,
Genitive, see Table of Con Indic), 259, etc., 262. 232.
tents, 73-104.
with Verbs of Fearing, Iterative (Frequentative)
Absolute,! c6, 165-7.
263. Tenses, 151.
with Infinitive, 13, I
with Consecutive Sen- See Temporal Sen-
158.
j tences, see Part II. ch. y\. tences.
as Oblique Predicate,
with Limitative or Re-
45-. . . I
strictive Sentences, 274.
in App<3sition to an- ;
with Causal Sentences,

other Genitive supplied i Limitative or Restrictive
see Part II. ch. vii.
in the Possessive, 26, 49. Sentences, 274-5.
Gnomic Tenses, 151.
j
wthExpressions of
Locative Case, 64-5, 116.
Wishes, see Part II. ch.
1
Graphic (or Vivid) con- |

viii.
struction, i.e. the Sub- ;
with Relative Sen- M

stitution, in a Subordinate !
tences, see Part II. ch. Middle Voice,^ 123-130.

Clause in Historic Se- :
ix.
quence of the Mood :
(and Active) Verbs.
substituted for the Alphabetical List, 127-
used in the Primary ,
Optative by the Graphic

Sequence, 13S, 182, etc. 130.
or Vivid Construction in Modal Sentences with o7r(os,
see also Oratio Obliqua :
Historic Sequence where- OTTcos ixr), 239-262.

passim, esp. 386, 404.
ever the Recta or the (i) Fut. Indic. or Fut.
Primary Sequence took Opt., 260.
H i
I
an Indicative. (2) Subj. or Opt., 260.
Hoping and Infinitive, see Table of
Promising, (3) OTTTJ, OT(p TftO'T'O, i^
Verbs of, with Pres. and
j
Contents, 133-162. oT(o Tp6~«o for OfftOS,
j
Aor. Infill., 180-1. 1

Epe.xegetical, 153-6. 261.
compared with Latin (4) o7T-(os with Of and
Supine, 155. Subj., 261.
I
after a Comparative With firi for ojr(i>s
(5)
Imperative Mood, 136-7. with fj or iosre, 136. fii), 261.
Imperfect Tense, uses of, •
with (OS, <os ye, Limi- Moods, see Table of Con-
143-4- tative, 156. tents, 132, 137.
Indicative Mood for Imperative," 159.
states facts or asks denoting surprise, 160.
N.
questions, 132. I>ersonal and im-
in the Indirect State- personal passive con- Negatives, see Part III.;
ment, 181, etc. struction, 159. Ch. ii., Table of Contents
* See Monro's Homeric Grammar, p. 167.

* On the Infinitive as an Imperative see Monro's Homeric Grammar, p. 162. The
whole of the chapter (see especially the Infin. as Subject, 157, Accus. with Infin., 158,
Origin and History of Infinitive, 163), is "worth careful perusal.
^ For the Middle and its uses, see Monro's Homeric Grammar, p. 7. The Passive
has grown out of the Middle, in fact was originally one of the u.ses of the Middle.
— —
ENGLISH INDEX. 427
Optative Mood Predicate, i, 13, contrasted

Neuter Plural, with Verb
the Optative with av, with Attributive, and Ap-
Singular, 15.
Verb Plu- found in other Sentences, position,5. Supplemen-
Plural, with
is always an Apodosis 2, 22
t.-iry, Oblique or
;
ral, 15.
Predicate, used subordinatcly. Dependent, 43-5.
Sincûlar
Optative in Oratio agreement of, with
with Plural Subject, 15.
Obliqua introduced with- several Subjects, 16-18.
Pronoun, (Adj. or Adv.)
out a Principal Verb. 399. with Article, 37.
with Gen. (like Lat. paul-
Assimilation and Non- Prepositions, see Table of
lum sapienliae), 85.
Assimilation of Optatives, Contents, Part III., 286,
Nominative Case, 65.
etc.
with Infinitive, 13, 158,
Oratio Recta and Quasi Prepositions,
179.
with Participle, 187. Obliqua, 10. Virtual Ob- 288, 301-2, 306.
liqua, II, 240, 243, 277, Present Tense, uses of, 142.
etc. Principal and Subordinate,
O see Chapter on Oratio see Sentence.
Obliqua. Promising, see Hoping.
Object, Direct and Remote,
Oratio Obliqua, see Pronouns, ^î- Table of Con-
5-
Part Ill.,ch. iii. (Table tents, Part I. ch. iii.,
Sentence, 252, foot-
of Contents). 47-63-
note.
Personal, for Reflex-
Optative Mood
ive, 48.
Introductory Note, 132.
in Independent Sen-
P. —— Possessive, for a Geni-
Participle, see Table of tive Subjective, or Objec-
tences, 135, etc.
Contents, 162-177. tive, 49.
A. Denoting a Wish
Fut. Part, with Article in Gen., agreeing with
(an Exhortation,
Command, or Pro- 163. a Personal Pronoun im-
Neuter or Substan plied in the Possessive,
hibition).
B. Deliberative Ques- five, 164. 49-
with Verbs of Percep Reflexive, for Recipro-
tions.
tion. Emotion, etc., 170, cal, 50.
in the Indirect State-
etc. as antecedent to the
ment, 181.
in Indirect Statement Relative, 52, n. 4, 55, «._i.
in the Indirect Ques-
187, etc. Protasis and Apodosis,
tion, i8S.
Deliberative In- Conditional Protasis meanings of, 195, footnote.
in
direct Questions. 190. 224.
inthe Indirect Peti- Conditional Apodosis Q.
tion (Fut. Opt), 191, 262. 227.
Questions, Indirect, 188.
in Conditional Sen- Temporal, 247-8.
Indirect, Deliberative,
tences, see Part II. ch. ii. Concessive, 249.
190-1.
(a.) In Future Condi- Final, 25S.
Deliberative, in Subj.
tions. Causal, 278.
and Opt., 134-6.
(3.) In General or Fre- Passive Voice, 130-1.
quentative Past Con- Voice, in Greek and
Latin, 130.
R.
ditions.
in Temporal Sentences, Perception, Verbs of, with Recta and Obliqua, 10.
denoting Indefinite Time Participle, 186. _ Relative Sentences,9,284-5.1
(which is of three kinds), Verbs with ori, or (!i«, Restrictive, see Limitative.
see Part II. ch. iii. 187.
in Concessive Sen- Verbs with Ace. and S.
tences with ei (coi, Kai et, Gen., 88.
250. Verbs with Preposi- Schema Pindaricum, 16.
Final Sentences, tion, 89. Sentence, parts of, i.

in
Verbs with Adjectives Simple and Compound,
252. etc.
in Relative Final Sen- and Adverbs denoting 5-
tences, 259. Perception in Gen., 100. Principal and Sub-

with bi7(os Modal (Fut. Verbs with jiij, and ordinate, 6.
Infin., 353. Co-ordinate, 7.
Opt.), 259.
with Causal Sentences Verbs with ni?, and Subordinate classified,
in Virtual Oratio Obliqua, Particip., 354- ^'^ 364- 7-10.

Perfect Tense, uses of, 144. Sequence of Moods, 138.
277- ^ .
.
with expressions of a
f Person, 2d pers. sing., used Singular for Plural, 18.
impersonally, 22. Statement, Indirect, see
Wish, 280.
Petition Indirect, 191-2. Table of Contents, 178,
used in Primary Se-
quence, 256. Plural for Singiilar, 21-2. 187.
I
On Rekitive Sentences, see Monro's Homeric Grrmmar.
. — ,
428 GREEK INDEX.

Subdirect and Suboblique, denoting Indefinite Time Substantive used as Adjec-
II, 389 (and Oral. Obi., (which is of three kinds), tive or Attributive, 23.
fassiin). Part II. ch. iii.).
(see Superlative and Compara-
Subjunctive ' Subjunctive, in Concessive tive, 120-123.
Introductory Note, 132. Sentences with ka.v KaC, Swearing and Witnessing,
in Independent Sen- Kat kdv, 250. Verbs of, take (iij, 353,
tences, 134, 135. in Final Sentences of n. 4, {see 352).
A. In Exhortations. Primary Sequence {see
B. In Prohibitions. Part II. ch. V.) T.
C. In Deliberative ; in Modal Sentences
Questions. with oTTws, etc., as a rarer Temporal Sentences, see
D. Denoting a future and variant construction, Table of Contents, Part
possibility (a very 260. II., ch. iii., 232-248.
rare Attic construc- with Verbs of Fearing, Tenses, see Table of Con-
tion). etc., 263, etc. tents, Part I. ch. vii.
in Deliberative Indirect alternating with 138-132.
'^)pta-
Questions, 190. tive, t82-i84 {see Com- Time in the Moods, 139.
in Indefinite Sentences pound Tmesis, 288.
Sentence and
with df, 194. Oratio Obliqua passim, Transitive Verbs become
in Conditional Ques- Intransitive, 124.
and 254, n. 1).
tions {see Part II. ch.
ii.). Substituted, by the
(a.) In Future Condi- Graphic or Vivid Construc- Vocative, 80.
tions, tion, for the
Optative in Voices, see Table of Con-
(i.) In General or Fre- Historic Sequence where- tents, 124-131.
quentative Present ever the Recta or the Pri- I
Conditions. mar>' Sequence took a Sub- \

W.
in Temporal Sentences junctive, see Graphic. 1 Wish, expressions of. 280-3.
1 On
the Subjunctive and Optative see Monro's Homeric Grammar (Subjunctive
in Principal Clauses, 196 ; in Subordinate Clauses, 201 ; Optative in Simple Sentences,
215 ; in Subordinate, 219; History of Subjunctive and Optative, 229, etc.).
GREEK INDEX.
The numbers refer to the pages of the book.
atpo), with Gen. of Charge, 6 dAAo5, meaning ?«^^««-a/,

,95-^ . 63- „
S. Adjectives
privative. ai(Txvvo)Jiiu, with Acc, 75. aAAos 6(70s, aAAo5 eiTts, 60.
compounded with, take — with Dat., 112. aAAorptos, Dat. or Gen.,
a Gen., e.g. aiivrjfiuv, — with Infin.,
155, 172. 79. "9-
di'^KOos, 98, 103. — with fiTJ, 264.
,
'Aâ, quasi-Prep., 306.
ayaOov (ev, Kaxov, etc.), with Gen.,
alcr0a.vofji.ai., 86. d/xa, with Dat., 119.
Ae'yio,Spii, etc., with — with Particip., 169, 175, a/xaprdi'u, with Gen., 86.
double Ace, 72 (for Pas- afieCpoixai, with Gen., 93.
sive forms, see 73, >i. 2). oirtoa/xat, with Gen. of d^teAu, with Gen., 87.
ayaXXofiai, with Dat., 112. Charge, 95. a.fji.vvo), with Dat., 116.
ayaixai, with Gen. 94.
, aKoKovOoi, with Gen. or afivvonai, with Acc, 76.
ayavaKTM, with Dat., 117. Dat., 119. aiJLVvio and djxiii/o/iat, 129.
dyeiv x^^po'', 87. aKoKovdii, with Dat., 118. afj.<f>C, Prep., 317-319-
ayvo^, with Gen. , 103. aKovo), dxpobifxai, with d/iîte'rvu/xi, with double
aSeAi^ds, with Gen. or Dat., Gen.. 86. Acc, 72.
,
"9- oAis, with Gen., 82. d^(îa-/3r)T(i>, with Gen and
aSiKi>, with double Ace, oAi'o-KOjxat,with Gen. of Dat, 117, 118.
,
72- charge, 95. — with /XT), p,T) oir, 365.
A0r]v<iiv ffoAig, 81. dAAos, aAAoto?, with Gen., 'Av, see Part II., ch. ii.,
a6vnu>. with Dat., 112. 103. Table of Contents, 193-
aiSovfiai, with Ace, 75. oAAos, meaning besides, 62. 231.
, ,,
GREEK INDEX. 429
"Af, with Imperi. and Aor. aVoKpvTTTO/iai /U.7), /AT) OU, yeuo), with Gen., 84, 86.
Indie, denoting a re- 365- yripoTpo<t><a, with Acc, 76.
. ,
peated act, 151. dnoKavui Tt Tti/09, 85, 86. ypa.ôp.a.1., with Gen. of
— with Aor. Infin., after aVoAuo/xai /u^, /ui) oil, 365. charge,
95.
— with double
Verbs of hoping, etc., oTTopia, with Gen., 82. Acc, 73.
181. dno(TTepio, with double •yv/ti'ds, with Gen., 82, 98,
— with Infin., in Indirect Acc, 72. 103.
Statement, 181. dnoa^Tpi^to fi-ri, fiij ov, 365.
— with Optat., in Indirect aTTOTpe'rru), with Gen., 100. |
Statement, 1S5. aTTOTuyxdru), with Gen., 1

SaKpvia, with Acc, 76.
— with Particip. in In- , _
86. 6c'5ocKa, with Infin., 155.
direct Statement, 1S7. d-noi^^vyia, with Gen. (of Se'pKO/xai nip, 'Aprji', etc.,
— with Aor. Indie, not
|
charge), 95. I
denoting an unfulfilled a7rT0|u.ai, with Gen., 86. Sri, SiqiTOTe, SijffOTOUf, as

condition, 216. ap^-yo), (poet.),with Dat., Suffixes, 58.
— omitted with the Subj. 116. SÂos, fiijAti, constructions,
in Subordinate Sentences, opKu), ap/cet, construction, 172, 174.
245- 173- Sel, constructions, 117.
— retained with the Oplat.
,
apfou/jtat /x^ and p-rj
, ,
ov, 365. Set oTToj?, 261, «. 8.
in Subordinate Sentences, with Present, 143.
oipTi, Sevrepos, Sevrepaios, with
246. apxw, dpx.ojj.a.1,, with Gen., Gen., 97.
— with Fmal Sentences, 86, 88, 98. Atoi, Prep., 307-310.
— with Infin. and Particip., 6ia/3aAA(d, with double Acc.
—255.
with
„
oTTws Modal, 261, „ 171-
72.
StaAAacrca) Ttva Tti/t, 105.
n. 4. art. Causal.
— with wo-T€ Consecutive, avTOKpartop, with Gen. 103. , 5iaAe'7op.at, with Dat., 109,
aiiTO!, various uses of, 53- 118.
272, «. 2.
'Aca, Prep., 291, 292. Stai/e'fio), with Acc. and
avay/cafw, with double Acc, —55-
with Dat. of Circum- Dat., 105.
stance, 114. 6ta7rAe'(o, with Acc, 75.
.
73- .
ai/ayxatos, construction 01,
.
— strengthens Reflexives, fitaiêpoj, with Gen., 97.
49- Siaê'pojaac, with Dat., 98,

•
'5^- .
avaixinuriaKia riva.
-
Tt A
ana — subject to Infinitive,
^
179.
, . .
109.
Tti/a Tii'os, 73, u. 3. avTo-5iKatooT;ia), etc. (Plat- Scouf/epovTois ex<o, with Gen.
Avev, 301. onic idioms), 26, 55. 97. 103-
oi^p=Tis, with Gen., 83. and 6 avTos, 42, 53-4.
aiiTos 6ta<|)opo9, with Gen., 97,
aio-e'xw, with Dat., 118. 6 avTo?, constructions of, with Dat. or Gen., 109,
avrixofi-ai-, with Gen., 86. no. 119.
'Ai/Ti, Prep., 294. aiâipovixai Tiva. n, and SiSdo-Ko), with double Acc,
avTikiyu n^ and niij ov, Tica Tivos, 72, 73, n. 3. 72.
365- a<f)tT)p.i, with Gen. (of Ste';^<o, with Gen., 99.

oi'TtTToiw, with double Acc. charge), 95. St'/catos, construction of,
''?•
a(j)i(TrqiJ.i., with Gen., 99. 159-
.
avTC(TTpo<f>oq, with Gen. or a-xSoixai., with Dat., 112, 5tjrAii(Ttos, etc., with Gen.,
Dat., 119. 97-
, "Z-
on7T(o, with Particip., 172. axpei-os, axP'JO'TOs, with with Gen., 87.
Sti/jw,
ofios, construction of, 159. Dat., 119. SiMKM, with Gen. of charge
afiw, with Gen., 93, 103. 'Axpt, quasi-Prep., 302. (6 St-uiKuif), 95.
OLTraYOpevio (diTretTroi') iJ.rj, p.1) — temporal Conjunction SoKcl, SoKui, construction of,
{see ixixpi). ii7> 159-
oil, 365.
a7raAAa<r(ru), -o/xac, with Svoiv Odrepoi', etc., 26.
Gen., 99. B SvadpMi, with Gen., 103.
arrai'To), with Dat., 118. Suo'i'ovs, with Dat., 119.
Paivio TToSa, 77.
aTreiflu), with Dat., 116.
papcMs <t>^ptji, with Dat. 117.
anexdiivofjiai, with Dat., jSatrtAtufc), with Gen., 98.
117- ^ta^'opai, with Acc, 78.
ri7r6;îu, with Gen., 99. cdv, see Conditional and
pXaTTTuj, with double Acc,
an^ôfj-ai ou, 363. Conces-sive Sentences.
aTniTTia,
p.>}, fXTj
with Dat., n6. with Gen.,
— never Interrogative, 191,
— (aTTio'Ttai' Trape'xei) fJirj,
/SAaJTeii',
jSAeVw vSttv, etc., 78.
80.
footnote, 207.
(IT)ov, 264, 365. eavTOV, for ist and 2d pers.,
PorjBu), with Dat., 116.
Prep., 295-297. 50.
.\7ro.
a -roSepÔfiat Tavrd Ttvoy, 88.
ôvAevM oTTiDS, with Fut.
Indie, etc, 261-2.
— Reciprocal, 50.
dnoSiSpdiTKoi, with Acc, 75. eyyvs, with Gen and Dat.,
with Gen., 93.
a7ro6i6o|u.ai,
diroKanvui, with Particip., e7yv<op.ai, with /x»J aud
172. y€Kia, with Acc. 76. Infin., 353.
1 , ,
430 GREEK INDEX.

iyit (otJ) for auTo^, as Sub- ei/avTios, with Gen. or Dat. eiêf^s, with Dat., 119.
ject of Infin., i8o. 103. e<i' tJ (lu re), Limitative, 274.
eyKoAoi, with Dat. , 117. eiSuM (eicfiva)), with double e(f)i.Kvovfj.ai, with Gen., 86,
cyKpaDjs, with Gen. 103. , Ace, 72. .
27-
efiec,without av. 144, 218. eVexa, eueKcv, 301. ex^po?, with Dat., 119.
ei. See Conditional and ei'i'ow jUT), ;xr) ou, 264. exo/aat, with Gen., 85;
Concessive Sentences. iuTpiiroixan, with Gen., 87. Meanings of, 90.
— Interrogative. See In- ei'TUYX'*'''"! with Dat., 109, ^XP")" (xpi")) without ov,
direct Question. i_i8. 144, 218.
— Interrogative, with Subj. ef OTOV rpoirov, 261. exî with Gen., 99.
291. kî(TTriiJ.i. with Acc. 75, — as a Copulative Verb, 43.
— Interrogative, with Verbs with Gen., 100.
,
— I'-V, Mi ov, 36s._

of Fearing, 266. ioiKCL, with Dat., 117, con- excof, in colloquialisms, 165.
— for oTi with Verbs of structions of, 159.
Emotion, 186. inaivio, with double Acc,
— with Subj., 245. ,
72-
ei (eai/) Kai, xal el (eai'), effatpofi-oi, with Dat, 112. frjAw, with Acc, 76; with
250. cjrejet/u.t, with Gen. of Gen., 94.
ei, €1 7ap, €t6e, with Wishes, charge, 95.
280-283. inepxoiiai, with Dat., 118.
et Se fiT), 208. emj/SoAos, with Gen., 90,
ei (€aj')=si forte, 208. 103. i^St), with Presen 143.
€1 €or, in Virtual Obliqua, eTnjpfaô), with Dat., 117. J) Ti? r) oiiSei's, 62.
405. 'EnC, Prep., 318-327. j; KttTo, rj 105 (oJerre), with
ei ou, 3/^7, 358, 359- — Verbs compounded with, Comparative, 121.
eiTrep (eanre'p), quasi con- take a Dat., 118. r)5op.ai, with Dat., 112.
cessive, 250. €iri6e'7)s, with Gen., 103. rjjiicrus (6) Tou XPO"""! etc.,
tiicbs ^1/ (without av), j^f €77i5€iKn)(itt, with Partic, .85.
187 (see 174 A.). rjixuiv (iiixuiv) avTii>v, Partl-
et(C(ij, with Gen., 99, Gen. or inCSoôs, constructions of, tively, 51.
Dat., 106. 159- :^TTa)p.ai, with Gen., 97-98;
cijuii, with Gen., 90.
,
, ^ .
cTTiKoupos, with Gen., 103. with DaL, III.

eip-yii), with Gen., 99. eniKovpCi, with Dat. 116.
— firj, >ii) oil,
365. €7rt/ui€A^s, eTriKijcriJuov, with
Eis, Prep. 292. Gen., 103.
ei? StSacTKoAov, AiSou, etc., eiTifieAoO/iiat, with ottojs. 9appit>, with Acc, 75.
,79- ^ Modal, 260-1. with Gen., 94.
6avij.d^tii,
eis oii/^p,
.
with Superlative, — with Infin., 261, «. 6. Bav/xacrTOi ocros, etc., 59,

123. cTTt'cTTafiai, with Partic, 173. SiVVafw, with Gen., 86.
.
e«7-6tfit. With Ace, 75. — with Partic, and with
'Ek, 'Ef, Prep., 297. Infin.
eicoTi, 301. — with p.ri and Infin., 353.
£»c6i6pd.<r(cio, with Ace, 75. iwiTiOefxai, with Dat., 117. rSios, with Gen. or Dat., 79,
cK/SaiVio, with Gen. 100. , «-tT7;5etos, with Dat., 119, 119.
cKcIi/os, uses
of, 52. constructions of, 159. iepos, with Gen., 7^.
eK?rA^(7(70/iiai, etc. , with €n-tTV7X"''"i ^^'ith Dat., 87. ixafo?. Constructions of,
Acc^, 75. eVoâi, with Dat., 109, see „ 173-
eAaTTtt), eAaTToOjLuxt, with also 118. iva, Final Conjunction, 253.
Gen., 98. eprjutos, with Gen. 82, 103. , Lva av, not Final, 255.
eXeiiflepos, ikev9epia, with ep^Cto, with Dat., 117. tcrdjiotpos, with Gen., 84.
Gen., 98, 99, 103. epw, with Gen., 87. IcroppOTTO^, with Gen. or
cAAijT^s, with Gen., 113. — with ix-q and Infin., 353. Dat., 119.
e\Kos oiracrai, etc., 69. epuTb) (i7p6,u.T)('), with double t<ros. Constructions of, 110,
€|u./Aoi'os(eMM«>''»), with Dat., Acc, 72. ,
^'9- ,
iirOim, with Gen., 84. to-i, with Acc and DaL,

€jt7r\ews, with Gen., 82. f<mv 01, el<TLV o'i., tvioi, 60. 117.
tfiTrctpos (aTreipos), with eVcpot, with Gen., 97, 103.
Gen., 103. cvSanij.ovL^tii, with Gen., 94.
e^7ro5iÔfxa((e|U.7rr£b>i' elfttt), ev'Aaôufiat, with Acc, 76. Kaflapos, with Gen., 82, 98,
Dat. 116. — with Infin., 155. 103.
— fi^, H7) oil, 365. — with oTTws, 260, with /x^, Kai, Kaiirep, Kai raOra, see
t/i<JivTOs, with Dat., 119. (XT) ov, 264, 365. Concessive Sentences,
'Ev, Prep., 302. tiiKoyu), with double Acc, 242.
iv, when used with Dat. of Kai, joining two Adjectives,
Time, 115. evfous, with Dat., 119. 24.
1 See Monro's Homeric Grammar, p. 93.

,, ; ; ,;;
GREEK INDEX. 431
•col', Kav ci, 2og. fiaxo/iai, with Dat., 109, O

(coucoCpyos,with Gen., 103.
KoAb; KayaBot, 24. IxGiovcKToi, with Gen., 98. 6 povAd(X€vo9 (6 TVX'i'i'), 31,
KoAoi, with double Ace, 71. fie'Aei fioi TOVTOU, 87.

ixeraneKd, Construc- o (oTTcp) Ae'yo), 60.
Kara, Prep., 310-313. /xe'\€i,
Kara TOUTO clfai, 157. tions of, 89, 117. bSe, 66t, uses of, 51, SS-
KarcucpiVb), KaTayiyKocrKft), /iie'Aei fiOi, (ieXeTO), with ofo), with Gen., 86.
oTTws Modal, 260, 261. oSovceica, for iJTt in state-
etc., with Gen., 95.
KaraTToXefkCi, with Ace, 76. /oieAAo), forming Periphras- ments, 185 Causal, 277.
;
Kara^povi), with Gen., 87. tic Future, 140. oi5a (fvfoiStt), with Partic.
<cetpe<rSai, with Dat., 107. — jrils (tO oil fieAAo) 150. with Infin., 175.
—
;
ice\evu), with Ace. and Dat. 1^7), fti) ov, 365. otKeios, with Gen., 79.
also with Ace. and Inf., lxett.(i>oiJiai, with Ace and oiKTet'pu), with Acc. and
116. Dat., 73, n. 3, and 117. _^Gen., 94.
K€vd«, with Gen. , 82. — also Ace, also Gen., oi(xot, with Gen., 94.
KEijxxA.atoi' (detiique, ad 117. olov, with Superlative, 123.
summatti)^ 26. fxeVos, with Gen. 103. , otos, in Attraction, 60.
KtVSvvo? eerrt (j.»j, /iat) ov, 264. /aetTTos, with Gen., 82. Olds re, 60.
icix<i«'w,with Ace, 86. Merd, Prep., 316-317. olos, Consecutive, 275
kAv(o Taurd crov, 88. IxeraSiSojIxi, with Gen. and Causal, 278.
Dat., 84, 105. oi(t6' o Spacroi' ; 137.
Koti/ds, with Gen. or Dat.
(jLCTaAajijSdvw, with Gen., oiYO(xai, with Partic, 174.^
79. "9- . .
•(COS,Adjectives ending in, 84. oAtyov, oAtyov 6et, 82 ; oAi-

with Gen., 113. fieraiv, with Particip., 165. yov Self, 157.
Kou'iovw, with Gen. and /xeTttTroiovfiai, with Gen., oAtyupw, with Gen., 87.
Dat. 84. 84. 6(xtA&>, with Dat., 109, 118.
fieVetm, with Acc, 6(xiai(xt, with (x^ and Infin.,
KpaToi, with Ace. and Gen. 75. j
87, 97, 98- IJ.eTepxoiJ.ai., with Ace, 75. « 353- ,
KpviTTw, with double Ace, ixerea-n, with Gen. and o(xotos (ai'0(xoios;, 119.
72. Dat., 84, 117.
I
;
— Constructions of, no.
Kvptos, with Gen., 103. fi€Te'xM, with Gen., 84: with
',
6(xoiu>, with Acc and Dat,

Kupoi. with Gen. , 85, 87 ; Ace, 85,_«. I.
with Particip. (poet.), (icToxos (d/u.6'Toxos), with I 6(xoAoyaJ, with Dat., 117,
173. Gen., 84. '
119 with Partic, 187.
;
Ku\vo), with_ôuble Ace, /xc'xP', Conjunction, 238 bix6<re xiapuj, with Dat., 117.
quasi-Prep., 302. 6(xov, with Dat., 119.
— /*!}, (XI) OV, 365. Mjj, see Chapter on Nega- 6(xc6i/v(xos, with Dat., 119.
tives. d(xios, see Concessive Sen-
jiT) /lAij for iJ.r) oil, 264. tences, 249.
(XT) for oTTwsjj.^, Modal, 261. 6i'0(xd^<o, with double Acc,
Kayxavu, with Gen., with (i^, omitted after Verbs of 71.
Ace, 85 n. I with Acc ; denying, and (x^ for (xj) OTTJ) for oJTus, with Fut.
and DaL, 116. oil, 369. 261.
Kap.âfM, with Gen. and (xr)5e' ix-qSeiTep, Concessive, OTTore, Causal, 277.
Acc. ^•9-. oTTius, Final, 253 ; Modal

, 87. _
„ ,,
cov,
^
Conces- with Fut., 259, etc. in
with Gen., 86.
Xo/u.|3di'0)ioi, (xr)6' et, (xi)o ;
(and Compds. ), sive, 250. Indirect Petition, 262

Aai'Sdi'Ofxai
with Gen., 86. ixrivvia, with Dat. and Ace, for oTt in Statements,
KcvBdvio, with Ace, 76. ii6._ 185 ; Temporal, 235
\av9avu}, KaSiav construc- (XTjxafijxot oi7(i)S, etc., 260, OTTO)? av, with Opt. not
261. final, 255.
tions, 173, 174.
Xarpevco, with Dat., 116. (XlKpOV, 83. 6pyi'ô(xai, with Dat. and
Keiirofjiai., with Gen., 98. (xi/xi'^<7'(0(xai, with Gen. , 86. Gen., 94, 117.
K-qyto,with Gen.. 99. (xitru), with Ace, 117. 6pe'yo(xai, with Gen., 86.
XoiSopui, with Ace, 73, n. 3. fxi/r)(xajv (d(XJT)(x(o>'), with op(l>av6i;, with Gen., 98.
Aoi6opo0/xai, with Dat. 73, Gen., 103. opio (x^, (XT) OV, 264 diTios, ;
K. 3,.and 117. 260, 261.

Avo-iTtAtt, with Dat., 117. N OS, Personal, 29 Relative, ;
57 Interrogative, 56 ;
;
i/ai (xd (n)),with Ace, 77. Conditional, 225, 226
M ydixo), with double Ace, 71.
Consecutive, 274 ; Causal,
i/(Kiop.ai, with Gen., 97 ; 278.
(id, and similar words, with Dat., III.
Acc, 77. OS ye Causal, 278.
i'0(xiîo, with Dat., iii.
0(705, see olos.
(laKopi'fu, with Gen. (and
do'Oi' ye (x' ei&ev<u, 157.
.\cc.), §4-
iidAAoi' >),
.
with
, ^
Compar. OS irep, 57.
and Positive, 121. 1 ^vKOKxi, with Gen., 86. doTiS, Relative, 57 ; In«
,
432 GREEK INDEX.

terrogative, 56 ; Condi- take a Dat. of reference, TTMs av ; in Wishes, 215,
tional, 225, 226 ; Con- 118. 280, etc.
secutive, 274 ; Causal, n-epi/SaAXofiai, with double
278. Ace, 72 ; Constructions
o<r(j)paivonai, with Gen., 86. of, 118.
ore, Temporal, 234 Causal, ; Trepiyiyi'o/aiat, with Gen., trrjue'iov Se, 26.
277. «• 3- . ^ 97- (Tiwnu), with Acc, 76.

with Gen.
. , ^
oTi (and lis), in Statements, Trepieifxi, , 97. (TKOTTU) ei, Interrog., 261 ;
178, etc. ; difference be- Trepie'pxoftat, with Acc, ojTws, etc. 260, 261 ; iirj,
tween, 184. 75- ,
^lr) oil, 264.
Causal, 276 with Verbs of ;

7repi7rA.e'co, with Acc. 75. ,
crn'ovSaôj oiroii, etc., 260,
Fearing, 265. nCixirKriixi., with Gen., 82; 261.
on, with Superlative, 123. Dat., 82. (TTacridîi), with Dat., 117.
OTu) TpoTTo* for O7roj5, 261. n-iVio, with Gen., 84 ; Acc, (nepLaKOfxai, with Gen., 99.
Oil', ovK, oiiyt, see Part III. 8s. (TTeijyavovfiLai, with Dat.,
ch. ii. (Table of Con- TTicTTevii}, with Dat., 116. 117.
tents), 345, etc. TTKTTevui (tte— eicr/jiat), with a-TOxa-ôixai, with Gen., 86.
oil /u.a, with Ace, 79. /liij and Infin., 353. o-TpaTT/yi, with Gen., 98.
ovi /x>), with Fut. Opt. and TTicrvroy, with Dat., 119. OT/yyiyraJo-Ko), with Dat.
Infin., 375. TrAeoceKTo), with Gen., 98. and Gen., 95.
0116' et (idu), Concessive, 7r\e'(os, with Gen., 103. <ruyyvu)lj.iav, with Gen., 103.
250. TrAijpTjs, with Gen., 82. (Tvyxtapia, with fiTJ and In-
oiiSi (jTfp), Concessive, 249. 7rA.oi;Vtos, with Gen., 82. fin., 353;
o5, oi, e. Reflexives, 50. TTOiovixat, \vith Gen., 79. avKoijiavTi}. with Acc, 76.
oiifieis iisTts oil, 59. jTOios ; TToStv ; in Repeti- avWaix^dvu, Construction,
ouK ot6* 203. av ei, tions, 56. 118.
ovv, as a Suffix, 58. TTOios and iroaoi (indefinite), (Tup-jSouAevto, with Acc. and
oiiveKa for on, 185. 61. Dat., 116.
oStos, ovTotri, Relatives, 7roAe';u.ios, TroAe/xo), with (Tvn/xaxos, with Dat., 119.
57- Dat., 119, 109. (TviJLêpov, cru/x<|<opos (<i<rvfi-
ôpos), with Dat., 119.
I
ouTOs, /ceus tu 66. .' TroAAi) TTJs x<^P"S> 85.

oilro), in Wishes (sic ut), — ;
\
TToAAooTos, etc., with Gen., (rvfi(j)ovia, with Dat., 117.
282. I
97- Xvv, Prep., 305.

o(/)pa (Epic and Lyric),
_ , .
TToAAoC Sei (Sew), 83.
, ^
— with Dat. of Circum-
final, 253. TTOT^po^ ; and TroTtpos, 61. stance, 114.
oi|/i/xaeijs, with Gen., 103. TTOv yri^ ; etc. 85, n. 3. , OTii' 6e<S einelv, 157.
irpaKTiKO?. with Gen., 103. Svi'to-ts, see Construction
irpdcrcTia (7rpa<ro"Ofiat), with Kara (Tvve<Ttv (English
n double Acc. 72 Trpao-cru Index).
— Verbs compounded with,
, ;
iraXai, with Present, 143. oTftos, etc. 260, 261.

na.v^^qiiidlibet. 63. jrpeVei, with Dat., 117. take a Dat., 118.
Tsa-VTO. iXva.!.. 16. npd, Prep., 300. a-vvaS(o (Sia&ta), with Dat.,
Ilapa, Prep. 318-332. 7rpo0ii/u,o{i/xat, with Acc, 117-
— Verbs compounded with, 76; oTTcos. etc., 260, 261. ooii/aAAao-o-w, with Acc. and
take Dat., 118. TrpoKoAoO/utai, with Gen. of Dat., 117.
irapapdWio, Constructions charge, 95. with Dat., 118.
crvvei.ft.1.,
of, 118. TrpoKei/aat, with Gen., 100. (TuveKovTi. (rvvTef-vovTi) et-

7rapa7rA.^(nos, with Dat., j7pos(/)iA^s, with Dat., 119. ireii', 107.
119 ; Constructions of, TrpoTifio), with (Acc.) and o-vVoiSo, Construction, 118,
no. Gen., 100. 175-
7ropa(7Kei;a(7nKds,withGen. Ilpds, Prep.,
336. <T<j>dK\oixai, with Gen., 86.
'°3- ,, „
— Verbs compounded with, o'X'^Sov eiireiv, 157.
jTopacTKevaJo) ojrujs, etc., take a Dat., 118. axntJâ KoS' okov koX fUpiti,
260, 261. TTposayopeuu, with double 24.
wapaTacrcTOjutai, with Dat., Acc, 71.
Ii3. Trpdseifii, with Dat., 118.
n-apa\(opto), with Gen., 99. jrpostpxofiat, with Dat.,
jTttvai (.'\cc.),and Gen., 99 ;
109. TO. TTpwTa etiât, i5.
navoixai, Gen. 9^ ; Travu) ,
TOuTou, 117.
n-pdsj)Kei (iot Ta6t, TotSe TTaira, 52.
and iravofiai, with Par- jrposKpovw, with Dat., n8, rd<T(T<j), with Gen., 93.
ticip., 163, 170. 119. ^ TiKixrjpiov Si, 26.
n-tiT)?,with Gen., 82, 103. nposTvyxavoi, with DaU, Tf/jii'M, with double Acc, 71.
wei'Sofxai, with Dat., 116. 87, 105, 118. TJjs aiiTTjs rffxepa^ and 77?
TTeiOov and ttiOov (fioi), 116. TTponpaios, with Gen., 97. ailTtj Tj/JLip^, 92.
Trep, as a SulTi-X, 57. Trvv0a.voiJ.ai., with Gen., 86. n' fxaOuiV ; ri ttaSutv ;
(rt
nepi, Prep., 332-335. TTioAui, with Gen., 93. t>;<«>'', Ti /SoiiAdêi'os), 164.
— Verbs compounded with. TTcus yap ai' ; 209. n'/xtos, with Gen., 103.
;: ;;
GREEK INDEX. 433
Tcfuu, Ti/au)^.at, with GlTI., i/jiopdWhi, with Dat., ii5. XaXiTTaCvio, X''^^^'>'S <l>ipio,
93- iiiroSvoiiai, with Ace, 75. with Dat., 112-117.
Tifiwpovîat, with Ace, 76 ;
iiJTOTrrcvio fiiij, fir) ov, 264. Xapi'Ôftai, with Dat., 116.
see 129. {i770TeA>js, with Gen., 103. Xaptv, quasi-Prep., 302.
T(/buapb>, with Dat., Ii6. viroriOifjiai, with Dat., 116. Xopevoi deov, 72.
Tts,idiomatic uses of, 26. UTro<^6v7ai, with Ace, 75. XPV (xpvv, fXPVv), with PT
TO /i>j (fiT) ov), Tou or ToO vampui, v<TTfpiû), with and oil, 353.
fiTJ (/xrjou), with Infin., Gen., 98. Xpii', i^^ ixpvv-
after Verbs of denying, vo"Tep6s, v<TTepalos, with XP^crtpos, XPIOTOS (axpno'-
etc. ,366, 367, 368. Gen., 97. To?), with Dat., 119.
TO jroioi', TO Tt ; 56 ; to utîoTOfiat, with Ace, 75. Xpwpai, with Dat., in. _,
woioj', TO iroo"Of, 63. Xupiôi, with Gen., 99.
TotouTos, followed by ou, Xwp's, quasi-Prep. 301.
362.
Tofevoj, with Gen., 87. (fiavepo^,âvepov, <j>aivo/xat.
ToO, with Infin. Final, 94, Constructions, 173, 174.
see 366. <pei,Soixai ((êiSuiAo;), with <Êv£opa(, with Gen., 86
tav AoiTToO and to AotTrov, Gen., 99, 103. with double Ace, 72.
92. <ii€v,with Gen., 94. ]
1^1 Aos with Gen., 9S, 103;
with Gen., 86;
rvyj^di-a), (êvyo) Suoji', 81 ; with Gen. iîAiJ, with Gen., 99.
with Particip., 173. of charge, 95 6 êvyav, ;
TQVT €IC€t^'0, 52,

^ 95- , , ,
Tpou^^cat, with Gen., 80. cpevyto lit), ftTj ov, 365.
Tpifiuiv, with Gen., 103. <f>da.i'ia, with Ace, 76 ; with tovTjTos,with Gen., 103
Tvpoj/i/evo), Tvpai/i/ci, with Particip., 171. oifovpcu, with Gen., 93 :
Gen., 98. 0ovu}, with Gen., 94 ; with with ojrojs, etc., 260, 261.
riKÂos, with Gen., 103. Dat., 117. (opaioy, with Gen., 93, 103.
(îA.tKuf SiaKniiat, ete, with ws. Modal, 253 ; for ottws
Dat. Modal, 261, ». 3 ; Final,
<ii\66ujpos, with Gen., 103. 253; with Final Particip.,
iffipiîo, with double Ace, <iiAofia&7)?, with Gen., 113. 258 ; for opsre. Consecu-
72. _
.
ôPovp-ai, with Ace, 76 tive, 275 ; uis av, Final,
iiiroKovio, with Gen. and with Infin., 155; withp.^, 255 ; in Wishes, 280, etc. ;
with Dat., 116. /otT) oil and variant con- Comparative (also iiisnep)
yTrapxai, with Particip., 171. structions, 266, ete with Particip., 165, 167.
vneKTpa.iriixtiai. iirj, /uii; ou, (i>pi<r<7io, with Ace, 75. «s, with Superlative, 123.
.365- 4>povtCû> ottus, etc., 260, cos (cusffep) ov and p^, 357.
.
^"€p, Prep., 314. 261 ;

p-rj, p.ri ov, 264. (is eiros e'nrelv, and siinilar
iiTTepaXyio, with Gen., 100. <j>v\d(T aou, -o/x(u oTTtDs, etc., phrases, 157.
vTTipîkXii}, with Ace, 75. 260, 261 ; p.^, fii) ov, 264, tusn-tpay si, 20q.
vireptxia, with Gen., 97. 365- oKTe, Consecutive, 269-273
iiffep<Û7)s 6(ros, etc., 59. <j)vAd(7CTopai, with Ace 76 Limitative, 274.
vmvOvvoi, with Gen. and fij), pt/ oil, 363. (isTe firi, with Infin. after
Dat., 103. <j)vv(u, with Gen., 8: Verbs of denying, etc.,
iunjperw, with Dat., 116. 3^-
,
um<rx«'oCâi, with Dat. and <!><t>e\oi', without av, see
with Ace, 116. efiet; in Wishes, 281-283.
"Vnd, Prep., 341. Xai'pw, with Particip., 170.
2e
TABLE OF REFERENCES.
Aeschines, B.C. 389-314 (?)
Aeschylus, B.C. 525-456.

Andocides, B.C. 440 (?)—last speech 39a
Antiphon, B.C. 48o(?)-4io{?).
Aristophanes, B.C. 450 (?)— last play 388.
Demosthenes, B.C. 3841?) -322.
Euripides, B.C. 480-406.
Isaeus, dates of speeches B.C. 389-352.
Isocrates, B.C. 436-338.
Lysias, B.C. 435 (?)-378.
Plato, B.C. 429(?)-347-
Sophocles, B.C. 496-406.
Thucydides, B.C. 471 (?)-40i (?).
Xenophon, B.C. 429 (?)-356 (?)•
TTie reference to the author

TABLE OF REFERENCES. 435
LINE PAGE
987, 93
1047, I3C
Septem ad Thebas.
481, ...
... 62
513,
553. ... 206
778
411
821, note 341
843. . 3i8
tiJ>pUces.
IS. 309
594. 74
ANDOCIDES.
I. De Mysteriis.
30. iSo
38, • 50. 407
43. 244, 256
50. 41
54. 223
57. 224
58, 59 218
61, 404
63. . 387
lOI, 353
436 TABLE OF REFERENCES.
LINE
Olynthiac ii.
24, 14 [2, 22],

LINE
LINE
LINE LINE LINE PACK

326 D, 24 615 D, 5 36, 147. 148
329 B, 206 616 C, 593. 356
356 D, 353 632, 415
352 D, . 367 Sophistes. ^59. 85
3S8 B, . 325 235 A, 267 f'65, 420
254 A, 38 674, 151
Republic. 6S0, 418
3»9B, 100 Symposium 690, 418
337 E. 192 17s A, 374 692, 147
338 D, 24 179 B, 328 715, 277
339 E, 192 185 E, 251 725. 59
344 D, 45 186 B, 22 728, 367
345 E, 177 187 D, 255 767, 114, 306
34SE, 186 189, 407 803, 100
352 c, 136 213 D, 261 807, lox
354 A and B, 32 222 A, 205 816, 106
358 B, 208 335
359 c. 213, 403 Theaeteius 413
360 B, 274 145. 370 960, 30s
360 D, 121 145 B, 267 1094, 377
362 D, 55 135 A, 233 1114, 337
362 D (O in text), 136 169 B, 21 1121, 44
393 E. 256 183 E, 264 "3i> 347
398 A, 3" 190 A, 377 1231, 277, 377
404 B, 250 1242, 347
40s A, 385 Timaeus. 1264, 780
406 c, 25 25 Di 1268, 347
408 c, 211 31 B, 145 1274, 377
412 A, 150 86 D, 23 1275, 377
416 D, 362 1340. 123
424 D, 86 SOPHOCLES. 1418, 244
427 E, 363
42^ C, 25 Aias.
434 B. 112 6, 357 419
436 D, 404 27, 114 171
451 A, 265, 370 42, 49 106
459 B, lOI 44> 71 26, 418
461 B, 75 SI. 322 28, 82
463 D, 102 70, 369 30, 3°2, 341
465 B, 383 75, 372 41, 261
470 A, loi 122, 249 42, 8S
470 B, 324 123, 277 43. 40, 52
472 B and 38 153. 112, 277 48, 154
475 A, S'l 263, 226 50, 410
478 B, 21 271, 237 69, 204
494 B, 229 272, 234 74. 420
499 B, 102, 373 275, 42 85. 305
5" A, 343 285, 92 91, 23s
517 A, 229, 230 313, 405 97, 271
518 c, iSo 318, 89 100, 122
S39A, . 261 359, 363 115. 114
545 A (in text 38 367, 94 152, 71
549 E, 192 377, 323 170, 277
562 C, 89 403. 135 172, 3^5
567 A, 255 434, 250 182, 20, 295
574 E, 343 470, 363 212, 77
579 B, 82 474, .
171 223, 1S5
579 B, 8s 475, 331 234. SI, 377
590 A, 314 496, 245 239. i39
591 B, 316 536, 204 242. 172
606 B, 54", 367 244. 356
607 c, 557, 189 260, 177
610 A, 229 560, 371 263, 366
612 B, 228 564, r
251 265. 155
614 B, 400 567. 192 323. 245
615 B, 407 572, 384 378. 352
LINE PAGE
LINE
LINE
LINE
BY THE SAME AUTHOR.
AN ELEMENTARY GREEK SYNTAX.

Crown 8vo, 2s.
HOMERIC GRAMMAR. For the use of Upper

Forms in Schools. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO.

LONDON, NEW YORK, AND BOMBAY
1
University of Toronto
ou
library
DO NOT
REMOVE
THE
or
CARD
Wl
FROM
^ THIS
Px4! <;
(3i
Ol
Cm
O POCKET
Oi
Acme Library Card Pocket

Under Pat. "Ref. Index FUe"
Made by LIBRARY BUREAU

Syntaxofatticgreek

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Syntaxofatticgreek

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LaGr.

LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO

The Statement, Question, and Petition, Subject, Copula, and Predicate,

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.

§ 14-34. Subject and Predicate —Attributive and Apposition.

18—The Dual Number, 19—The Plural used for the Singular, 21

37 Position Genitive follows, 39— Predicative Position

Personal Pronouns, page 47— Possessive Pronouns, 48— Reflexive Pro-

§ 78-126. The Cases.

Preliminary note on the cases, page 64 The Nominative, 65 The Vo-

§127. Comparative atid Superlative. Page 120

§ 128-134. Voices and Aloods.

§ 135-143. The Tenses.

§ 144-162. The Three Verbal Nouns.

1. The Infinitive (a Substantive), —

or becoming Manifest, aud of escaping Notice, 170 — Note on

\av6dvu, etc., 171 —

cease, finding, detecting, overlooking, 174 B. With Verbs of —

SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCK

§ 163- 170. Substantival Sentences.

§ 171-206. Conditional Sentences.

The Particle fij', — Definite and Indefinite Sentences, 194—Con-

Indicative, 204 — Ellipse of the Apodosis, and Ellipse of the Verb,

206 — Ae in Apodosis, 207 seemingly interrogative, 207

'Kv with the Participle seemingly in Protasis, 208 — Conditional

Jparticles andtheir Combiuatious, 208 —

Ordinary Present Conditions, 209. [B. ) Ordinary Past Conditions,

§ 207-224. Temporal Sentences.

§ 225-226. Concessive Sentences.

Concessive Sentences, page 249 — Note on d kcu, kuI d, etc., 250.

§ 227-239. (i) Final Sentences^ (2) o-ws with tJu Future

§ 240-244. Consecutive and Limitative Sentences.

§ 245. Causal Sentences.

§ 246, Expressions of a Wish. Page 280

PREPOSITIONS, NEGATIVES, ORATIO OBLIQUA, AND

Tutroductory Note on Prepositions, page 286 The Prepositions and —

/. Prepositions with one Case only :

§ 253-255. (a.) With Accusative only.

Avi, page 291— Ets or h, 292— ws, 294.

§ 256-264. {b.) With Genitive only.

301 eKari, 301 x^pi-^^ 301 —Old Cases used as quasi-Px'epositions

§ 265-268. {c.) With Dative only.

//. Prepositions with two Cases.

%, 260-272. With Accusative and Genitive.

5td, page 307— Kara, 310— i^Tr^p, 314—^erd, 316.

UI— Prepositions with all three Cases.

§ 279-310. The Negatives.

Introeluctory Note, page 345 — Oi) Privative, 346 —

§ 311-327. O ratio Obliqua.

Introductory, page 387 —Rules for Sub-direct Clauses in Oratio Obliqua,

§ 328-347. Figures of Rhetoric, etc.

Alliteration, page 410 —Anakoluthia, 411 — Antiptosis, 412 —Asyndeton,

English Index, ....... Page 425

Greek Index, . . . . . . .428

publishing a new Greek Syntax, when so many similar

books by really great Greek scholars are in use. My

once well-known Greek Grammars are so arranged : they

no one would now accept the local theory of the Cases,

I may perhaps be allowed to explain how I came

book, such as it is, is not a mere compilation from other

Grammars. I have for many years been in the habit of

draw up a Greek Syntax, I began by writing out these

outline of rules with many hundred examples, an outline